the Sāma Veda. Its authorship is
attributed to Śākaṭāyana according
to Nageśa, while औदिव्राज is held as
its author by some, and कात्यायन by
others. It bears a remarkable
similarity to Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī
especially in topics concerning co-
alescence and changes of स् and न्
to ष् and ण् respectively. It cannot
be definitely said whether it pre-
ceded or followed Pāṇini's work.
ऋक्प्रातिशाख्य one of the Prātiśākhya
works belonging to the Aśvalāyana
Śākha of the Ṛg Veda. The work
available at present, appears to be
not a very old one,possibly written
a century or so after Pāṇini's time.
It is possible that the work, which
is available, is based upon a few
ancient Prātiśākhya works which
are lost. Its authorship is attribu-
ted to Śaunaka.The work is a
metrical one and consists of three
books or Adhyāyas, each Adhyāya
being made up of six Paṭalas or
chapters. It is written, just as the
other Prātiśākhya works, with a
view to give directions for the
proper recitation of the Veda. It
has got a scholarly commentary
written by Uvaṭa and another one
by Kumāra who is also called
Viṣṇumitra. See अाश्वलायनप्रातिशाख्य.
ऋगयनादि a class of words headed
by ऋगयन to which the taddhita
affix अण् (अ) is affixed in the
sense of 'produced therein' ( तत्र
भवः), or 'explanatory of' ( तस्य
व्याख्यानः); cf. ऋगयने भव:, ऋगयनस्य
व्याख्यानो वा अार्गयनः पादव्याख्यानः,
औपनिषदः, शैक्ष: etc. Kāś. on P.IV.
3.73.
ऋग्विराम verse-pause equal to 3
mātrākālas or three mātrā units.
cf. ऋग्विरामः पदविरामो विवृत्तिविरामस्समान-
पदविवृत्तिविरामः त्रिमात्रो द्विमात्र एकमात्रोर्धमात्र
|
आनुपूर्व्येण T. Pr. XXII. 13. Accord-
ing to Ṛk. Tantra it consists of
two mātrās.
ऋत् short vowel ऋ. before which the
preceding vowel is optionally left
as it is, i. e. without coalescence
and shortened also if long; cf.
ऋत्यकः P. VI.1.128.
ऋत्वत् possessed of short ऋ; cf. रीगृत्वतः
संयोगार्थम् P.VII.4.90. Vārt. 1.
ऋदित् possessed of the mute indica-
tory letter ऋ, signifying in the
Grammar of Pāṇini the preven-
tion of the shortening of the long
vowel in the reduplicated syllable
of the Causal Aorist form of
roots which are marked with it;
e. g. अशशासत् अबबाधत्, अययाचत्
etc. cf. नाग्लोपिशास्वृदिताम् P.VII.4.2.
ऋश्यादि a class of words headed by
the word ऋश्य to which the tad-
dhita affix क is added in the four
senses prescribed in the rules IV.
2.67-70; e. g. ऋश्यकः, न्यग्रोधकः etc.
cf. P.IV.2.80.
ऋषिच्छन्द्स् the metre of the Vedic
seers. The seven metres गायत्री,
उष्णिक्, अनुष्टुप्, बृहती, पङ्क्ति, त्रिष्टुप् and
जगती consisting respectively of 24,
28, 32, 36, 40, 44 and 48 syllables
are named ऋषिच्छन्दस् as contrasted
with the metres दैव, प्राजापत्य and
आसुर, which, when combined to-
gether, make the metres of the
Vedic seers, For details see R.
Pr. XVI.1.5.
ऋष्यण् taddhita affix अण् in the sense
of 'descendant' applied to names
of ancient sages, by the rule
ऋष्यन्धकवृष्णिकुरुभ्यश्च P.IV.1.114;
e.g. वासिष्ठः,वैश्वामित्रः.
ॠ long variety of the vowel ऋ.
ॠदन्त (roots) ending in ॠ which
have the vowel ॠ changed into
इर् by the rule ॠत इद्धातोः P.VII.
1.100; e. g. किरति, गिलति.
लृ short vowel लृ taken to be a
cognate of ऋ, and described as a
vocalic form of the letter ल.
लृदित् (roots) marked with the mute
indicatory letter लृ, which take
the substitute अ (अङ्) for च्लि, the
Vikaraṇa of the aorist; e. g.
अपतत्, अशकत् cf. पुषादिद्ताद्य्-लृदितः
परस्मैपदेषु P.III.1.55.
ए diphthong vowel ए made up of अ
and इ, and hence having कण्ठतालु-
स्थान as its place of origin. It has
no short form according to Pāṇini.
In cases where a short vowel as a
substitute is prescribed for it in
grammar, the vowel इ is looked
upon as its short form. Patañjali
in his Mahābhāṣya has observed
that followers of the Sātyamugri
and Rāṇāyanīya branches of the
Sāmaveda have short ए ( ऍ ) in
their Sāmaveda recital and has
given सुजाते अश्वसूनृते, अध्वर्यो अद्रिभिः
सुतम् as illustrations; cf. M. Bh. on
I.1-48; as also the article on.
एक (1) Singular number, ekavacana:
cf. नो नौ मे मदर्थं त्रिह्येकेषु. V. Pr.II.3:
the term is found used in this
sense of singular number in the
Jainendra, Śākaṭāyana and Haima
grammars ( 2 ) single ( vowel )
substitute (एकादेश) for two (vowels);
cf एकः पूर्वपरयोः P.VI. 1.84; अथैकमुभे
T.Pr. X.1; ( 3 ) many, a certain
number : (used in pl. in this sense),
|
cf. इह चेत्येके मन्यते， M. Bh. on P.I.
4.21 .
एककर्मक transitive verbs having one
object, as contrasted with द्विक्रमेक;
cf kātantra IV.6.62
एकतिङ् possessed of one verb; given
as a definition of a sentence: cf.
एकतिङ् P.II.1.1 Vārt 10, explained
by Patañjali as एकतिङ् वाक्यसंज्ञं भवतीति
वक्तव्यम् । ब्रूहि ब्रूहि ।
एकदिक् in the same direction, given
as the sense of the tad. affix तस् by
Pāṇini; cf. तेनैकदिक् | तसिश्च । P.IV.
.3. 112, 113.
एकदेश a part or a portion of the
whole;cf. एकदेशविकृतमनन्यवत् Pari-Śek.
Pari 37; also M. Bh. Śivasūtra 2
Vārt 4: एकदेशोनुवर्तते M.Bh. on P.VI.
1.93 Vārt. 5; cf. also पदेकदज्ञानपि
तान् प्रतीयात् R.Pr. IX. 16.
एकदेशिन् ( a thing or a substance )
composed of parts; cf the term
एकदेशिसमास or एकदेशितत्पुरुष, used in
connection with compounds of
words such as पूर्व, पर and others
with words showing the constituted
whole ( एकदेशिन्) prescribed by the
rule पूर्वपराधरोत्तरमेकदेशिनेकाधिकरणे P. II.
2.1 ; (2) a partisan; cf. the word
सिद्धान्त्येकदेशिन् used often by com-
mentators.
एकदेशविकृतन्याय the maxim that ' a
thing is called or taken as that
very thing although it is lacking
in a part,'stated briefly as एकदेश-
विकृतमनन्यवत् Pari. Śek. Pari. 37. The
maxim is given in all the different
schools of grammar: cf. Śak Pari.
17: Cāndra Pari. 15, Kat. Par. Vr.
l, Jain. Par.Vr.l l, Hem.Pari.7 etc.
एकदेशानुमति consent to a part of the
whole, admission of one part as
correct.
एकद्रव्य one and the same individual
substance: cf the words एकद्रव्यसम-
|
वायित्व M. Bh. on P.I.4.23, एक-
द्रव्याभिघान on P.VIII.1.51, एकद्रव्योप-
निवेशिनी given as a definition of संज्ञा
M. Bh. on P.I.4.1.
एकपद made up of one word; con-
sisting of one word; cf. अथवा सन्त्ये-
कपदान्यप्यवधारणानि । यथा अब्भक्षो वायुभक्षः ।
अप एव भक्षयति वायुमव भक्षयति । M.Bh.
first Āhnika; (2) a continuous
word paraphrased as अखण्डपद and
समानपद by commentators; cf.
तेनानन्तरा षष्ठयेकपदवत् V.Pr.II. 18: (3)
every individual word: cf. बहुक्रमे
क्रमेत तस्यैकपदानि नि:सृजन् R.Pr.XI.18.
एकपदा made up of a single word; cf.
भवति चैतदकस्मिन्नपि एकवर्ण पदम् एकपदा
ऋक् एकर्चं सूक्तमिति । M. Bh. on P.I.
1.21 Vārt. 5; (2) made up of one
foot ( चरण or पाद ); cf. एक एकपदैतेषां
(R.Pr.XVII.24) explained by the
commentator as तेषां चतुर्णां पादाना-
मष्टाक्षरादीनां एकः पादः यस्याः सा एकपदा ऋक्
इत्युच्यते ।
एकपातिन् combined together; cf. R.
Pr. com. एकपातिनः एकीभूतस्य अक्षरस्य
क्रमे ध्रुवमाषीं लुप्यते; R. Pr. XI. 25, also
XVII.26.
एकभाविन् (vowels) combined by rules
of Saṁdhi; cf. क्षैप्रवर्णैकभाविनाम् R. Pr.
VII.22.
एकमात्रिक (l) possessed of one matra
or mora; (2) a term used for a
short vowel which measures one
mātrā or mora; cf. एकमात्रो ह्रस्वः
व्यञ्जनानि च । Ath.Pr.1.60.
एकमुनिपक्ष a view or doctrine pro-
pounded by one of the many
ancient sages or munis who are
believed to be the founders of
a Sastra; a view propounded
only by Pāṇini, to the exclusion
of Kātyāyana and Patañjali;
cf. एकमुनिपक्षे तु अचो ञ्णितीत्यत्राच इति
योगं विभज्य...व्यवस्थितविभाषात्रोक्ता Dur-
ghaṭa-Vṛtti I.1.5; see also I.4.24,
II.3.18.
12
|
एकयोग (1) combination of two Sutras
into one;cf.अथवा एकयोगः करिष्यते वृद्धिरादै-
जदेड्गुण इति M.Bh.P.I.1.3,I.4.59,V.2.
25; (2) one and the same Sūtra;cf.
एकयेागनिर्दिष्टानां सह वा प्रवृत्तिःसह वा निवृत्तिः
Pari.Śek.Pari.17; cf.also एकयोगानिर्दि-
ष्टानामप्येकदेशानुवृत्तिर्भवति P. IV.1.27,
Vārt. 2, Pari. Śek. Pari. 39.
एकयोगलक्षण characterized by i.e.
mentioned in one and the same
rule; cf. एकयोगलक्षणे तुग्दीर्घत्वे M.Bh.
on P. I. 1. 62. Vart. 10. See also
M. Bh.on P. VI.1.37.
एकवचन singular number; affix of
the singular numberin Pāṇini's gra-
mmar applied to noun-bases ( प्राति-
पदिक) and roots when the sense of
the singular number is to be conv-
eyed; the singular sense can be of
the form of an individual or colle-
ction or genus. The word एकवचन
in the technical sense of singular
number is found used in the
Prātiśākhyas and Nirukta also.
एकवत्त्व or एकवद्भाव use or treatment
of the plural sense as if it is singu-
lar; cf. एकवद्भावोsनर्थक: 1 समाहारैकत्वात्
M.Bh. on II. 4.12. Vart. 5.
एकवर्ण(a pada) made up of a single
letter; cf. एकवर्णं पदम् आ, उ इति:
commentary on R.Pr. X.2; cf.
also V.Pr.IV. 144-145 where एकवर्ण
is defined as एकप्रयत्ननिर्वर्त्य capable
of being produced with a single
effort. Pāṇini gives the term अपृक्त
to an affix made up of one single
letter; cf.अपृक्त एकाल् प्रत्यय: P.I.2.41.
एकवाक्य an expression giving one
idea, either a single or a composite
one. A positive statement and its
negation, so also, a general rule
and its exception are looked upon
as making a single sentence on
account of their mutual expectancy
even though they be sometimes
detached from each other cf.
|
विदेशस्थमपि सदेकवाक्यं भवति M. Bh. on
III.4.67; cf. also निषेधवाक्यानामपि
निषेध्यविशेषाकाङ्क्षत्वाद्विध्येकवाक्यतयैव अन्वयः ।
तत्रैकवाक्यता पर्युदासन्यायेन । संज्ञाशास्त्रस्य तु
कार्यकालपक्षे न पृथग्वाक्यार्थबोधः । Par. Śek
on Pari. 3. Such sentences are, in
fact, two sentences, but, to avoid
the fault of गौरव, caused by वाक्यभेद,
grammarians hold them to be
composite single sentences.
एकविभक्ति a pada having the same
case in the various dissolutions of
the compound word; e. g. the
word कौशाम्बी in the compound
word निष्कौशाम्बिः, which stands only
in the ablative case कौशाम्ब्याः, alth-
ough the word निष्क्रान्त, which stands
for the word निस्, could be used in
many cases. The word नियतविभक्तिक
is also used in the same sense.
एकवृत्ति single vṛtti or gloss on the
Vedic as well as classical portions
of grammar. Puruṣottamadeva has
used this term in his Bhāṣāvṛtti
to contrast his Vṛtti (भाषावृत्ति) with
the Kāśikāvṛtti and the Bhāgavṛtti
which deal with both the portions;
cf.अनार्ष इत्येकवृत्तावुपयुक्तम् Bhāṣāvṛtti on
I.1.16, cf.also Bhāṣāvṛtti on III.
4.99, IV.3.22 and VI.3.20.एकवृत्ति
is possibly used by Puruṣottama-
deva in the sense of मुख्यवृत्ति or साधा-
रणवृत्ति i. e. the common chief gloss
on both the portions.
एकशब्द a word having one sense
only, as opposed to अनेकशब्द many
words having the same sense or
synonyms which are given in निघण्टु
as also in अमरकोष; cf. अथ यान्यनेकार्थानि
एकशब्दानि तान्यतोनुक्रमिष्यामः Nir. IV.1.
एकशेष a kind of composite formation
in which only one of the two or
more words compounded together
subsists, the others being elided;
cf. एकः शिष्यते इतरे निवर्तन्ते वृक्षश्च वृक्षश्च
वृक्षौ । Kāśikā on सरूपाणामेकशेष एक-
|
विभक्तौ P.I.2.64; cf. also सुरूपसमुदा-
याद्धि विभक्तिर्या विधीयते । एकस्तत्रार्थवान् सिद्धः
समुदायस्य वाचकः ।। Bhāṣāvṛtti on P. I.
2.64. There is a dictum of gra-
mmarians that every individual
object requires a separate ex-
pression to convey its presence.
Hence, when there is a dual sense,
the word has to be repeated, as
also the word has to be multiplied
when there is a plural sense. In
current spoken language, however,
in such cases the word is used
only once. To justify this
single utterance for conveying the
sense of plurality, Pāṇini has laid
down a general rule सरूपाणामेकशेष
एकविभक्तौ and many other similar
rules to cover cases of plurality not
of one and the same object, but
plurality cased by many objects,
such as plurality caused by ideas
going in pairs or relations such
as parents, brothers and sisters,
grand-father and grand-son, male
and female. For example, see the
words वृक्षश्च वृक्षश्च वृक्षौ; Similarly वृक्षाः
for many trees, पितरौ for माता च
पिता च; देवौ for देवी च देवश्च; cf. also
the words श्वशुरौ, भ्रातरौ, गार्ग्यौ (for गार्ग्य
and गार्ग्यायण),आवाम् (for त्वं च अहं च), यौ
(for स च यश्च) and गावः fem. अजा fem.
अश्वाः masc. irrespective of the indi-
viduals being some males and
some females. Pāṇini has devoted
10 Sūtras to this topic of Eka-
śeṣa. The Daiva grammar has
completely ignored this topic.
Patanjali has very critically and
exhaustively discussed this topic.
Some critics hold that the topic
of एकशेघ did not exist in the ori-
ginal Aṣṭādhyāyī of Pāṇini but it
was interpolated later on, and ad-
duce the long discussion in the
Mahābhāṣya especially the Pūrva-
pakṣa therein, in support of their
|
argument. Whatever the case be,
the Vārttikakāra has commented
upon it at length; hence, the
addition must have been made
immediately after Pāṇini, if at all
there was any. For details see
Mahābhāṣya on I.1.64 to 73 as al-
so,Introduction p. 166-167, Vol.7
of the Mahābhāṣya published by
the D. E. Society, Poona.
एकशेषनिर्देश statement by subsistence of
one word out of many. The phrase
is very often used in the Mahā-
bhāṣya where the omission of an
individual thing is explained by
saying that the expression used is
a composite one including the
omitted thing along with the thing
already expressed; cf. एकशेषनिर्देशो-
यम् । सर्वादीनि च सर्वादीनि च सर्वादीनि ।
M. Bh. on I.I.27, on I.1.59,
I.2.39, as also on I.3.1 Vārt. 5,I.4.
101 Vārt. 3, II.1.1. Vārt. 19 etc.
एकश्रुति that which has got the same
accent or tone; utterance in the
same tone; monotone. The word
is applied to the utterance of the
vocative noun or phrase calling a
man from a distance, as also to
that of the vowels or syllables
following a Svarita vowel in the
Saṁhitā i.e. the continuous utter-
ance of Vedic sentences; cf. एकश्रुति
दूरात्संबुद्वौ and the foll. P.I.2.33-40
and the Mahābhāṣya thereon. In
his discussion on I.2.33 Patañjali
has given three alternative views
about the accent of Ekaśruti sylla-
bles : (a) they possess an ac-
cent between the उदात्त (acute)
and अनुदात्त (grave), (b) they are
in the same accent as is posses-
sed by the preceding vowel, (c)
Ekaśruti is looked upon as the
seventh of the seven accents;
cf. सैषा ज्ञापकाभ्यामुदात्तानुदात्तयोर्मध्यमेकश्रुति-
रन्तरालं ह्रियते। ... सप्त स्वरा भवन्ति | उदात्तः,
|
उदात्ततर:, अनुदात्तः, अनुदात्ततर:, स्वरितः
स्वरिते य उदात्तः सोन्येन विशिष्टः, एकश्रुतिः
सप्तमः । M.Bh. on P.I.2.33.
एकस्वर possessed of one vowel,mono-
syllabic; a term used by Hema-
candra in his grammar for the
term एकाच् of Pāṇini: cf. आद्योंश
एकस्वरे Hem.IV.1.2, which means
the same as एकाचेा द्वे प्रथमस्य P.VI.1.1.
एकहलादि having a single consonant
at the beginning; cf एकहलादौ
पूरयितव्येSन्यतरस्याम् P.VI.3.59.
एकहल्मध्य (a vowel) placed between
two single consonants; e.g the
vowel अ in पच्, रम्, रण्, etc.
एकाक्षर consisting of one single sylla-
ble ; e.g. स्व, भू, वाच् etc. cf. एकाक्षरा-
त्कृते जातेः सप्तम्यां च न तौ स्मृतौ M.Bh.
on P.V.2.115, as also on VI.1.168,
VI.4.161.
एकाच् possessed of a single vowel,
monosyllabic; cf. एकाचो द्वे प्रथमस्य P.
VI.1.1.
एकाच्पाद name given by Sīradeva
and other grammarians to the
first pāda of the sixth adhyāya cf
Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī, as it begins
with the sūtra एकाचो द्वे प्रथमस्य
VI.1.1.
एकादेश a single substitute in the place
of two original units; e.g. ए in the
place of अ and इ,or ओ in the place
of अ and उ. The ādeśas or substitu-
tes named पूर्वरूप and पररूप are looked
upon as ekadeśas in Pāṇini's
grammar although instead of
them, the omission of the latter
and former vowels respectively, is
prescribed in some Prātiśākhya
works. गुण and वृद्धि are sometimes
single substitutes for single origi-
nals, while they are sometimes
ekadeśas for two original vowels
e.g. तवेदम्, ब्रह्मौदनः, उपैति, प्रार्च्छति, गाम्,
सीमन्तः etc.; see P.VI.1.87 to ll l,
cf. also A.Pr.II 3.6.
|
एकादेशस्वर an accent prescribed for
the single substitute,as, for instance,
by rules like उदात्तस्वरितयोर्यणः स्वरितो-
नुदात्तस्य and the following rules P.
VI.2.4, 5 and 6.
एकान्त part, portion. Augments or
Āgamas in the Vyākaraṇa Śāstra
are looked upon as forming a part
of the word to which they are
attached; cf. अथ यस्यानुबन्ध आसज्यते,
किं स तस्य एकान्तो भवति आहोस्विदनेकान्तः ।
एकान्तस्तत्रेापलब्धेः । M. Bh. on I.3.9,
Vārt.9; cf. also एकान्ताः Par. Śek.
Pari, 5.
एकान्तर separated or intervened by
one single thing, a letter or a
word; e. g. अां पचसि देवदत्त, where
देवदत्त follows अाम् with one word
पचसि intervening; cf. आम एकान्तरमाम-
न्त्रितमनन्तिके P.VIII.1.55.
एकार the letter ए; looked upon as a
diphthong ( संध्यक्षर ) made up of
the letters अ and इ. The combina-
tion of the two constituent parts
is so complete as cannot allow any
of the two parts to be indepen-
dently working for saṁdhi or any
other operation with its adjoining
letter; cf नाव्यपवृत्तस्य अवयवे तद्विधिर्यथा
द्रव्येषु M. Bh. Śivasūtra 3 Vārt. 9.
एकार्थ (1) possessed of one sense as
contrasted with बह्वर्थ, द्व्यर्थ etc: (2)
synonym, cf. बहवो हि शब्दा एकार्था
भवन्ति । तद्यथा इन्द्रः शक्रः पुरुहूतः पुरंदरः ।
M. Bh. on I.2.45 Vārt. 9; (3)
Possessed of a composite sense;
cf. समासे पुनरेकार्थानि M. Bh. on II.
1.1 Vārt I. The words एकार्थ्य
and एकार्थत्व derived from the word
एकार्थ are often found used in the
sense of 'possession of a compo-
site sense' एकार्थस्य भाव: एकार्थता,ऐकार्थ्ये
एकार्थत्वं वा; cf. समासस्यैकार्थत्वंत्संज्ञाया
अप्रसिद्धिः M. Bh. on P.I.2.42
Vārt 1; cf. also the word एकार्थी-
भावः (4) potent to be connected;
|
समर्थ; cf. सुप्सुपा एकार्थम् ( समस्यते ) C.
Vy. II.2.1; (5) analogous समाना-
धिकरण cf. एकार्थं चानेकं च । एकः समानः
अर्थः अधिकरणं यस्य तदेकार्थं समानाधिकरणम्
Hem. Vy. III. 1.22: cf. also एकार्थे
च । Śāk. II.1.4.
एकार्थीमाव union of meanings; one
of the two ways in which the
word सामर्थ्य is explained; cf. एकार्थी-
भावो वा सामर्थ्यं स्याद् व्यपेक्षा वा । M. Bh.
on II.1.1.
एकाल् possessed of one single pho-
netic element or letter cf. अपृक्त
एकाल् प्रत्ययः P. I.2.41.
एकीभाव fusion, mixture, union, com-
bination (of 2 or more letters); cf.
उदात्तवति एकीभावे उदात्तं सन्ध्यमक्षरम्, R.
Pr.III.6.एकीभाव is said to be result-
ing from the coalescence called
अभिनिहितसन्धि, cf. R. Pr. II.16, 17.
एगेलिंग् ( Eggeling ) a well-known
German scholar of Sanskrit
Grammar who flourished in the
l9th century and who edited
the Kātantra Vyākaraṇa with the
commentary of Durgasiṁha and
many appendices in 1876.
एङ् a brief term ( प्रत्याहार ) for the
two diphthong letters ए and ओ;
cf. एङ्ह्रस्वात्संबुद्धेः P.VI.1.69, एङः
पदान्तादति VI.1.109. etc.
एच् a short term (प्रत्याहार) in Pāṇini's
grammar standing for diphthongs
or letters ए,ऐ,ओ, औ, e.g. एचोयवायावः
P.VI.1.78, एच इग् ह्रस्वादेशे P.I.1.48.
एजर्टन् [Edgerton, Dr. Franklin] an
American Sanskrit scholar and
author of ’Buddhist Hybrid Sans-
krit Grammar and Dictionary.'
एणीकृत A fault in pronunciation
when the voice is indistinct, and
the word pronounced is not dis-
tinctly heard; cf. एणीकृतः अविशिष्टः ।
किमयमोकारः अथौकार इति यत्र संदेहः Pradīpa
on M.Bh.I.1.1,explained as अवशिष्ट:
संश्लिष्टः संदिग्ध इति यावत् by Nāgeśa in
|
his Uddyota.
एण्य tad. affix एण्य applied to the
word प्रावृष् in the general शैषिक
senses; cf. प्रावृष एण्यः । प्रावृषेण्यः बलाहकः
Kāś. on P.IV.3.17.
एत् the vowel ए; cf. ईदूदेद्द्विवचनं प्रगृह्यम्
P.I.1.11.
एतावत्त्व limitation of the kind; 'such
and such' (words etc.); cf. A. Pr.I.
एत्व the substitution of ए; cf. बहुवचने
झल्येत् (P. VII.3.103) इति एत्वं प्राप्नोति
M.Bh. on P.V.3.10.
एत्य tad. affix applied to the in-
declinable दूर; e. g. दूरेत्यः पथिकः । cf.
दूरादेत्यः दूरेत्य: Kāś.on P.IV.2.104: cf.
also दूरादेत्यो वक्तव्यः । दूरेत्यः M.Bh. on
P.IV.2.104.
एदित् marked by the mute indicatory
letter ए. Roots marked with indi-
catory ए do not allow वृद्धि for
their vowel in the aorist: e.g.
अरगीत्, अलगीत्; cf. P.VII.2.5.
एद्यवि tad. affix एद्यवि applied to the
pronoun पर when the word refers
to a day;cf. परस्मिन्नहनि परेद्यवि Kāś. on
P.V.3.22.
प्रद्युसच् tad. affix एद्युस् applied to the
pronouns पूर्व, अन्य, अन्यतर, इतर,
अपर, अधर, उभय and उत्तर when the
words so formed refer to a day;
e. g. पूर्वेद्युः, अन्येद्युः etc.: cf. P.V.3.22.
एधाच् tad.affix एधा substituted for the
tad. affix धा optionally,when appli-
ed to the words द्वि and त्रि. e.g.द्विधा,
द्वेधा, दैधम्, त्रिधा, त्रेधा, त्रैधम्; cf. Kāś. on
एधाच्च P.V.3.46.
एनप् tad. affix एन applied to उत्तर, अधर,
and दक्षिण optionally instead of the
tad. affix आति in the senses of दिक्,
देश and काल, e.g. उत्तरेण, उत्तरतः उत्तरात्,
Words with this एन at the end
govern the acc. case of the word
syntactically connected with them.
e. g. तत्रागारं धनपतिगूहान् उत्तरेण Kālidāsa:
Meghadūta;cf.एनपा द्वितीया P.II.3.31.
|
एप् a term used in the Jainendra
Vyākaraṇa for the term गुण of
Pāṇini standing for the vowels
अ, ए and ओ; cf. ऋतः समादेरेप् Jain.
Vy. V.2.122.
एफ ending added to the consonant र
when a mention of it is to be
made; cf. T.Pr.I.19: e.g. रेफ.
एलिम (1) kṛt. afix केलिमर् e.g. पचेलिमा
माषाः cf. P. III.1.96 Vārt. 1: (2)
Uṇādi affix एलिमच् applied to पच्
cf. पच एलिमच् Uṇ. S.IV.37.
एलु tad-affix चेलु in the sense of unable
to bear, found in Vedic Literature
only; e.g. हिमेलुः cf. हिमाक्चेलुर्वक्तव्यः ।
P.V.2.122 Vārt. 7.
एव (l) a particle in the sense of re-
gulation (नियम) ; cf. एवकारः किमर्थः
नियमार्थः M. Bh. on V.3.58: (2) .
determinant indeclinable; cf. एव
इत्यवधारणे; cf. इष्टतोवधारणार्थस्तर्हि । यथैवं
विज्ञायेत । अजादी गुणवचनादेवेति M. Bh.
on V.3.58.
एवकारकरण use of the word एव; cf.
उक्तममैवाव्ययेन इत्यत्र एवकारकरणस्य प्रयो-
जनम्० M.Bh. on P.III.4.24.
एश् (1) the substitute ए for the per-
fect affix त, substituted for the
whole त by reason of the indica-
tory letter श् attached to ए; cf.
लिटस्तझयोरेशिरेच् and अनेकाल्शित्सर्वस्य P.
III.4.8l and I.1.55; (2) affix ए
applied to the root चक्ष् in Vedic
Literature; cf. नावचक्षे । नावख्यातव्य-
मित्यर्थः Kāś. on P.III.4.15.
एषितव्य necessary to be sought;
necessary to be prescribed; cf.
तस्मान्मृजेरिग्लक्षणा वृद्धिरेषितब्या M.Bh. on
I.1.3. Vārt. 8.
ऐ diphthong vowel ऐ; composite
form of आ and ए, also termed वृद्धि
in Pāṇini's grammar.
|
ऐकपदिक given in the group of eka-
padas or solitarily stated words
as contrasted with anekapadas or
synonyms. See एकपद above.
ऐकपद्य treatment as one single word
especially found in the case of
compound words (सामासिकपद)
which, as a result of such treat-
ment, have only one accent
(acute) and one case affix after
the whole word; cf. अयं खल्वपि
बहुव्रीहिरस्त्येव प्राथमकल्पिकः । यस्मिन्नैकपद्यमैकस्व
र्यमेकविभक्तित्वं च M. Bh.on P.I.1.29.
See एकपद.
ऐकश्रुत्य possession of the same tone
or accent; uniformity of tone or
accent. See the word एकश्रुति above;
also see P. I.2.39 Vārt. 1,2; VIII.
1.55 Vārt, 1.
ऐकस्वर्य having only one principal
accent (Udātta or Svarita) for the
whole compound word which is
made up of two or more indivi-
dual words cf. M. Bh. on P.
I.1.29.
ऐकार्थ्य possession of a single com-
posite sense (by all words to-
gether in a compound); cf संंघातस्य
ऐकार्थ्यात् सुबभावो वर्णात् M.Bh. on I.
2.45 Vārt 10; cf. also M. Bh. on
II.2.29 Vārt, 7; cf. also नाम
नाम्नैकार्थ्ये समासो बहुलम् Hem. III.1.18
where the commentator explains
ऐकार्थ्य as एकार्थीभावः In the com.
on Hem. III 2.8 ऐकार्थ्य is explain-
ed as ऐकपद्य
ऐच् short term ( प्रत्याहार ) standing for
'the two diphthong vowels ऐ and
औ; cf. न य्वाभ्यां पदान्ताभ्यां पूर्वौ तु ताभ्यामैच्
P.VII.3.4; cf. ऐचोश्चोत्तरभूयस्त्वात्
M. Bh. on P.I.1.48, The short
substitutes of ऐ and औ are इ and
उ when prescribed cf. P. I.1.48;
so also the protracted forms of
ऐ and औ are protracted इ and उ;
cf. P. III.2.106. They are called
|
द्विस्वर vowels in the Ṛk Prātiś-
ākhya. Śākaṭāyana says they are
द्विमात्र.
ऐत् the vowel ऐ; cf. एत ऐदित्यैत्वं M.Bh.
on P.III.4.93
ऐत्त्व substitution of ऐ for ए by the
rule एत ऐ prescribing the substitu-
tion of the vowel ऐ for ए in the
case of the imperative first person
terminations; cf P. III.4.93.
ऐन्द्र name of an ancient school of
grammar and of the treatise also,
belonging to that school, believed
to have been written under
instructions of Indra. The work is
not available. Patañjali mentions
that Bṛhaspati instructed Indra for
one thousand celestial years and
still did not finish his instructions
in words': (M. Bh. I.1.1 ). The
Taittirīya Saṁhitā mentions the
same. Pāṇini has referred to some
ancient grammarians of the East by
the word प्राचाम् without mention-
ing their names, and scholars like
Burnell think that the grammar
assigned to Indra is to be referred
to by the word प्राचाम्. The Bṛhat-
kathāmañjarī remarks that Pāṇi-
ni's grammar threw into the back-
ground the Aindra Grammar.
Some scholars believe that Kalāpa
grammar which is available today
is based upon Aindra,just as Cāndra
is based upon Pāṇini's grammar.
References to Aindra Grammar
are found in the commentary on
the Sārasvata Vyākaraṇa, in the
Kavikalpadruma of Bopadeva as
also in the commentary upon the
Mahābhārata by Devabodha.Quo-
tations, although very few, are
given by some writers from the
work. All these facts prove that
there was an ancient pre-Pāṇinian
treatise on Grammar assigned to
|
इन्द्र which was called Aindra-Vyā-
karaṇa.For details see Dr.Burnell's
'Aindra School of Sanskrit Gram-
marians' as also Vol. VII pages
124-126 of Vyākaraṇa Mahā-
bhāṣya, edited by the D.E.Society,
Poona.
ऐप् a term used in the Jainendra
Grammar instead of the term वृद्धि
of Pāṇini which stands for अा, ऐ
and औ; cf P.I.1.1.
ऐरक् taddhita affix ऐर applied to the
word चटका in the sense of offspring
to form the word चाटकैर; cf चटकाया
ऐरक् P.IV.1.128.
ऐषुकार्यादि a class of words headed
by the word एषुकारि to which the
taddhita affix भक्त is added in the
sense of 'place of residence'; e.g.
एषुकारिभक्तम्, चान्द्रायणभक्तम्; cf. Kāś.
on P.IV.2.54.
ऐस् substitute for the case affix भिस्
after words ending in अ; cf. अतो
भिस एस्. P.VII.I.9 to 11.
ओ (1) diphthong vowel made up of
the vowels अ and उ, termed as
guṇa in Pāṇini's grammar and
prescribed sometimes in the place
of the vowel उ; ( 2 ) affix ओ app-
lied to the root गम् or गा to form
a noun; cf. ओकारो नामकरणः Nir.II.5.
ओंकार the syllable ओं called by the
term प्रणव and generally recited at
the beginning of Vedic works.
Patañjali has commented upon
the word briefly as follows; पादस्य वा
अर्धर्चस्य वा अन्त्यमक्षरमुपसंहृत्य तदाद्यक्षरशेषस्य
स्थाने त्रिमात्रमोंकारं त्रिमात्रमोंकारं वा विदधति
तं प्रणव इत्याचक्षते M.Bh. on VIII.2.89.
ओत् the vowel ओ; cf. ओत् PI.1.15,16
prescribing- प्रगृह्यसंज्ञा for Nipātas
like अहो, उताहो and others with a
view that the wowel at their end
|
should not coalesce with the
following vowel. The Prātiśākhya
works prohibit the coalescence of
ओ in many cases with the succeed-
ing vowel; cf. R. Pr. I.70; V. Pr.
I.94.
ओदित् marked with the indicatory
letter ओ; roots marked with the
mute letter ओ have the Niṣṭhā
affix त or तवत् changed to न or नवत्;
e.g. लग्नः, लग्नवान् दीनः, दीनवान् etc.
cf. ओदितश्र P VIII.2.45; cf. also
स्वादय ओदितः इत्युक्तम् । सूनः सूनवान्; दूनः
दूनवान् Si. Kau. on P. VIII.2.45.
ओप्पेर्ट् [Gustav Oppert 1836-1908 ]
a German scholar of Sanskrit
who edited the Śabdānuśāsana of
Śākaṭāyana.
ओम् See ओंकार above- ओम् consists of
2 1/2 matras, cf. अर्धतृतीयमात्र एके ब्रुवते T.
Pr 18.1; शैत्यायन says that ओम् has
any one of the three accemts,
while कौण्डिन्य says it has प्रचय or
एकश्रुति i. e. absence of any accent.
ओरंभट्ट् a scholar of grammar of the
nineteenth century who wrote a
Vṛtti on Pāṇini sūtras called पाणिनि-
सूत्रवृत्ति. He has written many works
on the Pūrvamīmāmsa and other
Śāstras.
ओष्ठ Iit. lip; the place of origin
( स्थान ) of the labial letters called
उपध्मानीय वर्ण i.e the vowels उ, ऊ,
the consonants प्, फ्, ब्, भ्, म् and
the उपध्मानीय letter; cf. ऊपूपध्मानीयाना-
मेाष्ठौ Sid. Kau. on तुल्यास्यप्रयत्नं सवर्णम्
P.I.1.9, also उवोपोपध्मा ओष्ठे V. Pr .
I.70.
ओष्ठय lit. produced upon the lip: a
letter ofthe labial class;letters उ,ऊ,
ओ, औ, प्, फ्, ब्, भ्, म् and व् are given
as ओष्ठय letters in the Ṛk Prātiś-
ākhya, cf. R. Pr. I. 20. See the
word ओष्ठ above. For the utterance
of the letter व् tips of the teeth. are
also employed; hence the letter व्
|
is said to have दन्तौष्ठ as its स्थान..
ओस् the case affix ओस् of the gen.
and the loc, dual.
औ ( 1 ) the vowel औ; diphthong
vowel made up of आ and ओ; ( 2 )
the substitute औ for the final letter
उ of the word मनु before the fem,
affix ई; cf. मनोः स्त्री मनायी, मनावी,मनुः
Kāś. on P. IV. 1. 38; ( 3 ) case
ending of the nom. and acc. dual
called औङ् also.
ओङ् a term used by ancient gramm-
arians for the affix औ of the nom.
and the acc. dual. The vowel ई (शी)
is substituted for औ in the case of
nouns of the feminine and neu-
ter genders; cf. औङः शी P. VII.
1.18, 19.
औट् the case ending औ of the acc.
dual; cf. P.IV.1.2.
अौणादिक an afix mentioned in the
class of affixes called उणादि in
treatises of Pāṇini and other
grammarians; cf. नमुचि । मुचेरौणादिकः
केिप्रत्ययः Kāś.on P.VI.3.75; फिडफिड्डौ
अौणादिकौ प्रत्ययौ M.Bh. on Śiva Sūtra
2. See the word उणादि above.
औणादिकपदार्णव a collection of words
called औणादिक; a name given to
his work by पेदुभदृ of the 18th
century.
औत् (1) the letter औ included in the
वृद्धि vowels अा, ऐ and औ, and
hence called वृद्धि in Pāṇini's gra-
mmar, (2) substitute for the case-
ending इ ( ङि ) in Pāṇini's gra-
mmar; cf. P. VII.3.118, 119.
औत्तरपदिक pertaining to the ulte-
rior member of a compound cf.
औत्तरपदिके ह्रस्वत्व (P.VI.3.61) कृते
तुक् प्राप्नोति M.Bh. on I.1.62.
औत्व the substitution of the vowel
अौ; cf. P. VII.3.117-119.
|
औत्सर्गिक an affix or an operation
resulting from the general rule
( उत्सर्ग ); cf. अपत्ये कुत्सिते मूढे मनौरो-
त्सर्गिकः स्मृत: M. Bh. on IV.1.161 ;
cf. also एवमप्यौत्सर्गिकाणां तद्विषयता न
प्राप्नोति M. Bh. on IV.2.66.
औदव्रजि an ancient sage and scholar
of Vedic Grammar who is believ-
ed to have revised the original
text of the ऋक्तन्त्रप्रातिशाख्य of the
Sāma-Veda. cf. Śab. Kaus. I.1.8.
अौदुम्वरायण an ancient sage whose
doctrine of 'evanescence of
words' (lit. existence as long as
its cognition is had by the sense
organs) is seen quoted in the
Nirukta; cf. इन्द्रियनित्यं वचनमौदुम्बरा-
यणस्तत्र चतुष्टयं नोपपद्यते Nir. I.1.
औद्देशिक enumerated; actually stated;
उद्देशतः प्रोक्तम् औद्देशिकम् cf. न तु
औद्देशिकमिव Nir.I.4.
औपचारिक resulting from उपचार or
लक्षणा ; metonymical.
अौपदेशिक mentioned in the original
statement; cf. अन्तग्रहणं औपदेशिकांर्थम् ।
Kāś. on ष्णान्ता षट् P.I.1.24, cf.
also औपदेशिकप्रायोगिकयोरौपदेशिकस्यैव ग्रह-
णम् Par. Śek. Pari. 120.
औपमन्यव name of an ancient etymo-
logist referred to by Yaska in his
Nirukta possibly as a commenta-
tor on निघण्टु; cf. निगन्तव एव सन्तो
निगमनान्निघण्टव उच्यन्यन्ते इत्यौपमन्यवः Nir.
I.1. line 4.
औपमिक figurative metaphorical ap-
plication or statement: cf. ( विराट् )
पिपीलिकमध्या इत्यौपमिकम् Nir. VII. 13.
औपश्लेषिक resulting from immediate
contact immediately or closely
connected; one of the three types
of अधिकरण or location which is
given as the sense of the locative
case; cf. अधिकरणं नाम त्रिप्रकारं-व्यापकम्
ओपश्लेषिकम्, वैषयिकमिति ... इको यणचि |
अचि उपाश्लिष्टस्येति | M. Bh. VI. 1.72.
|
औपसंख्यानिक subsequently stated by
way of addition or modification
as done by the Vārttikakāras; cf.
औपसंख्यानिकस्य णस्यापवादंः । आरण्यको
मनुष्यः Kāś on P.IV.2.129; cf.
also Kāś. on V.1.29 and VI.3.41.
औरस produced from the chest ; the
Visajanīya and h (हकार) are look-
ed upon as औरस and not कण्ठ्य by
Some ancient phoneticians;cf. केचि-
दाचार्याः एतौ हकारविसर्जनीयौ उर:स्थानाविच्छ-
न्ति com. on R.Pr.I.18: cf. also
हकारं पञ्चमैर्युक्तमन्तस्थाभिश्च संयुतम् । उरस्यं
तं विजानीयात्कण्ठ्यमाहुरसंयुतम् । Pān.
Śikṣā. 16.
औरस्य produced from the chest. See
औरस.
औश् substitute औ for the nom. and
acc. case endings applied to the
numeral अष्टन्; cf. अष्टाभ्य औश् P.VII.
1.21.
औष्णिह beginning with a stanza of
the Uṣṇih metre; cf. उष्णिहापूर्वः सतो-
बृहत्यन्तः प्रगाथः औष्णिह इत्युच्यते । यथा यमा-
दित्यासो अद्रुहः Uvaṭa on R.Pr.XVIII.5.
{{c|-( अनुस्वार )
ंअनुस्वार or nasal (l) looked upon
as a phonetic element, indepen-
dent, no doubt, but incapable of
being pronounced without a vowel
Preceding it. Hence, it is shown
in writing with अ although its form
in writing is only a dot above the
line cf अं इत्यनुस्वारः । अकार इह उच्चारणर्थ
इति बिन्दुमात्रो वर्णोनुस्वारसंज्ञो भवति Kāt.
Vyāk I.1.19; (2) anusvāra,showing
or signifying Vikāra i.e. अागम and
used as a technical term for the
second विभक्ति or the accusative case.
See the word अं above on page 1.
ः ( विसर्ग )
'ः or विसर्गः lit. letting out
13
|
breath from the mouth; sound or
utterance caused by breath escap-
ing from the mouth; breathing.
The Visarjanīya, just like the
anusvāra, is incapable of being
independently uttered. Hence, it
is written for convenience as अः
although its form for writing pur-
poses is only two dots after the
vowel preceding it; cf. अः इति
विसर्जनीयः । अकार इह उच्चारणार्थः इति कुमारी-
स्तनयुगाकृतिर्वर्णो विसर्जनीयसंज्ञो भवति । Kāt.
Vyāk. I.1.16. See अः above on
page 2.
ᳵ ( जिह्वामूलीय )
जिह्वामूलीय, a phonetical element
or unit called Jihvāmūlīya, pro-
duced at the root of the tongue,
which is optionally substituted
in the place of the Visarga (left
0ut breath) directly preceding the
utterance of the letter क् or ख्
and hence shown as ᳵ क्. See
अ ᳵ क् above on page 2.
ᳶ ( उपध्मानीय )
ᳶ उपध्मानीय lit. blowing; a term
applied to the visarga when
followed by the consonant प् or फ्.
The upadhmānīya is looked upon
as a letter or phonetic element,
which is always connected with
the preceding vowel. As the
upadhmānīya is an optional sub-
stitute for the visarga before the
letter प् or फ्, when, in writing,
it is to be shown instead of
the visarga, it is shown as
ᳶ, or as w , or even as x just as the
Jihvāmūlīya; cf. उपध्मायते शब्दायते इति,
उप समीपे ध्मायते शब्द्यते इति वा com. on
Kāt. I:; : cf. also कपाभ्यां प्रागर्धविसर्गसदृशो
जिह्वामूलीयोपध्मानीयौः:S.K.on P.VIII.2.1.
|
( ँ नासिक्य )
ँ नासिक्य, a nasal letter or utterance
included among the अयोगवाह letters
analogous to anusvāra and yama
letters. It is mentioned in the
Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya as हुँ इति
नासिक्यः on which Uvvaṭa makes
the remark अयमृक्शाखायां प्रसिद्धः. The
Ṛk-Prātiśākhya mentions नासिक्य,
यम and अनुस्वार as नासिक्य or nasal
letters, while Uvvaṭa defines नासिक्य
as a letter produced only by the
nose; cf. केवलनासिकया उच्चार्यमाणे वर्णॊ
नासिक्यः Uvvaṭa on R. Pr. I. 20.
The Taittirīya Prātiśākhya calls
the letter ह् as nāsikya when it is
followed by the consonant न् or ण्
or म् and gives अह्नाम् , अपराह्णे and
ब्रह्म as instances. The Pāṇinīya
Śikṣā does not mention नासिक्य as
a letter. The Mahābhāṣya men-
tions नासिक्य as one of the six
ayogavāha letters; cf. के पुनरयो-
गवाहाः । विसर्जनीयजिह्वामूलीयोपध्मानीयानु-
स्वारानुनासिक्ययमाः M. Bh. on Śiva-
sūtra 5 Vārt. 5, where some
manuscripts read नासिक्य for अानुना-
सिक्य while in some other manus-
cripts there is neither the word
आनुनासिक्य nor नासिक्य. It is likely
that the anunāsika-colouring given
to the vowel preceding the conso-
nant सू substituted for the conso-
nants म, न् and others by P. VIII.
3.2. to 12, was looked upon as a
separate phonetic unit and called
नासिक्य as for instance in सँस्कर्ता, मा
हिँसीः, सँशिशाधि etc.
यम, a letter called यम which is
uttered partly through the nose.
A class consonant excepting the
fifth, when followed by the fifth
viz. ङ्, ञ्, ण्, न or म् , gets doubled
|
in the Vedic recital, when the
second of the doubled consonant
which is coloured by the follow-
ing nasal consonant is called यम.
This यम letter is not independent.
It necessarily depends upon the
following nasal consonant and
hence it is called अयोगवाह. The
nasalization is shown in script as
xx followed by the consonant; e.
g. पलिक्क्नी, अगूग्रे, etc. The pro-
nunciation of this yama or twin
letter is seen in the Vedic recital
only; cf. पलिक्कनी ... कखगघेभ्य; परे
तत्सदृशा एव यमाः S. K. on P. VIII.
2.1. cf. कु खु गु घु इति यमाः विंशति-
संख्याका भवन्ति V. Pr. VIII.24.
क्(l) the consonant क्; the first con.
sonant of the consonant group as
also of the guttural group; (2)
substitute क् for consonants ष्， and ढ्
before the consonant स्;cf.V.P.2.41.
For the elision ( लोप ) of क् on ac-
count of its being termed इत् see
P.I.3.3 and 8.
क.(l) tad.affix क applied to the words
of the ऋश्य group in the four senses
called चातुरर्थिक e. g. ऋश्यकः, अनडुत्कः,
वेणुकः etc., cf. P.IV.2.80; (2) tad.
affix क applied to nouns in the
sense of diminution, censure, pity
etc. e. g. अश्वक्रः, उष्ट्रकः, पुत्रकः, cf. P.V.
3.70-87: (3) tad. affix क in the very
sense of the word itself ( स्वार्थे ) e.g.
अविकः, यावकः, कालकः; cf. P.V.4.28-
33; (4) Uṇādi affix क e.g. कर्क, वृक,
राका, एक, भेक, काक, पाक, शल्क etc. by
Uṇādi sūtras III. 40-48 before
which the angment इट् is prohibit-
ed by P. VII.2.9; (5) kṛt affix क
( अ ) where क् is dropped by P. I.
3.8, applied, in the sense of agent,
to certain roots mentioned in
P.III.1.135, 136, 144, III. 2.3 to
|
7, III.2.77 and III.3.83 e.g. बुध:,
प्रस्थः, गृहम्, कम्बलदः, द्विपः, मूलविभुजः,
सामगः, सुरापः etc.; (6) substitute क
for the word किम् before a case affix,
cf. P.VII.2.103; (7) the Samāsānta
affix कप् (क) at the end of Bahu-
vrīhi compounds as prescribed by
P.V.4.151-160.
ककार the consonant क; cf. वर्णात्कारः P.
III.3.108 Vārt. 3.
कंसविजयगणि a Jain grammarian who
wrote a commentary by name
शब्दचन्द्रिकोद्धार on the सारस्वतव्याकरण.
कर्क्यादि a class of words headed by
the word कर्की, the word प्रस्थ after
which in a compound, does not
have the acute accent on its first
vowel. e. g. कर्कीप्रस्थः; cf. P.VI.2.87.
कच्छादि a class of words headed by
कच्छ to which the taddhita affix अण्
is added in the miscellaneous
(शैषिक) senses, provided the word,
to which the affix अण् is to
be added, is the name of a
country; e.g. ऋषिकेषु जातः आर्षिकः
similarly माहिषिकः, ऐक्ष्वाकः; cf. Kāś.
on P.IV.2.133.
कक् tad. cāturarthika affix क (I) by P.
IV.2.80 after words headed by
वराह, e.g. वराहकः, पलाशकः; (2) by
P.IV.4.21, after the word अपमित्य
e.g. आपमित्यकः
कञ् kṛt, affix ( अ ) affixed to the root
दृश् preceded by त्यद्, तद् etc. by P.
IV.2.60 e.g. तादृश:, यादृशः etc., fem.
तादृशी by P.IV.1.15.
कटच् tad.affix कट affixed to सं, प्र, उद्
and अव by P.V.2.29, 30; e.g. संकट,
प्रकट etc.
कट्यच् tad. affix कटय affixed to the
word रथ in the sense of collection
by P.IV.2.5l e.g. रथकटया.
कडारादि a class of words headed by
the word कडार which, although adje-
ctival,are optionally placed first in
|
the Karmadhāraya compound, e.g.
कडारजैमिनिः जैमिनिकडारः; cf. Kāś. on
II.2.38.
कर्णादि (1) a class of words headed
by कर्ण to which the taddhita affix
अायन ( फिञ् ) is applied in the four
senses given in P.IV.2.67-70; e.g.
कार्णायनिः वासिष्ठायनिः etc.; cf Kāś. on
P.IV.2.80; (2) a class of words
headed by कर्ण to which the taddhita
affix जाह (जाहच्) is added in the
sense of a 'root' e.g. कर्णजाहम् ; cf.
Kāś. on P.V.2.24.
कण्टकोद्धार name of a commentary on
Nāgeśa's Paribhāṣenduśekhara by
Mannudeva, known also as Mantu-
deva or Manyudeva, who was a
pupil of Pāyaguṇḍe in the latter
half of the 18th century.
कण्ठ glottis: cavity in the throat
holding vocal cords; the place of
the production of the sounds अ, अI
and ह; cf. अहविसर्जनीयाः कण्ठे V, Pr.I.
71; cf, also कण्ठ्योsकारः प्रथमपञ्चमौ च
R.Pr.I.18.
कण्ठतालव्य gutturo-palatal. The diph-
thongs ए and ऐ are called Kaṇṭha-
tālavya, as they are produced in
the Kaṇṭhatalu-sthāna.
कण्ठोक्त formally mentioned; directly
mentioned.
कण्ठोष्ठ्य, कण्ठौष्ठ्य gutturo-labial, the
diphthongs ओ and औ are called
Kaṇṭhoṣṭhya as they are produc-
ed at both the Kaṇṭha and the
Oṣṭha Sthānas.
कण्ठ्य produced at the throat or at
the glottis; the vowel अ, visarga
and the consonant ह् are called
कण्ठ्यं in the Prātiśākhyas, while
later grammarians include the
guttural consonants क्, ख् ग्, घ् and
ङ् among the Kaṇṭhya letters; cf.
अकुहविसर्जनीयानां कण्ठः Sid. Kau.on
तुल्यास्यप्रयत्नं सवर्णम् P.I.1.9. See
कण्ठ.
|
कण्ड्वादि a group of words which are
headed by the word कण्डू and which
are either nouns or roots or both
to which the affix यक् is added to
arrive at the secondary roots e.g.
कण्डूयति, कण्डूयते; हृणीयति, हृणीयते, महीयते
cf. धातुप्रक्ररणाद्धातुः कस्य चासञ्जनादपि ।
आह चायमिमं दीर्घं मन्ये धातुर्विभाषितः ॥ Kāś.
on P.III.1.27.
कण्वादि a class of words forming a
portion of the class of words call-
ed गर्गादि, and headed by the
word कण्व, to the derivatives of
which, formed by the afix यञ् by
the rule गर्गादिभ्यो यञ् (P.IV.1.105)
the affix अण् is added in the misce-
llaneous senses; e.g. काण्वाः छात्राः;
similarly गौकक्षाः, शाकलाः , अगस्तयः,
कुण्डिनाः etc: cf. P.IV.2.111 and II.
4.70.
कत्र्यादि a class of words headed by
the word कत्रि to which the tad.
affix एयक (ढकञ्) is applied in the
miscellaneous senses; e.g. कात्रेयकः,
ग्रामेयकः, कौलेयकः (from कुल्या); cf. P.
IV.2.75.
कथादि a class of words headed by
कथा the word कथा to which the affix इक
(ठक्) is added in the sense of
'good therein' (तत्र साधुः); e.g.
काथिकः, वैतण्डिकः, गाणिकः, अायुर्वेदिकः
cf. P.IV.4.102.
कध्यै कध्यैन् kṛt affix अध्यै of the
infinitive in Vedic Literature: cf.
तुमर्थे सेसे...कध्यैकध्यैन्..तवेनः P.III.4.9.
कन् (1) Uṇādi affix as in the words
एक, भेक, शल्क etc; (2) tad.affix क as
given by Pāṇini sūtras IV.2.13l,
IV.3.32, 65, 147, IV.4.21; V.1.22,
23, 51, 90, V.2.64, 65, 66, 68-75,
77-82, V.3.51, 52, 75,81,82,87, 95,
96, 97. V.4.3,4,6, 29-33.
कप् (l) kṛt affix क prescribed after
the root दुह् e.g. कामदुघा, cf. P.III.2.
70;(2) the Samāsānta अ at the end
|
of Bahuvrīhi compounds e.g. व्वूढो-
रस्कः, बहुदण्डिका, बहुकुमारीकः,बहुकर्तृकः,
cf. P.V.4.151-154. For its prohibi-
tion, see P.V.4.155-160.
कर्मणिपाद name given by Sīradeva
and other grammarians to the
second pāda of the third adhyāya
of Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī, which
begins with the sūtra कर्मण्यण् P.
III.2.1 .
कमुल् kṛt. affix अम् in Vedic Litera-
ore in the sense of the infinitive,
e. g. विभाजं in अग्निं वै देवा विभाजं
नाशक्नुवन्;cf. P.III.4.12.
कम्प vibration of the larynx which
produces thc sound.
कम्पन a fault in uttering an accent-
ed vowel especially a vowel with
the circumflex accent which is not
properly uttered by the Souther-
ners as remarked by Uvvata; cf
कम्पनं नाम रचराश्रितपाठदोषः । स च प्रायेण
दाक्षिणात्यानां भवति । स च वर्ज्यः । Uvvaṭa
on R. Pr. III.18.
कम्पित the same as कम्पन. See कम्पन
above
कम्बोजादि a class of words headed
by the word कम्बोज, the affix अञ्
placed after which is elided, pro-
vided the words कम्बोज and others
are names of countries; e.g. कम्बोजः
चोलः, केरलः, शकः, यवनः etc. cf. P.
IV.1.175.
करण(1) lit instrument; the term
signifies the most efficient means
for accomplishing an act; cf.
क्रियासिद्धी यत् प्रकृष्टोपकारकं विवक्षितं
तत्साधकतमं कारकं करणसंज्ञं भवति, Kāś.
on साधकतमं करणम् P.I.4.42,
e. g. दात्रेण in दात्रेण लुनाति; (2) effort
inside the mouth (अाभ्यन्तर-प्रयत्न )
to produce sound; e. g. touching
of the particular place ( स्थान )
inside the mouth for uttering
consonants; cf. स्पृष्टं स्पर्शानां करणम् M.
Bh. on P, I.1.10 Vārt. 3; (3)
|
disposition of the organ which
produces the sound; cf. श्वासनादो-
भयानां विशेषः करणमित्युच्यते । एतच्च पाणिनि-
संमताभ्यन्तरप्रयत्न इति भाति । Com. on R.
Pr. XIII.3;cf. also स्थानकरणानुप्रदानानि
M. Bh. on I.2.32: cf. also
अनुप्रदानात्संसर्गात् स्थानात् करणविन्ययात् ।
जायते वर्णवैशेष्यं परीमाणाच्च पञ्चमात् T. Pr.
XXIII. 2. where karaṇa is describ-
ed to be of five kinds अनुप्रदान (i.e.
नाद or resonance), संसर्ग (contact),
स्थान, करणविन्यय and परिमाण; cf.अकारस्य
तावत् - अनुप्रदानं नादः, संसर्गः कण्ठे, स्थानं
हनू, करणविन्ययः ओष्ठौ, परिमाणं मात्राकालः ।
अनुप्रदानादिभिः पञ्चभिः करणैर्वर्णानां वैशेष्यं
जायते Com. on Tai. Pr. XXIII.2.
The Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya men-
tions two karaṇas संवृत and विवृत;
cf. द्वे करणे संवृतविवृताख्ये वायोर्भवतः V.
Pr. I. 11; (4) use of a word e.g.
इतिकरणं, वत्करणम्; cf. किमुपस्थितं नाम ।
अनार्षं इतिकरणः M.Bh.on. P.VI.1.129.
करविणी or कर्विणी name of a svara-
bhakti i. e. behaviour like the
vowel लृ, noticed in the case of
the consonant ल् when followed
by the sibilant ह्; cf. करेणू रहयोर्योगे
कर्विणी लहकारयोः । हरिणी रशसानां च हारिता
लशकारयोः ॥ करेणुः बर् हिः । कर्विणी भलहाः
Com. on T. Pr. XXI. 15. See
स्वरभक्ति.
करिणी name of a svarabhakti i. e.
behaviour like the vowel ऋ
noticed in the case of the conso-
nant र्. when it is followed by ह्
e. g. बर् हिः करिणी is named करेणु also.
करिष्यत् करिष्यन्ती ancient technical
terms for the future tense;the word
करिष्यन्ती is more frequently used.
कर्णमूलीयproduced at the root of
the ear; the utterance of a cir-
cumflex vowel is described as
Karṇamūliya.
कर्तृ agent of an action, subject;
name of a kāraka or instrument
in general, of an action, which
|
produces the fruit or result of an
action without depending on any
other instrument; cf. स्वतन्त्रः कर्ता P.
I.4.54, explained as अगुणीभूतो यः
क्रियाप्रसिद्धौ स्वातन्त्र्येण विवक्ष्यते तत्कारकं कर्तृ-
संज्ञं भवति in the Kāśikā on P.I.
4.54. This agent, or rather, the
word standing for the agent, is
put in the nominative case in the
active voice (cf. P.I.4.54), in the
instrumental case in the passive
voice (cf P. II.3.18), and in the
genitive case when it is connected
with a noun of action or verbal
derivative noun, (cf. P.II.3.65).
कर्तृयक् the affix य of the passive
voice where the object functions
as the subject: e. g. यक् in लूयते
केदारः स्वयमेव; cf. अचः कर्तृयकि P.VI.
1.95 and the Kāśikā thereon.
कर्तृवेदना experience (of something)
by the agent himself; cf. सुखादिभ्यः
कर्तृवेदनायाम् P. III.1.18
कर्तृसाधन (an affix) appplied in the
sense of the agent of an activity;
भवतीति भावः । कतृसाधनश्चायं प्रत्ययः M.
Bh. on P.I.3.1. Vārt. 7.
कर्तृस्थक्रिय(a root) whose activity is
found functioning in the subject;cf.
यत्र क्रियाकृतविशेषदर्शनं कर्तरि Kaiyata on
P.III.1.87 Vārt. 3. Such roots,
although transitive do not have
any Karmakartari construction by
the rule कर्मवत्कर्मणा तुल्यक्रियः P.III.
1.87. as e.g. ग्रामं गच्छति देवदत्तः has no
कर्मकर्तरि construction; cf. कर्मस्थभाव-
कानां कर्मस्थक्रियाणां वा कर्ता कर्मवद् भवतीति
वक्तव्यम् । कर्तृस्थभावकानां कर्तृस्थक्रियाणां वा
कर्ता कर्मवन्मा भूदिति M. Bh. on III.
1.87. Vārt, 3.
कर्तृस्थभावक (a root) whose action or
happening is noticed functioning
in the subject; e.g. the root स्मृ. cf.
कर्तस्थभावकश्चायं (स्मरतिः) M. Bh. of
I.3.67, कतृस्थभावकश्च शेतिः (शीधातुः)
M. Bh. on V.3.55.
|
कर्त्रभिप्राय meant for the agent of
the action. The word is used
in connection with the fruit or
result of an action; when the
result is for the agent, roots
having both the Padas get the
Ātmanepada terminations; cf.
स्वरितञ्जितः कर्त्रभिप्राये क्रियाफले P.I.3.72.
कर्मकर्तृ object of the transitive verb
which functions as the subject
when there is a marked facility
of action: e.g.ओदन is karmakartari-
object, functioning as subject,
in पच्यते ओदनः स्वयमेव. The word
कर्मकर्तृ is used also for the कर्मकर्तरि
प्रयोग where the object, on which
the verb-activity is found, is
turned into a subject and the
verb which is transitive is turned
into intransitive as a result.
कर्मधारय name technically given to
a compound-formation of two
words in apposition i. e. used in
the same case, technically called
समानाधिकरण showing the same sub-
stratutm; cf. तत्पुरुषः समानाधिकरणः कर्म-
धारयः I 2.42. The karmadhāraya
compound is looked upon as a
variety of the tatpuruṣa com-
pound. There is no satisfactory
explanation of the reason why
such a compound is termed कर्म-
धारय. Śākaṭāyana defines Karma-
dhāraya as विशेषणं व्यभिचारि एकार्थं
कर्मधारयश्च where the word विशेषण is
explained as व्यावर्तक or भेदक (distin-
guishing attribute) showing that
the word कर्म may mean भेदकक्रिया.
The word कर्मधारय in that case
could mean 'कर्म भेदकक्रिया, तां धारयति
असौ कर्मधारयः' a compound which
gives a specification of the thing
in hand.
कर्मन् (l) object of a transitive verb,
defined as something which the
agent or the doer of an action wants
|
primarily to achieve. The main
feature of कर्मन् is that it is put in
the accusative case; cf. कर्तुरीप्सिततमं
कर्म, कर्मणि द्वितीया; P. I.4.49; II.3.2.
Pāṇini has made कर्म a technical
term and called all such words
'karman' as are connected with a
verbal activity and used in the
accusative case; cf. कर्तुरीप्सिततमं
कर्म; तथायुक्तं चानीप्सितम् ; अकथितं च and
गतिबुद्धिप्रत्यवसानार्थशब्दकर्माकर्मकाणामणि कर्ता
स णौ P.I.4.49-52;cf also यत् क्रियते तत्
कर्म Kāt. II.4.13, कर्त्राप्यम् Jain I. 2.
120 and कर्तुर्व्याप्यं कर्म Hem. II. 2. 3.
Sometimes a kāraka, related to
the activity ( क्रिया) as saṁpradāna,
apādāna or adhikaraṇa is also treat-
ed as karma, if it is not meant or
desired as apādāna,saṁpradāna etc.
It is termed अकथितकर्म in such cases;
cf. अपादानादिविशेषकथाभिरविवक्षितमकथितम्
Kāś. on I.4.51. See the word
अकथित above. Karman or object
is to be achieved by an activity or
क्रिया; it is always syntactically con-
nected with a verb or a verbal deri-
vative.When connected with verbs
or verbal derivatives indeclinabl-
es or words ending with the affixes
उक, क्त, क्तवतु, तृन् , etc, it is put in
the accusative case. It is put in
the genitive case when it is con-
nected with affixes other than those
mentioned above; cf. P, II.3.65,
69. When, however, the karman
is expressed ( अभिहित ) by a verbal
termination ( तिङ् ), or a verbal
noun termination (कृत्), or a noun-
affix ( तद्धित ), or a compound, it is
put in the nominative case. e.g.
कटः क्रियते, कटः कृतः, शत्यः, प्राप्तोदकः ग्रामः
etc. It is called अभिहित in such
cases;cf. P.II.3.1.Sec the word अन-
भिहित above.The object or Karman
which is ईप्सिततम is described to be
of three kinds with reference to
the way in which it is obtained
|
कर्म
नामन्
कर्मव्यतिहार I03
from the activity. It is called विकार्य
when a transformation or a change
is noticed in the object as a result
of the verbal activity, e. g. काष्ठानि
भस्मीकरोति, घटं भिनत्ति etc. It is called
प्राप्य when no change is seen to
result from the action, the object
only coming into contact with the
subject, e. g. ग्रामं गच्छति, आदित्यं पश्यति
etc. It is called निर्वर्त्य when the object
is brought into being under a
specific name; e.g. घटं करोति, ओदनं
पचति; cf. निर्वर्त्ये च विकार्यं च प्राप्यं चेति
त्रिधा मतम् । तत्रेप्सिततमम् Padamañjarī
on I.4.49: cf. also Vākyapadīya
III.7.45 as also Nyāsa on 1.4.49.
The object which is not ईप्सिततम
is also subdivided into four kinds
e. g. (a) अनीप्सित (ग्रामं गच्छन् ) व्याघ्रं
पश्यति, (b) औदासीन्येन प्राप्य or इतरत्
or अनुभय e.g. (ग्रामं गच्छन्) वृक्षमूलानि
उपसर्पति, (c) अनाख्यात or अकथित e.g.
बलिं in बलिं याचते वसुधाम् (d) अन्यपूर्वक
e.g अक्षान् दीव्यति, ग्राममभिनिविशते; cf.
Padamañjarī on I.4 49, The com-
mentator Abhayanandin on Jain-
endra Vyākaraṇa mentions seven
kinds प्राप्य, विषयभूत, निर्वर्त्य, विक्रियात्मक,
ईप्सित, अनीप्सित and इतरत्, defining
कर्म as कर्त्रा क्रियया यद् आप्यं तत् कारकं
कर्म; cf. कर्त्राप्यम् Jain. Vy. I.2.120
and com. thereon. जेनेन्द्रमधीते is
given therein as an instance of
विषयभूत. (2) The word कर्मन् is also
used in the sense of क्रिया or verbal
activity; cf. उदेनूर्ध्वकर्मणि P.I.3.24;
आदिकर्मणि क्तः कर्तरि च P.III.4.71, कर्तरि
कर्मव्यतिहारे P.I.3.14. (3) It is also
used in the sense of activity in
general, as for instance,the sense of
a word; e. g. नामाख्यातयोस्तु कर्मोपसंयोग-
द्योतका भवन्ति Nir. I. 3.4, where Dur-
gācārya explains karman as 'sense'
( अर्थ ).
कमेनामन् lit. noun showing action,
participle.
कर्मप्रवचनीय a technical term used in
|
connection with a preposition
which showed a verbal activity
formerly, although for the present
time it does not show it; the
word is used as a technical term
in grammar in connection with
prefixes or उपसर्गs which are not us-
ed along.with a root, but without
it cf. कर्म प्रोक्तवन्तः कर्मप्रवचनीयाः इति
M.Bh. on P.I.4.83; e.g. शाकल्यस्य
संहितामनु प्रावर्षत्, अन्वर्जुनं योद्धारः, अा कुमारं
यशः पाणिनेः; cf. Kāś. on P.I.4.83
to 98.
कर्मवद्भाव the activity of the agent or
kartā of an action represented as
object or karman of that very ac-
tion, for the sake of grammatical
operations: e. g. भिद्यते काष्ठं स्वयमेव;.
करिष्यते कटः स्वयमेव. To show facility
of a verbal activity on the object,
when the agent or kartā is dispen-
sed with, and the object is looked
upon as the agent, and used also
as an agent, the verbal termina-
tions ति, त; etc. are not applied in
the sense of an agent, but they
are applied in the sense of an ob-
ject; consequently the sign of the
voice is not अ (शप्), but य (यक्)
and the verbal terminations are त,
आताम् etc. (तङ्) instead of ति,
तस् etc. In popular language the
use of an expression of this type
is called Karmakartari-Prayoga.
For details see M. Bh. on कर्मवत्कर्मणा
तुल्यक्रियः P.III.1.87. Only such
roots as are कर्मस्थक्रियक or कर्मस्थभावक
i.e. roots whose verbal activity
is noticed in the object and not
in the subject can have this Kar-
makartari-Prayoga.
कर्मव्यतिहार exchange of verbal acti-
vity; reciprocity of action; कर्मव्यति-
हार means क्रियाव्यतिहार or क्रियाविनिमय;
cf. कर्तरि कर्मव्यतिहारे P.I.3.14.; also
कर्मव्यतिहारे णच् स्त्रियाम् । व्यावक्रोशी,
व्यात्युक्षी Kāś. on P.III.3.43.
|
The roots having their agents
characterized by a reciprocity of
action take the Ātmanepada ter-
minations; cf. P. I. 3.14.
कर्मसाधन prescribed in the sense of
an object; a term used in the
Mahābhāṣya in the sense of
affixes used in the sense of
'object' as contrasted with कर्तृसाधन
or भावसाधनः e. g. the affix कि in the
word विधि, explained as विधीयते इति
विधिः or in the word भाव explained
as भाव्यते यः स भावः; cf. क्रिया चैव हि
भाव्यते, स्वभावसिद्धं तु द्रव्यम् M.Bh. on P.
I.3.1. See similarly the words
समाहार M.Bh. on II.1.51 and उपधि
M.Bh. on V.1.13.
कर्मस्थक्रिय (roots) having their verbal
activity situated in the object; e.g.
the root अव + रुध् in अवरुणद्धि गाम् or
the root कृ in करोति कटम्; cf. कर्मस्थभा-
वकानां कर्मस्थक्रियाणां च P. III.1.87
Vārt. 3.
कर्मस्थभावक (roots) having their verbal
action or happening noticed in the
object; e. g. the root आस् and शी in
बालमासयति शाययति where the function
of the root bears effect in the
Object boy and not in the move-
ments of the object as in the
sentence बालमवरुणद्धि. See कर्मस्थक्रिय
above as also M.Bh. on III.1.87
and Kaiyaṭa on the same.
कर्मादि lit. karman and others; a term
often used in the Mahābhāṣya for
kārakas or words connected with
a verbal activity which have the
object or karmakāraka mentioned
first; सुपां कर्मादयोप्यर्थाः संख्या चैव तथा
तिङाम् M.Bh, on I.4.21.
कर्मापदिष्ट operations prescribed speci-
fically for objects i. e. prescribed
in the case of objects which are
described to be functioning as the
subject to show facility of the
verbal action: e. g. the vikaraṇa
|
यक् or the affix च्णि; cf. कर्मापदिष्टाविधय:
कर्मस्थभावकानां कर्मस्थक्रियाणां वा भवन्ति ।
कर्तृस्थभावकाश्च दीपादयः M.Bh.on I.1.44.
कर्विणी A kind of svarabhakti. See
करविणी.
कर्षण extension; protraction, defined
as kālaviprakarṣa by commentators;
a peculiarity in the recital as
noticed in the pronunciation of ट्
when followed by च् , or ड् when
followed by ज् e.g. षट्चै; षड्जात. cf.
Nār. Śik. I.7.19.
कल a fault of pronunciation conse-
quent upon directing the tongue
to a place in the mouth which is
not the proper one, for the utte-
rance of a vowel; a vowel so pro-
nounced; cf. संवृतः कलो ध्मात: ... रोमश
इति cf.also निवृत्तकलादिकामवर्णस्य प्रत्यापत्तिं
वक्ष्यामि M.Bh. Āhnika 1.
कलाप (कलाप-व्याकरण) alternative name
given to the treatise on grammar
written by Sarvavarman who is
believed to have lived in the days
of the Sātavāhana kings. The trea-
tise is popularly known by the
namc Kātantra Vyākaraṇa. The
available treatise,viz. Kalpasūtras,
is much similar to the Kātantra
Sūtras having a few changes and
additions only here and there.It is
rather risky to say that Kalāpa
was an ancient system of grammar
which is referred to in the Pāṇini
Sūtra कलापिनोण् P. IV.3.108. For
details see कातन्त्र.
कलापरत्न a commentary on the kāraka
portion of the Kalāpa grammar as-
cribed to the famous commentator
Durgasiṁha.
कलापसंग्रह a commentary on the
Kalāpa Sūtras.
कलापिन् the author of the work re-
ferred to as Kālāpa in the Mah-
ābhāṣya which perhaps was a work
on grammar as the word कालाप is
|
mentioned with the word
in the Mahābhāṣya, cf. M.Bh. on
कलापिनोSणू P. IV.3. 108. Kalāpin is
mentioned as a pupil of Vaiśam-
pāyana in the Mahābhāṣya; cf.
वैशम्पायनान्तेवासी कलापी M.Bh. on P.
IV.3.104.
कल्प the tad. affix कल्पप् added to any
substantive in the sense of slightly
inferior, or almost complete; e.g.
पट्कल्पः, मृदुकल्प; cf. P.V.3.67 and
Kāśikā thereon.
कल्पन, कल्पना supposition, assumption;
cf गुणकल्पनया च भिक्षुनटसूत्रयोश्छन्दस्त्वम्
Kāś. on P. IV.3.110; cf. also अनेक-
क्लिष्टकल्पनापेक्षया अस्या उचितत्वात् Pari. Śek.
on. Pari. 94.
कल्पनालाघव brevity of thought: bre-
vity of expression: minimum
assumption. See the word लाघव.
कल्पप् tad. affix कल्प. See कल्प.
कल्पलता name of a commentary on
Bhaṭṭojī's Praudhamanoramā ' by
Kṛṣṇamiśra.
कल्मन् the same as karman or
object of an action especially
when it is not fully entitled to be
called karman, but looked upon
as karman only for the sake of
being used in the accusative case;
subordinate karman, as for instance
the cow in गां पयो दोग्धि. The term
was used by ancient grammarians;
cf. विपरीतं तु यत्कर्म तत् कल्म कवयो विदुः
M.Bh. on P.I.4.51. See कर्मन्.
कल्याणमल्ल author of the commentary
Śabdaratnadīpa on the Śabdaratna
of Hari Dīkṣita.
कल्याणसरस्वती author of the Laghus-
ārasvata, a small grammar work.
He lived in the 18th century
A. D.
कल्याणसागर author of the Haimaliṅg-
ānuśāsana-vivaraṇa, a commentary
on the Liṅgānuśāsana chapter of|
14
|
कसुन
Hemacandra's grammar. He lived
in the 16 th century A. D.
कल्याण्यादि a class of words headed
by the word कल्याणी to which the
taddhita affix एय (ढक्) is add-
ed, in the sense of 'offspring'
and, side by side, the ending इन्
(इनड्) is substituted for the last
letter of those words; e. g. काल्या-
णिनेयः, सौभागिनेयः cf. Kāś. on P.IV.
1.126.
कवर्ग the class of guttural consonants
consisting of the five consonants
क्, ख्, ग्, घ् ङ्
कविकल्पद्रुम a treatise on roots wri-
tten by Bopadeva, the son of Keś-
ava and the pupil of Dhaneśa who
lived in the time of Hemādri, the
Yādava King of Devagiri in the
thirteenth century. He has written
a short grammar work named
Mugdhabodha which has been
very popular in Bengal being
studied in many Tols or Pāṭhaś-
ālās.
कविकल्पद्रुमटीका a commentary on the
Kavikalpadruma, written by the
author ( बोपदेव ) himself. It is kno-
wn by the name Kāvyakāmad-
henu; (2) a commentary on
Kavikalpadruma by Rāmatarka-
vāgīśa.
कविचन्द्र author of a small treatise on
grammar called Sārasatvarī. He
lived in the seventeenth century
A.D. He was a resident of Darbha-
ṅgā. Jayakṛṣṇa is also given as the
name of the author of the Sārasa-
tvarī grammar and it is possible
that Jayakṛṣṇa was given the title,
or another name, Kavicandra.
कश्यप name of a writer on the
Cāndra Vyākaraṇa.
कसुन् kṛt affix अस् found in Vedic
Literature, in the sense of the
infinitive: e. g. ईश्वरो विलिखः (विलि-
|
खितुम्) cf. P. III.4.13, 17. The
word ending in this कसुन् becomes
an indeclinable: cf क्त्वातोसुन्कसुनः
P.I.1.40.
कसेन् kṛt affix असे in the sense of
the infinitive in Vedic Literature;
e. g. प्रेषे, श्रियसे्; cf. Kāś. on P. III.
4. 9.
कस्कादि a class of compound-words
headed by कस्क in which the
visarga occurring at the end of
the first member is noticed as
changed into स् against the usual
rules e. g. कस्क:, कौतस्कुतः भ्रातुष्पुत्रः,
सद्यस्कालः, धनुष्कपालम् and others; cf.
P. VIII.3.48. As this कस्कादिगण
is said to be अाकृतिगण, similar
words can be said to be in the
कस्कादिगण although they are not
actually mentioned in the गणपाठ.
का a technical term used in the
Jainendra Vyākaraṇa for the term
पञ्चमी used in Pāṇini's grammar.
काण्ड tad. affix काण्ड prescribed after
words like दूर्वा, तृण, कर्म in the
sense of समूह; cf दूर्वादिभ्यः (v.1.
पूर्वादिभ्यः) काण्डः; Kāś on P.IV. 2.51.
काण्डमायन name of an ancient writer
of a Prātiśākhya work who held
that Visarga before the consonant
स् is dropped only when स् is
followed by a surd consonant; cf.
Tai.Pr. IX. 1.
कातन्त्र name of an important small
treatise on grammar which
appears like a systematic abridg-
ment of the Aṣṭādhyāyī of Pāṇini.
It ignores many unimportant
rules of Pāṇini, adjusts many,
and altogether omits the Vedic
portion and the accent chapter of
Pāṇini. It lays down the Sūtras
in an order different from that of
Pāṇini dividing the work into
four adhyāyas dealing with
technical terms, saṁdhi rules,
|
declension, syntax compounds
noun-affixes ( taddhita affixes )
conjugation, voice and verbal
derivatives in an order. The total
number of rules is 1412 supple-
mented by many subordinate
rules or Vārttikas. The treatise
is believed to have been written
by Śarvavarman, called Sarvavar-
man or Śarva or Sarva, who is
said to have lived in the reign
of the Sātavāhana kings. The
belief that Pāṇini refers to a work
of Kalāpin in his rules IV.
3.108 and IV.3.48 and that
Patañjali's words - कालापम् and
माहवार्तिकम् support it, has not
much strength. The work was
very popular especially among
those who wanted to study spoken
Sanskrit with ease and attained
for several year a very promi-
nent place among text-books on
grammar especially in Bihar,
Bengal and Gujarat. It has got
a large number of glosses and
commentary works, many of
which are in a manuscript form at
present. Its last chapter (Catur-
tha-Adhyāya) is ascribed to Vara-
ruci. As the arrangement of
topics is entirely different from
Pāṇini's order, inspite of consi-
derable resemblance of Sūtras and
their wording, it is probable that
the work was based on Pāṇini
but composed on the models of
ancient grammarians viz. Indra,
Śākaṭāyana and others whose
works,although not available now,
were available to the author.
The grammar Kātantra is also
called Kālāpa. A comparison of
the Kātantra Sūtras and the
Kālāpa Sūtras shows that the
one is a different version of
the other. The Kātantra Gram-
|
कातन्त्रकौमुदी कातन्त्रपरिशिष्टचन्द्रिका 107
mar is also called Kaumāra as it
is said that the original 1nstruc-
tions for the grammar were re-
ceived by the author from
Kumāra or Kārttikeya. For de-
tails see Vol. VII Patañjala
Mahābhāṣya published by the
D.E. Society, Poona, page 375.
कातन्त्रकौमुदी (i) a commentary on
the Kātantra Sūtras written by
Govardhana in the 12th century.
A. D.; (2) a commentary on the
Kātantra Sūtras ascribed to Gaṅ-
geśaśarman.
कातन्त्रचन्द्रिका a gloss on the com-
mentary of Vararuci on the कातन्त्रसूत्र
ascribed to Hari Dīkṣita of the
17th century if this Hari Dīkṣita
is the same as the author of the
Śabdaratna.
कातन्त्रधातुवृत्ति ascribed to Durga-
siṁha, the famous commentator
of the Kātantra Sūtras who lived
in the ninth or the tenth century.
कातन्त्रधातुवृत्तिटीका a commentary
ascribed to Ramanātha and call-
ed Manoramā on the Kātantra-
dhātuvṛtti of Durgasiṁha. See
कातन्त्रधातुवृत्ति above.
कातन्त्रपञ्जिका a name usually given to
a compendium of the type of Viva-
raṇa or gloss written on the Kā-
tantra Sūtras. The gloss written by
Durgasiṁha on the famous com-
mentary on the Kātantra Sūtras by
Durgasiṁha ( the same as the
the famous Durgasiṁha or
another of the same name )
known as दौर्गसिंही वृत्ति is called
Kātantra Pañjika or Kātantra-
vivaraṇa. A scholar of Kātantra
grammar by name Kuśala has
written a Pañjika on दुर्गसिंहृ's वृत्ति
which is named प्रदीप, Another
scholar, Trivikrama has written a
gloss named Uddyota.
|
कातन्त्रपरिभाषापाठ name given to a
text consisting of Paribhāṣāsūtras,
believed to have been written by
the Sūtrakāra himself as a supple-
mentary portion to the main
grammar. Many such lists of Pari-
bhāṣāsūtras are available, mostly
in manuscript form, containing
more than a hundred Sūtras divi-
ded into two main groups-the
Paribhāṣā sūtras and the Balābala-
sūtras. See परिभाषासंग्रह ed. by B. O.
R. I. Poona.
कातन्त्रपरिभाषावृत्ति (1) name of a gloss
on the Paribhāṣāpaṭha written
by Bhāvamiśra, probably a Mai-
thila Pandit whose date is not
known. He has explained 62 Pari-
bhāṣās deriving many of them from
the Kātantra Sūtras. The work
seems to be based on the Paribhāṣā
works by Vyāḍi and others on the
system of Pāṇini, suitable changes
having been made by the writer
with a view to present the work as
belonging to the Kātantra school;
(2) name of a gloss on the Pari-
bhāṣāpaṭha of the Kātantra school
explaining 65 Paribhāṣās. No name
of the author is found in the Poona
manuscript. The India Office
Library copy has given Durgasiṁha
as the author's name; but it is
doubted whether Durgasiṁha was
the author of it. See परिभाषासंग्रह ed.
by B. O. R. I. Poona.
कातन्त्रपरिशिष्ट ascribed to Śrīpatidatta,
whose date is not known; from a
number of glosses written on this
work, it appears that the work
was once very popular among
students of the Kātantra School.
कातन्त्रपरिशिष्टचन्द्रिका a gloss on the
Kātantra-Pariśiṣṭa ascribed to a
scholar named Ramadāsa-cakra-
vartin who has written another...
|
कातन्त्रपरिशिष्टटीका कातन्त्रोत्तर 108
work also named Kātantravyā-
khyāsāra.
कातन्त्रपरिशिष्टटीका a gloss on the
Kātantra-Pariśiṣṭa written by a
Kātantra scholar Puṇḍarīkākṣa.
कातन्त्रपरिशिष्टप्रद्योत a gloss on the
Kātantrapariśiṣṭa by Goyicandra
in the twelfth century.
कातन्त्रपरिशिष्टसिद्धान्तरत्नाङ्कुर a gloss
on the Kātantra-pariśiṣṭa by Śiva-
rāmendra, who is believed to have
written a gloss on the Sūtras of
Pāṇini also.
कातन्त्रप्रक्रिया a name given to the Kā-
tantra Sūtras which were written
in the original form as a Pra-
kriyāgrantha or a work discussing
the various topics such as alpha-
bet, euphonic rules, declension,
derivatives from nouns, syntax,
conjugation derivatives from roots
etc. etc.
कातन्त्रप्रदीप a grammar work written
by a scholar named Kuśala on the
Kātantrasūtravṛtti by Durgasiṁha.
See कातन्त्रपञ्जिका.
कातन्त्रबालबोधिनी a short explanatory
gloss on the Kātantra Sūtras by
Jagaddhara of Kashmir who lived
in the fourteenth century and who
wrote a work on grammar called
Apaśabdanirākaraṇa.
कातन्त्ररहस्य a work on the Kātantra
Sūtras ascribed to Ramānātha
Vidyāvācaspati of the sixteenth
century A. D.
कातन्त्ररूपमाला a work, explaining the
various forms of nouns and verbs
according to the rules of the
Kātantra grammar, ascribed to
Bhāvasena of the fifteenth century.
कातन्त्रलघुवृत्ति a short gloss on the
Kātantra Sūtras ascribed to a
scholar named Chucchukabhaṭṭa.
कातन्त्रविवरण a commentary on the
|
Kātantravistara of Vardhamāna
by Pṛthvīdhara who lived in the
fifteenth century A. D.
कातन्त्रविस्तर a famous work on the
Kātantra Grammar written by
Vardhamāna a Jain Scholar of the
twelfth century who is believed to
be the same as the author of the
well-known work Gaṇaratna-
mahodadhi.
कातन्त्रवृत्ति name of the earliest com-
mentary on the Kātantra Sūtras
ascribed to Durgasiṁha. The
commentary was once very popu-
lar as is shown by a number of
explanatory commentaries written
upon it, one of which is believed to
have been written by Durgasiṁha
himself. See Durgasiṁha.
कातन्त्रवृत्तिटिप्पणी a gloss on दौर्गसिंहीवृत्ति
written by Guṇakīrti in the four-
teenth century A.D.
कातन्त्रवृत्तिटीका a commentary on
Durgasiṁha's Kātantravṛrtti by
Mokṣeśvara in the fifteenth cen-
tury A.D.
कातन्त्रवृत्तिव्याख्या named Aṣṭamaṅ-
galā on Durgasiṁha's Kātantra-
vṛtti written by Rāmakiśora Cakr-
avartin who is believed to have
written a grammatical work शाब्दबो-
धप्रकाशिका.
कातन्त्रव्याख्यासार a work of the type
of a summary written by Rāma-
dāsa Cakravartin of the twelfth
century.
कातन्त्रसूत्रवृत्ति an old Vṛtti on the
Kātantra Sūtras ascribed to Vara-
ruci who is, of course, different
from Vararuci Kātyāyana. The
Vṛtti appears to have been occu-
pying a position similar to that of
Durgasiṁha.
कातन्त्रोत्तर a treatise on the Kātantra
Grammar believed to have been
written by Vidyānanda.
|
कात्थक्य an ancient writer of Nirukta
quoted by Yāska in his Nirukta.
कात्य (i) another name sometimes
given to Katyāyana to whom is
ascribed the composition of the
Vārttikas on Pāṇini-sūtras; (2) an
ancient writer Kātya quoted as
a lexicographer by Kṣīrasvāmin,
Hemacandra and other writers.
कात्यायन the well-known author of the
Vārttikas on the sūtras of Pāṇini.
He is also believed to be the
author of the Vājasaneyi Prāti-
śākhya and many sūtra works
named after him. He is believed
to be a resident of South India on
the strength of the remark प्रियतद्धिता
दाक्षिणात्याः made by Patañjali in
connection with the statement 'यथा
लौकिकवैदिकेषु' which is looked upon as
Kātyāyana's Vārttika. Some schol-
ars say that Vararuci was also ano-
ther name given to him, in which
case the Vārttikakāra Vararuci
Kātyāyana has to be looked upon
as different from the subsequent
writer named Vararuci to whom
some works on Prakrit and Kātan-
tra grammar are ascribed. For
details see Mahābhāṣya Vol. VII.
pages I93-223 published by the D.
E.Society, Poona.See also वार्तिकपाठ
below.
कानच् affix अान forming perfect part-
ciples which are mostly seen in
Vedic Literature. The affix कानच्
is technically a substitute for the
लिट् affix. Nouns ending in कानच्
govern the accusative case of the
nouns connected with them: e.g.
सोमं सुषुवाणः; cf. P. III.3.106 and
P.II.3.69.
काम् augment आम् applied to तूष्णीम्
just as अकच् is applied, e.g.; आसितव्यं
किल तूष्णीकाम M. Bh. on V.3.72.
कामचार option; permission to do as
|
desired liberty of applying any of
the rules of grammar that present
themselves; cf. तत्र कामचारो गृह्यमाणेन
वा विभक्तिं विशेषयितुं अङ्गेन वा M. Bh. on
P.I.1.27 Vārt. 6.
कामधेनु abridgment of काव्यकामधेनु of
Bopadeva; the word is also used
as a short form for काव्यकामधेनु.
कामधेनुसुधारस a commentary on the
Kāvyakāmadhenu by Ananta, son
of Cintāmaṇi who lived in the
sixteenth century A. D.
कामम् optionally; at will; cf. काममति-
दिश्यतांं वा M. Bh. on I.1.57.
काम्यच् affix in the sense of 'desiring
for oneself' applied to nouns to
form denominative roots; e.g.
पुत्रकाम्यति; cf. काम्यच्च् P. III.1. 9.
कार an affix, given in the Prātiśākhya
works and,by Kātyāyana also in his
Vārttika, which is added to a letter
or a phonetic element for conve-
nience of mention; e.g. इकारः, उकारः ;
cf. वर्णः कारोत्तरो वर्णाख्या; वर्णकारौ निर्देशकौ
Tai. Pra.I. 16: XXII.4.;cf. also V.
Pr. 1.37. It is also applied to sylla-
bles or words in a similar way to
indicate the phonetic element of
the word as apart from the sense
of the word: e. g.' यत एवकारस्तती-
न्यत्रावधारणम् Vyak. Paribhāṣā , cf.
also the words वकार:, हिंकारः: (2)
additional purpose served by a
word such as an adhikāra word;
cf. अधिकः कारः , पूर्वविप्रतिषेघा न पठितव्या
भवन्ति M. Bh. on P.I.3.11.
कारक lit. doer of an action. The
word is used in the technical sense ;
1 of ’instrument of action'; cf कारक-
शब्दश्च निमित्तपर्यायः । कारकं हेतुरिति नार्था-
न्तरम् । कस्य हेतुः । क्रियायाः Kāś. on P.I.
4.23: cf. also कारक इति संज्ञानिर्देशः ।
साधकं निर्वर्तकं कारकसंज्ञं भवति । M.Bh. on
P. I. 4.28. The word 'kāraka' in
short, means 'the capacity in which
a thing becomes instrumental in
|
bringing about an action'. This
capacity is looked upon as the
sense of the case-affixes which
express it. There are six kārakas
given in all grammar treatises
अपादान, संप्रदान, अधिकरण, करण , कर्मन् and
कर्तृ to express which the case affixes
or Vibhaktis पञ्चमी, चतुर्थी, सप्तमी, तृतीया,
द्वितीया and प्रथमा are respectively
used which, hence, are called
Kārakavibhaktis as contrasted with
Upapadavibhaktis, which show a
relation between two substantives
and hence are looked upon as
weaker than the Kārakavibhaktis;
cf. उपपदविभक्तेः कारकविभक्तिर्बलीयसी Pari.
Śek. Pari.94. The topic explaining
Kārakavibhaktis is looked upon as
a very important and difficult
chapter in treatises of grammar
and there are several small com-
pendiums written by scholars deal-
ing with kārakas only. For the
topic of Kārakas see P. I. 4.23 to
55, Kat, II. 4.8-42, Vyākaraṇa
Mahābhāṣya Vol. VII. pp.262-264
published by the D. E. Society,
Poona.
कारककारिका possibly another name
for the treatise on Kārakas known
as कारकचक्र written by Puruṣotta-
madeva the reputed grammarian
of Bengal who lived in the latter
half of the twelfth century A. D.
See कारकचक्र.
कारककौमुदी a work on the Kātantra
grammar discussing the Kāraka
portion.
कारकखण्डनमण्डन also called षट्कारक-
खण्डनमण्डन which is a portion of the
author's bigger work named त्रिलो-
चनचन्द्रिका. The work is a discourse
on the six kārakas written by
Maṇikaṇṭha, a grammarian of the
Kātantra school. He has also
written another treatise named
Kārakavicāra
|
कारकचक्र (I) written by Puruṣotta
madeva a reputed grammarian
of Bengal who wrote many works
on grammar of which the Bhasa.
vrtti, the Paribhāṣāvṛtti and Jñ
āpakasamuccya deserve a special
mention. The verse portion of
the Kārakacakra of which the
prose portion appears like a
commentary might be bearing
the name Kārakakaumudī.
कारकटीका a work on Kārakas as-
cribed to Bhairava.
कारकतत्त्व a treatise on the topic of
Kārakas written by Cakrapāṇi-
śeṣa, belonging to the famous
Śeṣa family of grammarians, who
lived in the seventeenth century
A. D.
कारकनिर्णय a work discussing the
various Kārakas from the
Naiyāyika view-point written by
the well-known Naiyāyika, Gadā-
dhara Chakravartin of Bengal,
who was a pupil of Jagadīśa and
who fourished in the 16th cen-
tury A. D. He is looked upon as
one of the greatest scholars of
Nyāyaśāstra. His main literary
work was in the field of Nyāya-
śāstra on which he has written
several treatises.
कारकपरिच्छेद a work dealing with
Kārakas ascribed to Rudrabhaṭṭa.
कारकपाद name given by Śivadeva
and other grammarians to the
fourth pāda of the first adhyāya
of Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī which be-
gins with the Sūtra कारके I. 4. 1
and which deals with the Kāra-
kas or auxiliaries of action.
कारकवाद (1) a treatise discussing the
several Kārakas, written by
Kṛṣṇaśāstri Ārade a famous Nai-
yāyika of Benares who lived in
the eighteenth century A. D; (2)
|
a treatise on syntax written by
Jayarāmabhaṭṭācārya which is
called कारकविवेक also, which see
below.
कारकविचार a work on Kārakas as-
cribed to Maṇikaṇṭha. See Kāra-
kakhaṇḍanamaṇḍana above.
कारकविभक्ति case affix governed by
a verb or verbal derivative as
contrasted with उपपदविभक्ति a case
affix governed by a noun, not
possessing any verbal activity.
See the word कारक above, See
also the word उपपदविभक्ति.
कारकविभक्तिबलीयस्त्व the dictum that
a Kāraka case is stronger than
an Upapada case,e. g. the accu-
sative case as required by the
word नमस्कृत्य,which is stronger than
the dative case as required by the
word नमः. Hence the word मुनित्रयं
has to be used in the sentence :
मुनित्रयं नमस्कृत्य and not the word
मुनित्रयाय cf. उपपदविभक्तेः कारकविभक्ति-
र्बलीयसी Pari. Śek. Pari. 94.
कारकविलास an anonymous elemen-
tary work on syntax explaining
the nature and function of the
six Kārakas.
कारकविवेक known as कारकवाद also;
a short work on the meaning and
relation of words written by Jaya-
rāmabhaṭṭācārya who lived in the
beginning of the eighteenth cen-
tury. The work forms the con-
cluding portion of a larger work
called कारकविवेक which was written
by शिरोमणिभट्टाचार्य.. The work
कारकवाद has a short commentary
written by the author himself.
कारकव्याख्या the same as कारकवादव्याख्या
written by जयरामभट्टाचार्य. See कारक-
विवेक.
कारिका a verse or a line or lines in
metrical form giving the gist of
the explanation of a topic; cf.
|
संक्षिप्तसूत्रबह्वर्थसूचकः श्लोकः कारिका Pada-
vyavasthāsūtrakārikā of Udaya-
kīrti.
कारित (1) ancient term for the
causal Vikaraṇa, (णिच् in Pāṇini's
grammar and इन् in Kātantra);
(2) causal or causative as applied
to roots ending in णिच् or words
derived from such roots called
also 'ṇyanta' by the followers of
Pāṇini's grammar; cf. इन् कारितं
धात्वर्थे Kāt. III.2.9, explained as
धात्वर्थक्रियानाम्न इन् परो भवति धात्वर्थे स च
कारितसंज्ञक;।
कार्तकौजपादि a class of words headed
by the word कार्तकौजप, which are
all dvandva compounds, and
which have their first member
retaining its own accent; e. g.
कार्तकौजपौ, आवन्त्यश्मकाः etc. cf. Kāś.
on P.VI.2.37.
कार्तिकेय the original instructor of the
Kātantra or Kālāpa Grammar,
to Śarvavarman who composed
the Sūtras according to inspira-
tion received by him. The Kā-
tantra, hence, has also got the
name Kaumara Vyākaraṇa.
कार्मनामिक the word is found used in
Yāska's Nirukta as an adjective to
the word संस्कार where it means
- belonging to nouns derived from
roofs (कर्मनाम)"like पाचक,कर्षक etc.The
changes undergone by the roots in
the formation of such words i. e.
words showing action are termed
कार्मनामिकसंस्कार; cf. कर्मकृतं नाम कर्मनाम।
तस्मिन् भवः कार्मनामिकः Durgavṛtti on
Nir. I.13.
कार्य(l) brought.into existence by
activity (क्रियया निर्वृत्तं कार्यम् ) as oppo-
sed to नित्य eternal; cf. एके वर्णाञ्
शाश्वतिकान् न कार्यान् R.Pr. XIII.4 cf.
also ननु च यस्यापि कार्याः ( शब्दाः ) तस्यापि
पूजार्थम् M. Bh. on I.1.44 Vārt.
17;(2) which should be done, used
</poem>
|
in connection with a grammatical
operation: cf. कार्य एत्वे सयमीकारमाहुः ।|
अभैष्म इत्येतस्य स्थाने अभयीष्मेति । R.Pr.
XIV.16; cf. also विप्रतिषेधे परं कार्यम् P.
I.4.2; (3) a grammatical opera-
tion as for instance in the phrases
द्विकार्ययोगे, त्रिकार्ययोगे etc.; cf. also
गौणमुख्ययोर्मुख्ये कार्यसंप्रत्ययः Par. Śek.
Pari. 15;(4) object of a transitive
verb: cf. शेषः कार्ये Śāk.
कार्यकाल along with the operation; cf.
कार्यकालं संज्ञापरिभाषम् , rules laying
down technical terms and regulat-
ing rules are to be interpreted
along with the rules that prescribe
or enjoin operations ( provided
the technical terms occur in those
rules, or, the regulating rules con-
cern those rules). See Pari. Śek.
Pari 3.
कार्यकालपरिभाषा one of the important
Paribhāṣā, regarding the applica-
tion of the Paribhāṣā rules. See
कायैकाल. For details see Par. Śek.
Pari. 3.
कार्यातिदेश looking upon the substi-
tute as the very original for the
sake of operations that are caused
by the presence of the original;the
word is used in contrast with रूपातिदेश
where actually the original is re-
stored in the place of the substitute
on certain conditions. For details
see Mahābhāṣya on द्विर्वचनेचि P.
1.1.59.
कार्यिन् the word or wording that
undergoes the operation; cf. सतो हि
कार्यिणः कार्येण भवितव्यम् M. Bh. on I.1.
1. Vārt. 7, also कार्यमनुभवन् हि कार्यो
निमित्ततया नाश्रीयते Par. Śek. Pari. 10.
काल notion of time created by differ-
ent contacts made by a thing with
other things one after another.
Time required for the utterance of
a short vowel is taken as a unit of
time which is called मात्रा or
|
कालमात्रा, lit. measurement of time;
(2) degree of a vowel, the vowels
being looked upon as possessed of
three degrees ह्रस्व,दीर्घ,& प्लुत measur-
ed respectively by one, two and
three mātrās; cf. ऊकालोSझ्रस्वदीर्घप्लुतः
P.I.2.27; (3) time notion in gene-
ral, expressed in connection with
an activity in three ways past
(भूत), present (वर्तमान), and future
(भविष्यत्) to show which the terms
भूता, वर्तमाना and भविष्यन्ती were used
by ancient grammarians; cf the
words पूर्वकाल, उत्तरकाल; also cf. पाणि-
न्युपज्ञमकालकं व्याकरणम् Kāś. on P. II.
4.21 ; (4) place of recital ( पाठदेश )
depending on the time of recital,
cf. न परकालः पूर्वकाले पुनः (V.Pr.III. 3)
a dictum similar to Pāṇini's पूर्वत्रा-
सिद्धम् P. VIII.2.1.
कालदुष्ट a word not sanctioned by
rules of grammar. The word pro-
bably refers to the corruption tak-
ing place in connection with the
use of a word on account of lapse
of time: cf. कालदुष्टा अपशब्दाः Durgh.
Vr. on II.2.6.
कालनिदर्शक signifying time; cf. काल-
निदर्शकाः प्रत्यया एते लुट् लिट् लट् इत्यादयः.
कालभेद difference in the time of
utterance; cf. किमुच्यते विवारभेदादिति ।
न पुनः कालभेदादपि । M. Bh. on Siva
Sutra 1.
कालव्यवाय interval of time: cf. अान्य-
भाव्यं तु कालशब्दव्यवायात् । कालव्यवायात् ।
दण्ड अग्रम् । M. Bh. on Śiva sūtra 1.
कालसामान्य time in general; unspeci-
fied time; cf. वर्तमाने लडुक्तः कालसामान्ये
न प्राप्नोति Kāś. on P.III.3.142.
काव्यकामधेनु name of the comm-
entary by Bopadeva on his own
work कविकल्पद्रुम. See कविकल्पद्रुम.
काशकृत्स्न (l)an ancient grammarian
and philosopher referred to in the
Mahābhāṣya; (2) the work on
grammar by Kāśakṛtsna; cf.पाणिनिना
|
प्रोक्तं पाणिनीयम् । आपिशलम् । काशकृत्स्नम् ।
M.Bh. on I.1. Āhnika 1.
काशादि a class of words headed by
the word काश to which the taddhita
affix इल is affixed in the four senses
stated in P.IV.2.67-70 e.g. काशिलम्,
कर्दमिलम् etc.; cf. Kāś. on P.IV.2.80.
काशिका (1) name given to the reputed
gloss (वृत्ति) on the Sūtras of Pāṇini
written by the joint authors.Jayā-
ditya and Vāmana in the 7th
century A.D. Nothing definitely can
be said as to which portion was
written by Jayāditya and which by
Vamana, or the whole work was
jointly written. Some scholars
believe that the work was called
Kāśikā as it was written in the
city of Kāśī and that the gloss
on the first five Adhyāyas was
written by Jayāditya and that on
the last three by Vāmana. Although
it is written in a scholarly way,
the work forms an excellent help
to beginners to understand the
sense of the pithy Sūtra of Pāṇini.
The work has not only deserved
but obtained and maintained a
very prominent position among stu-
dents and scholars of Pāṇini's gram-
mar in spite of other works like the
Bhāṣāvṛtti, the Prakriyā Kaumudi,
the Siddhānta Kaumudi and others
written by equally learned scholars.
Its wording is based almost on the
Mahābhāṣya which it has followed,
avoiding, of course, the scholarly
disquisitions occurring here and
there in the Mahābhāṣya. It ap-
pears that many commentary
works were written on it, the well-
known among them being the Kāśi-
kāvivaraṇapañjikā or Nyāsa written
by Jinendrabuddhi and the Pada-
mañjari by Haradatta. For details
see Vyākaraṇamahābhāṣya Vol.VII
pp 286-87 published by the D. E.
15
|
Society, Poona. ( 2 ) The name
Kāśikā is sometimes found given
to their commentaries on sta-
ndard works of Sanskrit Grammar
by scholars, as possibly they were
written at Kāśī; as for instance,
(a) Kāśikā on Vaiyākaraṇabhūṣaṇa-
sāra by Hari Dīkṣita, and ( b )
Kāśikā on Paribhāṣenduśekhara by
Vaidyanātha Pāyaguṇḍe.
काशिकाविवरणपञ्जिका also called Nyāsa,
the well-known commentary
written by Jinendrabuddhi on the
Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana.
See Kāśikā above.
काशिकावृत्तिसार a commentary on the
Kāśikāvṛtti named अमृतसूति by
Vāraṇāvateśa-śāstrin.
काश्यप name of an ancient gramma-
rian quoted by Pāṇini, possibly an
author of some Prātiśākhya work
now lost.
काश्यपीवृत्ति name of a gloss on the
Cāndra Vyākaraṇa.
काश्यादि a class of words headed by
the words काशि, चेदि and others to
which the taddhita affixes ठञ् and
ञिठ are added in the miscellaneous
senses; e.g. काशिकी, काशिका; वैदिकी,
वैदिका etc.; cf. Kāś. on P. IV. 2.116.
The fem. afix ई is applied when
the affix ठञ् is added to the word
काशि; cf. P. IV. 1.15.
काष्ठादि a class of words headed by
the word काष्ठ after which a word
standing as a second member in a
compound gets the grave accent
for it,e. g. काष्ठाध्यापकः, परमाध्यापक etc.
cf. P. VIII.1.67.
कि (I) kṛt affix इ prescribed after धु
roots with a prefix attached;e.g.प्रदिः
प्रधिः cf. P.III.3.92, 93; (2) kṛt affix इ
looked upon as a perfect termina-
tion and, hence, causing reduplica-
tion and accusative case of the
noun connected, found in Vedic
|
Literature added to roots ending in
अा, the root ऋ, and the roots गम्,
हन् and जन्; e.g. पपि; सोमं, जगुरिः, जग्मिः
etc., cf. P. III.2.171: (2) a term
used in the Jainendra Vyākaraṇa
for the term संबुद्वि.
किंवृत्त a form derived from the pro-
noun किम्; cf. किमो वृत्तं किंवृत्तम् । किंवृत्त-
ग्रहणेन तद्विभक्त्यन्तं प्रतीयाड्डतरडतमौ च। Kāś.
on P. VIII.1.48.
किंशुलकादि a class of words headed
by the word किंशुलक, which get their
final vowel lengthened when the
word गिरि is placed after them as
a second member of a compound,
provided the word so formed is
used as a proper noun; e. g. किंशुल-
कागिरिः, अञ्जनागिरिः; cf. Kāś. on P.
VI.3.117.
कित् (l) marked with the mute letter
क् which is applied by Pāṇini to
affixes, for preventing guṇa and
vṛddhi substitutes to the pre-
ceding इक् vowel (इ, उ, ऋ or लृ);
cf.क्ङिति च, Pāṇ. I.1.5; (2) con-
sidered or looked upon as marked
with mute indicatory क् for pre-
venting guna; cf. असंयोगाल्लिट् कित्
and the following P.I.2.5 etc.
The affixes of the first type are for
instance क्त, क्त्वा, क्तिन् and others.
The affixes of the second type are
given mainly in the second pada of
the first Adhyāya by Pāṇini. Be-
sides the prevention of guṇa and
wrddhi, affixes marked with कु or
affixes called कित्, cause Saṁprasā-
raṇa (see P. VI.1.15,16), elision
of the penultimate न् (P.VI.4.24),
elision of the penultimate vowel
(P. VI.4.98,100), lengthening of
the vowel (VI.4.15), substitution
of ऊ (VI.4.19,21), elision of the
final nasal (VI. 4.37), substitution
of अI (VI.4.42). The taddhita
affixes which are marked with
|
mute क् cause the Vṛddhi substi-
tute for the first vowel in the word
to which they are added.
कित्करण marking with the mute letter
क्, or looking upon as marked
with mute क् for purposes men-
tioned above; ( see कित् above ).
The word is often used in the
Mahābhāṣya; see M.Bh. on I. 1.
3, 5, 46; I.2.5, etc.
किन kṛt affix इ prescribed along with
कि. See कि above. The affix किन्
causes the acute accent on the
first vowel of the word ending
with it, while the affix ki ( इ ) has
itself the acute accent on its
vowel इ.
किरादि a class of roots headed by the
root कॄ, viz. the five roots कॄ, गॄ, दृ,
धृ and प्रच्छ् after which the desidera-
tive sign, i.e. the affix सन्, gets the
augment इ (इट्); e.g. चिकरिषति,
पिप्रच्छिषति: cf. Kāś. on P.VII.2.75.
किशरादि, किसरादि a class of words
headed by किसर meaning some kind
of scent, which get the taddhita
affix इक (ष्टन्) applied to them
when the word so formed means
'a dealer of that thing;' e.g.
किशारिकः, किशारिकी cf; Kāś. on P.
IV.4.53.
कील्हार्न् Kielhorn F., a sound scholar
of Sanskrit Grammar who brought
out excellent editions of the Pātañj-
ala Mahābhāṣya and the Paribhāṣ-
enduśekhara and wrote an essay
on the Vārttikas of Kātyāyana. For
details see Pātañjala Mahābhāṣya
Vol VII.p.40, D. E society edition,
Poona.
कु (l) guttural class of consonants,
ie the consonants क्, ख्, ग्, घ्, ङ्
The vowel उ added to क्, signifies
the class of क्. e. g. चजोः कु घिण्यतो,
VII.3.52, कुहोश्चुः VII.4.62, चोः कुः
|
VIII.2.30, किन्प्रत्ययस्य कुः; VIII.2.62;
cf. अणुदित्सवर्णस्य चाप्रत्ययः P.I.1.69; (2)
substitute कु for किम् cf. P.VII.2.
104.
कुक् augment क् (1) added to ङ् at
the end of a word before a sibi-
lant letter; e.g प्राङ्क्शेते cf. P.VIII.
3.28; (2) added to the words वात
and अतीसार before the affix इन्, cf.
P.V.2.129; (3) added to words
of the नड group before the tad.
affix छ (ईय), e.g. नडकीयम्, प्लक्षकीयम्
cf. P.IV.2.91.
कुङ्कुमविकाश a commentary by Siva-
Bhaṭṭa on Jinendrabuddhi's Kāśi-
kāvivaraṇapañjikā which is known
popularly as Nyāsa.
कुञ्चिका ( 1 ) a commentary on
Nāgeśa's Laghūmañjūṣā by Krṣṇa-
miśra; ( 2 ) a commentary on
Nāgeśa's Paribhāṣenduśekhara by
Durbalācārya.
कुञ्जादि a class of words headed by कुञ्ज
to which the taddhita affix अायन
(च्फञ्) is applied in the sense of गोत्र
i. e. grandchildren etc e. g. कौञ्जा-
यनाः cf. Kāś, on P.IV.1.9.
कुटादि a group of roots headed by the
root कुट् of the VIth conjugation after
which an affix which is neither ञित्
nor णित् becomes ङित्,and as a result
prevents the substitution of गुण or
वृद्धि for the preceding vowel e. g.
कुटिता, कुटितुम् । cf. गाङ्कुटादिभ्योञ्णिन्डित्
I.2.1.
कुटादिपाद name given by Sīradeva
and later grammarians to the sec-
ond pāda of the first adhyāya of
Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī, as the pāda
begins with the Sūtra गाङ्कुटादिभ्यो
ञ्णिन्डित् P.I.2.1.
कुटारच् tad. affix कुटार् added to अव,
e.g, अवकुटारम्: cf P. V.2.30.
कुणप् tad. affix कुण added to words
of पीलु group in the sense of 'ripen-
|
ed condition';e.g.पीलुकुणः=पीलूनां पाकः;
cf. P.V.2.24.
कुणरवाडव name of an ancient gran-
marian who lived possibly after
Pāṇini and before Patañjali and
who is referred to in the Mahā-
bhāṣya as giving an alternative
forms for the standard form of cer-
tain words; cf. कुणरवाडवस्त्वाह नैषां शंकरा
शंगरैषा M.Bh. on III.2.14; cf also
कुणरवस्त्वाह नैष वहीनरः । कस्तर्हि । विहीनर
एषः M. Bh. on VII.3.1.
कुणि name of an ancient Vṛttikāra
the Sūtras of Pāṇini, mentioned in
their works by Kaiyata and Hara-
datta; cf. Kaiyaṭa's Pradīpa on P.
I.1.74, also Padamañjarī on I.1.1
कुत्व substitution of the consonants of
the क् class or guttural consonants
कुप्पुशास्त्रिन् a famous grammarian of
the eighteenth century who wrote
some works on grammar of which
the परिभाषाभास्कर is an independent
treatise on Paribhāṣās.
कुमत् a word containing a guttural
letter in it;.cf. कुमति च P. VIII.4.
13.
कुमार (1) Kārtikeya who is believed
to havegiven inspiration to the Kat-
antra-sūtrakāra to write the Kātan-
tra-sūtras; (2) named Viṣṇumitra
who wrote a commentary on the
ऋक्प्रातिशाख्य,
कुमारीस्तनयुगाकृति a phrase used in
the gloss on the कातन्त्र by Durga-
siṁha to give along with the defi-
nition of र्विसर्जनीय or विसर्ग a graphic
description of it as shown in script
cf. Kāt, I.1.16 com.
कुमुदादि a class of words (१) consisting
of कुमुद, शर्करा, न्यग्रोध etc. to which the
taddhita affix ठक् is applied in the
four senses given in P.IV.2.67-70;
e.g. कुमुदिकम्,शर्करिकम् etc(2) consist-
ing of कुमुद गोमय, रथकार etc to which
|
{{RunningHeader|left= कुम्भपद्यादि|center=| 116right=कृत}'}
the taddhita affix इक ( ठक् ) is
applied in the senses referred to
in (I): e.g. कौमुदिकम् , राथकारिकम् etc.;
cf. Kāś, on P.IV.2.80.
कुम्भपद्यादि a class of words headed
by कुम्भपदी in which the word पाद
at the end of the compound is
changed into पाद् and further chan-
ged into पद् before the feminine
affix ई; e.g. कुम्भपदी, शतपदी, द्रुपदी,
पञ्चपदी etc.; cf Kāś. on P. V.4.138,
139.
कुरच् kṛt. affix उर applied to the roots
विद्, भिद् and छिद्: e.g. विदुर: । भिदुरम् !
छिदुरम् । cf. Kāś.on P.III.2.162.
कुर्वत् a term found in the Brāhmaṇa
works and used by ancient gram-
marians for the 'present tense'.
कुर्वद्रूप effective or efficient, as oppo-
sed to dormant, as applied to निमित्त
(cause); cf.निमित्तशब्दोयमस्ति योग्यतामात्रे ।
कुसुलस्थेष्वपि बीजेषु वक्तारो भवन्ति अङ्कुरनि-
मित्तान्येतानीति अस्ति च कुर्वद्रूपे । Pada-
mañjarī on P.VII.2.36.
कुर्वादि a class of words headed by the
word कुरु to which the taddhita
affix य ( ण्य ) is added in the sense
of अपत्य or descendant; e.g. कौरव्यः
गार्ग्यः etc.; cf. Kāś, on P.IV.1.51.
कुर्विणी a kind of svarabhakti; see
कर्विणी.
कुलालादि a class of words headed by
the word कुलाल to which the tadd-
hita affix अक ( वुञ्) is applied in
the sense of 'made by', provided
the word so formed is used as a
proper noun; e g.कौलालकम् , वारुडकम्;
cf. Kāś. on P.IV.3.118.
कुव्यवाय intervention by a letter of
the guttural class;cf. कुव्यवाये हादेशेषु
प्रतिषेधो वक्तव्यः । प्रयोजनं वृत्रघ्नः, स्रुघ्नः
प्राघानीति, P.VIII.4.2 Vārt.4,5.
कुशल name of a grammarian who
wrote a commentary on the Kāta-
ntra Vyākaraṇa; see कातन्त्रपञ्जिक्रा.
|
कृञ् (l) root कृ in the general sense
of activity; (2) pratyāhāra or short
form for the three roots कृ, भू and
अस्, cf. कृञ् चानुप्रयुज्यते लिटि P.II.1.40.
कृत् lit. activity; a term used in the
grammars of Pāṇini and others for
affixes applied to roots to form
verbal derivatives; cf. कृदतिङ् । धातोः
( ३ ।१।९१ ) इत्यधिकारे तिङ्कवर्जितः प्रत्ययः कृत्
स्यात् । Kāś. on III.1.93, The kṛt
affixes are given exhaustively by
Pāṇini in Sūtras III.1.91 to III.4.
I17. कृत् and तद्धित appear to be the
ancient Pre-Pāṇinian terms used
in the Nirukta and the Prātiśākhya
works in the respective senses of
root-born and noun-born words
( कृदन्त and तद्धितान्त according to
Pāṇini's terminology), and not in
the sense of mere affixes; cf.
सन्त्यल्पप्रयोगाः कृतोप्यैकपदिकाः Nir. I.14:
अथापि भाषिकेभ्यो धातुभ्यो नैगमाः कृतो भाष्यन्ते
Nir. II.2; तिङ्कृत्तद्धितसमासा: शब्दमयम्
V.Pr. I.27; also cf. V.Pr. VI.4.
Patañjali and later grammarians
have used the word कृत् in the sense
of कृदन्त; cf. गतिकारकोपपदानां कृद्भिः सह
समासवचनं प्राक् सुबुत्पत्तेः Pari Śek.Pari.75.
The kṛt affixes are given by Pāṇini
in the senses of the different Kāra-
kas अपादान, संप्रदान, करण, अाधकरण, कर्म
and कर्तृ, stating in general terms
that if no other sense is assigned to
a kṛt affix it should be understood
that कर्ता or the agent of the verbal
activity is the sense; cf. कर्तरि कृत् ।
येष्वर्थनिर्देशो नास्ति तत्रेदमुपतिष्ठते Kāś. on
III.4.67. The activity element
possessed by the root lies generally
dormant in the verbal derivative
nouns; cf. कृदभिहितो भावो द्रव्यवद्भवति,
क्रियावदपि । M.Bh.on V.4.19 and VI.
2.139
कृत (१) a term used by ancient
grammarians in the sense of 'past
tense';(2) effected, done. The word
|
कृताकृतप्रसङ्गि कृदभिहित 117
is mostly used in this sense in
grammar.works;e.g. किं तेन कृतं स्यात् ;
नानुबन्धकृतमनेकात्त्वम् Par. Śek.Pari. 6.
कृताकृतप्रसङ्गि a definition of the term
नित्य in the sense of a rule which
occurs after certain another rule
is applied as well as before
that rule is applied: cf. कृताकृतप्रसङ्गि
नित्यम् । तद्विपरीतमनित्यम् । Pari, Sek.
Pari. 42; cf also कंथं पुनरयं नित्यः ।
कृताकृतप्रसङ्गित्वात् l M. Bh. on VI.
4. 62.
कृतादेि a class of words such as कृत, मित,
मत, भूत, उक्त and others with which
the words श्रेणि, एक, पूग, कुण्ड, राशि
and others are compounded, pro-
vided both the words forming
the compound are in the same
case;.e.g. श्रेणिकृता:, एककृताः, कुण्डभूताः
etc. cf Kāś. on P.II.1.59.
कृतार्थ lit which has got its purpose
served: a term used in connection
with a rule that has been possible
to be applied (without clash with
another rule) in the case of cer-
tain instances, although it comes
into conflict in the case of other
istances cf. तत्र कृतार्थत्वाद् दिकशब्दपक्षे
परेण ठञ्जतौ स्याताम् Kāś. P.IV.
3.5. The word चरितार्थ is used
almost in the same sense.
कृत्य lit. that which should be done;
the word कृत्य is used as a tech
nical term in grammar in the
sense of kṛt affixes which possess
the sense 'should be done'.
Pāṇini has not defined the term
कृत्य but he has introduced a topic
( अधिकार ) by the name कृत्य (P.
III.1.95), and mentioned kṛt
afixes therein which are to be
called कृत्य right on upto the men-
tion of the affix ण्वुल्. in P.III.
1.133; cf. कृत्याः प्राङ् ण्वुलः P. III.
1.95 The kṛtya affixes, common-
|
ly found in use, are तव्य, अनीय and
य ( यत्, क्यप् and ण्यत् ).
कृत्रिमartificial; technical, as opposed
to derivative. In grammar, the
term कृत्रिम means 'technical sense',
as contrasted with अकृत्रिम 'ordi-
nary sense'; cf. कृत्रिमाकृत्रिमयोः कृत्रिमे
कार्यसंप्रत्यय: Par. Śek. Pari. 9.
कृत्रिमाकृत्रिमपरिभाषा a term popular-
ly used by grammarians for the
परिभाषा or maxim that out of the
two senses, the technical and the
derived ones, the technical sense
should be preferred; in rare cases,
the other too, is preferred cf.
Pari. Śek. Pari.9.
कृत्वसुच् tad. affix कृत्वम् applied to
numerals to convey the sense of
repetition, e. g. पंञ्चकृत्वः दशकृत्वः cf.
संख्यायाः क्रियाभ्यावृत्तिगणने कृत्वसुच् P. V.
4.17.
कृत्वे form of the tad. affix कृत्वम् in
Vedic Literature. See कृत्वसुच्,
कृत्स्वर the same as कृदुत्तरपदप्रकृतिस्वर, the
retention of its accent by the
second member of a tatpuruṣa
compound, if the first member is a
word termed Gati or Kāraka, by
the rule गतिकारकोपपदात् कृत् P.VI.2.
139; cf. अव्ययस्वरस्य कृत्स्वरः M.Bh. on
VI.2.52; cf.विभक्तीषत्स्वरात्कृत्स्वरः M.Bh.
VI.2.52 Vārt, 6.
कृदन्त the word ending with a kṛt
affix; the term कृत् is found used in
the sūtras of Pāṇini for कृदन्त; cf.
कृत्तद्धितसमासाश्च P. I.2.46. The term
कृदन्त for root-nouns, or nouns deri-
ved from roots, is found in the
Atharvaprātiśākhya (I.1.10, II.3.8,
II1.2.4), the Mahābhāṣya and all
the later works on grammar. See
the word कृत्.
कृदभिहित expressed by a kṛt affix;cf.
कृदभिहितो भावो द्रव्यवद्भवति M.Bh. on P.
II.2.19, III.1.67, IV.13, VI.2.139,
|
कृद्ग्रहण mention of a kṛt i.e. of a
word ending with a kṛt affix. The
word mainly occurs in the Pari-
bhāṣā कृद्ग्रहणे गतिकारकपूर्वस्यापि ग्रहणम्
which occurs first as an expression
of the Vārttikakāra (P.I.4.13 Vārt.
9) and has been later on given as
a Paribhāṣā by later grammarians
(Pari. Śek. Pari.28).The Paribhāṣā
is referred to as वृद्ब्रह्मणपरिभाषा in later
grammar works especially comme-
ntary works.
कृद्ग्रहणपरिभाषा a short term used
by the grammarians for the maxim
कृद्ग्रहणे गतिकारकपूर्वस्यापि ग्रहणम्. Par.Śek.
Pari. 28. See कृद्ग्रहण.
कृद्वृत्ति a short treatise by a gramma-
rian named मोक्षेश्वर who lived in the
fifteenth century. The work deals
with verbal derivatives.
कृल्लुक् the elision of a kṛt affix: the
word is found used along with the
words प्रकृतिप्रत्यापत्तिः, and प्रकृतिवत् कारकं
भवति in the Vārttika अाख्यानात्कृतस्त-
दाचष्टे इतेि कृल्लुक् प्रकृतिप्रत्यापत्तिः प्रकृतिवच्च
कारकम् by means of which the
phrase कंसं घातयति is formed for the
sentence कंसवधमाचष्टे.
कृल्लोप the dropping or removal of the
verbal noun(कृदन्त)after the words प्र,
परा etc when they are compound-
ed with the following noun; e.g.
the dropping of गत from the
expression निर्गतः कौशाम्ब्याः when it
is compounded into निष्कौशाम्बिः । cf.
कृल्लोपे निष्कौशाम्बिः, निर्वाराणसिः M.Bh. on
P.I.4.l. Vārt. 18.
कृशाश्वादि a class of words headed
by the word कृशाश्वं to which the
taddhita affix ईय (छण् ) is applied
in the four senses given in P.IV.2.
67-70, e.g. कार्शीश्वीयः, आरिष्टीयः cf.
Kāś, on P.IV.2.80. .
कृष्ट also क्रुष्ट the foremost of the seven
Yamas: .cf कुष्टप्रथमद्वितीयतृतीयचतुर्थ-
मन्द्राति स्वार्याः Tai.Pr.XXIII.14.
|
कृष्णकिंकरप्रक्रिया an alternative name
for the well-known grammar-work
क्रियाकौमुदी written by Rāmacandra
Śeṣa. See प्रक्रियाकौमुदी.
कृष्णपण्डित called also शेषकृष्ण, a sho-
lar of Sanskrit Vyākaraṇa who
wrote गूढभावविवृत्ति,a commentary on
the Prakriyā-Kaumudī of Rāma-
candra Śeṣa.
कृष्णमित्र a scholar of grammar and
nyāya of the 17th century A.D.
who wrote many commentary
works some of which are (l) a
commentary called Ratnārṇava on
the Siddhānta-Kaumudī, (2) a
commentary named Kalpalata on
Bhaṭṭoji's Prauḍhamanoramā, (3)
a commentary named Bhāvadīpa
on Bhaṭṭoji's Śabdakaustubha, (4)
a commentary on Nagojibhaṭṭa's
Laghumañjūṣā by name Kuñcikā
and (5) a commentary on Vaiyā-
karaṇabhūṣaṇa.
कृष्णमिश्र an alternative name of कृष्ण-
मित्र. See कृष्णमित्र.
कृष्णमौनिन् Son of Govardhana and
surnamed Maunī, who wrote a
commentary named सुबोधिनी on the
Siddhānta-Kaumudī at the end of
the 17th century A.D.
कृष्णलीलाशुकमुनि author of a commen-
tary named Puruṣakāra on Bhoja's
Sarasvatīkaṇṭhābharaṇa.
कृष्णशास्त्रिन् ( आरडे ) a famous gram-
marian and logician of the 18th
century who wrote Ākhyātaviveka
and Kārakavāda. See अारडे.
कृष्णशेष a famous grammarian of the
Śeṣa family who wrote a commen-
tary named the Gūḍhabhāvavivṛti
on the Prakriyā Kaumudī of Rāma-
candra Śeṣa.See कृष्णपण्डित
केन् kṛt. affix ए in the sense of कृत्य
(Pot.pass.part.) found in Vedic
|
Literature; e.g. नावगाहे = नावगाहितव्यम्
cf. Kāś. on P.III.4.14.
केन्य kṛt. affix एन्य in the sense of कृत्य
in Vedic Literature: e.g. दिदृक्षेण्यः
शुश्रूषेण्यः cf. Kāś. on P.III.4.14.
केलिमर् kṛt, affix एलिम in the sense
of कृत्य; e. g. पचेलिमा माषाः cf. केलिमर्
उपसंख्यानम् P.III.I.96 Vārt.
केवल isolated;a term applied to a letter
or a word when it is not combined
with another letter or another
word in a compound; cf. धर्मादनिच्
केवलात् । केवलान्न पदसमुदायात् Kāś. on
P.V.4.124; (2) simple (word)
without an affix added: cf. अर्थवत्ता
नोपपद्यते केवलेन अवचनात् । P. I. 2.45
Vārt. 7, also कृत्तद्धितान्तं चैवार्थवत् । न
केवलाः कृतस्तद्धिता बा M.Bh.on P.I.4.14.
केशव writer of a commentary named
प्रकाश on the Śikṣā of Pāṇini. He
lived in the 17th century.
केशवदत्त writer of the commentary
named दुर्धटोद्धाट on the grammar
संक्षिप्तसार written by Goyicandra,
कै kṛt affix ऐ used in Vedic Litera-
ture as noticed in the forms प्रयै
रोहिष्यै and अव्यथिष्यै: cf. P.III.4.10.
कैमर्थक्य iit. position of questioning
the utility; absence of any appa-
rent utility: cf. कैमर्थक्यान्नियमो भवति
विधेयं नास्तीति कृत्वा M. Bh. on I.
4.3, III.1.46; III.2.127, III.
3.19; VI.4.49, VII.2.26, and
VIII.4.32.
कैयट name of the renowned com-
mentator on the Mahābhāṣya,
who lived in the 11th century.
He was a resident of Kashmir
and his father's name was Jaiyaṭa.
The commentary on the Mahā-
bhāṣya was named महाभाष्यप्रदीप by
him, which is believed by later
grammarians to have really acted
as प्रदीप or light, as without it,
the Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali
|
would have remained unlit, that
is unintelligible, at several places.
Later grammarians attached to
प्रदीप almost the same importance
as they did to the Mahābhāṣya
and the expression तदुक्तं भाव-
कैयटयोः has been often used by com-
mentators. Many commentary
works were written on the Pradīpa
out of which Nageśa's Uddyota
is the most popular. The word
कैयट came to be used for the word
महाभाष्यप्रदीप which was the work of
Kaiyaṭa. For details see Vyākaraṇa
Mahābhāṣya published by the D.
E. Society, Poona, Vol. VII. pp.
389-390.
कैयटप्रकाश a commentary on the
Mahābhāṣyapradīpa of Kaiyaṭa
written by Nīlakaṇṭha of the Dra-
viḍa country. Nīlakaṇṭha lived in .
the 17th century and wrote works
on various subjects.
कैयटप्रकाशिका a commentary on the
Mahābhāṣyapradīpa of Kaiyaṭa
written by Pravartakopādhyāya.
कैयटविवरण (1) a commentary on the
Mahābhāṣyapradīpa of Kaiyaṭa
written by Iśvarānanda, in the
16th century; (2) a commentary
on Kaiyaṭa's Pradīpa by Rāma-
candra-Sarasvatī, who lived in the
16th century.
कोटरादि a class of words headed by
the word कोटर which get their final
vowel lengthened when the word
वन is placed after them as a second.
member of a compound, provided
the word so formed is used as
a proper noun; e.g. कोटरावणम्,
मिश्रकावणम्. cf. Kāś. on P.VI.3.117.
कोण्डभट्ट a reputed grammarian who
wrote an extensive explanatory
gloss by name Vaiyākaraṇabhūṣaṇa
on the Vaiyākaraṇasiddhāntakā-
rikā of Bhaṭṭoji Dīkṣita. Another
|
work Vaiyākaraṇabhūṣaṇasāra.
which is in a way an abridgment
of the Bhūṣaṇa, was also written
by him. Koṇḍabhaṭṭa lived in
the beginning of the l7th century.
He was the son of Raṅgojī and
nephew of Bhaṭṭojī Dīkṣita. He
was one of the few writers on the
Arthavicāra in the Vyākaraṇaśāstra
and his Bhūṣaṇasāra ranks next to
the Vākyapadīya of Bhartṛhari.
Besides the Bhūṣaṇa and Bhūṣaṇa-
sāra, Koṇḍabhaṭṭa wrote two
independent works viz. Vaiyāka-
raṇsiddhāntadīpika and Sphoṭa-
vāda.
कोद्ण्डराम a scholar of Sanskrit Vy-
ākaraṇa who composed शब्दसिद्धान्त-
मञ्जरी a small treatise dealing with
the declension of nouns.
कौण्डिन्य an ancient grammarian
referred to in the Taittirīya
Prātiśākhya(T. Pr. V. 38) and
Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī, (P.II.4.70).
कौमार, कोमारव्याकरण (1)an alternative
name of the Kātantra Vyākaraṇa
given to it on the strength of the
traditional belief that the original
inspiration for writing it was
received by Sarvavarman from
Kumara or Kārtikeya; (2) small
treatises bearing the name Kau-
māravyākaraṇa written by Muni-
puṅgava and Bhāvasena. The
latter has written Kātantrarūpa-
māla also.
कौहलीपुत्र an ancient grammarian
referred to in the Taittirīya Prāti-
śākhya: cf. T.Pr. XVIII.2.
क्त kṛt affix त in various senses, call-
ed by the name निष्ठा in Pāṇini's
grammar along with the affix क्तवतू
cf. क्तक्तवतू निष्ठा P.I.1.26.The various
senses in which क्त is prescribed
can be noticed below : (1) the
general sense of something done
|
in the past time as past pass.parti-
ciple e. g. कृत:, भुक्तम् etc.: cf P.
III.2.102; (2) the sense of the
beginning of an activity when it is
used actively: e. g. प्रकृतः कटं देवदत्तः,
cf. P.III.2.102 Vārt. 3; (3) the
sense of activity of the present
tense applied to roots marked
with a mute ञ् as also to roots in
the sense of desire, knowledge and
worship; e.g.मिन्नः, क्ष्विण्ण:, धृष्ट: as
also राज्ञां मतः, राज्ञामिष्टः, राज्ञां बुद्धः; cf.
P.III.2.187, 88; (4) the sense of
mere verbal activity (भाव) e. g.
हसितम् , सहितम् , जल्पितम् , (used always
in the neuter gender); cf. P.III.3.
114: (5) the sense of benediction
when the word ending in क्त is
used as a technical term, e.g. देवदत्तः
in the sense of देवा एनं देयासुः. The kṛt
affix क्तिन् is also used similarly
e.g. सातिः भूतिः मन्ति:; cf. Kāś. on P.
III.3.174.
क्तवतु kṛt affix तवत् which also is call-
ed निष्ठा. It is prescribed in the
active sense of somebody who has
done a thing sometime in the past.
A word ending in it is equivalent
to the past active participle; e.g.
भुक्तवान् ब्राह्मणः cf P.I.1.26. The fem.
affix डीप् ( ई ) is added to nouns
ending in क्तवतु to form feminine
bases; cf. P.IV.1.6.
क्तान्त a noun base ending in the kṛt
affix क्त; past passive participle;
cf. क्षेपे सप्तम्यन्तं क्तान्तेन सह समस्यते ।
अवतप्तेनकुलस्थितं त एतत् M. Bh.on II.2.
47.
क्तार्थं sense of क्त i.e. sense of the past
pass. participle; cf. उपसर्गाः क्तार्थे,
प्रादयः क्तार्थे ( समस्यन्ते ), P.II.2.18,
Vārt. 4.
क्तिच् kṛt affix ति added to roots in
the benedictive sense to form संज्ञाशब्द
or nouns in a technical sense; e.g-
तन्तिः in the sense of तनुतात्: cf. Kāś.
|
on III.3.174. क्त is also added in
the same way. See क्त.
क्तिन् kṛt affix ति added to roots to
form nouns in the sense of verb-
action; e.g. कृति:, स्थितिः, मति: etc.;cf.
P.III.3.94-97.
क्त्रि kṛt affix त्रि added to the roots
marked with the syllable डु by Pāṇ-
ini in his Dhātupāṭha; after this
affix त्रि, the tad. affix म ( मप् ) in
the sense of निर्वृत्तम् (accomplished)
is necessarily added, e. g. पक्त्रिमम्,
कृत्रिमम्; cf. P. III. 3.88. and P. IV.
4.20.
क्त्वा kṛt. affix त्वा added to roots (1) in
the sense of prohibition conveyed
by the word अलं or खलु preceding
the root, e.g. अलं कृत्वा, खलु कृत्वा; cf.
P. III.4.18; (2) in the sense of
exchange in the case of the root मा,
e. g. अपमित्य याचते; cf. P. III.4.19;
(3) to show an activity of the past
time along with a verb or noun
of action showing comparatively
a later time, provided the agent
of the former and the latter activi-
ties is the same; e.g. भुक्त्वा व्रजति, स्नात्वा
पीत्वा भुक्त्वा व्रजति; cf. P. III.4. 21.
This kṛt affix is always added to
roots when they are without any
prefix; when there is a prefix the
indeclinable, ending in त्वा, is always
compounded with the prefix and
त्वा is changed into य (ल्यप्), e.g. प्रकृत्य,
प्रहृत्य; cf. समासेऽनञ्पूर्वे क्त्वो ल्यप् P. VII.
1.37. The substitution of य is at
will in Vedic Literature; e.g. कृष्णं
वासो यजमानं परिधापयित्वा ( instead of
परिधाप्य ), cf. P. VII.1.38, while
sometimes, य is added after त्वा
as an augment e. g. दत्वाय सविता
धियः cf. P. VII.l.47, as also
sometimes त्वी or त्वीनम् is substi-
tuted for त्वा e. g. इष्ट्वीनं देवान्, स्नात्वी
मलादिव, cf. P. VII.1.48, 49.
क्त्वान्त gerund; a mid-way derivative
|
of a verbal root which does not
leave its verbal nature on the one
hand although it takes the form of
a substantive on the other hand.
क्नु kṛt affix नु added to the roots त्रस्,
गृध्, धृष् and क्षिप् in the sense of
habituated etc. as given in the rule
आक्वेरतच्छीलतद्धर्मतत्साधुकारिषु P.III.2.134;
e.g, त्रस्नुः, गृध्नु: etc. cf. P. III. 2.140.
क्मरच् kṛt affix मर added in the sense
of habituated etc. to the roots सृ,
घस् and अद्; e. g. सृमरः, घस्मर:, अद्मर:
cf. P.III.2.134 and 160.
क्य common term for the Vikaraṇas
क्यच् , क्यङ् and क्यञ्; cf. न: क्ये P. I.
4.15, also cf. P.III.2.170, VI.
4. 50.
क्यङ् affix य taking Ātmanepada termi-
nations after it, added in the sense
of similar behaviour to a substan-
tive. The substantive to which
this affix य is added, becomes a
denominative root; e. g. काकः श्येना-
यते, कुमुदं पुष्करायते, cf. Kāś. on P. III.
1.11-12, also on P. III, 1.14-18.
क्यच् denominative affix ( विकरण ) in
the sense of desiring for oneself,
added to nouns to form denomi-
tive roots; e.g. पुत्रीयति; क्यच् is also
added to nouns that are upamā-
nas or standards of comparison in
the sense of (similar) behaviour:
e.g. पुत्रीयति च्छात्रम्: cf. Kāś. on P.
III.1.8, 10. It is also added in the
sense of 'doing' to the words
नमस्, वरिवस् and चित्र; e. g. नमस्यति
देवान्, वरिवस्यति गुरून् , चित्रीयते ; cf. Kāś.
on P. III. 1.19.
क्यप् kṛt afix य applied to the roots
व्रज् and यज् in the sense of 'verbal
activity' and to the roots अजू
with सम्, षद् with नि etc. to form
proper nouns e. g. व्रज्या, इज्या,
समज्या, निषद्या etc., cf. P. III. 3.98 and
99; (2) kṛtya affix य in the sense
of 'should be done' applied to the
|
roots वद्, भू and हन् (when preceded
by certain words put as upapada),
as also to roots with penultimate
ऋ and the roots मृज्, इ, स्तु and
others; e. g. ब्रह्मोद्यम् , ब्रह्मभूयम् , इत्यम् ,
स्तुत्यम् etc. cf. Kāś. on P. III. 1.
106,121.
क्यष् affix य added to certain nouns
like लोहित and others to form
denominative roots after which
terminations of both the padas
are placed e.g. लोहितायति, लोहितायते;
cf. Kāś. on P. III. 1.13.
क्यु, क्युन् Uṇādi affixes अन.
क्रत्वादि a class of words headed by
the word क्रतु, which have their first
vowel accented acute in a Bahu-
vrīhi dompound, provided the first
member of the compound is the
word सु; e.g. सुक्रतुः, सुप्रपूर्तिः etc.; cf.
cf. Kāś. on P. VI.2.118.
क्रम (l) serial order or succession
as contrasted with यौगपद्य or simul-
taneity. The difference between क्रम
and यौगपद्य is given by भर्तृहरि in the
line क्रमे विभिद्यते रूपं यौगपद्ये न भिद्यते
Vāk. Pad. II. 470. In order to
form a word by the application of
several rules of grammar, a parti-
cular order is generally followed in
accordance with the general prin-
ciple laid down in the Paribhāṣā
पूर्वपरनित्यान्तरङ्गापवादानामुत्तरोत्तरं बलीयः, as
also according to what is stated
in the sūtras असिद्धवदत्राभात्, पूर्वत्रासिद्धम्
etc. (2) succession, or being
placed after, specifically with re-
ference to indeclinables like एव,
च etc. which are placed after
a noun with which they are
connected. When an inde-
cinable is not so connected,
it is called भिन्नक्रम; cf. परिपन्थं च
तिष्ठति (P.IV. 4.36), चकारो भिन्नक्रमः
प्रत्ययार्थं समुच्चिनोति, Kāś. on P. IV.
4.36; also ईडजनोर्ध्वे च । चशब्दो भिन्नक्रमः
|
ईशेः (VII.2.77) अनुकर्षणार्थो विज्ञायते
Kāś. on P.IV.2.78; (3) succession of
the same consonant brought
about; doubling; reduplication;
क्रम is used in this way in the Ṛk
Prātiśākhya as a synonym of
dvitva prescribed by Pāṇini; e. g.
अा त्वा रथं becomes अा त्त्वा रथम् ;
सोमानं स्वरणम् becomes सोमानं स्स्वरणम् ;
cf. स्वरानुस्वारोपहितो द्विरुच्यते संयोगादि: स
क्रमोSविक्रमे सन् । etc, R. Pr. VI. l
to 4; cf. also स एष द्विर्भावरूपो विधिः
क्रमसंज्ञो वेदितव्यः Uvvaṭa on R. Pr.
VI. 1. The root क्रम् IA. is
several times used in the Prāti-
śākhya works for द्विर्भवन, cf. also T.
Pr.XXI.5; XXIV.5; (4) repetition
of a word in the recital of Vedic
passages, the recital by such a
repetition being called क्रमपाठ,
which is learnt and taught with a
view to understanding the original
forms of words combined in the
Saṁhitā by euphonic rules,
substitution of letters such as that
of ण् for न् , or of ष् for स् , as
also the separate words of a com-
pound word ( सामासिकशब्द ); e. g.
पर्जन्याय प्र । प्र गायत । गायत दिवः । दिव-
स्पुत्राय । पुत्राय मीळ्हुषे । मीळ्हुषे इति
मीळ्हुषे । cf. क्रमो द्वाभ्यामतिक्रम्य् प्रत्यादायो-
त्तरं तयोः उत्तेरेणोपसंदध्यात् तथार्द्धर्चं समापयेत् ॥
R. Pr. X. 1. For details and
special features, cf. R. Pr. ch. X
and XI: cf. also V. Pr. IV. 182-
190: T. Pr, XXIII. 20, XXIV. 6.
क्रमण doubling. Irregular doubling is
looked upon as a fault; cf. क्रमणं
वा अयथेाक्तम् R.Pr. XIV. 25.
क्रमदीश्वर author of a grammar named
संक्षिप्तसार who lived at the end
of the 13th century.
क्रमपाठ recital of the Vedic Saṁhitā
by means of separate groups of two
words, repeating each word ex-
cept the first of the Vedic verse-
line; see क्रम above. The various
|
rules and exceptions are given in
detail in Paṭalas ten and eleven
of the Ṛk Prātiśākhya. The
Vedic Saṁhitā or Saṁhitāpāṭha
is supposed to be the original one
and the Padapāṭha prepared later
on, with a view to preserving the
Vedic text without any change
or modification of a letter, or
accent; cf. न लक्षणेन पदकारा अनुवर्त्याः ।
पदकारैर्नाम लक्षणमनुवर्त्यम् M. Bh. on
III. 1.109, VI. 1.207 and VIII.
2.16, where Patañjali clearly says
that grammar-rules are not to
follow the Padapāṭha, but, the
writer of the Padapāṭha is to
follow the rules already laid down.
The Jaṭāpāṭha, the Ghanapāṭha
and the other recitals are later
developments of the Padapāṭha as
they are not mentioned in the
Prātiśākhya works.
क्रमादि a class of words headed by
the word क्रम to which the tad-
dhita affix अक (वुञ् ) is added in
the sense of 'one who studies and
understands'; e. g. क्रमकः, पदकः,
मीमांसकः, शिक्षकः etc. cf. Kāś. on
IV. 2.61.
क्रम्य a consonant which is subjected
to doubling cf. क्रम्यो वर्णः पूर्वमक्षरं
भजते R. Pr. XVIII. 18.
क्रिया action, verbal activity; cf. क्रिया-
वचनो धातु: M. Bh. on I. 3.1 ; cf.
also क्रियावाचकमाख्यातम् R. Pr. XII.
8. quoted by Uvvaṭa in his Bhāṣya
on V. Pr. VIII. 50; cf. also
उपसर्गाः क्रियायोगे P. I.4.59, लक्षणहेत्वेाः
क्रियायाः P.III. 2.126; cf. also यत्तर्हि
तदिङ्गितं चेष्टितं निमिषितं स शब्दः । नेत्याह
क्रिया नाम सा M. Bh. Āhnika 1.
The word भाव many times is used
in the same sense as kriyā or
verbal activity in the sūtras of
Pāṇini. cf. P.I.2.21 ; I.3.13; III. 1.
66.etc; cf. also कृदभिहितो भावो द्रव्यवद्भवति
|
a statement made frequently by
the Mahābhāṣyakāra. Some scho-
lars draw a nice distinction bet-
ween क्रिया and भाव, क्रिया meaning
dynamic activity and भाव mean-
ing static activity: cf. अपरिस्पन्दन-
साधनसाध्यो धात्वर्थो भावः । सपरिस्पन्दन-
साधनसाध्यस्तु क्रिया Kaiyaṭa's Pradīpa
on M. Bh. III. 1.87. Philosophi-
cally क्रिया is defined as सत्ता
appearing in temporal sequence
in various things. When सत्ता does
not so appear it is called सत्त्व.
क्रियाकलाप a grammatical work on
the conjugation of roots written
by Vijayānanda.
क्रियागुप्तक a grammar work quoted
by वर्धमान in his गणरत्नमहोदधि.
क्रियातिपत्ति lit. over-extension or
excess of action; the word is,
however, used in grammar in the
sense of non-happening of an
expected action especially when .
it forms a condition of the con-
ditional mood ( लृङ् ); cf. कुताश्चि-
द्वैगुण्यादनभिनिर्वृत्तिः क्रियायाः क्रियातिपत्तिः
Kāś. on P. III. 3.139; cf. also
नान्तरेण साधनं क्रियायाः प्रवृत्तिरस्तीति साधना-
तिपत्तिश्चेत्कियातिपत्तिरपि भवति M. Bh.
on III.3.139.
क्रियाफल intended fruit of a verbal
activity; cf. स्वरितञितः कर्त्रभिप्राये क्रियाफले
P.I.3.72.
क्रियायोग association with a verbal
activity; cf उपसर्गाः क्रियायोगे P.I.4.59.
क्रियार्थ (adj. to क्रिया) lit. meant or in-
tended for another action; e g.
भोक्तुं व्रजति where गमनक्रिया is intend-
ed for भोजनक्रिया; cf. तुमुन्ण्वुलौ क्रियायां
क्रियार्थायाम् P.III.3.10.
क्रियावचन meaning or expressing a
verbal activity; a term generally
applied to dhātus or roots, or even to
verbs. The term is also applied to
denominative affixes like क्यच्
which produce a sort of verbal
|
activity in the noun to which they
are added; cf. क्रियावचनाः क्यजादय:
M.Bh. on III.1.19.
क्रियाविशेषण determinant or modifier
of a verbal activity; cf. क्रियाविशेषणं
चेति वक्तव्यम् । सुष्टु पचति दुष्टु पचति M.Bh. on
II.1.1; nouns used as Kriyāviśeṣaṇa
are put in the neuter gender, and
in the nom. or the acc. case in the
sing. number; cf. क्रियाविशेषणानां कर्मत्वं
नपुंसकलिङ्गता च Pari.Bhāśkara Pari.56.
क्रियासमभिहार repetition or intensity
of a verbal activity; cf. समभिहारः
पौनः पुन्यं भृशार्थो वा, Kāś. on P.I.4.2.
क्रु kṛt affix रु applied to the root भी,
e.g. भीरुः, cf. P.III.2.174.
क्रुकन् kṛt affix रुक; e.g, भीरुकः; cf.(भियः)
क्रुकन्नपि वक्तव्यः P.III.2.174 Vārttika.
क्रैयादिक a root belonging to the
class of roots which are headed by
क्री and which are popularly known
as roots of the ninth conjugation;
cf. यथा तु वार्तिकं तथा कैयादिकस्याप्यत्र
ग्रहणमिष्यते Padamañjarī on VII.2.48.
क्रोडादि a class of words headed by
the word क्रोड to which the tadd-
hita affix य ( ष्यङ् ) is added in the
sense of a female descendant; e.g.
क्रौड्या, आपिशल्या, गौकक्ष्या etc. ; cf. Kāś.
on P.IV.1.80.
क्रोष्ट्रीय an ancient school of gramma-
rians who are believed to have
written rules or Vārttikas on some
rules of Pāṇini to modify them;
the क्रोष्ट्रीय school is quoted in the
Mahābhāṣya; cf. परिभाषान्तरमिति च
मत्वा क्रोष्ट्रीयाः पठन्ति । M. Bh. on P.
I.1.3.
क्रौड्यादि a class of words headed by
the word क्रौडि which do not take
the feminine affix ई when they
stand at the end of a compound;
e.g. कल्याणक्रौडा, सुभगा, पृथुजघना etc.;
cf. Kāś. on P.IV.1.56.
क्रयादिगण a class of roots headed by
|
the root क्री ( डुक्रीञ् ) to which the
conjugational sign ना ( श्ना ) is
added; roots of the ninth conjuga-
tion.
क्लीबत्व a word used in the sense of
'neuter gender' by grammarians
later than पतञ्जलि and the Vārtti-
kakāra; cf. समभागे क्लीबलिङ्गमर्धमेकदे-
शिना समस्यते Bhāṣā Vr. on P.II.2.2;
पक्षे हि क्लीबत्वम् Kaiyaṭa's Pr. on II.1.
51; समाहारद्वन्द्वे क्लीबत्वप्रसङ्गात् Durgh. Vr.
on P.II.4.l7.
क्लुकन् kṛt affix लुक added to the root
भी; e.g. भीलुक; cf. P. III.2. 174.
कनिप् kṛt affix वन् in the sense of
agent added to (l) a root preced-
ed by an Upasarga or a Subanta
Upapada or sometimes even with-
out any preceding word; e.g.प्रतरित्वा,
धीवा, पीवा; (2) to the root दृश्, pre-
ceded by an Upapada which is the
object of the root दृश्, e.g. पारदृश्वा;
(3) to roots युध् and कृञ् having राजन्
as their object, e.g. राजयुध्वा, राजकृत्वा ;
cf. Pāṇini III.2.94-96.
क्वरप् kṛt affix वर, taking the affix ई
( ङीप् ) in the feminine gender,
added to the roots इ, नश्, जि etc.;
इत्वरी, नश्वर:, जित्वरी, गत्वरी; cf. P.III.
2.163-164.
क्वसु kṛt affix वस्, taking the fem.
affix ई (ङीप्) in the feminine gender,
prescribed in the sense of perfect
tense, which is mostly found in Vedic
Literature and added to some
roots only such as सद्, वस्, श्रु etc. in
the spoken language; e. g. जक्षिवान्
पपिवान् उपसेदिवान् कौत्स; पाणिनिम्; cf. Kāś.
on P.III.2.107-109.
क्वि a common term to signify kṛt
affixes क्विन् and क्वि both; cf. P. III.
2.134, VI.3.115, VI.4.40; VIII.3.
25, VI.4.15, VI.4.97.
क्विन् kṛt zero affix, i.e. an affix of
which every letter is dropped and
nothing remains, added to the roots
|
स्पृश्, यज्, सृज्, दृश्, etc. under certain
conditions; e.g. घृतस्पृक्, ऋत्विक्, यादृक्,
तादृक्; cf. Kāś. on P.III.2.58-60.
क्विप् (1) kṛt affix zero, added to the
roots सद्, सू, द्विष् and others with a
preceding word as upapada or
with a prefix or sometimes even
without any word, as also to the
root हन् preceded by the words
ब्रह्मन्, भ्रूण and वृत्र, and to the root कृ
preceded by सु, कर्मन् etc., and to the
roots सु, and चि under certain con-
ditions e.g. उपसत्, सूः, प्रसूः, पर्णध्वत्,
ब्रह्महा, वृत्रहा, सोमसुत्, अग्निचित्; cf.P.III.
2.61, 76, 77, 87-92: 177-179; (2)
the denominative affix zero appli-
ed to any substantive in the sense
of behaviour अश्वति, गर्दभति etc.; cf.
M.Bh. and Kāś, on P.III.1.11.
क्विबन्त a substantive ending with the
kṛt affix क्विप् (zero affix) added to a
root to form a noun in the sense of
the verbal action (भाव). The words
ending with this affix having got
the sense of verbal activity in them
quite suppressed, get the noun
terminations सु, औ, जस् etc. and
not ति, तः etc. placed after them;
cf. कृदभिहितो भावो द्रव्यवद् भवति. How-
ever, at the same time, these
words undergo certain operations
peculiar to roots simply because
the kṛt affix entirely disappears
and the word formed, appears
like a root; cf. क्विबन्ता धातुत्वं न जहति.
Kaiyaṭa's Prad. on VII.1.70.
क्षपणक a Jain grammarian quoted in
the well-known stanza धन्वन्तरिः
क्षपणकोमरसिंहशङ्कु which enumerates
the seven gems of the court of
Vikramāditya, on the strength of
which some scholars believe that
he was a famous grammarian of
the first century B.C.
क्षमामाणिक्य a Jain grammarian who
wrote a small grammar work
known as Aniṭkārikāvivaraṇa.
|
क्षितीशचन्द्र (चक्रवर्तिन्) or K. C. CHAT-
TERJI a scholar of Sanskrit
grammar who has written a work
on technical terms in Sanskrit, who
has edited several grammar works
and is at present editing the
Cāndra Vyākaraṇa and conduct-
ing the Sanskrit journal named
Mañjūṣa at Calcutta.
क्षिप्र lit. rapid, accelerated, a short
name given in the a Prātiśākhya
works to a Saṁdhi or euphonic
combination of the vowels इ, उ, ऋ,;
लृ with a following dissimilar
vowel; cf. Uvvaṭa Bhāṣya on R.Pr.
III.10; cf. also इको यणचि P.VI.1.77.
The name Kṣipra is given to this
Saṁdhi possibly because the vowel,
short or long, which is turned into
a consonant by this saṁdhi be-
comes very short (i.e. shorter than
a short vowel i.e. a semi-vowel).
The word क्षैप्र is also used in this
sense referring to the Kṣiprasaṁdhi.
क्षीरतरङ्गिणी a kind of commentary
on the Dhātupāṭha of Pāṇini
written by Kṣīrasvāmin.
क्षीरतरङ्गिणीसंकेत an abridgment of
क्षीरतरङ्गिणी by the author himself.
See क्षीरतरङ्गणी.
क्षीरस्वामिन् a grammarian of Kashmir
of the 8th century who wrote the
famous commentary क्षीरतरङ्गिणी on
the Amarakośa and a commentary
on the Nirukta of Yāska.
क्षुभ्नादि a class of wordings such as
क्षुभ्ना, तृप्नु and the like in which the
consonant न् is not changed into
ण् although the consonant न् is
preceded by ऋ, ॠ, र् or ष् and int-
ervened by letters which are
admissible; e. g. क्षुभ्नाति, तृप्नोति, नृनमनः
etc. cf Kāś. on P. VIII. 4.39.
This class ( क्षुभ्नादिगण ) is styled as
आकृतिगण.
|
क्षेमंकर author of a commentary on
सारस्वतप्रक्रिया.
क्षैप्र (1) another name of the क्षिप्रसंधि-
See the word क्षिप्र above; (2) name
given to the Svarita accent borne
by the vowel following the semi-
vowel which results from the Kṣipra-
saṁdhi; cf. R. Pr. II. 8; III.7,10;
VIII. 22: cf. इवर्णोकारयोर्यवकारभावे क्षैप्र
उदात्तयोः V.Pr. XX. 1; cf. also युवर्णौ
यवौ क्षैप्रः V.Pr.I.115: उदात्तस्वरितयोर्यणः
स्वरितोनुदात्तस्य P.VIII.2.4.
क्ष्वेडन hissing or whizzing sound
given as a fault in the utterance
of sibilants; cf. क्ष्चेडनमधिको वर्णस्य सरूपो
ध्वनि: । com. on R. Pr. XIV. 6.
क्स (1) aorist vikaraṇa affix sub-
stituted for च्लि; cf. P.III.1.45, 46;
e. g. अदृक्षत्, आश्लिक्षत्, अधुक्षत् cf. Kāś.
on P.III.1.45,46; (2) kṛt affix स
applied to the root दृश् preceded by
a pronoun such as त्यद्, तद् etc. e.g.
यादृक्षः, तादृक्ष: etc. cf. दृशेः क्सश्च वक्तव्य:
P.III.2.60 Vārttika. (3) affix स
applied to the root गाह् or ख्या or कव्
to form the noun कक्ष; cf. कक्षो गाहतेः
क्स इति नामकरण: ख्यातेर्वा कषतेर्वा Nir.
II.2.
क्सरन् Uṇādi affix सर; cf. तन्यृषिभ्यां
क्सरन् Uṇādi III.75.
क्सि Uṇādi affix सि; cf. प्रुषिकुषिशुषिभ्यः
क्सि: Uṇādi III.155.
क्से kṛt affix से in the sense of तुमुन्
in Vedic Literature; e.g.प्रेषे (भगाय)
Kāś. on III. 4. 9.
ख्second consonant of the guttural
class of consonants possessed of
श्वासानुप्रदान, अघोष and विवार qualities.
खtad. affix, always changed into
ईन, (l) applied to the word कुल
in the sense of a descendant, e.g.
कुलीनः, आढ्यकुलीन:; cf. P. IV. 1.139;
|
(2) applied to the words अवार, पार,
पारावार and अवारपार in the Śaīṣika
senses, e. g. अवारीणः, पारीणः etc.; cf.
P.IV.2.93 and Vārttikas 2, 3 on
it; (3) applied to words ending in
the word वर्ग ( which does not
mean 'sound' or 'letter' ) in the
sense of 'present there,' e. g.
वासुदेववर्गीणः, युधिष्ठिरवर्गीणः; cf. P. IV.
3.64; (4) applied to the words
सर्वधुर and एकधुर in the sense of
'bearing,' and to ओजसू , वेशोभग,
यशोभग and पूर्व, e.g. ओजसीनः
etc., cf. P.IV.4.78, 79, 130, 132,
133; (5) applied in the sense of
'favourable to' to the words आत्मन् ,
विश्वजन, etc. (P.V.1.9), to विंशतिक,
(32) to अाढक, अाचित, पात्र and others
(53-55), to समा (85-86), to रात्रि,
अहन् , संवत्सर and वर्ष (87-88)
and संवत्सर and परिवत्सर (92); e. g.
आत्मनीनः, आढकीनः पात्रीणः, समीनः, संवत्स-
रीणः etc.; (6) to the words सर्वचर्मन्,
यथामुख etc. e. g. सर्वचर्मीणः cf. P.V.
2.5 to 17; (7) to the words अषडक्ष,
अशितंगु etc. cf. P.V.4.7,8. e. g.
अषडक्षीणः. (8) ख is also a technical
term in the sense of elision or
लोप in the Jainendra Grammar
cf. Jain I. 1.61. (9) The word ख
is used in the sense of 'glottis' or
the hole of the throat ( गलबिल )
in the ancient Prātiṣākhya works.
खकार the consonant ख्; see ख.
खच् kṛt affix अ in the sense of
'agent' applied to the roots वद्,
ताप् , and यम् when preceded by
certain उपपद words standing as
objects. Before this affix खच्, the
augment मुम् ( म् ) is added to the
preceding उपपद if it is not an
indeclinable. e. g. प्रियंवदः, वशंवदः,
द्विषंतपः परंतपः वाचंयम: etc. cf P.III.
2.38-47.
खञ् tad. affix ईन, applied to महाकुल
in the sense of a descendant; e. g.
माहाकुलीनः cf. P. IV. 1.141, to ग्राम
|
(P. IV. 2.94), to युष्मद् and अस्मद्
in the Śaiṣika senses (P.IV.3.1),
to प्रतिजन, इदंयुग etc. (P. IV. 4.99),
to माणव and चरक (P. V.1.11), to
ऋत्विज् (P.IV.3.71), to मास (P. IV.
3.81), to words meaning corn in
the sense of 'a field producing
corn' (P.V.2.1), to सर्वचर्मन् (P.V.2.5),
and to the words गोष्ठ, अश्व, शाला etc.
in some specified senses (P. V.
3.18-23). A vṛddhi vowel ( अा, ऐ
or औ ) is substituted for the first
vowel of the word to which this
affix खञ् is applied, as ञ् is the
mute letter applied in the affix खञ्.
खण्ड tad. affix applied to कमल, अम्भोज
etc. in the sense of समूह, e. g.
कमलखण्डम, अम्भोजखण्डम, also to the
words वृक्ष and its synonyms, e. g.
वृक्षखण्डः, तरुखण्डः etc.; cf. Kāś on P.
IV.2.38, 51.
खण्डिकादि a class of words headed
by the word खण्डिका to which the
affix अञ् is added in the sense of
collection; e. g. खाण्डिकम्, वाडवम्,
भैक्षुकम्; cf. Kāś. on P. IV.2.45.
खमुञ् kṛt affix अम् applied to the
root कृ when preceded by a word
standing as the object of the root,
provided an abuse is meant, e. g.
चोरंकारं आक्रोशति; cf. P. III. 4.25.
खय् the pratyāhāra खयू standing for
the first and second consonants
of the five classes; cf. शर्पूर्वाः खयः
P.VII.4.6; also cf. P. VIII.3.6,
VIII.4.54.
खर् the pratyāhāra खर् standing for
hard consonants viz. the first and
second letters of the five classes
and the sibilants, before which, स्
at the end of a word becomes
विसर्ग, and soft consonants i. e.
the third and fourth consonants of
the five classes become hard; cf.
खरवसानयोर्विसर्जनीय; P. VIII.3.15,
and खरि च P. VIII.4.55
|
खल् kṛt afix अ added to any root
preceded by the word ईषद्, दुस् or
सु, and to the roots भू and कृ pre-
ceded by an upapada word form-
ing either the subject or the
object of the roots, e. g. ईषत्करः
कटो भवता, ईषदाढ्यंभवं भवता; cf. P. III.
3.126, 127.
खश् kṛt affix added to the roots यज्
(causal), ध्मा, धे,रुज्, वह्, लिह्, पच् , दृश् ,
तप्, मन् etc. preceded by certain
specified upapada words. The
root undergoes all the operations
such as the addition of the con-
jugational sign etc. before this
खश् on account of the mute letter
श् which makes खश् a Sārvadhā-
tuka affix, and the augment म्
is added to the preceding उपपद if
it is not an indeclinable on
account of the mute letter ख्;
e. g. जनमेजयः, स्तनंधयः, नाडिंधमः, असूयै.
पश्यः पण्डितंमन्यः etc,; cf. Pāṇ. III-
2.28-37, 83.
खित् characterized by the mute letter
ख्, applied to kṛt affixes which,
by reason of their being खित् ,
cause (a) the addition of the aug-
ment मुम् ( म् ) to the preceding
words अरुस् , द्विषद् and words end-
ing in a vowel, and (b) the shorten-
ing of the long vowel of the
preceding word if it is not an
indeclinable; cf. P. VI. 3.66-68.
खिलपाठ a supplementary recital or
enunciation which is taken along
with the original enunciation or
upadeśa generally in the form of
the sūtras. The word is used in the
Kāśikā in the sense of one of the texts
forming a part of the original
text which is called upadeśa; cf.
Kāśikā उपदिश्यते अनेनेत्युपदेश: शास्त्रवाक्यानि
सूत्रपाठ: खिलपाठश्च (on P.I.3.2); cf. also
खिलपाठो धातुपाठः प्रातिपदिकपाठो वाक्यपाठश्च
Padamañjarī on Kāśikā I.3.2.
|
खिष्णुच् kṛt affix इष्णु in the sense of
an agent added to the root भू,
e. g. आढ्यंभविष्णुः, स्थूलंभविष्णुः; cf. P.
III. 2.57.
खुकञ् kṛt affix उक in the sense of
an agent added to the root भू,
e. g. आढ्यंभावुकः, सुभगंभावुकः; cf. P.
III. 2.57. See खिष्णुच्.
ख्युन् kṛt affix अन applied to the
root कृ in the sense of an instru-
ment when preceded by the words
अाढ्य, सुभग, स्थूल etc. provided the
whole word is similar in sense
to cvi-formation ( च्व्यर्थ ), e.g. अाढ्यं
करणम् , सुभगंकरणम्; cf. P. III. 2.56;
fem. अाढ्यंकरणी, cf. नञ्स्नञीकक्ख्युंस्तरुण-
तलुनानामुपसंख्यानम् P.IV.1.15.Vārttika.
ग
ग्third letter of the guttural class
of consonants, possessed of the
properties घोष, संवृत, नाद and अल्पप्राण;
some grammarians look upon the
word क्ङित् (P.I.1.5) as made up of
क् , ग् and ङ् and say that the Guna
and Vṛddhi substitutes do not take
place in the vowels इ, उ, ऋ, and लृ
if an affix or so, marked by the
mute letter ग् follows.
.
गङ्गाधर [GANGADHARA SHASTRI
TELANG] (l) a stalwart gramm-
arian and Sanskrit scholar of
repute who was a pupil of Bāla-
sarasvatī of Vārāṇaśī and prepared
in the last century a host of Sans-
krit scholars in Banaras among
whom a special mention could be
made of Dr. Thebaut, Dr. Venis
and Dr. Gaṅgānātha Jhā. He was
given by Government of India the
titles Mahāmahopādhyāya and C.
I.E. His surname was Mānavallī but
he was often known as गङाधरशास्त्री
तेलङ्ग. For details, see Mahābhāṣya,
D.E. Society Ed.Poona p.p.33, 34;
|
(2)an old scholar of Vyākarana who
is believed to have written a com-
mentary on Vikṛtavallī of Vyādi;
(3) a comparatively modern scho-
lar who is said to have written a
commentary named Induprakāśa
on the Śabdenduśekhara; (4) author
of the Vyākaraṇadīpaprabhā, a
short commentary on the Vyāka-
raṇa work of Cidrūpāśramin. See
चिद्रूपाश्रमिन्.
गङ्गेशशर्मा writer of Kātantra-kaumudī
possibly different from the reput-
ed Gaṅgeśa Upādhyāa who is
looked upon as the founder of the
Navyanyāya school of modern
Naiyāyikas, and who lived in the
twelfth century A. D.
गजकुम्भाकृति a graphic description of
the Jihvāmūlīya letter as found
in script, given by Durgasiṁha;
cf. गजकुम्भाकृतिर्वर्ण उपध्मानीयसंज्ञो भवति
Durgasiṁha's com. on Kāt. I.1.
18. see ( उपधानीय ).
गण a class of words, as found in the
sūtras of Pāṇini by the mention
of the first word followed by the
word इति; e.g. स्वरादि, सर्वादि, ऊर्यादि,
भ्वादि, अदादि, गर्गादि etc. The ten
gaṇas or classes of roots given by
Pāṇini in his dhātupātha are given
the name Daśagaṇī by later
grammarians.
गणपाठ the mention individually of
the several words forming a class
or gaṇa, named after the first word
said to have been written by Pāṇini
himself as a supplementary work
to his great grammar called Aṣṭaka
or Aṣṭādhyāyī, the Sikṣā,the Dhātu-
pātha and the Lingānuśāsana being
the other ones. Other grammarians
such as शाकटायन, अापिशलि and others
have their own gaṇapāthās. The
gaṇapāthā is traditionally ascrib-
ed to Pāṇini; the issue is question-
|
ed, however, by modern scholars.
The text of the gaṇapāṭha is
metrically arranged by some
scholars. The most scholarly and
authoritative treatise on gaṇapā-
ṭha is the Gaṇaratnamahodadhī
of Vardhamāna.
गणरत्नमहोदधि a grammar work, consi-
sting of a metrical enumeration
of the words in the Gaṇapāṭha of
Pāṇini, written by Vardhamāna, a
Jain grammarian of the 12th
century, who is believed to have
been one of the six gems at
the court of Lakṣmaṇasena of
Bengal. Vardhamāna has written
a commentary also, on his Gaṇa-
ratnamahodadhi. Besides Vardha-
māna's commentary, there are
other commentaries written by
गोवर्धन and गङ्गाधर.
गणरत्नमहोदधिटीका also called गणरत्न-
महोदधिवृति, a commentary on
the गणरत्नमहोदधि of Vardhamāna
written by the author himself. See
गणरत्नमहोदधि.
गणरत्नमहोदध्यवचूरि a metrical com-
mentary on Vardhamāna's Gaṇa-
ratnamahodadhi. The name of the
author is not available.
गणसूत्र a statement of the type of a
Sūtra in the Gaṇapāṭha of Pāṇini
where mention of a word or words
in the Gaṇapāṭha is made along
with certain conditions; e. g.
पूर्वपुरावरo, स्वमज्ञातिधनाख्यायाम् , in the
सर्वादिगण, and क्त्वातोसुन्कसुनः, तसिलादय:
प्राक्पाशपः in the स्वरादिगण. Some of
the gaṇasūtras are found incorpo-
rated in the Sūtrapāṭha itself
Many later grammarians have
appended their own gaṇapāṭha to
their Sūtrapāṭha.
गणसूत्रविचार a commentary on the
Gaṇapāṭha of Pāṇini written by
17
|
Mannudeva who flourished in the
nineteenth century.
गति (1) lit. motion; stretching out,
lengthening of a syllable. The word
is explained in the Prātiśakhya
works which define it as the
lengthening of a Stobha vowel with
the utterance of the vowel इ or उ
after it, e.g. हाइ or हायि for हा; simi-
larly आ-इ or अा -यि ; (2) a tech-
nical term used by Pāṇini in con-
nection with prefixes and certain
indeclinables which are called गति,
cf. P.I.4.60-79. The words called
gati can be compounded with the
following word provided the latter
is not a verb, the compound being
named tatpuruṣa e.g, प्रकृतम् , ऊरीकृत्य
cf. P.II.2.18; the word गति is used
by Pāṇini in the masculine gender
as seen in the Sūtra गतिरनन्तरः P.VI.
2.49 and hence explained as form-
ed by the addition of the affix क्तिच्
to गम्, the word being used as a
technical term by the rule क्तिच्क्तौ च
संज्ञायाम् P.III.3.174; (3) realization,
understanding; cf. उभयगतिरिह भवति
Par. Śek. Pari.9; सांप्रतिकाभावे भूतपूर्वगतिः
Par. Śek. Pari 76; अगत्या हि परिभाषा
अाश्रीयते Puruṣottamadeva Pari.
Pāṭha 119.
गतिकारकपरिभाषा a popular name
given to the maxim गतिकारकोपपदानां
कृद्भिः सह समासवचनं प्राक् सुबुत्पतेः; cf. Par.
Śek. Pari. 75.
गतिनिघात the grave ( अनुदात्त ) accent
of the गति word before a verb with
an acute ( उदात्त ) accent; cf. तिङि-
चोदात्तवति P. VIII.1.71.
गतिसमास a compound with the prece-
ding gati word prescribed by the
rule कुगतिप्रादयः P.II. 2.18; cf. गति-
समास । निष्कौशाम्बिः, निर्वाराणसि: M.Bh.
on II. 4. 26
.
गत्यर्थ a root denoting motion; the
word frequently occurs in the
|
Sūtras of Pāṇini and the Mahābhā-
ṣya in connection with some special
operations prescribed for roots
which are गत्यर्थ. There is also a
conventional expression सर्वे गत्यर्था
ज्ञानार्था: meaning 'roots denoting
motion denote also knowledge'; cf.
Hem. Pari. 121 .
गदा a popular name given to the
scholarly commentary written by
Vaidyanātha Pāyaguṇḍe on the
Paribhāṣenduśekhara. The comm-
entary is called काशिका also, as it
was written in the town of Kāśī
(Vārāṇasī).
गदाधरचक्रवर्तिन् the reputed Naiyā-
yika who wrote numerous works
on the Navyanyaya; he has written
a few works like व्युत्पत्तिवाद, उपसर्ग-
विचार, कारकनिर्णय, सर्वनामविचार, प्रत्ययविचार
on Vyākaraṇa themes although the
treatment, as also the style, is
logical.
गन्तव्य that which should be under-
stood; the word is used in the
sense of अवगन्तव्य; cf. तत्र संबन्धादेतद्ग-
न्तव्यम् M. Bh. on I. 1.9.
गमक capable of conveying the sense;
intelligible; the word is often used
in grammatical works; cf. सापेक्षत्वेपि
गमकत्वात्समास:; cf. also अवश्यं कस्याचिन्नञ्स-
मासस्य असमर्थसमासस्य गमकस्य साधुत्वं
वक्तव्यम् । असूर्यपश्यानि मुखानि M. Bh. on
II. 1. 1.
गम्य to be understood, not expressed;
cf. यस्यार्थो गम्यते न च शब्दः प्रयुज्यते स गम्यः।
com. on Hem. II. 2. 62.
गम्यादि a class of words headed by
the word गमी which are formed
by the application of unādi affixes
in the sense of future time; e. g.
गमी ग्रामम्, अागामी, प्रस्थायी etc. cf.
Kāś. on P. III. 3. 3.
गरीयस् involving a special effort.The
word is frequently used by the
Vārttikakāra and old grammari-
|
ans in connection with some-
thing, which involves greater
effort and longer expression
and, hence, not commendable
in rules of the Shastra works
where brevity is the soul of 'wit';
cf. पदगौरवाद्योगवेिभागो गरीयान् Par. Śek.
Pari. 121. The word गुरु is also
sometimes used in a similar sense;
cf. तद् गुरु भवति M. Bh. I.1 Āhn. l
Vārt. 2.
गरीयस्त्व greater effort or prolixity of
expression which is looked upon
as a fault in connection with
grammar-works of the sūtra type
where every care is taken to make
the expression as brief as possible;
cf. अर्धमात्रालाघवेन पुत्रोत्सवं मन्यन्ते वैयाकरणाः
Par. Śek. Pari. 122. The word गौरव
is often used for गरीयस्त्व.
गर्गादिगण a class of words headed
by गर्ग to which the affix यञ्, ( य )
causing Vṛddhi to the first vowel
of the word, is added in the sense
of a descendant barring the son
or daughter; cf. गर्गादिभ्यो यञ् P. IV.
1.105 and the instances गार्ग्यः,
वात्स्यः, वैयाघ्रपद्यः, पौलस्यः cf. Kāś. on
P. IV. 1. 105.
गर्भवत् lit. just like a foetus. The
word is used in connection with
affixes that are placed like a foetus
in the midst of a word in spite
of the rule that affixes are to be
placed after; cf. परश्च P. III. 1. 2.
The affixes अकच् , टाप् etc. are of
this kind; cf. गर्भवट्टाबादयो भवन्ति । यथा
मध्ये गर्भस्तथा टाबादयः स्त्रीप्रत्ययाः प्रातिपदि-
कस्वाद्योर्मध्ये भवन्ति Sīradeva Par. Vṛ.
Pari. 91.
गलत्पद the word occurs in the Prātiś-
ākhya works in connection with
the definition of संक्रम, in the krama-
pātha. The word संक्रम means bring-
ing together two words when they
are combined according to rules
|
of Samdhi. (See the word संक्रम).
In the Kramapātha, where
each word occurs twice by repeti-
tion, a word occurring twice in a
hymn or a sentence is not to be
repeated for Kramapātha, but it
is to be passed over. The word
which is passed over in the
Kramapātha is called गलत्पद; e. g.
दिशां च पतये नमो नमो वृक्षेभ्यो हरिकेशेभ्यः
पशूनां पतये नमो नमः सस्पिञ्जराय त्विषीमतॆ
पथीनां पतये नमः । In the Kramapā-
tha पतये नमः and नमः are passed
over and पशूनां is to be connected
with सस्पिञ्जराय. The words पतये नमः
and नमः are called galatpada;
cf. गलत्पदमतिक्रम्य अगलता सह संधानं संक्रम;
V. Pr. IV. 197. There is no
गलत्पद in पदपाठ.
गवादि a class of words headed by
the word गो to which the affix
यत् is affixed in the senses men-
tioned in rules from P. V. 1, 5.
to V. 1. 36; e. g. गव्यम् , हविष्यम्
युग्यम् , मेध्यम् etc.; cf. Kas. on P.
V.1,2.
गवाश्वप्रभृति the dvandva compound
words गवाश्व, गवाविक गवैडक, अजाविक,
कुब्जमाणवक, पुत्रपौत्र मांसशोणित and
others which are to be declined
in the neuter gender and singular
number; cf. P. II. 4.11.
गहादि a class of words headed by
the word गह to which the tad-
dhita affix ईय (छ) is added in the
Saisika or miscellaneous senses;
e. g. गहीयम् , अन्तस्थीयम्; this class
called 'gahiya' is looked upon
as अाकृतिगण, and hence the
words वैणुकीयम् वैत्रकीयम् and the
like could be explained as correct;
cf Kas. on P. IV. 2.138.
गार्ग्य an ancient reputed grammarian
and possibly a writer of a Niru-
kta work, whose views, especially
in.connection with accents are
|
given in the Pratisakhya works,
the Nirukta and Panini's Asta-
dhyayi. Although belonging to
the Nirukta school, he upheld the
view of the Vaiyakaranas that all
words cannot be derived, but
only some of them: cf Nir. I.
12.3. cf, also V. Pr. IV. 167, Nir.
I. 3.5, III. 14.22: R. Pr. I. 13;
XIII. 12: P. VII. 3.99, VIII.
3.20, VIII. 4.69.
गालव an ancient grammarian and
niruktakara quoted by Panini;
cf. P. VI 3.60, VII. I.74, VII.
3,99, VIII. 4.67, cf. also Nir.
IV. 3.
गाव a technical term for the term
अाङ्ग (pertaining to the base in the
grammar of Panini); cf. वार्णात् गावं
बलीयः Kat. Pari. 72.
गिa conventional term for उपसर्ग in
the Jeinendra Vyākarana.
गित् marked with the mute letter ग्;
affixes that are गित् prevent guna
or vrddhi in the preceding word;
cf. क्क्ङिति च P. I. 1.5; cf. also M.
Bh. I. 3.10; III. 2.I39: cf. also
गकारोप्यत्र चर्त्वभूतो निर्दिश्यते Kas. on
P. I. 1.5.
गिरिधर writer of विभक्त्यर्थनिर्णय, a work
on syntax.
गीर्वाणपदमञ्जरी a grammatical work
written by वरदराज, pupil of Bha-
ttoji Diksita in the 17th century
who wrote many works on gram-
mar such as मध्यकौमुदी, लघुकौमुदी etc.
गुडादि a class of words headed by the
word गुड to which the taddhita
affix इक ( ठञ् ) is added in the
sense of 'good therein'; e.g. गौडिकः
इक्षुः, कौल्माषिको मुद्गः; cf. Kas. on p.
IV. 4.103.
गुण (1) degree of a vowel; vocalic
degree, the second out of the three
degrees of a vowel viz. primary
|
degree, guna degree and vrddhi
degree e.g. इ, ए and ऐ or उ, ओ
and औ. अ is given as a guna of अ;
but regarding अ also,three degrees
can be stated अ, अ and आ. In the
Pratisakhya and Nirukta ए is
called गुण or even गुणागम but no
definiti6n is given ; cf. गुणागमादेतन-
भावि चेतन R.Pr.XI.6;शेवम् इति विभीषि-
तगुणः। शेवमित्यपि भवति Nir.X.17: (2)
the properties of phonetic elements
or letters such as श्वास,नाद etc.: cf.R.
Pr. Ch.XIII : (3) secondary, sub-
ordinate;cf. शेषः,अङ्गं, गुणः इति समानार्थाः
Durgācārya on Nir. I.12: (4) pro-
perties residing in a substance just
as whiteness, etc. in a garment
which are different from the sub-
stance ( द्रव्य ). The word गुण is
explained by quotations from
ancient grammarians in the Maha
bhasya as सत्वे निविशतेsपैति पृथग्जातिषु
दृश्यते । अाघेयश्चाक्रियाजश्च सोSसत्त्वप्रकृतिर्गुणः ॥
अपर आह । उपैत्यन्यज्जहात्यन्यद् दृष्टो द्रव्यान्तरेष्वपि।
वाचकः सर्वलिङ्गानां द्रव्यादन्यो गुणः स्मृतः ;
M. Bh. on IV.1.44;cf also शब्दस्पर्श-
रूपरसगन्धा गुणास्ततोन्यद् द्रव्यम् ,M.Bh.on
V.1.119 (5) properties of letters
like उदात्तत्व, अनुदात्तत्व, स्वरितत्व, ह्र्स्व-
त्व, दीर्घत्व, प्लुतत्व, अानुनासिक्य etc.; cf.
भेदकत्वाद् गुणस्य । आनुनासिक्यं नाम गुणः
M. Bh. on I.1.1.. Vart, 13: (6)
determinant cf भवति बहुव्रीहौ तद्गुणसंवि-
ज्ञानमपि M. Bh. on P. I. 1.27; (7)
technical term in Panini's grarn-
mar standing for the vowels अ, ए
and ओ, cf. अदेङ्गुणः P.I.1.2. For the
various shades of the meaning of
the word गुण, see Mahabhasya on
V.1.119. " गुणशब्दोयं बह्वर्थः । अस्त्येव
समेष्ववयवेषु वर्तते ।...... चर्चागुणांश्च ।
गुणकर्मन् a term used by the an-
cient grammarians for the गौणकर्मन्
or indirect object of a verb.
having two objects.The word
is found quoted in the Mahabha-
ya; cf. कथिते लादयश्चेत्स्युः षष्टीं कुर्यात्तदा
|
गुणे । गुणे गुणकर्मणि । cf. also गुणकर्मणि
लादिविधि: सपरे M.Bh. on I. 4.51.
गुणकीर्ति a Jain writer of the thir-
teenth century who wrote a com-
mentary named कातन्त्रवृत्तिटिप्पणी on
दुर्गसिंहवृत्ति.
गुणभाविन् a vowel, liable to take the
guna substitute e. g. इ, उ, ऋ, लृ
and the penultimate अ; cf. यत्र
क्ङित्यनन्तरो गुणभाव्यस्ति तत्रैव स्यात् । चितम् ।
स्तुतम् । इह तु न स्याद्भिन्नः भिन्नवानिति ।
M. Bh. on I. 1.5.
गुणभेद difference in properties; cf.
एकोयमात्मा उदकं नाम तस्य गुणभेदादन्यत्वं
भवति । अन्यदिदं शीतमन्यदिदमुष्णमिति । M.
Bh. on I, 1.2.
गुणवचन lit. expressing quality; words
expressing quality such as शुक्ल,
नील, etc.; cf. गुणवचनब्राह्मणादिभ्यः कर्मणि च
P.V. 1.124. See page 369 Vyāka-
rana Mahabhasya Vol. VII. D.E.
Society edition, Poona.
गुणादि a class of words headed by
the word गुण, which, when pre-
ceded by the word बहु in a
Bahuvrihi compound, do not have
their last vowel acute; e. g. बहुगुणा
रज्जुः; बह्वक्षरं पदम् , etc. This class
of गुणादि words is considered as
आकृतिगण; cf. Kas, on P. VI. 2.176.
गुणिन् possessed of a quality ; cf इह
कदाचिद् गुणो गुणिविशेपको भवति । तद्यथा
पट: शुक्ल इति । कदाचिच्च गुणिना गुणो व्यपदिश्यते।
पटस्य शुक्ल इति। M. Bh. on I.4.21.
गुणीभूत subordinate, lit. which has
become subordinated, which has
become submerged, and therefore
has formed an integral part of
another; e. g. an augment ( अागम )
with respect to the word to which
it has been added;cf.यदागमास्तद्गुणी
भूतास्तद्ग्रहणेन गृह्यन्ते । M. Bh. I.1.20
Vart. 5; Par. Sek. Pari. 11.
गुरु (1) possessed of a special effort
as opposed to लघु; cf. तद् गुरु भवति
M. Bh. Ahnika 1। (2) heavy, a
|
technical term including दीर्घ
(long) vowel as also a ह्रस्व (short)
vowel when it is followed by a
conjunct consonant, (cf. संयोगे
गुरु । दीर्घ च। P. I. 4.11, 12) or a
consonant after which the word
terminates or when it (the vowel)
is nasalized; cf. Tai. Pr. XXII.
14, cf. also R. Pr. I. 5.
गुरुमत् a word containing a गुरु vowel
in it cf. इजादेश्च गुरुमतोनृच्छः P.III.1.36.
गुरुलघुता consideration of prolixity
and brevity of expression; cf.
तत्राप्ययं नावश्यं गुरुलघुतामेवोपलक्षायितुमर्हति .
M. Bh. on I.1.1.
गुरुलाघव the same as गुरुलघुता which
see above; cf पर्यायशव्दानां गुरुलाघवचर्चा
नाद्रियते Siradeva Pari. 125
गूढ held up or caught between two
words with which it is connected;
e.g. the word असि in इयं ते राट् यन्ता
असि यमनः ध्रुव: धरुणः। cf. V. Pr.
IV. 176.
गूढफक्किकाप्रकाश a short gloss on the
Siddhāntakaumudi of Bhattoji
Diksita, by Indradatta,
गूढभाववृत्ति a commentary on Rama-
candra's Prakriya Kaumudi by
Krsnasesa of the famous Sesa
family of grammarians. The
date of this Krsnasesa is the
middle of the sixteenth century.
For details about Krsnasesa and
the Sesa family see introduction to
Prakriyakaumudi B. S. S. No. 78.
गूढार्थदीपिनी a commentary ( वृत्ति ) on
the sutras of Panini by Sadasiva
Misra who lived in the seven-
teenth century.
गूढार्थप्रकाश a commentary on the
Laghusabdendusekhara by M. M.
Vasudeva Shastri Abhyankar
(1863-1942).
गृष्ट्यादि a class of words headed by
the word गृष्टि to which the taddhita
|
affix एय (ढञ्) is affixed in the sense
off 'an offspring' ( अपत्य): e g. गार्ष्टेयः,
हालेयः etc.; cf. Kas. on P. IV.1.136.
गृहीत included; cf. भ्राजादिसूत्र एव
गृहीतत्वात् Kas. on P. III. 2.178.
गोणिकापुत्र a grammarian whose wiew
in connection with the correct-
ness of the expressions नेताश्वस्य स्त्रुघ्नं
and नेताश्वस्य स्त्रुघ्नस्य is given by the
Mahabhasyakara in the words
'both expressions are justified'
( उभयथा गेणिकापुत्रः ). Nagesa has
observed that गेोणिकापुत्र is nobody
else but the Mahabhasyakara
himself; cf. गोणिकापुत्रः भाष्यकार इत्याहुः ।
NageSa's Uddyota on Mahabha-
syapradipa on P. I. 4.5I.
गोत्र lit. family. The word is used
by Panini in the technical sense
of a descendant except the son
or a daughter; cf. अपत्यं पौत्रप्रभृति
गोत्रम् P. IV. 1.162. The word
गोत्रापत्य is also used in the same
sense. The affix, which is found
many times in the sense of gotra,
barring the usual अण् , is यञ् ; cf.
गर्गादिभ्यो यञ् P. IV. 1.105.
गोत्रप्रत्यय affix in the sense of गोत्र;
cf. यश्चासौ गोत्रप्रत्ययः प्राप्नोति स एकः स्यात्
M. Bh.on IV. 1.93.
गोनर्दीय lit. inhabitant of Gonarda
which was the name of a district.
in the province of Oudh in the
days of the Mahabhasyakara
according to some scholars. Others
believe that Gonarda was the
name of the district named
Gonda at present The expression
गोनर्दीय अाह occurs four times in the
Mahabhasya where it refers to a
scholar of grammar in Patafijali's
time; cf M.Bh. on I. 1.21 ; I. 1.29;
III. I.92; VII. 2.101. As Kaiyata
paraphrases the words गेानर्दीयस्त्वाह
as भाष्यकारस्त्वाह, scholars say that
गेीनर्दीय was the name taken by the
|
Mahabhasyakara himself who was a
resident of Gonarda. Hari Diksita,
however, holds that गोनर्दीय was the
term used for the author of the .
Varttikas; cf. Brhacchabdaratna.
गोपवनादि a class of eight words head-
ed by the word गोपवन, the taddhita
affix in the sense of गोत्र ( i. e. a
descendant excepting a son or a
daughter) such as the affix यञ् or
अञू after which, is not elided in
the plural number; c. g. गौपवना:,
शौग्रवा: etc.; cf. Kas. on P. II. 4.67.
गोपाल ( देव ) known more by the
nickname of मन्नुदेव or मन्तुदेव who
lived in the eighteenth century
and wrote several commentary
works on well-known grammatical
treatises such as the Vaiyakarana-
bhusanasara, Laghusabdenduse-
khara, Paribhasendusekhara etc. He
is believed to have written a
treatise on Ganasutras also; (2)
a grammarian different from the
above मन्नुदेव who has written an
explanatory work on the Prati-
sakhyas;.(3) a scholar of grammar,
different from the above who is
believed to have written a gloss
named Visamarthadipika on the
Sarasvata Vyakarana at the end of
the sixteenth century.
गोपीचन्द्र known also by the name
गेयींचन्द्र who .has written several
commentary works on the gram-
matical treatises of the Samksipa-
tasara or Jaumāra school of Vya-
karana founded by Kramdisvara
and Jumaranandin in the 12th
century, the well-known among
them being the संक्षिप्तसाटीका, संक्षित-
सारपरिभात्रासूत्रटीका and तद्धितपरिशिष्टटीका.
He is believed to have lived in
the thirteenth century A. D.
गोपीनाथ a Bengali scholar of Katan-
sutra Grammar who is believed to
|
have written Katantraparisista-
praddyota.
गोयीचन्द्र see गोपीचन्द्र.
गोयुगच् a tad. affix applied to nouns
like अश्व, उष्ट्र, etc. in the sense of a
pair e. g. उष्ट्रगोयुगम्, अश्वयोयुगम्: cf.
द्वित्वे गोयुगच् Kas on P. V. 2.29.
गोल्ड्स्ट्यूकर a well known German
scholar who made a sound study
of Paini's Sanskrit Vyakarana and
wrote a very informative trea-
tise entitled 'Panini, his place in
Sanskrit Literature.' He lived in
the latter half of the 19th century.
गोवर्धन a grammarian who has writ-
ten a work on Katantra Grammar
called कातन्त्रकौमुदी and also a com-
mentary on the Ganaratnamaho-
dadhi of Vardhamana. A gloss on
the Unadisutras is also assigned to
Govardhana who is likely to be
the same as above.
गोविन्द writer of a commentary known -
as अम्बाकर्त्री by reason of that work
beginning with the stanza अम्बा
कर्त्रींó, on the Paribhasendusekhara
of Nagesa.
गोत्रिन्द ( चक्रवर्तिन् ) writer of Samasa-
vada, a short treatise on the sense
conveyed by compound words.
गोविन्दराम writer of 'Sabdadipika,' a
commentary on the Mugdha-
bodha Vyakarana of Bopadeva.
गोषदादि a class of words to which
the taddhita affix अक ( वुन् ) is
added in the sense of possession
provided the word so formed refers
to a chapter ( अध्याय ) or a section
( अनुवाक ) c. दैवासुरः, वैमुक्तः etc.; cf.
Kas. on P. V. 2.62.
गोष्ठच् a tad.affix applied to words like
गो and others in the sense of 'a pla-
ce'; cf. गेष्ठजादयः स्थानादिषु पशुनाम। पशुना-
मादिभ्य उपसंख्यानम् | गवां स्थानं गोगोष्ठम्,
अश्वगोष्ठम्: महिषीगोष्ठम् Kas.on P.v.2.29
|
It is very likely that words like
गोष्ठ, दघ्न and others were treated as
pratyayas by Panini and katyayana
who followed Panini, because they
were found always associated with
a noun preceding them and never
independently.
गौण (l) a word subordinate in syntax
or sense to another; adjectival;
उपसर्जनीभूतः (2) possessing a second-
ary sense, e. g the word गो in the
sense of 'a dull man';cf.गौणमुख्ययेार्मुख्ये
कार्यसम्प्रत्ययः, M. Bh. on I.1.15, I.4.
108, VI. 3. 46. See also Par.
Sek Pari. 15; (3) secondary, as
opposed to primary; cf. गौणे कर्मणि
दुह्यादे; प्रधाने नीहृकृष्वहाम् ।.
गौणमुख्यन्याय the maxim that the
primary sense occurs to the mind
earlier than the secondary sense,
and hence words used in the pri-
mary sense should be always
taken for grammatical operations
in preference to words in a secon-
dary sense. See the word गेोण.
गौतम an ancient sage referred to in
the Pratisakhya works as a Prati-
sakhyakara; cf. T.Pr. V.38.
गौरव greatness of effort; prolixity as
opposed to लाघव; cf. पर्यायशब्दानां
लाघवगौरवचर्चा नाद्रियते Par.Sek.Par.115;
cf. also पदगौरवाद्योगविभागो गरीयान् Par.
Sek. Pari. 121.
गौरादि a class of words to which the
affix ई ( ङीष्) is added to form the
feminine base; e.g. गौरी, मत्सी, हयी,
हरिणी; the class contains a large
number of words exceeding 150;
for details see Kasika on P.IV.1.
41; (2) a small class of eleven
words, headed by the word गौर
which do not have the acute
accent on the last syllable in a
tatpurusa compound when they are
placed after the preposition उप; cf.
P. VI.2.194.
|
ग्मिन् tad. affix in the sense of posses-
sion; cf. वाचो ग्मिनिः। वाग्मी । P.I.2.124.
ग्रस्त a fault of pronunciation due to
the utterance of a letter hindered
or held back at the throat; cf.
जिह्वामूलनिग्रहे ग्रस्तमेतत् R.Pr.XIV.3; cf.
also ग्रस्तं निरस्तमवलम्बितम् । ग्रस्तः जिह्वामूले
गृहीतः । अव्यक्त इत्यपरे । Pradipa on
M. Bh. Ahnika 1.
ग्रहण (1) technical term for a word
or प्रातिपदिक in Veda; cf. ग्रहणस्य च ।
गृह्यते इति ग्रहणं वेदस्थः इाब्दः । तत् त्रिविधम् ।
कार्यभाक्, निमित्तम्, उपबन्ध इति । तस्यापि
स्वरूपपूर्वकः अकारः आख्या भवति । Com. on
T.Pr.I.22; (2) citing, quoting; cf.
ग्रहणवता प्रातिपादिकेन न तदन्तविधिः Par.Sek.
Pari. 3I ; cf. also गृह्णन्तीति ग्रहणाानि
Com. on T.Pr.I.24. (3) mention,
inclusion; (4) employment in a
rule of grammar; cf. प्रातिपादिकग्रहणे
लिङ्गविशिष्टस्यापि ग्रहणम्. Par. Sek.Pari.71.
ग्रहणक citing or instructing the inclu-
sion ( ग्रहण) of certain other things
by the mention of a particular
thing; e. g. the rule अणुदित्सवर्णस्य
चाप्रत्ययः is a ग्रहणक rule as it advises
that the citing of the letters अ, इ,
उ, ऋ etc. includes the long and
protracted forms of अ, इ, उ etc; cf.
also ग्रहणकशास्त्रस्य सावर्ण्यविधिनिषेधाभ्यां
प्रागनिष्पत्ते; Sid. Kau. on अकः सवर्णे दीर्धः
V1. 1. 101.
ग्रहणवत् specifically mentioned in a
rule, individually mentioned; cf.
ग्रहणवता प्रातिपदिकेन तदन्तविधिर्नास्ति Par.
Sek.Pari.31. See the word ग्रहण.
ग्रहादि a class of roots headed by the
root ग्रह् to which the affix इन् (णिनि),
causing vrddhi to the preceding
vowel of the root, is added in the
sense of an agent: e.g. ग्राही, उत्साही,
स्थायी, मन्त्री etc.; cf Kas. on P.III.
1.134.
ग्रास a fault in the utterance of a
letter which makes it indistinct by
being held up at the throat.Seeग्रस्त.
|
ग्स्नु krt affix स्नु applied to the roots
ग्लै, जि and स्था in the sense of an
agent: cf. ग्लाजिस्थश्व क्स्नुः P.III.1.139.
घ् (1) fourth consonant of the gut-
tural class of consonants having
the properties कण्ठसंवृतत्व, घोष,
नादानुप्रदानत्व and महाप्राणत्व; (2)the con-
sonant घ at the beginning of a
tad. affix which is always chang-
ed into इय्; cf. P. VII. 1. 9; (3)
substitute for ह् at the end of roots
beginning with द्, as also of the root
नह् under certain conditions; cf.
P.VIII.2.32,33,34; (4) substitute
for the consonant व् of मतुव् placed
after the pronouns किम् and इदम्
which again is changed into इय् by
VII.1.9: e.g. कियान्, इयान्: cf. P.V.
2.40.
घ (l) consonant घ्, अ being added at
the end for facility of pronuncia-
tion; cf.Tai. Pr.I.21; (2) technical
term for the tad. affixes तरप् and
तमप्, cf. P.I.1.22, causing the short-
ening of ई at the end of bases
before it, under certain conditions,
cf. P. VI. 3.43-45, and liable to
be changed into तराम् and तमाम्
after किम्, verbs ending in ए, and
indeclinables; cf. P.V.4.11; (3)
tad. affix घ ( इय) in the sense of 'a
descendant' applied to क्षत्र, and in
the sense of 'having that as a
deity' applied to अपोनप्तृ अपांनप्तृ and
also to महेन्द्र and to the words राष्ट्र
etc., e.g. क्षत्रियः, अपोनाप्त्रिय:, अपांनप्त्रियः,
महेन्द्रियम्,राष्ट्रियः etc.; cf. P. IV.1.138,
IV.2.27, 29, 93; (4) tad. affix घ,
applied to अग्र, समुद्र and अभ्र in the
sense of 'present there', to सहस्र in
the sense of 'possession', to, नक्षत्र
without any change of sense, and
to यज्ञ and ऋत्विज् in the sense of
'deserving'; cf. P.IV.4.117,118,135,
|
136,141, V.1.71 ; (5) krt affix अ
when the word to which it has
been applied becomes a proper
noun i.e.a noun in a specific sense
or a technical term; cf. III.3. 118,
119,125.
घकार the consonant घ; see घ् .
घच् tad. affix इय, as found in the
word क्षेत्रिय; cf. क्षेत्रियच् परक्षेत्रे चिाकत्स्यः
P.V.2.92 and Kāsikā thereon.
घञ् krt affix अ causing the substitu-
tion of vrddhi for the preceding
vowel applied in various senses as
specified in P.III.3. 16-42, III.3.
45-55,III.3.120-125, e.g. पाद:, रोग:,
आयः, भावः, अवग्राहृः प्रावारः, अवतारः, लेखः
रागः etc
घन् tad. affix अ applied to the words
शुक्र, तुग्र, पात्र, and to multisyllabic
words in specified senses, causing
the acute accent on the first vowel
of the word so formed; cf.IV.2.26,
IV.4. 115, V.1.68, V.3.79, 80.
घन a variety of the क्रमपाठ or recital of
the Vedic hymns to show the serial
order of words there; one of the
eight vikrtis of the padapātha.
घस् tad, affix इय, occurring in Vedic
Literature,applied to the word ऋतु,
e.g. अयं ते योनिऋत्वीयः; cf. Kās on P.
V.1.106.
घि (1) a tech. term applied to noun
bases or Prātipadikas ending in इ
and उ excepting the words सखि
and पति and those which are term-
ed नदी; cf. P. I. 4.79; (2) a conven-
tional term for लधु ( a short vowel)
found used in the Jainendra
Vyakarana.
घित् affixes having the mute letter घ्,
as for instance, घञ् घ, घच् etc.which
cause the substitution of a guttu-
ral in the place of the palatal
letter च् or ज् before it: e.g. त्याग:
राग: cf. P.VII.3.52.
|
घिनुण् krt affix इन् causing the subs-
titution of Vrddhi for the preced-
ing vowel, as also to the penulti-
mate vowel अ, applied to the eight
roots शम्,तम्, दम् etc., as also to संपृच्,
अनुरुध् etc. and कस्, लष् लप्, etc.. e. g.
शमी,तमी, दमी, संपर्की, संज्वारी, प्रलापी etc.;
cf. P. III.2.141-145.
घिसंज्ञ (noun bases or Pratipadikas)
called or termed घि. See घि.
घु a tech. term applied to the roots
दा and धा, as also to those like दे or
दो which become दा by the substi-
tution of अा for the final diphthong
vowel, barring the root दाप् (to
cut) and दैप् (to purify): दाधा
ध्वदाप् P.I. 1.20.
घुट् a conventional term for the
first five case-affixes; cf. घुटि च Kat.
II. 1.68. The term घुट् is used in
the Katantra Vyakarana and cor-
responds to the term सर्वनामस्थान of
Panini.
धुरच् krt affix उर applied to the
roots भञ्ज् ,भास् and भिद् in the sense
of habit; e.g. भङ्गुरं काष्ठम्,भासुरं ज्योतिः,
मेदुर: पशुः: cf. Kas on P.III.2.161.
घोष an external effort in the pronun-
ciation of a sonant or a soft con-
sonant which causes depth of the
tone: cf. अन्ये तु घोषाः स्युः संवृताः etc.,
Sid. Kau. on VIII. 2. 1 .
घोषवत् a consonant characterized by
the property घोष， at the time of its
utterance; cf. तृतीयचतुर्थाः संवृतकण्ठाः
नादानुप्रदाना घोषवन्तः M.Bh. on P,I.1.9.
ङ् (1) fifth letter of the guttural class
of consonants having the properties
कण्ठसंवृतत्व, घोष, नादानुप्रदान, अल्पप्राणत्व
and अानुनासिक्य; (2) the consonant ङ्
getting the letter ，क as an aug-
18
|
ment added to it, if standing at
the end of a word and followed
by a sibilant, e. g. प्राङ्कूशेते cf. ङ्णो:
कुक् टुक् शरि P. VIII. 3.28; (3) the
consonant ङ् which, standing at
the end of a word and preceded
by a short vowel, causes the vowel
following it to get the augment
ङ् prefixed to it; e. g, प्रत्यङ्ङास्ते cf.
ङमो ह्रस्वादचि ङमुण् नित्यम् P. VIII.3.32.
ङ (1) fifth consonant of the guttural
class of consonants which is a
nasal ( अनुनासिक ) consonant; the
vowel अ being added at the end
for facility of pronunciation; cf. T.
Pr. I.21; (2) a conventional term
used for all the nasal consonants
in the Jainendra Vyakarana.
ङञ् a short term or Pratyahara
standing for the letters ङ्, ण्, न् ,
झ् , and भू , casually mentioned in
the Mahabhasya; cf. एतदप्यस्तु ञकारेण
ङञो ह्र्स्वादचि ङञुण्नित्यमिति । M. Bh. on
Mahesvara Sutras 8, 9.
ङम् a short term or Pratyahara for the
consonants ङ्, ण्, and न्. See ङ् (3).
ङमुद् augment ङम् i. e. ङ्, ण् or न्
prefixed to a vowel at the beginn-
ing of a word provided that vowel
is preceded by ङ्, ण् or न् standing
at the end of the preceding word.
See ङ् (3).
ङस् ending of the genitive case sing-
ular; स्य is substituted for ङस् after
bases ending in अ; cf P. IV. l . 2
and VII. 1. 12.
ङसि case-ending of the ablative
case, changed into अात् after bases
ending in अ and into स्मात् after
pronouns; cf.P.IV.1.2,VII.1.12,15.
ङि case-ending of the locative case,
changed into (a) अाम् after bases
termed Nadi, fem. bases ending in अा
and the word नी, (b) into औ after
bases ending in इ and उ, and (c)
into स्मिन् after bases of pronouns;cf.
|
P.IV. 1. 2, VII. 3. 116, 117, 118,
119 and VII. 1. 15, 16.
ङित् (l) affixes with the mute letter
ङ् attached to them either before
or after, with a view to preventing
the guna and vrddhi substitutes
for the preceding इ, उ, ऋ, or
लृ, as for example, the affixes
चङ्, अङ् and others (2) affixes con-
ventionally called ङित् after certain
bases under certain conditions;
cf. गाङ्कुटादिम्यो ञ्णिन्ङित् P. I. 2. 1-4;
(3) roots marked with the mute
letter ङ् signifying the application
of the Atmanepada terminations to
them: (4) substitutes marked with
mute ङ् which are put in the place
of the last letter of the word for
which they are prescribed as sub-
stitutes; (5) case affixes marked
with mute letter ङ् which cause the
substitution of guna to the last
vowel इ or उ of words termed घि.
ङी common term for the fem. affix ई,
mentioned as ङीप्, ङीष् or ङीन् by
Panini; cf P. IV. I. 5-8; IV. 1.
I5-39,40-65 and IV.1. 73.
डींन् fem. affix ई added to words in
the class headed by शार्ङ्गरव: cf. P.
IV. 1. 73. Words ending with this
affix ङीन् have their first vowel
accented acute.
ङीप् fem. affix ई which is anudatta
(grave) added (a) to words ending
in the vowel ऋ or the consonant
न् (cf.P.IV.1.5), (b) to words ending
with affixes marked with mute उ,ऋ
or लृ; cf.P.IV.1.6 (c) to words end-
ing with affixes marked with mute
ट् as also ending with the affixes ढ,
अण्, अञ्, द्वयसच् दघ्नच्,मात्रच्, तयप्, ठक्, ठञ्,
कञ् and क्वरप् (cf.P.IV.1.15) and to
certain other words under certain
conditions; cf. P. IV. 1.16-24.
ङीष् fem. afix ई, which is udatta,
applied to words in the class of
|
words headed by गौर, as also to
noun bases ending in affixes
marked with.mute ष्, as also to
words mentioned in the class
headed by बहुः cf. P.IV.1.41-46.It
is also added in the sense of 'wife
of' to any word denoting a male
person; cf. P. IV. 1. 48, and
together with the augment आनुक्
(आन्) to the words इन्द्र, वरुण etc e.g.
इन्द्राणी, वरुणानि, यवनानि meaning 'the
script of the Yavanas' cf. P. IV.
1.49. It is also added words
ending in क्रीत and words ending
in क्त and also to words expressive
of ' limbs of body ' under
certain conditions; cf. P.IV.1.
50-59 and IV. 1.61-65.
ङुट् augment ङ् mentioned as ङुठ्, in
Kasika, added to the vowel follow-
ing the consonant ङ् at the end of
a word. See ङमुट्.
ङे dative case termination changed
into य after bases ending in short
अ and into स्मै after pronouns; cf.
P.IV.1.2, VII, 1.13, 14.
ङ्यन्त noun bases ending with the
fem. affix ङी (ङीप्, ङीत्र्, or ङीन्); cf.
ङ्यन्तादित्येवं भविष्यति M.Bh. on P.I.
1.89 Vart. 16.
ङ्याप्पाद् a popular name given by
grammarians to the first pada of
the fourth adhyaya of Panini's
Astadyayi as the pada begins
with the rule ङ्याप्प्रातिपदिकात् IV.
I.I.
ङ्वनिप् krt affix वन् in the sense of
an agent referring to an activity
of past time, added to the roots सु
and यज्; e. g. सुत्वा, सुत्वानौ;यज्वा यज्वानौ
CF. P.III 2.103.
च् first consonant of palatal
class of consonants, possessed of
|
the properties, श्वास, अघोष, अल्पप्राण
and कण्ठविवृतत्व. च् at the beginning
of an affix is mute e. g. च्फञ्, cf.
चुट् P. I. 3.7; words, having the
mute letter च् (dropped), have
their last vowel accented acute
e. g. भङ्गुरम् । भासुरम् । cf. चित: VI.
1.163.
च (l) the letter च्, the vowel अ
being added for facility of utter-
ance, cf T. Pr. I. 21; (2) a Bra-
tyahara or short term standing
for the palatal class of consonants
च्, छ्, ज्,झ् and ञ्; cf इचशेयास्तालौ V.
Pr. I. 66; (3) indeclinable च call-
ed Nipata by Panini; cf. चादयोSसत्त्वे
P. I. 4.57, च possesses four senses
समुच्चय, अन्वाचय, इतरेतरयोग and समाहार
cf. Kas. on II. 2.29. See also
M. Bh. on II. 2.29 Vart. 15 for a
detailed explanation of the four
senses. The indeclinable च is
sometimes used in the sense of
'a determined mention' or ava-
dharana; cf. Kas. on II. 1.48 and
72. It is also used for the pur-
pose of अनुवृत्ति or अनुकर्षण i. e.
drawing a word from the previous
rule to the next rule; (cf. M. Bh.
on P. VI. 1.90) with a convention
that a word drawn thus, does not
proceed to the next rule; cf.
चानुकृष्टं नोत्तरत्र Par. Sek Pari. 78; (4)
a conventional term for अभ्यास
(reduplicative syllable) used in
the Jainendra Vyakarana; cf.
चविकारेषु अपवादा उत्सर्गान्न बाधन्ते Kat.
Pari. 75.
चकार the consonant च् , the vowel अ
being added for facility of utter-
ance and कार as an affix to show
that only the consonant च् is
meant there; cf. T. Pr. I. 16, 2l.
चकोर a grammarian who .wrote a
commentary on the 'Sabdalin-
garthacandrika of Sujanapandita.
|
चक्कनशर्मा a grammarian who is said
to have written a work named
Dhatusamgraha.
चक्रक a kind of fault in the appli-
cation of operations, resulting in
confusion; a fault in which one
returns to the same place not
immediately as in Anavastha but
after several steps; cf. पुनर्ऋच्छिभावः
पुनराट् इति चक्रकमव्यवस्था प्राप्नोति । M.
Bh. on I. 3.60 Vart 5.
चक्रकारक known by the name कारक-
चक्र also, a small work on syntax
attributed to वररुचि.
चक्रपाणि ( शेष ) a grammarian of
the Sesa family of the latter half
of the 17th century who held
views against Bhattoji Diksita
and wrote प्रौढमनोरमाखण्डन, कारकतत्व
and कारकविचार.
चक्रिन् a grammarian who has
written a small disquisition on
the correctness of the form जाग्रहीता.
See जाग्रहीतेतिवाद.
चङ् a Vikarana affix of the aorist
substituted for च्लि after roots
ending in the causal sign णि, as
also after the roots श्रि, द्रु and
others; this चङ् causes reduplication
of the preceding root form; cf. P.
III 1.48-50, e. g. अचूचुरत्, अशिश्रियत्;
cf. also P. VII. 4.93.
चङ्गदास a grammarian who has
written a work on the topic of
the five vrttis. The work is named
चङ्गवृति.
चङ्गवृत्ति a short treatise written by
वङ्गदास, dealing with the topic of
the five compact expressions or
Vrttis viz. कृत्, तद्वित, समास, एकशेष,
and सनादिधातु.
चङ्गुदास or चाड्गुदास a scholar of
grammar who has written an inde-
pendent work on Sanskrit Vyaka-
ana called वैयाकरणजीवातु. The trea-
|
tise is also known as चाङ्गुसूत्र or
चाङ्गु-व्याकरण.
चण् the indeclinable च (with ण् as a
mute letter added to it which
of course disappears) possessing
the sense of चेत् or condition. e.g.
अयं च मरिष्यति cf. Kas, on P. VIII.
1.30.
चणप् tad. affix चण in the sense of
वित्त (known by) applied to a word
which refers to that thing by which
a person is known. e. g. विद्याचणः,
केशचण:; cf. P. V. 2.26.
चण्डपण्डित writer of a Prakrta gram-
mar.He was known also as चन्द्र and
hence identified by some with
Candragomin.
चतुर्थ a term used by ancient gram-
marians for the fourth consonants
which are sonant aspirates, termed
झष् by Panini; cf. R. Pr. IV. 2. T.
Pr. I. 18, V. Pr. 1 54. R. T. 176.
वतुर्थी a term used by ancient gra-
mmarians for the dative case;
cf. उतो त्वस्मै तन्वं विसस्रे इति चतुर्थ्याम्;
Nir. I. 9.३.
चतुर्थीसमास the tatpurusa compound
with the first word in the dative
case in its dissolution; cf. वतुर्थीसमासे
सति पूर्वपदकृतिस्वरत्वेन भवितव्यम् M. Bh.
on II. 1.36.
चतुर्मात्र consisting of four matras or
moras, a short vowel consisting
of one matra, a long vowel of two
matras, and a protracted vowel of
three matras; cf. आन्तर्यतस्त्रिमात्र-
चतुर्मात्राणां स्थानिनां त्रिमात्रचतुर्मात्रा आदेशा
मा भूवन्निति । M. Bh. on Siva sutra
3.4.
चन्द्र a famous Buddhist Sanskrit
grammarian whose grammar
existing in the Tibetan script,
is now available in the Devana-
gar script. The work consists of
six chapters or Adhyayas in which
no technical terms or sanjnas like
|
टि, घु are found. There is no
section on Vedic Grammar and
accents. The work is based on
Panini's grammar and is believed
to have been written by Candra
or Candragomin in the 5th cen-
tnry A. D. Bhartrhari in his
Vakyapadiya refers to him; cf.
स नीतो बहुशाखत्वं चन्द्राचार्यादिभिः पुनः
Vakyapadiya II. 489. A summary
of the work is found in the Agni-
purana, ch. 248-258.
चन्द्रकला, called also कला, a well-
known commentary on Nagesa's
Laghusabdendusekhara by Bhai-
ravamisra who lived in the latter
half of the 18th century and the
first half of the nineteenth century.
चन्द्रकीर्ति a Jain grammarian of the
twelfth century A.D. who has
written a commentary named
Subodhini on the Sarasvata Vya-
karaha.
चन्द्रगोमिन् named also चन्द्र, a Bud-
dhist scholar who has written an
easy Sanskrit Grammar based on
the Astadhyayi of Panini. He is
believed to have lived in North
India in the fifth century A.D.
See चन्द्र.
चन्द्राचार्य a grammarian mentioned
by Bhartrhari in his Vakyapadiya
as one who took a leading part in
restoring the traditional explana-
tion of Panini's Vyakarana which,
by the spread of rival easy trea-
tises on grammar, had become
almost lost: cf. यः पतञ्जलिशिष्येभ्यो भ्रष्टो
ब्याकरणागमः । काले स दाक्षिणात्येषु ग्रन्थमात्रे
व्यवस्थित: ॥ पर्वतादागमं लब्ध्वा भाष्यबीजानुसा-
रिभि: । स नीतो बहुशाखत्वं चन्द्राचार्यादिभिः
पुनः ॥ Vakyapadiya II. 488-489.
See चन्द्र and चन्द्रगोमिन्.
चय् a short term (Pratyahara) for
the first letters ( क् , च् , ट् त्, and प्र)
of the five classes. Sometimes as
|
opined by पौष्करसादि, second letters
are substituted for these if a sibi-
lant follows them, e. g,अफ्सराः,
वध्सरः । cf. चयो द्वितीयाः शरि पौप्करसांद-
रिति वाच्यम् cf. S.K. on ङूणोः कुक्टुक् शरि
P. VIII.3.28.
चर् a short term (Pratyahara) for the
hard unaspirated surds and श्, ष्,
स्. The change of the second, third
and fourth letters into the first is
called चर्त्व: cf. अभ्यासे चर्च । खरि
च । वावसाने । Pan. VIII.4.54-56.
चरद् tad. affix चर in the sense of
'being (so and so) in the past'.
e.g. आढ्यचरः, fem. आढ्यचरी; cf. भूतपूर्वे
चरट् P.V.3.53.
चरण explained as a synonym of the
word शाखा which means a branch or
a school of Vedic Learning; cf. चरण-
शब्दाः कठकलापादय:: Kas. on P.IV.2.46.
चरितक्रिय having kriya or verb-
activity hidden in it. The term
is used by Bhartrhari in connec-
tion with a solitary noun-word or
a substantive having the force of a
sentence, and hence which can be
termed a sentence on account of
the verbal activity dormant in it.
e.g. पिण्डीम्; cf. वाक्यं तदपि मन्यन्ते यत्पदं
वरितक्रियम् Vakyapad.II. 326, and
चरिता गर्भीकृता आख्यातक्रिया यस्य तद्गर्भीकृतक्रि-
यापदं नामपदं वाक्यं प्रयुञ्जते ! Com. on
Vakyapadya II.326.
चरितार्थ which has got already a
scope of application; the term is
used by commentators in connec-
tion with a rule or a word forming
a part of a rule which applies in
the case of some instances and
hence which cannot be said to be
ब्यर्थ (superfluous) or without any
utility and as a result cannot be
said to be capable of allowing some
conclusion to be drawn from it ac-
cording to the dictum ब्यर्थं सज्ज्ञापयति
|
cf. अपवादो यद्यन्यत्र चरितार्थस्तर्ह्यन्तरङ्गेण
बाध्यते Par. Sek. Pari. 65.
चर्करीत a term used by the ancient
grammarians in connection with a
secondary root in the sense of
frequency; the term यङ्लुगन्त is used
by comparatively modern gramm-
arians in the same sense. The चर्क-
रीत roots are treated as roots of the
adadi class or second conjugation
and hence the general Vikarana
अ ( शप् ) is omitted after them.The
word is based on the 3rd pers.
sing form चर्करीति from .the root कृ
in the sense of frequency; e.g.
चर्करीति, चर्कर्ति, बोभवीति बोभोति; cf. चर्क-
रीतं च a gana-sutra in the gana
named ’adadi’ given by Panini in
connection with अदिप्रभृतिभ्य; शपः
Pan. II.4.72; cf. also चर्करीतमिति
यङ्लुकः प्राचां संज्ञा Bhasa Vr. on P. II.
4.72, The word चेक्रीयित is simi-
larly used for the frequentative
when the sign of the frequen-
tative viz. य ( यङ् ) is not elided.
See चेक्रीयित.
चर्करीतवृत्त a form of the frequenta-
tive or intensive. e.g. अापनीफणत् ,
चोष्कूयमाणः cf. अपनीफणदिति फणतेश्चर्करी-
तवृत्तम् । Nir. II. 28; चोष्कूयमाण इति
चोष्कूयतेश्चर्करीतवृत्तम् Nir.VI.22. See the
word चर्करीत.
चर्चा (1) splitting up of a word into
its component parts, which is gen-
eralty shown in the Padaptha by
अवग्रहं (S). The word, hence means
पदपाठ or recital by showing separa-
tely the constitutent words of the
Samhita or the running text of the
Veda. The word is used almost in
the same sense in the Mahabhasya
in respect of showing the words of
a sutra separately; cf. न केवलानि
चर्चापदानि व्याख्यानं वृद्धिः आत् ऐजिति ।
किं तर्हि । उदाहरणं प्रत्युदाहरणं वाक्याध्याहारः
इत्येतत्समुदितं व्याख्यानं भवति M.Bh. on
Mahesvara Sutra 1 Wart. 6l ; (2) a
|
repeated word; cf. इतिकरणात् पुरतो यत्
पुनः पदवचनं तत् चर्चाशब्देनोच्यते. Uvvata
on V. Pr. III.20; (3) a discussion
or a debate where consideration is
given to each single word; cf.
प्रर्यायशब्दानां लाघवगौरवचर्चा नाद्रियते Par.
Sek. Pari. 115.
चर्चागुण repetition of a word in the
पद्पाठ, क्रमपाठ, जटापाठ etc. where the
several Pathas appear to be called
चर्चा.In the पदपाठ a word in a comp-
ound is repeated twice, in the
क्रमपाठ every word is repeated twice,
in the जटापाठ, six times.
चंर्चापद component words of a runn-
ing text or of a compound word.
चर्त्व substitution of a hard consonant
or श्, ष्, स्, for soft consonants and
aspirates. See the word चर्.
चर्मशिरस् name of a Nirukta writer
quoted by Yaska; cf. Nir.III.15.
चवर्ग the group of consonants of the
palatal class,.wiz.च् , छ् , ज् , झ् , and ञ्.
The word च is used in the same
sense in the Pratisakhya works.See
the word च.
चाक्रवर्मण an ancient grammarian
whose view is quoted by Panini in
his Sutra ई 3 चाक्रवर्मणस्य P.VI.1.130.
चाङ्गुदास the same as चङ्गु or चाङ्गु or
चङ्गुदास,a grammarian who compo-
sed a compendium on grammar
called वैयाकरणजीवातु and also a com-
mentary on it.
चाङ्गुसूत्र a treatise on the grammar
Written by चाडगुदास in the Sutra
form,which was named वैयाकरणजीवातु
by him.
चाङ्गुव्याकरण the same as चाङ्गुसूत्र.
चातुःस्वार्य the view that there are
four accents-the udatta, the
anudatta, the svarita and the
pracaya - held by the Khandikya
and the Aukhiya Schools.
चातुरर्थ a tad- affix prescribed in the
|
four senses-तदस्मिन्नस्ति, तेन निवृत्तम् ,
तस्य निवासः and अदूरभवः mentioned
by Panini in IV.2.67-70; cf.अपत्यादि-
भ्यश्चातुरर्थपर्यन्तेभ्यः येन्येर्थाः स शेष: M.Bh.
on IV.2.92.
चातुरर्थिक the affixes prescribed in
the four senses mentioned in P.
IV.2.67-70. These taddhita affixes
are given in the Sutras IV.2.71 to
IV.2.91. The term चातुरर्थिक is
used for these afixes by commen-
tators on Panini sutras.
चातुर्वर्ण्यादि words mentioned in the
class headed by चातुर्वर्ण्य where the
tad. affix ष्यञ् is applied although
the words चतुर्वर्ण, चतुर्वेद and others
are not गुणवचन words to which
ष्यञ् is regularly applied by P.
V-1-124. cf. ब्राह्मणादिषु चातुर्वर्ण्यादीनामुप-
संख्यानम् P. V. I. 124 Vart. 1.
चादि a class of words headed by च
which are termed निपात by Panini
e g- च,वा,ह, एवम् नूनम्, चेत्, माङ्
etc.; cf. चादयोSसत्वे. P. I.4.57. For
the meaning of the word असत्त्व see
p.370 Vyakaranamahabhasya. Vol.
VII. published by the D. E.
Society, Poona.
चानश् krt affix अान applied to a root,
to signify habit, age or strength;
e. g. आत्मानं भूषयमाणाः । कवचं बिभ्राणाः ।
शत्रून्निघ्राना: cf. P. III. 2. 129.
चान्द्र name of a treatise on grammar
written by Candra, who is believed
to have been the same as Can-
dragomin. The Grammar is based
upon that of Panini, but it does
not treat Vedic forms and accents.
See the word चन्द्र above. For
details see pp. 375- 376 Patanjali
Mahabhasya. Vol. VII, D.E.
Society's Edition.
चान्द्रव्याकरणपद्धति name of a con-
mentary on the चान्द्रव्याकरण written
by अानन्ददत्त.
चाप् the fem. affix आ, applied to
|
words ending in the tad. affixes
ञ्यङ् and ष्यङ्; e. g. कौसल्या, वाराह्या,
गौकक्ष्या; cf Kas, on P. IV. 1. 74.
चारायण an ancient grammarian re-
ferred to by Patanjali in the Ma-
habhasya as a scholar who had a
line of pupils named after him;
cf. कम्बलचारायणीयाः M. Bh. on P.I.
1.73
चारितार्थ्य fulfilment of the object or
the Purpose. The word is used in
connection with a rule of grammar.
See चरितार्थ.
चार्थ the meaning of the indeclinable
च to convey which, as existing in
different individuals, the dvandva
compound is prescribed.Out of the
four senses possessed by the inde
clinable च, the Dvandva com-
pound is prescribed in two senses
viz.इतरेतरयोग and समाहार out of the
four समुच्चय, अन्वाचय, इतरेतरयोग and
समाहार: cf. कः पुनश्चेन कृतोर्थः समुच्चयो-
न्वाचय इतरेतरयोगः समाहार इति M. Bh.
on P.II.2.29; cf. also Candra
Vyakarana II.2.48
चालु tad. affix ( आलु ) applied to the
word हृदय, in the sense of posses-
sion, optionally along with the
affixes वत् इन् and इक. e.g. हृदयालुः,
हृदयवान् , हृदयी and हृदयिकः; cf. Kas:
on V.2. 122.
चिकीर्षित desiderative formation; a
term used by ancient grammarians
for the term सन्नन्त of Panini on the
analogy of the terms भवन्ती, वर्तमाना
etc. cf. अा इत्याकांर उपसर्ग; पुरस्तात्, चिकी-
र्षितज उत्तरः, अाशु शोचयतीति आशुशुक्षणिः
Nir. VI. 1.
चिकीर्षितज in the sense of the
desiderative; cf. चिकीर्षितादर्थाज्जातः
सन्नन्तादित्यर्थः Durgacarya on Nir.
VI.1.
चिच्चन्द्रिका name of a commentary
on the Paribhasendusekhara writ-
ten by Vishnu Shastri Bhat, in
|
reply to the treatise named दूषकरदो-
द्भेदः See विष्णुशास्त्रिन्. For details see
pp. 39, 40 of Vyakarana Maha-
bhasya Vol. VII. published by
the D.E. Society, Poona.
चिण् substitute इ causing vrddhi, in
the place of the aorist vikarana
affix च्लि, prescribed in the case of
all roots in the passive voice and
in the case of the roots पद्, दीप्, जन्
etc. in the active voice before the
affix त of the third pers. sing. in
the Atmanepada, which in its
turn is elided by P. VI. 4. 104.
cf P. III. 1.60-66.
चित् affixes or substitutes or bases
marked with the mute letter च् sig-
nifying the acute accent for the
last vowel; e. g. अथुच्, धुरच्, कुण्डिनच्
etc. cf P. VI. 1. 163, 164.
चित्करण marking with the mute letter
च्, signifying the acute accent of
the last vowel; cf. चापि चित्करणसाम-
र्थ्यादन्तोदात्तत्वं भविष्यति: M. Bh. on P.
III. 1.3 Vart, 16.
चित्प्रभा name of a commentary
on the Paribhasendusekhara by
ब्रह्मानन्दसरस्वती.
चिदस्थिमाला name of a commentary
on the Laghusabdendusekhara by
Vaidyanatha Payagunde,one of the
distinguished disciples of Nagesa-
bhatta.
चिद्रूपाश्रय named also चिद्रूपाश्रम who
wrote a learned commentary
named विषमी on the Paribhasen-
dusekhara of Nagesa-
bhatta
चिन्ता (1) view; theory. e.g. बाध्यसामान्य-
चिन्ता, बाध्यविशेषचिन्ता cf. इयमेव बाध्य-
सामान्यचिन्तेति व्यवह्रियते Par. Sek. Pari.
58; (2) a matter of scrutiny on a
suspicion; cf. चिन्ता च-मयतेरिदन्य-
तरस्याम् इत्यतोन्यतरस्यांग्रहणस्य सिंहावलोकन-
न्यायादनुव्रुत्तेः; Durghata Vr. on VI.4.69.
चिन्तामणि name of a commentary
|
चिन्तामणिप्रकाशिका चोरद् 144
on the Sutras of the Sakatayana
Vyakarana written by यक्षवर्मन्, It is
also called लधुवृत्ति.
चिन्तामणिप्रकाशिका a commentary on
the चिन्तामाणि of यक्षवर्मन्, written by
अाजतसेन in the twelfth century. See
विन्तामणि.
चिन्त्य questionable; contestable:
which cannot be easily admitted.
The word is used in connection
with a statement made by a sound
scholar which cannot be easily
brushed aside; cf. एतेन यत्कैयटे केचि-
दित्यादिना अस्यैव वाग्रहृणस्य तदनित्यत्वज्ञाप-
कतोक्ता सापि चिन्त्या, Par. Sekh. Pari.
93. 5.
चु the group of palatal consonants
viz. च्,छ्,ज्,झ् and ञ्; cf चुट् P.
I. 3. 7, चोः कुः VIII. 2. 30, कुहोश्चु:
VII. 4 62.
चुञ्चुप् tad.. affix चुञ्चु applied to a
word in the sense of 'well-known
by'; e. g. विद्याचुञ्चु:; cf. P.V. 2.26.
चुरादि a class or group of roots
headed by the root चुर्, familiarly
known as the tenth conjugation.
चुल्लिभट्टि a grammarian who is suppo-
sed to have written a gloss ( वृत्ति )
on the Sutras of Panini; cf. तत्र च
वृतिः पाणिनिप्रणीतानां सूत्राणां विवरणं चुल्लिभट्टि-
नल्लूरादि- ( V. 1. निर्लूरादि-) विरचितम् ,
Nyasa, on the benedictory verse of
Kasika: वृत्तौ भाष्ये तथा घातुनामपारायणा-
दिषु at the very beginning.
चूर्णि a gloss on the Sutras of Panini
referred to by Itsing and Sripati-
datta, Some scholars believe that
Patanjali's Mahabhasya is referred
to here by the word चूर्णि, as it fully
discusses all the knotty points.
Others believe that चूर्णि,stands for
the Vrtti of चुल्लिभाट्टि. In Jain Reli-
gious Literature there are some
brief comments on the Sutras which
are called चूर्णि and there possibly
|
was a similar चूर्णि on the sutras of
Panini.
चेकीयित the sign य ( यङ् of Panini )
of the frequentative or intensive.
The word is mostly used in the
Katantra Grammar works cf.
धातोर्यशब्दश्चेक्रीयितं क्रियासमभिहारे, Kat.
III. 2. 14. The word चेक्रीयित is used
in the Mahabhasya in the sense of
यङन्त where Kaiyata remarks थडः
पूर्वाचार्यसंज्ञा चेकीयितमिति cf. प्रदीप on
M.Bh. on P. IV.1.78 Vartika. The
word चेकीयितान्त means यङन्त in
Panini’s terminology meaning a
secondary root derived from the
primary root in the sense of in-
tensity. The word चर्करीतान्त is used
for the frequentative bases in which
य, the sign of the frequentative, is
omitted. See चर्करीत।
चेलु tad. affix एलु applied to the word
हिंम in the sense of 'unable to
bear ' e. g, हिमेलुः, cf. P. V. 2. 122
Vart. 7.
चोक्कनाथ a southern grammarian of
the seventeenth century who has
composed in 430 stanzas a short
list of the important roots with
their meaning. The work is called
धातुरत्नावली.
चोदक (1) an objector; the word is co-
mmon in the Commentary Litera-
ture where likely objections to a
particular statement are raised,
without specific reference to any
individual objector, and replies are
given, simply with a view to mak-
ing matters clear; (2) repetition
of a word with इति interposed: cf.
चेदकः परिग्रहः इत्यनर्थान्तरम्. See अदृष्टवर्ण
and परिग्रह.
चोरद् the crude form of the word चोर
with the mute consonant ट् added
to signify the addition of ङीप् to
form the feminine base e. g. चोरी;
cf. P. IV. 1. 15.
|
चौरादिक a root belonging to the tenth
conjugation of roots ( चुरादिगण ) ; cf.
अामः इति चौरादिकस्य णिचि वृद्धौ सत्यां भवति ।
Kas. on P. VII. 3. 34.
च्छ् the consonant छ् with च् prefixed,
for which श् is substituted by च्छ्घोः
शूडनुनासिके च P. VI. 4. 19.
च्फञ् tad. affix अायन causing a vrddhi
substitute for the first vowel of the
word to which it is added, The
affix ( च्फञ् ) is added in the sense
of 'a descendant except the direct
son or daughter’ to words कुञ्ज and
others; cf. P. IV. I. 98.
चिल the sign of the aorist ( लुड् ) for
which generally सिच् and अङ्, क्स, चङ्
and चिण् are substituted in specified
cases; cf. P. III. 1. 43-66.
च्वि tad. affix ( of which nothing re-
mains ) to signify the taking place
of something which was not so
before; after the word ending in
च्वि the forms of the root कृ, भू or
असू have to be placed; e. g. शुक्ली-
करोति; cf. P. V. 4. 50
च्व्यर्थ possessing the sense of च्वि. See
च्वि cf. P. III. 2. 56 also P. III.
3. 127 Vart. 1.
छ् the second consonant of the
palatal class of consonants ( चवर्ग ),
which is possessed of the properties
श्वास, अघोष, मह्याप्राण and कण्ठविवृतकारित्व.
छ् , placed at the beginning of
affixes, is mute; while ईय् is substi-
tuted for छ् standing at the begi-
nning of taddhita affixes; cf. P. I.
3.7 and VII. 1.2. छ् at the end
of roots has got ष्， substituted for
it: cf. P. VIII. 2.36.
छ tad. affix ईय, added ( 1 ) to the
words स्वसृ, भ्रातृ and to words end-
ing with the tad. affix फिञ्: cf. P.
19
|
IV. 1.143,144 and 149; (2) to the
dvandva compound of words
meaning constellations,to the words
अपोनप्तृ, अपांनप्तृ, महेन्द्र, द्यावापृथिवी, शुनासीर
etc. as also to शर्करा, उत्कर , नड etc. in
certain specified senses, cf. P. IV.
2.6, 28, 29, 32, 48, 84, 90 &91 ;(3)
to words beginning with the vowel
called Vrddhi (आ,ऐ or औ),to words
ending with गर्त, to words of the
गह class, and to युष्मद् and अस्मद् in
the शैषिक senses, cf. P. IV. 3.114,
137-45 and IV. 3.1 ; (4) to the
words जिह्वामूल, अङ्गुलि, as also to
words ending in वर्ग in the sense of
'present there '; cf. P.IV.3.62-64;
(5) to the words शिशुक्रन्द, यमसम,
dvandva compounds, इन्द्रजनन and
others in the sense of 'a book
composed in respect of', cf. P.IV.
3.88; (6)to words meaning warrior
tribes, to words रैवतिक etc, as also
अायुध, and अग्र, in some specifi-
ed senses: cf P.IV. 3.91, 131, IV.
4.14, 117; (7) to all words barring
those given as exceptions in the
general senses mentioned in the
sec. V.I.1-37; (8) to the words पुत्र,
कडङ्कर, दक्षिण, words ending in वत्सर,
अनुप्रवचन etc. होत्रा, अभ्यमित्र and कुशाग्र
in specified senses; cf. P. V. 1. 40,
69,70,91,92, 111,112,135, V. 2.17,
V.3.105; (9) to compound words
in the sense of इव; e. g. काकतालीयम् ,
अजाकृपाणीयम् etc. cf. V. 3. 106;and
(10) to words ending in जति and
स्थान in specified senses; cf. P. V.4,
9,10.
छकार the letter छ, the word कार being
looked upon as an affix added
to the consonant छ् which, by the
addition of अ, is made a complete
syllable; cf. T. Pr. I. 16, 21.
छण् tad. affix ईय causing the vrddhi
substitute for the first vowel of the
word to which it is added. छण् is
added (1) to the words पितृत्वसृ and
|
मातृप्वसृ in the sense of अपत्य; cf. P
IV. 1.132, 134; (2) to the words
कृशाश्व,अरिष्ट and others as a चातुरर्थिक
affix: cf. P. IV. 2.80; (3) to the
words तित्तिरि, वरतन्तु, खण्डिक and उख
in the sense of 'instructed by', cf.
P.IV.3.102; and (4) to the word
शलातुर in the sense of 'being a
national of' or 'having as a domi-
cile.' e. g. शालातुरीयः
- cf. P. IV. 3.94,
छन्दस् (1) Vedic Literature in general
as found in the rule बहुलं छन्दसि
which has occurred several times
in the Sutras of Panini, cf. छन्दो-
वत्सूत्राणि भवन्ति M. Bh. on I.1.1, and
I.4.3; cf. also V. Pr. I. 1, 4; (2)
Vedic Samhita texts as contrasted
with the Brahmana texts; cf.छन्दो-
ब्राह्मणानि च तद्विषयाणि P, IV.2.66; ()
metre, metrical portion of the
Veda.
छन्दोभाषा Vedic language as contrast-
ed with भाषा (ordinary language in
use); cf. गुरुत्वं लघुता साम्यं ह्रस्वदीर्घप्लुतानि
च...एतत्सर्व तु विज्ञेयं छन्दोभाषां विजानता
T. Pr. XXIV. 5.
छ्पाद a popular name given by gra-
mmarians to the first pada of the
fifth Adhyaya of Painis Asta-
dhyayi as the pada begins with
the rule प्राक् क्रीताच्छः P. V. 1.1.
छव्' a short term or Pratyahara stand-
ing for छ्, ठ्, थ्, च्, ट् and त्: cf.
नश्र्छन्यप्रशान् P. VIII.3.7.
छस् tad. affix ईय added to the word
भवत् in the general शैषिक senses,
e. g. भवदीयः; cf P. IV.2.115. The
mute letter स् has been attached to
the affix छस् So that the base भवत्
before it could be termed pada
(cf. सिति च P, I.4.16) and as a
result have the consonant त् chang-
ed into द् by P. VIII.2.39.
छान्दस found in the Vedic Literature;
Vedic; cf छान्दसा अपि क्वचिद् भाषायां
प्रयुज्यन्ते Bhasavrtti on P. IV.4.143;
|
cf. also छान्दसमेतत् । दृष्टानुविधिश्च च्छन्दसि
भवति; M. Bh. on I.1.5.
छाया a learned commentary on Na-
gesa's Mahabhasyapradipoddyota
written by his pupil बाळंभट्ट (possibly
the same as, or the son of, वैद्यनाथ
पायगुण्डे) who lived in the eighteenth
century.
छुच्छुकभट्ट a grammarian who wrote
a short gloss called कातन्त्रलघुवृत्ति on
the Katantrasutras.
ज् third consonant of the palatal class
of consonants, possessed of the
properties नाद, घोष, अल्पप्राण and कण्ठ-
संवृत्तकारित्व. ज् at the beginning of
affixes is mute in Panini's grammar.
ज the consonant ज् with अ added to
it for facility of pronunciation; cf.
T. Pr. I..21. See ज्.
जगद्धर a poet and grammarian of
Kasmira of the fourteenth century
who wrote a commentary named
बालबोधिनी on the Katantra Sutras.
जगन्नाथ (1) the well-known poet and
scholar of Vyakarana and Alam
kara who wrote many excellent
poetical works. He lived in the
sixteenth century. He was a pupil
of कृष्णशेष and he severely criticised
the views of Appaya Diksita and
Bhattoji Diksita. He wrote a sort
of refutation of Bhattoji's commen-
tary Praudha-Manorama on the
Siddhānta Kaumudi, which he
named प्रौढमनेारमाखण्डन but which is
popularly termed मनोरमाकुचमर्दन. His
famous work is the Rasaganga-
dhara on Alankrasastra; (2)
writer of a commentary on the
Rk-Pratisakhya by name Varna-
kramalaksana; (3) writer of Sara-
pradipika, a commentary on the
Sarasvata Vyakarana.
|
जटा a kind of Vedic recital wherein
each word is repeated six times.
जटा is called one of the 8 kinds
( अष्टविकृति) of the Kramapatha,
which in its turn is based on the
Padapatha; cf. जटा माला शिखा रेखा
ध्वजो दण्डो रथो घनः। अष्टौ बिकृतय: प्रोक्ताः
क्रमपूर्वा मनीषिभिः । जटा is defined as
अनुलोमविलोमाभ्यां त्रिवारं हि पठेत् क्रमम् ।
विलोमे पदवत्संधिः अनुलोमे यथाक्रमम् । The
recital of ओषधयः संवदन्ते संवदन्ते सोमेन can be
illustrated as ओषधयः सं, समोषधयः,
ओषधयः सं, सं वदन्ते, वदन्ते सं, सेवदन्ते,
वदन्ते सोमेन,सोमेन वदन्ते , वदन्ते सोमेन ।
जयकृष्ण a famous grammarian of the
Mauni family who lived in Vara-
nasi in the seventeenth century.
He wrote विभक्त्यर्थनिर्णय, स्फोटचन्द्रिका, a
commentary on the Siddhanta-
kaumudi called सुबोधिनी and a
commentary on the Madhya Kau-
mudi named विलास. He wrote a
commentary on the Laghukau-
mudi also.
जयदेव a grammarian, ( of course
different from well-known
poet), to whom a small treatise on
grammar by name इष्टतन्त्रव्याकरण is
attributed.
जयन्त (1) author of तत्वचन्द्र a commen-
tary on पाणिनिसूत्रवृत्ति written by
Vitthala; (2) writer of a commen-
tary named Vadighatamudgara on
the Sarasvataprakriya.
जयरामभट्टाचार्य a famous Bengalee
scholar of Vyakarana and Nyaya
who has written a small treatise
dealing with syntax. The treatise
is named कारकवाद.
जयादित्य one of the famous joint
authors ( जयादित्य and वामन ) of the
well-known gloss ( वृत्ति ) on the
Sutras of Panini, popularly called
काशिकावृत्ति. As the काशिकावृत्ति is men-
tioned by It-sing, who has also
mentioned Bhartrhari's Vakya-
|
padiya, as a grammer treatise
Written some 40 years before his
visit, the time of काशिकावृत्ति is fixed
as the middle of the 7th century
A.D. Some scholars believe that
जयादित्य was the same as जयापीड a
king of Kasmira and बामन was his
minister. For details, see pp. 386-
388 of the Vyakarana Mahabhasya
Vol. VII published by the D.E.
Society, Poona. See काशिका.
जयानन्द a Jain grammarian of the
fourteenth century who wrote a
commentary named उद्धार on the
लिङ्गानुशासन of Hemacandra
जश् a short term ( प्रत्याहार ) signifying
the soft inaspirate class consonants
ज्,ब्,ग्,ड् and द्.
जश्त्व substitution of a जश् consonant
prescribed by Panini for any con-
sonant excepting a semi-vowel or
a nasal, if followed by any fourth
or third consonant out of the class
consonants, or if it is at the end of
a pada; cf. P.VIII. 2.39, VIII.4.
53.
जश्भाव the same as जश्त्व, which see
above.
जस् case termination अस् of the nom.
plural: cf.P. IV. 1.2.
जसि case termination अस् of the
nom. plural mentioned as जस् by
Panini in IV. 1.2, but referred to
as जसि by him; cf. P.IV.1.31 and
VII.1.50.
जहत्स्वार्था ( वृत्ति ) a composite ex-
pression where the constituent
members give up their individual
sense. In compound words such
as राजपुरुष in the sentence राजपुरुषमा-
नय the word राजन् gives up its
sense in as much as he, the king,-
is not brought; पुरुष also gives up
its sense as every man is not
brought. It is of course to be
noted that although the sense is
|
given up by cach word, it is not
completely given up: cf जहदप्यसेो
स्वार्थ नात्यन्ताय जहाति; M. Bh. on P.
II. 1.1. Vart. 2. For detailed
explanation see Mahabhasya on
P. II. I. I. Vart. 2.
जहद्धर्मत्व abandonment or giving up
of properties in the case of a
word included in a वृत्ति or compo-
site expression; cf. जहद्धर्मत्वाच्छब्दप्रवृत्तेः
Durghata Vrtti on P. II. 2.6.
जाग्रहितेतिवाद a short disguisition on
the correctness of the word जाग्रहीता,
written by a grammarian named
Cakrin; cf. भट्टोजिदीक्षितग्राहग्रस्तं माधव-
दिग्गजम्। अमूमुचत् सत्यवर्यश्चक्री चक्रिप्रसादभाक्,
colophon.
जात born or produced there or then;
one of the senses in which the
tad. affixes, called जातार्थक, are
prescribed by Panini in the sutra
तत्र जातः and the following; cf. P.
IV. 3.25-37.
जातबहिरङ्गासिद्धत्व invalidity of a Ba-
hiranga operation that has al-
ready taken place by virtue of
the Antaranga-paribhasa-असिद्धं
बहिरङ्गमन्तरङ्ङ्गे- that which is ' bahi-
ranga' is regarded as not having
taken effect when that which is
'antarahga' is to take effect. For
details see Par. Sek. Paribhasa 50.
जाताभीयासिद्धत्व invalidity of a gra-
mmatical operation prescribed by
a rule in the अाभीय section (P. VI.
4.22 upto the end of the fourth
pada ) which, although it has taken
place, is to be looked upon as not
having taken place when any other
operation in the same section is
to take effect. See आभीयासिद्व.
जाति genus; class;universal;the notion
of generality which is present in
the several individual objects of the
same kind. The biggest or widest
notion of the universal or genus is
|
सत्ता which, according to the gra-
mmarians, exists in every object
or substance, and hence, it is the
denotation or denoted sense of
every substantive or Pratipadika,
although on many an occasion
vyakti or an individual object is
required for daily affairs and is
actually referred to in ordinary
talks. In the Mahabhasya a
learned discussion is held regard-
ing whether जाति is the denotation
or व्यक्ति is the denotation. The
word जाति is defined in the Maha-
bhasya as follows:- आकृतिग्रहणा
जातिर्लिङ्गानां च न सर्वभाक् । सकृदाख्यातनि-
र्गाह्या गोत्रं च चरणैः सह ॥ अपर आह ।
ग्रादुभीवविनाशाभ्यां सत्त्वस्य युगपद्गुणैः । असर्व-
लिङ्गां बह्वर्थो तां जातिं कवयो विदुः M. Bh.
on IV. 1.63. For details see
Bhartphari's Vakyapadiya.
जातिपक्ष the view that जाति, or genus
only, is the denotation of every
word. The view was first advo-
cated by Vajapyayana which was
later on held by many, the Mima-
msakas being the chief supporters
of the view. See Mahabhasya
on P. I. 2.64. See Par. Sek. Pari.
40.
जातिपदार्थवाद see जातिपक्ष.
जातिस्वर the acute accent for the
last vowel of a word ending with
क्त of the p.p.p. denoting a genus;
cf. P. VI. 2.170.
जातीयर् tad. affix जातीय in the sense
of प्रकार or variety; e. g. पटुजातीयः,
मृदुजातीयः; cf Kas. on P. V. 3.69.
Originally जातीय was possibly an
independent word, but as its use,
especially as a noun, was found
restricted, it came to be looked
upon as an affix on the analogy
of the affixes कल्प, देश्य, देशीय and
others.
जात्य name of a variety of the Sva-
|
rita or circumflex accent; the
original svarita accent as contra-
sted with the svarita for the grave
which follows upon an acute
as prescribed by P. in VIII. 4.67,
and which is found in the words
इन्द्रः, होता etc. The jatya svarita is
noticed in the words स्वः, क्व, न्यक्,
कन्या etc.; .cf. उदात्तपूर्वं स्वरितमनुदात्तं
पदेक्षरम्। अतोन्यत् स्वरितं स्वारं जात्यमाचक्षते
पदे॥ जात्या स्वभावेनैव उदात्तानुदात्तसंगतिं
विना जातो जात्यः । तं जात्यमाचक्षतै व्याडिप्रभृयः
R. Pr. and com. III. 4.
जामि tautologous, unnecessarily
repeated; the word is defined and
illustrated by Yaska as;-तद्यत्समान्या-
मृचि समानाभिव्याहारं भवति तज्जामि भवतीत्येकं ।
मधुमन्तं मधुश्चुतमिति यथा Nir.x.16.2. For
other definitions of the word जामि
conveying practically the same
idea, cf. Nir.X. 16. 3 and 4.
जाहच् tad. affix added in the sense
of 'a root' to the words कर्ण, अक्षि, नख,
मुख and others; e. g. कर्णजाहम् cf. P.
V.2.24.
जि a conventional term for संप्रसारण
used in the Jainendra Vyakarana.
जित् (l) lit. affix marked with the
mute letter ज्; e. g. जस्, जसि, जुस्.
the word जित् is not however found
used in this sense; (2) a word
supposed to be marked with the
mute indicatory letter ज्.The word
is used in this sense by the Vartti-
kakara saying that such a word
does not denote itself but its syno-
nyms; cf. जित् पर्यायवचनस्यैव राजांद्यर्थम्
P.I.1.68 Vart. 7. In the Sutra सभा
राजामनुष्यपूर्वा P.II. 4. 23, the word
राजन् is supposed to be जित् and
hence it denotes इन्, ईश्वर etc.; but
not the word राजन् itself; (3) In the
Pratisakhya works जित् means the
first two consonants of each class
(वर्ग); e.g. क्, ख्,च्, छ्. etc. which are
the same as खय् letters in Panini's
|
terminology; cf. द्वौ द्वौ प्रथमौ जित्, V.
Pr.I.50;III.13.
जिनचन्द्र author of the Siddhantaratna,
a commentary on the Sarasvata
Sutras,
जिनेन्द्रबुद्धि a reputed Buddhist Gra-
mmarian of the eighth century
who wrote a scholarly comment-
ary on the Kasikavrtti ofJayaditya
and Vamana. The commentary is
called न्यास or काशिकाविवरणपञ्जिका and
the writer is referred to as न्यासकार
in many later grammar works
Some scholars identify him with
पूज्यपाददेवनन्दिन् the writer of the जैनेन्द्र-
व्याकरण, but this is not possible as
पूज्यपाददेवनन्दिन् was a Jain Gramma-
rian who flourished much earlier.
जिन्निर्देश mention as जित्: cf. जिन्निर्देशः
कर्तव्यः M.Bh. on I.1.68 Vart. 7.See
जित्.
जिह्वा used in the sense of जिह्वाग्र, the
tip of the tongue.
जिह्वामूलस्थान (l)having the root of the
tongue as the place of its produc-
tion;the phonetic element or letter
called जिह्वामूलीय; (2) name given to
that phonetic element into which
a visarga is changed when follow-
ed by क् or ख्; cf X क इति जिह्वामूलीयः
V.Pr.VIII.19. The जिह्वामूलीय letter
is called जिह्व्य also; see Nyasa on I.
1.9. The Rk. Pratisakhya looks
upon ऋ, लृ, जिह्वामूलीय, and the gut-
tural letters as जिह्वामूलस्थान.
जिह्वामूलीय produced at the root of
the tongue the same as जिह्वामूलस्थान,
which see above.
जुक् augment ज् added to the root वा
before the causal sign णिच् when
the root means shaking;cf.वो विधूनने
जुक् P. VII. 3.38.
जुमरनन्दिन् a grammarian of the
fourteenth century A. D. who '
revised and rewrote the.grammar
संक्षिप्तसार and the commentary named
|
रसवती on it, which were composed
by क्रमदीश्वर in the thirteenth
century. The work of जुमरनन्दिन् is
known as जौमारव्याकरण.
जुस् verbal termination उस् substitut-
ed for the original झि of the third
pers. pl, in certain cases mentioned
inP.III.4.108,109,110,111, and 112.
जुस्भाव the transformation of झि into
जुस् ; the substitution of जुस् for झि.
The term is often used in the
Mahabhasya; cf. M. Bh. on I.
1.57, I.1.63, III.1.43 etc. See जुस्.
जुहोत्यादिगण the class of roots headed
by हु after which the vikarana Sap
is elided and the root is reduplica-
ted in the four conjugational tenses;
third conjugation of roots.
जैनेन्द्रव्याकरण name of a grammar
work written by Pujyapada Deva-
nandin, also called Siddhanandin,
in the fifth century A.D. The
grammar is based on the Astadh-
yay of Panini,the section on Vedic
accent and the rules of Panini exp-
laining Vedic forms being,of course,
neglected. The grammar is called
Jainendra Vyakarana or Jainendra
Sabdanusasana. The work is avail-
able in two versions, one consisting
of 3000 sutras and the other of 3700
sutras. it has got many comment-
aries, of which the Mahavrtti
written by Abhayanandin is the
principal one. For details see
Jainendra Vyakarana, introduction
published by the Bharatiya Jnana-
pitha Varadasi.
जैनेन्द्रव्याकरणमहावृत्ति name of a com-
mentary on the Jainendra Vyaka-
rana, written by Abhayanandin in
the ninth century A. D. see जैनेन्द्र-
व्याकरण above.
जौमार ( व्याकरण ) a treatise on vya-
'karana written by Jumaranandin.
See जुमरनन्दिन् above The Jaumara
|
Vyakarana has no Vedic section
dealing with Vedic forms or ac-
cents,but it has added a section on
Prakrita just as the Haima Vya-
karaha.
जौमारपरिशिष्ट a supplement to the
Jaumara Vyakarana written by
Goyicandra. See गीयीचन्द्र.
जौमारसंस्करण the revised version by
Jumuranandin of the original
grammar treatise in verse called
संक्षिप्तसार written by KramadiSvara,
The Jaumarasamskarana is the
samc as.jaumara Vyakarana, which
see above.
जौहोत्यादिक a root belonging to the
जुहोत्यादिगण or the third conjugation.
ज्ञानदीपिका name of a commentary on
Amarasimha’s Amarakosa written
by Sripati (Chakravartin) in the
14th century.
ज्ञापक lit.indirect or implicit revealer;
a word very commonly used in
the sense of an indicatory state-
ment. The Sutras, especially those
of Pinini, are very laconic and it is
believed that not a single word in
the Sutras is devoid of purpose.
If it is claimed that a particular
word is without any purpose, the
object of it being achieved in
some other way, the commenta-
tors always try to assign some pur-
pose or the other for the use of the
word in the Sutra. Such a word
or words or sometimes even the
whole Sutra is called ज्ञापक or indi-
cator of a particular thing. The
Paribhasas or rules of interpreta-
tion are mostly derived by indica-
tion(ज्ञापकसिद्ध) from a word or words
in a Sutra which apparently appear
to be व्यर्थ or without purpose, and
which are shown as सार्थक after the
particular indication ( ज्ञापन ) is
drawn from them. The ज्ञापक is
|
shown to be constituted of four
parts, वैयर्थ्य, ज्ञापन, स्वस्मिञ्चारितार्थ्य
and अन्यत्रफल. For the instances of
Jñāpakas, see Paribhāșenduśekhara.
Purușottamadeva in his Jñāpaka-
samuccaya has drawn numerous
conclusions of the type of ज्ञापन
from the wording of Pāņini Sūtras.
The word ज्ञापक and ज्ञापन are
used many times as synonyms
although ज्ञापन sometimes refers to
the conclusions drawn from a
wording which is ज्ञापक or indica-
tor. For instances of ज्ञापक, cf.M.Bh.
on Māheśvara Sūtras 1, 3, 5, P. Ι.1.
3, 11, 18, 23, 51 etc. The word ऊठ्
in the rule वाह ऊठ् is a well known
ज्ञापक of the अन्तरङ्गपरिभाषा. The
earliest use of the word ज्ञापक in the
sense given above, is found in the
Paribhāșāsūcana of Vyādi. The
Paribhāșā works on other systems
of grammar such as the Kātantra;
the Jainendra and others have
drawn similar Jñāpakas from the
wording of the Sūtras in their
systems. Sometimes a Jñāpaka is
not regularly constituted of the
four parts given above;it is a mere
indicator and is called बोधक instead
of ज्ञापक्र.
ज्ञापकसमुच्चय a work giving a
collection of about 400 Jñāpakas or
indicatory wordings found in the
Sūtras of Pānini and the conclusions
drawn from them. It was
written by Purușottamadeva, a
Buddhist scholar of Pāņini's grammar
in the twelfth century A. D.,
who was probably the same as the
famous great Vaiyākaraņa patronized
by Lakșmaņasena.See पुरुषेत्तमदेव.
ज्ञापकसाध्य realizable, or possible to
be drawn, from a wording in the
Sūtra of Pāņini in the manner
shown above. See ज्ञापक.
|
ज्ञापकसिद्ध realized from the ज्ञापक
wording; the conclusion drawn
from an indicatory. word in the
form of Paribhāșās and the like.
Such conclusions are not said to
be universally valid; cf. ज्ञापकसिद्धं न
सर्वत्र Par. Śek. Pari, 110.7.
ज्ञापन a conclusion or inference,
drawn from a word or words in a
Sūtra, with a view to assign a
purpose to that or to those words
which otherwise would have been
without a purpose. The word is
sometimes used in the sense of
ज्ञापक, and refers to the word or
words supposed to be without any
purpose and therefore looked upon
as a reason or हेतु for the desired
conclusion to be drawn. The
words किमेतस्य ज्ञापने प्रयोजनम् occur
very frequently in the Mahābhāșya:
cf, M.Bh. on P. Ι. I. 11, 14,19, 55,
68, Ι. 2.41 etc. etc.
ज्ञापित concluded or proved by means
of a ज्ञापक word or wording: cf. हन्तेः
पूर्वत्रप्रतिषेधो वार्तिकेनैव ज्ञापितः M.Bh. on
ΙΙΙ. 4.37 Vārt. 3.
ज्ञाप्य a conclusion or formula to be
drawn from a Jñāpaka word or
words; cf. the usual expression
यावता विनानुपपत्तिस्तावतो ज्ञाप्यत्वम् stating
that only so much, as is absolutely
necessary, is to be inferred.
ज्ञाप्यमान indicated or suggested: cf.
उत्पातेन ज्ञाप्यमाने ( चतुर्थी वाच्या )। वाताय
कपिला विद्युत् etc. M.Bh. on ΙΙ. 3.13
Vārt. 3.
ज्योत्स्ना (Ι) name of a commentary
by Rāmacandra possibly belonging
to the 18th century on the
Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya; (2) name
of a commentary on Nāgeśa's
'Laghuśabdenduśekhara by Uda-
yaṃakara Pāṭhaka of Vārāṇasi in
the 18th century.
ज्वलिति standing for ज्वलादि, name of
|
a class of 30 roots headed by the
root ज्वल दीप्तौ and given as चल कम्पने,
जल घातने etc; cf: ज्वलितिकसन्तेभ्यो णः P.
III. 1.140.
झ्fourth consonant of the palatal
class of consonants possessed of the
properties नादानुप्रदान, घोष, संवृतकण्ठत्व,
and महाप्राणत्व; झ् at the beginning of
an affix in Panini Sutras is mute;
e. g. the affixes झि, झ etc.; cf चुटूं P.
I. 3.7.
झ a verbal ending of the 3rd pers.
Atm. for ल ( i.e. लकार ); cf P.III.4.
78;for the letter झ् , अन्त् is substitu-
ted; cf. झोन्तः P. VIII.1.3, but ईरे in
the perfect tense; cf. P. III. 4.81
and रन् in the potential and bene-
dictive moods; cf. P. III. 4.85.
झच् wording of the affix झ (see above)
suggested by the Varttikakara to
have the last vowel of अन्त acute,
by चितः (P.VI.1.163) the property
चित्व being transferred from the
original झ to अन्त; cf. Kas. तथा च
झचश्चित्करणमर्थवद् भवति on P.VII.1.3.
झय् a short term ( प्रत्याहार ) for the
fourth, third, second and first con-
sonants of the five classes, after
which ह् is changed into the cog-
nate of the preceding consonant
while श्， is changed into छ् option-
ally; cf. P. VIII. 4.62, 63.
झर् a short term ( प्रत्याहार ) for any
consonant except semi-vowels,
nasals and ह्; cf. P. VIII.4.65.
झल् a short term (प्रत्याहार ) for conso-
nants excepting semi-vowels and
nasals; cf. P.I.2.9, VI.1.58, VI.4.
15, VII.1.60, VIII. 2.39 and VIII.4.53.
झश् short term ( प्रत्याहार ) for the
fourth and the third of the class
consonants; cf. P, VIII. 4.53, 54.
|
झष्short term ( प्रत्याहार ) for the
fourth ( झ, भ, घ, ढ and ध) of the
class consonants; cf. P.VIII. 2.37,
40.
झि (1) verb-ending of the 3rd pers.
pl. Parasmaipada, substituted for
the लकार of the ten lakaras, chang-
ed to जुस in the potential and the
benedictive moods, and optionally
so in the imperfect and after the
sign स् of the aorist; cf.P,III. 4. 82,
83, 84, 108, 109, 110, 111, 112: (2)
a conventional term for अव्यय (in-
declinable) used in the Jainendra
Vyakaraha.
झित् a term, meaning 'having झ् as इत्'
used by the Varttikakra in con-
nection with those words in the
rules of Panini which themselves
as well as words referring to their
special kinds, are liable to under-
go the prescribed operation; cf.
झित् तस्य च तद्विशेषाणां च मत्स्याद्यर्थम्।
पक्षिमत्स्यमृगान् हन्ति। मात्त्प्यिक;। तद्विशेषाणाम्।
शाफरिकः शाकुलिकः । M.Bh.on P.I. 1.
68 Vart. 8.
ञ् (1) the nasal (fifth consonant) of the
palatal class of consonants possess-
ed of the properties नादानुप्रदान, घोष,
कण्टसंवृतत्व, अल्पप्राण and अानुनासिक्य; (2)
mute letter, characterized by which
an affix signifies वृद्धि for the pre-
ceding vowel; ञ् of a taddhita affix,
however, signifies वृद्धि for the first
vowel of the word to which the affix
is added; (3) a mute letter added
to a root at the end to signify that
the root takes verb-endings of both
the padas.
ञtad. affix अ; cf. P. IV. 2. 58, 106,
107 and IV.4.129.
ञम् a short term (प्रत्याहार ) for the
five nasal consonants ङ् ,ञ्, ण्, न्,
and म् .
|
ञि a mute syllable prefixed to a
root in the Dhatuptha of Panini'
signifying the addition of the
affix त (क्त) to the root, in the sense
of the present time; e.g. क्ष्विण्णः, धृष्ट:
etc.; cf. Kas. on P. III. 2.187.
ञिठ tad. affix इक added to words
headed by काशी as also to words
meaning a village in the Vahika
country optionally with the affix
ठञ् in the Saisika senses;e.g. काशिका,
काशिकी, बैदिका, बेदिकी, शाकलिकां, शाक-
लिकी. The affixes ठञ् and ञिठ are
added to the word काल preceded
by आपद् as also by some other
words; e. g. आपत्कालिका, अापत्कालिकी
तात्कालिका, तात्कालिकी etc.; cf. P. IV.2.
116,117,118 and Varttika on IV.
2.116.
ञित् (1) an afix marked with the
mute letter ञ्; causing the substi-
tution of vrddhi for the preceding
vowel and acute accent for the first
vowel of the word to which it is
added, but, causing vrddhi for the
first vowel of the word to which it
is added in case the affix is a tad.
affix: cf. P.VII.2, 115, 116, 117;
(2) a root marked with the conso-
nant ञ् , taking verb-endings of
both the Parasmaipada and the
Atmanepada kinds; e.g. करोति, कुरुते,
बिभर्ति, बिभृते, क्रीणाति, क्रीणीते elc.; cf.
स्वरितञितः कत्राभिप्राये, क्रियाफले
P.I.3.72.
ञीत् a root marked with the mute
syllable ञि prefixed to it, signifying
the addition of the affix क्त in the
present tense. See ञि.
ञ्य taddhita affix य signifying the
substitution of vrddhi as also
the acute accent for the first
vowel of the word to which
it is added. It is added (1) to
words headed by प्रगदिन् in the
four senses termed वंतुरर्थ e.g.प्रागृद्यम्,
शारद्यम् etc.;cf.P.IV. 2.80; (2).to
20
|
the word गम्भीर and अव्ययीभाव com-
pounds in the sense of present
there', e.g. गाम्भीर्यम् , पारिमुख्यम् etc.
cf. P.IV.3.58, 59 (3) to the word
विदूर e.g. वैदुर्य; cf. P. IV.3.84;.(4) to
the words headed by शण्डिक in the
sense of 'domicile of', e.g. शाण्डिक्यः ;
cf. P. IV.3.92; (5) to the words
छन्दोग, औक्थिक, नट etc. in the
sense of duty (धर्म) or scripture
(अाम्नाय) e. g. छान्दोग्यम् , औविथक्यम्
नाट्यम् etc.; cf. P. IV. 3.129;
(6) to the word गृहपति in the sense
of ’associated with'; e.g. गार्हपत्यः
(अग्निः);cf.P.IV.4.90;(7) to the words
ऋषभ and उपानह् ; cf. P. V.1.14; .(8)
to the words अनन्त, आवसथ etc.,cf. P.
V.4.23; (9) to the word अतिथि; cf.
P.V.4.26; and (10) to the words
in the sense of पूग(wandering tribes
for earning money), as also to
the words meaning व्रात (kinds of
tribes) as also to words ending
with the affix च्फञ् under certain
conditions; cf. P.V.3. 112, 113.
ञ्यङ् tad. affix in the sense of 'a des-
cendant' added to words beginn-
ing with अा, ऐ, ओ or ending with इ,
as also to the words कौसल and
अजाद् provided they mean a coun-
try and a Ksatriya too; e.g. सौवीर्यः,
आवन्त्यः, कौन्त्यः कौसल्यः, अाजाद्यः; cf. P.
IV.1.171.
ञ्यट् tad. affix य .causing वृद्धि to the
first vowel of the word to which
it is added and the addition of ई
( ङीप् ) in the sense of feminine
gender, added to words meaning
warrior tribes of the Vahika coun-
try but not Brahmanas or Ksatri-
yas. e.g. क्षौद्रक्यः, क्षौद्रक्री etc.; cf P.
V. 3. 114.
ञ्युट् krt affix added to the root वह् in
Vedic Literature preceded by the
words कव्य, पुरीष, पुरीष्य or हव्य, e.g.
कव्यवाहनः, पुरीषवाहनः, हव्यवाहनः cf. P.
III,2.65, 66.. .
|
ट् the first consonant of the lingual
class ( टवर्ग ) possessed of the pro-
perties श्वासानुप्रदान, अघोष, विवृतकण्ठत्व
and अल्पप्राणत्व. When prefixed or
affixed to an affix as an indica-
tory letter, it signifies the addition
of the fem. affix ङीप् ( ई ); cf. P. IV.
1.15, When added to the conjuga-
tional affixes ( लकार ) it shows
that in the Atmanepada the vowel
of the last syllable is changed to
ए. cf. P. III. 4.79. When added
to an augment ( अागम ), it shows
that the augment marked with it
is to be prefixed and not to be
affixed; e. g. नुट्, तुट् etc.; cf P. I.
1.46.
ट (1) the consonant ट्, the vowel
अ being added for facility of
utterance; cf. अकारो व्यञ्जनानाम्, T.
Pr. I. 21; (2) short term, (प्रत्याहार)
standing for टवगे or the lingual
class of consonants, found used
mostly in the Pratisakhya
works; cf. RT. 13, V. Pr. I. 64,
T. Pr. I. 27: (3) tad. affix ( अ )
added to the word फल्गुनी in the
sense ' तत्र जातः' e. g. फल्गुनी, cf. P.
IV. 3.34, Vart. 2; (4) krt affix
( अ ) added to the root चर्, सृ and
कृ under certain conditions; e. g.
कुरुचर:, अग्रेसुर:, यशस्करी ( विद्या ) दिवाकरः,
वेिभकरः कर्मकरः etc. cf. P. III.
2.16-23.
टक् krt affix अ, not admitting गुण or
वृद्धि to the preceding vowel and
causing ङीप् in the feminine ( by
P.IV. 1.15), added to the roots गा,
पा and हन् under certain condi-
tions; e. g. समग;, सुरापः, पतिघ्नी etc.;
cf. P. IV. 2.8, 52, 53, 54, 55.
टकार the consonant ट्, कार being
added for facility of utterance;
cf. वर्णात्कारः P. III. 3.108 Vart. 3;
cf. also V. Pr, I.17.
|
टच् the samasanta affix अ added to
certain specified words at the end
of the tatpurusa and other com-
pounds e.g. राजसखः, पञ्चगवम्, महानसम्,
समक्षम् , अध्यात्मम् etc. cf P.V.4.91-112.
टवर्ग the class of lingual consonants;
the same as टु in Panini.
टा case ending of the third case
(तृतीया) sing. number; cf. P. IV.1.2,
टाङ् short term for affixes beginning
with टाप् in P. IV. 1.4 and ending
with ष्यङ् in P. IV. 1.78: cf. टाङिति
प्रत्याहारग्रहणम् । टापः प्रभृति आ ष्यङो ङकारात्
M. Bh. on I. 2.48 V. 2.
टाप् feminine affix अा added to mas-
culine nouns ending in अ by the
rule अजाद्यतष्टाप् IV. 1.4 excepting
those nouns where any other affix
prescribed by subsequent rules
becomes applicable.
टि the final syllable beginning with
a vowel; part of a word consisting
of the final vowel in a word and
the consonants following the final
vowel; cf अचेन्त्यादि टि P. I. 1.64.
टिठन् (l) tad. affix इक added to the
words श्राणा, मांस and ओदन in the
sense of ' something given as
wages' e. g. श्राणिकः श्राणिकी; cf. P.
IV. 4.67; (2) tad. affix इक added
to कंस and शूर्प in the अार्हीय senses
e. g. कंसिक:, कांसिक्री; cf. P. V.1.25,26.
टित् marked or characterized by the
mute letter ट्. For the significance of the
addition of ट्, see ट्.
टिलोप deletion or elision of the final
syllable beginning with a vowel,
as prescribed by Panini in
certain rules; cf. भस्य टेर्लोपः VII.
1.88, टे: P. VI, 4.143, 155 नस्तद्धिते
P. VI. 4.144 and अह्नष्टखोरेव P. VI.
4.145.
टीटच् tad. affix टीट added to the
preposition अच in the sense of
|
'lowering of the nose' ( नासिकाया:
नतम् ) e. g. अवटीटम्: cf. P. V. 2.31
टु(1) mute syllable टु prefixed to
roots to signify the addition of
the affix अथुच् in the sense of ver-
bal activity; e. g. वेपथुः, श्वयथु:, cf.
P.III. 3.89; (2) the class of lingual
consonants ट्, ठ्, ड्, ढ् and ण्; cf
चुटू P. I. 3.7.
टुक् augment ट् added to that in
connection with which it is pres-
cribed; it is prescribed in connec-
tion with ङ् and ण् followed by a
sibilant, e. g. सुगण्+षष्ठः = सुगण्ट्षष्ट:;
cf. P, VIII. 3.28.
टेण्यण् tad. affix एण्य added to
word वृक meaning 'a warrior
tribe not of a Brahmana nor of a
Ksatriya caste in the sense of the
word ( वृक ) itself; e. g. वार्केण्यः, cf.
P. V. 3.115
ट्यण् tad. affix य, causing वृद्धि for the
initial vowel and the addition of
the fem. affix ई, applied to the
word सोम in the sense of 'having
that as a deity,' e. g. सौम्यं हविः,
सौमी ऋक्: cf. P.IV. 2.30.
ट्यु tad. affix अन to which the aug-
ment त्， is prefixed, making the
affix तन, applicable to the words
सायं, चिरं, प्राह्वे, प्रगे ,and indeclinable
words in the Saisika or misce-
llaneous senses; e. g. सायंतन:, चिरंतनः
दिवातनम् etc.; cf. P. IV. 3.23, 24.
टयुल् tad. affix added in the same
way as टयु above, making only a
difference in the accent. When
the affix टयुल् is added, the acute
accent is given to the last vowel
of the word preceding the affix.
ट्लञ् tad. affix ल, causing vrddhi
for the initial vowel of the word to
which it is added and also the
addition of the fem.affix ई,applied
to the word शमी in the sense
|
of 'विकार,' e. g. शामीली स्रुक्; cf.
Kas. on P. IV. 3.142.
द्वित् having दु as इत्: roots, that
have टु as इत् or mute, take the
affix अथुच् in the sense of verbal
activity. See टु.
ठ् the second consonant of the ling-
ual class possessed of the proper-
ties श्वासानुप्रदान, अघोष, विवृतकण्टत्व and
महाप्राणत्व. For the syllable ठ at
the beginning of taddhita affixes,
the syllable इक is substituted; if
however the affix (beginning with
ठ ) follows upon a word ending
in इस्, उस्, उ, ऋ, लृ and त् then क
is added instead of इक; e. g.
धानुष्क:, औदश्वित्कः etc.; cf. टस्येकः,
इसुसुक्तान्तात् कः, P. VII. 3.50, 51.
Some scholars say that इक् and क्
are substituted for ठ् by the sutras
quoted above; cf. KS. on VII.
3.50.
ठ (l) tad. affix ठ; see ठ् above for the
substitution of इक and क for ठ.
ठ stands as a common term for
ठक् , ठन् , ठञ्, and ठच् as also for
ष्ठल्,ष्ठन् , and प्ठच्;(2) the consonant
ठ, the vowel अ being added for
facitity of pronunciation, cf. T.
Pr. I.21.
ठक् a very common tad. affix इक,
or क in case it is added to words
ending in इस् , उस् , उ, ऋ, ल् and
त् according to P. VII. 3. 51,
causing the substitution of vrddhi
for the first vowel of the word to
which it is added. ठक् is added
to (1) रेवती and other words in the
sense of descendant ( अपत्य ) e. g.
रैवतिकः:, दाण्डग्राहिकः, गार्गिकः, भागवित्तिकः
यामुन्दायनिकः, cf. P. IV. 1.146-149;
(2) to the words लाक्षा,रोचना etc.
in the sense of 'dyed in', e. g.
|
लाक्षिकम्, रौचनिकम् ; cf. P. IV. 2.2; (3)
to the words दधि and उदश्वित् in the
sense of संस्कृत 'made better ', e. g.
दाधिकम् , औदश्वित्कम् ( क instead of इक
substituted for टक् ), cf. P. IV.2.
18, 19; (4) to the words अाग्रहायुणी,
अश्वत्थ etc.; cf. P. IV. 2. 22, 23; (5)
to words expressive of inanimate
objects, to the words हस्ति and धेनु,
as also to the words केश and अश्व
in the sense of 'multitude '; cf. P.
IV. 2. 47, 48; (6) to the words
क्रतु, उक्थ and words ending in सूत्र,
वसन्त etc., in the sense of 'students
of' ( तदधीते तद्वेद ), cf. P. IV. 2.59,
60, 63; (7) to the words कुमुद and
others as also to शर्करा as a चातुरर्थिक
affix; cf. P. IV. 2.80, 84; (8) to
the words कन्था, भवत् and वर्षा in the
Saisika senses; cf. P. IV. 2.102,
115, IV. 3.18; (9) to the words
उपजानु and others in the sense
'generally present '; cf. P. IV. 3.
40; (10) to the words consisting of
two syllables, and the words ऋक्,
ब्राह्मण etc.in the sense of 'explanatory
literary work'; cf. P. IV.3.72: ( 11)
to words meaning 'sources of in-
come ' in the sense of 'accruing
from’; cf. P. IV. 3.75; (12) to
words denoting inanimate things
excepting words showing time or
place in the sense of ' भक्ति ', cf
P. IV. 8.96; and (13) to the words
हल् and सीर in the sense of 'belong-
ing to', cf. P. IV. 3.124. The tad.
affix ठक् is added as a general
termination, excepting in such
cases where other affixes are pre-
scribed, in specified senses like
'तेन दीव्यति, ' 'तेन खनति,' 'तेन संस्कृतम्'
etc.; cf P. IV. 4.1-75, as also to
words हल, सीर, कथा, विकथा, वितण्डा etc.
in specified senses, cf. P. IV.4. 81,
102 ठक् is also added as a general
tad. affix or अधिकारविहितप्रत्यय, in
various specified senses, as pre-
|
scribed by P. V.1.19-63,and to the
words उदर, अयःशूल,दण्ड, अजिन, अङ्गुली,
मण्डल, etc. and to the word एकशाला,
in the prescribed senses; cf. P. V.
2.67,76, V. 3.108,109; while, with-
out making any change in sense
it is added to अनुगादिन् , विनय, समय,
उपाय ( औपयिक being the word
formed), अकस्मात्, कथंचित्; (cf.आकस्मिक
काथंचित्क), समूह,विशेष, अत्यय and others,
and to the word वाक् in the sense of
'expressed'; cf. P. V. 4.13, 34, 35.
The fem. affix ङीप् ( ई ) is added to
words ending in the affix टक् to
form fem. bases.
ठक्पाद a popular name given to the
fourth pada of the fourth adhyaya
of Panini's Astadhyayi.The pada be-
gins with the rule प्राग्वहतेष्ठक् P.IV.4.1
prescribing the taddhita affix ठक्
in the senses prescribed in rules be- .
ginning with the next rule ' तेन
दीव्यति खनति जयति जितम् ' and ending
with the rule 'निकटे वसति' P.IV.4.73.
ठच tad. affix इक or क (by P.VII.3.51)
with the vowel अ accented acute
applied to (1) कुमुद and others as a
Caturarthika affix; cf. P. IV.2.80;
(2) to multisyllabic words and
words beginning with उप which
are proper nouns for persons; cf.
P. V.3.78, 80; and (3) to the word
एकशाला in the sense of इव; cf. P.
V.3.109. The base, to which टच् is
added, retains generally two sylla-
bles or sometimes three, the rest
being elided before the affix ठच्
e. g. देविकः, वायुकः, पितृकः शेबलिकः etc.
from the words देवदत्त, वायुदत्त, पितृ-
दत्त, शेवलदत्त etc.; cf. P. V,3.83, 84.
ठञ् tad. affix इक or क (by P.VII.3.51)
causing Vrddhi and acute accent
for the first vowel of the word to
which it is added, applied (1) to
महृाराज, प्रोष्ठपद and क्वाचिन् in the
specified.senses, cf. P. IV.2.35, 4l
|
e. g. माहृाराजिक, प्रौष्ठपदिक etc.; (2) to
words काशि, चेदि, संज्ञा and others,
along with ञिठ, e. g. काशिकी, काशिका,
also with ञिठ to words denoting
villages in the Vahika country e.g.
शाकलिकी शाकलिका; as also to words
ending in उ forming names of
countries in all the Saisika senses
cf. P. IV.2.116-120; (3) to com-
pound words having a word show-
ing direction as their first member,
to words denoting time, as also to
the words शरद्, निशा and प्रदोष in the
Saisika senses; cf P. IV.3.6, 7, 11-
15; (4) to the words वर्षा (1n Vedic
Literature), and to हेमन्त and वसन्त
in the Saisika senses; cf. P.IV.3.19-
21; (5) to संवत्सर, अाग्रहायणी, words
having अन्तः as the first member,
to the word ग्राम preceded by परि or
अनु, to multisyllabic words having
their last vowel accented acute, to
words denoting sacrifices, to words
forming names of sages, to words
ending in ऋ and to the word महाराज
in the specific senses which are
mentioned; cf. P. IV.3.50, 60, 61,
67, 68, 69, 78, 79, 97; (6) to the
words गोपुच्छ, श्वगण, आक्रन्द, लवण, परश्वध,
compound words having a multi-
syllabic words as their first mem-
ber, and to the words गुड etc. in
the specified senses;cf.P.IV.4.6,II,
38, 52, 58, 64, 103;(7) to any word
as a general tad. affix (अधिकारविहित),
unless any other affix has been
specified in the specified senses
' तेन क्रीतम् ' ' तस्य निमित्तम्' ... ' तदर्हम्'
mentioned in the section of sutras
V. 1. 18. to 117; (8) to the words
अय:शूल, दण्ड, अजिन, compound words
having एक or गो as their first mem-
ber as also to the words निष्कशत
and निष्कसहस्र; cf. P.V.2.76, 118,119.
ठन् tad. affix इक or क (according to
P. VII.3.51), causing the addition
of आ, and not ई,..for forming the
|
feminine base, applied (1) to the
word नौ and words with two
syllables in the sense of 'crossing'
or 'swimming' over; cf. P.IV.4. 7;
e.g. नाविकः नाविका, बाहुकः बाहुक्रा; (2)
to the words वस्र, क्रय, and विक्रय and
optionally with छ to अायुघ in the
sense of maintaining (तेन जीवति) ; cf.
P. IV. 4.13, 14; (3) to the word
प्रतिपथ, words ending with अगार,
to the word शत, to words showing
completion ( पूरणवाचिन् ), to the
words अर्ध, भाग, वस्त्र, द्रव्य, षण्मास and.
श्राद्ध in specified senses; cf. P. IV
4.42, 70, V. 1.21, 48, 49, 51, 84,
V. 2, 85, and 109; (4) to words
ending in अ as also to the words
headed by व्रीहि, and optionally with
the affix इल्च् to तुन्द and with the
affix व to केशin the sense of मतुप्(pos-
session); cf P.V. 2. 115, 116, 117
and 109.
ठित् marked with the mute letter ठ्.
There is no affix or word marked
with mute ठ् (at the end) in Pani-
ni's grammar, but to avoid cer-
tain technical difficulties, the
Mahabhasyakara has proposed
mute ठ् instead of 'ट् in the' case of
the affix इट् of the first pers. sing.
perf Atm. and ऊठ् prescribed as
Samprasarana substitute by P. VI.
4.132 e: g. प्रष्ठौहः, प्रष्ठौहा; cf. M.Bh.
on III.4.79 and VI.4.19.
ड् ( 1 ) third letter of the lingual
class of consonants possessed of the
properties नादानुप्रदान, घोष, संवृतकण्ठत्व,
and अल्पप्राण; (2) mute letter ap-
plied to affixes by Panini to show
the elision of the टि part (cf. P. 1.
1.64.) of the preceding word viz.
the penultimate vowel and the
consonant or consonants follow-
ing it; cf, टेः ; ( लोप: डिति प्रत्यये परे )
|
VI.4.143. The syllable ति of विंशति
is also elided before an affix mark-
with the mute letter ड्.
ड (1) krt affix अ applied to the root
गम् preceded by अन्त, अत्यन्त, अध्वन्
etc., as also to the roots हन् and
जन् under certain conditions; cf.
P. III.2,48,49, 50, 97-101 and to
the root क्रन् to form the word नक्र
cf. P. VI. 3.75; (2) tad. affix अ
applied to words ending in दशन्,
words ending in शत् and the word
विंशति in the sense of 'more than'
e.g. एकादशं शतम्, एकत्रिंशम्, एकविंशम्, cf
P.V.2.45, 46.
डच samasanta (अ) added to a Bahu
vrihi compound meaning a nume-
ral e.g. उपदशाः उपविंशाः cf. P.V.474.
डट् tad. अ, affix in the sense of पूरण
applied to a numeral to form an
ordinal numeral; e. g. एकादशः,
त्रयोदशः, cf. P.V.2.48
डण् tad. affix अ, causing vrddhi and
टिलोप, applied to त्रिंशत् and चत्वारिंंशत्
to show the परिमाण i.e. measure-
ment or extent of a Brahmana
work; e.g. त्रैंशानि ब्राह्मणानि, चात्वरिंशानि
cf. P. V. I.62
डतमच् tad. affix अतम in the sense of
determination or selection of one
out of many, applied to the pro-
nouns किं, यत् and तत्; e,g. कतमः cf.
P.V.3.93,as also to एक according to
Eastern Grammarians; e.g. एकतमो
भवतां देवदत्तः; cf. P.V.3.94.
डतरच् tad. affix अतर in the sense of
'selection out of two' applied to
the words किं, यत् and तत् as also to
the word एक; e. g. कतरो भवतोः पटुः
cf. P. V. 3.92, एकतरो भवतोर्देवदत्तः cf.
P.V.3.94.
डतरांदि a class of words headed by
the word डतर which stands for
डतरान्त i.e. words ending with the
affix डतर; similarly the word डतम
which follows डतर stands for डतमान्त.
|
This class डतरादि is a subdivision of
the bigger class called सर्वादि. and
it consists of only five words viz.
डतरान्त, डतमान्त, अन्य, अन्यतर and इतरः
cf P. VII.1.25 and I.1.27.
डति tad. affix अति affixed to the
word किम् to show number or
measurement; e.g. कति ब्राह्मणाः, cf.
P.V.2.41. The words ending with
the affix डति are termed संख्या and षट्
for purposes of declension etc.; cf.
P.I.1.23,25
डर krt affix अर added to the root खन्
in the sense of 'instrument' or
'location' e.g. आखरः, cf. P.III.3.
125 Vartika.
डस् affix अस् applied to the word
श्वेतवाह and others at the end of a
pada i.e when the word श्वेतवाह
has got the पदसंज्ञा. e.g. श्वेतवाः इन्द्रः ।
श्वेतवोभ्याम् cf.P.III.2.71 Vārt,1 and 2.
डा (1) verb-ending आ, causing elision
of the penultimate vowel as also
of the following consonant,
substituted for the 3rd pers. sing,
affix तिप् of the first future; e.g.
क्रर्ता ; cf. P.II.4.85; (2) case ending
आ substituted in Vedic Literature
for any case affix as noticed in
Vedic usages; e.g. नाभा पृथिव्याम्: cf.
P. VII.1.39
डाच् tad. affix आ applied to dissylla-
bic words, used as imitation of
sounds, or used as onomatopoe-
tic, when connected with the root
कृ or भू or अम्. The word to which
डाच् is applied becomes generally
doubled; c. g पटपटाकरोति, पटपटाभवति
पटपटास्यात्; cf. P.V.4.57. The affix
डाच् is also applied to द्वितीय, तृतीय,
to compound words formed of a
numeral and the word गुण, as also
to the words सपत्र, निष्पत्र, सुख, प्रिच etc
when these words are connected
with the root कृ;e.g. द्वितीयाकरोति,तृतीया
करोति, द्विगुणाकरोति, सपत्राकरोति, सुखाकरोति
etc.; cf.P.V.4. 58 to 67.
|
डाप् fem. affix आ added optionally to
words ending in मन् and to Bahu-
vrihi compounds ending in अन् to
show feminine gender, the words
remaining as they are when the
optional affix डाप् is not applied;
e.g. दामा, सीमा, सुपर्वा; cf. P. IV. I.l l,
12, 13.
डामहच् tad. affix अामह added to the
words मातृ and पितृ in the sense of
'father'; e.g. मातामहः, पितामहः; cf. P.
IV. 2.36 Vart, 2.
डित् possessed of the mute letter ड्
added for the purpose of the eli-
sion of डि (last vowel and the conso-
nant or consonants after it) of the
preceding word. See ड.
डिनि (l) tad. affix applied to अवान्तर-
दीक्षा, तिलव्रत etc. in the sense of चरति
(observing); e.g. तिलव्रती, cf. P. V. 1.
94 Vart 3; (2) applied in the sense
of 'having as measurement'applied
to numeral words ending in शत् or
शिन् and the word विंशति; e.g. त्रिंशिनो
मासाः, विंशिनोङ्गिरसः; cf. M. Bh. on P.
V. 2.37.
डिमच् tad. affix इम applied to the
words अग्र, अादि, पश्चात् and अन्त in
the Saisika senses; e.g. अग्रिमम्, अादि-
मम् , पश्चिमम् , अन्तिमम्: cf. M. Bh. on
P.IV.3.23.
डियाच् case affix इया for Inst.sing.seen
in Vedic Literature: e.g. सुक्षेत्रिया,
सुगात्रिया; cf Kas. on P.VII.1.39.
डुपच् tad affix उप added to the word
कुतू in the sense of diminutive: e.g.
कुतुपः a small oil-pot ( कुतू );cf. V.3.
89.
डुम्सुन् Unadi affix उम्स् added to the
root पा to form the word पुंंस्: cf. पांते
डेम्सुन् Unadi Sutra IV.177.
डुलच् tad. affix उल in the sense of
'brother' applied to the word मातृ;
e.g. मातुलः; cf. P. IV. 2.36 Vart 1.
|
ड्भतुप् tad. affix मत् as a चातुरर्थिक affix
applied to the words कुमुद, नड and
वेतत; e.g. कुमुद्वान् , नड्वान, वेतस्वान्: cf.P.
IV. 2.87.
ड्य tad. affix य (1) added in the
sense of ' Sama introduced by'
( दृष्टं साम ) to the word वामदेव ; e. g.
वामदेव्यं साम ; cf P. IV. 2.9; (2)
added to the word स्रोत्स optionally
with यत् in the sense of ’present
there ' ( तत्र भवः ) ; e. g.स्त्रोतस्यः, cf.
P. IV. 4.I 13.
ड्यण् tad. affix य added to the words
पाथस् and नदी in the sense of ’pre-
sent there ’ ( तत्र भवः ), e. g, पाथ्यः
नाद्यः; cf. P. IV. 4.111.
ड्यत् tad. affix य added along with
डय to the same words to which
the affix डय is added as also in the
same sense, the vowel अ of डयत्
being स्वरित. See the word डघ
above.
ड्या case affix या seen in vedic Lite-
rature e. g. अनुष्ठथा उच्च्यावयतात् cf. S.
K. on P. VII. 1.39.
ड्रट् krt affix र with fem. affix ई
added to it, applied to the root
रुत्यै. e.g. स्त्री cf. संस्त्र्याने स्त्यायतेर्ड्रट् स्त्री M.
Bh. on IV. 1.3.
ड्बवलच् tad.affix वल, in the four senses,
added to the words नड and
शाद; e. g. नड्वलम्, शाद्वलम्; cf. P.
IV. 2.88.
ड्वित् a root marked with the mute
syllable डु (at the beginning) to
Signify the application of the krt
affix त्रि which is invariably followed
by the addition of म ( मप् ), in
the sense of 'achieved by' e. g.
पक्त्रिमम् ; कृत्रिमम्: cf. P. III. 3.88 ;
and IV. 4.20.
ड्वुन् tad. affix अक added to the
words विंशति and त्रिंशत् in the tetrad
of tad. senses; e. g. विंशक:, त्रिंशक:
cf. P. V. 1.24.
|
ड् (1) fourth consonant of the lingual
class of consonants possessed
of the properties नादानुप्रदान, घोष,
संवृतकण्ठत्व and महृाप्राणत्व; (2) the
consonant ढ् which is elided when
followed by ढ् and the preceding
vowel is lengthened; e. g. गाढा,
cf. P. VIII. 3.13 and VI. 3.111 ;
(3) substitute ढ् for ह् at the end
of a पद, or, if followed by any
consonant excepting a semivowel
or a nasal excepting in the cases
of roots beginning with द् or the
roots द्रुह्, मुह् etc. as also वह् and
अाह् cf. P. VIII. 2.31, 32, 33, 34;
(4) ढ् at the beginning of a tad.
affix which has got एय् substituted
for it; cf. गाङ्गेय:, वैनतेयः ; cf. P. V.
3.102.
ढ tad. affix ढ (1) applied to the word
सभा in the sense of 'fit for' ( तत्र
साधुः ) in Vedic literature;. e. g.
सभेयः; cf. IV. 4.106; (2) applied to
the word शिला in the sense of इव;
e. g. शिलेयं दधि ; cf. P. V. 3.102; (3)
common term ( ढ ) for the affixes
ढक्, ढञ् and ढ also, after the
application of which the affix ङीप्
(ई) is , added in the sense of
feminine gender; cf. P. IV. 1.15.
ढक् tad. affix एय causing the substitu-
tion of vrddhi for the first vowel
of the word to which it is added.
ढक् is added in the sense of अपत्य
(descendant) (I) to words ending
in feminine affixes, to words end-
ing in the vowel इ, excepting इ of
the tad. afix इञ्, to words of the
class headed by शुभ्र, to words
मण्डूक, विकर्ण, कुषीतक, भ्रू , .कुलटा and to
words headed by कल्याणी which get
इन substituted for its !ast vowel; e.g.
सौपर्णेयः, दात्तेयः शौभ्रेय, माण्डूकेयः, , वैकर्णेयः,
कौषीतकेयः, भ्रौवेयः,.कौलटेयः, काल्याणिनेयः
etc: cf Kas on P. IV.I. 1 19-127;
|
(2) to the words पितृष्वसृ and मातृष्वसृ
with the vowel ऋ elided and to
the word . दुष्कुल, पितृष्वसेय:,
मातृष्वसेयः, दौष्कुलेयः, cf. Kas. on P.
IV. 1.133, 134, 142: (3) to the
word कलि in the sense of Sama,
to the word अग्नि in the sense of
'dedicated to a deity' ( सास्य देवता )
as also to the words नदी, मही,
वाराणसी, श्रावस्ती and others in the
Saisika senses; e. g. कालेयं साम,
आग्नेयः, नादेयम् महियम् etc. cf Kas. on
P. IV. 2.8, 33, 97: (4) to the
words तूदी, धुर् , कपि, ज्ञाति, व्रीहि and
शालि in the specified senses; cf.
P. IV. 3.94, IV. 4.77, V. 1.127,
V. 2.2.
ढकञ् tad. affix एयक applied (1) to
the word कुल optionally along
with यत् and ख, when it is not a
member of a compound;.e. g.
कौलेयकः, कुल्यः, कुलीनः; cf. P.'IV. 1.
140; (2) to the words कत्त्रि and
others in the Saisika senses as also
to the words कुल, कुक्षि and ग्रीवा, if
the words formed with the affix
added, respectively mean dog,
sword and ornament : e. g. कात्त्रेयकः
कौलेयक: (श्वा), कौक्षेयकः (असिः), ग्रैवेयकः
(अलंकारः): cf.Kas. on P.IV 2.95,96.
ढञ् tad. affix एय causing Vrddhi
substituted for the first vowel of the
base and the addition of the fem.
affix ङीप् (इ), applied (1) to words
meaning quadrupeds and words
in the class of words headed by गृष्टि
in the sense of अपत्य; e. g. कामण्ड-
लेयः, गार्ष्टेयः, हालेय:, बालेयः etc; cf. P.
IV.1.135,136; (2) to the word क्षीर,
words of the class headed by सखि,
the words कोश, दृति, कुक्षि, कलशि, अस्ति,
अहि,ग्रीवा,वर्मती,एणी,पथि,अतिथि,वसति,स्वपति,
पुरुष, छदि्स, उपधि, बलि, परिखा, and
वस्ति in the various senses mention-
ed in connection with these words;
e.g.क्षेरेयः, .साखेयम् कौशेयम् दात्र्ऱेयम् ,
|
कौक्षेयम् etc, cf Kas'. on P. IV. 2.
20, 80, IV. 3. 42, 56, 57, 94, 159,
IV.4.1 04, V.1.10,13,17, V.3.101.
ढिनुक् tad. affix एयिन् applied to the
word छगलिन् in the sense of 'stude-
nts following the text of ' e. g.
छागलेयिनः in the sense छगलिना प्रोक्त-
मधीयते ते; cf. Kas. on P. IV.3.109.
ढ्रक् tad. affix एर ( एय् + र ) applied in
the sense of offspring to the word
गोधा and optionally with ढक् to
words meaning persons having a
bodily defect or a low social status;
e. g. गौधेरः, काणेरः दासेरः; काणेयः, दासेयः,
cf Kas. on P. IV. 1. 129, 131.
ण् (l) fifth consonant of the lingual
class of consonants possessed of
the properties, नादानुप्रदान, घोष, संवृतक-
ण्ठत्व, अल्पप्राण and अानुनासिक्यः (2) the
mute letter ण् indicating the substitution
of vrddhi ( cf. P. VII. 2.
115-117) when attached to affixes;
(3) the consonant ण् at the beginn-
ing of roots which is changed into
न्; the roots, having ण् at the begi-
nning changeable to न्, being call-
ed णोपदेशः (4) ण् as a substitute for
न् following the letters ऋ, ॠ, र्, and
ष् directly, or with the intervention
of consonants of the guttural and
labial classes, but occurring in the
same word, Such a substitution of
ण् for न् is called णत्व;
cf. P.VIII.4.
I-39. For णत्व in Vedic Literature;
cf. R. Pr.V.20-28, T.Pr.VII.1-12.
V.Pr.III.84-88;(5) the consonant ण्
added as an augment to a vowel
at the beginning of a word when
it follows the consonant ण् at the
end of the previous word; cf. P.
VIII. 3. 32. In the Vedic Pratisa-
khyas this augment ण् is added to
the preceding ण् and looked upon
as a part of the previous word.
21
|
ण(1) krt affix अ, added optionally to
the roots headed by ज्वल् and end-
ing with कस् in the first conjuga-
tion (see ज्वलिति above) in the sense
of agent, and necessarily to the
root श्यै, roots ending with अा and
the roots व्यध्, आस्रु, संस्रु, इ with अति,
सो with अव, हृ with अव, लिह्, श्लिष्
and श्वस्, to the roots दु and नी with-
out any prefix and optionally to
ग्रह्: e. g. ज्वालः or ज्वलः, अवश्यायः, दायः,
धायः, व्याधः, अास्त्रावः, संस्त्रवः, अत्यायः,
अवसायः, अवहार:, लेहः, श्लेष:, श्वास:, दावः,
नाय:, ग्रहः or ग्राहः: ; in the case of the
root ग्रह् the affix ण is applied by
ब्यवस्थितविभाषा, the word ग्रहः meaning
a planet and the word ग्राहः
meaning a crocodile; cf Kas.
on P. III. 1.140-143; (2) krt affix
अ in the sense of verbal activity
( भाव ) applied along with the affix
अप् to the root अद् with नि; e.g.न्यादः
निघसः; cf. P. III.3.60; (3) krt affix
ण prescribed by the Varttikakara
after the roots तन्, शील्. काम, भक्ष् and
चर् with आ; cf. P.III.1.140 Vart 1,
and III. 2.l Vart. 7; (4) tad. affix
अ in the sense of अपत्य added along
with टक् also, to a word referring to
a female descendant (गेीत्रस्त्री) if the
resultant word indicates censure ;
e. g. गार्भ्यः गार्गिकः cf. P. IV.1.147,
150; (5) tad. affix अ in the sense
of अपत्य added also with the affix
फिञ्, to the word फाण्टाहृति: (6) tad.
affix अ in the sense of 'a game'
added to a word meaning 'an
instrument in the game'; e.g.
दाण्डा, मौष्टा: cf. P. IV.2.57: {7) tad.
affix अ added to the word छत्त्र
and others in the sense of 'habi-
tuated to' e.g. छात्र:, शैक्षः, पौरोहः चौर::
cf. P.IV. 4.62: (8) tad. affix अ
added to the words अन्न, भक्त, सर्व,
पथिन् , यथाकथाच, प्रज्ञा, श्रद्धा, अर्चा, वृत्तिं
and अरण्य in the senses specified
with respect to each ; e.g. आन्नः
(मनुष्यः) भाक्तः ( शालिः ), सार्वे ( सर्वस्मै
हितम् ), पान्थः, याथाकथाचं (कार्यम्), प्राज्ञः
or प्रज्ञावान् , श्राद्धः or श्रद्धावान् , अार्चः or
अर्चावान् , घार्त्तः or वृत्तिमान् and अारण्याः
( सुमनसः ); cf. Kas. on P.IV. 4.85,
100, V.1.10, 76, 98, V.2.101 and
IV.2.104 Varttika.
णच् krt affix अ in the sense of reci-
procal action, added to any root;
the affix णच् is to get necessarily
the affix अञ् added to it followed
by the fem. affix ई e.g. व्यावकोशी,
व्यावहासी; cf. Kas, on P.III.3.43 and
P. V. 4.14.
णत्व cerebralization; lingualization ;
the substitution of ण् for न् under
certain conditions; cf. P. VIII.4.
1-39. See ण.
णत्वपाद a popular name given by
grammarians to the fourth pada cf.
Panini's Astadhyayi, as the pada be-
gins with the rule रषाभ्यां नो णः समानपदे
and mainly gives rules about
णत्व i. e. the substitution of the
consonant ण् for न्.
णमुल् krt affix अम्, causing vrddhi
to the final vowel or to the penul-
timate अ, (!) added to any root in
the sense of the infinitive in Vedic
Literature when the connected root
is शक्: e.g. अग्निं वै देवा विभाजं नाशक्नुवन;
cf Kas. on P. III. 4.14; (2)
added to any root to show
frequency of a past action,
when the root form ending with
णमुल् is repeated to convey the
sense of frequency : e.g. भोजं भोजं
व्रजति, पायंपायं व्रजति, cf. Kas on P. III.
4.22; (3) added to a root showing
past action and preceded by the
word अग्रे, प्रथम or पूर्व, optionally
along with the krt affix क्त्वा; e.g.
अग्रेभोजं or अग्रे भुक्त्वा व्रजति; cf Kas.
on P.III.4.24;(4) added in general
to a root specified in P.III.4.25 to
64, showing a subordinate action
and having the same subject as the
|
root showing the main action,
provided the root to which णमुल् is
added is preceded by an antecedent
or connected word, such as स्वादुम्
or अन्यथा or एवम् or any other given
in Panini's rules; cf. P. III.4.26 to
III.4.64; e.g. स्वादुंकारं भुङ्क्ते, अन्यथाकारं
भुङ्क्ते, एवंकारं भुङ्क्ते, ब्राह्मणवेदं भोजयति,
यावज्जीवमधीते, समूलकाषं कषति, समूलघातं
हन्ति, तैलपेषं पिनष्टि, अजकनाशं नष्टः etc.;
cf Kas. on P.III.4.26-64. When
णमुल् is added to the roots कष्, पिष्, हन्
and others mentioned in P. III. 4.
34 to 45, the same root is repeat-
ed to show the principal action.
The word ending in णमुल् has the
acute accent (उदात) on the first
vowel (cf. P.VI.I. 94) or on the
vowel preceding the affix; cf. P.
VI.1.193.
णमुल्तत्पुरुष a term used in connec-
tion with the compound of the
णमुलन्त with its उपपदं which precedes;
e.g. अग्रेभोजम् , मूलकोपदंशम् : cf. P. II.
2.20, 21.
णल् personal ending अ substituted for
तिप् and मिप् in लिट् or the perfect,
and in the case of विद् and ，ब्रू in लट्
or the pres. tense optionally; cf P.
III, 4. 82, 83, 84. The affix णल्
on account of being marked by
the mute letter ण् causes vrddhi to
the preceding vowel; the vrddhi
is, however, optional in the case of
the 1st pers. ( मिप् ) cf. P. VII.1.91.
अौ is substituted for णल् after roots
ending in आ; cf. P. VII .1.34.
णस् tad. affix अस् applied to the
word पर्शू in the sense of collection.
The original Varttika is पर्श्वाः सण्
P. IV. 2. 43 Vart. 3. Some scho-
lars read णस् in the place of सण् in
the Varttika which is read as पर्श्वा
णम् वक्तव्यः by them.
णि common term for णिङ् ( signifying
Atmanepada ) and णिच्: cf; णेरणौ
|
यस्कर्मं P. I. 3.67, णेरनिटि VI. 4.51 ;
cf also P. I. 3.86, I. 4.52, II.4.46,
51: III. 2.137: VI. 1.31, 48, 54,
VI. 4.90; VII. 2.26, VII. 3.36;
VII.4.1, VIII. 4.80.
णिङ् affix इ causing vrddhi, prescribed
after the root कम् , the base end-
ing in इ i. e. कामि being called a
root: cf. P. III. 1.30, 32. The
mute letter ङ् signifies that the root
कामि is to take only the Atmanepada
affixes e. g. कामयते, अचीकमत.
णिच् affix इ causing Vrddhi (1)
applied to roots of the tenth conju-
gation ( चुरादिगण ) such as चुर् , चित्
etc. e. g. चोरयति, चोरयते; cf. P. III.
1.25: (2) applied to any root to
form a causal base from it, e. g.
भावयति from भू, गमयति from गम्: cf.
हेतुमति च P. III. 1.26: (3) applied
to the words मुण्ड, मिश्र etc, in the
sense of making, doing, practising
etc. ( करण ); e. g. मुण्डं करोति मुण्डयति,
व्रतयति (eats something or avoids it
as an observance), हलं गृह्नाति हलयति
etc.; cf P. III. 1.21; (4) applied
to the words सत्य, पाश, रूप, वीणा, तूल,
श्लोक, सेना, लोमन, त्वच्, वर्मन्, वर्ण and चूर्ण
in the various senses given by the
Varttikakara to form denominative
roots ending in इ: e. g. सत्यापयति,
पाशयति etc; cf. P. III.1.25: (5)
applied to suitable words in the
sense of composing, e.g. सूत्रं करोति
सूत्रयति, etc.: (6)applied to a verbal
noun ( कृदन्त ) in the sense of 'nar-
rating' with the omission of the
krt affix and the karaka of the
verbal activity put in a suitable
case; e. g. कंसं घातयति for the sen-
tence कंसवधमाचष्टे or बलिं बन्धयति for
बलिबन्धमाचष्टे,or रात्रिं विवासयति, सूर्यमुद्गमयति,
पुष्येण योजयति etc.: cf. Kas. on P. III.
1.26. Roots ending in णिच् (णिजन्त)
take the conjugational endings of
both the Parasmaipada and the,
|
Atmanepada: cf. णिचश्च P. I. 3.74.
They have perfect forms by the
addition of अाम् with a suitable
form of the perfect tense of the
root कृ, भू or अस् placed after अाम्,
the word ending with अाम् and the
verbal form after it being looked
upon as separate words e. g. कारयां
चकार कारयां चक्रे etc.; cf P. III.1.35,
40. They have the aorist form,
with the substitution of the Vika-
rana चङ् ( अ ) for च्लि before which
the root is reduplicated; e. g.
अचीकरत्, अबीभवत् etc.: cf. P.III.1.48,
VI.1.11 as also VII.4.93-97.
णिजन्त roots ending in णिच्; the term
is generally applied to causal bases
of roots. See णिच्.
णित् (1) an affix with the mute con-
.sonant ण् added to it to signify the
substitution of vrddhi for the pre-
ceding vowel or for the penulti-
mate अ or for the first vowel of
the word if the affix applied is a
taddhita affix; cf. P. VII.2.115-
117: e. g. अण्, ण, उण्, णि etc.: (2) an
affix not actually marked with the
mute letter ण् but looked upon as
such for the purpose of vrddhi;
e. g. the Sarvanamasthana affixes
after the words गो and सखि, cf. P.
VII.1.90, 92.
णित्त्व possession of ण् as a mute letter
for the purpose of vrddhi. See the
word णित् .
णिनि krt affix इन् signifying vrddhi
(1) applied to the roots headed by
ग्रह् ( i. e. the roots ग्रह्, उद्वस्, स्था etc. )
in the sense of an agent;e. g. ग्राही,
उद्वासी, स्थायी. cf. P. III.1.134; (2)
applied to the root हन् preceded by
the word कुमार or शीर्ष as उपपद: e. g.
कुमारघाती, शीर्षघाती, cf. P. III.2.51: (3)
applied to any root preceded by
a substantive as upapada in the
sense of habit, or when compari
|
son or vow or frequency of action
is conveyed, or to the root मन्, with
a substantive as उपपद e. g- उष्णभोजी,
शीतभोजी, उष्ट्रकोशी, ध्वाङ्क्षरावीः स्थण्डिलशायी,
अश्राद्धभोजीः क्षीरपायिण उशीनराः; सौवीर-
पायिणो वाह्रीकाः: दर्शनीयमानी, शोभनीयमानी,
cf. P. III.2.78-82; (4) applied to
the root यज् preceded by a word
referring to the करण of यागफल as also
to the root हन् preceded by a word
forming the object ( कर्मन् ) of the
root हन् , the words so formed re-
ferring to the past tense: e. g.
अग्निष्टो याजी, पितृव्याघाती, cf. P. III 2.85,
86; (5) applied to a root when the
word so formed refers to a kind of
necessary activity or to a debtor;
cf. अवश्यंकारी, शतंदायी, सहस्रदायी cf. P.
III.4. 169-170: (6) tad-affix इन् ,
causing vrddhi for the first vowel,
applied to the words काश्यप and
कौशिक referring to ancient sages
named so, as also to words which
are the names of the pupils of
कलापि or of वैशम्पायन, as also to the
words शुनक, वाजसनेय etc. in the
sense of 'students learning what
has been traditionally spoken by
those sages' e. g. काश्यपिनः, ताण्डिनः,
हरिद्रविणः शौनकिनः, वाजसनेयिनः etc.; cf
P. IV.3, 103 104, 106; (7) applied
to words forming the names of
ancient sages who are the speakers
of ancient Brahmana works in
the sense of 'pupils studying
those works' as also to words form-
ing the names of sages who com-
posed old Kalpa works in the
sense of those कल्प works; e. g.
भाल्लविनः, एतरेयिणः । पैङ्गी कल्पः अरुणपराजी
कल्पः; cf Kas. on P. IV. 3.105: (8)
applied to the words पाराशर्य and शिला-
लिन् in the sense of 'students read-
ing the Bhiksusutras (of पाराशार्य) and
the Nata sutras ( of शिलालिन् ) res-
pectively; e. g. पाराशरिणो भिक्षव:, शैला-
लिनो नटाः: cf Kas. on P. IV.3.110.
|
णिलोप elision of the affix णि (णिच् or णिङ्
see above ) before an ardhadh-
tuka affix without the augrnent इ
( इट् ) prefixed to it; cf. णेरनिटि P.
VI. 4.51, and VI.4.52, 53, 54 also.
णुट् augment ण्, prefixed to the ini-
tial vowel when it follows upon
the consonant ण् at the end of the
preceding word; e. g. सुगण्णीशः for
सुगण् + ईशः cf P. VIII. 3.82.
णोपदेश a root mentioned in the
Dhatupatha by Panini as beginn-
ing with ण् which subsequently is
changed to न् ( by P. VI. 1.65)
in all the forms derived from the
root; e. g. the roots णम, णी and
others. In the case of these roots
the initial न् is again changed into
ण् after a prefix like प्र or परा
having the letter र् in it and
having a vowel or a consonant of
the guttural or labial class inter-
vening between the letter र् and
the letter न्; e. g. प्रणमति, प्रणयकः etc.
cf. Kas. on P. VIII. 4.14.
णौपाद a popular name given to the
fourth pada of the seventh Adhya-
ya of Panini's Astadhyayi, which
begins with the rule णौ चङ्युपघाया
ह्रस्त्रः P. VII. 4.1.
ण्य tad.affix य (l) applied in the sense
of 'descendant' as also in a few other
senses, mentioned in rules from
IV. 1. 92 to IV.3.168, applied to
the words दिति, अदिति, अादित्य
and word; with पति as the उत्तरपद
in a compound, c. g. दैत्यः, आदित्यः,
प्राजापत्यम् etc. cf.Kas.on P. IV.1 84;
(2) applied in the sense of a descen-
dant ( अपत्य ) applied to the words
कुरु, गर्ग, रथकार, कवि, मति, दर्भ etc., e.g-
कौरव्यः, गार्ग्यः etc. cf. Kas:, on P. IV.
I.15I ; (3) applied in the sense of
अपत्य or descendant to words end-
ing in सेना,to the word लक्षण and to
words in the sense of artisans, e.g-
|
कारिषेण्यः, लाक्षण्यः, तान्तुवाय्यः, कौम्भकार्यः;
cf. Kas. on P.IV.1.152; (4) applied
in the Catuararthika senses to the
words संकाश, काम्पिल्थ, कश्मीर etc., e.g.
साङ्काश्यम्, काम्पिल्यम् etc.; cf. Kas. on
P. IV. 2.80; (5) applied to the
word परिषद् and optionally with
the affix ठक् to the word सेना in
the specified senses; e. g. परिषदं
समवैति, परिषदि साधुर्वा पारिषद्य्ः, सेनां समवेति
सैन्यः सैनिको वा; cf. Kas on P. IV.
44, 45, 101 ; (6) applied as a tad.
affix called ' tadraja , to the word
कुरु and words beginning with न
e. g. कौरव्यः नैषध्यः; cf. Kas on P.
IV. 1.172; कुरवः, निषधाः etc. are the
nom. pl. forms.
ण्यत् krtya affix य which causes
vrddhi and which has the cir-
curmflex accent (1) applied to a
root ending with ऋ or any con-
sonant to form the pot. pass.parti-
ciple: e. g. कार्यम्, हार्यम् , वाक्यम् etc.
cf. Kas on P. IV. 1.124; (2)
applied to a root ending in उ if a
necessity of the activity is to be
indicated, e. g. अवश्यलाव्यम् , अवश्य-
पान्यम् cf. Kas. on P. IV. 1.125;
(3) tad. affix य applied to the word
षण्मास्र optionally with यप् and ठञ्
affixes: e. g. षाण्मास्यः, षण्मास्यः, षाण्मा-
सिकः; cf Kas. on P. V. 1.84.
ण्युट् krt affix अन in the sense of
' skilled agent ' applied (1) to the
root गै to sing. e.g. गायनः, गायनी,
cf. Kas. on P. III 1.147, also
गाथकः, गाथिका by P. III. 1.146: (2)
to the root हा (III. P. and III.A.
also) if ' rice ' or ' time ' be the
sense conveyed: e. g. हायना व्रीहयः,
हायनः संवत्सरः .cf. Kas. on P. III.
1.148.
ण्वि krt, affix ण्वि i. e. zero, causing
vrddhi, applied to the root भज्
and to सह् and वह् in Vedic Lite-
rature if the root is preceded by
|
any preposition ( उपसर्ग ) or a
substantive as the upapada ; e. g.
अर्द्धभाक्, प्रभाक्, तुराषाट् , दित्यवाट्; cf. Kas.
on P. III, 2.62, 63, 64.
ण्विन् krt affix व् or zero, seen applied
in Vedic Literature to the root
वह् preceded by श्वेत, to शंस् preced-
ed by उक्थ, to दाश् preceded by
पुरस् and to यज् preceded by अव.
e. g. श्वेतवा इन्द्रः, उक्थशा यजमानः, पुरोडाः,
अवयाः; cf Kas. on P. III. 2.71, 72.
ण्वुच्( krt affix अक seen always with
the fem. affix अा applied to a root
when the sense conveyed is ' a
turn ' or ' a deserving thing ' or
' debt ' or ' occurrence;' e. g.
भवतः शायिका, अर्हति भवान् इक्षुभक्षिकाम्,
ओदनभोजिकां धारयसि, इक्षुभक्षिका उदपादि ;
cf Kas. on P. III. 3.1 1 1.
ण्वुल् (1) a very general krt affix
अक, causing vrddhi and acute
accent to the vowel preceding the
affix, applied to a root optionally
with तृ (i. e. तृच् ) in the sense of
an agent e. g कारकः हारकः also कर्ता,
हर्ता ; Cf P. III. 1.33; (2) krt. affix
अक applied optionally with the
affix तुम् to a root when it refers
to an action for which another
action is mentioned by the princi-
pal verb; e. g. भोजको व्रजति or भोक्तुं
व्रजति; cf. Kas. on तुमुन्ण्वुलौ क्रियायां
क्रियार्थायाम्; P. III. 3.10; (3) krt
affix अक, necessarily accompanied
by the fem. affix अा added to it,
applied to a root if the sense
given by the word so formed is
the name of a disease or a proper
noun or a narration or a query ;
e. g. प्रवाहिका, प्रच्छर्दिका, शालभञ्जिका,
तालभञ्जिका, कारिक, cf. Kas. on P.
III. 3.108, 109, 110.
त
त् the first consonant of the
|
dental class of consonants which
has got the properties श्वासानुप्रदान,
अघोष, विवृतकण्ठत्व and अल्पप्राणत्व. When
used as a mute letter by Panini, त्
signifies the Svarita accent of the
vowel of that affix or so, which is
marked with it: e. g. कार्यम्, हार्यम्,
पयस्यम् cf. P. VI.1.185. When appi-
ed to a vowel at its end, त् signifi-
es the vowel of that grade
only, possessed by such of its vari-
eties which require the same time
for their utterance as the vowel
marked with त् , e. g. अात् stands
for अा with any of the three accents
as also pure or nasalised; अात् does
not include अं or अ 3 cf. तपरस्तत्कालस्य
P. I. 1. 70. The use of the indi-
catory mute त् for the above
purpose is seen also in the Pratis
akhya works; cf. V. Pr. I. 114
R. T. 234.
त ( 1) personal ending of the third
pers sing. Atm: cf. P. III. 4.78,
which is changed to ते in the per-
fect tense and omitted after the
substitute चिण् for च्लि in the aorist;
cf. P.VI.4.04: (2) personal ending
substituted for the affix थ of the
Paras. 2nd pers. pl. in the im-
perative, imperfect, potential,
benedictive, aorist and condition-
al for which, तात्, तन and थन are
substituted in Vedic Literature,
and also for हि in case a repetition
of an action is meant; cf. P. III.
4. 85, 10l as also VII. 1. 44, 45
and III. 4. 2-5. cf P. III. 4. 85
and III. 4. 10I ; (3) tad. affix त
applied to the words कम् and शम्
e. g. कन्तः, शन्त:, cf. P. V. 2. 138:
(4) tad. affix त applied to दशत्
when दशत् is changed to श; cf.
दशानां दशतां शभावः तश्च प्रत्ययः । दश दाशतः
परिमाणमस्य संधस्य शतम्, Kas. on P. V.
l. 59; (5) .general term for the
affix क्त of the past pass. part, in
|
popular use: (6) a technical term
for the past participle affixes (त) क्त
and तवत् ( क्तवतु ) called निष्ठा by
Panini; cf. P. I.1.26; the term त is
used for निष्ठI in the Jainendra Vya-
kararna.
तकार the consonant त्, the vowel अ
and the word कार being placed af-
ter it for facility in understanding;
cf. T. Pr. I. 17, 21.
तक्षशिलादि a class of words headed
by तक्षशिला to which the taddhita
affix अ ( अञ् ) is added in the
sense of 'a native place or a domi-
cile'. The word so formed has the
acute accent on its first vowel;
e. g. ताक्षशिलः वात्सोद्वरणः; cf. Kas. on
P. IV. 3.93.
तङ् (1) a short term used for the nine
personal endings of the Atmane-
pada viz. त,अाताम्...महिङ् which are
themselves termed Atmanepada;
cf. तङानौ अात्मनेपदम् P. 1.4. 100 (2)
the personal-ending त of the 2nd
pers. pl. (substituted for थ by III.4
101) looked upon as तङ् sometimes,
when it is lengthened in the Vedic
Literature: cf. तङिति थादेशस्य ङित्त्वपक्षे
ग्रहणम् । भरता जातवेदसम् Kas. on P.
VI. 3. 133.
तच्छीलादि the triad of senses तच्छील्,
तद्धर्म and तत्साधुकारिन् possessed by
the agent of an action, in connec-
tion with which the affixes तृन् ,
इष्णुच् etc. are prescribed (cf P.III.
2.184 etc.) which (affixes) hence
are called ताच्छीलिक; cf. अयं तच्छीला-
दिष्वर्थेषु तृन् विधीयते, M. Bh. on P. III.
2.146, e. g. कर्ता कटान्.
तण् ancient term for संज्ञा and छन्दस्
used by the Vartikakara: cf. बहुलं
तणीति वक्तव्यम् । किमिदं तणीति । संज्ञाचन्दसो
र्ग्रहणम् , M. Bh. on P. II. 4.54 Vart.
11: III. 2.8 Vart. 2; IV. 1.52. Vart.
3.
तत्काल requiring the same time for
utterance as for example one
matra for short vowels, two for
long ones and three for protracted
ones, although those vowels are
nasalised or pure, or acute, grave
or circumflex. See the word तपर.
तत्कालप्राप्तिक occurring or presenting
itself at the same time or simul-
taneously.
तत्त्वचन्द्र name of a commentary on
Ramacandra's Prakriyakaumudi.
तत्त्वबोधिनी name of the well-known
commentary on Bhattoji's Sidd-
hnta Kaumudi written by his
pupil Jnanendrasarasvati at Be-
nares. Out of the several commen-
taries on the Siddhantakaumudi,
the Tattvabodhini is looked upon
as the most authoritative and at
the same time very scholarly.
तत्त्वविमर्शिनी name of a commentary
on the Kasikavrtti by a gramma-
rian named Upamanyu in the
beginning of the nineteenth cen-
tury A. D.
तत्त्वादर्श name of a commentary on
the Paribhasendusekhara written
by M. M. Vasudev Shastri Abh-
yankar in 1889 A. D. The com-
mentary is more critical than ex-
planatory,wherein the author has
given the purpose and the gist of
the important Paribhasas and has
brought out clearly the differences
between the school of Bhattoji and
the school of Nagesa in several
important matters.
तत्पुरुष name of an important kind of
compound words similar to the
compound word तत्पुरुष i.e. ( तस्य
पुरुषः ), and hence chosen as the
name of such compounds by anci-
ent grammarians before Panini.
Panini has not defined the term
with a view to including such
|
compounds as would be covered
by the definition. He has mention-
ed the term तत्पुरुष in II.1.22 as
Adhikara and on its strength dire-
cted that all compounds mention-
ed or prescribed thereafter upto
Sutra II.2.22 be called तत्पुरुष. No
definite number of the sub-divi-
sions of तत्पुरुष is given;but from the
nature of compounds included in
the तत्पुरुष-अधिकार, the sub-divisions
विभक्तितत्पुरुष cf. P.II.1.24 to 48,
समानाधिकरणतत्पुरुष cf. P. II.1.49 to 72
(called by the name कर्मधारय; acc.to
P.I. 2. 42), संख्यातत्पुरुष (called द्विगु by
P.II.1.52), अवयत्रतत्पुरुष or एकदेशितत्पुरुषं
cf. P.II.2.1-3, ब्यधिकरणतत्पुरुष cf. P.
II 2.5, नञ्तत्पुरुष cf. P.II.2.6, उपप-
दतत्पुरुष cf. P. II.2.19, प्रादितत्पुरुष cf.
P.II.2 18 and णमुल्तत्पुरुष cf.P.II.2.20
are found mentioned in the com-
mentary literature on standard
classical works. Besides these, a
peculiar tatpurusa compound
mentioned by'Panini in II.1.72, is
popularly called मयूरव्यंसकादिसमास.
Panini has defined only two out
of these varieties viz. द्विगु as संख्यापूर्वो
द्विगुः P.II. 1.23, and कर्मधारय as
तत्पुरुषः समानाधिकरणः कर्मधारयः P. I.2.42.
The Mahabhasyakara has described
तत्पुरुष as उत्तरपदार्थप्रधानस्तत्पुरुषः: cf.
M.Bh. on II.1.6, II.1.20, II.1.49,
etc., and as a consequence it
follows that the gender of the
tatpurusa compound word is that
of the last member of the compo-
und; cf. परवल्लिङ द्वन्द्वतत्पुरुषयोः P. II.4.
26; cf also तत्पुरुषश्चापि कः परवल्लिङं
प्रयोजयति । यः पूर्वपदार्थप्रधानः एकदेशिसमासः
अर्धपिप्पलीति । यो ह्युत्तरपदार्थप्रधानो दैवकृतं
तस्य परवल्लिङ्गम्, M. Bh. on II.4.26.
Sometimes, the compound gets a
gender different from that of the
last word; cf. P.II.4.19-31, The
tatpurusa compound is optional as
generally all compounds are,
|
depending as they do upon the
desire of the speaker. Some tat-
purusa compounds such as the
प्रादितत्पुरुष or उपपदतत्पुरुष are called
नित्य and hence their constitutent
words, with the case affixes appli-
ed to them, are not noticed sepa-
rately; cf. P.II.2.18,19, In some
cases अ as a compound-ending
( समासान्त ) is added: e.g. राजघुरा,
नान्दीपुरम् ; cf. P. V.4.74; in some
cases अच् ( अ ) is added: cf. P.V-4
75 o 87: while in some other
cases टच् ( अ ) is added, the mute
letter ट् signifying the addition of
ङीप् ( ई) in the feminine gender;
cf.P.V.4. 91-1 12. For details See
p.p. 270-273 Mahabhasya Vol.VII
published by the D. E. Society,
Poona.
तदन्तविधि a peculiar feature in the
interpretation of the rules of
Panini, laid down by the author
of the Sutras himself by virtue of
which an adjectival word, quali-
fying its principal word, does not
denote itself, but something end-
ing with it also; cf. येन विधिस्तदन्तस्य
P.I.1.72.This feature is principally
noticed in the case of general
words or adhikaras which are put in
a particular rule, but which Occur
in a large number of subsequent
rules; for instance, the word प्राति-
पदिकात्, put in P.IV.1.1, is valid in
every rule upto the end of
chapter V and the words अतः,
उतः, यञः etc. mean अदन्ताद् , उदन्तात् ,
यञन्तात् etc. Similarly the words
धातोः (P.III.1.91) and अङ्गस्य (P.VI.
4.1 ) occurring in a number of
subsequent rules have the adjecti-
val words to them, which are
mentioned in subsequent rules,
denoting not only those words,but
words ending with them. In a
large number of cases this feature
|
of तदन्तविधि is not desirable, as it,
goes against arriving at the desired
forms, and exceptions deduced
from Panini's rules are laid down
by the Varttikakara and later gram-
marians; cf. Par. Sek. Pari. 16,23,
31 : also Mahabhasya on P.I.1.72.
तदादिविधि a convention similar to the
तदन्तविधि of Panini,laid down by the
Varttikakara laying down that in
case an operation is prescribed for
something followed by a single
letter, that single letter should be
taken to mean a word beginning
with that single letter: cf. यस्मिन्विधि-
स्तदादावल्ग्रहणे P.I.1.72 Vart. 29: Par.
Sek. Pari. 33.
तद्गुणसंविज्ञान lit. connection with
what is denoted by the constituent
members; the word refers to a
kind of Bahuvrihi compound
where the object denoted by the
compound includes also what is
denoted by the constituent
members of the compound; e g.
the compound word सर्वादि in the
rule सर्वादीनि सर्वनामानि includes the
word सर्व among the words विश्व, उभय
and others, which alone form the
अन्यपदार्थ or the external thing and
not merely the external object as
mentioned in Panini's rule अनेकमन्य-
मपदार्थे (P.II. 2. 24): cf. भवति बहुर्वीहौ
तद्गुणसंविज्ञानमपि । तद्यथा । चित्रवाससमानय।
लोहितोष्णीषा ऋत्विजः प्रचरन्ति । तद्गुण आनीयते
तद्गुणाश्च प्रचरन्ति M.Bh. on I.1.27. For
details cf. Mahabhasya on P.1.1.27
as also Par. Sek. Pari. 77.
तद्गुणीभूत lit. made subordinated to
(the principal factor); completely
included so as to form a portion
The word is used in connection with
augments which, when added to.a
word are completely included in
that word, and, in fact, form a
part of the word: cf यदागमास्तद्भुणी-
|
भूतास्तद्ग्रहणेन गृह्यन्ते Par. Sek. Pari. 11.
तद्धित a term of the ancient pre-
Paninian grammarians used by
Panini just like सर्वनामन् or अव्यय
without giving any specific defini-
tion of it. The term occurs in the
Nirukta of Yaska and the Vaja-
saneyi-Pratisakhya ; cf. अथ तद्वि-
तसमासेषु एकपर्वसु चानेकपर्वसु पूर्वे पूर्वमपरमपरं
प्रविभज्य निर्ब्रूयात् । द्ण्डय्ः पुरुषः । दण्डमर्ह-
तीति वा, दण्डेन संपद्यते इति वा Nir. II.2;
also cf. तिङ्कृत्तद्धितचतुथ्यसमासाः इाब्दमयम्
Vaj Prati.I. 27. It is to be noted
that the word तद्वित is used by the
ancient grammarians in the sense
of a word derived from a substan-
tive ( प्रातिपादक ) by the application
of suffixes like अ, यत् etc., and not
in the sense of words derived from
roots by affixes like अन, ति etc. which
were termed नामकरण, as possibly
contrasted with the word ताद्धित
used by Yaska in II. 5. Panini has
used the word तद्धित not for words,
but for the suffixes which are add-
ed to form such words at all
places (e. g. in I. 1.38, IV.1.17,
76, VI.1.61 etc.). in fact, he has
begun the enumeration of taddhita
affixes with the rule तद्धिता: (P.IV.1.
76) by putting the term तद्धित for
affixes such as ति, ष्यङ्, अण् etc.
which are mentioned thereafter.
In his rule कृत्तद्धितसमासाश्च and in the
Varttika समासकृत्तद्धिताव्यय(I.4.1Vart.
41) which are similar to V.Pr.1. 27
quoted above the word तद्धित
appears to be actually used for
words derived from nouns by
secondary affixes, along with the
word कृत् which also means words
derived from roots, although com-
mentators have explained there
the terms कृत् and तद्धित for कृदन्त and
तद्धितान्त. The term तद्वित is evidently
echoed in the Sutra तस्मै हितम् which,
although it is not the first Sutra
22
|
of the taddhita section, may imply
that there were possibly long lists
of secondary nouns with the senses
of secondary suffixes, and तद्धित was
perhaps,the first sense given there.
The number of taddhita suffixes
mentioned by Panini is quite
a large one; there are in fact
1110 rules given in the taddhita
section covering almost two
Adhyayas viz. from P. IV. 1.76
to the end of the fifth Adhyaya.
The main sub-divisions of taddhita
affixes mentioned by commentators
are, Apatyadyarthaka (IV. 1.92 to
178), Raktadyarthaka (IV.2.1 to
91), Saisika {IV.2. 92 to IV.3.133),
Pragdivyatiya (IV. 3 134 to 168),
Pragvahatiya (IV.4.1 to IV.4.74),
Pragghitiya (IV.4.75 to IV.4.109),
Arhiya (V.1.1 to 71),Thanadhikara-
stha (V. 1.72 to V. 1.1.114), Bhava-
karmarthaka (V. 1.115 to V.1.136),
Pancamika (V. 2.1 to V. 2.93),
Matvarthiya (V. 2.94 to V. 2.
140), Vibhaktisamjaaka (V. 3.1 to
V. 3.26) and Svarthika (V. 3.27 to
V. 4.160). The samasanta affixes
(V.4.68 to V.4.160) can be includ-
ed in the Svarthika affixes.
तद्धितकोश a work on the taddhita
section written by Siromani Bhatta-
carya, who has also written
तिङन्तशिरोमणि.
तद्भाव the essence, also called तत्व; cf.
यस्य गुणान्तरेष्वपि प्रादुर्भवत्सु तत्त्वं न विहन्यते
तद् द्रव्यम् । किं पुनस्तत्त्वम् । तद्भावस्तत्त्वम् M.
Bh. on P.V.1.1 19.
तद्भावित produced or brought into
being by some grammatical opera-
tion such as the vowel आ in दाक्षि,
कारक्र, अकार्षीत् etc. by the substitu-
tion of वृद्धि, as contrasted with the
original अा in ग्राम, विघान शाला, माला
etc.; cf. किं पुनरिदं तद्भावितग्रहणं वृद्धिरित्येवं
ये आकरैकारौकारा भाव्यन्ते तेषां ग्रहणमाहो-
स्विदादैज्मात्रस्य M.Bh. on I. 1.1.
|
तद्राज the taddhita affixes अञ्,अण्,ञ्यङ,
ण्य, as also इञ्, छ्, ञ्युट्, ण्य, टेण्यण् and
यञ् given in the rules of Panini IV.
1.168-174 and V.3. 112-119. They
are called तद्राज as they are applied
to such words as mean both the
country and the warrior race or
clan ( क्षत्त्रिय ): cf. तद्राजमाचक्षाणः तद्राजः
S. K. on P. IV.l.168. The pecu-
liar feature of these tadraja affixes
is that they are omitted when the
word to which they have been app-
lied is used in the plural number;
e. g. ऐक्ष्वाकः, ऐक्ष्वाकौ, इक्ष्वाकवः; simi-
larly इक्ष्वाकूणाम्; cf. P.II.4.62.
तद्वत् (l) as above,similarly;the words
शेषं तद्वत् (the rest as above) are fre-
quently seen used by commenta-
tors; (2) the tad. affix वत् in the
sense of possession and not in the
sense of measure etc. cf. तद्वति तद्धिते
न्यायसंहितं चेत् V.Pr.V.8.
तद्वदतिदेश treatment of something as
that which is not that e. g. the
treatment of affixes not marked
with mute n or n as marked with
n even though they are not actual-
ly marked that way, cf. P. I. 2.1-
4; also cf तद्वदतिदेशेSकिद्विधिप्रसङ्गः P. I.
2.1 Vart 4.
तन (1) personal ending for त of the
second pers. pl. Parasmaipada in
the imperative in Vedic Litera-
ture e.g जुजुष्टन for जुषत cf. Kas.
On P VII. 1.45; (2) tad. affixes
टयु and टयुल् i.e. अन which, with the
augment त्, in effect becomes
तन e.g. सायंतन, चिरंतन, etc.: cf. P.
IV. 3.23.
तनप्' Personal ending for त of the
Second Pers.. pl. e. g. दधातन for
धत्त. Cf Kas on P. VII. 1.45. See
तन.
तन्त्र a word frequently used in the
Mahabhasya in the sense of 'in-
tended ' or विवक्षित. The word is
|
used always in the neuter gender
like प्रमाणम्; cf. तन्त्रं तरनिर्देशः M. Bh.
on P. I. 2.33, II. 2.34, नात्र निर्दे-
शस्तन्त्रम् On P. I. 2.39, III.3.38, III.
4.21,IV.1.92 etc. The word is also
explained in the sense of 'impor.
tant'.
तन्त्रप्रदीप name of the learned com-
mentary_written by मैत्रेयरक्षित, a
famous Buddhist grammarian of
the 12th century A. D. on the
काशिकाविवरणपञ्जिका ( न्यास ) of Jinen-
drabuddhi। The work is available
at Present only in a manuscript
form, and that too in fragments.
Many later scholars have copious-
ly quoted from this work. The
name of the work viz. तन्त्रप्रदीप is
rarely mentioned; but the name
of the author is mentioned as रक्षित,
मैत्रेय or even मैत्रेयरक्षित. Ther are
two commentaries on the तन्त्रप्रदीप
named उद्द्योतनप्रभा and आलोक,
तनादि a class of roots headed by the
root तन्, which is popularly caII-
ed as the eighth conjugation to
which the conjugational sign उ
is added: e.g. तनोतेि, करोति, कुरुते cf.
P. II. 4.79: III. 1.79.
तनोत्यादि a class of words which is
the same as तनादि: cf. P. VI. 4.37.
See तनादेि.
तन्नामिकाण् the tad. affix अण् prescrib-
ed by the rule अवृद्धाभ्यो नदीमानुषी-
भ्यस्तन्नामिकाभ्यः P. IV. 1.113: cf. M.
Bh. on P. IV. 1.1I4,
तप् (I) tad. affix त added to the
words पर्वन् and मरुत् to form the
words पर्वतः and मरुत्तः; cf. P. V.
2.122 Vart. 10; (2) personal end-
ing in Vedic Literature substitut-
cd for त of the impera. sec. pers.
pl. e. g. श्रुणोत ग्रावाणः cf. Kas. on
P. VII. 1.45.
तपरकरण addition of the mute letter
त् after a vowel to signify the in-
|
clusion of only such varieties of
the vowel as take the same time
for their utterance as the vowel
marked with त्; cf. P. I. 1.70.
See त्.
तम् personal ending तम् substituted
for थम् in the impera. imperf.
potential, benedictive, aorist and
conditional; cf. P. III. 4.85, 101
तम common term for the tad. affixes
तमट् and तमप्.
तमट् tad. affix तम added optionally
with the affix डट् ( अ ) to विंशति,
त्रिंशत् etc., as also to words ending
with them, in the sense of पूरण
(completion), and necessarily (नित्यं)
to the words शत, सहस्र, षष्टि, सप्तति etc.
e. g. एकविंशतितमः एकविंशः, त्रिंशत्तमः,
त्रिंशः, शततमः, षष्टितम:, विंशी, त्रिंशी etc.;
cf. Kas. on V. 2.56-58.
तमप् tad. affix तम added without a
change of sense, i. e. in the sense
of the base itself to noun bases
possessing the sense of excellence,
as also to verbal forms showing
excellence: e. g. आढ्यतमः, दर्शनीयतमः,
श्रेष्ठतमः, पचतितमाम् cf. Kas on P. V.
3.55-56. The affix तमप् is termed
घ also; cf. P. I. 1.22.
तय tad. affix तयप् applied to a nu-
meral ( संख्या ) in the sense of
अवयविन् or 'possessed of parts';
e. g. पञ्च अवयवा अस्य पञ्चतयम् , दशतयम् ,
चतुष्टयी; cf. Kas. on P. V. 2.42. अय
is substituted for तय optionally
after the numerals द्वि and त्रि and
necessarily after उभ; cf. P. V.
2.43-44.
तयप् tad. affix तय. See तय.
तर tad. affix तरप् added to bases
showing excellence (अतिशायन )
when the excellence shown is
between two persons; e. g. अनयोः
सुकुमारतरः सुकुमारतरा, पचतितराम्; cf.
Kas. on P. V.3.57. The affix तरप् is
called घ just like तमप्; cf P.I. 1.22.
|
तरप् tad. affix तर. See तर.
तल् tad, affix त (l) added in the
sense of collection (समूह) to the
words ग्राम, जन, बन्धु and सहाय and
गज also, e.g. ग्रामता, जनता etc.; (2)
added in the sense of 'the nature
of a thing' ( भाव ) along with the
affix त्व optionally, as also option-
ally along with the affixes इमन्, ष्यञ्
etc. given in P. V. 1.122 to 136;
e. g. अश्वत्वम्, अश्वता; अपतित्वम्,
अपतिता; पृथुत्वम्, पृथुता, प्रथिमा; शुक्लता,
शुक्लत्वम्, शौक्ल्यम्, शुक्लिमा; etc., cf Kas.
on P.V.1.119 to 136. Words end-
ing with the affix तल् are always
declined in the feminine gender
with the fem. affix अा ( टाप् ) add-
ed to then; cf. तलन्तः (शब्दः स्त्रियाम् ),
Linganusasana 17.
तवर्ग the class of dental consonants
viz. त्, थ्, द्, ध् and न; cf. विभक्तौ
तवर्गप्रतिषेधोऽतद्धिते P.I 3,4 Vart. 1.
तवेङ् krt affix तवे for the infinitive
affix तुम् in Vedic Literature: e.g.
दशमे मासि सूतवे; cf. P.III 4.9.
तवेन् krt affix तवे for the infinitive affix
तुम् in Vedic Literature; e.g.गन्तवे,
कर्तवे, हर्तवे; cf. P.III. 4.9.
तवै (1) krt affix तवै for the infinitive
affix तुम् in Vedic Literature. The
affix तवै has a peculiarity of accent,
namely that the word ending in तवै
has got both the initial and end-
ing vowels accented acute (उदात्त);
e.g. सोममिन्द्राय पातवै, हर्षसे दातवा उ; cf.
P.III.4.9; and VI. 1.200; (2)
krtya affix in Vedic Literature,
e.g. परिघातवै for परिघातव्यम्; cf. Kas.
on P. III. 4.14.
तव्य krtya affix applied to a root to
form the pot.pass. part, e.g. कर्तव्यम्;
cf. Kas. on P.III.1.96.
तव्यत् krtya affix तव्य applied to a
root to form the pot. pass. part.;
the affix तव्यत् has the circumflex
|
accent on the last syllable; e.g.
कर्तव्यम् cf. Kas on P. III. 1 . 96.
तस् (1) personal ending of the third
pers. dual Parasmaipada substitu-
ted technically for ल् (लकार); cf P.
III.4.78; (2) tad. affix तस् ( तसि or
तसिल् ). See तसि and तसिल्.
तसि (1) tad.affix तस् showing direction
by means of a thing e.g. वृक्षमूलतः,
हिमवत्तः; cf. Kas on P.IV.3.114,115;
(2) tad.affix तस् applied in the sense
of the abl. case and substituted for
the abl. case affix: e.g. ग्रामतः अाग-
च्छति, चोरतो विभेति; sometimes the affix
is applied instead of the instrumen-
tal or the genitive case also. e. g.
वृत्ततः न व्यथते for वृत्तेन न व्यथते; देवा
अर्जुनतः अभवन्, for अर्जुनस्य पक्षे अभवन् cf.
Kas, on P.V.4.44-49.
तसिल् (1) tad. affix तस् added to pro-
nouns from सर्व upto द्वि, to the
pronoun किम् and after परि and अभि;
e.g. कुतः; यतः, ततः, अभितः; cf Kas. on
P.V.3. 7 to 9.
तसिलादि a class of taddhita affixes
headed by the affix तस् ( तसिल् ) as
given by Panini in his sutras from
पञ्चम्यास्तसिल् P. V. 3. 7. upto संख्यायाः
क्रियाभ्यावृत्तिगणने कृत्वसुच् V.3.17; cf. P.
VI.3.35. The words ending with
the affixes from तसिल् in P.V.3.7
upto पाशप् in P.V.3.47 (excluding
पाशप्) become indeclinables; cf.
Kas on P.I.1.38.
ता (1) a technical term for the genitive
case affix used in the Jainendra
Vyakarana; (2) the tad. affix तल्
which is popularly called ता as
the nouns ending in तल् i.e. त are
declined in the fem. gender with
the fem. affix अा added to them.
ताच्छब्द्य (1) use of a word for that
word (of which the sense has been
conveyed); the expression तादर्थ्या -
त्ताच्छब्द्यम् is often used by gramma-
rians just like a Paribhasa; cf. अस्ति
|
तादर्थ्यात्ताच्छब्द्यम् । बहुव्रीह्यर्थानि पदानि बहुव्रीहि-
रिति M. Bh. on P. I.1.29; similarly
तृतीयासमास;for तृतीयार्थानि पदानि M.Bh.
on P.I.1.30 or समासार्थे शास्त्रं समासः
M. Bh. on P.I.2.43; (2) use of a
word for that word of which there
is the vicinity; cf. अथवा साहचर्यात्
ताच्छब्द्यं भविष्यति। कालसहचरितो वर्णः। वर्णॊपि
काल एव; M. Bh. on P.I.2.27 where
the letter उ is taken in the sense
of time required for its utterance,
the reason being that sound and
time go together; cf. also M.Bh. on
P.I.2.70, IV.3.48, V.2.79; (3)
use of a word for that which resi-
des there; cf. तात्स्थ्यात्ताच्छब्द्यं भविष्यति
M.Bh. on V.4.50 Vart. 3. At all
the above places, the use of one
word for another is by Laksana.
ताच्छीलिक prescribed in the sense of
'habituated'; a term used in con-
nection with all affixes prescribed
in the triad of senses viz. ताच्छील्य,
ताद्धर्म्य, तत्साधुकारित्व in Sutras from P.
III.2.134 to 180; cf. ताच्छीलिकेषु
बासरूपविधिर्नास्ति P. III.2.146 Vart. 3,
Par. Sek, Pari. 67.
तात् (1) the same as तातङ् substituted
for तु and हि of the imperative sec.
and third sing. Parasmaipada; cf.
P.VII.1.35; (2) substitute तात् for
त of the imperative 2nd pl. in
Vedic Literature; e.g. गात्रं गात्रमस्यानूनं
कृणुतात् cf. Kas on P.VII.1.44.
तातङ् the affix तात्. See तात् (1).
तातिल् tad. affix ताति in the very
sense of the word to which it is
applied occurring in Vedic Litera-
ture after the words सर्व and देव, as
also after शिव, शम् and अरिष्ट in the
sense of 'bringing about' and in
the sense of भाव (presence) after
the same words शिव, शम् and अरिष्ट;
e.g. सर्वतातिः, देवतातिः, शिवतातिः etc. cf.
P.IV.4.142-144.
|
तात्पर्य (1) repetition of action; cf.
तात्पर्यमाभीक्ष्ण्यं पौनःपुन्यमासेवा Kas. on III.
2.81 also तात्पर्यमासेवा । द्रव्ये व्याप्तिः,
क्रियायामासेवा । (2) foremost considera-
tion; cf. चतुर्ग्रहणे सति तात्पर्येण स्यन्दिः
संनिधापितो भवति Kas. on P.VII.2.59;
(3) purport (of a sentence), signi-
ficance, intention; cf. सर्वशास्त्रोपकारक-
मिति तत्तात्पर्यम् Par. Sek. Pari. 2, 3.
ताथाभाव्य name given to the grave
(अनुदात्त) vowel which is अवग्रह i.e.
which occurs at the end of the
first member of a compound and
which is placed between two acute
vowels i.e. is preceded by and
followed by an acute vowel; e.g.
तनूSनप्त्रे, तनूSनपत्: cf. उदाद्यन्तो न्यवग्र-
हस्ताथाभाव्यः । V.Pr.I.120. The tath-
abhavya vowel is recited as a
kampa ( कम्प ) ; cf. तथा चोक्तमौ-
ज्जिहायनकैर्माध्यन्दिनमतानुसारिभिः- 'अवग्रहो
यदा नीच उच्चयॊर्मध्यतः क्वचित् । ताथाभाव्यो
भवेत्कम्पस्तनूनप्त्रे निदर्शनम्'. Some Vedic
scholars hold the view that the
ताथाभाव्य vowel is not a grave
( अनुदात्त ) vowel, but it is a kind of
स्वरित or circumflex vowel. Strictly
according to Panini "an anudatta
following upon an udatta becomes
Svarita": cf. P.VIII.4.66, V.Pr.
IV. 1.138: cf also R.Pr.III. 16.
तादर्थ्य (l) the nature of being meant
for another ; cf. चतुर्थीविधाने तादर्थ्य
उपसंख्यानम् । यूपाय दारु M. Bh. on P.
II.3.13; (2) meant for another: cf.
तदर्थे एव तादर्थ्यम् । चातुर्वण्यादित्वात् ष्यञ् ।
अग्निदेवतायै इदम् अग्निदेवत्यम् । तादर्थ्ये यत् ।
cf. Kas. on P. V. 4.24 (3) being
possessed of the same sense: cf.
तादर्थ्यात्ताच्छब्द्यम्. See ताच्छब्द्य.
तादात्म्य possession of the same nature;
तत्स्वभावता; cf. सुबामन्त्रिते पराङ्गवत्स्वरे ।
तादात्म्यातिदेशोयम् Kas. on P.II.1.2.
ताद्धर्म्य being possessed of the same
property; cf. चतुर्भिः प्रकारैरतस्मिन्स इत्ये-
तद्भवति तात्स्थ्यात्ताद्धर्म्यात्तत्सामीप्यात्तत्साहवर्या-
|
दिति । M. Bh. on IV. 1.48 Vart. 3.
ताद्रूप्य restoration to, or resumption of
the same form by the rule of
Sthanivadbhava, prescribed in P.I.
1.56, called रूपातिदेश as contrasted
with कार्यातिदेश; cf. नेह ताद्रूप्यमतिदिश्यते
M. Bh. on VI. 1.85 Vart. 26.
तान one uniform accent or tone
एकश्रुति, as observed at the time of
sacrifices in the case of the recital
of the hymns; cf. तानलक्षणमेकं स्वरमाहु-
र्यज्ञकर्मणि V. Pr. I.130; cf. also P.I.
2.34.
तानादिक a root of the tanadi class
of roots (8th conjugation).
ताम् personal ending substituted for
तस् of the 3rd pers. dual in the
imperative, imperfect, potential,
benedictive, aorist and condi-
tional; cf. P. III.4.85, 101.
तार (1) elevated, high; a place for
the production of words; cf. T.Pr.
XVII. 11; (2) recital in a high
tone which is recommended in
the evening time; cf. तारं तु विद्यात्सवने
तृतीये, शिरोगतं तत्र सदा प्रयोज्यम् com. on
T. Pr. XXIII. 12.
तारकादि a class of words headed by
the word तारका and containing
prominently the words पुष्प, कण्टक,
मुकुल, कुसुम, पल्लव, बुभुक्षा, ज्वर and
many others numbering more than
ninety, to which the taddhita affix
इत (इतच्) is added in the sense of
'containing'. As this class, called
तारकादि, is looked upon as आकृतिगण,
nouns with इत added at their end,
are supposed to be included in it;
cf. P. V. 2.36.
तारानाथ called तर्कवाचस्पति; a Bengali
modern Sanskrit scholar and gra-
mmarian of the nineteenth century
who has written a commentary
called Sarala on the Siddhanta
Kaumudi. He has edited many
|
important Sanskrit works consist-
ing of many kosas.
तालव्य lit. produced from तालु the
part below the tongue; the vowel
इ, चवर्ग, य and श् are called तालव्य,
palatal letters; cf. इचशेयास्तालौ V.Pr.
I. 66. These letters are formed
upon the palate by the middle
part of the tongue; cf. R.Pr. 1.42,
R.Pr. II.36.
तालादि a small class of eight words to
which the affix अ ( अण् ) is added
in the sense of 'a product' or 'a
part' e.g. तालं धनुः, बार्हिणम्, etc.;
cf. Kas, on P.IV.3.152.
तालु palate; cf. तालुशब्देन जिह्वाया अधस्तन-
प्रदेश उच्यते । स इवर्णस्य स्थानम् । जिह्वामध्यं
करणम् । cf. T. Pr. II. 22.
तास् conjugational sign or Vikarana
(तासि) added to a root in the first
future before the personal endings
which become accented grave
(अनुदात्त); cf. P.VI.1.186; it has the
augment इ prefixed, if the root, to
which it is added, is सेट्, cf. P. VI.
4. 62.
तासि the Vikarana तास्. See तास्.
ति (l) personal ending तिप् of the 3rd
pers. sing.; (2) common term for
the krt affixes क्तिन् and क्तिच् as
also for the unadi affix ति; see
क्तिन् and क्तिच्; (3) fem. affix ति
added to the word युवन्. e. g.
युवतिः cf. P. IV. 1.77; (4) tad. affix
ति as found in the words पङ्क्ति and
विंशति cf. Kas. on P.V.1.59; (5) tad.
affix added to the word पक्ष in the
sense of 'a root,' and to the words
कम् and शम् in the sense of posses-
sion (मत्वर्थे ); e.g. पक्षतिः, कन्तिः, शान्तिः,
cf. Kas, on P. V.2.25, 138; (6) a
technical term for the term गति in
Panini's grammar, cf. उपसर्गाः क्रिया-
योगे; गतिश्च P. 1.4.59, 60. The term
ति for गति is used in the Jainendra
Vyakarana.
|
तिककितवादि a class of compound
words headed by the dvandva
compound तिककितव in which the
taddhita affixes added to the con-
stituent members of the com-
pound are dropped when the
dvandva compound is to be used
in the plural number; तैकायनयश्च कैत-
वायनयश्च तिककितवाः; cf. Kas. on P. II.
4.68.
तिकन् tad. affix तिक added to the
word मृद् in the sense of the word
itself ( स्वार्थे ) e. g. मृत्तिका cf.; P. V.
4.39.
तिकादि a class of words headed by
the words तिक, केितव, संज्ञा and others
to which the taddhita affix अायनि
(फिञ्) causing the substitution of
vrddhi is added in the sense of
'a descendant'; e.g. तैकायनि:, कैत-
वायनि:; cf. Kas. on P. IV.1.154.
तिङ् (l) a brief term (प्रत्याहार) for the 18
personal endings. Out of these
eighteen personal endings, which
are common for all tenses and
moods, the first nine तिप्, तस् etc.
all called Parasmaipada, while
the other nine त, अाताम् etc. are
named Atmanepada and तङ् also;
cf. तङानावात्मनेपदम्; (2) a verbal form
called also अाख्यातक; cf. तिङ् खलु
अाख्यातका भवान्ति । पचति पठति । V.Pr.I.27.
तिङन्त (l) a word ending in तिङ्; a
Verb; (2) a popular name given
to the section which deals with
verbs in books on grammar as
contrasted with the term सुबन्त
which is used for the section deal-
ing with nouns.
तिङन्तशिरोमणि a work dealing with
verbal forms written by शिरोमणि-
भट्टाचार्य.
तिङर्थ senses possessed by the person-
al endings of verbs, viz. कारक ( कर्ता
or कर्म ) संख्या and काल. For details
see Vaiyakaranabhusanasara.
|
तिङ्निघात the grave accent for the
whole word (सर्वेनिघात्) generally
possessed by a verbal form when it
is preceded by a word form which
is not a verb; cf. तिङतिङ: P. VIII.
1.28.
तित् an affix to which the mute
indicatory letter त् is added signi-
fying the circumflex accent of
that affix; e. g. the affixes यत्, ण्यत्
etc.; cf. P. VI. 1.185.
तित्स्वर the circumflex accent possess-
ed by an affix marked with the
mute letter त्. See तित्.
तिथुक् the augment तिथ् added to the
words बहु, पूप, गण and संघ when
they are followed by the tad.
affix अ ( ड ) e, g. बहुतिथः; cf. P.
V. 2.52.
तिप् the personal ending of the 3rd
pers. sing. substituted for ल (लकार)
in the Parasmaipada. For sub-
stitutes for तिप् in special cases, see
P. VI.1.68, III.4.82, 83, 84.
तिमण्णा a southern grammarian who
wrote a short treatise on the
pratyaharas like अण्, इण् etc. in
the grammar of Panini.
तिरुमल्ल a southern writer of the
commentary named सुमनोरमा on
the Siddhānta Kaumudi of Bhat-
toji Diksita.
तिल् tad. affix ति added in Vedic
Literature to the word वृक when
superior quality is meant, e.g.
वृकतिः cf. P. V. 4.41.
तिष्ठद्गुप्रभृति compound words headed
by the word तिष्ठद्गु which are
termed as avyayibhava com-
pounds and treated as indeclin-
ables; e.g. तिष्ठद्गु, वहद्गु असंप्रति, प्राह्णम्
etc.; cf. Kas. on P.II. 1.17.
तीक्ष्ण utterance with a sharp tone
characterizing the pronunciation
of the Abhinihita kind of circum-
|
flex vowel as opposed to the
utterance which is called मृदु when
the circumflex, called पादवृत्त, is
pronounced; cf. सर्वतीक्ष्णोऽभिनिहितः
प्रश्लिष्टस्तदनन्तरम्, ततो मृदुतरौ स्वारौ जात्यक्षै-
प्रावुभौ स्मृतौ । ततो मृदुतरः स्वारस्तैरोव्यञ्जन
उच्यते । पादवृत्तो मृदुतमस्त्वेतत्स्वारबलाबलम्
Uvvata on V. Pr. I. 125.
तीय tad. affix तीय in the sense of
पूरण added to the words द्वि and त्रि
before which त्रि is changed into
तृ. e, g. द्वितीयः, तृतीयः cf. P. V.
2.54, 55; the tad. affix अन् ( अ ) is
added to the words ending in तीय
to mean a section e. g. द्वितीयॊ भागः
cf. Kas. on P. V. 3.48.
तीव्रतर extreme sharpness of the
nasalization at the time of pro-
nouncing the anusvara and the
fifth letters recommended by Sai-
tyayana.e. g. अग्नीररप्सुषदः, वञ्चते
परिवञ्चते. cf. T. Pr. XVII. 1.
तु (1) short term ( प्रत्याहार ) for the
dental consonants त्, थ्, द्, ध् and
न् cf. P. I. 1.69; (2) personal-end-
ing substituted for ति in the 2nd
pers. imper. sing. Parasmaipada
cf. P. III, 4.86; (3) tad. affix तु
in the sense of possession added
in Vedic Literature to कम् and
शम् e. g. क्रन्तुः, शन्तु: cf. P. V. 2.138;
(4) unadi affix तु ( तुन्) prescribed
by the rule सितनिगमिमसिसच्यविधाञ्कुशि-
भ्यस्तुन् ( Unadi Sitra I.69 ) before
which the augment इ is not added
e.g. सेतुः सक्तुः etc. cf. P. VII.
2.9
तुक् augment त् added (1) to the root
चि in the form चित्य, the pot. pass.
part. of चि cf. P. III. 1.132; (2) to
the short vowel at the end of a
root before a krt affix marked
with the mute letter प् e.g. अग्निचित्,
प्रहृत्य cf. P. VI. 1.71 ; (3) to a short
vowel before छ् if there be close
proximity ( संहिता ) between the
|
two e. g. इच्छति, गच्छति; cf. P. VI.
1.73; (4) to the indeclinables अा
and मा as also to a long vowel
before छ, e. g. आच्छादयति, विचाच्छाद्यते:
cf. P. VI. 1.74, 75; (5) to a long
vowel optionally, if it is at the
end of a word, e. g. लक्ष्मीच्छाया,
लक्ष्मीछाया, cf. P. VI. 1.76; (7) to the
letter न् at the end of a word
before श्, e.g. भवाञ्च्छेते, cf. P. VIII.
3.31.
तुग्विधि a rule prescribing the addi-
tion of the augment त् ; e. g. नलोपः
सुप्स्वरसंज्ञातुग्विधिषु कृति P. VIII. 2. 2
See तुक्.
तुजादि roots such as the root तुज् and
the like, which have their vowel
of the reduplicative syllable leng-
thened as seen mostly in Vedic
Literature: e. g. तूतुजानः, मामहानः,
दाधार etc.: cf. Kas. on P. VI.1.7.
तुट्augment त् (1) added to the affix
अन substituted for the यु of ट्यु and
ट्युल्; e. g. चिरंतनः, सायंतनः, cf. P.
IV.3.23; (2) added to the tad.
affix इक (ठक्) applied to the word
श्वस् in the Saisika senses; e.g, शौव-
स्तिकः cf. P. IV. 3.15.
तुदादि a class of roots headed by the
root तुद् which take the conjuga-
tional sign अ ( श ) and which are
popularly called roots of the sixth
conjugation, cf. P. III.1.77.
तुन् unadi affix तु, added to the roots
सि, तन् , गम् etc. See तु (4).
तुन्दादि a very small class of words
headed by the word तुन्द to which
the taddhita affix इल ( इलच् ) is
added in the sense of possession
( मत्वर्थ ). The affix इल is optional
and the other affixes इन् , इक and
मत् are also added; e.g. तुन्दिल, तुन्दी,
तुन्दिकः, तुन्दवान् ; similarly उदरिलः
etc.; cf. Kas. on P.V.2.117.
तुम् krt affix तुम् of the infinitive (1)
added to a root optionally with
|
ण्वुल् when the root refers to an
action for the purpose of which
another action is mentioned by the
principal verb ; e.g. भोक्तुं व्रजति or
भोजको व्रजति्; cf. Kas. on P.III.3.11;
(2) added to a root connected with '
another root in the sense of desire
provided both have the same sub-
ject; e.g. इच्छति भोक्तुम् ; cf. P. III.
3.158; (3) added to a root connec-
ted with the words काल, समय or वेला;
e.g. कालो भोक्तुम् etc. cf. P.III.3.167;
(4) added to any root which is
connected with the roots शक्, धृष्,
ज्ञा, ग्लै, घट्, रभ्, लभ्, क्रम्, सह्, अर्ह् and अस्
or its synonym, as also with अलम्,
or its synonym; e.g. शक्नोति भोक्तुम्,
भवति भोक्तुम्, वेला भोक्तुम्, अलं भोक्तुम्,
पर्याप्तः कर्तुम् : cf. Kas. on P.III.4.
65, 66.
तुल्य similar in articulation; savarna;
cf. R. T. 168.
तुल्याधिकरण having got the same sub-
stratum; denoting ultimately the
same object; expressed in the same
case the same as samanadhikarana
in the grammar of Panini, cf.
Kat. II.5.5.
तृ (l) substitute prescribed for the
last vowel of the word अर्वन् so as
to make it declinable like words
marked with the mute letter ऋ;
(2) common term for the krt
affixes तृन् and तृच् prescribed in the
sense of the agent of a verbal
activity; the tad. affixes ईयस्, and
इष्ठ are seen placed after words
ending in तृ in Vedic Literature
before which the affix तृ is elided;
e.g. करिष्ठः, दोहीयसी; cf. Kas. on P.
V. 3.59.
तृच् tad. affix तृ, taking the fem.
affix ई ( ङीप् ), (1) added to
a root optionally with अक ( ण्वुल् )
in the sense of the agent of a
verbal activity, the word so form-
|
ed having the last vowel acute;
e.g. कर्ता कारक:; हर्ता हारकः; cf. P. III
I.133; (2) prescribed in the sense
of 'deserving one' optionally along
with the pot. pass. part. affixes; e.g.
भवान् खलु कन्यया वोढा, भवान् कन्यां वहेत्,
भवता खलु कन्या वोढव्या, वाह्या, वहनीया वा;
cf. Kas. on P. III. 3.169.
तृजन्त a word ending in the affix तृच्
and hence getting the guna vowel
(i. e. अ ) substituted for the final
vowel ऋ before the Sarvana-
masthana (i. e. the first five) case
affixes; cf. तृजन्त आदेशॊ भविष्यति, M.
Bh. on VII. 1.96.
तृज्वद्भाव treatment of a word as
ending with the affix तृच् although,
in fact, it does not so end; e. g.
the word क्रोष्टु; cf. तृज्वत्क्रोष्टु:, P. VII.
1.95 ; cf. also तृज्वद्भावस्यावकाशः क्रोष्ट्रा
क्रोष्टुना; M.Bh, on VII. 1.95 Vart.
10.
तृणादि a class of words to which the
taddhita affix श is added in the
four senses given in P. IV. 2.67 to
70; e. g. तृणशः, नडशः, पर्णशः etc.; cf.
Kas. on P. IV. 3.80.
तृतीय the third consonants out of
the class consonants; वर्गतृतीय; viz.
ग्, ज्, ड्, द् and ब्; cf. यथा तृतीयास्तथा
पञ्चमा अानुनासिक्यवर्जम् M.Bh. on P. I.
1.9.
तृतीया the third case; affixes of the
third case ( instrumental case or
तृतीयाविभक्ति ) which are placed (1)
after nouns in the sense of an ins-
trument or an agent provided the
agent is not expressed by the
personal-ending of the root; e. g.
देवदत्तेन कृतम्, परशुना छिनत्ति: cf. P. III.
3.18; (2) after nouns connected
with सह्, nouns meaning defective
limbs, nouns forming the object of
ज्ञा with सम् as also nouns meaning
हेतु or a thing capable of produc
ing a result: e. g. पुत्रेण सहागतः, अक्ष्णा
23
|
काणः, मात्रा संजानीते, विद्यया यशः; cf. Kas.
on P. II.3.19,23; (3) optionally
with the ablative after nouns
meaning quality, and optionally
with the genitive after pronouns
in the sense of हेतु, when the word
हेतु is actually used e. g. पाण्डित्येन
मुक्तः or पाण्डित्यान्मुक्त:; केन हेतुना or
कस्य हेतोर्वसति; it is observed by the
Varttikakara that when the word
हेतु or its synonym is used in a sen-
tence, a pronoun is put in any
case in apposition to that word
i.e. हेतु or its synonym e.g, केन
निमित्तेन, किं निमित्तम् etc.; cf. Kas. on
P. II. 3. 25, 27; (4) optionally
after nouns connected with the
words पृथक्, विना, नाना, after the words
स्तोक, अल्प, as also after दूर, अन्तिक
and their synonyms; e.g. पृथग्देवदत्तेन
etc. स्तोकेन मुक्तः, दूरेण ग्रामस्य, केशैः प्रसितः;
cf. Kas. on P.II.3.32, 33, 35, 44; (5)
optionally with the locative case
after nouns meaning constellation
when the tad. affix after them has
been elided; e.g. पुष्येण संप्रयातोस्मि श्रवणे
पुनरागतः Mahabharata; cf. P.II.3.45;
(6) optionally with the genitive
case after words connected with
तुल्य or its synonyms; e.g.तुल्यो देवदत्तेन,
तुल्यो देवदत्तस्य; cf. P. II.3.72.
तृतीयासमास called also तृतीयातत्पुरुषसमास
as prescribed by P. II. I. 30-35;
e.g. तृतीयासमासे P.I. 1.30 and the
Mahabhasya thereon.
तृन् (1) krt affix तृ with the acute
accent on the first vowel of the
word formed by its application,
applied to any root in the sense of
'an agent' provided the agent is
habituated to do a thing, or has his
nature to do it, or does it well; e.g.
वदिता जनापवादान् , मुण्डयितारः श्राविष्ठायना
-भवन्ति वधूमूढाम् , कर्ता कटम्; cf. Kas. on
P. III.2.135; words ending with
तृन् govern the noun connected
with them in the accusative case;
|
तैत्तिरीयप्रातिशाख्य त्नप् 178
(2) the term तृन् , used as a short
term ( प्रत्याहार ) standing for krt
affixes beginning with those pres-
cribed by the rule लटः शतृशानचौ
(P.III.2.124) and ending with the
affix तृन् (in P.III.3.69); cf. Kas. on
P.III.4.69.
तैत्तिरीयप्रातिशाख्य called also कृष्णयजुः-
प्रातिशाख्य and hence representing
possibly all the different branches
or Sakhas of the कृष्णयजुर्वेद, which is
not attributed definitely to a parti-
cular author but is supposed to
have been revised from time to
time and taught by various acaryas
who were the followers of the
Taittiriya Sakha.The work is divid-
ed into two main parts, each of
which is further divided into twelve
sections called adhyayas, and
discusses the various topics such as
letters and their properties, accen-
ts, euphonic changes and the like,
just as the other Pratisakhya
works. It is believed that Vararuci,
Mahiseya and Atreya wrote Bhas-
yas on the Taittiriya Pratisakhya,
but at present, only two important
commentary works on it are avai-
lable- (a) the 'Tribhasyaratna',
based upon the three Bhasyas
mentioned above as the title shows,
written by Somayarya and (b) the
'Vaidikabharana' written by
Gopalayajvan. For details see
Introduction to 'Taittiriya
Pratisakhya' ed. Govt Oriental
Library Series, Mysore.
तैरोविराम a kind of स्वरित, or a vowel
with a circumflex accent which
follows an acute-accented vowel
characterized by avagraha i. e.
coming at the end of the first
member of a compound; e.g. गेाप-
ताविति गॊSपतौ यज्ञपतिमिति यज्ञSपतिं. Here
the vowel अ of प following upon
|
the avagraha is called तैरोविरामस्वरित;
cf. उदवग्रहस्तैरोविराम: V. Pr. I. 118,
तैरोव्यञ्जन a kind of svarita or circum-
flex-accented vowel which follows
an acute-accented vowel, with the
intervention of a consonant
between the acute accented vowel
and the circumflex vowel which
(vowel) originally was grave. e. g.
इडे, रन्ते, हव्ये, काम्ये; here the vowel
ए is तैरोव्यञ्जनस्वरित; cf. स्वरो व्यञ्जनयुतस्तैरो-
व्यञ्जनः, V. Pr. I. 117.
तैलच् tad. affix तैल applied in the
sense of oil to a word meaning the
substance from which oil is extra-
cted: e. g. तिलतैलं सर्षपतैलम् ; cf. विकारे
सेनहने तैलच्, Kas on P. V. 2. 29.
तोलप्पदीक्षित a southern grammarian
who has written a gloss called
प्रकाश on the Siddhāntakaumudi
of Bhattoji Diksita.
तोसुन् krt affix तोस् in the sense of
the infinitive ( तुम् ) seen in Vedic
Literature; e. g. ईश्वरोभिचरितो:. The
word ending with तोसुन् becomes
an indeclinable.
तौदादिक a root belonging to the तुदादि
class of roots ( sixth conjugation )
which take the vikarana अ ( श )
causing no guna or vrddhi substi-
tute for the vowel of the root.
तौल्वल्यादि a class of words headed
by the word तौल्वलि, the taddhita
affix in the sense of युवन् ( grand-
child ) placed after which is not
elided by P. II. 4. 60; e.g. तौल्वलिः
पिता, तौल्वलायनः पुत्रः; cf. Kas. on P.II.
4.61.
त्न tad. affix त्न added to the words
चिर, परुंत् and परारि showing time, as
also to the word प्रग in Vedic
Literature: e. g. चिरत्नम्, परुत्नम् ,
परारित्नम्, प्रत्नम् ( where ग is elided );
cf. Kas. on P. IV. 3. 23.
त्नप् tad. affix त्न, added to the word
नव optionally with the affixes तनप्
|
and ख before which नव is changed
to नू ; e. g. नूत्नम् , नूतनम्, नवीनम् ; cf.
P. V. 4, 30 Vart. 6.
त्य (1) tad. affix त्य standing for त्यक्
and त्यप् which see below; (2)
a technical term for प्रत्यय ( a
suffix or a termination ) in the
Jainendra Vyakarana.
त्यक् tad. affix त्य added in the
Saisika senses to the words दक्षिणा,
प्रश्चात् and पुरस् ; e. g. दाक्षिणात्यः,पाश्चात्यः,
पौरस्त्य:, दाक्षिणात्यिका cf. P. IV. 2. 98.
त्यकन् tad. affix त्यक added to the
words उप and अधि in the senses
'near' and 'above' respectively;
cf. पर्वतस्यासन्नमुपत्यका, तस्यैवारूढमधित्यका,
cf. Kas. on P. V. 2.34.
त्यदादि a term used for the class of
pronouns headed by त्यद् which are
eight viz. त्यद्,तद्, यद्, एतद्, अदस्,
इदम्, एक and द्वि; cf. P.I.1.74, I.2.72,
III. 2. 60, VII. 2. 102.
त्यदादिविधि a specific operation pres-
cribed for the pronouns headed
by त्यद् e. g. the substitution of अ
for the final letter; cf. त्यदादिविधौ च
प्रयोजनम्, M. Bh. on P. I. 1. 27
Vart. 6.
त्यप् tad. affix त्य (1) added to a few
specified indeclinables in the Saisi-
ka senses; e. g. अमात्य:,इहत्यः etc.; cf.
Kas. on IV. 2. 104; (2) added to
the indeclinables ऐषमस्, ह्यस् and श्वस्
optionally along with ट्यु and ठन् ;
e.g. श्वस्त्यम्, श्वस्तनम्, शौवस्तिकम्; cf.
Kas, on P. IV. 2.105.
त्र a common term for the krt affixes
ष्ट्रन् and इत्र (P.III. 2. 181-186) in
case the vowel इ of इत्र is look-
ed upon as equivalent to an aug-
ment, as also for the unadi affix ष्ट्रन्
and the tad. affixes त्र and त्रल् (P.
IV. 2.51 and V.3.10); the tad, affix
त्र is added in the sense of समूह or
collection to the word गॊ, e.g.
गोत्रा; cf. Kas. on P.IV.2.51.
|
त्रल् tad. affix termed Vibhakti added
to pronouns excepting द्वि and
others, and to the words बहु and किम्
when they end with the loc. case
termination: e.g. कुत्र, तत्र, बहुत्र etc.;
cf. Kas. on P.V. 1.10, 14.
त्रा tad. affix त्रा in the sense of some-
thing donated, as also to the
words देव, मनुष्य, पुरुष, पुरु and मर्त्य end-
ing in the accusative or the loca-
tive case; e. g. व्राह्मणत्रा करोति, देवत्रा
वसतिः cf. Kas. on P. V.4.55,56.
’There is avagraha before the tad.
affix त्रा. देवत्रेति देवSत्रा्; cf. V.Pr. V.9.
त्रि (1) krt affix क्त्रि, always having the
tad. affix मप् ( म ) added to it,
applied to the roots marked with
the mute syllable डु prefixed to
them in the Dhatupatha; e. g.
कृत्रिमम्, पक्त्रिमम्; (2) a term signify-
ing the plural number; cf. ना नौ
मे मदर्थे त्रिद्व्येकेषु V.Pr.II.3.
त्रिक lit. triad; a term used in the
Mahabhasya in connection with
the Vibhakti affixes i.e. case end-
ings and personal endings which
are in groups of three; cf. त्रिकं
पुनर्विभक्तिसंज्ञम् M.Bh. on P.I.1,38: cf.
also कस्यचिदेव त्रिकस्य प्रथमसंज्ञा स्यात् M.
Bh. om P.I.4.101 ; cf. also M. Bh.
on II.2.23, V.1.52, V.1.58.
त्रिपथगा name of a commentary on
the Paribhasendusekhara written
by Raghavendracarya Gajendra-
gadkar, a resident of Satara and a
pupil of Nilakanthasastri Thatte.
He lived in the second half of the
eighteenth and first half of the
nineteenth century and wrote com-
entaries on important grammar
works.
त्रिपद made up of a collection of three
padas or words; the word is used
in connection with a Rk or a por-
tion of the kramapatha: cf. यथॊक्तं
पुनरुक्तं त्रिपदप्रभृति T.Pr.I.61. The word
|
is found used in connection with a
bahuvrihi compound made up of
three words; cf. the term त्रिपद-
बहुव्रीहि.
त्रिपादीa term usually used in conne-
ction with the last three Padas (ch.
VIII. 2, VIII. 3 and VIII. 4) of
Panini’s Ashtadhyayi, the rules in
which are not valid by convention
to rules in the first seven chapters
and a quarter, as also a later rule
in which (the Tripadi) is not valid
to an earlier one; cf. पूर्वत्रासिद्धम् P.
VIII.2.1; (2) name of a critical
treatise on Panini's grammar ("The
Tripadi") written by Dr. H. E.
Buiskool recently.
त्रिभाष्यरत्न name of a commentary on
the Taittiriya Pratisakhya written
by Somayarya. The commentary
is said to have been based on the
three Bhasya works attributed to
the three ancient Vedic scholars-
Vararuci, Mahiseya and Atreya.
त्रिमात्र consisting of three moras or
matras. The protracted or प्लुत
vowels are said to consist of three
matras as contrasted with the
short and long vowels which
respectively consist of one and two
matras; cf. Kas. on P.I.2.27.
त्रिमुनि (1) the famous three ancient
grammarians Panini (the author of
the Sutras), Katyayana (the author
of the Varttikas), and Patanjali
(the author of the Mahabhasya;)
(2) the grammar of Panini, called
so, being the contribution of the
reputed triad of Grammarians.
त्रिरुक्त repeated thrice, occurring
thrice; a term used in the Prati-
Sakhya works in respect of a word
which is repeated in the krama
and other artificial recitations.
त्रिलोकनाथ son of Vaidyanatha who
wrote a small treatise on karakas
|
called षट्कारकनिरूपण.
त्रिलॊचन a scholar of grammar who
has written a small work named
अव्ययशब्दवृत्ति on the uses of indeclin-
ables.
त्रिविक्रम pupil of Vardhamana who
wrote a gloss called ’पञ्जिकॊद्द्यॊत’.
on the Katantra-vrtti
त्रिशिखा name of a commentary on
the Paribhasendusekhara written
by Laksminrsimha in the 18th
century.
त्रैकाल्य all the three times, past,
present and future; cf. त्रयः काला:
समाहृताः त्रिकालम्, त्रिकालमेव त्रैकाल्यम् ।
स्वार्थे ष्यञ् Uvvatabhasya on V. Pr.
I. I5.
त्रैपादिक a rule or an operation pres-
cribed by Panini in the last three
quarters of his Astadhyayi. See
त्रिपादी above.
त्रैशब्द्य a collection of three words
(to express the same sense); cf.
अपि च त्रैशब्द्यं न प्रकल्पते । अस्पृक्षत् अस्पार्क्षीत्
अस्प्राक्षीदिति M. Bh. on III. 1.44;
cf. also M. Bh. on P. I. 4.74, IV.
1. 88, IV. 2.60 etc.
त्रेस्वर्य (l) use of the three accents
acute, grave and circumflex at the
time of the recital of the Veda;
त्रयः स्वरा एव त्रैस्वर्यम्; cf. चातुर्वर्ण्यादीनां
स्वार्थॆ उपसंख्यानम् । त्रैलोक्यम् , त्रैस्यर्यम् Kas,
on P. V. 1. 124. cf. also यद्येवं त्रैस्वर्ये
न प्रकल्पते तत्र को दोषः। त्रैस्वर्येणाधीमहॆ इत्ये-
तन्नोपपद्यते । M. Bh. on P. I. 2.31.
त्र्यक्षर (a word) having three vowels
or syllables in it; त्र्यच् or त्र्यच्क; cf.
द्व्यक्षरव्यक्षरेभ्य इति वक्तव्यम् cf. M. Bh.
on VIII 4.6.
त्र्यम्बक a grammarian of the nine-
teenth century, who resided at
Wai in Satara District and wrote
a commentary on the Paribhasen-
dusekhara which is named त्र्यम्बकी
after the writer.
|
त्र्यम्बकी a commentary on the Pari-
bhasendusekhae by म्बव्यकः see
त्र्यम्बक.
त्व tad. affix त्व in the sense of duty,
nature or essence, prescribed
optionally with the affix तल् ( ता );
e. g. अश्वत्वम्, गोत्वम् , अश्वता, गोता; cf
तस्य भावस्त्वतलौ P. V. 1.119, also cf
त्वतलोर्गुणवचनस्य P. VI. 3. 35 Vart.lo.
त्वत् krt affix त्च in the sense of the
potential pass. part. in Vedic
Literature; e. g. कर्त्वे हविः । कर्तव्यम्:
also cf. Kas, on P.III. 4.14;cf also
कृतानि या च कर्त्वा R. V. IX. 47.2.
त्वन् tad. affix त्व before which there
is observed the caesura or ava-
graha in the recital of the Pada-
patha. e: g. देवत्वमिति देवsत्वम् । cf.
V. Pr. V. 9.
थ् () second consonant of the dental
class of consonants possessed of
the properties श्वासानुप्रदान, अघोष, विवृत-
कण्ठत्व and महाप्राणत्व; (2) augment
थ् ( थुक् ) added to the words षष् ,
कति, कतिपय and चतुर् before the
Purana affix डट्. e. g. षण्णां पूरण: षष्ठ:,
कतिथः, चतुर्थः; cf. Kas, on P. V.
2.51 ; (3) substitute for the con-
sonant ह् of आह् before any con-
sonant except a nasal, and a
semivowel as also for the conso-
nant स् of स्था preceded by the
preposition उद्: cf. P, VIII. 2.35,
VIII. 4.61.
थ (l) personal-ending of the 2nd
pers. pl. Parasmaipada,substituted
for the ल् of the ten lakara affixes;
(2) substitute ( थल् ) for the 2nd
pers sing. personal ending सिप् in.
the perfect tense: (3) unadi affix
( थक् ) added to the roots पा, तॄ, तुद्
etc. e. g. पीथः, तीर्थः, etc.; cf unadi
sutra II. 7; (4) unadi affix ( क्थन् ) |
|
added to the roots हन्, कुष् ，नी etc.;
e. g, हथः, कुष्टं, नीथः etc. cf unadi
sutra II. 2: (5) unadi affix (थन्)
added to the roots उष्, कुष्, गा and
ऋ, e. g. ओष्ठः, कोष्ठम् etc. cf unadi
sutra_II. 4; (6) a technical term
for the term अभ्यस्त or the redu-
plicated wording of Panini ( cf.
उभे अभ्यस्तम् ) P. VI. 1. 5, used in
the Jainendra Vyakarana.
थकन् krt affix थक added to the root
गै 'to sing,' in the sense of agent
provided he is skilled: e. g. गाथकः ;
cf. P. III. 1.146.
थट् tad. affix थ added to numerals
ending in न् in Vedic Literature;
e. g. पञ्चथ, सप्तथः, पर्णमयानि पञ्चथानि
भवन्ति: cf. P. V. 2.50.
थन personal-ending थन substituted
for त of the 2nd pers. pl. of the
imperative Parasmaipada in Vedic '
Literature, e. g. यदिष्ठन for यदिच्छथ:
cf. Kas. on P. VII. 1.45.
थमु tad. affix थम् in the sense of
प्रकार (manner) added to the pro-
nouns इदम्, and किम्, the words
ending in थम् becoming indeclina-
bles; e. g, इत्थम्, कथम् cf. P. V.
3.24, 25.
थल् personal ending थ substituted
for सिप् of the 2nd pers.sing. Paras-
maipada in the perfect tense as
also in the present tense in speci-
fic cases; cf. P. III. 4.82, 88,84.
थस् personal ending of the 2nd
pers. dual Parasmaipada, which
is substituted for ल् of the lakara
affixes; cf. P. III 4.78.
था (1) tad. affix था in the sense of
question or reason ( हेतु ) added to
the pronoun किम् in Vedic Litera-
ture; e.g. कथा देवा आसन् ; cf. Kas.
on P.V.3.26; (2) tad. affix था (थाल्
according to Panini) which gets
caesura or avagraha after प्रत्न, पूर्व,
विश्व, इम and ऋतु; e.g. प्रत्नथेतिं प्रत्नSथा,
|
पूर्वथेति पूर्वऽथा etc.: cf. Vij. Pr.V.12:
(3) tad. affix थाल् in the sense of
इव added to the words प्रत्न, पूर्व, विश्व
and इम in Vedic Literature, e.g.
तं प्रत्नथा पूर्वथा विश्वथेमथा; cf Kas, on P.
V.3.111: (4) tad. affix थाल् in the
sense of mannar ( प्रक्रार) added to
किन् , pronouns excepting those
headed by द्वि, and the word बहु;
e.g. सर्वथा, cf. P V.3.23.
थाल् tad. affix थाल्. See था.
थास् personal ending of the 2nd
pers. sing. Atmanepada, substitut-
ed for ल् of the lakara affixes.
थीम (THIEME, PAUL) a sound
scholar of the present day, well
versed in Sanskrit Grammar and
Vedic Literature, who has written
a critical treatise named "Panini
and the Veda."
थुक् (1) augment थ् added to the
words षष्, कति, कतिपय and चतुर्: see
थ् above; (2) augment थ् added to
the root अस् of the fourth conjugati-
on Paras. before the affixes of the
aorist. e.g. अास्थत्: cf P.VII.4.17.
थ्यन् tad. affix थ्य in the sense of
'favourable for' ( तस्मै हितम् ) added
to the words अज and अवि; e.g.
-अजथ्या यूथिः। अविथ्या । cf Kas. on P.
V.1.8.
द् third consonant of the dental class
of consonants possessed of the pro-
perties नादानुप्रदान, घोष, संवृतकण्ठत्व and
अल्पप्राणता;(2) consonant द् substituted
for the final letter of nouns ending
with the affix वस् as also for the final
letter of स्रंस्, ध्वंस् and अनडुह् provided
the final letter is at the end of
a pada; e.g. विद्वद्भयाम् etc.; cf Kas.
on P, VIII. 2.72; (3) consonant द्
substituted for the final स् of roots
excepting the root.अस्, before the
|
personal ending तिप् of the third
pers. sing.; e. g. अचकाद् भवान् ; cf.
P. VIII. 3.93.
द (1) the consonant द्, the vowel अ
being added for facility of utter-
ance or use; (2) a technical term
used in the Jainendra Vyakarana
for the term आत्मनेपद in the gram-
mar of Panini.
दग्घ a fault of pronunciation where
the letters are uttered indistinct
( अस्पष्ट ).
दघ्नच् tad. affix दघ्न prescribed optiona-
lly with द्वयस and मात्र in the sense
of measure ( प्रमाणे ), with ङीप् ( ई )
to be added further to form the
fem. base, e. g. जानुदघ्नम्, जानुद्वयसम्,
जानुमात्रम् , जानुदघ्नी, cf. P. V. 2.37 and
IV.1.15; दघ्नच् is added optionally
along with अण् as also with द्वयस
and मात्र to the words पुरुष and हस्तिन्
e.g. पुरुषद्वयसम्, पौरुषम् पुरुषदघ्नम्, पुरुषमात्रम्;
cf. P. V. 2.38.
दण्ड one of the eight artificial Vedic
recitations.
दण्डादि a class of words headed by
the word दण्ड to which the taddhita
affix य, is added in the sense of
'deserving', cf. दण्डमर्हति दण्ड्यः Kas.
on P. V. 1.66
दधिपयआदि a class of compound
words headed by the word दधिपयस्
which are not compounded as
समाहारद्वन्द्व which ends in the neuter
gender and singular number; e.g.
दधिपयसी, शिववैश्रवणौ, श्रद्धातपसी etc.; cf.
Kas. on P.II. 4.14.
दन्त place where the utterance of
dental letters originates;cf. ऌतुलसानां
दन्ताः S. K. on P. I. 1.9.
दन्तमूलीय the letters त्, थ् द् ध् and न्:
cf. दन्तमूलीयस्तु तकारवर्गः R. Pr. I. 19.
The Rk. Pratisakhya calls र् (रेफ )
also as दन्तमूलीय.
दन्तोष्ठ्य also दन्त्योष्ठ्य or : दन्त्यौष्ठ्य the
|
dentolabial letter व्: cf. ओष्टान्ताभ्यां
दन्तैर्वकार । दन्तैरिति स्थाननिर्देशः| ओष्ठान्ता-
भ्याम् इति करणनिर्देशः Com. on T.Pr.II.
43.
द्न्त्य produced at the teeth, dental;
formed at the teeth by the tip of
the tongue; e.g. the letters लृ ल् ,स्
and तवर्ग; cf. लृलसिता दन्ते V.Pr.I.69.
According to Panini's grammar
लॄ(long) does not exist. Accord-
ing to Taittirya Prtisakhya र्
is partly dental and partly lingual;
cf T.Pr.II.41, while व् is partly
dental and partly labial; cf. T.Pr.
II.43; cf. दन्त्या जिह्वाग्रकरणाः V. Pr.I.
76; cf. लुग्वा दुहदिहलिहगुहामात्मनेपदे दन्त्ये
P. VII. 3.73.
दयानन्दसरस्वति a brilliant Vedic
scholar of the nineteenth century
belonging to North India who
established on a sound footing the
study of the Vedas and Vyakarana
and encouraged the study of
Kasikavrtti. He has written many
books on vedic studies.
दयापाल a.Jain writer who wrote a
treatise named रूपसिद्धि.
दयारत्न a.Jain scholar who has written
a grammar treatise on the Saras-
vata Grammar called सारस्वतपरिभाषा.
दयाराम writer of a commentary on
the Mugdhabodha Vyakarana
of Bopadeva.
दर्पण name of a commentary on
Kondabhatta's Vaiyakaranabhusa-
nasara, written by a grammarian
named Harivallabha.
दर्पणा name of a commentary on the
Sabdakaustubha, written by
Mannudeva or Mantudeva of the
nineteenth century.
दशक a name given to the treatise on
grammar written by व्याघ्रपाद which
consisted of 10 chapters; cf. दशकं
वैयाघ्रपदीयम् Kas. on P V. 1.58. The
|
word also means students reading
the work दशक; cf. दशका वैयाघ्रपदीया:
Kas. on P. IV.2.65.
दशगणी (1) a section of grammatical
treatises dealing with the ten
conjugations of roots. e.g the
first section of the second part
( उत्तरार्ध ) of the Siddhanta Kau-
mudi; (2) name of the dhatupatha
of Panini which gives ten classes
of roots; cf. भूवादयो दशगणीपरिपठिता
गृह्यन्ते Nyasa on I.3.1.
दशधुष्करण the ten classes or conjuga-
tions of roots; धुष् was a term for
धातु (root) in some ancient gram-
mar works.
दशबलकारिका a short treatise on the
roots belonging to more than one
conjugation; the name of the
author is not given.
दा tad. affix named 'vibhakti' app-
lied to the words सर्व, एक, अन्य, किं,
यत्,तत् and इदम् in the locative case;
e.g. सर्वदा, एकदा, कदा: cf. Kas. on
P. V. 3.15,19,20,21.
दाक्षायण name, by which व्याडि, the
author of the grammar work संग्रह
is referred to. The word दाक्षायण
indicates that व्याडि was a
descendant of दक्ष, and, as Panini
is called दाक्षीपुत्र, critics say
that Panini and Vyadi were
relatives; cf. शोभना खलु दाक्षायणस्य
दाक्षायणेन वा संग्रहस्य कृतिः M. Bh. on P.
II.3.66.
दाक्षीपुत्र lit. son of a female descen-
dant of दक्ष; name given to Panini
who was the son of दाक्षी a female
descendant of दक्ष; cf. शंकरः शांकरीं
प्रादाद्दाक्षीपुत्राय धीमते Pan. Sik. 56; cf.
also सर्वे सर्वपदादेशा दाक्षीपुत्रस्य पाणिनेः
M.Bh. on P. I. 1.20: VII.1.27.
दानविजय a Jain grammarian, who
wrote a small grammar treatise
named शब्दभूषण.
दानीम् tad. affix called विभक्ति, applied
|
to तद् and इदम् in the sense of the
locative case e.g. तदानीम्, इदानीम्;
cf. P. V.3.18, 19.
दामन्यादि a class of words headed by
the word दामनि to which the tadd-
hita affix छ is added without any
change of sense: e.g.दामनीयः, औलपीयः
cf. Kas. on P. V, 3.116.
दारुण्य explained by the commentators
on the Pratisakhya works as दृढत्व
(firmness) or कठिनता (hardness,) and
given as a characteristic of the acute
or उदात्त tone; cf. अायामो दारुण्यमणुता
खस्येत्युच्चैःकराणि शब्दस्य, T. Pr. XXII.9,
quoted in the Mahabhasya on P.I.
2.29, where दारुण्य is explained as
स्वरस्य दारुणता रूक्षता ।
दासीभारादि a class of words headed
by the word दासीभार which,although
they are tatpurusa compounds,
retain the accents of the first
member of the compound: cf. P.
VI.2.42.
दि a technical term in the Jainen-
dra Vyakarana for the term प्रगृह्य
used by Panini.
दिक्शब्द a word denoting a direction
such as पूर्व, उत्तर and the like, used
as a substantive, e. g. पूर्वो ग्रामात् , or
showing the direction of another
thing being its adjective, e. g.
इयमस्याः पूर्वा; cf Kas, on P. II.3.29.
दिक्समास the bahuvrihi compound
prescribed by the rule दिङ्नामान्यन्तराले,
e.g. पूर्वोत्तरा (north-east) or उत्तरपश्चिमा
(north-west): cf. दिक्समासः दिगुपदिष्टः
समासः, Kas. on P.I. 1.28.
दिगादि a class of words headed by
the word दिक् to which the tad.affix
य ( यत् ) is added in the sense of
'produced therein' ( तत्र भवः ), e.g.
दिशि भवं दिश्यम्, similarly वर्ग्यम्, गण्यः
etc.; cf. Kas. on P.IV.3.54.
देिनण् tad. affix added to the word
मध्य, before which. मध्य is changed
|
to मध्यम्: e. g. माध्यान्दिन उद्गायति;cf मध्य
मध्ये दिनण् चास्मात् M.Bh. on IV. 3.60.
दिवादि a class of roots of the fourth
conjugation, headed by the root
दिव् ( दीव्यति ), called also दीव्यत्यादि
cf. P. I. 2.27.
दी a technical term in the Jainendra
Vyakarana for दीर्ध (long vowel)
in Panini's grammar.
दीपप्रभा a commentary on वाररुचसंग्रह
by नारायण.
दीप्ति explained as स्फूर्ति or throbbing
in utterance. Out of the seven
svaras or yamas क्रुष्ट, प्रथम, द्वितीय,
तृतीय, चतुर्थ, मन्द्र and अतिस्वार्य, the
throbbing ( दीप्ति ) of the latter
and latter tone leads to the per-
ception of the former and former
one: cf. तेषां दीप्तिजोपलब्धि: T. Pr.
XXIII. 15.
दीर्घ long: a term used in connec-
tion with the lengthened tone of
a vowel described to be dvimatra
as contrasted with ह्रस्व having one
matra and प्लुत having three ma-
tras; cf. द्विस्तावान् दीर्घः V. Pr. I. 35,
V. Pr. I. 57, also ऊकालोज्झ्रस्वदीर्घप्लुतः
P, I.2.27.
दीर्घविधि a grammatical operation
where a short vowel is turned
into a long one: a rule of gram-
mar prescribing the lengthening
of a short vowel.
दु a technical term in the Jainendra
Vyakarana for the term वृद्ध which
is used in Panini's grammar and
which is defined by Panini in the
rule वृद्धिर्यस्याचामादिस्तद् वृद्धम् P. I. 1.73.
दुःश्लिष्ट a word, or words whose case
affixes can be syntactically con-
nected only with some difficulty;
cf.बहुव्रीहौ सक्थ्यक्ष्णोः स्वाङ्गात् षच्। स्वाङ्गवाची
यः सक्थिशब्दः अक्षिशब्दश्च तदन्ताद् बहुव्रीहेः
षच् भवति । सूत्रे तु दुःश्लिष्टविभक्तीनि पदानि
Kas, on P. V. 4.I13. .
|
दुःस्पृष्ट produced by an incomplete
contact of the करण; the term is
applied to the phonetic element
ळ् which is due to the incomplete
contact of the organ at the pro-
duction of the letter ल्; cf दु:स्पृष्ट-
श्चेति विज्ञेयः; Pan, Siksa 5.
दुर्गसिंह the famous commentator of
the Katantra sutras, whose Vrtti
on the sutras is the most popular
one. It is called , कातन्त्रसूत्रवृत्ति or
कातन्तवृत्ति or दौर्गसिंहीवृत्ति , also. A
work on Paribhasas named परिभाषा-
वृति, in which Paribhasas are ex-
plained and established as based
on the Katantra Vyakarana
sutras, is attributed to Durga-
simha. It is doubtful whether
this commentator Durgasimha is
the same as Durgacarya, the
famous commentator of Yaska's
Nirukta. There is a legend that
Durgasimha was the brother of
Vikramaditya, the founder of the
Vikrama Era. Besides the gloss
on the Katantra sutras, some gra-
mmar works such as a gloss on
the unadi sutras, a gloss ( वृत्ति ) on
Kalapa-Vyakarana Sutras, a com-
mentary on Karakas named षट्का-
रकरत्न, Namalinganusasana and
Paribhasavrtti are ascribed to
Durgasimha. Some scholars be-
lieve that the term अमरसिंह was
only a title given to Durgasimha
for his profound scholarship, and
it was Durgasimha who was the
author of the well-known work
Amarakosa.
दुर्गादास a grammarian who wrote
(a) a gloss on Bopadeva's Mug-
dhabodha, (b) a gloss named घातु-
दीपिका on Kavikalpadruma and
(c) Sabdarnavakosa.
दुर्गोत्तम a grammarian who wrote
a work on genders called लिङ्गानु-
शासन and also a commentary on it.
24
|
दुर्घटवृत्ति name of a grammar work
explaining words which are difficult
to derive according to rules of
Panini. The work is written in
the style of a running commen-
tary on select sutras of Panini,
devoted mainly to explain difficult
formations. The author of it,
Saranadeva, was an eastern gra-
mmarian who, as is evident from
the number of quotations in his
work, was a great scholar of the
12th or the 13th century.
दुर्घटवृत्तिसंस्करण a grammar work
on the formation of difficult
words attributed to शर्वरक्षित or
सर्वरक्षित.
दुर्धटोद्धार name.of a commentary by
Kesavadatta-Sarman on the gra-
mmar work named संक्षिप्तसार.
दुर्वलाचार्य a grammarian who wrote
a treatise on grammar दुर्वलीयव्याकरण,
named after him. Besides this
treatise, he has written commen-
taries on Nagesa's Laghumanjusa
and Paribhasendusekhara.
दुस्स्पृष्ट see दुःस्पृष्ट
दूषकरदोद्भेद name of a commentary,
on the Paribhasendusekhara of
Nagesa, believed to have been
written by Gopalacārya Karhadkar,
a grammarian of the 19th century
and attributed to Bhimacarya.
This commentary, which was
written to criticize the comment-
ary written by Visnusastri Bhat,
was again criticized in reply by
Visnusastri Bhat in his Ciccandrika
( चिच्चन्द्रिका ). See विष्णुशास्त्री भट.
दूषण fault, objection; the word
is used in connection with a fault
found with, or objection raised
against an argument advanced by,
a writer by his opponent or by
the writer himself who replies it to
make his argument well establis-
|
hed; cf.नित्यवादी कार्यपक्षे दूषणमाह-कार्येष्विति
Maha. Prad. on P.I. 1.44 Vart.!6.
दूस tad. affix prescribed after the
word अवि in the sense of milk(दुग्ध)
along with the affixes सोढ and मरीस
optionally, by the Vartikakara;
e. g. अविदूसम् । अविसोढम् । अविमरीसम्;
cf. Kas, on M. Bh. IV. 2. 36.
दृढादि a class of words headed by दृढ
to which the tad. affix य ( ष्यञ् )
or इमन् ( इमनिच् ) is added in the
sense of nature ( भाव ); त्व and तल्
( ता ) can, of course, be added
optionally e.g. दार्ढ्यम्, द्रढिमा दृढत्वम्,
दृढता.See also लावण्य शैत्य, औष्ण्य, जाड्य,
पाण्डित्य, मौर्ख्य etc.; cf Kas. on
P. V. 1. 123.
दृष्ट seen in use in Vedic Literature,
or Classical Literature, or in the
talk of cultured people; said in
connection with words which a
grammarian tries to explain; cf.
दृष्टानुविधिश्छन्दसि भवति' Vyadi Pari.
Patha 68.
दृष्टानुविधि taking place of an opera-
tion, or application of a rule of
grammar in accordance with the
words seen in use. See दृष्ट.
दृष्टान्त similar instance,generally quot-
ed to explain effectively some rules
or conventions laid down; cf. ननु
चायमप्यस्ति दृष्टान्तः समुदाये वाक्यपरिसमाप्ति-
रिति । तद्यथा गर्गाः शतं दण्ड्यन्तामिति M.Bh.
on P.I. 1. 7.
दृष्टापचार discrepant, characterized
by discrepancy; cf. यद्यपि तावदयं
पराशब्दो दृष्टापचार उपसर्गश्चानुपसर्गश्च अयं तु
खलु विशब्दोऽदृष्टापचार उपसर्ग एव; M. Bh.
on P. 1. 3. 19.
देवताद्वन्द्व a compound word called
द्वन्द्व whose members are names of
deities; the peculiarities of this
Dvandva compound are (a) that
generally there are changes at the
end of the first member, by virtue
of which it appears similar to a
|
word ending in the dual number,
and (b) that both the words retain
their original accents.e.g. इन्द्रासोमौ,
सौमापूषणा, अग्नीषोमाभ्यां, मित्रावरुणाभ्याम् ; for
changes, cf. P. VI.3.25-31; for
accent, cf. देवताद्वन्द्वानि चानामन्त्रितानि
(द्विरुदात्तानिं) । इन्द्राबृहस्पतिभ्याम्, इन्द्राबृहस्पती
इति त्रीणि V. Pr. II.48, 49; cf. also
देवताद्वन्द्वे च P. VI, 2.141.
देवनन्दिन् called also पूज्यपाद or पूज्यपाद-
देवनन्दिन् believed to have lived in
the fifth century A. D. and written
the treatise on grammar, of course
based om Panini Sutras, which is
known as जैनेन्द्र-व्याकरण or जैनेन्द्र-
शब्दानुशासन. The writer of this gram-
mar is possibly mentioned as जैनेन्द्र
in the usually guoted verse of
Bopadeva :- इन्द्रश्चन्द्रः काशकृत्स्नापिशली
शाकटायनः पाणिन्यमरजैनेन्द्र जयन्त्यष्टादेिशा-
ब्दिकाः. देवनन्दिन् was a great Jain saint
and scholar who wrote many
works on Jain Agamas of which
सर्वार्थसिद्धि, the commentary on the
तत्त्वार्थाधिगमसूत्र, is well-known.
देवपथादि a class of words headed by
the word देवपथ, the affix कन् applied
to which in the sense of a statue,
or applied for the formation of a
proper noun, is dropped देवपथः,
हंसपथ:, शिवः, विष्णुः etc.; cf.Kas. on P.
V. 3.100.
देवशर्मन् a grammarian who has writ-
ten a disquisition on the philoso-
phy of Vyakarana in verse, and
added a commentary of his own
on it which he has named as
समन्वयप्रदीपसंकेत.
देवनन्दिन् a Jain grammarian of the
eighth century who is believed to
have written a grammar work,
called सिद्धान्तसारस्वत-शब्दानुशासन. It is
likely that देवनन्दिन् is the same as
देवानन्दि-पूज्यपाद and the grammar
work is the same as जैनेन्द्रशब्दानुशासन
for which see देवनन्दिन् .
देविकापाद a popular name given to
the third pada of the seventh
adhyaya of Parinis Asadhyāyi as
the pada begins with the Sutra
दविकाशिंशपादित्यवाट्दीर्घसत्त्रश्रेयसामात् P.VII
3. 1.
देवीदीन a modern grammarian of the
19th century who has written a
gloss on the Asādhyāyi of Panini.
देवेन्द्र a Jain grammarian of the 13th
century who has written a com-
mentary named लघुन्यास on the
शब्दानुशासन of Hemacandra. He
has written many works on the
Jain Agamas, of which a commen-
tary on the Uttaradhyanasutra can
be specially mentioned. He is
called देवेन्द्रसूरि also.
देश lit. place; (l) original place of
articulation: cf. अदेशे वा वचनं व्यञ्ज-
नस्य, R. Pr. XIV. 5; (2) place of
origin; उच्चारणस्थान: (3) place of
inferential establishment of a
Paribhasa etc. परिभाषादेशः उद्देशः Par.
Sek. pari. 2,3; (4) passage of the
Samhita text, cf..T. Pr. I. 59.
देशीयर् tad. affix देशीय in the sense
of slightly less, or almost similar,
optionally prescribed with the
affixes कल्प and देश्य e. g. मृदुकल्पः,
मृदुदेश्यः. मृदुदशीयः cf.Kas, on P.V.3.67.
देश्य (l) tad. affix in the sense of
almost similar; see देशीयर् above;
(2) (words) current in popular use
or language, although not sanction-
ed by rules of grammar; cf. देश्याः
सूत्रनिबन्धाः क्रियन्ते M.Bh. on P. V.
3.55: cf. देश्या देष्टव्याः साधुत्वेन प्रतिपाद्या:,
Kaiyata on V. 3.55; probably
Kaiyata had a difficulty in ex-
plaining the word देश्य in the old
way meaning ' current in use', as
many words called bad words,
introduced from other languages
were current at his time which he
was reluctant to term देश्य.
|
दैव name of a system of grammar or
a work on grammar the peculi-
arity of which is the omission of
the एकशेष topic; cf. अनेकशेषं दैवं स्यात्
दैवादिक a root belonging to the
fourth conjugation of roots.( दिवा-
दिगण ); cf.जसु ताडेन इति चुरादौ पठ्यते
तस्येदं ग्रहणं, न देवादिकस्य, Kas. on P. II
3.56.
देवेन्द्र name given to a work on
grammar, presumably the same as
जैनेद्र-शब्दानुशासन written by पूज्यपाद-
देवनन्दिन्. See जेनेन्द्रव्याकरण.
दोष (1) a fault of pronunciation; cf
एताः स्वरदोषभावनाः अतोन्ये व्यञ्जनदोषाः
M.Bh. on I. 1.1 Vart.18 (2) defect
shown in connection with an ex-
pression or explanation.
दोषोद्धरण name of a commentary on
Nagesa's Paribhisendusekhara wri-
tten by मन्नुदेव of the eighteenth
century.
दोषोद्धार name of a commentary on
Nagesa's Laghusabdendusekhara
written by मन्नुदेव of the eighteenth
century.
द्य tad. affix द्य, applied to इदम् in the
sense of ' a day ', when इदम् is
changed into अ ( अश् ) ; e. g- अद्य,
cf. P.V. 3.22 Vart. 5.
द्यस् tad. affix द्यस्, applied to the
word समान when समान is changed
into स; e.g. सद्यः, cf. सद्यः परुत्परार्यैषमः P.
V.3.22: cf. also समानस्य सभावो द्यश्चाहनि
P. V. 3.22, Vart. 1
घुa technical term in the Jainendra
Vyakarana for the term उत्तरपद (the
latter or the second member of-a
compound word ) which is used in
Panini's grammar.
द्युतादि a class of roots headed by
the root द्युत् , the aorist sign च्लि
after which gets ( अ ) अङ् substi-
tuted for it: e.g. अद्युतत् , अश्वितत्; cf.
Kas. on P. III.1.55. and I.3.91.
द्युस् tad. affix द्युस् applied to the word
उभय in the sense of a day; e.g.
उभयद्युः cf. P. V. 3.22 Vart. 7.
द्योतक indicative, suggestive; not
directly capable of expressing the
sense by denotation; the nipatas
and upasargas are said to be 'dyo-
taka' and not 'vacaka' by stand-
ard grammarians headed by the
Varttikakara; cf. निपातस्यानर्थकस्यापि
प्रातिपदिकत्वम् P.I.2.45 Varttika 12; cf.
Kaiyata also on the above; cf also
निपाता द्योतकाः केचित्पृथगर्थाभिधायिनः Vak-
yapadiya II.194;, गतिवाचकत्वमपि तस्य
( स्थाधातोः ) व्यवस्थाप्यते, उपसर्गस्तु तद्यो-
तक एव com. on Vakyapadiya II.
190; cf. पश्चाच्छ्रोतुर्बोधाय द्योतकोपसर्गसंबन्ध:
Par. Sek. on Pari. 50; cf also इह
स्वरादयो वाचकाः चादयो द्योतका इति भेदः
Bhasa Vr. om P.I.1.37.The Karma-
pravacaniyas are definitely laid
down as dyotaka, cf. क्रियाया द्योतको
नायं न संबन्धस्य वाचकः । नापि क्रियापदाक्षेपीं
संबन्धस्य तु भेदकः Vakyapadiya II.206;
the case affixes are said to be
any way, 'vacaka' or 'dyotaka'; cf.
वाचिका द्योतिका वा स्युर्द्वित्त्वादीनां विभक्तयः
Vakyapadiya II. 165.
द्योतन conveyance of sense indirectly
or by suggestion, and not directly.
See द्योतक above.
द्योत्य (sense) conveyed by suggestion
indirectly and not directly ex-
pressed, as in the case of karma-
pravacaniyas, the krt affixes and
the tad, affixes: cf. अनुशब्दो लक्षणे
द्योत्ये कर्मप्रवचनीयसंज्ञो भवति Kas. on
P. I. 4.84.
द्रव्य substance, as opposed to गुण pro-
perty and क्रिया action which exist
on dravya. The word सत्त्व is used
by Yaska, Panini and other gram-
marians in a very general sense
as something in completed forma-
tion or existence as opposed to
'bhava' or kriya or verbal activity,
|
and the word द्रव्य is used by old
grammarians as Synonymous with
सत्त्व; cf. चादयोSसत्वे। चादयो निपातसंज्ञा
भवन्ति न चेत्सत्वे वर्तन्ते, cf. Kas on P.
I. 4.57; cf. S.K. also on P. I.4.57.
(2)The word द्रव्य is also found used
in the sense of an individual
object, as opposed to the genus or
generic notion ( अाकृति ); cf. द्रव्याभि-
धानं व्याडिः, M. Bh. on P. I. 2. 64.
Vart. 45.(3)The word द्रव्य is found
used in the sense of Sadhana or
means in Tait. Prati. cf. तत्र शब्द-
द्रव्याण्युदाहरिष्यामः । शब्दरूपाणि साधनानि वर्ण-
यिष्यामः Tai, Pr. XXII. 8.
द्रव्यपदार्थिक a grammarian who main-
tains that 'dravya' or 'individual
object' is the sense of words; cf.
न ह्याकृतिपदार्थिकस्य द्रव्ये न पदार्थो, द्रव्य-
पदार्थिकस्य वाकृतिर्न पदार्थः । M. Bh. on
I.2.64 Vart. 53. See द्रव्य.
द्रव्यवचन expressive of substance as
their sense as opposed to गुणवचन;
cf. उभयवचना ह्येते शुक्लादयः द्रव्यं चाहुर्गुणं च।
M. Bh. on P. V.1.119.
द्रव्यवद्भाव behaviour like a dravya as
noticed in the case of the bhava or
kriya found in a root after a krt
afix is added to it cf. कृदभिहितो
भावो द्रव्यवद्भवति. M. Bh. on II.2.19,
III.1.67 etc.
द्रव्याभिधान denotation of द्रव्य or indi-
vidual object as the sense of words
as opposed to आकृत्यभिधान i, e.
denotation of the general form
possessed by objects of the same
class; of द्रव्याभिधानं व्याडिः P. I.2.64
Vart. 45. See द्रव्य.
द्रुत lit. rapid; the vice of rapidity in
utterance;a fault of speech especi-
ally in connection with the uttera-
nce of vowels in Vedic recital when
on account of haste the utterance
of letters becomes indistinct. cf.
संदृष्टमेणीकृतमर्धकं द्रुतं विकीर्णमेताः स्वरद्रोषभा-
वनाः । M. Bh. Ahnika 1 vart. 18.
|
द्रुतबोध name of a treatise on gram-
mar written for beginners by
Bharatasena or Bharatamalla of
Bengal in the sixteemth century.
द्रुता one of the three Vrttis or styles
of utterance mentioned in the
Pratisakhya works and quoted in
the Mahabhasya; cf.तित्रो वृत्तीरुपदिशन्ति
वाचो विलम्बितां मध्यमां च दुतां च । अभ्यासार्थे
दुतां वृत्तिं प्रयोगार्थे तु मध्यमाम् । शिष्याणा-
मुपदेशार्थे कुर्याद् वृत्ति विलम्बिताम् । R. Pr.
XIII. 18, 19; cf. ये हि द्रुतायां वृत्तौ वर्णा-
स्त्रिभागाधिकास्ते मध्यमायां, ये मध्यमायां
वर्णास्त्रिभागाधिकास्ते विलाम्बितायाम् । M. Bh.
on P. I.1.70, Vart. 4. The utte-
rance of a letter takes ，1/3 rd time
more in the मध्यमवृत्ति than in the
द्रुतवृत्ति, while in the विलम्बितवृत्ति it
takes 1/3 rd more than in the
मध्यमवृत्ति. In short, the utterance of
the same letter takes in the
three vrttis, Druta, Vilambita and
Madhyama the quantity of time
in the proportion of 9:12:16 res-
pectively.
द्रोणिका a kind of the position of the
tongue at the time of pronounc-
ing the letter ष्.
द्वन्द्ध name of a compound, formed of
two or more words used in the
same case, showing their collection
together; cf. चार्थे द्वन्द्वः P. II.2.29.
Out of the four meanings of the
indeclinable च, viz. समुच्चय
अन्वाचय, इतरेतरयोग and समाहार, the
dvandva compound is sanctioned
in the last two senses only called
इतरेतरद्वन्द्व (as in प्लक्षन्यग्रोधौ etc.) and
समाहारद्वन्द्व (as in वाक्त्वचम् etc.) respec-
tively For details see Mahabhasya
on II.2.29. The dvandva compo-
und takes place only when the
speaker intends mentioning the
several objects together i.e. when
there is, in short, सहविवक्षा orयुगपदधि-
करणवचनता; cf. अनुस्यूतेव मेदाभ्यां एका
|
प्रख्योपजायते । यस्यां सहविवक्षां तामाहुर्द्वन्द्वै-
कशेषयोः । Sr. Pr. II. The gender of
a word in the द्वन्द्वसमास is that of the
last word in the case of the इतरेत-
रद्वन्द्व, while it is the neuter gender
in the case of the समाहारद्वन्द्व.
द्वयसच् tad. affix द्वयस, in the sense of
measure, prescribed optionally
along with the affixes दघ्न and मात्र;
cf. ऊरू प्रमाणमस्य ऊरुद्वयसम्; Kas. on P.
V. 2.37; fem. ऊरुद्वयसी, cf.P.IV.1.15.
द्वारादि a class of words headed by
the word द्वार् which get the aug-
ment ऐच् (i.e. ऐ or औ ) placed
before the letter य or व in them,
instead of the substitution of
vrddhi, when a taddhita affix mark-
ed with the mute letter ञ्,ण्, or क्
is added to them; e. g. दौवारिकः
सौवस्तिकः, शौवम्, शौवनम् etc.; cf Kas.
on P, VII .3,4.
द्वि a term used for the dual number
in the Pratisakhya works; cf. नो नौ
मे मदर्थे त्रिद्व्येकेषु V. Pr. II. 3 where
Uvvata has explained the words
त्रि, द्वि and एक as बहुवचन, द्विवचन and
एक्वचन respectively.
द्विः doubled; the term is used in
connection with reduplication in
the Katantra and Haima gram-
mars cf. Hem. IV.1.1, Kat.III 8.
10.
द्विःप्रयोग doubling, putting a word or
word element twice;the words द्वित्व
and द्विर्वचन are used in the same
sense.
द्वि:स्पृष्ट a word used many times
synonymously with दु:स्पृष्ट; the
letters ळ्, ळ् ह्, and upadhmaniya(xप्)
are termed द्विःस्पृष्ट or दुःस्पृष्ट.
द्विकर्मक a term used in connection
with roots governing two objects
or two words in the accusative
case, e.g. दुह् in, गां दोग्धि पयः; the
term कर्म according to the strict
|
definition of the term कर्तुरीप्सिततमं कर्म
or अाप्यं कर्म applies to one of the
two, which is called the प्रधानकर्म or
the direct object, the other one,
which, in fact, is related to the ver-
bal activity by relation of any other
karaka or instrument is taken as
karmakaraka and hence put in
the accusative case. For details
see Mahabhasya and Kasika on
P.I.4.51. Some roots in their
causal formation govern two
objects out of which one object is
the actual one while the other is
the subject of the primitive root.
e.g. गमयति माणवकं ग्रामम्; बोधयति माणवकं
धर्मम्; cf Kas on P.I.4.52. See for
details Mahabhasya on P. I. 4.52.
कार्ययोग simultaneous occurrence of
two grammatical operations result-
ing into a conflict and creating a
doubt as to which of the two
should take place first; cf.द्विकार्ययोगो
हि विप्रतिषेधः M.Bh. on P.I.1.3 Vart.
6; I.1.12; etc. The term विप्रतिषेध
occurring in the rule विप्रतिषेधे परं
कार्यम् P. I.4.2 is evidently defined
in this way by the word द्विकार्ययोग
in the Mahabhsya.
द्विखण्ड a compound expression or
word separated into two by ava-
graha in the Padapatha; the word
is misstated as दुखण्ड by some
vedic reciters.
द्विगु name of a compound with a
numeral as the first member. The
compound is looked upon as a
subdivision of the Tatpurusa com-
Pound- The dvigu compound,
having collection as its general
sense, is declined in the neuter
gender and singular number;
when it ends in अ the fem. affix
ङी is added generally, e. g. पञ्चपात्रम्,
त्रिभुवनम्, पञ्चमूली. The Dvigu com-
Pound also takes place when a
|
karmadharaya compound, having
a word denoting a direction or a
numeral as its first member, (a)
has a tad. affix added to it e.g.
पञ्चकपाळः (पुरोडाशः), or (b) has got a
word placed after it in a com-
pound e. g. पशञ्चगवधनः or (c) has a
collective sense e.g. पञ्चपूली; cf. तद्वि-
तार्थोत्तरपदसमाहारे च ( P. II.1.51 ) also,
cf Kas. and S. K. om P.II.1.51,52.
द्विगुपाद a Popular name given by
grammarians to the fourth quar-
ter of the second Adhyaya of
Panini's Astadhyayi which begins
with the sutra द्विगुरेकवचनम् II. 4.1.
द्वितीय the second consonant in the
five groups of consonants, surd
aspirate, cf. T.Pr. I. 11: V. Pr.I. .
54, R. Pr. VI. 15; it is called
द्वितीयतस्पर्श also.
द्वितीयद्विर्वचन the reduplication of a
root beginning with a vowel
prescribed by the rule अजादेर्द्वितीयस्य
P. VI. 1.2.
द्वितीया the second case; the accusa-
tive case, mainly prescribed for a
word which is related as a karma-
karaka to the activity in the sen-
tence; cf P. II. 3.2 to 5,
द्वित्व doubling, reduplication pres-
cribed for (I) a root in the per-
fect tense excepting the cases
where the affix अाम् is added to
the root before the personal end-
ing: e.g. बभूव, चकार, ऊर्णुनाव etc.
cf P. VI. 1.1,2; (2) a root before
the vikarana affixes सन्, यङ्, श्लु
and चङ् e. g. बुभूषति, चेक्रीयते, चर्करीति,
जुहोति, अचीकरत् etc. cf. P. VI. 1.9-
l l ; (3) a word ending in अम् .
( णमुल् ) in the sense of repetition,
e. g. स्मारं स्मारं वक्ष्ये, भोजं भोजं व्रजति cf.
आभीक्ष्ण्ये द्वे भवतः P. VIII. 1.12 Vart.
7; (4) any word (a) in the sense of
constant or frequent action, (b) in
the sense of repetition, (c) showing
|
reproach, or scorn, or quality in
the sense of its incomplete possess-,
ion, or (d) in the vocative case at
the beginning of a sentence in some
specified senses; reduplication is
also prescribed for the prepositions
परि, प्र, सम्, उप, उद्, उपरि, अधि, अघस्
in some specified senses cf.
P. VIII. 1.1 to 15. A letter ex-
cepting हृ and र्, is also repeated,
if so desired, when (a) it occurs
after the letter ह् or र् ， which is pre-
ceded by a vowel e g. अर्क्कः अर्द्धम्
etc. cf VIII. 4.46; or when (b) it
is preceded by a vowel and follow-
ed by a consonant e. g. दद्ध्यत्र,
म्द्धवत्र cf. P. VIII. 4.47. For
details see Kas. on VIII. 4.46-52.
The word द्वित्व is sometimes used
in the sense of the dual number;
cf. Kas. on P. I.2.51. The words
द्वित्व, द्विर्वचन and द्विरुक्त are generally
used as synonyms. Panini generally
uses the word द्वे. For द्वित्व in Vedic
Literature cf. R. Pr. VI. 1.4; T.
Pr. XIV. 1-8 V, Pr. IV. 101-118.
द्विदण्ड्यादि a class of words, which
are headed by the word द्विदण्डि
and which are all bahuvrihi com-
pounds, to which the affix इ is
found added as a Samasanta affix
e. g- द्विदण्डिः, सपदि etc.; cf Kas. on
P.v. 4.128.
द्विरुक्ति repetition of a word, or of a
letter or of a root. See द्वित्व.
द्विरुच्चारण phonemic utterance a
second time; see द्वित्व.
द्विरूपवत् phonemically repeated; see
द्वित्व.
द्विर्भाव repetition, reduplication. See
द्वित्व.
द्विर्वचन see द्वित्व and द्विरुक्ति; the word
is very frequently used in the
Mahabhasya instead of द्वित्व. cf.
M Bh on I. 1. Ahnika 1, I. 1.7,
10, 57, 59. etc. etc.
|
द्विवचन a case affix of the dual num-
ber; dual number; a word in the
dual number; cf M. Bh. on I. -
1,11, I. 4.21 etc.: cf. द्वयोरर्थयोर्वचनं
द्विवचनम् Kas. on P. V. 3.57.
द्विवचस् a word in the dual number ;
cf. षष्ठादयश्च द्विवचोन्तभाजः R. Pr. I. 28
where the word द्विवचस् is explain-
ed as द्विवचनाभिधायिनः by Uvvata.
द्विचत् a syllable consisting of two
consonants; cf. R. T. 245.
द्विवर्ण (1) a repeated consonant; cf.
द्विवर्णमेकवर्णवत्, V. Pr. IV. 144: (2)
doubling, repetition: cf ह्रस्वपूर्वो
ङकारो द्विवर्णम् T. Pr. IX. 18; cf. also
T. Pr. XIV. 1, R. Pr. IX. 18.
द्विस् double reduplicated; the word
is frequently used in connection
with doubling of consonants or
words in the PratiSakhya Litera-
ture as also in the Katantra,
Sakatayana and Haima grammars
cf. R. Pr. VI. 1, XV. 5, V. Pr.
IV. 101, R, T. 264; cf. also Kat.
III. 8.10, Sak. IV. 1.43; Hem.
IV. 1.1.
द्विसन्धि a kind of विवृत्ति or interval of
time in the pronunciation of two
consecutive vowels, which as a
result of two euphonic changes
has a vowel preceded by a vowel
and followed also by a vowel:
e. g. अभूदुभा उ अंशवे, R. Pr. II. 44.
द्विस्वर possessed of two vowels,dis-
syllabic; cf. न पदे द्विस्वरे नित्यम् T.
Pr. XVI. 17.
द्विस्स्पृष्ट a term used for an
upadhmaniya letter or a phonetic
element resulting from a visarga
followed by the letter प्， or फ़्.
See उपध्मांनीय.The word is also used
sometimes for the pronunciation ळ्
of ड्, and ळ्ह् of ढ्. See दुःस्पृष्ट.
द्विहल् possessed of two consecutive
consonants; cf. तस्मान्नुड् द्विहलः, P. VII.
4 71 : cf also M. Bh. on VI. 1.68.
|
द्वैधम् used adverbially for द्विधा
in'the sense of ’optionally' or 'in
two ways'; cf. द्वैधं शब्दानामप्रतिपत्तिः
M. Bh. on P. I. 1. 44 vart. 15.
द्वैपद् group of two words; an express-
ion consisting of two words; cf प्र
वोचं नः सुमना द्वैपदाश्च R. Pr. VIII. 2.
10; X. 3; XI. 37 etc.
द्व्यच् a word possessed of two
vowels in it; dissyllabic words; the
word is frequently used in Panini's
Astadhyayi and Patanjali's Maha-
bhasya, Kasika Vrtti and other
works on Panini's grammar.
द्व्यादि a class of pronouns headed
by the pronoun द्वि to which the
taddhita affixes called विभक्ति, as
prescribed by the rules of Panini
in the rule पञ्चम्यास्तसिल् and the
following ones, are not added. cf.
P. V. 3. 2.
द्व्यूष्मन् name of a Samdhi made up
of two spirants, or resulting in the
presence of two spirants or Usman
letters e.g. निष्षिध्बरी:, स्वस्साता; cf. R.
Pr. XI. 22.
घ्(I) fourth letter of the dental
class(तवर्ग) possessed of the proper-
ties नादानुप्रदान, घोष, कण्ठसंवृतत्व and
महाप्रण ; (2) substitute ध् ， for the ह् of
नह् before a ' jhal ' consonant or
at the end of a word e. g. नद्धम्,
उपानत्, cf. P. VIII. 2. 34; (3)
substitute ध् for the letters त् and थ्
placed after a fourth letter, e. g
लब्धुम्, दोग्धा etc. cf. P. VIII. 2. 40.
घ a technical term in the Jainen-
dra Vyakarana for the term सर्व-
नामस्थान of Panini used for the first
five case affixes सु, औ, अस्, अम्, ओ
and इ (nom. and acc. pl. neuter
gender); cf P. I. I. 42, 43.
|
धनजित् name of the author of a short
metrical treatise on roots named
धातुक्रल्पलतिका.
धमुञ् tad. affix optionally substitu-
ted in the place of the tad. affix धा
after the words द्वि and त्रि; e. g.
द्विधा, द्वौधम्, त्रिधा, त्रैधम्; cf. P. V. 3.45.
धरणीधर a grammarian of the six-
teenth century at the court of
Udayasimha who wrote a commen-
tary on the sutras of Panini which
was named वैयाकरणसर्वस्व as also a
commentary on the Siksa of Panini.
धर्म defined as ऋषिसंप्रदाय, the tradi-
tional practices laid down by the
sages for posterity; cf.केवलमृषिसंप्रदायो
धर्म इति कृत्वा याज्ञिक्राः शास्त्रेण अनुविदधते M.
Bh. I. 1. Ahnika I ; cf also धर्मशास्त्रं
in एवं च कृत्वा धर्मशास्त्रं प्रवृत्तम् M. Bh.
on P. I. 2.64, as also धर्मसूत्रकाराः in
नैवेश्वर आज्ञापयति नापि धर्मसूत्रकाराः पठन्ति
अपवादैरुत्सर्गा बाध्यन्तामिति M. Bh. on I.
l.47; (2) religious merit, cf. धर्मोपदे-
शनमिदं शास्त्रमस्मिन्ननवयवेन शास्त्रार्थः संप्रतीयते ,
M. Bh. on P. VI. I. 84, cf also
ज्ञाने घमै इति चेत्तथाSधर्मः M. Bh. I. 1.
Ahnika l ; ' 3) property possessed
by a thing or a letter or a word.
e. g. वर्णधर्म; cf Kas. on P.
I. 2.29; cf also Kas. on P. II. 1,
55, II. 3.33, VIII. 1. 4. cf. also
R. Pr. III. 8, 13 XIV. 1 etc.:
( 4 ) the characteristic of being
in a substance; in the phrase अयं
घटः the dharma viz.घटत्व is predica-
ted of this (इदम्) or, in other words
the designation pot ( घटसंज्ञा ) is the
predication; the explanation in
short, can be given as घटत्ववान् इदं-
पदार्थः or घटाभिन्नः इदंपदार्थ:
धमेकीर्ति a Jain scholar called by
the name कीर्ति also, who was the
author of धातुप्रत्ययपञ्जिक्रा and रूपावतार
a well-known treatise on roots;
cf. बोपदेवमहाग्राहग्रस्तो वामनदिग्गजः । कीर्तेरेव
प्रसङ्गेन माधवेन समुद्धृतः । He is believed
|
to have been the first grammarian
who arranged the sutras of Panini
according to the subject matter.
धर्मिन् (1)a thing possessed of proper-
ties, द्रव्यः cf. धर्मशब्देन धर्मी भण्यते Kas.
on P.III.3.77;cf also the common
expression धर्मिग्राहकमानात् Par. Sek.
on Pari. 55, 66, 79, 82: (2) the
same as dharma in rare cases
according to the dictum धर्मघर्मिणो-
रभेदोपचारः e. g. वर्णैकं देहि, पुराणैकं देहि;
cf. Durghata Vr. on P. II. 1. 49.
धा tad.affix (l) applied to a numeral
in the sense of a kind ( प्रकार ) or a
division of time, e.g.एकधा, द्विधा, त्रिधा
etc.: cf. P.V.3.42, 43; (2) applied
to बहु to show divisions of a short
time;e.g. बहुधा दिवसस्य भुङ्क्क्ते and बहुधा
मासस्य भुङ्क्ते;cf. Kas. on P.V.4.20.
धातु a root; the basic word of a
verbal form,defined by the Bhasya-
kara as क्रियावचनो धातुः or even
as भाववचने धातु:, a word denoting
a verbal activity. Panini has
not defined the term as such,
but he has given a long list of
roots under ten groups, named
dasagani, which includes about
2200 roots which can be called
primary roots as contrasted with
secondary roots. The secondary
roots can be divided into
two main groups ( l ) roots
derived from roots ( धातुजधातवः )
and (2) roots derived from nouns
( नामधातवः ). The roots derived
from roots can further be classified
into three main subdivisions : (a)
causative roots or णिजन्त, (b) desi-
derative roots or सन्नन्त, (c) inten-
sive roots or यङन्त and यङ्लुगन्त:
while roots derived from nouns or
denominative roots can further be
divided into क्यजन्त, काम्यजन्त, क्यङन्त,
क्यषन्त, णिङन्त, क्विबन्त and the misce-
llaneous ones ( प्रकीर्ण ) as derived
from nouns like कण्डू( कण्ड्वादि ) by
25
|
the application of the affix यक् or
from nouns like सत्य,वेद, पाश, मुण्ड,मिश्र,
etc. by the application of the
affix णिच्. Besides these, there are
a few roots formed by the applica-
tion of the affix अाय and ईय (ईयङ्).
All these roots can further be
classified into Parasmaipadin or
Parasmaibhasa, Atmanepadin or
Atmanebhasa and Ubhayapadin.
Roots possessed of a mute grave
( अनुदात्त ) vowel or of the mute
consonant ङ् added to the root in
the Dhatupatha or ending in the
affixes यड्, क्यङ् etc. as also roots
in the passive voice are termed
Atmanepadin: while roots ending
with the affix णिच् as also roots
possessed of a mute circumflex
vowel or a mute consonant ञ़़् appl-
ied to them are termed Ubhaya-
padin. All the rest are termed
Parasmaipadin. There are some
other mute letters or syllables
applied by Panini to the roots in
his Dhatupatha for specific purpo-
ses; e.g. ए at the end to signify
prohibition of vrddhi to the penu-
ltimate अ in the aorist, e.g. अकखीत्
cf. P. VII.2.5; इर् to signify the
optional substitution of अ or अङ्
for the affix च्लि of the aorist, e.g.
अभिदत्, अभैत्सीत् ; cf. P.III. 1.57; उ
to signify the optional application
of the augment इ ( इट् ) before क्त्वा
e.g. शमित्वा, शान्त्वा; cf. P.VII. 2. 56;
ऊ to signify the optional applica-
tion of the augment इ ( इट् ) e.g.
गोप्ता, गेीपिता, cf. P.VII.2.44; अा to
signify the prohibition of the aug-
ment इट् in the case of the past
pass. part. e.g. क्ष्विण्णः, स्विन्नः, cf. P.
VII.2.16; इ to signify the addition
of a nasal after the last vowel e. g.
निन्दति from निदि, cf. P. VII.1.58: ऋ
to signify the prohibition of ह्रस्व to
the penultimate long vowel before
|
धातुकल्पलतिका धातुप्रदीप 194
णिच्, e. g. अशशासत्, cf. P.VII. 4.2;लृ
to signify the substitution of अङ्
for च्लि in the aorist, e.g. अगमत् cf.
P. III.1.55: ओ to signify the substitution
of न् for त् of the past
pass.part. e.g. लग्नः, अापीनः, सूनः, दून:
etc.; cf. P. VIII. 2.45. Besides
these,the mute syllables ञि, टु and डु
are prefixed for specific purposes;
cf. P. III.2.187, III.3.89 and III.
3.88. The term धातु is a sufficiently
old one which is taken by
Panini from ancient grammarians
and which is found used in the
Nirukta and the Pratisakhya
works, signifying the 'elemental
(radical)base' for nouns which are
all derivable from roots according
to the writers of the Nirukta works
and the grammarian Siktaayana;
cf. नाम च धातुजमाह निरुक्ते व्याकरणे शकटस्य
च तोकम् M. Bh. on P. III.3.1. Some
scholars have divided roots into
six categories; cf. तत्र धातवः षोढा
(a) परिपठिताः भूवादयः, (b) अपरिपठता
अान्दोलयत्यादयः, (c) परिपठितापरिपठिताः
( सूत्रपठिताः ) स्कुस्कम्भस्तम्भेत्यादयः, (d)
प्रत्ययधातवः सनाद्यन्ताः, (e) नामघातवः
कण्ड्वादयः, (f) प्रत्ययनामधातवः होडगल्भक्ली.
बप्रभृतयः; cf Sringara Prak. I. For
details see M.Bh. on P.I.3.I as
also pp 255, 256 Vol. VII Vya-
karana-Mahabhasya published by
the D.E. Society, Poona.
धातुकल्पलतिका a short treatise on the
roots of the different conjugations
written by a grammarian named
Dhananjaya.
घातुकारिकावली a grammatical work in
verse written by Varadarja, the
pupil of Bhattoji Diksita who lived
in the 17th century, Besides
Karikvali, Varadarja wrote
लघुकौमुदी and मध्यकौमुदी also.
घातुदीपिका (l) name of a comment-
ary on the Kavikalpadruma of
|
Bopadeva by Ramalamkara; (2)
name of a commentary on the
Kavikalpadruma by Durgadasa
who wrote a commentary on
the Mugdhabodha also.
धातुपाठ (1) name given in general to
the several collections of roots
given generally with their meanings
by grammarians belonging
to the various different schools of
grammar. These collections are
given as necessary appendices
named खिल to their grammars by
the well known grammarians of
Sanskrit such as Panini, Sakata-
yana, and others; (2) a small trea-
tise on roots written by Bhimasena
of the 14th century.
धातुपाठवृत्ति a commentary on the
Dhatupatha by Nagesa.
धातुपारायण a grammatical treatise
dealing with roots written as a su-
pplementary work by Jumaranan-
din to his grammar work called
Rasavati,which itself was a thorou-
ghly revised and enlarged edition
of the रसवती a commentary written
by Kramadisvara on his own gram-
mar named संक्षिप्तसार.Jumaranandin
is believed to have been a Jain
writer who lived in the fifteenth
century A.D.
घातुप्रकाश a work dealing with roots
Written as a supplementary work
by Balarama-Pancanana to his
own grammar named Prabodha-
Prakasa.
धातुप्रत्ययपञ्जिका a work dealing with
verbal forms written by Dharma-
kirti, a Jain grammarian of the
eighth century.
धातुप्रदीप a work dealing with verbal
forms written by Maitreya Rak-
sita, a Buddhist writer and a
famous grammarian belonging to
the eastern part of India who
|
lived in the middle of the twelfth
century. He is believed to have
written many scholarly works in
connection with Panini's grammar
out of which the Tantrapradipa is
the most important one. The
work Dhatupradipa is quoted by
Saranadeva, who was a contem-
porary of Maitreya Raksita, in his
Durghatavrtti on P. II. 4. 52.
घातुमञ्जरी called also धातुसंग्रहृ attribut-
ed to a grammarian namcd Kasi-
natha.
धातुमाला a work on roots in verse-
form attributed to a grammarian
named Isvarakanta.
धातुरत्नमञ्जरी a treatise dealing with
roots believed to have been written
by Ramasimhavarman.
धातुरत्नाकर a work dealing with roots
believed to have been written by
Narayana who was given the title
वन्द्य. He lived in the seventeenth
century; a work named सारावलि
व्याक्ररण is also believed to have been
written by him.
धातुरत्नावली a short list of the impor-
tant roots from the Dhatuptha of
Panini, given in verse by चोक्कनाथ a
grammarian of the 17th century.
धातुलोप an elision of a portion of a
root; cf. न धातुलेप अार्धधातुके, P.I.1 4.
धातुवृत्ति a general term applied to a
treatise discussing roots, but speci-
fically used in connection with the
scholarly commentary written by
Madhavacārya, the reputed scholar
and politician at the court of the
Vijayanagara kings in the four-
teenth century, on the Dhatupatha
ot Panini. The work is generally
referred to as माधवीया-धातुवृति to
distinguish it from ordinary com-
mentary works called also धातुवृत्ति
written by grammarians like
Wijayananda and others.
|
धातुव्याकरण a grammar dealing with
Verbs believed to have been written
by Vangasena.
घातुसबन्धपाद conventional name given
to the fourth pada of Panini's
Astadhyayi which begins with the
Sutra धातुसंबन्धे प्रत्ययाः P. III.4.1
धातूपदेश enumeration or recital of
roots in the Dhatupatha;cf. प्रकृत्युप-
पदोपाधयश्वोपदिष्टः। क्व । धातूपदेशे प्रातिपदिको-
पदेशे च । M. Bh. on P. III. 1 1.
धात्वर्थे lit. meaning of a root, the
verbal activity, named क्रिया or भावः .
cf. धात्वर्थः क्रिया; M. Bh. on III.2.
84, III.2.115. The verbal activity
is described generally to be made
up of a series of continuous sub-
ordinate activities carried on by
the different karakas or agents
and instruments of verbal activity
helping the process of the main
activity. When the process of the
verbal activity is complete, the
completed activity is looked upon
as a substantive or dravya and a
word denoting it, such as पाक,or याग
does not get conjugational affixes,
but it is regularly declined like a
noun.Just as स्वार्थ, द्रब्य, लिङ्ग, संख्या,
and कारक are given as प्रातिपदिकार्थ,
in the same manner क्रिया, काल, पुरुष,
वचन or संख्या, and कारक are given as
धात्वर्थ, as they are shown by a
verbal form, although strictly
speaking verbal activity (क्रियorभाव)
alone is the sense of a root, as
stated in the Mahbhasya. For
details see Vaiyak.Bh.Sara, where
it is said that fruit ( फल) and effort
( ब्यापार ) are expressed by a root,
cf. फलव्यापारयोर्धातुः. The five senses
given above are in fact conveyed
not by a root, but by a verb or
अाख्यात or तिडन्त.
धान्यपाद a popular name given to the
|
second pada of the fifth adhyaya
of Panini's Astadhyayi possibly
because the pada begins with the
Sutra धान्यानां भवने क्षेत्रे खञ्, P. V.2.1.
धारण (1) suppression of a consonant,
out of two successive consonants
which is looked upon as a
fault of recital; e.g. ह्वयामि when
recited as वयामि; ef. धारणमनुपलब्धिः
Uvvata on R.Pr.XIV. 6; (2) repe-
tition of a consonant which is also
a fault; e.g. ज्ज्योतिष्कृत् for ज्योतिष्कृत्:
cf. Uvvata on XIV.6;cf. also धारयन्त;
परक्रमं etc. explained by Uvvata as
सान्तस्थस्य संयोगस्य आदौ रक्तं धारयन्तो
विलम्बमानाः परक्रमं कुर्वन्ति where धारयन्तः
means 'lengthening’ or 'prolonging'
cf. R.Pr. on XIV.23; (3) the pecu-
liar position of the mouth (मुखसं-
धारणम् ) by which a double conso-
nant is recited as a single one, cf.
द्विवर्णमेकवर्णवत् ( एकप्रयत्ननिर्वर्त्य ) धारणात्
e.g. व्यात्तम् , कुक्कुटः, cf. V.Pr. IV.144.
धि (1)a technical term used for sonant
consonants in the Pratisakhya and
old grammar works; cf. धि शेषः V.
Pr.I.53, explained by Uvvata as
वर्गाणां उत्तरास्त्रय: यरलवहकाराश्च धिः V.Pr.
I.53; the term धि corresponds to
हश् of Panini; (2) personal ending
धि substituted for हि of the impera.
2nd sing. e.g. जुहुधि, छिन्द्धि, भिन्द्धि,
श्रुधि, रारन्धि etc.; cf.P.V.4.101-103.
धु a technical term in the Jainendra
Vyakarana for धातु (a root) which
is used freely by the ancient gra-
mmarians and Panini.
धुट् (1) the augment ध् prefixed to the
consonant स् following upon the
consonant ड् or न् occurring at the
end of a word; e.g. श्वलिट्त्साये,
महान्त्साये etc.; cf. P. VIII.3.29; (2)
technical short term for धातु (root);
the technical term is धुष् , but the
nom. sing. used is धुट्; (3) a
technical term standing for con-
|
sonants excepting semi-vowels and
nasals; cf. धुटश्च धुटि Kat. III.6.51.
The term is used in the Katantra
Vyakarana. It corresponds to the
term झर् of Panini.
धुना tad. affix called Vibhakti tad.
affix, applied to the word इदम्
when इदम् is changed into अ; cf.
इदमः अश्भावः धुना च प्रत्ययः Kas. on P.
V. 3.17.
धुष् a short term for धातु or root.See धुट्,
धूमादि a class of words headed by
the word धूम to which the tad.affix
अक ( वुञ् ) is added in the miscella-
neous(शैषिक ) senses; e. g. धौमकः
खाण्डकः etc.; cf Kas. on P.IV.2.127.
धृत or धृतप्रचय a kind of original
grave vowel turned into a circum-
flex one which is called प्रचय unless
followed by another acute or
circumflex vowel. The Taittiriya
Pratisakhya has mentioned seven
varieties of this 'pracaya' out of
which धृतप्रचय or धृत is one. For
details see Bhasya on धृतः प्रचयः
कौण्डिन्यस्य, T.Pr.XVIII.3.
धेय tad. affix धेय applied to the words
भाग, रूप and नाम in the same sense
as those words possess;e.g.भागधेयम् ,
cf. Kas. on P. V.4.25.
ध्मात name of a fault in the pronun-
ciation of a vowel when on
account of fullness of breath it
appears as uttered long (दीर्घ ),
although really it is short; cf.
श्वासभूयिष्ठतया ह्रस्वोपि दीर्घ इव लक्ष्यते,
Kaiyata on I. 1. Ahnika 1. Vart.
18.
ध्यम् tad. affix ध्यमुञ् substituted for
धा optionally after the word एक
e. g. ऐकध्यम् , एकधा; cf. P. V. 3.44.
ध्यै krt afix ध्यै seen in Vedic Lite-
rature, substituted for त्या option-
ally; e. g. साढयै, साढ्वा; cf P. VI.
3.113.
ध्रुव (1) fixed,stationary, as contrasted
with moving (ध्रुव) which is termed
अपादान and hence put in the abla-
tive case; cf ध्रुवमपायेऽपादानम् P. I.
4.24; (2) repeated sound ( नाद )
of a third or a fourth consonant
of the class consonants when it
occurs at the end of the first
word of a split up compound
word; cf. R. Pr. VI. II and
XI. 24.
ध्रौव्य fixed; of a stationary nature;
of क्तोऽधिकरणे च ध्रौव्यगतिप्रत्यवसानार्थेभ्य:
P. III. 4.76.
ध्वनि (1) sound; cf. ध्वनिं कुर्वन्नेवमुच्यते-
शब्दं कुरु शब्दं मा कार्षीः M. Bh. I. 1.
Ahnika 1; cf. also Vak. Pad. I.
77; cf. also स्फोटः शब्दः, ध्वनिः शब्दगुणः,
M.Bh. on I. 1.70 Vart. 5. ध्वनि or
sound is said to be the indicator
(सूचक्र or व्यञ्जक) of स्फोट the eternal
sound.
ध्वनित suggested, as opposed to उक्त
expressed; the word is found fre-
quently used in the Paribhasen-
dusekhara and other works in
connection with such dictums as
are not actually made, but indi-
cated in the Mahabhasya.
ध्वम् personal-ending of the sec.
pers. pl. Atmanepada, substituted
for ल् of the 10 lakaras.
ध्वात् personal-ending in Vedic
Literature, substituted for ध्वम् of
the sec. pers. pl. Atmanepada;
e.g.वारयध्वात् for वारयध्वम् cf. P.
VII. 1.42.
ध्वान the second out of the seven
Positions of voice in the Veda
recital which are-उपांशु, ध्वान, निमद,
उपब्दिमत्, मन्द्र, मध्यम and तार.
ध्वे Personal-ending of the sec. pers.
Pl. Atmanepada in the present
and perfect tenses.
|
न् fifth consonant of the dental class
of consonants which is possessed
of the properties घोष, नादानुप्रदान,
अल्पप्राणत्व, संवृतकण्ठत्व and अानुनासिक्य. In
Panini's grammar the nasal conso-
nant न् (a)is added as an augment
prescribed\ \नुट् or नुम् which
originally is seen as न्, but after-
wards changed into अनुस्वार or
परसवर्ण as required, as for example
in पयांसि, यशांसि, निन्दति, वन्दति etc.;
cf. P. VII. 1.58-73, VII. 1.79-
83; VIII. 3.24; (b) is changed
into ण् when it directly follows
upon ऋ, ॠ, र् or ष् or even
intervened by a vowel, a
semivowel except ल् , a guttural
consonant, a labial consonant
or an anusvara; cf. P. VIII.
4.1.1-31. (c) is substituted for the
final म् of a root, e. g. प्रशान्, प्रतान्
cf. P. VIII. 2.64, 65.
न (l) the consonant न् (see न् above)
with the vowel added to it for
facility of utterance, cf. T. Pr.
I. 21 ; (2) tad. affix न added to
words headed by पामन् in the sense
of possession; e.g. पामनः, हेमनः etc.,
cf P. V. 2.100; (3) tad. affix न as
found in the word ज्योत्स्ना derived
from ज्योतिष्, cf P. V. 2.114; (4)
unadi affix न as found in the
word स्योनः; cf Kas. on P. VI.4.19;
(5) the krt affix नङ् as also नन्
prescribed after the roots यज्, याच्,
यत्, विच्छ्, प्रच्छ्, रक्ष् and स्वप् , e g. यज्ञ:,
याञ्चा, प्रश्नः etc., cf P. III. 3.90, 91;
(6) the negative particle न given
by Panini as नञ् and referred to in
the same way, which (i.e. न.) when
compounded with a following
word is changed into अ or अन् or
retained in rare cases as for in-
stance in नभ्राट्, नासत्यौ, नक्षत्रम् etc.
cf P. VI.3.73-75;(7) tad.affix न (नञ्)
|
applied to the words स्त्री and पुंस्
in senses given from P. IV. 1.92 to
V. 2.1 e. g. स्त्रैणं, पौंस्नम् cf. IV. 1.87.
नकार the consonant न to which the
vowel अ and the affix कार are
added for facility of utterance;
e. g. तथा नकार उदये नकारे R. Pr.
IV.; cf. V. Pr. I. 17, 21.
नङ् krt affix न applied to the roots
यज्, याच्, यत् and others in the sense
of verbal activity; e. g. यज्ञ; याञ्चा,
यत्नः etc. cf. P. III. 3.90, 91. See
न (5).
नजिङ् krt. affix नज् applied to the
roots स्वप्, तृष् and धृष् in the sense
of 'habituated' e. g. स्वप्नक् धृष्णक् ;
See Kas. on P. III. 2.172.
नञ् the negative particle ( नञ् )
which possesses the six senses
which are sketched as सादृश्यं तदभावश्च
तदन्यत्वं तदल्पता । अप्राशस्त्यं विरोधश्च नञर्थाः
षट् प्रकीर्तिताः and which are res-
pectively illustrated by the
examples अनिक्षुः शरः, भूतले घटो नास्ति,
अघट: पट:, अनुदरमुदरं तरुण्याः, अब्राह्मणो
वार्धुषिकः and असुर: दैत्य: । See न (6).
नञ्तत्पुरुष a compound with न as its
first member which is changed into
अ or अन्, or remains unchanged,
the indeclinable न (नञ् ) possessing
any one of the six senses given
above under न (6); e. g अब्राह्मणः,
अनश्वः, नमुचिः etc.; cf. P. VI. 3
73-77.
नञ्समास a compound with न (नञ् )
as its first member; the term is
found used in the Mahabhasya
for both the नञ्तत्पुरुष as well as the
नञ्बहुव्रीहि compounds; cf. M.Bh. on
P.I.4.1 Vart. 19, also on P. II.1.1.
नञ्स्वरबलीयस्त्व the superiority, or
strength of the accent caused by
नञ्समास which sets aside the
accent caused by the case affix;
cf. विभक्तिस्वरान्नञ्स्वरो बलीयान् P. VI.
2.158 Vart. 13,
|
नडादि (l) a class of words headed by
the word नड to which the tad.affix
आयन ( फक् ) is added in the sense
of गोत्र ( grandchild and further
descendants); e. g, नाडायनः, चारायणः;
cf. Kas. on P. IV.1. 99; (2) a class
of words headed by नड to which
the affix ईय (छ) is added, together
with the augment क placed after
the word and before the affix, in
the four senses prescribed in P.
IV.2. 67-70; e.g. नडकीयम् , प्लक्षकीयम् ;
cf. Kas. on P. IV. 2. 91.
नत cerebralized; changed into ण्.
The change of the consonant न्
into ण् is called नति in the old
Pratisakhya works; cf. स्पर्शे वोष्मणि
चानते R. Pr. IV. 11.
नति lit.inclination, bending down; the
word is used generally in the tec-
hnical sense of 'cerebralization' but
applied to the change of न् into ण्
as also that of स् into ष्; cf. दन्त्यस्य
मूर्धन्यापत्तिर्नतिः, V. Pr.I. 42. The root
नम् is used in the sense of 'cere-
bralizing ' or 'being cerebraliz-
ed' very frequently in the Pratisa-
khya works; e.g. the word नम्यते
is used in the sense of 'is cerebra-
lized'; नमयति in the sense of
'cerebralizes' and नामिंन् in the
sense of 'causing cerebralization';
cf. ऋकारादयो दश नामिन: स्वराः, पूर्वो
नन्ता नतिषु नम्यमुत्तरम् R. Pr. I. 27.
नदी a technical term applied in Panini's
grammar to words in the feminine
gender ending in ई and ऊ excep-
ting a few like स्त्री,श्री, भ्रू and others;
it is optionally applied to words
ending in इ and उ, of course in
the fem. gender, before case affix-
es of the dative, ablative, genitive
and locative sing. The term was
probably in use before Panini and
was taken from the fem. word नदी
which was taken as a model. Very
probably there was a long list of
words like नद् ( नदट्) चोर ( चोरट् )
etc. which were given as ending
in ट् and to which the affix ई (ङीप्)
was added for forming the femi-
nine base;the first word नदी so
formed, was taken as a model and
all words in the list and similar
others were called नदी; cf. P. I
4. 3-6.
नद्ध a fault of pronunciation when a
letter, although distinctly prono-
unced inside the mouth, does not
become audible, being held up
( बद्ध ) by the lips or the like. The
fault is similar to अम्बूकृत: cf. ओष्ठा-
भ्यामम्बूकृतमाह नद्धम् R.Pr.XIV.2.
नद्यादि a class of words headed by नदी,
मही and other fem. nouns to which
the taddhita affix एय (ढक्) is added
in the miscellaneous (शैषिक ) senses;
e.g. नादेयम्, माहेयम्, वाराणसेयम्, श्रावस्तेयम्
etc.; cf. Kas. on P.IV.2.97.
नन् krt affix न applied to the root स्वप्
to show verbal activity ; e.g. स्वप्न;
cf.P.III.3.91.
नन्तृ one that causes cerebralization;
cf. पूर्वो नन्ता नतिषु नम्यमुत्तरम् R.Pr.I.27.
See नति.
नन्दसुन्दर a Jain grammarian who
wrote a gloss (अवचूरि) on the हैमशब्दा-
नुशासनवृत्ति.
नन्दिकेश्वर an ancient grammarian who
has written a short work in verses
on grammar in general, which is
named नन्दकेश्वरकारिकासूत्र. There is
a scholarly commentary upon it
written by उपमन्यु.
नन्दिकेश्वरकारिका a short treatise of 28
stanzas, attributed to an ancient
grammarian नन्दिकेश्वर, which gives
a philosophical interpretation of
the fourteen sutras attributed to
God Siva. The authorship of the
treatise is assigned traditionally to
|
the Divine Bull of God Siva. See
नन्दिकेश्वर. The treatise is also named
नन्दिकेश्वरकारिकासूत्र.
नन्दिकेश्वरकारिकाविवरण called also
नन्दिकेश्वरकारिकाटीका a gloss written
by Upamanyu on नन्दिकेश्वरकारिका.See
नान्द्वेश्वरकारिका.
नन्द्यादि name giver to the class
of roots beginning with the root
नन्द्, which includes the roots वाश्,
मद् , दूष्， वृध् , शुभ् and others as given
in the Ganapatha.These roots have
the affix ल्यु i.e. अन added to them
in the sense of agent. e.g. नन्दनः,
वाशनः, मदनः, वर्धनः, शोभनः, रमणः, दर्पणः,
जनार्दनः, यवनः etc.; cf. P.III.1.134.
नपुंसक 1it. a word which is neither in
the masculine nor in the feminine
gender; a word in the neuter
gender; cf. R.Pr.XIII.7,V. Pr. II.
32; III.138; cf. P. VI.3.75, on
which the Siddhanta Kaumudi
observes न स्त्री पुमान् नपुंसकम् । स्त्रीपुंसयोः
पुंसकभावो निपातनात् ।
नपुंसकस्वर the special accent viz. the
acute accent for the first vowel
for nouns in the neuter gender
excepting those that end in इस्, as
prescribed by नबिषयस्यानिसन्तस्य
Phitsutra 11; cf. नपुंसकस्वरो मा भूत्
M.Bh. on P.VII.1.77.
नम्य capable of being cerebralized.
See नति.
नर person; personal ending; the term
is used in connection with (the
affixes of) the three persons प्रथम,
मध्यम, and उत्तम which are promisc-
uously seen sometimes in the
Vedic Literature cf. सुतिङुपग्रह-
लिङ्गनराणां ... व्यत्ययमिच्छति ... M. Bh.
on III.1.85.
नरेन्द्रसूरि an old grammarian believed
to have been the original writer of
the Sarasvata Vyakarana, on the
strength of references to him in
|
the commentary on the Sarasvata
Vyakarana written by क्षेमेन्द्र as also
references in the commentary on
the Prakriykaumudi by Vittha-
lesa. He is believed to have lived
in the tenth century A;D.
नरेन्द्रचार्य the same as नरेन्द्रसूरि. See
नरेन्द्रसूरि.
नलोप elision of न्, which in Panini's
grammar is sometimes taken as
valid for certain grammatical
operations,and otherwise for other
operations; cf. नलोपः सुप्स्वरसंज्ञातुग्विधिषु
कृति P.VIII.2.2.
नवगणी a term used in connection
with the first nine ganaas or conju-
gations given by Panini in his
Dhatupatha, the tenth conjuga-
tion being looked upon as a secon-
dary conjugation.
नवाह्निकी name given to the first nine
Ahnikas or lessons of the Maha-
bhasya which are written in expla-
nation of only the first pada of the
first Adhyaya of Panini's Astadhyayi
and which contain almost all the
important theories, statements and
problems newly introduced by
Patanjali.
नव्यमत a term used for the differen-
tiation in views and explanations
held by the comparatively new
school of Bhattoji Diksita, as con-
trasted with those held by Kasika-
kara and Kaiyata; the term is
sometimes applied to the differ-
ences of opinion expressed by
Nagesabhatta in contrast with
Bhagttoji Diksita. For details see
p.p. 23-24 Vol.VII of the Patan-
jala Mahabhasya ed. D.E. Society,
Poona.
नष्ट elided or dropped; a term used
as a synonym of 'lupta' in some
commentaries.
|
नष्टरूपा name given to an anustup
verse which has nine, ten and
eleven syllables respectively for the
first, second and third feet; e.g.
विपृच्छामि पाक्यान् देवान् R.V.I.120.4; cf.
R.Pr. XVI. 29. The verse has got
32 syllables, but it has only three
feet instead of four.
ना (1) tad. affix ना as also नाञ् pres-
cribed respectively after वि and
नञ् (negative particle न ) in the
sense of separation; e. g. विना,
नाना ; (2) case ending ना substituted
for the ins. sing. affix टा (called
also अाङ् in ancient grammars) in
the masculine gender after words
called घि i. e. words ending in इ or
उ excepting such as are called नदी.
नागेश the most reputed modern
scholar of Panini's grammar, who
was well-versed in other Sastras
also, who lived in Benares in the
latter half of the seventeenth and
the first half of the eighteenth
century. He wrote many master-
ly commentaries known by the
words शेखर and उद्द्योत on the
authoritative old works in the
different Sastras, the total list of
his small and big works together
well nigh exceeding a hundred.
He was a bright pupil of Hari
Diksita, the grandson of Bhattoji
Diksita. He was a renowned
teacher also, and many of the
famous scholars of grammar in
Benares and outside at present
are his spiritual descendants. He
was a Maharastriya Brahmana of
Tasgaon in Satara District, who
received his education in Benares.
For some years he stayed under
the patronage of Rama, the king
of Sringibera at his time. He was
very clever in leading debates in
the various Sastras and won the
|
title of Sabhapati. Out of his
numerous works, the Uddyota on
Kaiyata's Mahabhasyapradipa, the
Laghusabdendusekhara on the
Siddhanta Kaumudi and the Pari-
bhasendusekhara are quite well-
known and studied by every one
who wishes to get proficiency in
Panini's grammar. For details
see pp. 21-24 and 401-403, Vol.
VII of the Patanjala Mahabha-
sya ed. D. E. Society, Poona.
नाञ् see ना.
नाटच् tad. affix नाट applied to the
prefix अव optionally with the
affixes टीटच् and भ्रटच्; e. g. अवनाटम्,
अवटीटम्, अवभ्रटम्; cf Kas. on P. V.
2.31.
नाद (l) voice; resonance; tone; the
sound caused by the vibration of
the vocal chords in the open
glottis when the air passes through
them; cf. वर्णाोत्पत्त्यनन्तरभावी अनुरणनरूपः
शब्दः नादः Uddyota on M. Bh. on
P. I. 1.9; cf. also संवृते कण्ठे यः शब्दः
क्रियते स नादसंज्ञो भवति T. Pr. II. 4; (2)
sound, articulate sound generally
without sense, which is momen-
tary; (3) the highest sound. See परा.
नादानुप्रदान having voice ( नाद ) as
their main cause; a term used in
connection with vowels and so-
nant consonants which are caused
by नादः cf. नादः अनुप्रदानं स्वरघोषवत्सु ।
अनुप्रदीयते अनेन वर्णः इति अनुप्रदानं मूल-
कारणम्, com. on T. Pr. II. 8.
नादि (a root) beginning with न् in
the Dhatupatha as contrasted with
one beginning with ण् ( णादि )
whose ण् is, of course, changed into
न् when conjugational and other
forms are arrived at; cf. सर्वे नादयो
णोपदेशा नृतिनन्दिनदिनक्किनाटिनाथृनाधृनॄवर्जम्
M.Bh. on VI. 1.65.
नादिन् possessed of नाद; sonorous,
resonant, See नाद.
26
|
नानापद different words as opposed
to समानपद or a single word; cf. V. Pr.
III. 80; T.Pr. XXIV. 3, XX. 3.
नान्तरीयक absolutely necessary; being,
in a way, inseparable: cf. कश्चि-
दन्नार्थी शालिकलापं सतुषं सपलालमाहरति
नान्तरीयकत्वात् M. Bh. on P. III.
3.18 on which Kaiyata observes
अन्तरशब्देा विनार्थे । अन्तरे भवमन्तरीयम् ।
तत्र नञ्समासे कृते पृषोदरादित्वाद्भाष्यकारवचन-
प्रामाण्याद्वा नलोपाभावः ।
नापुंसक the same as नपुंसुकलिङ्ग or neuter
gender; cf. नापुंसकं भवेत्तस्मिन् । नपुंसके
भवं नापुसकम् M. Bh. on IV. 1.3.
नाम् the genitive affix आम् together
with the augment न् prefixed to
it; cf. नामि P. VI. 4. 3.
नामज a word or noun derived from
a noun, as opposed to धातुज a word
derived from a root.
नामधातु a denominative root; the
term सुब्धातु is also used for नामधातु;
cf. सुब्धातुर्नामधातुरभिधीयते Nyāsa on P.
VI. 1.3. See the word धातु.
नामन् noun, substantive; one of the
four categories of words given in
the Nirukta and other ancient
grammer works; cf. चत्वारि पदजातानि
नामाख्याते चोपसर्गनिपाताश्च, Nir. I.1. The
word is defined as सत्त्वप्रधानानि नामानि
by standard grammarians; cf.
Nir. I. 1.; cf. also सत्त्वाभिधायकं नाम,
R. Pr. XIII.8; V. Pr. VIII. 49
and com. thereon. Panini divides
words into two categories only,
viz. सुबन्त and तिङन्त and includes
नामन् ,उपसर्ग and निपात under सुबन्त.
The Srngarapraksa defines नामन्
as follows-अनपेक्षितशब्दव्युत्पत्तीनि सत्त्व-
भूतार्थाभिधायीनि नामानि। तानि द्विविधानि।
आविष्टलिङ्गानि अनाविष्टलिङ्गानि च । The
word नामन् at the end of a sasthi-
tatpurusa compound signifies a
name or Samjna e. g. सर्वनामन्, दिङ्-
नामन् , छन्दोनामन्; cf. also. Bhasa-
|
vrtti on संज्ञायां कन्थोशीनरेषु P. II.4. 20
and संज्ञायां भृत्. P. III. 2.46 where
the author of the work explains
the word संज्ञायां as नाम्नि. The word
is used in the sense of 'a collection
of words' in the Nirukta, cf. अन्त-
रिक्षनामानि, अपत्यनामानि, ईश्वरनामानि,
उदकनामानि, etc.
नामलिङ्गानुशासन a treatise in which
words with their genders are given.
The term is usually used in con-
nection with the great dictionary
by अमरसिंह which is called नामालिङ्गानु-
शासन or अमरकोष.
नामिन् (vowels) which cause cere-
bralization; the ten vowels ऋ, ॠ,
इ, ई, उ, ऊ, ए, ओ, ऐ, औ; cf. ऋकारा-
दयो दश नामिनः स्वराः R. Pr. I. 27, cf.
also R.T. 94. See the word नति.
The word भाविन् is used for नामिन्
in the Vajasaneyi Pratisakhya; cf.
अकण्ठ्यो भावी V. Pr. I. 46; cf. also
नामिपरो रम् Kat. I.5.12.
नारायण (1) name of a grammarian
who wrote a commentary on the
Mahabhsya-Pradipa; (2) a gram-
marian who is said to have
written a gloss named Sabda-
bhusana on the Sutras of Panini
as also some minor works named
शब्दमञ्जरी, शब्दभेदनिरूपण, etc.
नारायणवन्द्य a grammarian of the
seventeenth century who wrote a
treatise on grammar named Sara-
vali, and a treatise on roots named
Dhatuparayana.
नाव्यवधान necessary intervention; cf.
येन नाव्यवधानं तेन व्यवहितेपि वचनप्रामाण्यात्,
a statement which is looked upon
as a general statement of the '
nature of Paribhasa occurring
in the Mahabhasya on P. VII. 2.3.
नाश elision, the word is used in
grammar as a synonym of 'lopa.'
नासिकास्थान a place in the nose where
a nasal letter such as ङ्, ञ्, ण्, न् or
|
म् and anusvara get a tinge of
nasalization while passing through
it. The yama letters e.g the nasal
क्, ख् ,ग् , घ् get nasalization in the
utterance of the words पलिक्किनः,
चख्ख्नतुः, अग्ग्निः, घ्घ्नन्ति; cf. यमो नाम
वर्णः प्रातिशाख्ये प्रसिद्धः S.K. on P. VIII.
2. 1. cf. also यमानुस्वारनासिक्यानां नासिके
V. Pr. I. 74, R. T. 12.
नासिक्य letters or phonetic elements
produced in the nose; cf. नासिकायां
यमानुस्वारनासिक्याः R. T. 12. See
( नासिक्य ).
नि (1) personal ending substituted for
मि (मिप्) of the 1st pers. sing. in the
imperative; (2) a technical term
in the Jainendra Vyakarana for
the term निपात of Panini.
निःसंख्य not possessed of any number-
sense ; the term is used in connec-
tion with indeclinables; cf. अव्यये-
भ्यस्तु निःसंख्येभ्यः सामान्यविहिताः स्वादयो
वेिद्यन्त एव Kas. on P.I. 4.21.
निःसंधि deprived of Samdhi; without
any euphoric combination or eu-
phonic change.
निक् augment नि as seen in the re-
duplicated syllable कनि of the
aorist form कनिक्रदत् of the root क्रन्द्;
cf. क्रन्देर्लुङि च्लेरङादेशो द्विर्वचनमभ्यासस्य
चुत्वाभावो निगागमश्च निपात्यते । अक्रन्दीदिति
भाषायाम्; Kas. on P.VII.4.65.
निगम a statement in the Vedic
passage; a Vedic passage; sacred
tradition or Vedic Literature in
general; cf. the frequent expression
इत्यपि निगमो भवति where निगम means
'a vedic word, given as an
instance'; if also means 'Veda'; cf.
निगम एव यथा स्यात् । M. Bh. on
VII. 2. 64. Durgacarya says that
the word it also used in the sense
of 'meaning';cf. तत्र खले इत्येतस्य निगमा
भवन्ति Nir. III.9. Durgacarya has
also explained the word as गमयन्ति
मन्त्रार्थान् ज्ञापयन्ति इति निगमाः, those
|
that make the hidden meaning of
the Mantras very clear.
निगार a kind of sound which appa-
rently is made up of a combina-
tion of three phonetic elements
ह्, म् and नासिक्य. It is a peculiar
sound through both the mouth and
the nose, although no specific
place of production is assigned to
it; cf अविशेषस्थानौ संस्वांदनिगारौ। हकार-
मकारनासिक्या वा निगारे R.T.11.
निघण्टु a name given to a collection
of words which are mainly Vedic.
In ancient times such collections
were possibly very general and
numerous and the works or trea-
tises on derivation such as the
Nirukta of Yaska were based upon
them; cf. निघण्टवः कस्मात् । निगमा इमे
भवन्ति । छन्दोभ्यः समाहृत्य समाहृत्य समाम्नातास्ते
निगन्तव एव सन्तो निगमनान्निघण्टव उच्यन्ते
इत्यौपमन्यवः । अपि वा आहननादेव स्युः |
समाहता भवन्ति । यद्वा समाहृता भवन्ति
(Nir.I.1) where the word is deri-
ved from गम्,or हन् or हृ. The word
निघण्टु is taken as synonymous with
निगम by Durgacarya.
निघात toning down; the grave accent;
the root निहन् in its various forms is
used in the sense of toning down
the voice and the word निघात is
used in the sense of the grave
accent (अनुदात्तस्वर) in the Vyakarana
and Pratisakhya works; cf. also
the words शेषनिघात, सर्वनिघात, etc.; cf.
समानवाक्ये निघातयुष्मदस्मदादेशाः P. VIII.
I.18 Vart. 5.
निङ् substitute नि for the last letter of
the word जाया at the end of a
bahuvrihi compound; cf. युवजानिः,
वृद्धजानिः Kas. on P.V. 4.134.
निचृत् less by one syllable; the word
is used as an adjective to the
name of a Vedic metre which has
got one syllable less than the
normal; cf. एकद्-व्यूनाधिकः सैव निचृ-
|
दूनाधिका भुरिक् R.Pr.XVII.1.
नित् an affix possessed of the mute
indicatory letter न्, the word cha-
racterized by which has the acute
accent on the vowel of the first
syllable; e. g. गार्ग्यः, वात्स्यः, cf Kas.
on P.VI.1.197.
नित्य (1) eternal, as applied to word
or Sabda in contrast with sound
or dhvani which is evanescent
(कार्य ). The sound with meaning or
without meaning,made by men and
animals is impermanent; but the
sense or idea awakened in the mind
by the evanescent audible words
on reaching the mind is of a per-
manent or eternal nature; cf. स्फोटः
शब्दो ध्वनिस्तस्य व्यायामादुपजायते; cf. also
व्याप्तिमत्त्वा्त्तु शब्दस्य Nir.I.1 ; (2) cons-
tant; not liable to be set aside by
another; cf. उपबन्धस्तु देशाय नित्यम्, न
रुन्धे नित्यम्। नित्यशब्दः प्राप्त्यन्तरानिषेधार्थः
T.Pr.I.59, IV.14; (3) original as
constrasted with one introduced
anew such as an augment; cf. T.
Pr. VI.14; (4) permanently func-
tioning, as opposed to tentatively
doing so; cf. नित्यविरते द्विमात्रम् R.
T.37; (5) unchangeable, perma-
nent, imperishable; cf. अयं नित्यशब्दो-
स्त्येव कूटस्थेष्वविचालिषु भावेषु वर्तते M.Bh.
on P. VIII. 1.4; (6) always or
invariably applying, as opposed
to optional; the word in this
sense is used in connection with
rules or operations that do not
optionally apply; cf. उपपदसमासो
नित्यसमासः, षष्ठीसमासः पुनार्वेभाषा; M. Bh.
on P.II.2.19; (7) constant,as appli-
ed to a rule which applies if
another simultaneously applying
rule were to have taken effect, as
well as when that other rule does
not take effect; cf. क्वचित्कृताकृतप्रसङ्गमा-
त्रेणापि नित्यता Par. Sek. Pari 46.
The operations which are nitya
according to this Paribhasa take
|
effect in preference to others which
are not 'nitya', although they may
even be 'para'; cf. परान्नित्यं बलवत्
Par. Sek. Pari. 42.
नित्यबलीयस्त्व possession of greater
force; the word is used in connec-
tion with rules that are called नित्य.
See नित्य (7).
नित्यसमास an invariably effective
compound; the term is explained
as अस्वपदविग्रहो नित्यसमासः i. e. a com-
pound whose dissolution cannot
be shown by its component words
as such; e. g. the dissolution of
कुम्भकारः cannot be shown as कुम्भं
कारः, but it must be shown as कुम्भं
करोति स: । The upapadasamasa, the
gatisamsa and the dative tat-
purusa with the word अर्थ are
examples of नित्यसमास.
नित्यानन्दपर्वतीय a scholar of Sanskrit
Grammar who wrote glosses on
the Mahabhasyapradipa, on the
Laghusabdendusekhara and on
the Paribhasendusekhara. He
was a resident of Benares where
he coached many pupils in Sanskrit
Grammar. He lived in the first
half of the nineteenth century.
निदर्शन illustration; cf. पर्याप्तो ह्येकः पुलाक:
स्थाल्या निदर्शनाय M.Bh. on I. 4. 23
Vart. 15; cf also इला साल्हा चात्र
निदर्शनानि R. Pr. I. 22.
निपात a particle which possesses no
gender and number, and the case
termination after which is dropped
or elided. Nipata is given as one
of the four categories of words viz
नामन्, आख्यात, उपसर्ग and निपात by all
the ancient writers of Pratisakhya,
Vyakarana and Nirukta works;cf.
Nir. I. 4, M.Bh. on I. 1. Ahnika
l, R. Pr. XII. 8 etc. The word is
derived from the root पत् with नि
by Yaska who has mentioned three
subdivisions of Niptas उपमार्थे,
|
कर्मोपसंग्रहार्थे and पदपूरणे; cf. अथ निपाताः ।
उच्चावचेष्वर्थेषु निपतन्ति । अप्युपमार्थे । अपि
कर्मोपसंग्रह्यार्थे । अपि पदपूरणाः । Nir. I. 4.
The Nipatas are looked upon as
possessed of no sense; cf. निपातः
पादपूरणः R. Pr. XII. 8, V. Pr. VIII.
50, ( com. by Uvvata ). Panini has
not given any definition of the
word निपात, but he has enumerated
them as forming a class with च at
their head in the rule चादयोऽसत्वे
where the word असत्वे conveys an
impression that they possess no
sense, the sense being of two
kinds सत्त्व and भाव, and the Nipatas
not possesssing any one of the two.
The impression is made rather
firm by the statement of the
Varttikakra- 'निपातस्यानर्थकस्य प्राति-
पदिकत्वम्' P. I. 2. 45 Vart. 12.
Thus, the question whether the
Nipatas possess any sense by them-
selves or not, becomes a difficult
one to be answered. Although the
Rkpratisakhya in XII.8 lays down
that the Nipatas are expletive, still
in the next verse it says that some
of them do possess sense; cf. निपाता-
नामर्थवशान्निपातनादनर्थकानामितरे च सार्थकाः on
which Uvvata remarks केचन निपाताः
सार्थकाः, केचन निरर्थकाः । The remark
of Uvvata appears to be a sound
one as based on actual observa-
tion, and the conflicting views have
to be reconciled. This is done by
Bhartrhari who lays down that
Nipatas never directly convey the
sense but they indicate the sense.
Regarding the sense indicated by
the Nipatas, it is said that the sense
is never Sattva or Dravya or sub-
stance as remarked by Panini; it is
a certain kind of relation and that
too, is not directly expressed by
them but it is indicated. Bhoja in
his Srngaraprakasa gives a very
comprehensive definition of Nipata
|
निपातद्योतकत्व निमित्तापायपरिभाषा 205
as:-जात्यादिप्रवृत्तिनिमित्तानुपग्राहित्वेनासत्त्वभूता-
र्थाभिधायिनः अलिङ्गसंख्याशक्तय उच्चावचेष्वर्थेषु
निपतन्तीत्यव्ययविशेषा एव चादयो निपाताः ।
He gives six varieties of them, viz.
विध्यर्थ, अर्थवादार्थ, अनुवादार्थ, निषेधार्थ,
विधिनिषेधार्थ and अविधिनिषेधार्थ, and
mentions more than a thousand of
them. For details see Bhartrhari's
Vakyapadiya II. 189-206.
निपातद्योतकत्व the view that the
nipatas and the upasargas too,
as contrasted with nouns,pronouns
and other indeclinables, only
indicate the sense and do not de-
note it; this view, as grammarians
say, was implied in the Mahabha-
sya and was prominently given in
the Vakyapadiya by Bhartrhari
which was followed by almost all
later grammarians. See निपात.
निपातन a word given, as it appears,
without trying for its derivation,in
authoritative works of ancient gra-
mmarians especially Panini;cf.दाण्डि-
नायनहास्तिनयनo P. VI.4.174, as also
अचतुरविचतुरo V.4.77 etc. etc. The
phrase निपातनात्सिद्धम् is very frequen-
tly used by Patanjali to show that
some technical difficulties in the
formation of a word are not some-
times to be taken into considera-
tion, the word given by Panini
being the correct one; cf. M.Bh.on
I.1.4, III.1.22 etc. etc.; cf also
the usual expression बाधकान्येव निपात-
नानि. The derivation of the word
from पत् with नि causal, is suggest-
ed in the Rk Pratisakhya where it
is stated that Nipatas are laid down
or presented as such in manifold
senses; cf R. Pr.XII.9; cf also
घातुसाधनकालानां प्राप्त्यर्थं नियमस्य च ।
अनुबन्घविकाराणां रूढ्यर्थ च निपातनम् M.
Bh Pradipa on P. V.1.114: cf.also
M. Bh. on II.1.27.
निपातनस्वर the accent, with which the
|
Nipatana word is expressed in the
Sutra, which is said to prevail over
the accent which ordinarily should
be possessed by the word; cf. स
निपातनस्वरः प्रकृतिस्वरस्य बाधको भविष्यति
M.Bh. on P.I.1.56 Vart. 23; cf.
also M.Bh. on I.3.3, VI.1.123 etc. .
निपातानर्थकत्व the view prominently
expressed by the Varttikakara that
nipatas do not possess any sense,
which was modified by Bhartrhari
who stated that they do possess
sense which, of course, is indicated
and not expressed. See निपात.
निपाताव्ययोपसर्गवृत्तिa short treatise
explaining and illustrating the use
of indeclinables, written by a
grammarian named तिलक who
probably lived in Kasmira.
निमद् a mode of utterance of words at
the performance of a sacrifice.
Seven such modes are given in the
Taittiriya Pratisakhya; cf. उपांशुध्वान-
निमदोपव्दिमन्मन्द्रमध्यमताराणि T.Pr.XXIII.
5
निमित्त (1) the formal cause of a gra-
mmatical operation; cf. निमित्ताभावे
नैमित्तिकस्याप्यभाव; given as a Pari-
bhasa by many grammarians like
Vyadi, Siradeva and others; cf.
also प्रकृत्युपपदोपाधयो निमित्तं प्रत्ययेा निमित्ती
M.Bh. on III.1.1 Vart. 2; (2)
distinguishing sign यः प्रेक्षापूर्वकारी भवति
स: अध्रुवेण निमित्तेन ध्रुवं निमित्तमुपादत्ते वेदिकां
पुण्डरीकं वा, M.Bh. on I.1.26 Vart.5.
निमित्तसप्तमी locative case, used in the
sense of a cause as prescribed by
निमित्तात्कर्मसंयोगे, P. II.3 36 Vart. 6
and illustrated by the usually
quoted verse चर्मणि द्वीपिनं हन्ति दन्तयोर्हन्ति
कुञ्जरम् । केशेषु चमरीं हन्ति सीम्नि पुष्कलको हत:
M.Bh.on II.3.36 Vart. 6, also cf.
Kas. on P. I.1.57.
निमित्तापायपरिभाषा a popular name
given by grammarians to the
maxim निमित्तापाये नैमित्तिकस्याप्यपायः,. a
|
thing, which is brought into exist-
ence by a cause, disappears on
the disappearance of the cause.
The maxim is not, of course,
universally applicable. For details
see Par. Sek. Pari. 56, Sira. Pari.
99.
निमित्तिन् an affix or an augment or a
substitute taking place on account
of certain formal causes or nimi-
ttas; cf. निर्ज्ञातार्थो निमित्तमनिर्ज्ञातार्थो
निमित्ती, इह च प्रत्ययोऽनिर्ज्ञातः प्रकृत्युपपदो-
पाधयो निर्ज्ञाताः M. BSh. on III. l . l
Vart. 2.
नियत (1)regulated in size or number;
definitely fixed; the word नियत is
used in grammar in connection with
the nimitta or nimittin in a gram-
matical operation prescribed by a
rule, which, or a part of which, is
shown to be superfluous unless
there is laid down a regulation; cf.
शेषग्रहणं कर्तव्यम् । शेषनियमार्थम् | प्रकृत्यर्थौ
नियतौ प्रत्यया अनियतास्ते शेषेपि प्राप्नुवन्ति
M.Bh. on I.3.12 Vart. 6; (2) The
grave accent; cf उदात्तपूर्वं नियतं...
स्वर्यते RPr.III.9.
नियतस्वर (1) an affix whose accent is
definitely given by an indicatory
mute letter applied to it; cf. M.Bh.
on I.1.3; (2) the grave accent; a
syllable with a grave accent; grave
vowel; cf. नियतस्वरोदये R.Pr.XI.25;
(3) name of a Samdhi when a
visarga is changed into रेफ and
then omitted and the preceding
vowel is lengthened; cf ह्रस्वस्याकाम-
नियता उभाविमौ R.Pr. IV.9; cf. also
P. VIII.3.14 and VI.3.111.
नियम (1)restriction; regulation; bind-
ing; the term is very frequently
used by grammarians in connec-
tion with a restriction laid down
with reference to the applica-
tion of a grammatical rule gene-
rally on the strength of that rule,
|
or a part of it, liable to become
superfluous if the restriction has
not been laid down; cf. M.Bh. on
I. 1. 3, Kas. on I. 3.63, VI. 4.11;
cf. also the frequently quoted
dictum अनियमे नियमकारिणी परिभाषा; (2)
limitation as contrasted with विकल्प
or कामचार; cf. अनेकप्राप्तावेकस्य नियमो
भवति शेषेष्वनियम; पटुमृदुशुक्लाः पटुशुक्लमृदव
इति; M. Bh. on II. 2. 34 Vart. 2;
(3) a regulating rule; a restrictive
rule, corresponding to the Parisam-
khya statement of the Mimamsakas,
e. g. the rule अनुदात्तङित आत्मनेपदम्
P. I.3.12; the grammarians gene-
rally take a rule as a positive in-
junction avoiding a restrictive sense
as far as possible; cf. the dictum
विधिनियमसंभवे विधिरेव ज्यायान्. Par. Sek.
Pari. 100; the commentators have
given various kinds of restrictions,.
such as प्रयोगनियम,अभिधेयनियम,अर्थनियम,
प्रत्ययनियम, प्रकृतिनियम, संज्ञानियम etc.etc.;
(4) grave accent or anudatta; cf.
उदात्तपूर्वं नियतम् R. Pr. III. 9; see
नियत (2).
नियामक limiting; limitative; cf. तुः
क्रियते । स नियामको भविष्यति । अमेवापञ्चम्याः
इति M. Bh, on II. 4.83; cf. also
लोके निमित्तं द्विविधं दृष्टम् । कार्यस्थितौ नियामकं
तदनियामकं च Par. Sek. Pari. 56.
नियोग an obligatory order or
command, such as that of a pre-
ceptor, as contrasted with स्वभाव;
cf धातोः परः अकारोऽकशब्दो वा नियोगतःकर्तारं
ब्रुवन्कृत्संज्ञश्च भवति ......... स्वभावतः कर्तारं
ब्रुवन्कृत्संज्ञश्च भवति etc. M. Bh. on P.
III. 4.67 Vart. 8 where Kaiyata
explains नियोग as अाचार्यनियोग.
निरनुनासिक pure, unnasalized, as
opposed to सानुनासिक nasalized. cf.
सन्ति हि यणः सानुनासिका निरनुनासिकाश्च ।
M.Bh. on I. 1. Ahnika 1.
निरनुबन्धक possessed of no mute
indicatory letter; not possessed of
any mute indicatory letter; cf. क्व
|
निरनुबन्धकपरिभाषा निरुदकादि 207
पुनरयं (आकारः) सानुबन्धकः क्व निरनुबन्धकः ।
M.Bh. on I. 1.14.
निरनुबन्धकपरिभाषा a short term used
for the maxim निरनुबन्धकग्रहणे न
सानुबन्धकस्य ग्रहणम् Par. Sek. Pari. 81.
निरवकाश possessed of no scope of, or
occasion for, application; the word
अनवकाश is also used in this sense.
The niravakasa rules always set
aside the general rules which are
always present wherever they i. e.
the niravakasa rules are possible to
be applied. Niravakasatva is looked
upon as one of the two criteria for
बाध or sublation, the other one
being सामान्यविशेषभाव as illustrated
by the usual maxim, known as
तक्रकौण्डिन्यन्याय. See तक्रकौण्डिन्यन्याय; cf.
also अनवकाशा हि विधयो बाधका भवन्ति
Par. Sek. on Pari. 64.
निरस्त a fault of pronunciation when
a vowel is harshly pronounced
and hence is not properly audible;
cf. निरस्तं निष्ठुरम् Pradipa on M.Bh. I.
1. Ahn. 1. The fault occurs when
the place and the means of utter-
ance are pressed and drawn in;cf.
निरस्तं स्थानकरणापकर्षे R. Pr. XIV. 2.
निराकृत (1) set aside; answered; the
word is frequently used in connec-
tion with faults which are stated
to occur or present themselves if
a particular explanation is given;
(2) prevailed over by another; cf.
तदा न रूपं लभते निराकृतम् R. Pr. XI.
30, where Uvvata paraphrases
निराकृत as विस्मृत.
निरुक्त name of a class of works which
were composed to explain the
collections of Vedic words by
means of proposing derivations of
those words from roots as would
suit the sense. The Nirukta works
are looked upon as supplementary
to grammar works and there must
have been a good many works of
|
this kind in ancient times as
shown by references to the writers
of these viz. Upamanyu, Sakatay-
ana,Sakapuni,Sakapurti and others,
but, out of them only one work
composed by Yaska has survived;
the word, hence has been applied
by scholars to the Nirukta of
Yaska which is believed to have
been written in the seventh or the
eighth century B. C. i. e. a century
or two before Panini. The Nirukta
works were looked upon as subsidi-
ary to the study of the Vedas
along with works on phonetics
( शिक्षा ), rituals ( कल्प ), grammar
(व्याकरण) prosody (छन्दस्) and astro-
nomy(ज्योतिष)and a mention of them
is found made in the Chandogyo-
panisad. As many of the derivati-
ons in the Nirukta appear to be
forced and fanciful, it is doubtful
whether the Nirukta works could
be called scientific treatises. The
work of Yaska, however, has got
its own importance and place
among works subsidiary to the
Veda, being a very old work of
that kind and quoted by later
commentators. There were some
glosses and commentary works
written upon Yaska's Nirukta out
of which the one by Durgacarya is
a scholarly one.It is doubtful whe-
ther Durgacarya is the same as
Durgasimha, who wrote a Vrtti
or gloss on the Katantra Vyakar-
ana. The word निरुक्त is found in
the Pratisakhya works in the sense
of 'explained' and not in the sense
of derived; cf. R. Pr. XV 6; V.Pr.
IV. 19, 195.
निरुक्तभाष्य a gloss on Yaska's Nirukta
written by a modern scholar of
grammar named Ugracarya in the
eighteenth century A. D.
निरुदकादि a class of compound words
|
headed by the word निरुदक which
have their last vowel accented
acute; e. g निरुदकम्, निरुपलम्, निर्मक्षिकम्
etc.; cf. Kas. on P. VI. 2. 184.
निरूढलक्षणा potentiality of implica-
ion which gives the meaning of a
word which is based upon implica-
tion; e. g. रथो गच्छति.
निरूढोपध a word, the penultimate
vowel in which is picked up and
taken back, as for instance the
penultimate अ of हन् in the word
अंहस् cf. अंहतिश्च अंहश्च अंहुश्च हन्तेर्निरूढोपधा-
द्विपरीतात् Nir. IV. 25.
निर्दिश्यमानपरिभाषा a short form for the
maxim निर्दिश्यमानस्यादेशा भवन्ति which
means 'substitutes take the place
of that or its part which has been
actually stated or enunciated in
the rule (of grammar)' Par. Sek.
Pari. 12. For details see Par. Sek.
Pari. 12.
निर्दिष्ट exhibited, enunciated; cf.
तस्मिन्निति निर्दिष्टे पूर्वस्य P.I.1.66; V.Pr.I.
134.
निर्दिष्टपरिभाषा a popular name of the
Paribhasa तस्मिन्निति निर्दिष्टे पूर्वस्य । cf.
किं चेह निर्दिष्टपरिभाषाप्रवृत्तिर्दुर्वचा । Pari.
Bhaskara Pari. 97.
निर्देश mention, actual statement; the
word is often used in the Mahabh-
asya in sentences like स तथा निर्देशः
कर्तव्यः, निर्देशं कुरुते etc.; cf. also V.Pr.
I. 36;cf. also the maxim तस्मिन्निति
निर्दिष्टे पूर्वस्य P. I.1.66 and V. Pr. I.
134; cf. also अवश्यं कयाचिद्विभक्त्या केन-
चिद्वचनेन निर्देशः कर्तव्यः M.Bh. on P. I.
2. 39 Vart. 1. Sometimes the men-
tion or exhibition made by a word
shows the particular type of word;
cf. Durghata Vrtti on P. I. 2. 6
and VII. 4. 73 as also Kas. on
P. IV. 3. 11 and V. 2. 20.
निर्धारण (1)selection of one or some out
of many; cf. जातिगुणाक्रियाभिः समुदायादे-
कदेशस्य पृथक्करणं निर्धारणम् । मनुष्याणां मनुष्येषु
|
वा क्षत्रियः शूरतमः Kas. on P. II.2.10
as also on II.3.4l; (2) determined
or definite sense to the exclusion
of another, generally on the
strength of the indeclinable एव
which is expressed or understood.
The word नेिर्धारण is used for अवधारण
in this sense; cf. यत एवकारस्ततोन्यत्राव-
धारणम् a maxim used as a Paribhasa
by some grammarians; cf; also
धातोस्तन्निमित्तस्यैव । धात्ववधारणं यथा स्यात्तन्नि-
मित्तावधारणं मा भूदिति Kas. on P. VI.
1.81.
निर्बद्ध separated,dissociated, disconne-
cted; cf. न निर्बद्धा उपसर्गा अर्थान्निराहुरिति
शाकटायनः Nir. I.3.
निर्भुज a name for the Samhitapatha;
Cf. निर्भुजं संहिताध्ययनमुच्यते R. Pr.I. 3.
निर्मलदर्पण name of a commentary on
the Prakriya-Kaumudi.
निर्लूर name of a grammarian who is
believed to have written a gloss
( वृत्ति ) on the Sutras of Panini on
the strength of a reference to him
in the Nyasa of Jinendrabuddhi;
cf. वृत्तिः पाणिनीयसूत्राणां विवरणं चुल्लिभट्टिनिर्लू-
रादिप्रणीतम् Nyasa on I.1.1.
निर्वचन interpretation by means of
etymology as found in the Nirukta
works; the act of fully uttering the
meaning hidden in words that are
partially or wholly unintelligible
in respect of their derivation, by
separating a word into its compo-
nent letters; cf. निष्कृष्य विगृह्य निर्वचनम्,
Durgavrtti on Nir. II. 1.For details
see Nirukta II.1.
निर्वर्तक (1) productive, as opposed to
expressive; cf. किं पुनरिदं निर्वर्तकम् ।
अन्तरतमा अनेन निर्वर्त्यन्ते । अहोस्वित्प्रति-
पादकम् । अन्येन निर्वृत्तानामनेन प्रतिपत्तिः ।
M.Bh. on P.I.1.50 Vart. 1; (2)
productive of activity; cf. साधकं
निर्वर्तकं कारकसंज्ञं भवतीति वक्तव्यम् M.
Bh. on I.4.23.
निर्वर्त्य one of the many kinds of kar-
|
man or object governed by a
transitive verb or root, which has
got the nature of being produced
or brought into existence or into a
new shape; cf. त्रिविधं कर्म निर्वर्त्य विकार्य
प्राप्यं चेति । निर्वर्त्य तावत् कुम्भकारः नगरकारः।
The word निर्वर्त्य is explained as
यदसज्जन्यते यद्वा प्रकाश्यते तन्निर्वर्त्यम् । कर्तव्यः
कटः । उच्चार्यः शब्दः Sr. Prakasa; cf.
also Vakyapadiya III.7.78; cf. also
इह हि तण्डुलानोदनं पचतीति द्व्यर्थः पचिः ।
तण्डुलान्पचन्नोदनं निर्वर्तयति । M. Bh. on
I.4.49. For details see the word
कर्मन्; also see M.Bh. on I.4.49.
निर्वृत्ति production of the effect; pro-
duction of the activity by the
agents or instruments of activity
called Karakas; cf. साधनं हि क्रियां
निर्वर्तयति तामुपसर्गो विशिनष्टि M.Bh. on
II. 2.19 Vart. 2.
निर्हत a fault of pronunciation by
which a letter is uttered harsh or
rude; cf. निर्हतो रूक्षः Kaiyata on M.
Bh.I.1. Ahnika 1 .
निर्ह्रास (1) abridgment, diminution;
cf.सर्ववचनं प्रकृतिनिह्लासार्थम् । निर्ह्लासः अपचयः
अल्पत्वमित्यर्थः । Kaiyata on M.Bh. on
IV.3.100; (2) being turned into a
short (vowel); cf. स्पर्शान्तस्थाप्रत्ययौ
निर्ह्रसेते R.Pr.IV.39.
निवर्तक lit. expeller, excluding other
forms which are otherwise, that is,
incorrect; cf. समाने चार्थे शास्त्रान्वितः
अशास्त्रान्वितस्य निवर्तको भवति । M.Bh. on
I.1. Siva Sutra 2.
निवर्त्य that which should not proceed
to the next rule; cf. तच्चावश्यं निवर्त्यम्
M.Bh. on III.2.68, V.1.16, etc.
See the word निवृत्ति.
निवात sometimes used for निघात or
the grave accent.
निवृत्ति (l) cessation of recurrence of
a word or words from a rule to a
subsequent rule or rules; non-appli-
cation of a rule consequent upon
the cessation of recurrence or
27
|
anuvrtti cf; न ज्ञायते केनाभिप्रायेण प्रसजति
केन निवृत्तिं करोति M. Bh. on P. 1.1.44
Vart.8. cf. also एकयोगनिर्दिष्टानां सह
वा प्रवृत्तिः सह वा निवृत्तिः Kat. Par. Vr.
Pari. 9; (2) cessation or removal;
cf. न च संज्ञाया निवृत्तिरुच्यते । स्वभावतः
संज्ञा संज्ञिन; प्रत्याय्य निवर्तन्ते । तेन अनु-
बन्धानामपि निवृत्तिर्भविष्यति M. Bh. on
I. 1.1. Vart. 7; cf. also M. Bh. on
I. 1. 3 etc.; cf. also the usual
word उदात्तनिवृत्तिस्वरः.
निवृत्तिस्थान places where the sub-
stitutes गुण and वृद्धि do not apply ;
weak terminations; kit or nit
affixes in Panini's grammar; cf.
अथाप्यस्तेर्निवृत्तिस्थानेष्वादिलेापो भवति । स्तः
सन्तीति । Nir. II. 1. The word
संक्रम is also used in this sense by
ancient grammarians.
निषेध negation; prohibition; cf निषे-
धपञ्चसूत्रीयं स्वरार्था Bhasavrtti on P.
II. 2.16; cf. निषेधाश्च बलीयांसः Par.
Sek. Pari. 112. The word प्रतिषेध
is used frequently in this sense in
old grammar works such as the
Mahabhasya, the word निषेध be-
ing comparatively a modern one.
निष्कादि a class of words headed by
the word निष्क to which the affix
इक ( ठक् ) is added, provided these
words are not members of a
compound; e. g. नैष्किकम् , पादिकम् ,
माषिकम् etc.; cf. Kas. on P. V.1.20.
निष्कृष्ट separated; taken out from a
thing; existing only in concep-
tion or idea; cf. इह केचिद्गुणाः शब्देन
द्रव्यान्निष्कृष्टा एव प्रत्याय्यन्ते न तु द्रव्यस्यो-
परञ्जकत्वेन । यथा चन्दनस्य गन्धः इति ।
Kaiy. on P. II. 2. 8.
निष्ठा the affixes क्त and क्तवत् in
Panini's Grammar; cf. क्तक्तवत् निष्ठा
P. I. 1.26.
निष्ठित also निःष्ठित completed, accom-
plished; used in connection with
a grammatically formed word by
applying affixes to the bases; cf.
|
अङ्गवृत्ते पुनर्वृत्तावविधिर्निष्ठितस्य Siradeva
Pari. 94, where Siradeva has
explained the word निष्ठित as
प्रयोगार्ह-अङ्ग.
निहत struck down in tone, grave,
possessed of a grave accent; cf.
V. Pr. IV. 138.
निहित separated with the interven-
tion of a consonant. The word is
used in connection with the de-
tached first part of a compound
word not followed immediately
by a vowel; cf. अनिहतं अव्यवहितम्
Uvvata on V. Pr. V. 30.
नीक्augment नी affixed to the re-
duplicative syllables of the roots
फण्, वञ्च् , स्रंस,ध्वंस्, भ्रंस् कस्, पत्, पद् and
स्कन्द् in the intensive; e. g. अापनी-
फणत्, वनीवच्यते etc. cf. P. VII. 4.65
and 84.
नीच a term used for the grave
accent or for the vowel, accented
grave; cf. स्वरितयोर्मध्ये यत्र नीचं स्यात्
T. Pr. XIX. 1. उन्नीचे मे नीचमुच्चात्
R. T. 54, 55 cf. also V. Pr. I. 111.
नीचैःकर constituting the grave
accent, features of the grave
accent; cf. अन्ववसर्गो मार्दवमुरुता खस्येति
नीचैःकराणि शब्दस्य M.Bh.on I. 2.30.
नीलकण्ठ author of वैयाकरणसिद्धान्तरहस्य a
commentary on the Siddhanta
Kaumudi of Bhattoji Diksita.
नीलकण्ठदीक्षित a famous grammarian
of the seventeenth century who
wrote an independent work on
the Paribhasas in Vyakarana
named Paribhasavrtti. This Vrtti
is referred to in the Paribhsen-
dusekhara by Nagesabhatta and
the views expressed in it are
severely criticised in the com. गदा.
नीलकण्ठमखिन् nephew of Appaya
Diksita who has written a com-
mentary on Kaiyata's Mahabha-
syapradipa.
|
नुक् augment न् (l) affixed to the
words अन्तर्वत् and पतिवत् before the
feminine affix ङीप् e. g. अन्तर्वत्नी,
पतिवत्नी, cf. P. IV. 1.32; (2) affixed
to the root ली before the causal
affix णिच् , e. g. विलीनयति, cf. P.
VII. 3.39; (3) affixed to the re-
duplicative syllable of roots end-
ing in a nasal consonant and
having the penultimate अ as also
of the roots जप्, जभ् , दह् , दश्, भञ्ज्,
पश्, चर्, and फल् in the intensive;
e. g. जङ्गम्यते, तन्तन्यते, यंयमीति, जङ्गमीति,
जञ्जप्यते, दन्दह्यते, दन्दशीति. चञ्चूर्यते, पम्फु
लीति cf. P. VII 4.85, 86, 87.
नुट् augment न् prefixed (l) to the
gen. pl. ending in अाम् after a crude
base ending in a short vowel, or in
ई or ऊ of feminine bases termed
nadi, or in अा of the feminine affix
( टाप् डाप् or चाप्); e g. वृक्षाणाम्,
अग्नीनाम् , कर्तॄणाम् , कुमारीणाम् , मालानाम्
etc.; cf. P. VII.1.54; (2) to the
affix अाम् after numerals term-
ed षट् and the numeral चतुर् as also
after the words श्री, ग्रामणी and गो in
Vedic Literature, e. g. षण्णाम् ,
पञ्चानाम् , चतुर्णाम्, श्रीणाम्, ग्रामणीनाम्,
गोनाम्; cf. P. VII.1.55,56, 57; (3)
to the part of a root possessed of
two consonants, as also of the
root अश् of the fifth conjugation
after the reduplicative syllable
ending in अा, which is substituted
for अ; e.g. अानञ्ज, व्यानशे; cf. P.VII.4.
71,72; (4) to the affix मतुप् after a
base ending in अन् as also to the
affixes तरप् and तमप् after a base
ending in न् in Vedic Literature,
e.g. मूर्धन्वती, अक्षण्वन्तः, सुपथिन्तरः etc.;cf.
P. VIII. 2.16, 17: (5) to the initial
vowel of the second member of a
compound having अ of नञ् as the
first member; e. g. अनघः, cf. P.VI.
3.74; (6) to any vowel after न्
which is preceded by a short vowel
|
and which is at the end of a word
e.g. कुर्वन्नास्ते, cf. P. VIII. 3.32.
नुम् augment न् inserted after the last
vowel (1) of a root given in the
Dhātupātha as ending with mute
इ; e.g. निन्दति, क्रन्दति, चिन्तयति, जिन्वति
etc.; cf. P VII.1.58; (2) of roots मुच्
and others before the conjugational
sign अ ( श ); e. g. मुञ्चति, लुम्पति; cf.
P. VII.1.59; (3) of the roots मस्ज्,
नश्, रध्, जभ् and लभ् under certain
specified conditions, e.g.मङ्क्त्वा, नंष्टा,
रन्धयति, जम्भयति, लम्भयति, आलम्भ्यः etc.
cf. P.VII. 1.60-69; (4) of declin-
able bases marked with the mute
indicatory letter उ, ऋ or ऌ as also
of the declinable wording अञ्च्
from the root अञ्च् and युज्, e.g.भवान्,
श्रेयान् , प्राङ्, युङ्, cf. Kās. on P. VII.1.
70, 71; (5) of the declinable base
in the neuter gender, ending with
a vowel or with any consonant
excepting a semivowel or a nasal,
before a case-ending termed Sar-
vanāmasthāna; e.g. यशांसि, वनानि,
जतूनि etc., cf. Kās. on VII.1.72; (6)
of the declinable base in the neuter
gender, ending with इ, उ,ऋ or ऌ
before a case-ending beginning
with a vowel; e.g. मधुने, शुचिने etc.,
cf. Kās, on P. VII.1.73; (7) of the
affix शतृ ( अत् of the pres. part.)
under certain conditions याती यान्ती;
पचन्ती, सीव्यन्ती, cf. I .VII.78-8 : (8)
of the word अनडुह् before the nom.
and voc. sing. affix सु;e.g. अनड्वान् ,
हे अनड्वन्, cf. P. VII.1. 82; (9) of
the words दृक्, स्ववस् and स्वतवस्
before the nom. and voc.sing.affix
सु in Vedic Literature, e. g. यादृङ्,
स्ववान् , स्वतवान् , cf. P.VII.1.83.
नुमागम augment न् inserted after the
last vowel of a root or a noun-base
in specified cases. See नुम्.
नृचक्ष-ं name of the second Yama
letter.
|
नेमस्पृष्ट partly touched, half touched;
semi-contacted; a term used for
sibilants and hissing sounds.
नैकाच् multisyllabic, possessed of many
syllables, as contrasted with एकाच्.
नैगम(1) belonging to the Veda, Vedic
as opposed to लौकिक or भाषिक; cf.
नैघण्टुकानि नैगमानीहेह Nir.I. 20; (2)
name given to Kāndas 4, 5 and 6
of the Nirukta of Yāska; cf. अनवगत-
संस्कारा जहादयो यस्मिन्निगम्यन्ते तन्नैगमं
Durga Vr. on Nir IV.1.
नैघण्टुक mentioned as secondary; lit.
निघण्टुकाण्डे वर्तमानानि पदानि; the term is
applied to the first three Kāndas
or sections of the Nirukta.
नैपातिक accessory; accidental; निपातात्
अागतानि.
नैमित्तिक effect; one that is caused; cf.
निमित्ताभावे नैमित्तिकस्याप्यभावः a Pari-
bhāsā given by Vyādi, Siradeva
and others.
नैरुक्त (1) obtained by derivation, ety-
mological; (2) etymologist, writer
of a Nirukta work.
नैर्देशिक matter of communication;
statement made for communica-
tion. Uddyota explains the word
as निर्देशः बोधः प्रयोजनमस्य नैर्देशिकः । cf.
एते खल्वपि नैर्देशिकानां वार्ततरका भवन्ति ये
सर्वनाम्ना निर्देशाः क्रियन्ते M. Bh. on
P. I.1.67.
नैवासिक tad. affixes अण् and others
added in the sense of 'तस्य निवासः'
(P. IV. 2. 69), as in words like शैब
meaning the place of residence of
the Sibis.
न्यक् a technical term in the Jainen-
dra Vyākarana for the term उपसर्जन
defined by Pānini in the rules
प्रथमानिर्दिष्टं समास उपसर्जनम् and एक-
विभक्ति चा पूर्वनिपाते P.I.2.43, 44.
न्यङ्कुसारिणी a kind of बृहती metre in
which the second foot has twelve
syllables, while the rest have
|
eight syllables each; cf. द्वितीये
न्यङ्कुसारिणी R.Pr.XVI.32.
न्यङ्क्वादि a class of words headed by
the word न्यङ्कु, which are formed
by means of the substitution of a
guttural consonant in the place of
a consonant of any other class
belonging to the root from which
these words are formed; e.g. न्यङ्कुः
मद्गुः, भृगुः etc.; cf. Kās, on P.VII.3.
53.
न्यच् going lower, subordinate, the
word is used in the sense of upa-
sarjana as a technical term in the
Jainendra Vyākarana, cf. वोक्तं न्यक्
Jain. Vy.I.1.93.
न्यवग्रह also नीचावग्रह, the vowel at the
अवग्रह or end of the first member
of a compound word which has
got a grave accent; e. g. the vowel
ऊ of नू in तनूनप्त्रे; cf. उदाद्यन्तो न्यवग्रह-
स्तथाभाव्यः V. Pr. I. 120. See ताथा-
भाव्य.
न्यस्त name given to अनुदात्त or the
grave tone; cf. मात्रा न्यस्ततरैकेषामुभे
व्यालि: समस्वरे R. Pr. III. 17 where
Uvvata explains न्यस्ततरा as अनुदात्ततरा.
न्याय maxim, a familiar or patent
instance quoted to explain simi-
lar cases; cf. the words अग्नौकरवाणि-
न्याय M. Bh. on P. II 2.24, अपवाद-
न्याय M. Bh. on P. I. 3.9, अविरवि-
कन्याय M. Bh. on P. IV. 1. 88, 89,
IV. 2.60, IV.3.131, V. 1.7, 28, VI
2. 11 ; कुम्भीधान्यन्याय M.Bh. on P.I.
3.7, कूपखानकन्याय M.Bh. I. 1. Āhnika
1, दण्डिन्याय M.Bh. on P. VIII.2.83,
नष्टाश्वदग्धरथन्याय M. Bh. on P. I.1.50
प्रधानाप्रधानन्याय M.Bh.on P.II.1.69,VI.
3. 82, प्रासादवासिन्याय M. Bh. on P.I .
1.8, मांसकण्टकन्याय M.Bh. on P.I.2.39,
लट्वानुकर्षणन्याय M.Bh. on Siva Sūtra
2 Vārt. 5, शालिपलालन्याय M.Bh on P.
1.2.39,सूत्रशाटकन्याय M.Bh. on P. I.3.
12. The word came to be used
in the general sense of Paribhāsās
|
or rules of interpretation many of
which were based upon popular
maxims as stated in the word
लोकन्यायसिद्ध by Nāgesa. Hemacan-
dra has used the word न्याय for
Paribhāsa-vacana. The word is also
used in the sense of a general rule
which has got some exceptions,
cf. न्यायैर्मिश्रानपवादान् प्रतीयात् R. Pr.
which lays down the direction
that 'one should interpret the rule
laying down an exception along
with the general rule'.
न्यायरत्नमञ्जूषा a work dealing with
Vyākarana Paribhāsas or maxims
as found in Hemacandra's system
of grammar, written bv Hema-
hamsaganin, a pupil of Ratna-
sekhara, in 1451. The author has
written a commentary also on the
work, named Nyāsa.
न्यायसंग्रह a work enumerating the
Paribhāsas in Hemacandra's gram-
mar, numbering 140 nyāyas out
of which 57 nyāyas are said to
have been given by Hemacandra
himself at the end of his comment
बृहद्वृत्ति on his Śabdānuśāsana. The
work is written by हेमहंसगणि who
has added a commentary to it
called Nyayārthamaňjūșa by him,
which is also known by the name
न्यायरत्नमञ्जूषा which see above.
न्यायसंहित combined euphonically ac-
cording to rules of grammar; cf.
तद्वति तद्धिते न्यायसंहितं चेत् explained as
व्याकरणशास्त्रोक्तसंधिमत् V. Pr. V. 8 com.
न्यायसिद्ध established by a maxim; with
full justification; cf. न्यायसिद्धमेवैतत् M.
Bh.on V.1.19.The word is used as
opposed to ज्ञापकसिद्ध by Nāgesa; cf.
Par. Sek. Pari. 1.
न्यायार्थमञ्जूषा a name given to न्याय-
रत्नमञ्जूषा. See न्यायरत्नमञ्जूषा.
न्याय्य proper; fully justified न्यायादन-
पेतम् cf. P.IV.4.92; correct; regular;
|
cf. यञञ्भ्यामुक्तत्वादर्थस्य न्याय्योत्पत्तिर्न भवि-
ष्यति M. Bh. on II.3.1 where Kai-
yata however, explains the word
differently. Kaiyata states that
न्याय्य means a general rule; cf.उत्सर्गः
पूर्वाचार्यप्रसिद्ध्या न्याय्य उच्यते Kaiyata on
P. II. 3.1. By Pūrvācārya he pos-
sibly refers to the writers of the
Prātiśākhyas and other similar
works by ancient grammarians,
where the word nyāya is used in
the sense of 'a general rule '. See
the word न्याय above.
न्यास (1) lit. position, placing;a word
used in the sense of actual ex-
pression or wording especially in
the sūtras; cf. the usual expression
क्रियते एतन्न्यास एव in the Mahābhāșya,
cf. M. Bh. on I. 1.11, 1.1.47 etc.;
(2) a name given by the writers
or readers to works of the type of
learned and scholarly comme-
ntaries on vŗitti-type-works on
standard sūtras in a Śāstra; e. g.
the name Nyāsa is given to the
learned commentaries on the
Vŗtti on Hemacandra's Śabdā-
nuśasana as also on the Pari-
bhāşāvŗtti by Hemahamsagani.
Similarly the commentary by
Devanandin on Jainendra gram-
mar and that by Prabhācandra on
the Amoghāvŗtti on Śākatāyana
grammar are named Nyāsa. In
the same way, the learned com-
mentary on the Kāśikāvŗtti by
Jinendrabuddhi, named Kāśi-
kāvivaranapaňjikā by the author, is
very widely known by the name
Nyāsa. This commentary Nyāsa
was written in the eighth century by
the Buddhist grammarian Jinen-
drabuddhi, who belonged to the
eastern school of Pānini's Grammar.
This Nyāsa has a learned co-
mmentary written on it by
Maitreya Rakșita in the twelfth
|
century named Tantrapradipa
which is very largely quoted by
subsequent grammarians, but
which unfortunately is available
only in a fragmentary state at
present. Haradatta, a well-known
southern scholar of grammar has
drawn considerably from Nyāsa
in his Padamañjarī, which also is
well-known as a scholarly work.
न्यासोद्द्योत a learned commentary on
Jinendrabuddhi's Nyāsa written
by Mallinātha, the standard com-
mentator of prominent Sanskrit
classics.
न्यून incomplete in sense or wording
as opposed to Pūrņa; cf. अयवावे न्यूने
( पादे न संनिकृष्येते ) R. T. 76.
प् (l) first consonant of the labial
class of consonants possessed of
the properties श्वासानुप्रदान, अघोष, and
कण्ठविवृतत्व; ( 2 ) प् applied as a
mute letter to a suffix, making
the suffix accented grave (अनुदात्त).
प, पकार the consonant प्, the vowel
अ and the affix कार being added
for facility of understanding and
pronunciation; cf T.Pr. I. 17, 21 ;
प is also used as a short term for
consonants of the fifth class (पवर्ग);
cf. T. Pr. 1.27; V. Pr. I. 64 and
R. T. 13.
पक्ष alternative view or explanation
presented by, or on behalf of, a
party ; one of the two or more
way of presenting a matter. The
usual terms for the two views are
पूर्वपक्ष and उत्तरपक्ष, when the views
are in conflict. The views, if
not in conflict, and if stated as
alternative views, can be many
in number, e. g. there are seven
alternative views or Pakșas re :
|
the interpretation of the rule इको
गुणवृद्धी; cf. M. Bh. on P. I. 1.3; cf.
also सर्वेषु पक्षेषु उपसंख्यानं कर्तव्यम् M.
Bh. on P. I. 2.64.
पक्षादि a class of words headed by
the word पक्ष to which the tad-
dhita affix अायन ( फक् ) causing
vŗddhi is added in the four senses
given in P. IV. 2.67-70; e. g.
पाक्षायण:, अाश्मायनः etc.; cf. Kāś. on
P. IV. 2.80.
पचादि a class of roots headed by the
root पच् to which the kŗt. affix अ
( अच् ) is added in the sense of
'an agent'; e. g. श्वपचः, चोरः, देवः
etc. The class पचादि is described
as अाकृतिगण and it is usual with
commentators to make a remark
पचाद्यच् when a kŗt affix अ is seen
after a root without causing the
vŗddhi substitute to the preced-
ing vowel or to the penultimate
vowel अ. cf. अज्विधिः सर्वधातुभ्यः पठ्यन्ते
च पचादय: । अण्बाधनार्थमेव स्यात् सिध्यन्ति
श्वपचादघ: Kāś. on P. III. 1.134.
पञ्चपदी a term used in the Atharva-
Prātiśākhya for the strong case
affixes viz. the nominative case
affixes and the accusative sing.
and dual affixes; cf. चत्वारि क्षैप्रञ्च
पञ्चपद्यामन्तोदात्तादीनि यात् A. Pr. I.
3.14. The term corresponds to
the Sarvanāmasthāna of Pāņini,
which is also termed सुट् ; cf. सुडन-
पुंसकस्य P. I. 1.43.
पञ्चम the fifth consonant of the five
classes of consonants; the nasal
consonant, called also वर्गपञ्चम; cf.
यथा तृतीयास्तथा पञ्चमा आनुनासिक्यवर्जम् M.
Bh. on P. I. 1.9 Vārt. 2.
पञ्चमी (1) the fifth case;ending of the
fifth or ablative case as prescrib-
ed by rules of Pāņini cf. अपादाने
पञ्चमी, P. II. 3-7, 10, etc. (2) the
imperative mood; cf. Kāt.III.1.18.
पञ्चमीनिर्देश statement by the abla-
|
tive case, cf. डः सि धुट् P. VIII.
3.29;cf. उभयनिर्देशे पञ्चमीनिर्देशे; बलीयान्
e. g. ङमो ह्रस्वादचि ङमुण्नित्यम् P. VIII.
3.32, Par. Sek. Pari. 70; cf. also
उभयानिर्देशे विप्रतिषेधात्पञ्चमीनिर्देशः M. Bh.
on P.I. 1.67 Vārt. 3.
पञ्चालपदवृत्ति the usage or the me-
thod of the Pañcālas; the eastern
method of euphonic combinations,
viz. the retention of the vowel अ
after the preceding vowel ओ
which is substituted for the
Visarga; e. g. यो अस्मै; cf. R. Pr.
II. 12; T. Pr. XI. 19. This
vowel अ which is retained, is pro-
nounced like a short ओ or अर्ध-
ओकार by the followers of the
Sātyamugri and Rāņāyaniya bran-
ches of the Sāmavedins; cf. com-
mentary on T. Pr. XI. 19 as also
M. Bh. Āhnika 1.
पञ्जिका a popular name given to
critical commentaries by scholars;
cf. काशिकाविवरणपञ्जिका by Jinendra-
buddhi which is popularly known
by the name न्यास.
पटच् tad. affix पट in the sense of
extent ( विस्तार ) added to the word
अवि; e. g. अविपटम् cf. विस्तारे पटज्वक्तव्यः,
P. V. 2.29 Vārt. 2.
पठन oral recital, the word is used
in connection with the use of
words by the author himself in
his text which he is supposed to
have handed over orally to his
disciples, as was the case with
the ancient Vedic and Sūtra
works; cf. the words पठित, पठिष्यते,
पठ्यते and the like, frequently used
in the Mahābhāșya in connection
with the mention of words in the
Sūtras of Pāņini.
पण्डित writer of Citprabhā, a com-
mentary on the Paribhāșendu-
śekhara. A commentary on the
Laghuśabdenduśekhara is also as-
|
cribed to him. He was a Gauda
Brāhmaņa whose native place was
Kurukșetra. He lived in the
beginning of the nineteenth cen-
tury.
पतञ्जलि the reputed author of the
Mahābhāșya, known as the Pātañj-
ala Mahābhāșya after him. His
date is determined definitely as the
second century B.C. on the streng-
th of the internal evidence suppli-
ed by the text of the Mahābhāșya
itself. The words Gonardiya and
Gonikāputra which are found in
the Mahābhāșya are believed to
be referring to the author himself
and, on their strength he is said
to have been the son of Goņikā
and a resident of the country
called Gonarda in his days.
On the strength of the internal
evidence supplied by the Mahā-
bhāșya, it can be said that
Patañjali received his education at
Takșaśila and that he was,just like
Pāņini, very familiar with villages
and towns in and near Vāhika and
Gāndhāra countries. Nothing can
definitely be said about his birth-
place, and although it might be
believed that his native place was
Gonarda,its exact situation has not
been defined so far. About his
parentage too,no definite informa-
tion is available. Tradition says
that he was the foster-son of a
childless woman named Gonikā to
whom he was handed over by a
sage of Gonarda, in whose hands
he fell down from the sky in the
evening at the time of the offering
of water-handfuls to the Sun in
the west; cf.पतत् + अञ्जलि, the deriva-
tion of the word given by the
commentators. Apart from an-
ecdotes and legendary informa-
tion, it can be said with certain-
|
ty that Patañjali was a thorough
scholar of Sanskrit Grammar
who had studied the available
texts of the Vedic Literature and
Grammar and availed himself of
information gathered personally
by visiting the various schools of
Sanskrit Grammar and observing
the methods of explanations given
by teachers there. His Mahābhā-
șya supplies an invaluable fund of
information on the ways in which
the Grammar rules of Pāņini were
explained in those days in the
various grammar schools. This in-
formation is supplied by him in
the Vārttikas which he has
exhaustively given and explained.
He had a remarkable mastery
over Sanskrit Language which
was a spoken one at his time and
it can be safely said that in res-
pect of style, the Mahābhāșya
excels all the other Bhāșyas in the
different branches of learning out
of which two, those of Śabaraswā-
min and Śańkarācārya,are selected
for comparison. It is believed by
scholars that he was equally conv-
ersant with other śāstras, especi-
ally Yoga and Vaidyaka, on which
he has written learned treatises.
He is said to be the author of the
Yogasūtras which,hence are called
Pātañjala Yogasūtras, and the
redactor of the Carakasamhitā.
There are scholars who believe
that he wrote the Mahābhāșya
only, and not the other two. They
base their argument mainly on the
supposition that it is impossible
for a scholar to have an equally
unmatching mastery over three
different śāstras at a time. The
argument has no strength, especi-
ally in India where there are many
instances of scholars possessing
|
sound scholarship in different
branches of learning. Apart from
legends and statements of Cakrad-
hara, Nāgesa and others, about his
being the author of three works
on three different śāstras, there is
a direct reference to Patañjali's
proficiency in Grammar, Yoga
and Medicine in the work of King
Bhoja of the eleventh century
and an indirect one in the Vākya-
padīya of Bhartŗhari of the
seventh century A. D. There is a
work on the life of Patañjali,
written by a scholar of grammar
of the South,named Ramabhadra
which gives many stories and inci-
dents of his life out of which it is
difficult to find out the grains of
true incidents from the legendary
husk with which they are covered.
For details,see Patañjala Mahābhā-
șya D.E.Society's edition Vol. VII
pages 349 to 374. See also the
word महाभाष्य.
पद a word; a unit forming a part
of a sentence; a unit made up of a
letter or of letters, possessed of
sense; cf. अक्षरसमुदायः पदम् । अक्षरं वा ।
V.Pr. VIII. 46, 47. The word
originally was applied to the indi-
vidual words which constituted the
Vedic Samhitā; cf. पदप्रकृतिः संहिता
Nir.I.17. Accordingly, it is defin-
ed in the Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya
as ' अर्थः पदम् ' (V. Pr. III. 2) as
contrasted with ' वर्णानामेकप्राणयोगः
संहिता ' (V.Pr.I.158). The definition
' अर्थः पदम् ' is attributed to the
ancient grammarian 'Indra', who
is believed to have been the first
Grammarian of India. Pāņini has
defined the term पद as ' सुप्तिङन्तं
पदम् ' P.I.4.14. His definition is
applicable to complete noun-forms
and verb-forms and also to prefixes
and indeclinables where a case-
|
affix is placed and elided accord-
ing to him; cf. अव्ययादाप्सुपः P. II. 4.
82. The noun-bases before case
affixes and tad. affixes, mentioned
in rules upto the end of the fifth
adhyāya, which begin with a con-
sonant excepting य् are also termed
पद by Pāņini to include parts of
words before the case affixes भ्याम् ,
भिस्, सु etc. as also before the tad.
affixes मत्, वत् etc. which are given
as separate padas many times in the
pada-pātha of the Vedas; cf. स्वादि-
ष्वसर्वनामस्थाने P. I. 4. 17. See for
details the word पदपाठ. There are
given four kinds of padas or words
viz. नाम, अाख्यात, उपसर्ग and निपात in
the Nirukta and Prātiśākhya works;
cf. also पदमर्थे प्रयुज्यते, विभक्त्यन्तं च पदम्
M. Bh. on P. I. 2. 64 Vārt. 19,
वर्णसमुदायः पदम् M.Bh. on I.1.21 Vārt.
5, पूर्वपरयोरर्थोपलब्धौ पदम् Kāt. I.1.20,
पदशब्देनार्थ उच्यते Kaiyata on P.I.2.42
Vārt. 2; cf. also पद्यते गम्यते अर्थः
अनेनेति पदमित्यन्वर्थसंज्ञा Nyāsa on P.III.
1.92. The verb endings or affixs ति,
तस् and others are also called
पद. The word पद in this sense
is never used alone, but with
the word परस्मै or अात्मने preceding
it. The term परस्मैपद stands for
the nine affixes तिप्, तस्, ...मस्,while
the term आत्मनेपद stands for the
nine affixes त, आताम् ... महिङ्. cf. ल:
परमैपदम्, तङानावात्मनेपदम्. It is possible
to say that in the terms परस्मैपद
and अात्मनेपद also, the term पद
could be taken to mean a
word, and it is very likely that
the words परस्मैपद and अात्मनेपद
were originally used in the sense
of 'words referring to something
meant for another' and 'refer-
ring to something meant for
self' respectively. Such words,
of course, referred to verbal forms,
roughly corresponding to the
|
verbs in the active voice and
verbs in the passive voice. There
are some modern scholars of gra-
mmar, especially linguists, who
like to translate परस्मैपद as 'active
voice' and आत्मनेपद as ' passive
voice'. Pāņini appears, however,
to have adapted the sense of the
terms परस्मैपद and आत्मनेपद and taken
them to mean mere affixes just as
he has done in the case of the
terms कृत् and तद्धित. Presumably in
ancient times, words current in
use were grouped into four classes
by the authors of the Nirukta
works, viz. (a) कृत् (words derived
from roots)such as कर्ता, कारकः, भवनम्
etc., (b) तद्धित (words derived from
nouns ) such as गार्ग्यः , काषायम् , etc.,
(c) Parasmaipada words viz. verbs
such as भवति, पचति, and (d) Ātma-
nepada words i.e. verbs like एधते,
वर्धते, etc.Verbs करोति and कुरुते or हरति
and हरते were looked upon as both
परस्मैपद words and आत्मनेपद words.
The question of simple words, as
they are called by the followers of
Pāņini, such as नर, तद् , गो, अश्व, and
a number of similar underived
words, did not occur to the authors
of the Nirukta as they believed
that every noun was derivable,
and hence could be included in
the kŗt words.
पदकाण्ड (1) a term used in connection
with the first section of the Vākya-
padīya named ब्रह्मकाण्ड also, which
deals with padas, as contrast-
ed with the second section
which deals with Vākyas; (2)
a section of the Așțadhyāyī of
Pāņini, which gives rules about
changes and modifications applic-
able to the pada, or the formed
word, as contrasted with the base
(अङ्ग) and the suffixes. The section
is called पदाधिकार which begins with
28
|
the rule पदस्य P.VIII.1.16. and ends
with the rule इडाया वा VIII. 3. 54.
पदकार lit. one who has divided the
Samhitā text of the Vedas into the
Pada-text. The term is applied to
ancient Vedic Scholars शाकल्य, आत्रेय,
कात्यायन and others who wrote the
Padapātha of the Vedic Samhitās.
The term is applied possibly
through misunderstanding by some
scholars to the Mahābhāsyakāra
who has not divided any Vedic Sam-
hitā,but has, in fact, pointed out
a few errors of the Padakāras
and stated categorically that gra-
mmarians need not follow the Pada-
pāțha, but, rather, the writers of
the Padapāțha should have follow-
ed the rules of grammar. Patañ-
jali, in fact, refers by the term
पदकार to Kātyāyana, who wrote
the Padapātha and the Prātiśākhya
of the Vājasaneyi-Samhitā in the
following statement--न लक्षणेन पदकारा
अनुवर्त्याः। पदकारैर्नाम लक्षणमनुवर्त्यम्। यथालक्षणं
पदं कर्तव्यम् M. Bh. on P. III.1. 109;
VI. 1. 207; VIII. 2.16; cf. also
अदीधयुरिति पदकारस्य प्रत्याख्यानपक्षे उदाह-
रणमुपपन्नं भवति ( परिभाषासूचन of व्याडि
Pari. 42 ) where Vyādi clearly
refers to the Vārtika of Kātyā-
yana ' दीधीवेव्योश्छन्दोविषयत्वात् '
P. I. 1.6 Vārt. I. The misunder-
standing is due to passages in the
commentary of स्कन्दस्वामिन् on
the Nirukta passage I. 3, उब्वट-
टीका on ऋक्प्रातिशाख्य XIII. 19
and others where the statements
referred to as those of Patañjali are,
in fact, quotations from the Prā-
tiśākhya works and it is the writers
of the Prātiśākhya works who are
referred to as padakāras by Patañ
jali in the Mahābhāsya.
पदचन्द्रिका a grammar work on the
nature of words written by कृष्णशेष
of the sixteenth century.
|
पदपक्ष the same as पदसंस्कारपक्ष. See
पदसंस्कारपक्ष.
पदपाठ the recital of the Veda text
pronouncing or showing each
word separately as detached from
the adjoining word. It is believed
that the Veda texts were recited
originally as running texts by the
inspired sages, and as such, they
were preserved by people by oral
tradition. Later on after several
centuries, their individually dis-
tinct words were shown by gram-
marians who were called Pada-
kāras. The पदपाठ later on had
many modifications or artificial
recitations such as क्रम, जटा, घन etc.
in which each word was repeated
twice or more times, being uttered
connectedly with the preceding
or the following word, or with
both. These artificial recitations
were of eight kinds, which came
to be known by the term अष्टविकृतयः.
पदप्रकृति a term used in connection
with the Samhitā text or संहितापाठ
which is believed to have been
based upon words ( पदानि प्रकृति:
यस्याः सा ) or which forms the basis
of words or word-text or the pada-
pātha (पदानां प्रकृतिः); cf पदप्रकृतिः संहिता
Nir.I.17.
पदप्रभेद lit, divisions of words: parts
of speech. There are four parts of
speech viz.नामन् , आख्यात, उपसर्ग and
निपात given by ancient gramma-
rians and the authors of the
Prātiśākhya works, while there are
given only two, सुबन्त and तिङन्त by
Pāņini. For details see pp. 145,
146 Vol. VII. Mahābhāșya D. E.
Society's edition.
पदमञ्जरी the learned commentary by
Haradatta on the काशिकावृत्ति. Hara-
datta was a very learned gram-
marian of the Southern School,
|
and the Benares School of Gram-
marians follow पदमञ्जरी more than
the equally learned another com-
mentary काशिकाविवरणपञ्जिका or न्यास.
In the Padamanjarī Haradatta is
said to have given everything
of importance from the Mahā-
bhāșya; cf. अधीते हि महाभाष्ये व्यर्था सा
पदमञ्जरी. For details see Mahābhāșya
D. E. S. Ed. Vol. VII P. 390-391.
पदवाक्यरत्नाकर a disquisition on
grammar dealing with the differ-
ent ways in which the sense of
words is conveyed. The work
consists of a running commentary
on his own verses by the author
Gokulanātha Miśra who, from
internal evidence, appears to have
flourished before Koņdabhațța and
after Kaiyața.
पदवाद or पदवादिपक्ष view that words
are real and have an existence
and individuality of their own.
The view is advocated by the
followers of both the Mīmāmsā
schools and the logicians who
believe that words have a real
existence. Grammarians admit the
view for practical purposes, while
they advocate that the अखण्डवाक्य-
स्फोट alone is the real sense. cf.
Vākyapadīya II.90 and the foll.
पदविधि an operation prescribed in
connection with words ending
with case or verbal affixes and not
in connection with noun-bases or
root-bases or with single letters or
syllables. पदविधि is in this way con-
trasted with अङ्गविधि ( including
प्रातिपदिकविधि and धातुविधि ), वर्णविधि and
अक्षरविधि, Such Padavidhis are given
in Pāņini's grammar in Adhyāya2,
Pādas l and 2 as also in VI.1.158,
and in VIII. 1.16 to VIII.3.54 and
include rules in connection with
compounds, accents and euphonic
|
combinations. When, however, an
operation is prescribed for two or
more padas, it is necessary that
the two padas or words must be
syntactically connectible; cf. समर्थः
पदविधिः P. II.1.1.
पदविराम pause between two words
measuring two mātrās, or equal to
the time required for the utter-
ance of a long vowel; e. g. in इषे
त्वोर्जे त्वा, the pause between इषे and
त्वा is measured by two mātrās; cf.
पदविरामो द्विमात्रः T. Pr. XXII.13.Some
Prātiśākhya texts declare that the
pause between two words is of
one mātra as at avagraha; cf. R
Pr. II.1 and R. T. 35-38.
पदव्यवस्थासूत्रकारिका a metrical work
on the determination of the
pada or padas of the roots attri-
buted to Vimalakīrti.
पदव्यवस्थासूत्रकारिकाटीका a short gloss
on the पदव्यवस्थासूत्रकारिका written by
Udayakīrti, a Jain grammarian
पदसंस्कारपक्ष an alternative view with
वाक्यसंस्कारपक्ष regarding the forma-
tion of words by the application
of affixes to crude bases. Ac-
cording to the Padasamskāra al-
ternative, every word is formed
independently, and after forma-
tion the words are syntactically
connected and used in a sentence.
The sense of the sentence too, is
understood after the sense of every
word has been understood; cf.
सुविचार्य पदस्यार्थं वाक्यं गृह्णन्ति सूरयः Sira.
on Pari. 22. According to the
other alternative viz. वाक्यसंस्कारपक्ष,
a whole sentence is brought before
the mind and then the constitu-
ent individual words are formed
e.g. राम +सु, गम् + अ + ति । Both the
views have got some advantages
and some defects; cf. Par. Sek.
Pari. 56.
|
पदस्फोट expression of the sense by
the whole word without any con-
sideration shown to its division
into a base and an affix. For inst-
ance, the word रामेण means 'by
Rama' irrespective of any consider-
ation whether न is the affix or इन
is the affix which could be any
of the two, or even one, different
from the two; cf. उपायाः शिक्षमाणानां
वालानामपलापनाः Vākyapadīya II.240.
पदादि (1) beginning of a word, the
first letter of a word; cf. सात्पदाद्योः
P. VIII.3.111; cf. also स्वरितो वानुदात्ते
पदादौ P. VIII.2.6. Patañjali, for the
sake of argument has only once ex-
plained पदादि as पदादादिः cf. M.Bh.on
I. 1. 63 Vāŗt. 6; (2) a class of words
headed by the word पद् which is
substituted for पद in all cases ex-
cept the nom. and the acc. sin-
gular and dual; this class, called
पदादि, contains the substitutes पद् ,
दत्, नस् etc. respectively for पाद
दन्त, नासिका etc. cf. Kās on P. VI.
1.63; (3) the words in the class,
called पदादि, constiting of the
words पद्, दत्, नस्, मस् हृत् and निश्
only, which have the case affix
after them accented acute; cf. P.
VI. 1.171.
पदादिविधि a grammatical operation
specifically prescribed for the ini-
tial letter of a word.
पदाधिकार the topic concerning padas
i.e. words which are regularly
formed, as contrasted with words
in formation. Several grammatical
operations, such as accents or
euphonic combinations, are speci-
fically prescribed together by
Pāņini at places which are said
to be in the Padādhikāra formed
by sūtras VIII.1.16 to VIII.3.54.
पदान्त final letter of a word; cf. P.
VI.1.76, 109; VII.3.3, 9; VIII.
|
</poem>
4.35,37, 42, 59. At one place,
Patañjali for purposes of argu-
ment has explained the word as
final in a word; cf.नैवं विज्ञायते पदस्यान्तः
पदान्तः पदान्तादिति । कथं तर्हि । पदे अन्तः
पदान्तः पदान्तादिति M. Bh. on VIII.
4.35.
पदार्थ meaning of a word, significa-
tion of a word; that which
corresponds to the meaning of a
word; sense of a word. Gram-
marians look upon both-the
generic notion and the individual
object as Padārtha or meaning
of a word, and support their view
by quoting the sūtras of Pāņini
जात्याख्यायामेकस्मिन् बहुवचनमन्यतरस्याम् I.
2.58 and सरूपाणामेकशेष एकविभक्तौ I.
2.64; cf. किं पुनराकृतिः पदार्थ अाहोस्विद्
द्रव्यम् । उभयमित्याह । कथं ज्ञायते । उभयथा
ह्याचार्येण सूत्राणि प्रणीतानि । अाकृतिं पदार्थे
मत्वा जात्याख्यायामित्युच्यते | द्रव्यं पदार्थे मत्वा
सरूपाणामित्येकशेष अारभ्यते, M. Bh. in
I. 1. first Āhnika. In rules of
grammar the meaning of a word
is generally the vocal element or
the wording, as the science of
grammar deals with words and
their formation; cf. स्वं रूपं शब्दस्याशब्द-
संज्ञा, P. I. 1. 68. The possession of
vocal element as the sense is
technically termed शब्दपदार्थकता as
opposed to अर्थपदार्थकता; cf. सोसौ
गोशब्दः स्वस्मात्पदार्थात् प्रच्युतो यासौ अर्थपदा-
र्थकता तस्याः शब्दपदार्थकः संपद्यते M. Bh.
I. 1.44 V. 3. The word पदार्थ
means also the categories or the
predicaments in connection with
the different Śāstrās or lores as
for instance, the 25 categories in
the Sāmkhyaśāstra or 7 in the
Vaiśeșika system or 16 in the
NyayaŚāstra. The Vyākaranaśā-
stra, in this way to state, has only
one category the Akhandavākyas-
phota or the radical meaning
|
given by the sentence in one
stroke.
पद्मनाभ a grammarian who wrote a
treatise on grammar known as
the Supadma Vyākaraņa. He is
believed to have been an inhabi-
tant of Bengal who lived in the
fourteenth century A. D. Some
say that he was a resident of
Mithilā.
पद्य forming a part of a word or
pada; cf. उपोत्तमं नानुदात्तं न पद्यम् R.
Pr. I. 29; cf. also पूर्वपद्यः R. Pr. I.
30. The word is used in this
sense ( पदावयव ) mostly in the
Prātiśākhya works. The word is
used in the sense of पादसंपन्न, made
up of the feet (of verses), in the
Rk Prātiśākhya in contrast with
अक्षर्य, made up of syllables. In
this sense the word is derived
from the word पाद; cf. पद्याक्षर्ये स
उत्थितः R. Pr, XVIII. 3.
पर (l) subsequent,as opposed to पूर्व or
prior the word is frequently used
in grammar in connection with a
rule or an operation prescribed
later on in a grammar treatise; cf.
विप्रतिषेधे परं कार्यम् P. I. 4. 2; ( 2 )
occurring after ( something ); cf.
प्रत्ययः परश्च P. III. 1.1 and 2; cf.
also तत् परस्वरम् T.Pr. XXI.2.(3)The
word पर is sometimes explained
in the sense of इष्ट or desired,
possibly on the analogy of the
meaning श्रेष्ठ possessed by the word.
This sense is given to the word
पर in the rule विप्रातिषेधे परं कार्यं with
a view to apply it to earlier rules
in cases of emergency; cf. विप्रतिषेधे
परं यदिष्टं तद्भवति M.Bh. on I.1.3.Vārt,
6; परशब्दः इष्टवाची M.Bh. on I. 2.5,
I. 4.2. Vārt. 7; II. 1.69 etc.
परंकार्यत्व or परंकार्यत्वपक्ष the view that
the subsequent संज्ञा or technical
term should be preferred to the
|
prior one, when both happen to
apply simultaneously to a word.
The word is frequently used in the
Mahaabhaasya as referring to the
reading आ काडारात् परं कार्यम् which is
believed to have been an alterna-
tive reading to the reading अा
कडारादेका संज्ञा;cf. ननु च यस्यापि परंकार्यत्वं
तेनापि परग्रहणं कर्तव्यम्; M. Bh. on I.4.1;
also भवेदेकसंज्ञाधिकारे सिद्धम् | परंकार्यत्वे
तु न सिद्ध्यति: M.Bh. on II. 1.20, II.2.24.
परक्रम a term used in the Praatisaakhya
works for'doubling' of a consonant; |
cf. सान्तःस्थादौ धारयन्तः परक्रमम् | R. Pr.XIV. 23.
परग्रहण the use of the word पर;insertion
of the word पर in a rule; cf. तेनापि परग्रहणं कर्तव्यम् :
M.Bh. on I.4.1; cf. also परग्रहृणमनर्थकम्
M. Bh. on III. 1.2.
परत्व posteriority; mention afterwards;
the word is frequently used in works on grammar
in connection with a rule which is mentioned in
the treatise after another rule; the posterior
rule is looked upon as stronger than the prior one,
and is
given priority in application when the two rules come
in conflict although technically they are equally
strong: cf. परत्वादल्लोप: ; M. Bh. on I. 1.4 Vaart 7;
'परत्वाच्छीभाव: I. 1.11 etc.
परत्वन्याय application of the later rule before
the former one, according to the dictum laid down by
Paanini in the rule विप्रतिषेधे परं कार्यम्
P. I. 4.2 ; cf. परत्वन्यायो 'न लङ्कितो भवति
Sira. Pari. 84,
परनिपात lit.placing after; the placing
of a word in a compound after another as contrasted
with पूर्वनिपात . A subordinate word is generally
placed first in a compound, cf. उपसर्जनं पूर्वम्;
in some exceptional cases however, this general rule is
|
not observed as in the cases of राजदन्त and the like,
where the subordinate word is placed after
the principal word, and which
cases, hence, are taken as cases
of परनिपात. The words पूर्व and पर are
relative, and hence, the cases of
परनिपात with respect to the sub-
ordinate word ( उपसर्जन ) such as
राजद्न्त, प्राप्तजीविक etc. can be called
cases of पूर्वनिपात with respect to the
principal word ( प्रधान ) cf. परश्शता:
राजदन्तादित्वात्परनिपात: Kaas. on P. II.1.39.
परनिमित्तक caused by something
which follows; the term is used in
grammar in connection with some-
thing caused by what follows; cf.
परनिमित्तकोजादेश: पूर्वविधिं प्रति न स्थानिवत्
S. K, on अचः परस्मिन्पूर्वविधौ P.I.1.57.
परमप्रकृति the most original base; the
original of the original base; the
word is used in connection with a
base which is not a direct base to
which an affix is added, but which
is a remote base;cf. अापत्यो वा गेात्रम् |
परमप्रकृतश्च अापत्यः । M. Bh. on P.IV.1.89;
cf. also M. Bh. om IV.1.93,98,163.
परमाणु a time-unit equal to one-half
of the unit called अणु, which forms
one-half of the unit called मात्रा
which is required for the purpose
of the utterance of a consonant;
cf. परमाणु अर्धाणुमात्रा V. Pr.I.61. परमाणु,
in short, is the duration of very
infinitesimal time equal to the
pause between two individual
continuous sounds. The interval
between the utterances of two
consecutive consonants is given to
be equivalent to one Paramanu;
cf. वर्णान्तरं परमाणु R.T.34.
पररूप the form of the subsequent
letter (परस्य रूपम्). The word is used
in grammar when the resultant of
the two coalescing vowels ( एकादेश )
|
is the latter vowel itself, as for
instance ए in प्रेजते ( प्र+एजते ); cf.
एङि. पररूपम् P.VI.1.94.
परवल्लिङ्गता possession of the gender of
the final member of a compound word, which,
in tatpurusa compounds, is the second of the two or
the 1ast out of many; cf. परवल्लिङ्गद्वन्द्वतत्पुरुषयो:
(P. II.4 26) इति परवाल्लिङ्गता यथा स्यात् M. Bh. on P.V.4.68.
परविप्रतिषेध the conflict between two
rules (by occurrence together)
when the latter prevails over the
former and takes place by. Virtue
of the dictum विप्रतिषेधे परं कार्यम् P.I. 4.2;
cf. कथं ये परविप्रतिषेधाः M.Bh. on I.4.2.
परसप्तमी a locative case in the sense
of 'what follows', as contrasted
with विषयसप्तमी, अधिकरणसप्तमी and the
like; cf. लुकीति नैषा परसप्तमी शक्या विज्ञातुं
न हि लुका पौर्वापर्यमस्ति । का तर्हि । सत्सप्तमी
M.Bh. on P.I.2. 49.
परसवर्ण cognate of the latter vowel
or consonant. The word is frequently used
in grammar in connection with a substitute
or आदेश which is specified to be cognate
( सवर्ण ) of the succeeding vowel or
consonant: cf. अनुस्वरस्य यथि परसवर्ण: P.VIII. 4. 58.
परस्परव्यपेक्षा mutual expectancy
possessed by two words, which is
called सामर्थ्र्य in grammar. Such an
expectancy is necessary between
the two or more words which form
a compound: cf. परस्परव्यपेक्षां सामर्थ्र्यमेके
P.II.1.1, V.4; cf. also इह राज्ञ: पुरुष
इत्युक्ते राजा पुरुषमपेक्षते ममायमिति पुरुषोपि
राजानमपेक्षते अहृमस्य इति | M.Bh. om II.1.1.
परस्मैपद a term used in grammar
with reference to the personal affixs
ति, त: etc. applied to roots. The
term परस्मैपद is given to the first
nine afixes ति, त:, अन्ति, सि, थ:, थ,
|
मि, व: and म:,
while the term आत्मनेपद is used in
connection with the next nine त, आताम् etc.;
cf. परस्मै परोद्देशार्थफलकं पदम् Vac. Kosa. The
term परस्मैपद is explained by some
as representing the Active_Voice
as contrasted with the Passive
Voice which necessarily is characterized
by the Aatmanepada affixes.
The term परस्मैभाष in the sense of
परस्मैपद was used by ancient grammarians
and is also found in the Vaarttika
अात्मनेभाषपस्मैभाषयोरुपसंख्यानम्
P. VI. 3.8 Vart.1 . The term
परस्मैभाष as applied to roots, could
be explained as परस्मै क्रियां (or क्रियाफलं)
भाषन्ते इति परस्मैभाषाः and originally
such roots as had their activity
meant for another, used to take
the परस्मैपद् affixes, while the rest
which had the activity meant for
self, took the अात्मनेपद affixes. Roots
having activity for both, took both
the terminations and were termed
उभयपदिनः.
परस्मैभाष lit. speaking the activity or
क्रिया for another; a term of ancient
grammarians for roots taking the
first nine personal affixes only viz.
ति, तः... मसू. The term परस्मैपदिन् was
substituted for परस्मैभाष later on,more
commonly. See परस्मैपद above. The
term परस्मैभाष along with अात्मनेभाष is
found almost invariably used in the
Dhaatupaatha attributed to Paanini;
cf. भू सत्तायाम् | उदात्त: परस्मैभाषः | एघादय
उदात्त अनुदात्तेत अात्मनभाषा: Dhatupatha.
परा the highest eternal voice or
word, the highest and the most
lofty of the our divisions of
language (वाक), viz. परा,पश्यन्ती, मध्यमा
and वैखरी, which, (परा), philosophically
is identified with नाद ( व्रह्म )
or शब्दब्रह्म . It is described as
वर्णादि -विशेषरहिता चेतनमिश्रा सृष्ट्युपयोगिनी जगदुपादानभूता
कुण्डलिनीरूपेण प्राणिनां मूलाधारे वर्तते |
|
कुण्डलिन्याः प्राणवायुसंयोगे परा व्यज्यते | इयं
निःष्पन्दा पश्यन्त्यादयः सस्पन्दा अस्या विवर्तः ।
इयमेव सूक्ष्मस्फोट इत्युच्यते ।
पराङ्गवद्भाव behaviour as having be-
come a part and parcel of another ;
treatment of a word as a part of
another. The term is used by
Panini in connection with a word
followed by and connected with a
word in the vocative case of which
it is looked upon as a part for
purposes of accent, e. g. कुण्डेनाटन् ,
मद्राणां राजन् etc. Here the words अटन्
and राजन् , being in the vocative
case, are अाद्युदात्त, i.e. अ ( at the
beginning of अटन्) and अा (in राजन्)
are acute and as a result all the
other vowels in कुण्डेनाटन् and मद्राणां
राजन् become अनुदात्त or grave; cf.
सुबामन्त्रिते पराङ्गवत्स्वरे P.II.1.2.
परादि initial or first of the next or
succeeding word; cf. किं पुनरयं पूर्वान्त
आहोस्वित्परादि: आहोस्त्रिदभक्त: M.Bh on
P. I. 1.47 Vart. 3; cf. also M. Bh.
on IV.1.87, IV.2. 91.
परादिसस्वर a consonant belonging to
the succeeding vowel in sylllabication;
cf. R.Pr.I.15.
परार्थ (1) the sense of another word;
cf. परार्थाभिधानं वृत्तिः इत्याहुः । M.Bh. on
II.1.1,Vart.2; (2) for the sake of,or
being of use in,the next (सूत्र);cf.परार्थे
मम भविष्यति सन्यत इद्भवतीति, M. Bh. on
I.1.59 Vart. 8.
परिकृष्ट dragged to the latter: cf.
Puspasūtra III. 114; the word परि
stands for पर here.
परिक्रम the same as परक्रम; doubling
(द्वित्व ) of a subsequent consonant
as for example the doubling of स्
in इर्मन् स्स्याम ; cf. सान्त:स्थादौ धारयन्तः
परक्रमं (v. I. परिक्रमं) R.Pr. XIV. 23.
परिगणन lit. enumeration. The word
is used in grammar treatises in the
sense of a definite or complete
|
enumeration' with a view to ex-
clude those that are not included
in the enumeration : cf परिगणनं
कर्तव्यम् | यङ्यक्यवलोपे प्रतिषेधः M.Bh. on
I.1.4 Vaart. 1.
परिग्रह also परिग्रहण. (1) acceptance, in-
clusion; cf. किं प्रयोजनम् | प्रत्ययार्थे
परिग्रहार्थम् M.Bh. on P.III.26.1 ; (2)
repetition of a Samhita word in the
Pada recital, technically named
वेष्टक also; repetition of a word with
इति interposed; e. g. सुप्राव्या इति सुप्रऽ
अव्या: Rg Veda II.13.9, अलला भवन्ती-
रित्यललाSभवन्तीः Rg. IV.18.6; cf. परिग्रहे-
त्वनार्षान्तात् तेन वैकाक्षरीक्तात् | परेषां न्यास-माचारं
व्यालिस्तौ चेत्स्वरौ परौ; R. Pr. III.
14. cf. also, R.Pr.XI.32,36,42.
परिनिष्ठित completely formed; with
the formation completely achieved;
स्वार्थे परिपूर्णम्; cf. परिनिष्ठितस्य पदान्तरसंबन्धे
हुि गौर्वाहीक इत्यादौ गौणत्वप्रतीतिर्न तु प्रातिपदि-
कसंस्कारवेलायाम् Par. Sek. on Pari. 15.
परिपन्न a kind of Samdhi or coale-
scence characterized by the change
of the consonant म् into an anu-
svara, as by मोनुस्वारः P. VIII. 3.23,
before a sibilant or before रेफ; cf.
रेफोष्मणोरुदययोर्मकारः अनुस्वारं तत् परिपन्नमाहुः
R.Pr.IV.5; cf. also सम्राट्शब्द: परिसं-
पन्नापवाद: R.Pr.IV.7.
परिभाषा an authoritative statement or
dictum, helping (1) the correct
interpretation of the rules (sūtras)
of grammar, or (2) the removal of
conflict between two rules which
occur simultaneously in the process
of the formation of words, (पदसिद्धि),
or (3) the formation of correct
words. Various definitions of the
word परिभाषा are given by commen-
tators, the prominent ones being-
परितो व्यापृतां भाषां परिभाषां प्रचक्षते(न्यास);or,
परितो भाष्यते या सा परिभाषा प्रकीर्तिता. The
word is also defined as विधौ नियामक-
रिणी परिभाषा ( दुर्गसिंहवृत्ति ). परिभाषा can
also be briefiy defined as the
|
convention of a standard author.
Purusottamadeva applies the word
परिभाषा to the maxims of standard
writers, cf. परिभाषा हिं न पाणिनीयानि
वचनानि; Puru. Pari. 119; while
Haribhaskara at the end of his
treatise परिभाषाभास्कर, states that
Vyaadi was the first writer on
Paribhaasas. The rules तस्मिन्निति निर्दिष्टे
पूर्वस्य, तस्मादित्युत्तरस्य and others are in
fact Paribhaasa rules laid down by
Panini. For the difference between
परिभाषा and अधिकार, see Mahabhasya
on II.1.1. Many times the writers
of Sutras lay down certain conven-
tions for the proper interpretation
of their rules, to which additions
are made in course of time accor-
ding to necessities that arise, by
commentators. In the different
systems of grammar there are
different collections of Paribhasas.
In Panini's system, apart from
commentaries thereon, there are
independent collections of Pari-
bhasas by Vyadi, Bhojadeva,
Purusottamadeva, Siradeva, Nila-
kantha, Haribhaskara, Nagesa and
a few others. There are inde-
pendent collections of Pari-
bhasas in the Katantra, Cand-
ra, Sakatayana,Jainendra and He-
macandra systems of grammar.
It is a noticeable fact that many Paribhasas
are common, with their wordings quite similar or
sometimes identical in the different systems.
Generally the collections of Paribhasas have got
scholiums or commentaries by recognised grammarians,
which in their turn have sometimes other glosses or
commentaries upon them. The Paribhaasendusekhara
of Nagesa is an authoritative work of an outstanding
merit in the system of Paninis Grammar, which is
|
commented upon by more than
twenty five scholars during the last
two or three centuries. The total
number of Paribhasas in the difer-
ent systems of grammar may well-
nigh exceed 500. See परिभाषासंग्रह.
परिभाषाप्रकाशा an independent trea-
tise explaining the various Pari-
bhasas in the system of Panini's
grammar, written by Visnusesa of
the famous SeSa family.
परिभाषाप्रदीपार्चिस् a scholarly inde-
pendent treatise on Vyakarana
Paribhasas written by Udayamkara
Pathaka, called also Nana Pathaka,
a Nagara Brahmana, who lived at Benares in the
middle of the 18th century A. D.
He has also written commenta-
ries on the two Sekharas of
Naagesa.
परिभाषाभास्कर (1) a treatise on the
Paribhasas in Panini's grammar
written by Haribhaskara Agni-
hotri, son of Appajibhatta Agni-
hotri, who lived in the seventeenth century : (2) a treatise on Panini-
paribhasas, as arranged by Sira-
deva, written by Sesadrisuddhi,
परिभाषार्थसंग्रहृ a treatise on the Paribhasas in the system of Panini's grammar written by Vaidyanatha
Sastrin.
परिभाषावृत्ति a general name given to
an explanatory independent work
on Paribhasas of the type of a
gloss on a collection of Pari-
bhasas,irrespective of the system
of grammar, whether it be that
of Panini, or of Katantra, or of
Jainendra or of Hemacandra. The
treatises of Vyadi (Panini system),
Durgasimha and BhavamiSra
(Katantra system), Purusottama-
deva and Siradeva (Panini system),
|
परिभाषावृत्तिटिप्पणी परिभाषेन्दुशेखर 225
Abhyankar (Jainendra system)
and others are all known by the
name Paribhasavritti.
परिभाषावृत्तिटिप्पणी a very brief comm-
entary on the Paribhasavrtti of
Siradeva written by Srimanasarman
of Campahatti.
परिभाषावृत्तिटीका a commentary on
the Paribhasavrtti of Siradeva
written by Ramabhadra Diksita
who lived in the seventeenth
century A. D.
परिभाषासेग्रह' a work containing a
collection of independent works on
Paribhasas in the several systems
of Sanskrit Grammar, compiled
by M. M. K. V. Abhyankar.
The collectlon consists of the
following works (i) परिभाषासूचन con-
taining 93 Paribhasas with a
commentary by Vyadi, an ancient
grammarian who lived before
Patanjali; ( ii ) ब्याडीयपरिभाषापाठ, a
bare text of 140 Paribhaasaas be-
longing to the school of Vyadi
(iii) शाकटायनपरिभाषासूत्र a text of 98
Paribhasa aphorisms, attributed
to the ancient grammarian Saka-tayana,
or belonging to that school;
[iv) चान्द्रपरिभाषासूत्र a text of 86
Paribhasa aphorisms given at the
end of his grammar work by Candragomin;
(v) कातन्त्रपरिभाषासूत्रवृत्ति a
gloss on 65 Paribhas aphorisms of
the Katantra school by Durgasimha;
(vi) कातन्त्रपारभाषासूत्रवृत्ति a short gloss
on 62 Paribhasa aphorisms of the
Katantra school by Bhavamisra;
(vii) कातन्त्रपरिभाषासूत्र a text of 96
Paribhasa rules belonging to the
Katantra school without any
author's name associated with it;
(viii) कालापपरिभाषासूत्र a text of
118 Paribhasa rules belonging
to the Kalapa school without any
author's name associated with it;
(ix) जैनेन्द्रपरिभाषावृत्ति a gloss written
29
|
by M. M. K. V. Abhyankar ( the
compiler of the collection), on 108
Paribhasas or maxims noticeable in
the Mahavrtti of Abhayanandin on
the Jainendra Vyakarana of Pujya-
pada Devanandin; (x) भोजदेवकृतपरि-भाषासूत्र
a text of 118 Paribhasa rules
given by Bhoja in the second pada
of the first adhyaaya of his grammar
work named Sarasvatikanthabha-
rana; (xi) न्यायसंग्रह a bare text of
140 paribhasas(which are called by
the name nyaya) given by Hema-hamsagani in his paribhasa.work named न्यायसंग्रह; (xii) लधुपरिभाषावृत्ति
a gloss on 120 Paribhasas of the
Panini school written by Puruso-ttamadeva; (xiii) वृहत्परिभाषावृत्ति con-taining 130 Paribhasas with a
commentary by Siradeva and a very short,gloss on the commentary by Srimanasarman ( xiv )
परिभाषावृत्ति a short gloss on 140 Paribhasas of the Panini school written by Nilakantha; (xv) परिभाषाभास्कर a
collection of 132 Paribhasas with
a commentary by Haribhaskara Agnihotri; (xvi) bare text of Paribhasa given and explained by
Nagesabhatta in his Paribhasendusekhara. The total number of Paribhasas mentioned and treated
in the whole collection exceeds five hundred.
परिभाषासूचन an old work on the
Paribhasas in the system of Panini's Grammar, believed to have been written by Vyaadi, who
lived after Kaatyayana and before
Patanjali. The work is written in the old style of the Mahabha-
Sya and consists of a short commentary on 93 Paribhasas.
परिभाषेन्दुशेखर the reputed authoritative work on the Paribhasas in the system of Paanini's grammar
written by Nagesabhatta in the
|
beginning of the 18th century
A.D. at Benares. The work is
studied very widely and has got
more than 25 commentaries
written by pupils in the spiritual
line of Nagesa. Well-known among
these commentaries are those
written by Vaidyanatha Paya-
gunde ( called गदा ), by Bhaira-
vamiSra ( called मिश्री), by Ragha-
vendraacaarya Gajendragadakara
( called त्रिपथगा ), by Govinda-
carya
Astaputre of Poona in the
beginning of the nineteenth century
(called भावार्थदीपिका), by Bha-
skaraSastri Abhyankar of Satara
(called भास्करी ), and by M. M.
Vaasudevasaastri Abhyankar of
Poona (called तत्त्वादर्श ). Besides
these, there are commentaries
written by Taatya Sastri Pata-
wardhana,Ganapati Sastri Mo-
kaate, Jayadeva Misra, Visnu-
Sastri Bhat, Vishwanatha Dan-
dibhatta, Harinaatha Dwiwedi
Gopaalacarya Karhaadkar, Hari-
shastri Bhagawata,
Govinda Shastri Bharadwaja, Naarayana Shastri
Galagali, Venumaadhava Shukla,
Brahmaananda Saraswati, ManisiSe-
SaSarma,Manyudeva, Samkara-
bhatta, Indirapati, Bhimacarya
Galagali, Madhavacarya Waikaar,
Cidrupasraya, Bhimabhatta, Lak-
Sminrsimha and a few others.
Some of these works are named by their authors as Tikaas, others as Vyaakhyaas and still others as Tippanis or Vivrtis.
परिमल a work on Grammar attri-
buted to Amaracandra.
परिमाण a word used by Panini in
तदस्य परिमाणम् V.1.19 and explained
by Patanjali as सर्वतो मानम् .Samkhya
( number ) is also said to be
a parimana. Parimana is of two
kinds- नियत or definite as in the
|
case of Khaari, drona etc; and अनियत,
as in the case of Gana, Samgha,
PUga, Sartha, Sena etc. The term
परिमाण, in connection with the
utterance of letters, is used in the
sense of मात्राकाल or one mora.
परिलोप elision ofa phonetic member:
the same as lopa in the Grammar
of Panini. The term परिलोप and
the verbal forms of the root परिलुप्
are found in the Pratisakhya works;
cf. उष्मा परिलुप्यते त्रयाणाम् R. Pr. II. 4.
परिवर्तन reversion in the order of
words as found in the recital of
the Veda at the time of the recital
of जटा, घन and other artificial types
of recitations.
परिसंख्यान lit. enumeration; enuncia-
tion;mention ; the word is found
generally used by Katyayana and
other Varttikakaras at the end of
their Varttikas. The words वक्तव्यम्,
वाच्यम् , and the like, are similarly
used.
परिसमाप्ति application of the complete
sense; the word is found used in
the three alternative views about
the application of the full sense of
a sentence,- collectively, in-
dividually or in both the ways, to
the individuals concerned ; cf.प्रत्येकं
वाक्यपरिसमाप्ति:, समुदाये वाक्यपरिसमाप्तिः,
उभयथा वाक्यपरिसमाप्तिः ; cf. M. Bh. I.
1.1 Vart- 12; ( 2 ) completion ; cf.
वृत्करणं ल्वादीनां प्वादीनां च परिसमाप्त्यर्थमिति
Kas. on VII. 3.80.
परिहार (1) removal of a difficulty, cf.
अन्यथा कृत्वा चोदितमन्यथा कृत्वा परिहारं: M. Bh.
on P. IV. 1.7. Vart. 3: (2)
repetition in the Padapatha, Kra-
mapatha etc. e. g अकरित्यक:. In
this sense the word is found in the
neuter gender ; cf. रेफपरिहाराणि A. Pr.
III. 1.1.
परोक्ष used as an adjective of the
word भूत meaning 'past tense'; lit.
|
behind the eyes, unnoticed by the
eyes. The word is generally used in
the sense of remote or long (past)
or 'perfect'. For the alternative
explanation of the word परोक्ष, cf.
कथंजातीयकं पुनः परोक्षं नाम । केचित्तावदाहुः
वर्षशतवृत्तं परोक्षमिति । अपर आहुः क्रटान्तरितं
परोक्षमिति । अपर आहुर्ह्याहवृत्तं त्र्यहंर्वृत्तं चेति ।
M.Bh. on परोक्षे लिट् P. III.2.115.
परोक्षा lit. behind the eyes; remote; ।
the term is found used by ancient
grammarians and also referred to
in the Mahaabhaasya as referring to
the perfect tense called लिट् in
Paanini's grammar: cf. ज्ञापकात्परोक्षायां
( लिटि ) न भविष्यति । M.Bh. on P. I.
2.28: cf. also न व्यथते: परोक्षायाम् Kaat.
III.4.21.
पर्जन्यवल्लक्षणप्रवृत्ति the application of
a grammatical rule or operation
like the rains which occur on dry
land as also on the sea surface: cf.
कृतकारि खल्वपि शास्त्रं पर्जन्यवत् । तद्यथा ।
पर्जन्यो यावदूनं पूर्णे च सर्वमभिवर्षति । M.Bh.
on P.I. 1.29 ; VI. 1.127: cf also
यथा पर्जन्यः यावदूनं पूर्णे वाभिवर्षति एवं
लक्षणमपि दीर्घस्य दीर्घत्वम् । चिचीषति, बुभूषति।
Vyaadi. Pari. 58, cf. कृतकारि शास्त्रं
मेघवत् न चाकृतकारि दहनवत् Puruso. Pari.
86.
पर्पादि a class of words headed by
the word पर्प to which the tad.
affix इक (ष्ठन्) is added in the sense
of ’moving by' or eating along
with' ( तेन चरति ); e.g. पर्पिकः, पर्पिकी;
अश्विकः, अश्विकी etc.; cf. Kaas. on P.
IV.4.10.
पर्याय (l) serial order or succession as
opposed to simultaniety ; the word
is used in grammar in connection
with a rule which, as the objector
for the sake of argument, would
like to hold and would apply by
succession with respect to the rule
in conflict, either before it or
after it i.e. alternatively; cf. पर्यायः
|
प्रसज्येत often found used in the
Mahabhaasya as for example on
I.4.1 etc.: cf. also तृजादयः पर्यायेण
भवन्ति M.Bh. on P. I. 4.2. Vaart. 3;
( 2 ) alternative word,. synonym;
cf. अभिज्ञावचने लृट् । वचनग्रहणं पर्यायार्थम् ।
अभिजानासि स्मरसि बुध्यसे चेतयसे इति ।
Kaas. on P. III.2.112.
पर्यायवचन synonym, synonymous
word: cf. जित् पर्यायवचनत्यैव राजाद्यर्थम् ।
इनसभम् । ईश्वरसभम् M.Bh. on I.1.68;
cf. also यदयं कस्यचित्पर्यायवचनस्य ग्रहणं
करोति । अधिपतिदायादेति M. Bh. on
II. 3.9.
पर्युदास (1) exclusion; negation with a
view to exclude; one of the two
senses ( प्रसज्यप्रतिषेध and पर्युदास ) of
the negative particle नञ्, generally
found in cases when the particle
नञ् is compounded with a noun,
and not used independently with
a verbal form or a verbal activity ;
e. g. अब्राह्मणः; अनचि च ; cf. अन-
पुंसकात् । नायं प्रसज्यप्रतिषेधो नपुंसकस्य नेति ।
किं तर्हि । पर्युदासोयं यदन्यन्नपुंसकादिति । M.
Bh. on I.1.43: cf also प्रसज्यप्रतिषेधः
स्यात् क्रियया सह यत्र नञ् । पयुदास: स
विज्ञेयो यत्रोत्तरपदेन नञ् ॥ (2) removal
in general, not by the use of a
negative particle: cf. पाठात्पर्युदासः
कर्तव्यः । शुद्धानां पठितानां संज्ञाः कर्तव्या ।
M. Bh. on I. 1.27 Vaart. 3.
पर्वन् word, pada; lit. member of a
sentence; the word is found used
in the sense of पद in the old Pra-
tisaakhya Literature: cf. अन्तरेण पर्वणी ।
पर्वशबेदन पदमुच्यते । पदयोर्मध्ये पद अागमो
भवति । यथा प्राङ्कसोमः, प्राङ्क्सोम: । Uvvata
on V. Pr. I. 138.
पर्श्वादि a class of words headed by
the word पर्शु to which the tad.
affix अ ( अण् ) is added without
any change of sense provided the
words पर्शु and others, to which
the affix अ is to be added mean
fighting clans; e. g. पार्शव , आसुरः,
|
राक्षसः, दाशार्हः etc. cf. Kaas. on
V. 3.117.
पलद्यादि a class of words headed
by the word पलदी to which the
tad. affix अण् is applied in the
miscellaneous ( शैषिक) senses; e g-
पालदः, पारिषदः, रौमकः; पाटच्चरः etc. cf.
Kaas, on P. IV. 2.110.
पलाशादि a class of words headed by
the word पलाश to which the affix
अ (अञ् ) is added in the sense of
'a product of' or 'a part of;' e. g.
पालाशः, खादिरः, वैकङ्कतः etc. cf Kaas.
on P. IV. 3.141.
पश्यन्ती name of the second out of
the four successive stages in the
origination or utterance of a
word from the mouth. Accord-
ing to the ancient writers on
Phonetics, sound or word ( वाक् )
which is constituted of air ( वायु )
originates at the Mulaadhaaracakra
where it is called परा. It then
springs up and it is called पश्यन्ती
in the second stage. Thence it
comes up and is called मध्यमा in
the third stage; rising up from the
third stage when the air strikes
against the vocal chords in the
glottis and comes in contact with
the different parts of the mouth,
it becomes articulate and is heard
in the form of different sounds.
when it is called वैखरी; cf. वैखर्या
मध्यमायाश्च पश्यन्त्याश्चैतदद्भुतम् । अनेकतीर्थ-
भेदायास्त्रय्या वाचः परं पदम् Vaakyapadiya
I. 144, and also cf. पश्यन्ती तु सा
चलाचलप्रतिबद्धसमाधाना संनिविष्टज्ञेयाकारा
प्रतिलीनाकारा निराकारा च परिच्छिन्नार्थप्रत्ययव-
भासा संसृष्टार्थप्रत्यवभासा च प्रशान्तसर्वार्थ-
प्रत्यवभासा चेत्यपरिमितभेदा । पश्यन्त्या रूप-
मनपभ्रंशामसंकीर्ण लोकव्यवह्यरातीतम् । com.
on Vaakyapadiya I. 144. cf. also
तत्र श्रोत्रविषया वैखरी । मध्यमा हृदयदशेस्था
पदप्रत्यक्षानुपपत्त्या व्यवहारकारणम् । पश्यन्ती
तु लोकव्यवहारातीता। योगिनां तु तत्रापि
|
प्रकृतिप्रत्ययविभागावगतिरस्ति | परायां तु न इति
त्रय्या इत्युक्तम् । Uddyota on चत्वारि
वाक्परिमिता पदानि । M. Bh. Ahnika 1.
पस्पशा called also पस्पशाह्निक; name
given to the first or introductory
chapter ( अाह्निक ) of the Maaha-
bhaasya of Patanjali. The word
occurs first in the SiSupaalavadha of
Maagha. The word is derived from
पस्पश् , the frequentative base of स्पर्श
to touch or to see (ancient use).
Possibly it may be explained as
derived from स्पश् with अप; cf . शब्द-
बिद्येव नो भाति राजनीतिरपस्पशा Sis.II.112.
Mallinatha has understood the
word पस्पश m. and explained it as
introduction to a Saastra treatise;
cf. पस्पशः शास्त्रारम्भसमर्थक उपेद्वातसंदर्भग्रन्थः ।
Mallinaatha on SiS. II.112.
पाकवती a word used in the Siksa
works for a kind of pause or hiatus.
पाक्षिक alternative; occurring option-
ally or alternatively; cf. पाक्षिक एष
दोषः M. Bh. on II.3.46 Vaart. 8; VI.
1.6I Vart. 4, cf. also पाक्षिक एक्श्रुत्य-
विधिर्भवति Kaas. on P. I.2.36.
पाञ्चमिक lit.pertaining to the fifth;
name given to the affixes prescrib-
ed in the fifth Adhyaya of Paanini's
Astadhyayi, especially in Sutras
V.2.1 to W.2.93.
पाठ (1) recital of a sacred Vedic
or Sastra work; the original reci-
tal of an authoritative text;(2) the
various artificial ways or methods
of such a recital; c.g. पदपाठ, क्रमपाठ
etc. in the case of Vedic Literature:
(3) an original recital such as the
सुत्रपाठ, धातुपाठ, गणपाठ, वार्तिकपाठ and
परिभाषापाठ in the case of the several
systems of Sanskrit Grammar; the
five Paathas are called पञ्चपाठी; (4)
recitation; cf. नान्तरेण पाठं स्वरा अनुबन्धा
वा शक्या विज्ञातुम् M. Bh. on P.I.3.1
Vaart. 13; (5) reading, variant: cf.
|
चूर्णादीनि अप्राण्युपग्रहादिति सूत्रस्य पाठान्तरम्
Kaas. on P.V.2.134.
पाठक or उदयंकरपाठक name of a scholar
of Sanskrit Grammar who wrote
an independent work on Pari-
bhaasaas and commentaries on the
ParibhaaSendusekhara and Laghu-
5abdendusekhara. See उदयंकर and
परिभाषाप्रदीपार्चिस्.
पाठकी name popularly given to the
commentaries written byउदयंकरपाठक.
See पाठक.
पाणिनि the illustrious ancient gra-
mmarian of India who is well-
known by his magnum opus, the
Astaka or Astaadhyaayi which has
maintained its position as a unique
work on Sanskrit grammar un-
paralleled upto the present day by
any other work on grammar, not
only of the Sanskrit language, but
ofany other language, classical as
well as spoken. His mighty inte-
lligence grasped, studied and
digested not only the niceties of
accentuation and formation of
Vedic words, scattered in the vast
Vedic Literature of his time, but
those of classical words in the
classical literature and the spoken
Sanskrit language of his time in
all its different aspects and shades,
noticeable in the various provin-
ces and districts of the vast coun-
try. The result of his careful study
of the Vedic Literature and close
observation of.the classical Sanskrit,
which was a spoken language in
his days, was the production of the
wonderful and monumental work,
the Astaadhyaayi,which gives an auth-
oritative description of the Sanskrit
language, to have a complete ex-
position of which,several life times
have to be spent,in spite of several
commentaries upon it, written
|
from time to time by several dis-
tinguished scholars. The work is a
linguist's and not a language
teacher's. Some Western scholars
have described it as a wonderful
specimen of human intelligence,or
as a notable manifestation of
human intelligence. Very little is
known unfortunately about his
native place,parentage or personal
history. The account given about
these in the Kathaasaritsaagara and
other books is only legendary and
hence, it has very little historical
value. The internal evidence,
supplied by his work shows that
he lived in the sixth or the seventh
century B. C., if not earlier,
in the north western province of
India of those days. Jinendra-
buddhi, the author of the
Kaasikavivaranapanjikaa or Nyasa,
has stated that the word शलातुर्
mentioned by him in his sUtra
( IV. 3.94 ) refers to his native
place and the word शालातुरीय deriv-
ed by him from the word शलातुर
by that sUtra was, in fact his own
name, based upon the name of
the town which formed his native
place. Paanini has shown in his
work his close knowledge of, and
familiarity with, the names of
towns, villages, districts, rivers and
mountains in and near Vaahika,
the north-western Punjab of the
present day, and it is very likely
that he was educated at the
ancient University of Taksasilaa.
Apart from the authors of the
Pratisaakhya works, which in a way
could be styled as grammar works,
there were scholars of grammar
as such, who preceded him and
out of whom he has mentioned
ten viz., Apisali, Saakataayana,
Gaargya, Saakalya, Kaasyapa, Bha- .
|
पाणिनिसूत्र पाणिनिसूत्रवार्तिक 230
radwaja, Gaalava, Caakravarmana
Senaka and Sphotaayana. The
grammarian Indra has not been
mentioned by Paanini, although
tradition says that he was the first
grammarian of the Sanskrit
language. It is very likely that
Paanini had no grammar work of
Indra before him, but at the same
time it can be said that the works
of some grammarians , mentioned
by Panini such as Saakaatyana,
Apisali, Gaargya and others had
been based on the work of Indra.
The mention of several ganas as
also the exhaustive enumeration
of all the two thousand and two
hundred roots in the Dhaatupaatha
can very well testify to the ex-
istence of systematic grammatical
works before Paarnini of which he
has made a thorough study and a
careful use in the composition of
his Ganapaatha and Dhaatupatha.
His exhaustive grammar of a rich
language like Sanskrit has not
only remained superb in spite of
several other grammars of the
language written subsequently,
but its careful study is felt as a
supreme necessity by scholars of
philology and linguistics of the
present day for doing any real
work in the vast field of linguistic
research. For details see pp.151-
154 Vol. VII of Paatanjala Mahaa-
bhsya, D. E. Society's Edition.
पाणिनिसूत्र called also by the name
अष्टक or पाणिनीय-अष्टक; name given to
the SUtras of Paanini comprising
eight adhyaayaas or books. The total
number of SUtras as commented
upon by the writers of the Kasika
and the Siddhaantakaumudi is 3983.
As nine sUtras out of these are
described as Vaarttikas and two as
Ganasutras by Patanjali, it is
|
evident that there were 3972
SUtras in the Astaka of Paanini
according to Patanjali. A verse
current among Vaiyakarana
schools states the number to be
3996; cf. त्रीणि सूत्रसहस्राणि तथा नव शतानि
च । षण्णवतिश्च सूत्राणां पाणिनिः कृतवान्
स्वयम् । The traditional recital by
Veda Scholars who look upon the
Astadhyayi as a Vedaanga, consists
of 3983 Sutras which are accepted
and commented upon by all later
grammarians and commentators.
The SUtras of Paanini, which mainly
aim at the correct formation of
words, discuss declension, conjuga-
tion, euphonic changes, verbal
derivatives, noun derivatives and
accents. For details see Vol.VII,
Vyaakarana Mahaabhaasya, D. E.
Society's edition pp. 152-162.
पाणिनिसूत्रवार्तिक name given to the
collection of explanatory pithy
notes of the type of SUtras written.
mainly by Kaatyaayana. The Var-
ttikas are generally written in the
style of the SUtras, but sometimes
they are written in Verse also.
The total number of Varttikas is
well-nigh above 5000, including
Varttikas in Verse.There are three
kinds of Varttikas; cf.उक्तानुक्तदुरुक्तानां
चिन्ता यत्र प्रवर्तते । तं ग्रन्थं वार्तिकं प्राहुर्वार्तिकज्ञा
मनीषिणः । Naagesa appears to have
divided Varttikas into two classes
as shown by his definition 'सूत्रेऽ
नुक्तदुरुक्तचिन्ताकरत्वं वार्तिकत्वम् '. If this
definition be followed, many of the
Vaarttikas given in the Maahibhaasya
as explaining and commenting
upon the Sutras will not strictly
be termed as Vaarttikaas, and their
total number which is given as
exceeding 5000, will be reduced
to about 1400 or so. There are
some manuscript copies which
give this reduced number, and it
|
पाणिनिसूत्रवृत्ति पात्रेसमितादि 231
may be said that only these Vārtti-
kas were written by Kātyāyana
while the others were added by
learned grammarians after Kātyā-
yana. In the Mahābhāșya there are
seen more than 5000 statements
of the type of Vārttikas out of
which Dr. Kielhorn has marked
about 4200 as Vārttikas. At some
places the Mahābhāșyakāra has
quoted the names of the authors
of some Vārttikas or their schools,
in words such as क्रोष्ट्रीयाः पठन्ति,
भारद्वाजीयाः पठन्ति, सौनागाः पठन्ति. etc.
Many of the Vārttikas given in the
Mahābhāșya are not seen in the
Kāśikāvŗtti, while some more are
seen in the Kāśikā-vŗtti, which,
evidently are composed by scholars
who flourished after Patańjali,
as they have not been noticed by
the Mahābhāșyakāra. It is very
difficult to show separately the
statements of the Bhāșyakāra popu-
larly named 'ișțis' from the Vārtti-
kas of Kātyāyana and others. For
details see Vol. VII Mahābhāșya,
D.E. Society's edition pp. 193-224.
पाणिनिसूत्रवृत्ति a gloss on the gram-
mer rules of Pāņini. Many glosses
were written from time to time on
the Sûtras of Pāņini, out of which
the most important and the oldest
one is the one named Kāśikāvŗtti,
written by the joint authors Jayā-
ditya and Vāmana in the 7th
century A.D. It is believed that
the Kāśikāvŗtti was based upon
some old Vŗttis said to have been
written by कुणि, निर्लूर, चुल्लि, श्वोभूति,
वररुचि and others.Besides Kāśikā,the
famous Vŗtti, and those of कुणि,निर्लूर
and others which are only report-
ed, there are other Vŗttis which
are comparatively modern. Some
of them have been printed, while
others have remained only in
|
manuscript form. Some of these
are : the Bhāșāvŗtti by Puruso-
ttamadeva, Vyākaranasudhānidhi
by Viśveśvara, Gūdhārthadīpinī
by Sadāsivamiśra, Sūtravŗtti by
Annambhatta, Vaiyākaraņasarvasva
by Dharaņīdhara, Śabdabhūșaņa
by Nārāyaņa Paņdita, Pāņini-
sūtravŗtti by Rāmacandrabhațța
Tāre and Vyākaranadīpikā by
Orambhațța. There are extracts
available from a Sūtravŗtti called
Bhāgavŗtti which is ascribed to
Bhartŗhari, but, which is evident-
ly written by a later writer
(विमलमति according to some scho-
lars) as there are found verses from
Bhāravi and Māgha quoted in it as
noticed by Sīradeva in his vŗtti on
Pari.76. Glosses based upon Pāņini
Sūtras, but having a topical arran-
gements are also available, the
famous ones among these being
the Praķriyākaumudī by Rāma-
candra Śeșa and the Siddhānta-
kaumudī by Bhațțojī Dĩkșita. The
मध्यमकौमुदी and the लघुकौमुदी can also
be noted here although they are
the abridgments of the Siddhānta
Kaumudī. There are Vŗttis in
other languages also, written in
modern times, out of which those
written by Bōhtlingk, Basu and
Renou are well-known.
पाणिनीयशिक्षा a short work on phone-
tics which is taken as a Vedāņga
work and believed to have been
written by Pāņini. Some say that
the work was written by Pińgala.
पाणिनीयशिक्षाटीका name of a commen-
tary on the Śikşā of Pāņini by
धरणीधर as ordered by king उत्पलसिंह.
पातञ्जलमहाभाष्य the same as महाभाष्य. See महाभाष्य.
पात्रेसमितादि a class of irregular com
pound words headed by the com-
|
pound word पात्रेसमित, which are
taken correct as they are. This
class of words consists mostly of
words forming a tatpurușa com-
pound which cannot be explained
by regular rules. The class is
called आकृतिगण and hence similar
irregular words are included in it:
e. g. पात्रेसमिताः, गेहेशूरः कूपमण्डूकः etc
cf. KS. on P. II.1.48.
पाद lit. foot; the term is applied to a
fourth part of a section such as
अध्याय, or of a verse which is divisi-
ble into four parts or lines; cf
प्रकृत्यान्तःपादमव्यपरे P. VI.1.115, also
गोः पादान्ते P. VII. 1.57.
पादपूरण completion of the fourth part
or Pāda of a stanza or verse; cf.
सोचि लोपे चेत् पादपूरणम् P. VI.1.134,
also प्रसमुपोदः पादपूरणे VIII. 1.6. As
many times some particles, not
with any specific or required sense,
were used for the completion of a
Pāda, such particles were called
पाद्पूरण ; cf. सत्त्वाभिधायकं नाम निपातः
पादपूरण: R.Pr.XII.7; also निपातस्त्वर्था-
संभवे पादपूरणो भवति V. Pr. VIII.50
Uvvața.
पामादि a class of words headed by
the word पामन् to which the tad.
affix न is added optionally with मतुप्
in the sense of ’possession', e.g.
पामनः, पामवान् ; वामनः, वामवान् etc., cf.
Kāś. on V.2.100.
पायगुण्ड, पायगुण्डे A learned pupil of
Nāgeśabhațța who lived in Vārǎ-
ņasī in the latter half of the 18th
century A.D. He was a renowned
teacher of Grammar and is believ-
ed to have written commentaries
on many works of Nāgeśa, the
famous among which are the
'Kāśikā' called also 'Gadā' on the
Paribhāșenduśekhara,the'Cidasthi-
mālā' on the Laghuśabdenduśek-
hara and the 'Chāyā' on the Udd-
yota Bālambhațța Pāyaguņde, who
|
has written a commentary on the
Mitākșarā (the famous commen-
tary on the Yajňavalkyasmŗti), is
believed by some as the same as
Vaidyanātha: while others say that
Bālambhațța was the son of
Vaidyanātha.
पारण the same as पारायण, recital of the
Veda in any of the various artifi-
cial ways prescribed, such as
krama, jatā, ghana etc., cf ऋते न
च द्वैपदसंहृितास्वरौ प्रसिध्यतः पारणकर्म चोत्तमम्
R.Pr.XI.37.
पारस्करादिगण or पारस्करप्रभृति, words
headed by the word पारस्कर which
have got some irregularity, espe-
cially the insertion of स् between
the constituent words. For details
see पारस्करप्रभृतीनि च संज्ञायाम् P. VI.
1.153 and the commentary there-
on.
पारायण oral recital of a sacred work.
See पारण.
पारार्थ्य lit. serving the purpose of
another like the Paribhāşā and the
Adhikāra rules in Grammar which
have got no utility as fair as they
themselves are concerned, but
which are of use in the interpreta-
tion of other rules; cf. अधिकारशब्देन
पारार्थ्यात् परिभाषाप्युच्यते. Par. Sek. Pari.
2, 3.
पारिभाषिक (l) technical, as opposed
to literal; conventional; e. g. the
words संबुद्धि, हेतु etc. cf शब्दैरर्थाभिधानं
स्वाभाविकम् । न पारिभाषिकमशक्यत्वात् ।
लोकत एवार्थावगते: । Kāś on P.I.2.56;
cf. किमिदम् पारिभाषिक्याः संबुद्धैग्रहणमेकवचनं
संबुद्धिराहोस्विदन्वर्थग्रहणं संबोधनं संबुद्धिरिति ।
M. Bh. on P. I. 2.33; (2) derived
on the strength of a Paribhasa
cf. पारिभाषिकं क्वचिदनित्यं स्यात् Kat.
Par. vr. Pari. 58.
पारिशेष्य residual nature; the law or
rule of elimination; the remain-
ing alternative after full consi-
|
deration of all the other alterna-
tives; cf. विभाषा कुरुयुगन्धराभ्याम् ।
पारिशेष्याद्युगन्धरार्था विभाषा Kāś. on P.
IV. 2.130; cf. also पारिशेष्यादजन्तादेव
यत् सिद्धः Sira. Pari. 37.
पारिषद lit. belonging to the assem-
bly; the term पारिषद refers to the
results of the discussions held at
the assemblies of specially
prominent scholars or learned
persons ; cf. सर्ववेदपारिषदं हीदं शास्त्रं
(ब्याकरणम्) तत्र नैकः पन्था: शक्य आस्थातुम् ।
M. Bh. on II. 1. 58; VI. 3.14.
पारोक्ष्य remoteness; lit. being out of
sight; in grammar, पारोक्ष्य is a con-
dition for the use of the perfect
tense ( लिट् ). See परोक्ष.
पार्षद पर्षदि भवं पार्षदम्, lit. the inter-
pretation or theory discussed and
settled at the assembly of the
learned. The word is used in
the sense of works on Nirukti or
derivation of words as also works
of the type of the Prātiśākhyās;
cf. पदप्रकृतीनि सर्वचरणानां पार्षदानि Nir.
I. 17 and the com. of, दुर्गाचार्यः cf.
also पार्षदकृतिरेषा तत्रभवतां नैव लोके नान्य-
स्मिन्वेदे अर्ध एकारः अर्ध ओकारो वास्ति M.
Bh. on I. 1. 48: see also pp. 104,
105 Vol. VII Mahābhāsya D. E.
Society's edition. See पारिषद.
पार्षदव्याख्या name given to the com-
mentary written by विष्णुमित्र on
the Ŗk Prātiśākhya.
पार्षदसूत्रवृति name given to the works
of the type of commentaries
written by उव्वट on the old Prā-
tiśākhya books.
पाशादि a class of words headed by
the word पाश to which the taddhita
affix य is added in the sense of
collection; e.g. पाश्या, तृण्या, वात्या etc,
cf. Kāś. on P. IV. 2.49.
पिङ्गलाचार्य an ancient scholar who is
believed to be the first writer on
30
|
Prosody, his work being known as
छन्दःशास्त्र of पिङ्गल. Some scholars
believe that he wrote a work on
Phonetics which is now popularly
called पाणिनीयशिक्षा.
पिच्छादि a class of words headed by
the word पिच्छ to which the
taddhita affix इल ( इलच् ) is added
optionally with मत् ( मतुप् ), in the
sense of 'possessed of'; e.g.पिच्छिलः
पिच्छवान्, उरसिलः उरस्वान् etc.: cf Kāś.
om V. 2. 100.
पिञ्ज a tad. affix applied to the
word तिल in the sense of fruitless,
useless; cf. तिलान्निष्फलात् पिञ्जपेजौ IV.
2.36 Vārt. 6: cf.also निष्फलस्तिलः तिल-
पिञ्जः तिलपेजः । Kāś. on P. IV. 2.36.
पिटव् a tad. affix applied to the
word नि in the sense of the depre-
ssion of the nose, the word चि
being substituted for नि; e.g. चिपिटः;
cf. इनच् पिटच् चिक चि च P. V: 2.33
पित् marked with the mute letter प्
which is indicative of a grave
accent in the case of affixes
marked with it, as for example,
the affixes तिप् , सिप् and मिप् ; cf.
अनुदात्तौ सुप्पितौ P. III. 1.4. A Sarva-
dhātuka affix, marked with the
mute consonant प्, in Pāņiņi's
Grammar has been described as
instrumental in causing many
operations such as (a) the substitu-
tion of guņa; (cf P. VII. 3 84,9l).
(b) the prevention of guņa in the
case of a reduplicative syllable
as also in the case of the roots भू
and सू ( cf. P. VII. 3.87, 88 ); (c)
the substitution of Vŗddhi, (cf. P.
VII. 3.89, 90 ), (d) the augments
इ and ई in the case of the roots तृह्
and ब्रू respectively ( cf. P. VII.
3.92, 93, 94 ), and (e) acute accent
for the vowel preceding the affix
in the case of the roots भी, हृी, भृ
and others ( cf. P. VI. 1.192 ). A
|
short vowel (of a root) gets त् add-
ed to it when followed by a kŗt
affix marked with प्: e.g., विजित्य,
प्रकृत्य, etc.:(cf. P. VI. 1.71 ).
पित्करण marking an affix with the
mute consonant प् for several
grammatical purposes; see पित्; cf-
पित्करणानर्थक्यं चानच्कत्वात् P. III. I. 33
Vārt.5. See पित्.
पित्कृत a grammatical operation caus-
ed by an affix marked with the
mute consonant प्: cf. यत्तु खलु पिति
ङित्कृतं प्राप्नोति ङिति च पित्कृतं केन तन्न स्यात्,
M. Bh, on III. 1.-3 Vart. 7. For
details see पित्.
पित्व the same as पित्करण. See पित्करण
and पित्.
पिपीलिकमध्या, पिपीलिकमध्यमा name
given to a stanza of त्रिष्टुप् or जगती
or बृहती type consisting of three
feet, the middle foot consisting of
six or seven or eight syllables only;
e. g. Ŗgveda X. 105, 2 and 7;
IX. 110.l, VIII. 46.14; cf. उष्णिक्
पिपीलिकामध्या हरीयस्येति दृश्यते R. Pr.
XVI. 25, 28, 36.
पिशेल् [ PISCHELL, RICHARD]
a famous European Grammarian
of the nineteenth century who
wrote many articles on grammati-
cal subjects and wrote a work en-
titled 'Prakrit Grammar.'
पीडन compression; a fault in the
pronunciation of vowels and con-
sonants caused by the compression
or contraction of the place of utte-
rance: cf. विहारसंहारयोर्व्यासपीडने स्थान-
करणयोर्विस्तारे व्यासो नाम दोष:, संहारे संकोचने
पीडनं नाम । R. Pr. XIV. 2; cf. also
व्यञ्जनानामतिप्रयत्नेनोच्चारणं पीडनं R. Pr.
XIV. 5.
पील्वादि a class of words headed by
the word पीलु to which the taddhita
affix कुण ( कुणप्) is added in the
sense of 'decoction' ( पाक ). e. g.
पीलुकुण:; cf. Kāś. on P. V.2.24.
|
पु short term for the labial consonants
प्, फ्, ब्, भ् and म् as prescribed by
P. 1.1.61 e.g. ओः पुयण्ज्यपरे (P. VII.
4.80 ).
पुंवद्भाव restoration of the masculine
form in the place of the feminine
one as noticed in compound words,
formed generally by the Karma-
dhāraya and the Bahuvrīhi com-
pounds, where the first member is
declinable in all the three genders;
e. g. दीर्घजङ्घः. This restoration to
the masculine form is also noticed
before the tad. affixes तस्, तर, तम्,
रूप्य, पाश, त्व as also before क्यङ् and
the word मानिन्. For details, see P.
VI, 3.34 to 42 and commentaries
thereon. See also page 334, Vol.
VII of the Pātańjala Mahābhāșya
D. E. Society's edition.
पुंस् masculine: a word used in gra-
mmar in the पुंलिङ्ग or the masculine
gender; cf स्त्रीपुंनपुंसकेषु Br. Dev. I.
40, cf.also असरूपाणां युवस्थविरस्त्रीपुंसानां
विशेषश्चाविवक्षितः सामान्यं च विवक्षितम् ।
M. Bh. on P. I. 2.68 Vārt. 1; cf.
पुंस्प्रवाद. and पौंस्नानि नामानि.
पुंस्क masculine nature, hence mascu-
line gender. The word is generally
found as a part of the word भाषित-
पुंस्क which means a word which is
declined in the masculine and the
feminine gender or in the neuter
and the masculine gender in the
same sense. For details see M. Bh,
on P. VI.3.34.
पुक् the augment प् added to the roots
ऋ, हृी, क्नूय् etc. as also to all roots
ending in अा before the causal
sign णिच् ( इ ); e. g. अर्पयति, ह्वेपयति,
क्नोपयति, दापयति, etc.: cf. अर्त्तिह्रीब्लीरी-
क्नूयीक्ष्माय्यातां पुङ् णौ P. VII.3.36.
पुञ्जराज a famous grammarian of the
12th century who wrote a learned
commentaty on a part of the Vāky
apadīya of Bhartŗhari in which
|
he has quoted passages from famous
writers and grammarians such as
भामह, कुन्तक, वामन, हेमचन्द्र and others.
The name is found written as
पुण्यराज also.
पुण्डरीकाक्ष a grammarian of the four-
teenth century who wrote a com-
mentary named कातन्त्रपरिशिष्टटीका on
the कातन्त्रव्याकरण.
पुण्यनन्दन a famous grammarian, who
wrote a grammar work, named
रूपमाला.
पुण्यराज see पुञ्जराज.
पुण्यसुन्दरगाणि a jain grammarian who
has written a commentary work ।
on the धातुपाठ of हेमचन्द्र.
पुत्रट् (1) the word पुत्र as given in the
ancient list of masculine words
marked with the mute letter ट् to
signify the addition of the fem.
affix ई ( ङीप् ): cf. P. IV.1.15: (2)
the substitute पुत्रट् ( i. e. पुत्री ) for
the word दुहितृ optionally prescrib-
ed after the words सूत, उग्र, राज, भोज,
कुल and मेरु in the simple sense of
'girl' and not ' daughter ' e. g.
राजपुत्री, सूतपुत्री; cf. P.VI.3.70 Vārt. 9.
पुनःप्रसङ्गविज्ञान occurrence or possibi-
lity of the application of a preced-
ing grammatical rule or operation
a second time again, after once it
has been set aside by a subsequent
opposing rule or rules in conflict;
cf. पुनःप्रसङ्गविज्ञानात् सिद्धम् Par. Śek.
Pari. 39; cf. M. Bh. on P. I. 4.2
Vārt. 7; cf.also Puru. Pari. 40.
पुनःप्रसव the same as प्रतिप्रसव counter-
exception; cf. Cāndra,Vyāk. VI.4.
49.
पुनरुक्त a passage which is repeated in
the क्रमपाठ and the other Pāțhas or
recitals; the word is also used in
the sense of the conventional repe-
tition of a word at the end of a
chapter. The word पुनर्वचन is used
|
also in the same sense; cf. यथोक्तं
पुनरुक्तं त्रिपदप्रभृति त्रिपदप्रभृति । T.Pr.I.6l:
cf. also R. Pr. X.8 and 10.
पुनर्ग्रहण recital of a word again in
the Krama and other Pāțhas for a
special purpose, although such a
recital after three times is gener-
ally discouraged; cf. एवमर्थविशेषात्
पुनरुक्तस्य ग्रहणं भवति ... Uv Bhāşya on
V. Pr. IV. 177.
पुनर्वचन use of the same word or
expression, which, if noticed in the
writing of the Sūtrakāra, is indi-
cative of something in the mind of
the Sūtrakāra; cf. अणः पुनर्वचनमपवाद-
विषये अनिवृत्त्यर्थम् M. Bh. of P III. 3.
12 Vārt.1; cf also पुनर्वचनमनित्यत्वज्ञा-
पनार्थम् । Kāś. on P. I. 41"
पुनर्विधान prescribing the same affix
or operation again, which gene-
ally is attended with some pur-
pose: cf. ण्वुलः क्रियार्थोपपदस्य पुनर्विधानं
तृजादिप्रतिषेधार्थम्, P.III. 3.10 Vārt. I ;
cf. also पुनर्विधानसामर्थ्यात् अध्यर्धपूर्वद्विगोर्लुङ् न,
Kāś. on P. V.1.57.
पुनर्वृत्ति occurrence of the same ope-
ration again after it has once occ-
urred and has been superseded;
cf. अङ्गवृत्ते पुनवृत्तादविधिः, M.Bh. on VI.
4.160;VII. I.30 etc.
पुम्. or पुंस् masculine. It appears
that both पुभ्, and पुंस् were current
terms meaning 'masculine ' in
ancient days. cf. पुमः खय्यम्परे P.VIII.
3.12. and पुंसोसुङ् P. VII. 1.89. Al-
though पुभ् is changed to पुंस् before
a word beginning with a hard
consonant, still पुंस् is given as an
independent word derived from the
root पा cf. पातेर्डुम्सुन् Unādi S IV.
177; cf. also the expressions पुंवचन,
पुंलिङ्ग and पुंयोग.
पुरस्तात् occurring beforehand, pre-
ceding: cf. पुरस्तादपवादा अनन्तरान् विधीन्
बाधन्ते , नोत्तरान् Par. Sek. Pari. 59,
also M.Bh. on VII. 2.100; cf.
|
also the expression पुरस्तादुपकर्ष which
means the same as अपकर्ष which is
opposed to अनुवृत्ति.
पुराण old; the word is used in the
sense of old or ancient cf. पुराणप्रोक्तेषु
ब्राह्मणकल्पेषु. P. IV. 3.105. It is also
used in the sense of old mytho-
logical works; cf. इतिहृास: पुराणं वैद्यकं
M.Bh. on Āhnika l Vart. 5.
पुरुष a grammatical term in the
sense of 'person:' cf. करोतिः पचादीनां
सर्वान् कालान् सर्वान् पुरुषान्सर्वाणि वचनान्यनु-
वर्तते, भवतिः पुनर्वर्तमानकालं चैकत्वं च.
These persons or Purușas are
described to be three प्रथम, मध्यम and
उत्तम corresponding to the third
second and first persons respec-
tively in English Grammar; cf.
also Nir. VII. l and 2.
पुरुषकार name of a commentary
on the Sarasvatikaņthābharaņa
of Bhoja by Kŗşņalilāśukamuni.
पुरुषसंज्ञा the term पुरुष or person viz.
the first, the second and the
third; the rule prescribing the
term पुरुष is तिङ्स्त्रीणि त्रीणि प्रथममध्यमो-
त्तमाः P. I. 4. 101: cf. परस्मैपदसंज्ञां
पुरुषसंज्ञा बाधेत M. Bh. on P. I. 4. 1
Vārt. 8.
पुरुषोत्तमदेव a famous grammarian
believed to have been a Buddhist,
who flourished in the reign of
Lakșmaņasena in the latter half
of the twelfth century in Bengal.
Many works on grammar are
ascribed to him, the prominent
ones among which are the Bhā-
șāvŗtti and the Paribhāșāvŗtti,
the Gaņavŗtti and the Jñapaka-
samuccaya and a commentary on
the Mahābhāșya called Prāņa-
paņā of which only a fragment
is available. Besides these works
on grammar, he has written some
lexicographical works of which
Hārāvalī, Trikāņdaśeșa, Dvirūpa-
|
kosa, and Ekaaksarakosa are the
prominent ones. The Bhasavrtti
has got a lucid commentary on it
written by Srstidhara.
पुरुषोत्तमविद्यावागीश a famous gram-
marian of Bengal, who wrote the
grammar work Prayogaratnamala
in the fifteenth century. The work
betrays a deep study and scholar-
ship of the writer in the Man-
trasāstra.
पुरोहितादि a class of words headed
by the word पुरोहित to which the
taddhita affix यक् is added in the
sense of 'duly' or 'nature': e.g .
पौरोहित्यम् , राज्यम् , बाल्यम् , मान्द्यम् etc.;
cf. KaS. on P. V. !. 128.
पुषादि a class of roots headed by the
root पुष् of the fourth conjugation
whose peculiarity is the substitu-
tion of the aorist sign अ ( अङ्)
for च्लि ; e.g. अपुषत्, अशुषत्, अनुषत्
etc. of. पुषादिद्युताद्यलृदितः परस्मैपदेषु P.
III. 1.55.
पुष्करण a popular term used for the
treatise on grammar by an ancient
grammarian Apisali. cf. अापिशलं
पुष्करणम् Kas on P. IV. 3. 15. It
was called Puskarana probably
because it was very extensive and
widely read before Panini. For
the reading दुष्करण for पुष्करण, and
other details see Mahabhasya Vol.
VII. pp. 132-133, D. E. Society's
edition.
पुष्करादि a class of words headed by
the word पुष्कर, to which the tadd-
hita affix इन् ( इनि ) is added pro-
vided the word ending with the
affix forms the name of a district.
e. g. पुष्करिणी, पद्मिनी etc. cf. Kas. on
P. V. 2.135.
पूजार्थ lit for the sake of paying
respect. The word is used by
commentators in connection with
references to ancient grammarians
|
by Panini in his sutras, where the
commentators usually say that the
sutras citing the views of ancient
grammarians imply merely an
option, the name being quoted
merely to show respect to the
grammarian; cf. अापिशलिग्रहणं पूजार्थम्
S.K. on P.VI.1.92.
पूज्यपाद originally a title, but mostly
used in connection with the famous
Jain grammarian देवनन्दिन् whose
work on grammar called जैनेन्द्र-
व्याकरण is well-known: see देवनन्दिन्.
पूरण an ordinal numeral; lit. the
word means completion of a
particular number ( संख्या ); cf. येन
संख्या संख्यानं पूर्यते संपद्यते स तस्याः पूरणः ।
एकादंशानां पूरणः एकादशः । Kas, on P.V.
2.48. The word is used also in the
sense of an affix by the applica-
tion of which the particular
number ( संख्या ) referring to an
object, is shown as complete; cf.
यस्मिन्नुपसंजाते अन्या संख्या संपद्यते स
प्रत्ययार्थः Kas. on P. V.2.48. These
Purana pratyayas are given in
P. V. 2. 48-58, cf. पूरणं नामार्थः ।
तमाह Xतीयशव्दः । अतः पूरणम् M. Bh. on
P.II.2.3. The word also means 'an
ordinal number'; cf. पूरणगुणसुहितार्थ-
सदव्ययतव्यसमानाधिकरणेन P.II.2.11.
पूरणप्रत्यय a tad. affix showing the
completion of the particular
number ( संख्या ) shown by the
word to which the affix is applied;
cf. . अर्धपूर्वपदश्च पूरणप्रत्ययान्तः संख्याशब्दो
भवतीति वक्तव्यम् । अर्धपञ्चमः । M. Bh.on
P.I.1.23 Vart. 7. These affixes are
mentioned by Panini in V.2. 48 to
58.
पूरणान्त ending with an ordinal affix:
the same as पूरणप्रत्ययान्त; cf. योसौ
पूर्णान्तात् स्वार्थ अन् सोपि पूरणमेव M.Bh.on
P. II. 2.3.
पूर्व (l) ancient, old: (2) belonging
to the Eastern districts. The word
|
is frequently used as qualifying the
word अाचार्य where it means ancient.
पूर्वत्रासिद्धवचन the dictum of Panini
about rules in his second, third
and fourth quarters (Padas) of
the eighth Adhyaya being invalid
to (viz. not seen by) all the previ-
ous rules in the first seven chapters
and the first quarter of the eighth
as laid down by him in the rule
पूर्वत्रासिद्धम् VIII.2.1. The rule पूर्व-
त्रासिद्धम् is taken also as a governing
rule i.e. अधिकार laying down that
in the last three quarters also of
his grammar, a subsequent rule is
invalid to the preceding rule. The
purpose of this dictum is to prohi-
bit the application of the rules in
the last three quarters as also that
of a subsequent rule in the last
three quarters, before all such
preceding rules, as are applicable
in the formation of a word, have
been given effect to; cf. एवमिहापि
पर्वेत्रासिद्धवचनं अादेशलक्षणप्रतिषेधार्थमुत्सर्ग-
लक्षणभावार्थं च M.Bh. on P. VIII.2.1
Vart. 8.
पूर्वत्रासिद्धीय an operation prescribed
in the province of the rule पूर्वेत्रा-
सिद्धम् i.e. in the last three quarters
of the eighth book of Panini's
grammar.
पूर्वनिघात the grave accent for the
preceding acute vowel as a result
of the following vowel made acute,
and the preceding , as a result,
turned into grave by virtue of the
rule अनुदात्तं पदमेकवर्जम् VI.1.198: cf.
मतुब्विभक्त्युदात्तत्वं पूर्वनिघातस्यानिमित्तं स्यात् ।
अग्निमान् । वायुमान् । M. Bh. on P.I.1.39
Vart. 16.
पूर्वनिपात placing first (in a compo-
und); priority of a word in a com-
pound, as in the case of an adjec-
tival word, For special instructions
|
in grammar about priority see
P. II.2.30 to 38.
पूर्वपक्ष lit. the view placed first for
consideration which generally is
the view of the objector and is
generally refuted by the author's
view called उत्तरपक्ष or सिद्धान्त.
पूर्वपद anterior member, the first out
of the two members of a compo-
und, as contrasted with the next
member which is उत्तरपद; cf. पूर्व-
पदोत्तरपदयोरेकोदशः पूर्वपदत्यान्तवद्भवति, M.
Bh. on P.VI.1.85 Vart. 4.
पूर्वपदप्रकृतिस्वर retention of the ori-
ginal acute accent of the first
member in a compound as is
generally noticed in the bahuvrihi
compound and in special cases in
other compounds; cf बहुव्रीहौ प्रकृत्या
पूर्वपदम् and the following rules P.
WI. 2.1 to 63.
पूर्वपदार्थप्राधान्य importance in sense
possessed by the first member of a
compound as noticed generally in
the case of the avyayibhava com
pound, which hence is defined as
पूर्वपदार्थप्रधानोव्ययीभावः M.Bh on P.I I.
I.6, II.1.20, II. 1.49.
पूर्वरूप substitution of the former letter
in the place of the two viz. the
former and the latter, as a result
of the coalescence of the two cf
अमि पूर्वः and the following rules P.
VI. 1.107-110.
पूर्वविधि (1) an operation or karya
or the anterior cf. P. I. 1.57: cf
also Mahabhasya on P. I. 1.57 cf
also एकादेशः पूर्वविधौ स्थानिवत् M.Bh. on
I.2.4 Vart. 2 and II. 4.62 Vart. 4;
(2) an operation or a rule cited
earlier in the order of sutras; cf.
पूविधिमुत्तरो विधिर्वाधते M. Bh on P 1.
1.44 Vart. 13.
पूर्वविप्रतिषेध conflict of two rules
where the preceding rule super-
|
sedes the latter rule, as the arrival
at the correct form requires it.
Generally the dictum is that a
subsequent rule should supersede
the preceding one; cf विप्रतिषेधे परं
कार्यम् P. I. 4. 2; but sometimes the
previous rule has to supersede the
subsequent one in spite of the
dictum विप्रतिषेधे परम्. The author of
the Mahabhasya has brought these
cases of the पूर्वविप्रतिषेध, which are,
in fact, numerous, under the rule
विप्रतिषेधे परं कार्यम् by taking the word
पर in the sense of इष्ट 'what is de-
sired '?; cf. इष्टवाची परशब्दः । विप्रतिषेधे
परं यदिष्टं तद्भवतीति l M. Bh. on I. 1.3;
I.2, 5: I. 4.2: II.1.69, IV.1.85etc.
cf.also पूर्वविप्रतिषेधो नाम अयं र्विप्रतिषेधे
परमित्यत्र परशब्दस्य इष्टवाचित्वाल्लब्धः सूत्रार्थः
परिभाषारुपेण पाठ्यते Puru. Pari 108; for
details see page 217 Vol. VII
Mahabhasya D. E. Society's edi-
tion.
पूर्वसवर्णदीर्ध substitution of the long
form of the previous vowel in the
place of two vowels as a result of
their coalescence, prescribed by
Paanini in VI. l.102 .
पूर्वसूत्र 1it. previous rule: a rule cited
erlier in a treatise. The word is
however, frequently used in the
Mahabhasya in the sense of 'a
rule laid down by an earlier
grammarian': cf.वर्ण वाहुः पूर्वसूत्रे M.
Bh, Ahnika 1, पूर्वसूत्रे गोत्रस्य वृद्धमिति
संज्ञा क्रियते M. Bh on I. 2.68; cf.
also M.Bh. on P.IV.1.14 Vart. 3,
VI.I. 163 Vart. 1, VII.1.18, VIII.
4.7.
पूर्वस्थानिक a variety of antarangatva
mentioned by Nagesa in the Pari-
bhasendusekhara, where an opera-
tion, affecting a part of a word
which precedes that portion of the
word which is affected by
the other operation, is looked
|
upon as antaranga; e. g. the टिलोप
in स्रजिष्ठ ( स्रग्विन् + इष्ठ ) is looked
upon as अन्तरङ्ग with respect to the
elision of विन् which is बहिरङ्ग. This
kind of antarangatva is, of course,
not admitted by Nagesa although
mentioned by him; cf. Par. Sek.
Pari. 50,
पूर्वान्त end of the previous. The word
is used in connection with a vowel
which is substituted for two vowels
(एकादेश.). Such a substitute is look-
ed upon as the ending vowel of
the preceding word or the initial
vowel of the succeeding word; it
cannot be looked upon as both at
one and the same time; cf.
अन्तादिवच्च P. VI. 1. 85 and उभयत
अाश्रयेण नान्तादिवत् Sira. Pari. 60; cf.
also किं पुनरयं पूर्वान्तः अहोस्वित् परादिः
अाहोस्विदभक्तः M. Bh. on I. 1. 47
Vart. 3.
पूर्वान्तसस्वर belonging to the previous
vowel in syllabication; e. g. a con-
sonant at the end of a word or
the first in a consonant group
( संयोग ).
पूर्वापरपाद name given to the second
pada of the second adhyaya of
Panini's Asadhyayi which begins
with the Sutra पूर्वापराधरोत्तरमेकदेशिनैका-
धिकरणे P. II. 2.1.
पृक्त lit. mixed. The term is used in
the Pratisakhya works in connec-
tion with the vowel ऋ or ऌ which
is looked upon as a पृक्तस्वर being
mixed with the consonant र् or ल्;
cf. पृक्तस्वरो नाम ऋकारः ऌकारश्च रेफलकारसं-
पृक्तत्वात् com. on T.Pr.XIII.16.
पृथक् separately as far as hearing is
concerned; distinctly separate
from another; cf. सप्त स्वरा ये यमास्ते
पृथग्वा R. Pr. XIII. 17.
पृथग्योगकरण framing a separate rule
for a thing instead of mentioning
it along with other things in the
|
same context, which implies some
purpose in the mind of the author
such as anuvrtti in subsequent
rules, option, and so on; cf. पृथग्यो-
गकरणमस्य विधेरनित्यत्वज्ञापनार्थम् Kas. on P.
I.3.7; cf. also Kas. on I.3.33, I. 3.
84, I.4.58, III.1.56, IV.1.16, VII.
4.33, VIII.1.52, VIII.1.74.
पृथ्वादि a class of words headed by
the word पृथु to which the taddhita
affix इमन् ( इमनिच् ) is added option-
ally with the other usual affixes
अण्, त्व and तल् in the sense of
'nature'; e. g. प्रथिमा, पार्थवम् , पृथुत्वम् ,
पृथुता; similarly म्रदिमा, मार्दवम् मृदुत्वम्,
मृदुता पटिमा पाटवम् , पटुता पटुत्वम् ; cf.
KS. om P.V.1.122.
पृथ्वीधराचार्य a grammarian of the
Eastern school who wrote the
treatise कातन्त्रविवरण on Katantra
Grammar.
पृषोदरादि a group of words, with irre-
gularity in the coalescence of the
two constituent members, collect-
ed together by Panini and men-
tioned together with the word
पृषोदर at the head; cf. पृषोदरादीनि
यथोपदिष्टम् P.VI. 3. 109; cf. also
येषु लोपागमवर्णविकारः शास्त्रेण न विहिताः,
दृश्यन्ते च तानि, यथोपदिष्टानि साधूनि
भवन्ति । पृषोदरम् , बलाहकः, जीमूतः,
पिशाचः, वृसी, मयूरः,पयोपवसनानाम्, दूढ्यः
etc. Kas. on P.VI. 3.109.
पेज tad. affix added to the word तिल
optionally with the affix पिञ्ज; e. g.
तिलपेजः. See पिञ्ज.
पेदुभट्ट a grammarian.who has written
a treatise named औणादिकपदार्णव on
the Unadi sutras.
पैलादि a class of words headed by
the word पैल, the tad. affix in the
sense of युवन् applied to which
(words) is elided; e.g. पैलः पिता, पैलः
पुत्रः ; for details see Kas. on P.II.4.
59.
|
पौनःपुन्य frequency; repetition a
sense in which the frequentative
affix यङ् and in some cases the
imperative mood are prescribed;
cf.पौनःपुन्यं भृशार्थश्च क्रियासमभिहारः:S.K.
on P.1II. 1.22: cf. also S. K on
P.III.4.2.
पौरस्त्यवैयाकरण a grammarian of the
eastern school which is believed to
have been started by जिनेन्द्रबुद्धि the
writer of the gloss called न्यास on
the Kasikavrtti. The school practi-
cally terminated with पुरुषोत्तमदेव and
सीरदेव at the end of the twelfth
century A.D. Such a school exist-
ed also at the time of Panini and
Patanjali, a reference to which is
found made in प्राचां ष्फ ताद्धतः P. IV.
1.17 and प्राचामवृद्धात्फिन् बहुलम् IV.1.
160 and प्राचामुपादेरडज्वुचौ च V.3.80
where the word is explained as
प्राचामाचार्याणां by the writer of the
Kasika.
पौर्वापर्य (1) a relation between two
operations or rules based upon
their anterior and ulterior posi-
tions, which is many times taken
into consideration for deciding
their relative strength; (2) the
order of words; cf शब्देनार्थान्वाच्यान्
दृष्ट्वा बुद्धौ कुर्यात् पौर्वापर्यम् M. Bh.on P
1.4.109 Vart. 10 cf also पौर्वापर्यमका-
लव्यपेतं सेहिता, P. I. 4.109 Vart. 8.
पौष्करसादि an ancient grammarian
who belonged to the dynasty of
पुष्करसद्, whose views are quoted by
the Varttikakara and the writers
of the Pratisakhya works: cf चयो
द्वितीयाः शारि पौष्करसादेः P. VIII. 4.48
Vart. 3; cf. also व्यञ्जनपरः पौष्करसादेर्न
पूर्वश्च ञकारम् T. Pr. V: cf. also T. Pr.
XIII. 16; XIV. 2, XVII. 6.
प्र a conventional term for हृस्व (short)
generally applied to vowels in the
Jainendra Vyakarana.
|
प्रकम्प depression of the voice after
raising it as noticed in connection
with the utterance of the svarita
vowels in certain cases and in
certain Vedic schools with a view
to show the svarita nature of the
vowel distinctly, in spite of the
fact that such a depression is
generally looked upon as a.fault;
cf. असन्दिग्धान् स्वरान् ब्रूयादविकृष्टानकाम्पितान्
R. Pr. III.18 as also जात्योभिानिहितश्चैव
क्षैप्रः प्रश्लिष्ट एव च । एते स्वराः प्रकम्पन्ते
यत्रोच्चस्वरितोदयाः R. Pr. III. 19.
प्रकरण topic; context; a section
wherein a particular subject is
treated; cf. अर्थात् प्रकरणाद्वा लोके कृत्रि-
माकृत्रिमयोः कृत्रिमे संप्रत्ययो भवति M.Bh.
on I. 1. 23; cf. also सामान्यशब्दाश्च
नान्तरेण विशेषं प्रकरणं वा विशेषेष्ववतिष्ठन्ते M.
Bh. on I. 2.45 Vart 9.
प्रकरणग्रन्थ literary works in which the
treatment is given in the form of
topics by arranging the original
sutras or rules differently so that
all such rules as relate to a
particular topic are found toge-
ther: the Prakriykaumudi, the
Siddhantakumudi and others are
called प्रकरणग्रन्थs. Such works are
generally known by the name
प्राक्रयाग्रन्थ as opposed to वृतिग्रन्थ.
प्रकर्ष eminence: excellence of a parti-
cular quality ; cf. कथं पुनरन्यस्य प्रकर्षेण
अन्यस्य प्रकर्षः स्यात्: cf. also यद्यपि द्रव्यस्य
स्वतः प्रकर्षो नास्ति तथापि गुणाक्रियास्थ: प्रक्रर्षो
द्रव्य उपचर्यते , Kas on P. V. 4.1 1.
प्रकर्षगति preferential treatment, spe-
cial consideration ; cf. तत्र प्रकर्षगतिर्वि-
ज्ञास्यते साधीयः यः अल्विधिः इति, M.Bh.on
P.I. 1.56; cf. also M. Bh. on III.
1.94 Vart. 6.
प्रकर्षण keeping wide the two parts
of the chin which causes a fault
in pronunciation called विक्लिष्ट :cf
प्रकर्षणे तदु विक्लिष्टमाहुः । ह्न्वोः प्रकर्षणे सर्व-
|
प्रकल्पक प्रकृतिप्रत्ययविभाग 241
तश्चलने विक्लिष्टमसंयुक्तं नाम दोषो भवति ;
Uvvata on R. Pr. XIV.-3.
प्रकल्पक (fem. प्रकल्पिका ) a word or ex-
pression causing a change in the
nature of another word or ex-
pression which has to be taken as
changed accordingly; cf. प्रकल्पक्र-
मिति चेन्नियमाभावः P.I. 1.68 Vart. 15;
प्रत्ययविधिरयं न च प्रत्ययविधौ पञ्चम्यः प्रकल्पिक्रा
भवन्ति M.Bh. on P.I.1.27 Vart.1,I.1.
62 Vart.7; II.2.3 Vart.1, IV. 1.60;
cf also रुधादिभ्यः इत्येषा पञ्चमी शप् इति
प्रथमायाः षष्ठीं प्रकल्पयिष्यति, M. Bh. on
II 2.3, Vart. 1, III.1.33.
प्रकल्पक्रिय a word in which a verbal
activity has to be conjectured, as
for example, the words गौः, अश्वः
etc. Words which are not actually
derived by rules of grammar are
called प्रकल्पक्रिय as contrasted with
प्रत्यक्षक्रिय.
प्रकार (l) attribute, attribute which
differentiates, manner, difference;
differentiating description: cf. कंचि-
त्प्रकारं प्राप्तः इत्थंभूत: Kas. on P.II.3.21:
(2) resemblance, similarity of one
thing with another with slight
deficiency: cf. प्रकारे गुणवचनस्य । प्रक्रारो
भेदः सादृश्यं च। तदिह सादृश्यं प्रकारो गृह्यते ।
प्रकारे वर्तमानस्य गुणवचनशब्दस्य द्वे भवतः ।
पटुपटुः मृदुमृदुः । अपरिपूर्णगुण इत्यर्थः । परि-
पूर्णगुणेन न्यूनगुणस्य उपमाने सत्येवं प्रयुज्यते
Kas. on P. VIII.1.12; (3) differen-
tiating attribute; cf. प्रकारवचने थाल्
V. 3.23, प्रकारवचने जातीयर् V. 3.69,
स्यूलादिभ्यः प्रकारवचने कन् V. 4.3 where
Kasika defines the word प्रकार as
सामान्यस्य भेदको विशेषः प्रकार: Ka, on V.
3.23 and 69; (4) type, cf. इतिशब्दः
प्रकारार्थः Kas. on V. 2.93: cf. also
अदिशब्दः प्रकारे Kas. on देवपथादिभ्यश्च
P.V.3.100; cf also अादिइाब्दः प्रकारे
वर्तते । देवदत्तादय आढ्याः । देवदत्तप्रकारा
इत्यर्थः M.Bh. on I.3.1 Vart. 11.
प्रकाश name of commentary on Bhar-
trhari's Vakyapadiya by Punjaraja.
31
|
प्रकीर्णकाण्ड name given to the third
Kanda or book of Bhartrhari's
Vakyapadiya where miscellaneous
topics are treated. The third
Kanda consists of 14 sections called
by the name Samuddesa. For de-
tails see pp. 381-382 Mahabhasya
Vol. VII. D. E. Society's edition.
प्रकृत (1) in context, in question; the
word is frequently used in connec-
tion with words in the preceding
rules which are drawn on to the
following rules by anuvrtti or con-
tinuation; cf. प्रकृतं गुणवृद्धिग्रहणमनुवर्तते,
M.Bh. on I.1.3 Vart. 2: (2) found
or available in a large quantity;
cf. तत्प्रकृतवचने मयट् । प्राचुर्येण प्रस्तुतं
प्रकृतम् । Kas. on P. V. 4.21.
प्रकृति (1) material cause: cf.. तदर्थे
विकृते: प्रकृतौ । प्रकृतिरुपादानकारणं तस्यैव
उत्तरमवस्थान्तरं विकृतिः Kas.on P.V.1.12;
(2) original, as opposed to modifi-
ed' ( विकृति ); the original base of a
word which is used in language by
the addition of affixes. There are
mentioned three kinds of such
original words in grammar, roots
( धातु ), noun bases ( प्रातिपदिक ) and
affixes (प्रत्यय). प्रकृति is defined as
शास्त्रप्रक्रियक्रियाव्यवहारे प्रकृतिप्रत्ययविभागकल्पनय
शब्दार्थभावनायां प्रत्ययात् प्रथममुपादानकारणामिव
या उपादीयते तां प्रकृतिरिति व्यापदिशन्ति'
in the Sringaraprakasa; cf. अपशब्दो
ह्यस्य प्रकृति: । न चापशब्द: प्रकृतिः ， न
ह्यपशब्दा उपदिश्यन्ते न चानुपदिष्टा प्रकृतिरस्ति ।
M.Bh. on Siva Sutra 2; cf. also
कृत्प्रकृतिर्धातु: M.Bh. on P. VI. 2. 139
Vart. 2; पदप्रकृति: संहिता । पदप्रक्तीनि सर्व-
चरणानां पार्षदानि Nir. I.17.
प्रकृतिनियम restriction regarding the
base, as contrasted with प्रत्ययनियम,
cf. किमयं प्रत्ययनियम: प्रकृतिपर एव प्रत्ययः
प्रयोक्तव्यः अप्रकृतिपरो नेति । अाहोस्वित् प्रकृति-
नियमः । प्रत्ययपरैव प्रकृतिः प्रयोक्तव्या अप्रत्यय-
प्ररा नेति [ M.Bh. on P.III. 1.2.
प्रकृतिप्रत्ययविभाग division of a word
|
प्रकृतिप्रत्यापत्ति प्रक्रियाप्रकाश 242
(in use in a language) into the
base and the affix, which is looked
upon as the main function of
grammar.
प्रकृतिप्रत्यापत्ति restoration to the ori-
ginal word from the substituted
word; e.g. the restoration of the
root हन् in कंसवधमाचचष्टे कंसं घातयति; cf.
आख्याताकृदन्ताण्णिज्वक्तव्यस्तदाचष्टे इत्येत-
स्मिन्नर्थे । कृल्लुक् प्रकृतिप्रत्यापत्तिः प्रकृतिवच्च कारकं
भवतीति वक्तव्यम्, M.Bh. on III. 1 26
Vart. 6.
प्रकृतिभाव phonetical maintenance of
a wording without allowing any
euphonic modifications as found in
the case of a dual form ending in
ई,ऊ or ए,as also in other specified
cases; cf.ईदूदेद्विवचनं प्रगृह्यम् and the
following rules P.I. 1.11 to 19,
as also प्लुतप्रगृह्या अचि नित्यम् VI.1.125
प्रक्रुतिस्वर the accent i.e. the acute
accent ( उदात्त ) possessed by the
original word as contrasted with
the accent of the afix ( प्रत्ययस्वर )
which (latter) is looked upon as
more powerful; cf. (बहुव्रीहौ) पूर्वपदं
प्रकृतिस्वरं भवति M.Bh, on II.I.24, II.
2.29 Vart. 17, See Panini Sutras
VI.2.1 to 63.
प्रकृत्यन्तर difference in the radical
base; a different radical base; cf.
कथमुपबर्हणम् l बृहिः प्रकृत्यन्तरम् M. Bh.
on I.1.4; cf also प्रत्ययार्थस्याव्यति-
रेकात्प्रकृत्यन्तरेषु मन्यामहे धातुरेव क्रियामाहेति
M.Bh. on P.I. 3.1.
प्रकृत्यर्थनियम restriction regarding the
sense of the radical base; cf.
प्रकृत्यर्थनियमे अन्येषां प्रत्ययानामभावः । अनुदात्त-
ङितस्तृजादयो न प्राप्नुवन्ति M.Bh. on P. I.
3.12 Vart. 5
.प्रकृत्या intact, without any change by
rules of euphony, accent etc.;cf.P.
VI. 2.1 etc. VI.2.137, VI.3.74 and
VI.4.163
प्रकृष्ट superior, excellent; cf.मध्यमश्च शुक्ल-
शव्दः पूर्वमपेक्ष्यप्रकृष्टः परमपेक्ष्य न्यूनः न च न्यून:
|
प्रवर्तते ; M.Bh. on P. V.3.55 Vart. 3.
प्रक्रम (l) the place of articulation, the
place of the production of sound,
such as throat, chest, palate and
the like; cf. प्रक्रम्यन्ते अस्मिन्वर्णा इति प्रक्रमः
स्थानमुच्यते M. Bh. Pradipa on सिद्धं तु
समानप्रक्रमवचनात् P.I.2.30 Vart.2; (2)
recital of Veda, described as क्रमपाठ
cf. उभयथा च प्रक्रमे दोषो भवति M.Bh.on
P. VIII. 4.28 cf. also "अष्टसु प्रक्रमेषु
दोषो भवति"quoted in the Mahabha-
sya on P.VI. 1.172; (3) regularity
in the position of words, regular
order of words.
प्रक्रियाकौमुदी a well-known work on
Sanskrit Grammar by रामचन्द्रशेष of
the 15th century, in which the
subject matter of the eight chapters
of Panini's grammar is arranged
into several different sections form-
ing the different topics of gram-
mar. It is similar to, and possibly.
the predecessor of, the Siddhanta
Kaumudi which has a similar
arrangement. The work was very
popular before the Siddhinta
Kaumudi was written. it has got
many commentaries numbering
about a dozen viz. प्रक्रियाप्रसाद,
प्रक्रियाप्रकाश, प्रक्रियाप्रदीप, अमृतस्तुति,
प्रक्रियाव्याकृति,निर्मलदर्पण,तत्वचन्द्र, प्रक्रियारञ्जन,
प्रक्रियाविवरण and others of which the
Prasada of Vitthalesa and the
Prakasa of Srikrsna are the well-
known ones.
प्रक्रियाकौमुदीवृत्ति called also प्रक्रियाकौ-
मुदीव्याख्या or even कृष्णपण्डिता ( वृत्ति )
written by a learned grammarian
named Krsnapandita belonging to
the famous Sesa family of gra-
mmarians.
प्रक्रियाकौमुदीसार a commentary on
Ramacandra's Prakriyakaumud by
a grammarian named Kasinatha
प्रक्रियाप्रकाश name of the learned
commentary on the प्रक्रियाकौमुदी,
|
called also प्रक्रियाक्रौमुदीप्रक्राश by
Krsnasesa, the son of Nrsimhasesa,
which is, in a way an improve-
ment upon the commentary Pra-
sada of Vitthalesa.
पक्रियाप्रदीप name of a commentary
on the प्रक्रियाकौमुदी, written by
चक्रपाणिदत्त.
प्रक्रियाप्रसाद name of the scholarly com-
mentary on Ramacandra's Prakri-
yakaumudi, written by Vitthalesa,
the grandson of Ramachandra.
प्रक्रियासंग्रह a work on grammar by
Abhayacandra in which the Sutras
of Sakatayana's Sabdanusasana are
arranged in the form of different
sections dealing with the different
topics of grammar.
प्रगद्यादि a class of words headed by
the word प्रगदिन् to which the tad.
affix य ( ञ्य ) is added in the four
senses prescribed in P. IV.2.67-70;
e.g. प्रागद्यम् , शारद्यम् कौविदार्यम् etc.; cf.
KaS. on P.IV.2.80
प्रगाथ a couple of Vedic hymns
divided into three hymns for pur-
poses of singing as Saman; cf. यत्र
द्वे ऋचौ प्रग्रथनेन तिस्रः क्रियन्ते स प्रगाथनात्
प्रकर्षगानाद्वा प्रगाथ इत्युच्यते Kas. on P.IV
2.55.
प्रगीत a fault of utterance or recital
where a simple word in conversa-
tion or recital is uttered in a tone
proper for singing or in a manner
suitable for singing; cf प्रगीत:
सामवदुच्चारितः Kaiy. on M.Bh.Ahni.1.
प्रगृहीतlit. held as it is, uncombin-
able by euphonic rules; the same
as प्रगृह्य.
प्रगृहीतपदा a description of the Samh-
hita text of the Veda in which a
pragrhya vowel preceding another
vowel is held up ( प्रगृह्य ) i.e. kept
as it is, without any euphonic
combination; cf. सहोदयास्ताः प्रग्रहीतपदाः
सर्वत्रैव त्र्यक्षरान्तास्तु नैव R. Pr. II. 27.
|
प्रगृह्य a term used in the Pratisakhya
works and by Panini, in the sense
of a vowel which is not combined
with the following vowel by rules
of euphony; e. g सुजाते अश्वसूनृते, अमी
अत्र etc; cf. R. Pr. I. 28 and 29;
P. I. 1.11-19 and VI.1.125.
प्रग्रह absence of euphonic change; the.
term is frequently used in the
Taittiriya Pratisakhya; cf. T. Pr.
I.60, IV.1.1-54.
प्रघट्टक name given to the subdivisions
of chapters or sections in certain
books.
प्रचय (1) a specific feature or quality
( धर्म ) of the grave (अनुदात्त) accent
when a vowel, accented grave, is
preceded by a स्वरित (circumflex .
vowel) and is followed upon by
another grave-accented vowel.
These grave vowels in succession,
i.e. the grave vowels which are not
followed by an acute or a cir-
cumflex vowel are uttered neither
distinctly circumflex nor distinctly
grave; cf also R. Pr, III.II-14.
They are uttered like the acute,
but slightly so; e. g. the vowels
after मे and before ति in इमं मे गङ्गे'
यमुने सरस्वति; cf. स्वरितात्संहितायामनुदात्तानां
प्रचय उदात्तश्रुतिः T. Pr. XXI.10, 11
also cf. P.I.2.39, where the term
एकश्रुति is used for the word प्रचय;
(2) the connection of one word
with many words; e.g. राज्ञो गोश्चाश्वश्च
पुरुषश्च where राज्ञः is connected with
गौ, अश्व and पुरुष; cf. प्रचये समासप्रतिषेधो:
वक्तव्य: M. Bh. on II.1.1 Vart, 6.
प्रज्ञादि a class of words headed by the
word प्रज्ञ to which the tad. affix अ
(अण् ) is added without any change
of sense: e.g. प्राज्ञः, वाणिजः etc:; cf.
प्रज्ञ एय प्राज्ञः । प्राज्ञी स्त्री । यस्यास्तु प्रज्ञा
विद्यते सा प्राज्ञा भवति | Kas. on P.V.
4. 38.
प्रणयत composition ( of the original
|
Sutra work); cf. द्वयमपि चैतत् प्रमाणम् ।
उभयथा सूत्रप्रणयनात् Kas.on P. IV.2.
117: cf. also Kas. on P.V.1.94 and
V.4.21 .
प्रण्यस्त silent: cf. अनादेशे प्रण्यस्ता जिह्वा T.
Pr. II.20 explained by Uvvata as
अनादेशे अनुपदेशे जिह्वा प्रण्यस्ता तूष्णींभूता भवति।
प्रतिकण्ठम् (1) vocally, pronouncedly,
expressly without any attention to
the derivation or the formation of
the word; ( 2 ) irregular forma-
tion; c.. सर्वशास्त्रार्थं प्रतिकण्ठमुक्तम् where
प्रतिकण्ठ is explained as निपातन by
Uvvata; cf. प्रतिकण्ठं निपातनम् : उत्सर्गवि-
धिभिः साधयितुमशक्या अपि प्रयोगविशेषा
निपात्यन्ते शास्त्रसंपूर्तये. Uvvata on R. Pr.
I.23.
प्रतिक्रम recital in the reverse order as
in some of the artificial recitations
of the Samhita text such as जटा, घन
etc.
प्रतिजनादि a class of words headed by
the word प्रतिजन to which the tad.
affix ईन ( खञ् ) is added in the
sense of 'good at’ ( तत्र साधुः ); cf.
प्रतिजने साधुः प्रातिजनीनः, जने जने साधुरित्यर्थः
Kas. on P. IV.4.99.
प्रतिज्ञा प्रतिज्ञान also; hypothesis, express
tenet in a Sastra or convention: cf.
अाडः स्थः प्रतिज्ञान इति वक्तव्यम् । अस्ति
सकारमातिष्ठते । आगमौ गुणवृद्धी अतिष्ठते ।
विकारौ गुणवृद्धीं आतिष्ठते Mf.Bh. on P.I.3.
22; cf also प्रतिज्ञानुनासिक्याः पाणिनीयाः
Kas. on P.I.3.2,VII.1.1, प्रतिज्ञास्वरिताः
पाणिनीयाः Kas.on P.I.3.11.
प्रतिद्वन्द्वभावेिन् opponent, opposing:
अन्तरङ्गं बहिरङ्गमिति प्रतिद्वन्द्वाभाविंनौ एतौ
पक्षौ। M.Bh. on P. VIII.3.15.
प्रतिनिर्दिश्यमान predicate, as opposed
to the subject; cf. उद्देश्यप्रतिनिर्दिश्यमान-
घौरेक्यमापादयत्सर्वनाम पर्यायेण तत्तैल्लिङ्गभाक् M.
Bh.Pradipa.
प्रतिपत्ति knowledge, understanding;
cf. तस्मादनभ्युपायः शब्दानां प्रतिपत्तौ प्रतिपद-
प्राठः। M.Bh. on Ahn. 1 ; also cf.
MBh. on P. I. 1. 20. Vart.5 I.1
|
44,46 etc.
प्रतिपत्तिगरीयस्त्व difficulty in under-
standing; requiring an effort to
understand the sense; cf. योगविभागे
तु प्रतियोगं भिन्नबुद्ध्युदयाद् व्यक्तं प्रतिपतिगरीय-
स्त्वम् Puru. Pari. 98.
प्रतिपत्तिगौरव difficulty in understand-
ing; requiring a longer time in un-
derstanding the sense: cf. एवं हि प्रति-
पत्तिगौरवंं स्यात् Sira. Pari. 50. See
प्रतिपत्तिगरीयस्त्व.
प्रतिपत्तिलाघव facility of understand-
ing: cf. प्रतिपत्तिलाघवार्थं ज्ञाजनोर्जा इति
दीर्घान्तादेशविधानम् Sira. Pari. 91.
प्रतिपदपाठ (1)recital ofeach and every
word; (2) enumeration of every
word; cf. किं शब्दानां प्रतिपत्तौ प्रतिपदपाठः
कर्तव्यः, M. Bh. on Ahn. 1.
प्रतिपदविधान express statement by a
definite wording; cf. एवं तर्हि उभयमनेन
क्रियते अपवादविषये चानिवृत्तिः उत्सर्गविषये च
प्रतिपदविधानम् । M. Bh. on III 3. 12.
Vart.l: cf. also प्रतिपदविधाना च षष्ठी न
समस्येत । का पुनः षष्ठी प्रतिपदविधाना का
कृद्योगा । सर्वा षष्ठी प्रतिपदविधाना शेषलक्षणां
वर्जयित्वा । क्रतृकर्मणोः कृति इति या षष्ठी सा
कृद्योगा; M. Bh. on P. II. 2.8 and
II.2.10.
प्रतिपदविधि an injunction or opera-
tion stating expressly the word or
words for which it is meant; cf.
यं विधिं प्रति उपदेशोनर्थकः स विधिर्बाध्यते ।
दत्वं प्रति नुमः प्रतिपदविधिरनर्थकः, रोः पुनर्नि-
मित्तमेव. M.Bh. on P. VIII. 2.72.
प्रतिपदोक्त expressly stated as opposed
to implied or suggested; cf. लक्षण-
प्रतिपदोक्तयोः प्रतिपदोक्तस्यैव ग्रहणम्,. Par.
Sek.Pari.105: cf. also विशेषेण प्रतिपादितं
प्रतिपदोक्तं Puru. Pari. 3.
प्रतिप्रसव lit. bringing into life again;
the term is used in the sense of a
counter-exception; cf. याजकादिभिश्चेति
पुनः कारकषष्ठीसमासप्रतिप्रसवाद् ब्राह्मणयाजकादि-
षु उत्तरपदप्रकृतिस्वर एव । Bhasavrtti on
II.2.16.
|
प्रतियेगिन् negative counterpart;cf. न
चान्तरेण प्रतियोगिनं स्पर्धा भवति M. Bh. on
II. 1.69. Vart. 6; also M.Bh.on
VIII. 8.4 Vart. 8; corresponding
term; ct. प्रथमग्रहणं च तियोग्यपेक्षत्वान्नो-
पयुज्यते Kas. on V. 3.1.
प्रतिरूपक similar in appearance: cf.
उपसर्गविभक्तिस्वरप्रतिरूपकाश्च निपाता भवन्ति
M. Bh. on P. II. 2.24 Vart. 22, as
also on P. III. 4.2; cf. उपसर्गप्रतिरूपका
निपाताः, तिङन्तप्रतिरूपका निपाताः; cf also
अस्ति च समासप्रतिरूपको रूढिशब्दः स्वतन्त्र इति
Nyasa on P. I. 4.54.
प्रतिलोम lit. regressive; a kind of
Sandhi or euphonic combination,
in which the consonant precedes
and the vowel comes after it; e. g.
हव्यवाडग्निः; cf. प्रतिलोमसंधिषु व्यञ्जनानि पूर्वाणि
स्वरा उत्तरे; Uvvata on R. Pr. I. 4.
प्रतिवर्ण for every letter; corresponding
to every letter; cf. अनर्थकास्तु वर्णाः
प्रतिवर्णमर्थानुपलब्धेः M. Bh. on Ahnika
2, Siva sutra 5.
प्रतिविधान counteraction; solving a
difficulty by taking the necessary
action; cf. अयमिदानीं स प्रतिविधानकालः
M. Bh. on P. VII. 4.60 Vart. 4;
cf. also तत्र प्रातविधानं द्विर्वचननिमित्ते
अचीत्युच्यते, Kas. on P. VI. 1.2; cf.
also the usual expression प्रतिविधेयं
दोषेषु M. Bh. on I. 1.39, I. 3.10,
4.1.l etc,
प्रतिषिद्ध a rule or operation which is
prohibited or prevented from
application by a specific negation
of it by another rule or operation
laid down to prohibit it. Gene-
rally the prohibited rule does not
apply again; cf. सकृद्रतौ विप्रतिषेधे यद्वाधितं
तद्वाधितमेव Par, Sek.Pari. 40; cf.नोत्सहते
प्रतिषिद्धा सती बाधितुम् । M.Bh. on P. I.
1.43. The word प्रातिषिद्ध which is
generally used in ancient works
appears to be an earlier word as
compared with निषिद्ध which is used
by later grammarians.
|
प्रतिषेध prohibition, negation, prohibi-
tion of a rule or operation;
generaliy प्रतिषेध or प्रसज्यप्रतिषेध is laid
down by the use of the negative
particle ( नञ् ) connected with a
verbal activity, and not with a
noun in a compound in which
case the negation is named पर्युदास;
cf. प्रसज्ज्यप्रतिषेधो यः क्रियया सह यत्र नञ् ।
पयुदासः स विज्ञेयः थत्रोत्तरपदेन नञ् ।
प्रतिषेधक a word expressing a prohibi-
tion, e. g. the negative particle न
(नञ्); cf. नेति प्रतिषेधकः T. Pr.XXII.8.
प्रतिषेधबलीयस्त्व the priority of consi-
deration given to rules laying
down a prohibition, for instance,
the prohibition of guna or vrddhi
by the rule ङ्किति च P. I. 1.5 after
giving due consideration to which,
the injunctions i. e the guna and
vidhi rules are to be applied; cf.
निषेधाश्च बलीयांसः Par. Sek. Pari. 112;
cf. also. एवमप्युभयोः सावकाशयोः प्रति-
षेधबलीयस्त्वात्प्रतिषेधः प्राप्नोति, M.Bh. P. on
III. 1.30.
प्रतिषेध्य what is prohibited, as oppos-
ed to विधेय; cf. औत्त्वं च प्रतिषेघ्यम् ;
M.Bh. on P.I. 1.47, I.1.51.
प्रतिसंस्करण editing with improve-
ment, with an attempt to restore
the correct version or the original
text in the place of the corrupt
one sometimes suitable additions
and improvements are also made;
e. g. चरकप्रतिसंस्करण attributed to
Patanjali.
प्रतिहार excessive contact with the
sound-producing organ which is
looked upon as a fault; cf. वर्गेषु
जिह्वाप्रथनं चतुर्षु ग्रासो मुख्ये प्रतिहारश्चतुर्थे ।
चतुर्थे वर्गे ( तवर्गे ) प्रतिहारः अतिप्रयत्नो नाम
दोषो भवति । Uvvata on R. Pr.XIV.7.
प्रतीतार्थ whose sense is clear and
which hence does not require any
further explanation; cf. यथा चापि
प्रतीतार्थानि स्युस्तथैनान्याचक्षीरन् । Nir. I.13.
|
प्रतृण्ण lit. broken or split up; the
separated words of the Samhita of
the Vedas i. e. the Padapatha; the
recitation of the Padapatha.; cf.
शौद्धाक्षरोच्चारणं च प्रतृण्णम् R. Pr. I. 3.
प्रत्यक्षक्रिय a word in which the verbal
activity is actually noticed, as for
instance, verbs and krt formations;
the term is used as an antonym of
प्रकल्पक्रिय.
प्रत्यय affix, suffix, a termination,
as contrasted with प्रकृति the base;
cf. प्रत्याय्यते अर्थः अनेन इति प्रत्ययः; cf. also
अर्थे संप्रत्याययति स प्रत्ययः M.Bh. on III.
1.l Vart. 8; The word प्रत्यय is used
in the Pratisakhya works in the
sense of 'following' or 'that which
follows', e. g. स्पर्शे चोषः प्रत्यये पूर्वपद्यः
R. Pr. I. 30 which is explained
by Uvvata as उषः इत्ययं ( शब्दः )
पूर्वपदावयवः सन् स्पर्शे प्रत्यये परभूते इति यावत्;
रेफिसंज्ञो भवति; Uvvata on R. Pr. I.30;
cf. प्रत्येति पश्चादागच्छति इति प्रत्ययः परः T.
Pr. V. 7; cf also V. Pr, III. 8.
Pratyaya or the suffix is generally
placed after the base; cf, प्रत्ययः,
परश्च P. III. I. 1,2; but sometimes
it is placed before the base; e. g.
बहुपटुः cf. विभाषा सुपो बहुच् पुरस्तात्तु P.
V. 3.68. The conjugational signs
(शप् , श्यन् etc.), the signs of tenses
and moods ( च्लि, सिच् , स्य, ताम् etc.)
and the compound endings(समासान्त)
are all called pratyayas according
fo Panini's grammar, as they are
all given in the jurisdiction(अधिकार)
of the rule प्रत्ययः III.1.1, which
extends upto the end of the fifth
chapter ( अध्याय ). There are six
main kinds of affixes given in
grammar सुप्प्रत्यय, तिङ्प्रत्यय, कृत्प्रत्यय ,
तद्धितप्रत्यय, धातुप्रत्यय (e.g. in the roots
चिकीर्ष, कण्डूय etc.) and स्त्रीप्रत्यय. The
word प्रत्यय is used in the sense of
realization, in which case the root
इ in the word त्यय means'knowing'
|
according to the maxim सर्वे गत्यर्था
ज्ञानार्थाः; cf. मन्त्रार्थप्रत्ययाय Nir. I.15.
प्रत्ययग्रहणपरिभाषा the guiding rule
that when an affix ( प्रत्यय ) is
given in a rule as a निमित्त (causing
something), the affix denotes a
word-form which begins with that
to which that affix has been added
and ends with the affix itself; cf.
प्रत्ययग्रहणे यस्मात् स विहितस्तदादेस्तदन्तस्य च
ग्रह्यणम् Par. Sek. Pari. 23. The rule
यञियोश्च, which prescribes the affix
फक् (आयन), has the word यञ् and इञ्
which respectively mean यञन्त and
इञन्त; in the word परमगार्ग्यायण from
परमगार्ग्य the word गार्ग्य is looked
upon as यञन्त to which फक् (अायन) is
affixed and hence the word परमगार्ग्या-
यण is arrived at and not पारमगार्ग्य.
प्रत्ययधातु a term applied to secondary
roots which are formed by adding
affixes like णिच् , सन् , यङ् etc. to
primary roots or by the addition
of affixes like क्विप्, क्यच् , कायच् etc.
to nouns; e. g. कामय, ह्यारय, चिकीर्ष,
जिहीर्ष, जेघ्रीय,चेकीय, गङ्गीय, राजाय, पुत्रकाम्य
etc.; cf. सनाद्यन्ता धातवः P.1II.. 1.32;
cf also प्रत्ययधातु । गोपायति, धूपायति,
ऋतीयते M. Bh. on VI. 1.162 Vart.3.
प्रत्ययपाद a conventional name given
to the first pada of the third
adhyaya of Panini's Astadhyayi
which begins with the rule प्रत्ययः
III. 1.1.
प्रत्ययलक्षण an operation caused by an
affix which takes place even though
the affix is elided: e.g. the term षद
is applied to अग्निचित्, सोमसुत् etc.
on account of the words ending
with a case affix although the
affix of the nom. sing. has been
elided; cf. प्रत्ययलोपे प्रत्ययलक्षणम्. P.I.1.
62 and Kas, thereon.
प्रत्ययविधि a rule prescribing the addi-
tion of a suffix; cf. यस्मात्प्रत्ययाविधि-
स्तदादि प्रत्ययेङ्गम्, P.I.3.13.
|
प्रत्ययंस्वर प्रत्यासत्ति 247
प्रत्ययस्वर an accent caused by virtue
of the affix which is added; cf.
यथैव हि निपातनस्वरः प्रकृतिस्वरं बाधेत एवं
प्रत्ययस्वरमपि बाधेत । लतिशिष्टत्वाप्रत्ययस्वरो
भविष्यति । M. Bh. on P. I.I 56 Vart.
23.
प्रत्ययान्त ( प्रकृति ) a base ending in an
affix, a secondary base as opposed
to the original base, which is des-
cribed to be of six kinds. सुप्प्रत्ययान्ता
(प्रकृतिः) as in अहंयुः, सायंतनम् etc.;
तिङ्प्रत्ययान्ता as in पचतितराम् , आस्तिकः,
पचतभृज्जता etc.; कृत्प्रत्ययान्ता as in कृत्रिमम्
सांराविणम् etc.; तद्धितप्रत्ययान्ता as in
गार्ग्यायणः, तत्रत्यः etc.; धातुसंज्ञाप्रत्ययान्ता as
in चिकीर्षा, कण्डूया etc.; स्त्रीप्रत्ययान्ता as in
गङ्गेयः, गौरेयः, काद्रवेयः etc.
प्रत्ययार्थ the meaning of an affix.
Generally meanings are assigned
to affixes when they are prescribed.
When the meanings are not assign-
ed, the affix is supposed to bear
the sense of the base; cf. अनिर्दिष्टार्थाः
प्रत्ययाः स्वार्थे Par. Sek. on Pari. 113.
The sense given by a word in
language is the composite sense of
the base and the affix together; cf.
प्रकृतिप्रत्ययौ सहार्थं ब्रूतः । न केवला प्रकृतिः
प्रयोक्तव्या, न केवलः प्रत्ययः । M. Bh. on
P.I.2.64 Vart. 5.
प्रत्यवमर्श reference (made to some-
thing) by a word , cf. ताभ्यामिति
संप्रदानार्थ प्रत्यवमर्शः Kas.on P. III.4.75;
cf.also तन्नामिकाभ्य इति सर्वनाम्ना प्रत्ययप्रकृतेः
प्रत्यवमर्शः Kas. on P.IV.1.113.
प्रत्याख्यान rejection of a rule or a
word or words in a rule shown as
redundant, their purpose being
shown as served otherwise; cf. लुपि
युक्तवद् व्यक्तिवचने इति पूर्वाचार्याणामेवेदं सूत्रम् ।
तथा चास्य प्रत्याख्यानं भविष्यति । तदशिष्यं
संज्ञाप्रमाणत्वादिति । Kas. on I.2.51.
प्रत्याख्यानपक्ष an alternative which
proposes the rejection of something
such as a rule or its part; cf. यदि
प्रत्याख्यान पक्षः इदमपि प्रत्याख्यायते M. Bh.
|
on Siva Sutra 4; cf also अदीवयुरिति
पदकारस्च प्रत्याख्यानपक्षे उदाहरणमुपपन्नं भवति
Vyadi Pari. 42.
प्रत्याख्यानवादिन् one who advocates the
rejection of something, an oppo-
nent, an objector; cf प्रत्याख्यानवादी
अाह-नास्त्यत्र विशेष इति Kaiy. on M. Bh.
on P. VI.4.22 Vart. 15.
प्रत्यादान lit. taking again; uttering a
word already utttered in the
Krama and other recitations of
the Vedas; cf. क्रमो द्वाभ्यामतिकम्य प्रत्या-
दायोत्तरं तयो: । प्रत्यादाय पुनर्गृहीत्वा Uvvata
on R. Pr. X-1.
प्रत्यापत्ति restitution, restoration to the
previous wording; cf. प्रातिपदिकस्य च
प्रत्यापत्तिर्वक्तव्या M. Bh. on P. VI.3.34
Vart.2; restoration to the previous
nature; cf. अकारस्य प्रत्यापत्तौ दीर्घप्रतिषेधः ।
खट्वा,माला । M.Bh. on P. VIII.4.68.
प्रत्याम्नाय literally, repetition in a con-
trary way; in the Pratisakhya
literature, the word refers to the
repetition of a Vedic passage;
repetition by pupils after hearing
from the preceptor ; cf. प्रत्याम्नायः
पुनर्वचनं Uvvata on R. Pr. XV. 9.
प्रत्यारम्भः (1) statement after prohibi-
tion lit. commencing again; in-
ducing a person to do something
after he has refused to do it by
repeating the order or request for
generally by beginning the appeal
with the word नह; e.g. नह भोक्ष्यसे ? नह
अध्येप्यसे; cf. नह प्रत्यारम्भे P. VIII. 1.31
and Kasika and Nyāsa thereon.
(2) commencement or laying down
again in spite of previous mention;
cf. शेषवचनात्तु योसौ प्रत्यारम्भात्कृतो बहुव्रीहिः
M. Bh. on P. VI-3.46.
प्रत्यासङ्ग close contact or association;
तरतमयेाश्च अतिशयते अदक्षिणप्रत्यासङ्गे। प्रत्यासङ्गः
प्रत्यासन्नता V. Pr. V. 2.
प्रत्यासत्ति immediate proximity; close
contact; the same as प्रत्यासङ्ग which
|
प्रत्यासत्तिन्याय प्रथम 248
see above; cf. हेतुमण्णिचो विधिः प्रतिषेधोपि
प्रत्यासत्तेस्तस्यैव न्याय्यः Kas. on P. I 3.88.
cf. also Kas. on VII.1.95.
प्रत्यासत्तिन्याय or प्रत्यासतिवचन a dictum
that a word should, as fair as possi-
ble, be construed with the nearest
word; cf. अनन्तरस्य विधिः प्रतिषेधो वेत्यर्थः
प्रतिपत्तिन्यायलभ्यः Sira. Pari. 48.
प्रत्याहार lit. bringing together; bring-
ing together of several letters ( or
words in a few cases, such as roots
or nouns ) by mentioning the first
and the last only for the sake of
brevity; the term प्रत्याहार is gene-
rally used in connection with brief
terms such as अण्, अक् , अच् , हल् and
the like, created by Panini in his
grammar by taking any particular
letter and associating it with any
mute final letter ( अनुबन्ध ) of the
fourteen Sivasutras, with a view to
include all letters beginning with
the letter uttered and ending with
the letter which precedes the
( mute ) letter. The practice of
using such abbreviations was in
existence before Panini, possibly in
the grammar attributed to Indra.
The term प्रत्याहार is not actually us-
ed by Panini; it is found in the Rk.
Tantra; cf. प्रत्याहारार्थो वर्णोनुबन्धो व्यञ्जनम्
R.T.I.3. The term appears to have
come into use after Panini. Panini
has not given any definition of
the term प्रत्याहार. He has simply
given the method of forming
the Pratyaharas and he has
profusely used them; cf. आदिरन्त्येन
सहेता P. I. 1.71. The word कृञ्
in P. III.1.40 and तृन् in P. II.
3.69 are used as Pratyaharas. For
a list of the Pratyharas which
are used by Panini see Kasika on
the Maheswara Sutras.
प्रत्याहारसूत्र a term for the fourteen
Siva Sutras which are utilized for
the formation of Pratyaharas.
|
प्रत्याहारसूत्रविचार a short treatise ex-
plaining the pratyharas अण् , अट्,
अश् etc. in the grammar of Panini;
one such work is written by a sou-
thern grammarian named तिमण्णा.
प्रत्याहाराह्निक name given to the second
Ahnika of the Mahabhasya which
explains the Siva Sutras अइउण्,
ऋऌक् , etc., and hence naturally dis-
cusses the Pratyaharas.
प्रत्युच्चार repetition especially of what
has been recited by the preceptor;
cf. प्रत्युच्चार्यैतद्वचनं परस्य शिष्यस्य स्याद् भो इति
चोदना वा, R. Pr. XV. 8.
प्रत्युज्जीवन bringing to life again; the
term is used in the sense of प्रतिप्रसव
or counter exception.
प्रत्युदाहरण counter instance. In
order to explain the wording of
a grammatical rule clearly, it is
customary to give along with the
instances of the rule (where the
rule has been effectively employ-
ed), a few words which would
have resulted into other faulty
words by the application of the
particular rule in case that rule
had not been stated or a word or
more of it had been omitted; cf.
न केवलानि चर्चापदानि व्याख्यानं वृद्धिः आत्
ऐच् इति । किं तर्हि । उदाहरणं प्रत्युदाहरणं
वाक्याध्याहारः इत्येतत् समुदितं व्याख्यानं
भवति । M. Bh. in Ahnika 1.
प्रथम lit, premier, first; the word is
used in connection with the per-
sonal affixes तिप् , तस्, झि ( अन्ति ) of
verbal forms. See the word पुरुष
above; cf. अस्तिर्भवन्तीपरः प्रथमपुरुषः अप्रयु-
ज्यमानोप्यस्तीति । वृक्षः प्लक्षः। M. Bh.
on P. II. 3.1 and 4. The word
प्रथम is used in the Pratisakhya
works in the sense of the first
consonants of the five vargas or
groups of consonants; cf. प्रथमैर्द्विती-
यास्तृतीयैश्चतुर्थाः V. Pr. IV. 110 cf.
प्रथमतृतीयादीनामादेशादित्वादेत्वाभावः, M.Bh.
|
on P. VI. 4.120 Vart 3, also cf.
Katantra I. 4.1 and Hem. I. 3.35.
The word is also used (in the
feminine gender) in the sense of
the case affixes सु ( स् ), औ, जस्
( अस् ) of the nominative case.
The word is also used in the
sense of the premier accent उदात्त
(acute); cf. प्रथमभाविनः उदात्तभाविनः
Uvvata on R. Pr. III. 8.
प्रथमा the nominative case; case affix-
es of the nominative case. cf.
प्रातिपदिकार्थलिङ्गपरिमाणवचनमात्रे प्रथमा P.II.
3.46.
प्रदर्शन illustration; cf. विदांकुर्वन्तु इति ।
इतिकरणः प्रदर्शनार्थः न केवलं प्रथमपुरुषबहुवचनं
किं तर्हि सर्वाण्येव लोड्वचनान्यनुप्रयुज्यन्ते । Kas.
on P. III.1.41; cf. also किमर्थो योग-
विभागः । प्रदर्शनार्थः । Kas. on P.I.2.59.
प्रदान mode of articulation, the same
as करण.
प्रदीप popular name of the famous
commentary on the Mahabhasya
of Patanjali written by the reput-
ed grammarian Kaiyata in the
eleventh century A. D. The corn-
mentary is a very scholarly and
critical one and really does justice
to the well-known compliment
given to it, viz. that the Pradipa
has kept the Mahabhasya alive
which otherwise would have re-
mained unintelligible and conse-
quently become lost. The commen-
tary प्रदीप is based on the commen-
tary महाभाष्यदीपिका,or प्रदीपिका written
by Bhartrhari, which is available
at present only in a fragmentary
form. The Pradipa is to this day
looked upon as the single com-
mentary on the Mahabhasya in
spite of the presence of a few other
commentaries on it which are all
thrown into the back-ground by it.
प्रदीपकार Kaiyatabhatta, the author
of the fatmous commentary प्रदीप
32
|
on the Mahabhasya, which see
above.
प्रदीपविवरण called also उद्द्योत written
by the well-known grammarian
Nagesabhatta of Varanasi who
flourished in the first half of the
eighteenth century.
प्रदेश lit. district; sphere of applica-
tion, place of the application of
a rule. The word is frequently
used in this sense in the Kasika
Vritti; cf. प्रत्ययप्रदेशाः प्रत्ययलोपे प्रत्यय-
लक्षणमित्येवमादयः Kas. on P. III.1.1 .
cf. also अनुदात्तप्रदेशाः अनुदात्तौ सुप्पितौ
इत्यादयः Kas. on P. I. 2.30. The
word प्रदेश is also used in the sense
of the place of use or utility; cf.
संज्ञाशास्त्रस्य तु कार्यकालपक्षे न पृथग्वाक्यार्थबोधः
किं तु प्रदेशवाक्येन सहैव । ... कार्यज्ञानं च
प्रदेशदेश एव Par. Sek. Pari. 3.
प्रदेशशास्त्र a rule, laying down a
positive original injunction as
opposed to the अपवादशास्त्र;cf. यैः अर्थाः
प्रदिश्यन्ते तानि प्रदेशशास्त्राणि com. on
R. Pr. XI.35.
प्रधान (1) the principal thing as oppo-
sed to the subordinate one; some-
thing which has got an indepen-
dent purpose of its own and is not
meant for another; प्रधानमुपसर्जनमिति
च संबन्धिशब्दावेतौ M.Bh. on P. I.2.43
V.5; cf. also प्रधानाप्रधानयोः प्रधाने कार्य-
संप्रत्ययः Par. Sek. Pari. 97; (2) pre-
dominant of main importance; cf.
पूर्वपदार्थप्रधानोव्ययीभावः etc. M. Bh. on
II. 1.6, 20, 49 II.2.6 etc; (3) pri-
mary as opposed to secondary;
cf. गौणे कर्मणि दुह्यादेः प्रधाने नीहृकृष्वहाम् ।
cf. also प्रधानकर्मण्याख्येये लादीनाहुर्द्विकर्मणाम् ।
अप्रधाने दुहादीनाम् M.Bh.on I.4.51
प्रधानशिष्ट prominently mentioned as
opposed to अन्वाचयशिष्टः cf. कर्तुः क्यङ्
सलोपश्च । प्रधानशिष्टः क्यङ् अन्वाचयशिष्टः सलोपः
M. Bh. on III.1. 11; cf. also प्रधाना-
न्वाचयशिष्टयोः प्रधाने संप्रत्ययः Vyadi Pari.
67.
|
प्रध्वंसिन् disappearing; cf. उच्चरितप्रध्वं-
सिनोनुबन्धाः Vyadi Pari. ll.
प्रपञ्च amplification, further expla-
nation,clarification. The expres-
sion पूर्वस्यैवायं प्रपञ्चः or तस्यैवायं प्रपञ्चः is
very frequently used in the Kasika
vrtti; cf. Kas. on P.II. 1.33,37,41,
58, II.4.28, III.2.6I etc.
प्रपाठक a term used for a division of
a work by an ancient writer, as for
instance in the case of the Athar-
vapratisakhya.
'प्रभा (1), name of a commentary on
the Sabdakaustubha by Ragha-
vendracarya Gajendragadkar; (2)
name of a commentary on Kai-
yata's Mahabhasyapradipa.
प्रभाचन्द्र a Jain grammarian who
wrote a learned commentary
named Nyasa on the Amoghavrtti
of Amoghavarsa.
प्रभृति a passage or a word at the com-
mencement; cf. इरावतीप्रभृति अा दाधार
T. Pr. IV. 22; प्लुतादिप्रभृतीनि च R.
Pr. X. 4 तिष्ठद्गुप्रभृतीनि च P.II.1.17.
प्रभेद smaller division, sub-division.
प्रमाण (1) authority; authoritative
proof; cf. लोकः अवश्यं शब्देषु प्रमाणम्
M. Bh. on I. 2.64 Vart. 29; (2)
measurement, measure; cf. प्रमाणे
द्वयसज्दघ्नत्र्मात्रचः P. V. 2.37; प्रमाणत;
अकारो गुणः प्राप्तः Kas. on P. I. 1.50.
प्रमाद inadvertance, negligence; cf.
प्रमादकृतमाचार्यस्य शक्यमकर्तुम् M. Bh. on
P. IV. 2.70; cf. also अन्ये तु गौरादि-
ष्वेतयेाः प्रमादपाठमाहुः Kaiy. of P. I.
1.72. Vart. 4.
प्रयतन the same as प्रयत्न; see प्रयत्न.
प्रयत्न (1) effort; the word is used in
connection with the effort made
for producing sound; cf. तुल्यास्यप्रयत्नं
सवर्णम् P.1.1.9 these efforts are
described to be of two kinds बाह्य
and आभ्यन्तर of which the latter
are considered in determining the
|
cognate nature of letters ( सावर्ण्य );
cf.अाभ्यन्तरप्रयत्नाः सवर्णसंज्ञायामाश्रीयन्ते;Kas.
on P. I. 1.9; (2) specific measure
taken for a particular purpose
such as marking a letter with a
particular tone or accent or
dividing a rule, or laying down
a modificatory rule or the like; cf.
सैवाननुवृत्तिः शब्देनाख्यायते प्रयत्नाधिक्येन पूर्व-
सूत्रेपि संबन्धार्थम् Kas. on P. IV. 3.22.
प्रयुक्ताख्यातमञ्जरी a small treatise on
verbal forms by सारङ्गकवि.
प्रयोग (1) employment or use of a
word in language and literature
about which, laying down rules
is looked upon as the purpose of
grammar; cf. प्रयोगमूलत्वाद् व्याकरणस्मृतेः
Kaiy.on P. V. 1.16, लोकतोर्थप्रयुक्ते
शब्दप्रयोगे शास्त्रेण धर्मनियमो यथा लौकिक-
वैदिकेषु M. Bh. Ahnika I. Vart. 1;
(2) use of speech; utterance; cf.
मध्यमेन स वाक्प्रयोगः प्रणवात्मकः कर्तव्यः, T.
Pr. XVIII. 4.
प्रयोगनियम general rules or principles
laid down regarding the use of
words in language and literature
such as (l) a word recognised as
correct should always be used, cf.
एवमिहापि समानायामर्थगतौ शब्देन चापशब्देन
च धर्मनियमः क्रियते शब्देनैवार्थोभिधेयो नाप-
शब्देनेति । एवंक्रियमाणमभ्युदयकारि भवति M.
Bh. on P. I. I. Ahnika l, (2)
never a base alone or an affix
alone should be used, but always
a base with the necessary affix
should be used; cf. यावता समयः कृतो
न केवला प्रकृतिः प्रयोक्तव्या न केवलः प्रत्ययः
M. Bh, on P. I. 2.64 Vart. 8,
also on P. III. 1.94 Vart. 3; (3)
when the sense is already express-
ed by a word, a word repeating
the sense should not be used; cf.
उक्तार्थानामप्रयोगः. Besides these, many
minor regulations of the type of
Paribhasas are laid down by
grammarians. For details see
Paribhashasamgraha Introduction.
|
प्रयोगपल्लव a small treatise in verses
on the conjugation of roots,
written by Bhavanatha Misra, son
of Ramapati.
प्रयोगमुखमण्डन known also by the
name प्रयोगविवेक, an elementary
treatise on syntax, attributed to
वररुचि, who must, of course, have
been different from the ancient
grammarian वररुचि.
प्रयोगरत्नमाला name of a recognised
treatise on grammar written by
पुरुषोत्तमविद्यावागीश of Bengal in the
fourteenth century. The treatise
explains many words which, al-
though current in language and
literature, cannot be easily formed
by rules of grammar. The author
has tried to form them by apply-
ing rules of grammar given in
the grammatical systems of Panini
and Katantra. The alphabet given
in this treatise is according to the
system of the Tantra Sastra which
shows a scholarship of the author
in that branch The grammar
was studied much in Bengal and
Assam.
प्रयोगविधि an elementary work on
the three constructions which has
no name of the author mentioned.
प्रयोगविषय sphere or domain of the
use of words; the whole Vedic
and classical recognized litera-
ture: cf महान् हि शब्दस्य प्रयोगविषयः ।
सप्तद्वीपा वसुमती त्रयो लोकाः चत्वारो वेदाः
साङ्गाः सरहस्याः बहुधा विाभन्नाः, एकशतमध्व-
र्युशाखाः, सहस्रवर्त्मा सामवेदः, एकविंशतिधा
बाह् वृच्यम् , नवधाथर्वणो वेदो वाकोवाक्यामितिहासः
पुराणं वैद्यकमित्येतावाञ्शब्दस्य प्रयोगविषयः M.
Bh. Ahnika 1. Vrt. 5
प्रयोजक causing another to do;
causal agent; cf. कुर्वाणं प्रयुङ्क्ते इति
प्रयोजकः Ks. on P. I. 4.55.
प्रयोजन object, motive or purpose
in undertaking a particular thing;
|
the word is used although rarely,
in the sense of a cause also; cf.
इमान्यस्य प्रयोजनानि अध्येयं व्याकरणम् M.
Bh. Ahnika 1. For the advan-
tages of the study of Vyakarana,
see M. Bh. Ahnika 1. See also
Vyakarana Mahabhasya Vol. VII
pp.226,227, D.E. Society's edition.
प्रयोज्य that which is employed or
incited or urged; the word which
is the subject in the primitive con-
struction and becomes an object in
the causal construction, and as a re-
sult, which is put in the accusative
case being प्रयोज्यकर्म. As, however,
the प्रयोज्यकर्म originally occupies the
place of the subject in the primitive
construction, the term प्रयोज्यकर्ता
( प्रयोज्यश्चासौ कर्ता च ) is often used in
connection with it, as contrasted
with the term प्रयोजककर्ता which is
used with respect to the subject in
the causal construction; cf. इह च
भेदिका देवदत्तस्य यज्ञदत्तस्य काष्ठानामिति प्रयोज्ये
कर्तरि षष्ठी न प्राप्नोति । M.Bh. on P. III.
1.26 Vart. l ; cf. also Kaiy. on P.
I. 2.65.
प्रवचन (1) recital of Vedic texts; cf.
अथैके प्राहुरनुसंहितं तत् पारायणे प्रवचनं प्रशस्तम्
R. Pr. XV. 16; cf also इति प्र बाभ्रव्य
उवाच च क्रमं क्रमप्रवक्ता ( बाभ्रव्यः ) प्रथमं
शशंस च , R. Pr. XI 33; (2) the
reading of the Samhita text प्रावचनो
वा यजुषि । प्रवचने भवः स्वरः प्रावचनः ;
प्रवचनशब्देनार्षपाठ उच्यते 1 V. Pr. I. 132.
प्रवण circumflex accent; possessed of
svarita accent; cf. सुर्वः प्रवण इत्येके ।
प्रकर्षेण वन्येत व्युत्क्षिप्यते इति प्रवणः स्वरितस्वरः
T. Pr. I. 47; cf. also प्रवणे यष्टव्यम् M.
Bh. on VI. 2.33.
प्रवर्तकोपाध्याय a grammarian who
wrote an explanatory gloss named
कैयटप्रकाशिका on the महाभाष्यप्रदीप written
by Kaiyatabhatta.
प्रवर्तना incitement or inducement
which is the sense of 'lin'
affixes in general ;cf. प्रवर्तनायां लिङ्.
|
प्रवाद a grammatical explanation;
detailed explanation by citing the
gender, number, krt affix, tad.affix
and the like: cf. लिङ्गसंख्यातद्धितकृतरूप-
भेदाः प्रवादाः । पाण्यादिशब्दानां प्रवादेषु प्रथमो
(original) नकारो णत्वमाप्नोति स च प्राकृतः ।
T. Pr. XIII. 9. The word is ex-
plained as a change in the form
of a word, as for instance, by the
substitution of स् for विसर्ग where
विसर्ग is, in fact, expected; cf. कबन्धं
पृथु इत्येतेषां पदानां प्रवादा रूपभेदा उदये
परत्रावस्थिताः दिव इत्येतस्य उपचारं जनयन्ति ।
यथा दिवस्कबन्धम् , दिवस्पृथुः Uvvata on
R. Pr. IV. 22; cf. also प्रवादाः षडितः
परे, R. Pr. IX. 18. In the Nirukta,
the word is used in the sense of
'distinct mention'; cf. एवमन्यासामपि
देवतानामादित्यप्रवादाः स्तुतयो भवन्ति ( dei-
ties are mentioned under the
name of Aditya) Nir II.13; cf also
वैश्वानरीयाः प्रवादाः Nir, VII. 23.
प्रवादिनः scholars who explain the
changes ( प्रवाद ) mentioned above;
possibly the Padakaras or writers
of the पदपाठ;cf प्रवादिनो दूणाशदूढ्यदूलभान्
... महाप्रदेशं स्वधितीव चानयेन्नुदच्च R Pr.
XI. 20. Apparently प्रवादिनः ( nom.
sing.) seems to be the word in the
explanation of Uvvata.
प्रविग्रह separate or distinct uterance
of several words of a sentence
which are joined together by San-
dhi rules in a compound ( समास )
or otherwise, with a very short
pause ( अवग्रह ) after each word.
e. g. उद् उ एति instead of उद्वेति; cf.
प्रविग्रहेण मृदूवग्रहेण चर्चयेयुः R. Pr. XV.10,
where Uvvata remarks प्रविग्रहेषु प्रश्लिष्टं
विश्लिष्टं कुर्यात् । कालाधिक्येन कुर्यात्। तथा च
उद् उ एति इति पठेन्न तु उद्वेति.
प्रविभक्त made separate with their
Component parts shown clearly:
Split up into component parts in
such a way that their meaning
also is fully stated cf तद्धितसमासे
|
ष्वेकपर्वसु चानेकपर्वसु च पूर्वे पूर्वे अपरं अपरं
प्रविभज्य निर्घ्रूयात् । दण्डयः पुरुषः। दण्डमर्हतीति
वा दण्डेन संपद्यते इति वा । Nir.II.2.
प्रवृत्त ( I) complete; cf. अथ य प्रवृत्त अथे
अमिताक्षरेषु ग्रन्थेषु वाक्यपूरणा आगच्छन्ति पदपू-
रणास्ते, Nir. I. 9; (2) which has pre-
Sented itself, which has become
applicable; the word is used in
connection with a grammatical
rule or operation ; cf. एवं च कृत्वा
धर्मशास्त्रं प्रवृत्तम् ; M. Bh. on P. I. 2.64
Vart.39; समुदाये व्राह्मणशब्दः प्रवृतेवयवेष्वपि
वर्तते जातिहीने गुणहीने च । M.Bh. on II.
2.6; cf. दीर्घस्य यण् ह्रस्व इति प्रवृत्तं, M.
Bh. on P. VI.1.77; also cf. यद्यपि
ङिच्चेत्ययमपवादः ... तातङि मन्थरं प्रवृत्तः परेण
बाध्यते S. K. on P.VII.1.35.
प्रवृत्ति (l) application or presentation
of a rule as opposed to निवृत्ति; cf
क्वचित्प्रवृत्तिः क्वचिदप्रवृत्तिः कचिद्विभाषा क्वचिद-
न्येदेवः (2) working; function; cf. नान्त-
रेण साधन क्रियायाः प्रवृत्तिर्भवति M. Bh. on
P.II.3.7.
प्रवृत्तिनिमित्त cause of the application
of a word which is shown by the
word when the affix त्च or ता is
added to it: cf. तस्य भावस्त्वतलौ । शब्दस्य
प्रवृत्तिनिमित्तं भावशब्देनोच्यते, Kas. on P.V.
1.119. There are given four such
causes जाति, गुण, क्रिया and संज्ञा ।
प्रवृत्तिभेद difference regarding the
cause of application; cf. पूर्वमिति
वर्तमाने पुनः पूर्वग्रहणं प्रवृत्तिभेदेन नियमप्रति-
पत्त्यर्थम्; Kas. on P. VI.2:174.
प्रवृद्धादि a class of compound words
headed by the word प्रवृद्ध in which
the second word, which is a past
pass. part, has its last vowel
accented acute; cf. प्रवृद्धं यानम्, प्रयुक्ताः
सक्तवः, खट्वारूढः । आकृतिगणश्च प्रवृद्धादिर्द्र-
ष्टव्यः । तेन पुनरुत्स्यूतं वासो देयमित्यादि सिद्धं
भवति Kas. on. on P.VI.2. 147.
प्रश्श्लिष्ट (l) an additional letter (vowel
or consonant) read on splitting up
a euphonic combination; cf. प्रश्लिष्टा.
|
प्रश्लिष्टनिर्देश प्रसिद्ध 253
वर्णावेतौ M.Bh.on P.I.1.9 Vart. 2; (2) ;
contracted combination; name of
a Samdhi where two vowels coale-
sce into one single vowel, cf. R.Pr. ।
II. 15-19.
प्रश्लिष्टनिर्देश mention of a thing in a
coalescence, which when split up,
shows a phonetic element or a
letter which could not be known
before the components were sepa-
rated; अनुपसर्जनात् । प्रश्लिष्टनिर्देशोयम् ।
अनुपसर्जन अ अ अत् इति । M.Bh. on I.
1.27 Vart. 6; cf also M. Bh. on
P.II.3.69.
प्रश्लेष (l) coalescence of two vowels
into one, as given in R. Pr. II.6,
and 7, corresponding to the गुण,
वृद्वि and दीर्घ substitutes prescribed
by the rules आद्गुणः P.IV 1.87; अकः
सवर्णे दीर्घः VI.1.101; and वृद्धिरेचि VI.
1.88 which are stated under the
jurisdiction of the rule एकः पूर्वपरयोः
VI.1.84; (2) finding out the pre-
sence of a letter in addition to the
letters already present as coalesced,
after splitting the combination
into its different constituent 1etters.
This Practice of finding out an
additional letter is resorted to by
the commentators only to remove
certain difficulties in arriving at
some correct forms which other-
wise could not be obtained; e. g.
see क्ङिति च where क्ङ् is believed to
be a combination of ग्, क् and ङ्
See प्रश्लिष्ट and प्रश्लिष्टनिर्देश.
प्रसंघान lit. linking up; joining; re-
peating a word in the Kramapatha
and joining it with the following
word: e. g. the second words ईळे
पुरोहितम् etc. in अग्निं ईळे । ईळे पुरोहितम् ।
पुरोहितं यज्ञस्य ।
प्रसक्त applicable, but not actually
applied; the word is used in con-
nection with a grammatical ’rule
or operation that has become
|
applicable, but has not been appli-
ed; cf. उत्सर्गस्य प्रसक्तस्यापवादो वाधको
भवति, M. Bh. on P. II.3 32, also
प्रसक्तस्यादर्शनं लोपसंज्ञं भवति M. Bh. and
S.K. on P.I.1. 60. The term प्रसक्त
is opposed to the term अभिनिर्वृत्त.
प्रसङ्ग applicability; possibility of be-
ing applied; the word is used
with respect to a grammatical
rule or operation which is on the
point of being applied or taking
place; the word प्राति is also used in
the same sense; cf. को हि शब्दस्य प्रसङ्गः
यत्र गम्यते चार्थो न च प्रयुज्यते M.Bh.on
P.I.1.60 cf. also द्वौ प्रसङ्गौ अन्यार्थां
एकस्मिन् स विप्रतिषेधः,M. Bh. on P.I.4.
2; also cf. प्रसङ्गे सति सदृशतम आदेशः स्यात्
S.K. on स्थानेन्तरतमः P. I.1.50.
प्रसज्यप्रतिषेध prohibition of the possi-
ble application of a rule, generally
laid down by the use of the nega-
tive particle न, together with, or
connected with, a verbal activity:
e.g न लुमताङ्गस्य P.I.1.63, नामि P.VI.
4.3, न माङ्योगे VI.4.74 etc. etc: cf.
प्रसज्यप्रतिषेधोSयं क्रियया सह यत्र नञ्; cf.also
प्रसज्यायं क्रियागुणौ ततः पश्चान्निवृतिं करोति
M.Bh. on P.II.2.6. In some cases
the negative particle in a compo-
und has also to be taken as stating
a negation by प्रसज्यप्रतिषेधः;cf. M.Bh.
on सुडनपुंसकस्य P.1.1.43, सार्वधातुकमपित्
I.4.2, चादयोsसत्त्वे I. 4. 57.
प्रसाद see प्रक्रियाप्रसाद by Vitthalesa.
प्रसारण a term used by ancient gra-
mmarians for संप्रसारण, i.e, the subs-
titution of a corresponding vowel
for a semivowel; e.g. इ for य्, उ
for व्, ऋ for र् and लृ for ल्: cf. रकि
ज्यः प्रसारणम् P.I.1.4. Vart. 6.
प्रसारणिन् that which gets, or is liable
to get the Prasarana or Samprasa-
rana substitute; cf. कविधौ सर्वत्र
प्रसारणिभ्यो ड: P.III.2.3 Vart. 1.
प्रसिद्ध (1) established in existence:
cf. क्रमेण नार्थः पदसंहिताविदः पुराsप्रसिद्धा
|
श्रयपूर्वसिद्धिभिः, R. Pr. XI.34 where
the Kramapatha is said to be one
which was not established before
the Samhitapatha; (2) known ;
cf. अनिटि प्रसिद्धे क्सो भविष्यति M. Bh.
on P. III. 1.45 Vart. 4, लोकत एते
शब्दाः प्रसिद्धाः स्त्री पुमान् नपुंसकमिति M.
Bh. on P. IV. 1.3: (3) brought
about, accomplished, realized;
तथास्य छः प्रसिद्धो भवति M. Bh. on P.
IV. 1.89 Vart. 2, सर्वत्रैव जश्त्वेन सिद्धं
स्यात् , M. Bh. on P.VIII 2.25
प्रस्ताव context, topic, the same as
प्रकरण which see above; cf, प्रस्तावः
प्रकरणम् । यथा भोजनप्रकरणे सैन्धवमानयेति
लवणे प्रतीतिर्गमनप्रकरणे त्वश्वे, Kaiy. on
M. Bh. I. 1.23 Vart. 4.
प्रस्वार a word or utterance in three
matras or moras; cf. स ओमिति
प्रस्वरति त्रिमात्रः प्रस्वारः स्थाने स भवत्युदात्तः R.
Pr. XV.3 whereon Uvvata remarks
त्रिमात्र: प्रस्वारः । See the word ओंकार
प्राक् before a particular thing in
place, or in recital, or in mention.
The word is used generally to
show the limit upto which a
particular topic extends; cf. तसि-
लादयः प्राक् पाशपः; cf also प्राक् कडारा-
त्समासः P. I. 4.l : cf. also अथ आख्याः
समाम्नायाधिकाः प्राग्रिफितात् V. Pr. I. 33.
प्राकृत (1) original, primary,belonging
to the Prakrti as contrasted with
a वैकृत modification or a modified
thing; cf प्रकृतिः स्वभावः, तत्संबन्धी प्राकृतः.
com. on T. Pr. XIV. 28: cf.
एतद्विकारा एवान्ये, सर्वे तु प्राकृताः समाः
R. Pr. XVII. 23; cf. also तहीन् ...
पशूंस्तकारपरः ( नकारः ) सकारं प्राकृतो नित्ये
T. Pr. VI. 14; (2) natural, which
can be so ordinarily, without
any specific effort; cf. तस्मात् प्राकृत-
मेवैतत् कर्म यथा कटं करोति, M. Bh. on
P. II. 3.5, cf. also M. Bh. on P.
III 1.5 Vart. 8, 9.
प्राकृतसर्वस्य a treatise on the gra-
|
mmar of Prakrta Languages attri-
buted to Markandeya
प्राक्कीतीय name given to a group of
tad, affixes छ, यत् and others pres-
cribed in the different senses ( हित
and others) given in rules upto
तेन क्रीतम् P.V. 1.37 from तस्मै हितम् P.
V. 1.5.
प्रागिवीय name given to tad. affixes
mentioned in rules from P. V.
3.27 upto P. V. 3.95.
प्राग्घितीय name given to tad. affixes
prescribed by rules beginning
with प्राग्हिताद्यत् P. IV. 4.75 and
ending with सोदराद्यः P. IV. 4.109.
प्राग्दिशीय name given to tad. affixes
prescribed in rules from P. V,
3.1 to 25.
प्राग्दीव्यतीय name given to tad. affixes
prescribed by rules beginning
with तस्य विकारः P. IV. 3.134 and
ending with the rule कंसीयपरशव्य-
योर्यञञौ लुक् च P. IV. 3.168.
प्राग्देश districts of the east especially
districts to the east of Ayodhya
and Pataliputra, such as Maga-
dha, Vanga and others; nothing
can definitely be said as to which
districts were called Eastern by
Panini and his followers Katya-
yana and Patanjali. A Varttika
given in the Kasika but not
traceable in the Mahabhasya
defines Pragdesa as districts situat-
ed to the east of शरावती (probably
the modern river Ravi or a
river near that river ): cf. प्रागुदञ्चौ
विभजते हंसः क्षीरोदके यथा । विदुषां शब्द-
सिद्ध्यर्थे सा नः पातु शरावती ॥ Kas. on
एङ् प्राचां देशे P. I. 1.75. There is a
reading सरस्वती in some manus-
cript copies and सरस्वती is a well-
known river in the Punjab near
Kuruksetra, which disappears in
the sandy desert to the south: a
reading इरावती is also found and
|
इरावती may stand for the river
Ravi. शरावती in Burma is simply
out of consideration. For details
see Vyakarana Mahabhasya Vol.
VII. pp. 202-204 and 141-142
D. E. Society's Edition.
प्राग्वतीय name given to tad. affixes
prescribed in rules from P. V.
1.18 to 115.
प्राग्वहतीय name given to tad. affixes
prescribed in rules from P. IV.
4.1 to 76.
प्राचीनमत the view or doctrine of the
former or rather older gram-
marians. The word is used in
many commentary books and the
meaning of the word is to be
decided according to the context.
For example in the works of
Ramacandra, the author of the
Prakriyakaumudi and his follow-
ers, the word refers to the view
given by the writers of the Kasi-
kavrtti and the commentaries
thereon in the works of Bhattoji
and his pupils, it refers to the
writer of the Prakriyakaumudi
in addition to the writers of the
Kasika, while in the works of
Nagesa it refers to the writings
of Bhattoji and his pupils. For
details see Vyakarana Maha-
bhasya Vol. V1I pp. 23-24 D.
E. Society's Edition.
प्राच्यपदवृत्ति succession of two vowels
where the former vowel, which is
either ए, or ओ remains without
coalescence with the following
vowel अ, even though by
rules it is liable to be changed;
e.g.सुजाते अश्वसूनृते । अध्वर्यो अद्रिभिः सुतम् ।
In such cases the vowel अ is pro-
nounced like ए. This view is held
by the senior Sakalya (स्थविरशाकल्य);
cf. प्राच्यपञ्चाल-उपधानिभोदयाः शाकल्यस्य
स्थविरस्येतरा स्थितिः, R.Pr. II.44; cf.
|
also स पूर्वस्यार्धसदृशमेकेषाम् T. Pr.
XI.19 and the commentaries
thereon; cf. also छन्दोगानां सात्यमुग्रि-
राणायनीया अर्धमेकारमर्धमोकारं चाधीयते । सुजाते
ए अश्वसूनृते । अध्वर्यो ओ अद्रिभिः सुतम् । M.
Bh. on Siva Sutra 3, 4 as also on
P.I.1.48.
प्राच्यावैयाकरण an eastern grammarian;
the term प्राच्य (eastern) being a
relative term, the east is to be
taken with respect to the place in
the context. The word प्राचां occurs
many times in Panini's Sutras and
the term प्राक् may refer to countries
east of the river शरावती or सरस्वती in
the Punjab. See प्राग्देश above. प्राचां is
understood by some commentators
as referring to time, in which case,
the word may refer to ancient
grammarians आपिशलि, शाकटायन, इन्द्र
and others who lived before
Panini; cf. प्राचीनवैयाकरणतन्त्रे वाचनिकानि
...Par. Sek. Pari. 1. The word
प्राचीन is, of course, mostly used in
the sense of ancient, rather than
the word प्राच्. For specific peculia-
rities of the eastern grammarians
see pp. 148-149 Vyakarana Maha-
bhasya Vol. VII. D. E. Society's
Edition.
प्राण air, which is instrumental in pro-
ducing sound; cf. वायुः प्राणः कण्ठ्यमनुप्र
दानम् R.Pr.XIII.1.
प्राणपणा a gloss on the Mahabhasya
of Patanjali, written by the famous
easterm grammarian Purusottama-
deva of the 12th century A. D., of
which only a fragment of a few
pages is available. As the legend
goes, the name प्राणपणा was given to
the gloss as it was accompanied by
an oath on the part of the author
that his life was at stake if he did
even the slightest injustice to the
author of the Mahabhasya.
प्राण्यञ् the tad. affix अञ् prescribed
by the rule प्राणिरजतादिभ्योsञ् P. IV.3.
|
प्रातिपदिक प्रातिपदिकार्थ 256
154: cf. मयटः प्राण्यञ् विप्रतिषेधेन P.IV.3.
156 Vart, 4.
प्रातिपदिक lit.available in every word.
The term प्रातिपादिक can be explain-
ed as प्रतिपदं गृह्णाति तत् प्रातिपदिकम् cf
P.IV. 4. 39. The term प्रातिपदिक,
although mentioned in the Brah-
mana works, is not found in the
Pratisakhya works probably be-
cause those works were concerned
with formed words which had been
actually in use. The regular
division of a word into the base
( प्रकृति ) and the affix ( प्रत्यय ) is
available, first in the grammar of
Panini, who has given two kinds
of bases, the noun-base and the
verb-base. The noun-base is
named Pratipadika by him while
the verb-base is named Dhatu.
The definition of Pratipadika is
given by him as a word which is
possessed of sense, but which is
neither a root nor a suffix; cf.
अर्थवदधातुरप्रत्ययः प्रातिपदिकम् . P.I. 2.45.
Although his definition includes,
the krdanta words,the taddhitanta
words and the compound words,
still, Panini has mentioned them
separately in the rule कृत्तद्धितसमासाश्च
P. I. 2.45 to distinguish them as
secondary noun-bases as compared
with the primary noun-bases which
are mentioned in the rule अर्थवदधातुर-
प्रत्ययः प्रातिपदिकम्, Thus,Panini implies
four kinds of Pratipadikas मूलभूत,
कृदन्त, तद्धितान्त and समास, The Vartti-
kakara appears to have given nine
kinds-गुणवचन, सर्वनाम, अव्यय, तद्धितान्त,
कृदन्त, समास, जाति, संख्या and संज्ञा. See
Varttikas 39 to 44 on P. I. 4. 1.
Later on, Bhojaraja in his Sringara-
Prakasa has quoted the definition
अर्थवदधातु given by Panini, and has
given six subdivisions.: cf. नामा-
व्ययानुकरणकृत्तद्धितसमासाः प्रातिपदिकानि Sr.
Prak. I. page 6. For the sense con-
|
veyed by a Pratipadika or noun-
base, see प्रातिपदिकार्थ.
प्रातिपदिककार्य corresponding to अङ्गकार्य
in the case of the declinables,
which the Sutrakara mentions
specifically with respect to the
noun-base.
प्रातिपदिकग्रहण express mention by
wording of a noun-base as in
दित्यदित्यादित्य , सुधातुरकङ् च etc., and
not by description as अदन्त in अत
इञ् (P.IV.1.95) or in a group of
words ( गण ) ; cf. प्रातिपदिकग्रहणे लिङ्ग-
विशिष्टस्यापि ग्रहणम् Par. Sek. Pari. 71,
which recommends the feminine
form of the base for an operation,
provided the base is specifically
expressed and not merely des-
cribed. e. g युवतिः खलतिः युवखलतिः,
चटकस्यापत्यं चाटकैरः, वह्नीनां पूरणी बहुतिथी
etc.
प्रातिपदिकस्वर the general accent of the
Pratipadika viz. the acute ( उदात्त )
for the last vowel as given by the
Phit sutra फिषः ( प्रातिपदिकस्य ) अन्त
उदात्तः; cf. also प्रातिपदिकस्वरस्यावकाशः ।
अाम्रः । M. Bh. on P. VI. 1.91
Vart. 7.
प्रातिपदिकार्थ denoted sense of a Prati-
padika or a noun-base. Standard
grammarians state that the denota-
tion of a pratipadika is five-fold
viz. स्वार्थ, द्रव्य, लिङ्ग, संख्या and कारक.
The word स्वार्थ refers to the causal
factor of denotation or प्रवृत्तिनिमित्त
which is of four kinds जाति, गुण,
क्रिया and संज्ञा as noticed respectively
in the words गौः, शुक्लः, चलः and डित्ः.
The word द्रव्य refers to the in-
dividual object which sometimes
is directly denoted as in अश्वमानय,
while on some occasions it is in-
directly denoted through the genus
or the general notion as in ब्राह्मणः
पूज्य:, लिङ्ग the gender, संख्या the num-
ber and कारक the case-relation are
|
the denotations of the case-termi-
nations, but sometimes as they
are conveyed in the absence of a
case-affix as in the words पञ्च, दश,
and others, they are stated as the
denoted senses of the Pratipadika,
while the case-affixes are said to
indicate them; cf. वाचिका द्योतिका वा
स्युः शब्दादीनां विभक्तयः Vakyapadiya.
प्रातिलोम्य in inverse order, antithesis.
reverse sense; e. g. प्र and परा mean
the reverse of अा, or प्रति means the
reverse of अभि; cf अा इत्यर्वागर्थे । प्र
परेत्येतस्य प्रातिलोम्यम् etc. Nir. I. 4.
प्रातिशाख्य a work on Vedic grammar
of a specific nature, which is
concerned mainly with the changes,
euphonic and others, in the Pada
text of the Samhita as compared
with the running text, the Samhita
itself. The Pratisakhya works are
neither concerned with the sense
of words, nor with their division
into bases and affixes, nor with
their etymology. They contain,
more or less,Vedic passages arrang-
ed from the point of view of
Samdhi. In the Rk Pratisakhya,
available to-day, topics of metre,
recital, phonetics and the like are
introduced, but it appears that
originally the Rk Pratisakhya, just
like the Atharva Pratisakhya, was
concerned with euphonic changes,
the other subjects being introduced
later on. The word प्रातिशाख्य shows
that there were such treatises for
everyone of the several Sakhas or
branches of each Veda many of
which later on disappeared as the
number of the followers of those
branches dwindled. Out of the
remaining ones also, many were
combined with others of the same
Veda. At present, only five or six
Pratisakhyas are available which
are the surviving representatives of
33
|
the ancient ones -the Rk Prati-
sakhya by Saunaka, the Taittiriya
Pratisakhya, the Vajasaneyi Prati-
Sakhya by Katyayana, the Atharva
Pratisakhya and the Rk Tantra by
Sakatayana, which is practically a
Pratisakhya of the Sama Veda. The
word पार्षद or पारिषद was also used for
the Pratisakhyas as they were the
outcome of the discussions of learn-
ed scholars in Vedic assemblies; cf
परिषदि भवं पार्षदम्. Although the
Pratisakhya works in nature, are
preliminary to works on grammar,
it appears that the existing Prati-
sakhyas, which are the revised and
enlarged editions of the old ones,
are written after Panini's grammar,
each one of the present Prtisakhyas
representing, of course, several
ancient Pratisakhyas, which were
written before Panini. Uvvata, a
learned scholar of the twelfth cen-
tury has written a brief commenta-
ry on the Rk Pratisakhya and ano-
ther one on the Vajasaneyi Prati-
sakhya. The Taittiriya PratiSakhya
has got two commentaries -one
by Somayarya, called Tribhasya-
ratna and the other called Vaidika-
bharana written by Gopalayajvan.
There is a commentary by Ananta
bhatta on the Vajasaneyi Pratisa-
khya. These commentaries are
called Bhasyas also.
प्रातिश्रुत्क places of echo or reverbera-
tion viz.chest and others, of sound
which gets its origin at the navel
but becomes reverberated at chest,
throat, top of the month, mouth
and nose; cf. तस्य ( उत्पत्त्याश्रयस्य
शब्दस्य ) प्रातिश्रुत्कानि भवन्ति उरः कण्ठः शिरो
मुखं नासिके इति, T. Pr. II. 3.
प्रातिहत name given to the circumflex
vowel, standing at the beginning
of a word and following the final
vowel of the previous word which
|
is acute ( उदात्त ); cf. अपि चेन्नानापदस्थ-
मुदात्तमथ चेत्सांहितेन स्वर्यते स प्रतिहतः
T. Pr. xx. 3.
प्राथमकल्पिक of the first type or kind;
primary, as opposed to secondary;
cf. अयं खल्वपि बहुव्रीहिरस्त्येव प्राथमकल्पिकां
यस्मिनैकपद्यमैकस्वर्यमेकविभक्तिकत्वं च, M.Bh.
on P. I. I. 29, I. 1. 30; I. 2. 42;
cf also अथवेह कौचित् प्राथमकल्पिकौ प्लक्षन्य-
ग्रोधौ कौचित् क्रियया वा गुणेन वा M. Bh.on
P. II. 2. 29 Vart. 15.
प्राथम्य first preference; first place;
priority; cf. कुतः पुनः प्राथम्यं किं शब्दतः
आहोस्विदर्थतः । M. Bh. on I. 3. 1.
Vart. 11.
प्रादि a group of words beginning
with प्र, which are all prefixes or
upasargas e. g, प्र, परा, अप etc. cf
कुगतिप्रादयः P. II. 2. 18.
प्रादिसमास a compound with प्र and
others prescribed by the rule
कुगतिप्रादयः P. II.2.18 and explained
in detail by the Varttikas headed
by the Varttika प्रादयो गताद्यर्थे प्रथमया
P. II. 2. 18 Vart. 4, which comes
under the general head तत्पुरुष ;
the compound is also called प्रादित-
त्पुरुष; cf. कथं प्रभावो राज्ञः । प्रकृष्टो भाव इति
प्रादिसमासो भविष्यति । Kas. on P. III.
3.24 cf also प्रान्तः पर्यन्तः । बहुव्रीहिरयं
प्रादिसमासो वा Kas. on P. VI. 2. 180.
प्रादेशिक belonging to the root; the
word प्रदेश has here the peculiar
sense of a root which has the mean-
ing of the noun (under discussion).
cf. तद्यत्र स्वरसंस्कारौ समर्थौ प्रादेशिकेन गुणेन
अन्वितौ स्यातां संविज्ञातानि तानि Nir I. 12.
प्राधान्य preponderance, principal
nature as opposed to the sub-
ordinate one ( विशेषण्त्व ); cf.
यत्र प्राधान्येन अल् आश्रीयते तत्रैव प्रतिषेधः स्यात्
M. Bh. on P. I. 1. 56. cf. also
प्राधान्येन व्यपदेशा भवन्ति ।
प्रापक applying in the usual way; lit.
Ieading to the injunction or विधिशास्त्र;
cf. किं पुनरिदं नियमार्थे आहोस्वित् प्रापकम्
|
M. Bh. on P. I. 1.70; cf. also M.
Bh. on P. III. 4. 110.
प्रापण reaching, arrival; cf. प्रत्यक्षमाख्या-
नमुपदेशो, गुणैः प्रापणमुद्देशः M. Bh. on
P. I. 3.2.
प्राप्तविभाषा or प्राप्तविकल्पत्व, optional
prescription of some operation or
rule which otherwise is obligatory;
cf. लेपे विभाषा । प्राप्तविभाषेयम् । किमर्थेन
योगात् । Kas. on P. VIII. 1.45; cf.
also हृक्रोरन्यतरस्याम् । प्राप्तविकल्पत्वाद् द्विती-
यैव I Kas. on P. I. 4.53.
प्राप्ति application of a rule, arrival
at a particular form; incidence,
occurrence of a particular rule;cf.
अनन्तरा या प्राप्तिः सा प्रतिषिध्यते M. Bh. on
P. I. 1.43.
प्राप्तिज्ञ a person who knows only the
application of a rule and the
realization from it of the form that
can be arrived at, as opposed to
one who knows the form that is
desired or current; cf प्राप्तिज्ञो देवानां-
प्रियः न त्विष्टिज्ञः इष्यते एतदूपमिति । M.
Bh. on II. 4. 56 Vart. l ; cf. also
किरतिं चर्करीतान्तं पचतीत्यत्र यो नयेत् । प्रातिज्ञं
तमहं मन्ये प्रारब्धस्तेन संग्रहः । M. Bh. on
VII. 4.92.
प्राप्य lit. which is arrived at; an
object which is to be reached;
cf. प्राप्यं कर्म; the word प्राप्य is used
as a word qualifying the word
कर्म, in which case it is called
प्राप्यकर्म, as for example ग्रामं in ग्रामं
गच्छति देवदत्तः or वेदमधीते माणवकः.
The term प्राप्य is defined as क्रियाकृ-
तविशेषानवगतौ कर्तुः क्रियया अनास्थितं अास्थितं
वा यदवाप्यते तत् प्राप्यं कर्म । cf. कर्तुरीप्सितमं
कर्म । ततु त्रिविधं निर्वर्त्ये विकार्यं प्राप्यमिति ।
यस्य क्रियाकृतानां विशेषाणां सर्वथानुपलब्धिः
तत् प्राप्यम्. Srngara Prakasa IV.
प्रामाणिक authoritative; those that
talk with authority; cf. प्रामाणिकमत-
मेतत्, a phrase often used by com-
mentators.
|
प्रामाण्य authority; cf. यथोत्तरं मुनीनां
प्रामाण्यम् S. K. on न वहुव्रीहौ P. I.
1.29; cf. also the usual expression
वचनप्रामाण्यात् Kas. on P. VII. 2.7.
प्रामादिक faulty, uttered or expressed
with a fault; inaccurate.
प्राय general nature, general public;
cf. प्राय इति लोको व्यपदिश्यते, M. Bh.
on P. V. 1.16; cf. प्रायोर्थो वृत्तमित्येते
पादज्ञानस्य हेतवः R. Pr. XVII.16; cf.
also, लौकिकी विवक्षा यत्र प्रायस्य सं त्ययः M.
Bh. on P. V. 1.16.
प्रायिक optional, to be done at plea-
sure, common, usual; cf. प्रायिकं
चैतत् ।
प्रायोक्त्र belonging to one who speaks
or says; cf. अस्त्येव प्रायोक्त्री विवक्षा अस्ति
लौकिकी । M. Bh. on P. V. 1.16.
प्रावचन accentuation, as noticed in
the original Samhitapatha; cf.
प्रावचनो वा यजुषि | प्रवचनशब्देन आर्षपाठ
उच्यते । तत्र भवः स्वरः प्रावचनः स च यजुबि
भवति । तान्ते वा यज्ञकर्मणि । V. Pr.
I. 132.
प्राश्लिष्ट name of the circumflex
accent possessed by a vowel which
has resulted from the coalescence
of two similar vowels, as for
example in भिन्द्धीदम् । see प्रश्लिष्ट.
प्रसादवासिन्याय inclusion of a thing
even though it possesses an addi-
tional factor, or consideration,
other than what is referred to; cf
प्रासादवासिन्यायेन ग्रहणं भवति । तद्यथा केचित्त्
प्रासादवासिनः । केचिद् भूमिवासिनः । केचिदुभय-
वासिन: । ये प्रासादवासिनः गृह्यन्ते ते प्रसाद-
वासिग्रहणेन । ये भूमिवासिनः गृह्यन्ते ते
भूमिवासिग्रहणेन । ये उभयवासिनः गृह्यन्ते ते
प्रासादवासिग्रहणेन भूमिवासिग्रहणेन च । M.
Bh. on P. I. 1.8.
प्रियादि a class of words headed by
the word प्रिया which do not allow
their previous word in a bahu-
vrihi compound to take the mas-
culine base by the rule स्त्रियाः
पुंवत्.. P. VI. 3.84: e. g. कल्याणीप्रियः
|
For details, see Kas, on P. VI.
3.34.
प्रेक्षा (1) appearance, the being seen
or understood; cf. दूतो निर्ऋत्या इदमा-
जगाम । पञ्चम्यर्थप्रेक्षा वा षष्ठ्यर्थप्रेक्षा वा ।
Nir. I. 17; (2) thoughtful consi-
deration, cf. य एव मनुष्यः प्रेक्षापूर्वकारी
भवति सोSध्रुवेण निमित्तेन ध्रुवं निमित्तमुपादत्ते,
M. Bh. on P. I. 1.26 Vart, 5,
प्रेक्षादि a class of words to which the
tad. affix इन् is added in the four
senses given in P. IV. 2.67-70;
e. g. प्रेक्षी, घ्रुवकी; cf. Kas. on P.
IV . 2.80.
प्रेप्सु desiderative adjective; a word
formed by adding the affix उ in the
sense of ' an agent ' to a desidera-
tive root by the rule सनाशंसभिक्ष उः
P.III.2.168. The term प्रेप्सु was used
for such nouns by ancient gram-
marians.
प्रेषणी a term used by ancient gra-
mmarians for the imperative
mood or लोट् of Panini.
प्रैषादि the senses प्रैष 'order to do',
अतिसर्ग 'permission to do' and प्राप्तका-
लता 'fitness of time', as possessed
by the potential passive partici-
ples; cf विधीयन्ते प्रैषादिषु लोडादयः M.
Bh. on P. III. 1.26.
प्रोक्तपुंस्क possessed of the masculine
gender
प्रौढमनोरमा popularly called मनोरमा
also; the famous commentary on
the Siddhantakaumudi of Bha-
ttoji Diksita written by the author
himself to explain fully in a
scholarly manner the popular
grammar written by him; , the
word प्रौढमनेारमा is used in contrast
with बालमनोरमा another commen-
tary on the Siddhantakaumudi
by Vasudevadiksita. On account
of the difficult nature of it, it is
usual to read the प्रौढमनेारमा upto
the end of the Karaka-prakarana
|
only in the Sanskrit PathaSalas
before the study of the Sabdendu-
sekhara and the Paribhsendu-
sekhara is undertaken.
प्रौढमनोरमाखण्डन (1) a grammatical
work written by a grammarian
named Cakrapani of the Sesa
family of grammarians. The work
is meant to refute the arguments
of Bhattoji Diksita in his Praudha-
manorama; (2) a grammar work
written by the famous poet and
rhetorician Jagannātha in refuta-
tion of the doctrines and expla-
nations given in the Praudhamano-
rama by the stalwart Gramma-
rian Bhattoji Diksita. The work is
not a scholarly one and it has got
a tone of banter. It was written
by Jagannatha to show that he
could also write works on Gram-
mar and the bearded pedant
Bhattoji should not be proud of his
profound scholarship in Grammar.
The work of Jagannatha was
named मनोरमाकुचमर्दन possibly by his
followers or even by himself.
प्रौढमनोरमाटीका a commentary on
Bhattoji DikSita's Praudhamano-
rama written by Bhattoji's grand-
son Hari Diksita. The commen-
tary is called लघुशब्दरत्न or simple
शब्दरत्न which is an abridgment of
the author's work बृहच्छब्दरत्न. The
Laghusabdaratna is widely studied
along with the Praudhamanorama
in the Pathasalas.
प्लक्षादि a class of words headed by
the word प्लक्ष to which the tad.
affix अण् is added in the sense of
'a fruit' e.g. प्लाक्षम्,ऐङ्गुदम् cf.Kas.
on P.IV.3.164
प्लाक्षायण an ancient Vedic scholar
who presumably wrote a work on
Vedic grammar (of the type of the
Pratisakhya works).For a difference
|
of view he is quoted in the Taitti-
riya Pratisakhya: cf.न प्लाक्षिप्लाक्षायणयेाः
T.Pr. IX.6.
प्लाक्षि an ancient writer of a Prati-
sakhya work quoted in the Taitti-
riya Pratisakhya.See प्लाक्षायण above.
The words प्लाक्षि and प्लाक्षायण as
also प्लाक्षी ( feminine ) occur in the
Mahabhasya also, but not in the
Ganapatha of Panini.
प्लुत protracted, name given to
vowels in the protracted grade.
The vowels in this grade which
are termed protracted vowels are
possessed of three matras and in
writing they are marked with the
figure 3 placed after them. In
pronunciation they take a longer
time than the long or दीर्घ vowels;
cf. ऊकालोज्झ्रस्वदीर्घप्लुतः P. I.2.27. The
word is derived from प्लु (प्रु also)
I Atmane to go, and explained as
प्लवते इति, The word प्लवते is often
found for प्लुतो भवति in the Pratisa-
khya works; cf also मात्रा ह्रस्वरतावदव-
ग्रहान्तरं, द्वे दीर्धस्तिस्रः प्लुत उच्यते स्वरः । अधः
स्विदासी३दुपरि स्विदासी३द् अर्थे प्लुतिर्भीरिव
विन्दती३त्रिः ll R. Pr. I.16.
प्लुति prolation or protraction of a
vowel when it is possessed of three
matras; cf.. R. Pr. I.31. See प्लुत
above; cf. अविद्वांसः प्रत्यभिवादे नाम्नो ये न
प्लुतिं विदुः । कामं तेषु तु विप्रोष्य स्त्रीष्विवायमहं
वदेत् M.Bh. on P.I.1 Ahnika 1
प्वादि a class of roots headed by the
root पू which get their vowel short-
ened in the four conjugational
tenses as also before the pres.part.
affix; e.g. पुनाति पुनानः, लुनाति, लुनन्
etc.; cf Kas. on P.VII.3.80.
फ् hard labial consonant, aspirate
of प्, possessed of the properties श्वास
घोष, महाप्राणता, and कण्ठविवृतता.
|
फ (l) the letter or sound फ्,the vowel
अ being added for facility of pro-
nunciation ;(2) the affix फ for which
अायन is always substituted as given
by Panini in P.VII.1.2.
फक् (1) tad.affix फ marked with mute
क् for effecting the वृद्धि substitute
for the initial vowel of the word to
which it is applied. The initial
letter फ् of all the affixes beginning
with फ् in Panini's grammar is al-
ways changed into आयन्. The tad.
affix फक् is affixed (1) in the sense
of गोत्रापत्य grandchild and his issues,
to the words नड and others as also
to the words ending with the affixes
यञ् and इञ् and words शरद्वत्, दर्भ, द्रोण
etc. e.g. नाडायनः, शालङ्कायनः, दाक्षायणः
प्लाक्षायणः, द्रोणायनः, वैदः, अौर्वः etc.; cf
P.IV. 1.99-103; (2) as a caturar-
thika affix in the four senses
mentioned in P. IV. 2.67-70 to
the words पक्ष and others e. g.
पाक्षायणः, तौषायणः; cf. P.IV. 2.80.
फञ् tad. affix फ marked with ञ् caus-
ing the Vrddhi substitute for the
initial vowel of the word, applied
in the sense of grandchildren and
their issues to words अश्व and others,
as also to the word भर्ग; e.g.आश्वायन,
अाश्मायनः, भार्गायणः cf. अश्वादिभ्यः फञ्
and भर्गात् त्रैगर्ते; cf. P.IV.1.110 and
111.
फणादि a class of seven roots headed
by the root फण्, which belong to
the first conjugation and which
have optionally their vowel अ
changed into ए and the reduplica-
tive syllable ( अभ्यास) dropped, in
the forms of the perfect tense
before the affix इथ and weak affixes;
e. g. फेणतु:, फेणु:, फेणिथ फफणतुः, पफणुः,
पफणिथ etc. cf. P.VI.4.:125.
फल (1) fruit or benefit of an action
which goes to the agent; cf. फलव्यापारयोर्धातुः
Vaiyakarana-bhusana. A
|
root which is given as Ubhaya-
padin in Panini's Grammar takes
the Atmanepada affixes when the
fruit of the activity is meant for
the agent, while otherwise it takes
the Parasmaipada affixes; (2) The
word फल also means the result
of a grammatical operation or
grammatical injunction.
फि a common term for the affixes
फिन् and फिञ्.
फिञ् tad. affix आयनि applied to the
word मिमत in the sense of offspring
e.g. मैमतायनिः ; cf. P.IV.1.150; it is
also added in the same sense of (off-
spring) to the words तिक and others
as also to the word कौसल्य, two-
syllabled words ending with अण्
and to words वाकिन and others; e.g.
तैकायनिः, कौसल्यायनिः, वाकिनकायनिः etc.;
cf. P.IV.1.159.
फिट्सूत्र a small work on accents
attributed to Santanava,an ancient
Vedic scholar who lived before
Patanjali if not before Panini, as
the latter has not referred to him.
There is an anonymous commentary
upon it.
फिन् tad. affix आयनि in the sense of
offspring added according to the
Eastern grammarians to words not
beginning with आ, ऐ or औ, e.g.
ग्लुचुकायनिः,cf. IV.1.160.
फडेगन् [ FADDEGON, BAREND ]
a scholar of Sanskrit Grammar,
who has written a book 'Studies
in Panini's Grammar'.
ब् third letter of the labial class
which is soft and inaspirate.
ब or बकार the letter ब्, the vowel अ
as also the word कार being added
for facility of utterance; cf. T. Pr.
I.17.21, The letter ब् is some-
|
बर्नेल् बहिरङ्गासिद्धत्व 262
times used for व् especially when it
stands at the beginning of a word,
for which scholars use the expre-
ssion वबयेारभेद:.
बर्नेल् [ BURNELL., Dr.] a European
Sanskrit scholar who has written
a learned booklet 'Aindra School
of Sanskrit Grammarians' which
discusses the problem of the
Aindra grammar. See ऐन्द्र.
बर्बरता a fault in pronunciation of
the type of roughness or barbar-
ousness in the utterance of the
letter र् : cf. बर्बरता असौकुमार्ये रेफे
Uvvata on R.Pr.XIV. 8.
बर्स्व्य (written as बर्त्स्व्य or बर्त्स्य possibly
through mistake in the printed
Calcutta Edition); connected with
the socket of the teeth. As the
utterance of र् proceeds from the
socket of the teeth, र् is called बर्स्व्य.
cf. उपसंहृततरे च जिह्वाग्रमृकारर्कारल्कारेषु
बर्स्वेषूपसंहरति T.Pr.II.18.बर्स्व is explain-
ed here by the commentator as
दन्तपङ्क्तेरुपरिष्टादुच्चप्रदेशेषु ऋकारस्य ॠकारस्य
ऌकारस्य च बर्स्वाः स्थानम् । The word
उपरिष्टात् in the explanation given
above is questionable;the explana-
tion given by Uvvata in his com-
ment on वर्त्स्यमेकं इच्छन्ति रेफम् R. Pr. I.
20.viz. वर्त्सशब्देन दन्तमूलादुपरिष्टादुच्छूनः प्रदेश
उच्यते appears better although appa-
rently वर्त्स is written in the text for
बर्स्व or वर्त्स्व.
बलराम writer of a gloss named
धातुप्रकाश on the Dhatupatha of
Panini.
बलादि (1) a class of words headed by
the word बल, to which the tad.
affix य is added in the four senses
given by Panini in IV.2.67-70.
e. g. बल्यः कुल्यम्, तुल्यम् , वन्यम् etc.
cf Kas, on P.IV.2.80; (2) a class
of words headed by बल which take
the possessive tad. affix मत् option-
ally with the regular affix इन् ;
|
e. g. बलवान् , बली; cf Kas. on P.
V. 2.136.
बलीयस्त्व' relative superiority in
strength possessed by rules of
grammar or by operations based
on rules of grammar. This Supe-
riority is decided generally on any
one or more of the four recognised
criteria such as परत्व, नित्यत्व, अन्तरङ्गत्व
and अपवादत्व. The phrase अन्तरङ्गबली-
यस्त्वात् very frequently occurs in
the varttikas and in the Maha-
bhasya; cf. M.Bh. on P. III. 1.67,
VI.i.17, 85 Vart. 15, VI. 4.62 and
VII.1.1.
बश् short term or pratyahara for the
consonants from ब to mute श् in
the Mahesvara sutra i.e. the con-
sonants ब्, ग्, ड् and द्.
बहिरङ्ग a rule or operation which is
बहिरङ्ग (lit. external); the word बहिरङ्ग
is used in grammar in connection
with a rule or operation, the cause
( निमित्त )of which occurs later in
place or time than the cause of
the other which is called अन्तरङ्ग. For
the various kinds of बहिरङ्गत्व see the
word अन्तरङ्ग where the kinds of
अन्तरङ्गत्व are given.
बहिरङ्गपरिभाषा the Paribhasa or the
maxim असिद्धं बहिरङ्गमन्तरङ्गे (Par. Sek.
Pari. 50) which cites the com-
parative weakness of the rule or
operation which is Bahiranga.
बहिरङ्गलक्षण an operation or rule
which is characterized as बहिरङ्ग; cf
असिद्धं बहिरङ्गलक्षणमन्तरङ्गलक्षणे M. Bh. on
P. I. 1.57; cf. also M.Bh. on P. I.
4.2 Vart. 21.
बहिरङ्गासिद्धत्व invalidity i. e. non-
occurrence or non-application of
a bahiranga rule or operation be-
fore the antaranga operation which
is looked upon as stronger occurr-
ing earlier to the mind, or in the
wording, as it does.
|
बहु बहुव्रीहिप्रकृतिस्वर 263
बहु plural, many, the word is used
in the sense of abundance also; cf.
बहुषु बहुवचनम् P. I.4.21 and बहोलोपो भू
च बहोः VI. 4.158.
बहुच् tad. suffix बहु which is always
prefixed to a noun in the sense of
'almost complete', 'almost full',
'to a considerable extent'; e.g. बहुगुडा
द्राक्षा; cf. विभाषा सुपो बहुच् पुरस्तात्तु P. V.
3.68.
बहुप्रक्रुति (l) consisting of a large
number of verbal parts in deriva-
tion; बह्वयः प्रकृतयो यत्र; (2) a com-
pound in which the constituent
words are all in the plural number,
cf. सर्वे द्वन्द्वो विभाषैकवद्भवति । बहुप्रकृतिरिति
वक्तव्यम् M. Bh. on P.II.4.12 Vart.l ;
(3) a compound word ( पद ) made
up of many constituent words; cf.
बहूनि पदानि यत्र तद् बहुप्रकृति पदम् Vaj.
Prat. V. 7.
बहुमध्यगत a word which has entered
between two constituent words of
a compound by splitting in a way
the compound e. g. the word च in
ईयते नरा च शंसं दैव्यम् Rg. Veda IX.
86.42; cf. एतानि परिगृह्णीयात् बहूमध्यगतानि
च । R.Pr.X.7. explained by Uvvata
as बहूनां पदानां मध्यगतानि च यानि पदानि
तानि अतिक्रम्य परिगृह्णीयात् !
बहुल lit. variously applicable; the
word is used in the rules of Panini
in connection with a grammatical
rule or affix or the like that is
seen necessarily applied in some
cases, optionally applied in a few
other cases and not at all applied
in the other cases still. The word
बहुलम् is used by Panini in all such
cases. See P. II. 1.32, 57; II. 3.62;
II.4.39, 73, 76, 84, III. 1.34 etc.;
cf. the usual explanation of बहुलम्
given by grammarians in the lines
क्वचित्प्रवृत्तिः क्वचिदप्रवृत्तिः क्वचिद्विभाषा क्वचि-
दन्यदेव । विधेर्विधानं बहुधा समीक्ष्य चतुर्विधं
बाहुलकं वदन्ति Com. V. Pr. III.18.
|
बहुलपाद name given by grammarians
to the third pada of the third
adhyaya of the Astdhyayi.
बहुवचन the plural number; the
affixes of the plural number
applied to noun-bases as also to
roots; cf. बहुषु बहुवचनम् P. I. 4.21.
बहुव्रीहि a compound similar in
meaning to the word बहुव्रीहि ( pos-
sessed of much rice ) which, in
sense shows quite a distinct object
than those which are shown by
the constituent members of the
compound; a relative or adjective
compound. There are various kinds
of the Bahuvrihi compound such
as समानाधिकरणबहुव्रीहि, व्यधिकरणबहुव्रीहि,
संख्याबहुव्रीहि, दिग्बहुव्रीहि, सहबहुव्रीहि, नञ्बहु-
व्रीहि, and अनेकपदबहुव्रीहि which depend
upon the specific peculiarity notic-
ed in the various cases. Panini in his
grammar has not given any defini-
tion of बहुव्रीहि, but has stated that a
compound other than those already
given viz. अव्ययीभाव, द्वन्द्व and तत्पुरुष,
is बहुव्रीहि and cited under Bahu-
vrihi all cases mentioned above;
cf शेषो बहुव्रीहिः II. 3.23-28; also cf.
अन्यपदार्थप्रधानो बहुव्रीहिः M. Bh. on P.
II. 1.6; II. 1.20; II. 1.49.
बहुव्रीहिपाद conventional term used
for the second pada of the sixth
adhyaya of Panini's Astadhyayi.
बहुव्रीहिप्रकृतिस्वर the accent peculiar
to, or specifically mentioned in the
case of the Bahuvrihi compound
viz. the retention of its own
accents by the first member, in
spite of the general rule that a
compound word has the last
vowel accented acute i.e. उदात्त. cf.
बहुव्रीहौ प्रकृत्या पूर्वपदम्. P. VI. 2.1.
The expression बहुव्रीहिस्वर in this
very sense is used in the Maha-
bhasya cf. बहुव्रीहिस्वरं शास्ति समासान्तविधेः
सुकृत् M. Bh. on P. VI. 2.1.
|
बह्वच् multisyllabled, a word which
contains three, or more than three
vowels; the word occurs many
times in the sutras of Panini. cf.
P. II. 4.66, IV. 2.73, IV. 2.109,
IV. 3.67; V. 3.78, VI. 2.83,
VI. 3.118.
बह्वपेक्ष lit. depending on many; the
word is used in the sense of de-
pending on many causal factors
( निमित्तानि ) and given as the defi-
nition of a kind of बहिरङ्ग by some
grammarians; cf. अल्पापेक्षमन्तरङ्गं बह्वपेक्षं
बहिरङ्गम् . This kind of अन्तरङ्गबहिरङ्गत्व,
cited by Kaiyata is, however,
disapproved by Nagesabhatta; cf.
बहुिरङ्गान्तरङ्गाशब्दाभ्यां बह्वपेक्षत्वाल्पापेक्षत्वयोः
शब्दमर्यादया अलाभाच्च । तथा सति असिद्धं
बह्वपेक्षमल्पापेक्षे इत्येव वदेत् । Par. Sek. on
Pari. 50.
बह्वर्थ lit. the meaning of the word
बहु. There are many senses of the
word बहु out of which 'plurality'
is the sense usually seen. The
word also means 'collection;' cf.
ग्रामशब्दोयं बह्वर्थः । अस्त्येव शालांसमुदाये
वर्तते । तद्यथा । ग्रामो दग्ध इति M. Bh.
on P. I. 1.8, 21.
बह्वादि a class of words headed by
बहु to which the fem. affix ई ( ङीप् )
is added to form the feminine
base; the words ending in अ in
this class take the fem. affix अा
( टाप् ) in case ई which is optional,
is not added; other words remain
as they are, if ई, is not added;
e. g. बह्वी, बहुः; पद्धतिः, पद्धती; गतिः, _
गती; चण्डी, चण्डा; etc. cf. Kas. on
P. IV. 1.45.
बाध sublation, setting aside; , सामान्य-
शास्त्रस्य विशेषशास्त्रेण बाध: Par. Sek. on
Pari. 51.
बाधक lit. that which sublates or sets
aside; generally a special rule which
sets aside a general rule: cf. येन ना-
प्राप्ते यो विधिरारभ्यते स तस्य बाधको भवति,
|
Pari. Patha of पुरुषोत्तमदेव Pari. 51;
cf. also नैतज्ज्ञापकसाध्यं अपवादैरुत्सर्गा
बाध्यन्त इति । बाधकेनानेन भवितव्यं सामान्य-
विहितस्य विशेषविहितेन । M.Bh. on P. II.
1.24 Vart. 5. बाधक is used as a
synonym of अपवाद, cf. अपवादशब्दोत्र
बाधकपरः Par. Sek. Pari. 58.
बाधकत्व the same as बाध ; sublation;
setting aside; this sublation is
described to be of two types-
(1) complete sublation when the
rule set aside, is for ever set aside
and cannot, by the maxim called
तक्रकौण्डिन्यन्याय, be applied again; cf.
दधि ब्राह्मणेभ्यो दीयतां तक्रं कौण्डिन्यायेति सत्यपि
संभवे दधिदानस्य तक्रदानं निवर्तकं भवति ।
cf. M. Bh. on P. I. 1.47; VI. 1.2.
VI. 2.1. etc.; ( 2 ) temporary
sublation when the rule set aside,
can be applied, if possible after
the special rule has been applied;
cf. सर्वथा अनवकाशत्वादेव बाधकत्वे स्वस्य
(अनवकाशशास्त्रस्य) पूर्वप्रवृत्तिरित्येव बाधः । तत्र
बाधके प्रवृत्ते यद्युत्सर्गप्राप्तिर्भवति तदा भवत्येव
यथा तत्रैव याडादयः Par.Sek.on Pari.57,
The sublation or बाधकत्व is not
only in the case of सामान्यविशेषभाव
and अनवकाशत्व as given above, but
a rule or operation which is पर
(cited later), or नित्य, or अन्तरङ्ग sets
aside the rule or operation which
is पूर्व,or अनित्य,or बहिरङ्ग respectively.
This बाध्यबाधकभाव occupies a very
important position in respect of
the application of grammar rules
for arriving at the correct forms
(इष्टरूपसिद्धि) and grammarians have
laid down a number of Paribha-
sas in the field of बाध्यबाधकभाव.
बालंभट्ट ( बाळंभट्ट ) surnamed Paya-
gunda or Payagunde, who has
written a commentary on the
commentary Mitaksara on the
याज्ञवल्क्यस्मृति. Some scholars say that
he was also a great grammarian
and identical with वैद्यनाथ पायगुंडे who
has written the commentary काशिका
|
or गदा on the Paribhasendusekhara,
the Cidasthimala on the Laghusab-
dendusekhara and commentaries
on the Vaiyakaranabhusana,Sabda-
kaustubha and Bhasyapradipodd-
yota. Other scholars believe that
Balambhatta was the son of
Vaidyanatha and that he wrote
only the commentary on Mita-
ksara called Balambhatti after him.
(2) There was also a comparative-
ly modern grammarian of Tanjore
who has written small grammar
works बालबोधिनी and बालरञ्जनी.
बालबोधिनी name of a grammatical
work ascribed to Balambhatta of
Tanjore.
बालमनोरमा name of a commentary
on the Siddhanta-kaumudi of
Bhattoji Diksita by Vasudeva
Diksita, a grammarian of Tanjore.
There is also another commentary
called Balamanorama written by
Anantadeva on the Siddhanta-
kaumudi.
बालरञ्जनी name of a grammar work
written by Balambhatta of Tanjore.
See बालंभट्ट (2).
बाहुलक the application of a gramma-
tical rule as a necessity to arrive at
some forms in literature especially
in the Vedic Literature as also in
the works of standard writers, which
cannot be explained easily by the
regular application of the stated
rules; cf. सुप्तिङुपग्रहलिदनराणां कालहलच्-
स्वरकर्तृयङां च । व्यत्ययमिच्छति शास्त्रकृदेषां
सोपि च सिध्यति बाहुलकेन M.Bh. on P.
III. 1.85; also cf. बाहुलकं प्रकृतेस्तनुदृष्टेः
प्रायसमुच्चयनादपि तेषाम् । कार्यसशेषविधेश्च
तदुक्तं नैगमरूढिभवं हि सुसाधु M.Bh. on P.
III.3.1. In many sutras, Panini has
put the word बहुलम् to arrive at
such forms; e.g see P.II.1.32,57;
II.3.62. II.4.39,73,76,84 etc.
बाह्य (प्रयत्न) external effort; the
34
|
term is used many times in conne-
ction with the external effort in
the production of articulate sound,
as different from the internal
effort अाभ्यन्तरप्रयत्न. The external
effort is described to be consisting
of 11 kinds; cf. बाह्यप्रयत्नस्त्वेकादशधा ।
विवारः संवारः श्वासो नादो घोषोSघोषोSल्पप्राणो
महाप्राण उदात्तोनुदात्तः स्वरितश्चेति S.K.on P.
I.1.9.
बाह्वादि a class of words headed by
the word बाहु to which the tad.
affix इ ( इञ् ) is added in the sense
of a descendant; e. g. बाहविः,
पौष्करसादि:, पाञ्चिः etc. The class called
बाह्वादि is looked upon as अाकृतिगण on
the strength of the word च in the
rule, so that similar words, not
included in the class, could be
explained; cf. Kas. on P.IV.1.96.
बिदादि a class of words headed by the
word बिद to which the affix अ (अञ्)
is added in the sense of a grand-
child and further descendants;
e.g. बैदः, और्वः, काश्यप:, कौशिकः etc.
The words in this class are mostly
names of sages. In the case of
such words as are not names of
sages, the affix अ is added in the
sense of the offspring and not any
descendant. e.g. पौत्रः, दौहित्रः etc.;
cf. Kas. on P.IV.1.104.
बिन्दु anusvara, letter pronounced only
through the nose; a dot to indicate
the nasal phonetic element shown
in writing above or sometimes after
that letter or vowel, after which it
is uttered; cf. अं इत्यनुस्वारः । अकार
इह उच्चारणार्थः इति बिन्दुमात्रो वर्णोनुस्वारसंज्ञो
भवति ।। Kat. I.1.19.
बिल्वकादि a class of words headed by
the word बिल्वक the affix ईय ( छ )
placed after which is elided when
another tad. affix such as अण् or
the like is placed after them; cf.
|
बिल्वा यस्यां सन्ति बिल्वकी तस्यां भवाः बैल्वकाः
Kas. on P.VI.4.153.
बिल्वादि a class of words headed by
the word बिल्व, to which the tad.
affix अ (अण् ) is added
sense of 'a product' or 'a part';
e.g. बैल्वः मौद्गः, वैणवः etc.; cf Kas on
P. IV. 3.136.
बुइस्कूल [ BUISKOOL H. E. ) A
European grammarian who has
written an essay on the last three
Padas of Panini's Astadhyayi (त्रिपादी)
under the title 'The Tripadi'.
बुद्धि notion, mental understanding;
mental inclination; cf. बुद्धि: संप्रत्यय
इत्यनर्थान्तरम् । Or अस्तेर्भूर्भवतीत्यस्तिबुद्ध्यां
भवतिबुद्धिं प्रतिपद्यते M. Bh on P. I.1.56
Vart. 14; (2) mental inclusion; cf.
यां यां विभक्तिं आश्रयितुं बुद्धिरुपजायते सा
साश्रयितव्या M.Bh. on P. I. 1. 57: cf.
अथ बुद्धिः अविशेषात्स्मपुरा हेतू, M. Bh. on
III.2.118 Vart. 4.
बुद्धिकर्मन् activity of the mind of the
type of understanding as contrast-
ed with the activity of the sense
organs; cf. इन्द्रियकर्म समासादनं बुद्धिकर्म
व्यवसायः M. Bh. on P.III. 3. 133
Vart. 8.
बुद्धिसागर writer of a grammar work
who lived in the 11th century.
बृंहण keeping: preservation;cf. क्रमादतो-
प्यृग्यजुषां च बृंहणम् । बृंहणं संधारणम् ;Uvvata
on R. Pr. XI. 37.
बृहच्छब्दरत्न a learned commentary
on the commentary मनोरमा of
भट्टोजीदीक्षित; the commentary was
written by हरिदीक्षित the grandson of
Bhattoji. The work is called
बृहच्छब्दरत्न in contrast with the
लघुशब्दरत्न of the same author
(हरिदीक्षित) which is generally studied
at the Pathasalas all over the
country. The work बृहच्छब्दरत्न is
only in a Manuscript form at
present. Some scholars believe
that it was written by Nagesabhatta,
|
who ascribed it to his preceptor
Hari Diksita, but the belief is not
correct as proved by a reference
in the Laghusabdaratna, where the
author himself remarks that he
himself has written the बृहच्छब्दरत्न,
and internal evidences show that
लबुशब्दरत्न is sometimes a word-for-
word summary of the बृहच्छब्दरत्न.
cf.विस्तरस्तु अस्मत्कृते बृहच्छब्दरत्ने मदन्तेवासि-
वृतलधुशब्देन्दुशेखरे च द्रष्टव्यः Laghusabda-
ratna. For details see Bhandarkar
Ins. Journal Vol. 32 pp.258-60.
बृहच्छब्दरत्नटीका called बृहच्छब्दरत्नव्याख्या
written by भवदेव.
बृहती a Vedic metre consisting of
four padas and 36 syllables. There
are three padas of eight syllables
and the fourth has twelve
syllables. It has got further sub-
divisions known as पुरस्ताद्बृहती, उपरि-
ष्टाद्बृहती, न्यङ्कुसारिणी or उरोबृहती, ऊर्ध्व-
बृहती विष्टारबृहती, पिपीलिकमध्यमा and
विषमपदा. For details see R.Pr. XVI.
31-37.
बृहत्संज्ञा the same as महत्संज्ञा or महती
संज्ञा; a bigger terminology as con-
trasted with लघुसंज्ञा brief termino-
logy such as टि, घु, भ etc. for which
(latter) Panini is very particular.
The bigger terms such as सर्वनाम,
अात्मनेपद, परस्मैपद and others are
evidently borrowed by Panini
from the ancient grammarians
who lived before him.
बृहद्दर्पणा name of a commentary on
Kondabhatta's Vaiyakaranabhu-
sanasara by Mannudeva, who was
called also Mantudeva, who lived
in the latter half of the eighteenth
century.
बृहद्व्याकरणसिद्धान्तमञ्जूषा a grammar
work written by Ramanatha
Chobhe.
बेलवलकर [ SHRIPAD KRISHNA
|
BELVALKAR ] a well-known
Sanskrit scholar of the present day
who has been the General Editor
of the Mahabharata published by
the Bhandarkar Oriental Research
Institute, Poona. He has written
a book on grammar reviewing
very briefly the various systems
of Sanskrit grammar, which is
named "Systems of Sanskrit
Grammar".
बोथलिंग्क [BOHTLINGK, OTTO] a
German Sanskrit scholar and
Grammarian of St.Petersberg, who
has written a short gloss in German
on Panini's Astadhyayi under the
title "Panini's Grammatik" with an
introduction and various indexes
at the end. He has also critically
edited Mugdhabodha of Bopadeva.
बोध्य a technical term for the voca-
tive case in the Jainendra Vyaka-
rana.
बॉप [ BOPP, FRANZ ] a German
Sanskrit scholar who has written
the famous volumes of "The Com-
parative Sanskrit Grammar".
बोपदेव a great Sanskrit scholar and
grammarian belonging to Deva-
giri in the greater Maharastra
who was supported by Hemadri
of Devagiri. He resided at सार्थग्राम
on the river Varada in the first
half of the thirteenth century. He
wrote a short treatise on Sanskrit
Grammar, which has a number of
peculiar abbreviations for the usual
well-known grammatical terms.
His grammar had a wide spread
in Bengal and it is today a very
common text on Grammar
Bengal. On this account some
scholars believe that he lived in
Bengal. He was the son of Kesava
and pupil of Dhanesa. He is also
the author, of the well-known
|
work कविकल्पद्रुम on which he has
written a commentary named
कामधेनु or काव्यकामधेनु.
ब्रह्मकाण्ड name given to the first
section or Kanda of Bhartrhari's
Vakyapadiya. It deals with Sphota,
and in a way it contains in a nut-
shell the philosophy of Sanskrit
Grammar.
ब्रह्मराशि the sacred Sanskrit alphabet
given in the fourteen sutras of Ma-
hesvara, named Aksarasamamnaya
which is called ब्रह्मराशि as it contains
the basic letters of शब्द which is
Brahma according to Gramma-
rians; cf. सोयमक्षरसमाम्नायो वाक्यसमाम्नायः
पुष्पितः फलितश्चन्द्रतारकवत् प्रतिमण्डितो वेदितव्यो
ब्रह्मराशिः M. Bh. Ahnika 2 end; cf.
also एते पञ्चषष्टिवर्णा ब्रह्मराशिरात्मवाचः V.
Pr.VIII. 25.
ब्राह्मणादि a class of words headed by
the word ब्राह्मण to which the tad.
affix य ( ष्यञ् ) is added in the
sense of 'nature' or 'duty'; e. g.
ब्राह्मण्यं ( ब्राह्मणस्य भावः कर्म वा ); cf
ब्राह्मणादिराकृतिगणः अादिशव्दः प्रकारवचनः
Kas. on P. V.1.24.
भ् fourth letter of the labial class
which is possessed of the pro-
perties कण्ठसंवृतता, नादानुप्रदान, घोष, and
महाप्राणत्व.
भ (1) the letter or sound भ् with the
vowel अ added for facility of
utterance; (2) a technical term
in the Grammar of Panini given
to a noun base before such case
and taddhita affixes as begin with
any vowel or with the consonant
य्. The utility of this designation
of भ to the base is (l) to pre-
vent the substitutes which are
enjoined for the final vowel or
consonant of a pada (a word end-
|
ing with a case-affix or a base
before case and tad. affixes begin-
ning with any consonant except-
ing य् ) just as the substitution of
Visarga, anusvara, the first or
third consonant, and others given
in P. VIII. 4.37 and the follow-
ing. For the various changes
and operations for a base termed
भ see P. VI. 4.129 to 175.
भकार the consonant भ् with the
vowel अ and the affix कार added
for facility of utterance: cf. T. Pr.
I. 17,21.
भक्त forming a part or portion (of
something in connection with
which it has been prescribed as
an augment) cf. तद्भक्तस्तद्ग्रहणेन गृह्यते
Vyadi Pari. 17; cf. also अामः सुडयं
भक्तः अाम्ग्रहणेन ग्राहिष्यते M. Bh. on P.
VII. 1.33.
भक्तल् tad. affix भक्त applied to the
words भौरिकि and others in the
sense of 'a place of residence;' cf.
P. IV. 2.54.
भक्ति (1) name given to two of the
five divisions of a Saman which
are प्रस्तावभक्ति, उद्गीथ, प्रतिहार, उपद्रव
and निधानभाक्ति; (2) the vowel por-
tion surrounding, or placed after,
the consonant र् or ल् which (con-
sonant) is believed to be present
in the vowel ऋ or ऌ respectively
forming its important portion,
but never separately noticed
in it. The vowels ऋ and ऌ
are made up of one matra
each. It is contended by the
grammarians that the consonants
र् and ल् forming respectively the
portion of ऋ and ऌ, make up half-
a-matra, while the remaining half
is made up of the भक्ति of the
vowel surrounding the consonant
or situated after the consonant.
The word which is generally used
|
for this 'bhakti is 'ajbhakti' in-
stead of which the word स्वरभक्ति
is found in the Pratisakhya works;
cf. यत्तद्रेफात्परं भक्तेस्तेन व्यवहितत्वान्न
प्राप्नेति । ...... यच्चात्र रेफात्परं भक्तेर्न तत्
क्वचिदपि व्यपवृक्तं दृश्यते । M. Bh. on P.
VIII. 4.1 Vart 2; cf. स्वरभक्तिः
पूर्वभागक्षराङ्गं R. Pr. I. 17; also cf.
रेफात्स्वरोपहिताद् व्यञ्जनोदयाद् ऋकारवर्णा स्वरभ-
क्तिरुत्तरा । R. Pr. VI. 13.
भक्षित lit, eaten up; a fault in pro-
nunciation when a letter is so
hurriedly pronounced that it
appears to have been dropped.
भक्ष्यनियमrestriction regarding
edibles of a particular kind. The
word is quoted to illustrate the
नियमविधि or restrictive rule in gra-
mmar. Although the restriction in
the instance पञ्च पञ्चनखा भक्ष्याः is of
the kind of परिसंख्या and called
परिसंख्या, and not नियम, by the Mima-
msakas, the grammarians call it
a niyamavidhi. There is no परि-
संख्याविधि according to grammarians;
they cite only two kinds of vidhi
viz. simple vidhi or apurva vidhi
and niyamavidhi.
भट्टोजी surnamed Diksita; a stalwart
grammarian of the Panini system
who flourished in the first half of
the seventeenth century and wrote
many independent books and com-
mentaries such as the Siddhanta-
kaumudi, the Praudhamanorama,
the Vaiyakaranasiddhantakarika,
the Sabdakaustubha and others.
The most reputed work out of
these, however, is the Siddhanta-
kaumudi which is very popular
even today and which has almost
set aside other works of its kind
such as the Prakriyakaumudi and
others. Bhattoji was a Telagu
Brahmana, as generally believed,
and although he belonged to the
|
South, he made Varanasi his home
where he prepared a school of
learned Grammarians. Although
he carried on his work silently in
Varanasi, he was envied by the
reputed rhetorician of his time
Pandita Jagannātha, who criticised
his work ( Bhattoji’s work ) named
Manorama very severely. See
प्रौढमनोरमा above. The Siddhānta-
kaumudi has got many comme-
ntaries of which the Tattvabodhini
written by Bhattoji's pupil Jnane-
ndrasarasvati is appreciated much
by learned grammarians.
भत्व the nature or quality of being
called भ which causes many gram-
matical operations which are given
together by Panini in VI. 4.129 to
175. See the word भ above.
भरतमल्ल a grammarian of Bengal
who lived in the sixteenth century
and who wrote उपसर्गवृत्ति, द्रुतबोध and
other works on grammar.
भर्गादि a class of words headed by भर्ग
which are generally names of
countries, the taddhita affixes अण्
and others added to which are not
elided; e. g. भार्गीं, कैकेयी, काश्मीरी; cf.
Kas. on IV. 1.178.
भर्तृहरि a very distinguished Gra-
mmarian who lived in the seventh
century A. D. He was a senior
contemporary of the authors of the
Kasika, who have mentioned his
famous work viz. The Vakyapadiya
in the Kasika. cf. शब्दार्थसंबन्धोयं प्रकरणम् ।
वाक्यपदीयम् Kas. on P. IV.3.88. His
Vyakarana work "the Vakyapa-
diya" has occupied a very promi-
nent position in Grammatical Lite-
rature. The work is divided into
three sections known by the name
'Kanda' and it has discussed so
thoroughly the problem of the relation
of word to its sense that sub-
|
sequent grammarians have looked
upon his view as an authority.
The work is well-known for ex-
pounding also the Philosophy of
Grammar. His another work " the
Mahabhasya-Dipika " is a scho-
larly commentary on Patanjali's
Mahabhasya. The Commentary is
not published as yet, and its soli-
tary manuscript is very carelessly
written. Nothing is known about
the birth-place or nationality of
Bhartrhari. It is also doubtful
whether he was the same person
as king Bhartrhari who wrote the
'Satakatraya'.
भवत् ( भवन्त् ) ancient term for the
present tense found in the Brha-
ddevata and other works, The
term 'vartamana' for the present
tense was also equally common.
The word is found in the Maha-
bhasya, the Unadisutravrtti of
Ujjvaladatta and in the Grammar
of Jainendra cf. P.II.3.1 Vart 11,
Unadi III. 50 Jain Vyak. I.1.471.
भवदेव a scholar of grammar who has
written a commentary on the
Brhacchabdaratna of Hari Diksita.
भवन्ती ancient term for the present
tense or लट् according to Panini cf.
अस्तिर्भवन्तीपरः प्रथमपुरुषः अप्रयुज्यमानेप्यस्ति
M. Bh. on P. II.3.1 . Vart. 4; cf.
also प्रवृत्तस्याविरामे शासितव्या भवन्ती । इहा-
धीमहे । इह वसामः । इह पुष्यमित्रं याजयामः ।
M. Bh. on P. III. 2.123. See भवत्
(भवन्त्).
भविष्यत् ancient term for the future
tense in general; cf. भविष्यति गम्यादयः ।
भविष्यतोद्यनद्यतन उपसंख्यानम् P. III.3.3
Vart.l : cf. also the words भविष्यत्काल,
भविष्यत्प्रतिषेध, भविष्यदधिकार.
भविष्यन्ती ancient term for the future
tense in general; cf. परिदेवने श्वस्तनी
भविष्यन्त्यर्थे P. III.3.15. Vart.1; cf.
also Kat. III.1.15; Hem. III. 3.15.
|
भष् short term ( प्रत्याहार ) for the con-
sonants भ्, घ्, ढ्, ध् ; cf. एकाचो बशो
भष् P. VIII.2.37.
भष्भाव the substitution of the third
consonants respectively for the
fourth consonants भ्, घ्, ढ् and ध्;
cf. P. VI.1.13 Vart. 13.
भस्त्रादि a class of words headed by
the word भस्त्रा to which the tad.
affix इक ( ष्ठन् ) is added in the
sense of 'carrying by' ; e. g.
भस्त्रिक, भस्त्रिकी cf. Kas. on P.IV.4.16.
भसंज्ञा the term भ applied to the
noun-base in contrast with the
term पद. For details see the word भ.
भागवत हरिशास्त्री a modern scholar of
grammar who has written a com-
mentary named Vakyarthacandrika
on the Paribhasendusekhara of
Nagesa; he lived in the first half
of the eighteenth century.
भागवृत्ति one of the oldest commen-
taries on the Sutras of Panini,
which, although not available at
present, has been profusely quoted
by Purusottamadeva and other
Eastern Grammarians of the
twelfth and later centuries. The
authorship of the work is attribut-
ed to Bhartrhari, but the point is
doubtful as Siradeva in his Pari-
bhasavrtti on Pari. 76 has stated
that the author of the Bhagavrtti
has quoted from Maghakavya; cf.
अत एवं तत्रैव सूत्रे भागवृत्तिः पुरातनमुनेर्मुनिता-
मिति पुरातनीनेदिरिति च प्रमादपाठावेतौ गतानु-
गतिकतया कवयः प्रयुञ्जते न तेषां लक्षणे चक्षुरिति ।
Some scholars attribute its author-
ship to Vimalamati. Whosoever
be the author, the gloss ( भागवृत्ति )
was a work of recognised merit;
cf. काशिकाभागवृत्त्योश्चेत् सिद्धान्तं वेत्तुमस्ति धीः ।
तदा विचिन्त्यतां भातभीषावृत्तिरियं मम Bha-
savrtti at the end. सृष्टिघर in his
commentary on the Bhasavrtti
also says " सा हि द्वयोर्विवरणकर्त्री."
|
भाण्डारकर [ Sir Ramakrishna Gopal
Bhandarkar 1837-1925 A. D. ] a
well-known scholar of Sanskrit
Grammar who has written learned
articles on many grammatical
topics. He was a distinguished
Professor of Sanskrit in the latter
half of the nineteenth century.
He was one of the pioneers of
Sanskrit studies in India.
भारद्वाज (1) an ancient grammarian
quoted by Panini in his rules to
show differences of opinion; cf. ऋतो
भारद्वाजस्य VII. 2.63; (2) name of a
country in the days of Panini cf.
कृकणपर्णाद्भारद्वाजे P. IV. 2.145,
भारद्धाजीय scholars and grammarians
belonging to or following the Bha-
radwaja School of Grammar whose
views are often quoted in the
Mahabhasya; भारद्वाजीयाः पठन्ति M.
Bh. on P. I.1.20 Vart. 1, I.1.56
Vart.11 : I.2.22 Vart.3; I.3.67 Vart.
4, III.1.38 Vart. 1, III 1.48 Vart.
3; III 1.89 Vart. 1, IV.1.79, VI.4.
47 and VI.4.155.
भाव (1 ) becoming; existence. The
word is used many times in the
sense of धात्वर्थ- the sense of a root
which is 'incomplete activity' or
'process of evolving'; cf. तदाख्यातं
येन भावं स धातुः R. Pr. XII. 5; cf.
also षड् भावविकारा भवन्ति Nir. I. 36;
पूर्वापरीभूतं भावमाख्यातेन आचष्टे व्रजतिपचती-
त्युपक्रमप्रभृति अपवर्गपर्यन्तम् Nir. I. 1 ; (2)
activity as opposed to instru-
ments ( साधन or कारक ); cf. भाव-
गर्हायाम् । धात्वर्थगर्हायाम् Kas. on P.
III. 1.24; cf. also भावः क्रिया, Kas. on
यस्य च भावेन भावलक्षणम् P. II. 3.37; (3)
completed action which is shown,
not by a verb, but by a verbal
derivative noun; cf. धात्वर्थश्च धातु-
नैवोच्यते । यस्तस्य सिद्धता नाम धर्मस्तत्र घञादयः
प्रत्यया विधीयन्ते Kas. on 'भावे' P. III.
3.18; cf. also कृदभिहितो भावो द्रव्यवद्भवति
|
M. Bh. on P. II. 2.19, III. 1.67,
IV. 1.3, V. 4.19; cf. also भावस्त्वेक:
M. Bh. on P. III. 1.67; (4) the
radical factor for the use of a
word; प्रवृत्तिनिमित्त; cf. भवतोत्मादभि-
धानप्रत्ययौ इति भावः । शब्दस्य प्रवृत्तिनिमित्तं
भावशब्देनोच्यते । अश्वत्वम् , अश्वता । Kāś,
on P. 5.1.119; (5) thing, object
cf सिद्धशब्दः कूटस्थेषु भावेष्वविचालिषु वर्तते
M. Bh. I. 1. Āhnika l; (6) trans-
formation, substitution; change
into the nature of another; cf. तत्र
प्रथमास्तृतीयभावम् R. Pr. II. 4. cf. also
the words मूर्धन्यभाव, अभिनिधानभाव
etc. {7) possession of the qualities,
nature; तदर्थस्य भावः तादर्थ्यम्; M. Bh.
on P. II. 3.13; (8) relationship;
cf. गुणप्रधानभाव, प्रकृतिविकृतिभाव etc.
भावकर्तृक having for its subject a
verbal derivative in the sense of
the भाव or the root activity. The
word भाववचन is explained as
भावकर्तृक in the Kāṡikāvŗtti. e. g.
the word रोगः in चौरस्य रुजति रोगः
Kāṡ. on P. II. 3.54: cf. भाववचनानां
भावकर्तृकाणां Kāṡ. on P II. 3.54.
भावदीप name of a commentary on
the Ṡabdakaustubha by कृष्णमिश्र.
भावदेव a grammarian who has
written a commentary on the
Bŗhacchabdaratna of Hari Dīkșita;
possibly the same as भवदेव.See भवदेव.
भावना effort, activity.
भावप्रकाश name of a commentary
on the शब्दकौस्तुभ by वैद्यनाथ पायगुण्डे.
भावप्रत्यय an affix in the sense of quality
such as त्व, ता etc.; cf. न ह्यन्तरेण
भावप्रत्ययं गुणप्रधानो भवति निर्देशः .
भावप्रधान description of a verb or
verbal form in which activity
plays the main part as opposed
to a noun in which completed
activity ( सत्व ) is predominant.
भावभेद the different activities such
as igniting a hearth, placing a
rice-pot on it, pouring water in
|
it etc., which form the different
parts of the main activity viz.
cooking; cf. उक्तो भावभेदो भाष्ये M.
Bh. on P. III. 3.19, III. 4.67.
भाववचन (1) expressive of भाव or the
completed verbal activity; e.g. the
word भाव itself, as also कृती, राग, and
others; (2) having for their subject
a verbal derivative in the form of
the verbal activity. See भावकर्तृक.
भावविकार kinds of verbal activity
which are described to be six in
number viz. production, existence,
transformation, growth, decay and
destruction. These six modes of
existence first mentioned by Vāŗș-
yayani and quoted by Yāska are
explained philosophically by
Bhartŗhari as a mere appearance
of the Śabdabrahman or Sattā
when one of its own powers, the
time factor ( कालशक्ति ) is superim-
posed upon it, and as a result of
that superimposition, it (i.e. the
Śabdabrahman) appears as a process;
cf. षड् भावाविकारा भवन्ति इति वार्ष्या-
यणि: । जायते अस्ति विपरिणमते वर्धते अपक्षीयते
विनश्यति इति । Nir.I.2; cf. also Vāk-
yapadiya III.30.
भावशर्मन् the author of the कातन्त्रपरि-
भाषावृत्ति, a work on the Paribhāșās
in grammar which are utilized
in explaining the rules of the
कातन्त्रव्याकरण by Śarvavarman.
भावसाधन (l) a word in the sense of
भाव or completed verbal activity
अस्ति भावसाधनो विधिशब्दः । विधानं विधिरिति
M. Bh. on P. I.1.57; (2) an affix
applied for the formation of a
word in the sense of verbal acti-
vity; cf. प्रयतनं प्रयत्नः । प्रपूर्वाद्यततेर्भा-
वसाधनो नङ् प्रत्ययः M. Bh. on I.1.9.
भावसेन a grammarian of the Kātan-
tra school who wrote the works
Kātantrarūpamālā and Kaumāra
Vyākaraņa.
|
भावित designated by a technical
term; cf. किं पुनरिदं तद्भावितग्रहणं वृद्धिरित्येवं
ये आकारैकारौकारा विहिता भाव्यन्ते तेषां ग्रहणं
आहोस्विद् आदैन्मात्रस्य, M.Bh.on P.I.11.
भाविन् which is to come into being;
of future time: cf. भावि कृत्यमासीत्
M. Bh. on III. 4. 1: cf. भाविन: सुट
आदेशो विधीयते M.Bh. on P. VII. 1.
33; cf also एवं तर्हि भाविनीयं संज्ञा
विज्ञास्यते M.Bh on P. I. 1.45.
भावेप्रयेाग impersonal form of a
sentence when there is no activity
mentioned on the part of the agent
nor resulting upon the object,
but there is a mere mention of
verb-activity.
भाव्य that which is to be produced;
cf.Jain. Vyak. I.1.72. See भाव्यमान.
भाव्यमान lit, which is to be produc-
ed; which is prescribed by a rule,
like an affix; hence, an affix or an
augment or a substitute prescribed
by a rule as contrasted with the
conditions or the original wording
for which something is substituted,
or after which an affix is placed,
or to which an addition is made,
or which is deleted; cf. भाव्यमानेन
सवर्णानां ग्रहृणं न Par. Sek. Pari, 19;
also cf. M.Bh. on P.I. 1.50, I.1.
69,VI.1.85, VI.4.160.
भाषा spoken language as opposed to
the archaic Vedic Language; cf.
भाषायां सदवसश्रुवः;P.III2.108;प्रत्यये भाषायां
नित्यम् . P. VIII. 4, 45 Vārt. 1 ; cf.
also R. T. 96, 212; cf also नेति
प्रतिषेधार्थीयो भाषायाम् । उभयमन्वध्यायम् Nir.
I.4.
भाषानुशासन a work on Language
attributed to यश:कवि.
भाषांमञ्जरी a small treatise on gram-
mar written by Vyaṅkaṭa Subbā-
Shastrī.
भाषावृत्ति a short gloss on the Aṣṭādhyāyī
of Pāṇini in the l2th century
|
by Puruṣottamadeva, a reputed
scholar belonging to the Eastern
school of grammarians which
flourished in Bengal and Behar in
the 10th, 11th and 12th centuries,
The gloss is very useful for begi-
nners and it has given a clear
explanation of the different sūtras
without going into difficult nice-
ties and discussions. The treatise
does not comment upon Vedic
portions or rules referring to Vedic
Language because, as the legend
goes, king Lakṣmaṇa Sena, for
whom the gloss was written, was
not qualified to understand Vedic
Language; cf. वैदिकभाषानर्हत्वात् Com.
on Bhāṣāvṛtti by Sṛṣṭidhara.
There is a popular evaluation
of the Bhāṣāvṛtti given by the
author himself in the stanza
"काशिकाभागवृत्त्योश्चेत्सिद्धान्तं बोद्धुमस्ति धीः ।
तदा विचिन्त्यतां भ्रातर्भाषावृत्तिरियं मम "
at the end of his treatise; for details
see पुरुषोत्तमदेव.
भाषावृत्तिटीका a learned commentary
on Puruṣottamadeva's Bhāṣavṛtti
by Sṛṣṭidhara a learned grammarian
of the sixteenth century.
भाषिक belonging to, or used in spoken
language as contrasted with the
Vedic Language or निगम; cf. अथापि
भाषिकेभ्यो धातुभ्यो नैगमाः कृतो भाष्यन्ते Nir.
II.2.
भाषितपुंस्क a word or a noun-base
which has the same sense in the
masculine gender as in the neuter
gender; generally words of quality
or adjectives like शुचि, मधु etc. fall
in this category;cf तृतीयादिषु भाषितपुंस्कं
पुंवद्गालवस्य P. VII. 1. 74; cf. also
भाषितः पुमान् यस्मिन्नर्थे प्रवृत्तिानिमित्ते स भाषित-
पुंस्कशब्देनोच्यते । तद्योगादभिधेयमपि यन्नपुसकं
तदपि भाषितपुंस्कम् । तस्य प्रतिपादकं यच्छब्दरूपं
तदपि भाषितपुंस्कम् । Kāś. on VII.1.74.
भाष्य a learned commentary on an
original work, of recognised merit
|
and scholarship, for which people
have got a sense of sanctity in
their mind; generally every Sūtra
work of a branch of technical
learning (or Śāstra) in Sanskrit has
got a Bhāṣya written on it by a
scholar of recognised merit. Out
of the various Bhāṣya works of the
kind given above, the Bhāṣya on
the Vyākaraṇa sūtras of Pāṇini is
called the Mahābhāṣya, on the
nature of which possibly the
following definition is based "सूत्रार्थो
वर्ण्यते यत्र पदैः सूत्रानुकारिभिः । स्वपदानि च
वर्ण्यन्ते भाष्यं भाष्यविदो विदुः ।" In
books on Sanskrit Grammar the
word भाष्य is used always for the
Mahābhāṣya. The word भाष्य is
sometimes used in the Mahābhāṣya
of Patanjali (cf. उक्तो भावभेदो भाष्ये
III.3.19, IV.4.67) where the
word may refer to a work like
लघुभाष्य which Patañjali may have
written, or may have got available
to him as written by somebody
else, before he wrote the Mahābhāṣya.
भाष्यकार Patañjali, the author of the
Pātañjala Mahābhāṣya; the term,
in this sense, frequently occurs in
works on Grammar. See भाष्य.
भाष्यसूत्र the brief pithy statements in
the Mahābhāṣya of the type of the
Sūtras or the Vārttikas. These
assertions or statements are named
'ișṭi' also.
भाष्येष्टि the brief pithy assertions or
injunctions of the type of Sūtras
given by Patañjali in a way to
supplement the Sūtras of Pāṇini
and the Vārttikas thereon. See the
word इष्टि above and the word
भाष्यसूत्र also.
भास्करशास्त्री surnamed Abhyankar
(1785-1870) a great grammarian
in the line of the pupils of Nāgeśa
35
|
who was educated at Poona and
lived at Sātārā. He taught many
pupils, a large number of whom
helped the spread of Vyākaraṇa
studies even in distant places of
the country, such as Vārāṇasi and
others. For details see Vyākaraṇa
Mahābhāṣya Vol. VII pp. 27-29,
D. E. Society's Edition.
भिक्षादि a class of words headed by
the word भिक्षा to which the tad,
affix अ ( अण् ) is added in the
sense of collection;e.g. भैक्षम्,यौवतम्,
पादातम्: cf. Kāś. on P. IV.2.38.
भिदादि a class of roots headed by the
root भिद् to which the kṛt affix अ
(always in the fem. gender as अा )
is added in the sense of verbal
activity: e.g. भिदा, गुह्या, श्रद्धा, मेघा
etc. cf Kāś. on P. III. 3.104.
भिस् affix of the instrumental plural
before which the base is looked
upon as a Pada and sometimes
split up in the Padapāṭha, especi-
ally when the preceding word has
got no change for its last letter or
syllable.
भीमभट्ट writer of the commentary,
named भैमी after him, on the
Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa.
भीमसेन called भीमदास also, who flou-
rished in the fourteenth century
and wrote a treatise on grammar
called भैमव्याकरण.
भीमादि a class of words headed by
the word भीम in which the Uṇādi
affixes म and others, as prescribed
by specific Uṇādi sūtras, are found
added in the sense of the 'apādāna'
case-relation; e.g. भीमः in the sense
'बिभेति अस्मात्'. Similarly भीष्मः, भूमि:,
रज: etc. cf. Kāś. on P.III.4.74.
भुक्त lit. swallowed or eaten up; the
term is used in connection with
letters that are uttered imperfect-
|
ly on account of the proximity of
similar letters.
भुग्न name of a Saṁdhi or coalescence
given by the writers of the
Prātiśākhya works where the diph-
thong vowels ओ and औ, followed
by any vowel which is not labial,
are turned respectively into अव्
and आव्: e.g. ऋतेन मित्रावरुणावृतावृधा-
वृतस्पृशा (Ṛ. Saṁh.I.2.8); cf. ओष्ठ्ययो
न्योर्भुग्नमनोष्ठये वकारोत्रान्तरागमः । यथा ऋतेन
मित्रावरुणावृतावृधावृतस्पृशा । अनोष्ठये इति
किम् । वायो उक्थेभिः 2.2. (R.Saṁh.
I.2.2). इत्यतः वाय उक्थेभि cf. R. Pr.
II.11.
भूत lit. what has become or happen-
ed. The word is used in books on
grammar in the sense of past
tense in general, which has been
subdivided into (a) unseen past
(परोक्षभूत or लिट् ), (b) past, not of to-
day (अनद्यतनभूत or लङ् ) and (c)
past in general (सामान्यभूत or लुङ्),cf.
भूते P.III.2.84, परोक्षे लिट् P.III.2.116
and अनद्यतने लङ् P.III.2.111.
भूतपूर्वगति lit. denotation of some-
thing which formerly was existing;
a consideration of that form of a
word which was formerly present.
The word is used frequently by
commentators when they try to ap-
ply a rule of grammar to a changed
wording under the plea that the
wording required by the rule
was formerly there; cf.भूतपूर्वगत्या
(पकारलोपे कृतेपि ) दाप् भविष्यति, M. Bh.
on P.I.1.20 Vārt. 9; cf. also M.
Bh. on P.I.1.56, VII.1.9 and VII.
3.103; cf.also सांप्रतिकाभावे भूतपूर्वगतिः
Par. Śeḵ. Pari. 76.
भूपाद name popularly given by
Śiradeva and other grammarians
to the third pāda of the first
adhyāya of Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyi
as it begins with the Sūtra भूवादयो
धातवः P.I.3.1.
भूमन् plurality of the individuals
|
referred to; cf. बहोर्नञ्वदुत्तरपदभूम्नि P.
VI.2.175.
भूमादि the limited senses भूमन् (plu-
rality) and others in which भतुप्
and other possessive taddhita
affixes should take place, and not in
the general sense of the 'presence at
one place' as also 'the possession by
some one individual;' cf. भूमनिन्दाप्रशंसासु
नित्ययोगेतिशायने । संसर्गेस्तिविवक्षायां
भवन्ति मतुबादय: M. Bh. on V. 2.94.
भूवादि lit headed by भू , or headed
by भू and वा as some scholars like
to explain; the term means roots;
in general, which have भू as the
first root in Pāṇini's list of roots;
cf. भूवादयो धातव: P. I. 3.1; The
word भूवादि denoting roots stands
in contrast with the word भ्वादि
which stands for the roots of the
first conjugation. भूवादीनां वकारोयं
मङ्गलार्थः प्रयुज्यते | भुवो वार्थं वदन्तीति भ्वर्था
वा वादयः स्मृता: Kāś. on P. I. 3.1.
भृशादि a class of nouns headed by
भृश to which the denominative
affix य is added in the sense of
'being or becoming what they
were not before;' e.g. अभृशो भृशो
भवति भृशायते; similarly ，शीघ्रायते, मन्दायते,
उन्मनायते, दुर्मनायते etc.cf.Kāś.III.1.I3.
भेद difference, differentiation; .cf.
सति भेदे र्किचित्समानमिति कृत्वा सवर्णसंज्ञा
भविष्यति M. Bh. on P. I.1.9, Vārt. 2.
भेदक (1) lit.distinguishing; differentiating;
cf भेदकत्वात्स्वरस्य | भेदका
उदात्तादय: | M. Bh. on P. I. 1.1
Vārt. 13; (2) adjective; cf. भेदकं
विशेषणं भेद्यं विशेष्यम् Kāś. on P. II:
1.57; (3) variety; kind; cf. सामान्यस्य
विशेषो भेदकः प्रकार: Kāś. on P.V. 3.23;
(4) indicating, suggesting, as contrasted
with वाचक; cf. संबन्धस्य तु
भेदक: Vākyapadīya.
भेद्य that which is distinguished; the
word which is qualified; cf. भेद्यं
विशेष्यम् Kāś. on P. II. 1.57.
|
भैमव्याकरण a grammar treatise
written by भौमसेन in the fourteenth
century A. D.
भैमी name of a commentary on the
Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa
written by Bhīmabhaṭṭa in the
latter half of the eighteenth cen-
tury.
भैरवमिश्र one of the reputed gra-
mmarians of the latter half of the
eighteenth century and the first
half of the nineteenth century who
wrote commentaries on several
prominent works on grammar. He
was the son of भवदेव and his native
place was Prayāga. He has
written the commentary called
Candrakalā on the Laghuśab-
denduśekhara, Parikṣā on the
Vaiyākaraṇabhũṣanasāra, Gadā
called also Bhairavī or Bhairavīgadā
on the Paribhāṣenduśekhara
and commentaries (popularly
named Bhairavī) on the Śabda-
ratna and Lingānuśāsana. He is
reported to have visited Poona,
the capital of the Peśawas and
received magnificent gifts for
exceptional proficiency in Nyāya
and Vyākaraṇa. For details see
pp. 24 and 25 Vol. VII . Pātañ-
jala Mahābhāṣya D. E. Society's
Edition.
भैरवी name given to a commentary
in general written by Bhairava-
miśra, which see above. The
commentary on the Paribhāṣen-
duśekhara is more popularly
known as Bhairavī.
भोगनिर् tad. affix भोगीनर् suggested
by the Vārttikakāra to form
words like राजभोगीन, अाचार्यभोगीन
which are derived by the rule
आत्मन्विश्वजनभोगोत्तरपदात् ख: P. V. 1.9.
भोज the well-known king of Dhārā
who was very famous for his
|
charities and love of learning.
He flourished in the eleventh
century A.D. He is said to have
got written or himself written
several treatises on various śāstras.
The work Sarasvatīkaṇṭhābharaṇa
which is based on the Astādhyāyi
of Pāṇini, but which has included
in it the Vārttikas and Paribhāṣās
also, has become in a way a
Vyākaraṇa or a general work in
grammar and can be styled as
Bhoja-Vyākaraṇa.
भोलानाथ a grammarian who has
written a commentary named
Saṁdarbhāmṛta on Bopadeva's
Mugdhabodha.
भौतपूर्व्य the consideration that a
thing was such and such a one
formerly, and hence liable to
undergo grammatical operations
on that ground; cf. कृत एत्त्वे भौत-
पूर्व्यात् । भिस ऐस् । M. Bh. on P.
VII. 1. 9.
भौवादिक belonging to the class of
roots headed by भू; a root of the
first conjugation; cf. अक्षू व्याप्तौ
भौवादिकः Kāś. on P. III. 1.75.
भ्यस् case-affix of the dative and
ablative plural: cf. स्वौजसमौट् P.
IV. 1. 2.
भ्याम् case-affix of the instrumental,
dative and ablative dual; cf.
स्वौजसमौट् P. IV. 1. 2.
भ्रटच् tad. affix भ्रट applied to the
prefix अव in the sense of depres-
sion of the nose; e.g. अवभ्रटः पुरुष:
अवभ्रटा नासिका अवभ्रटम् (depression of
the nose नासिकाया नतत्वम्);cf. Kāś. on
नते नासिकायाः संज्ञायां टटिञ् नाटज् भ्रटच:
P. V. 2.31.
भ्रष्टावसर lit. a person or a thing of
which the proper occasion has
passed; the word is used in conne-
ction with the application of a
rule even though the proper time
|
of its application is gone, on the
analogy of a man who is paid his
Dakṣiṇā although the proper time
has gone ( भ्रष्टावसरन्यायेन दक्षिणा दीयते);
cf. न च पुनर्लुक्शास्त्रं प्रवर्तते भ्रष्टावसरत्वात्
Kāś. on P. VII.2.101.
भ्राज stray or spurious verses or
stanzas whose authorship cannot
be traced, but which are commonly
quoted by scholars; cf. भ्राजा
नाम श्लेाकाः M.Bh. on I.1 Āhnika 1;
the word भ्राज is explained as
'composed by Kātyāyana' by
Nāgeśabhaṭṭa in his Uddyota.
भ्रूमध्य lit.centre of the brows, or eye-
brows which is described as the
place of air ( which produces
utterance or speech) at the time
of the evening soma-pressing or
sacrifice: cf. प्रातःसवनमाध्यन्दिनसवनतृती-
यसवनक्रमेण उरःकण्ठभ्रूमध्यानि त्रीणि स्थानानि
वायोर्भवन्ति । Vāj. Prāt. I. 30; cf. also
भ्रुवोर्मध्ये प्राणमावेश्य सम्यक्.
भ्वादिगण the class of roots headed by
भू ; the first conjugation of roots.
म
म् (1) fifth letter of the labial class
of consonants which is possessed
of the properties नादानुप्रदान, घोष,
कण्ठसंवृतत्व, अल्पप्राणत्व and अानुनासिक्य ;
(2) substitute म् ( मश् ) for अम् of
the 1st. pers. sing. in Vedic litera-
ture; e.g. वधीं वृत्रम् । cf. अमो मश् P.
VII, 1.40;
म (l) the consonant म् with the vowel
अ added for facility of utterance;
cf T. Pr. I.2.1 ; (2) The substi-
tute म for मस् of the 1st pers.
pl. in the perfect tense cf.
P परस्मैपदानां ... णल्वमाः III. 4.82
and in the present tense also in
the case of the root विद्; (3) tad.
affix म added to the word मध्य in
the Śaiṣika senses,and to the words
|
द्यु and द्रु in the sense of possession;
cf. P.IV.3.8,V.2. 108.
मकरन्द (1)name of a commentary by
Raṅganātha on the Padamañjari
of Haradatta; (2) name of a com-
mentary on the Supadma Vyāka-
raṇa by Viṣṇumiśra.
मकार the consonant म् with the vowel
अ and the affix कार added for faci-
lity of use and pronunciation; cf.
T.Pr.I.17 and 21.
मङ्गलार्थ for the sake of auspicious-
ness at the beginning of a treatise
or work; cf. भूवादीनां वकारोयं मङ्गलार्थः
प्रयुज्यते M.Bh. on P.I.3.1.;cf.मङ्गलादीनि
हि शास्त्राणि । M.Bh. on P.I.1.1.
मट् tad. affix म applied to a numeral,
not preceded by another numeral
in the sense of completion; e. g.
पञ्चमः, सप्तमः; cf. नान्तादसंख्यादेर्मट् Pān.
V.2.49.
मण् tad. affix म, causing vṛddhi for
the word मध्य, in the sense of
'present therein' ( तत्र भवः ); e.g.
माध्यम:; cf. मण्मीयौ चापि प्रत्ययौ, P.IV.
3.60 Vārt. 2.
मण्डूकगति lit.the gait of a frog; jump;
the continuation of a word from a
preceding Sūtra to the following
Sūtra or Sūtras in the manner of a
frog by omitting one or more Sūtras
in the middle; the word मण्डूकप्लुति
is also used in the same sense espe-
cially by later grammarians; cf.
अथवा मण्डूकगतयोधिकाराः । यथा मण्डूका
उत्प्लुत्योत्प्लुत्य गच्छन्ति तद्वदधिकाराः ॥ M.
Bh. on P.I.1.3 Vārt.2, II. 3.32, II.
4.34, VI.1.16, VI.3.49,VII. 2.117.
मण्डूकप्लुति the same as मण्डूकगति which
see above; cf. अथवा मण्डूकप्लुतयोधिकाराः
MB.h. on P. V.2.4.
मञ्जूषा a popular name given to the
work परमलघुमञ्जूषा of Nāgeśa on अर्थ-
प्रक्रिया (science or method of inter-
pretation) in Vyākaraṇa, which is
|
generally read by advanced
students. Nāgeśa has also written
a bigger work on the same subject
लघुमञ्जूषा which sometimes is also
referred to by the word मञ्जूषा.
मतु the same as मतुप् a tad. affix
showing possession; the word is fre-
quently used in Pāṇini's rules for
मतुप्. cf. मतोश्च बह्वजङ्गात् । P. IV 2.72;
cf. also, P.IV. 4.125, 136; V. 2.59,
VI.1.215, VI.3.118,130; VIII. 2.9;
for the sense of मतु see मतुप् below.
The affix मतु (instead of मतुप् of
Pāṇini) is found in the Atharva
Prātiśakhya.
मतुप् tad. affix मत् changed in some
cases to वत् (cf मादुपधायाश्च मतोर्वोऽ
यवादिभ्यः P. VIII. 2.9), applied to
any noun or substantive in the
sense of 'who possesses that,' or
'which contains it,' or in the
sense of possession as popularly
expressed. The affix is called
possessive affix also, and is very
commonly found in use; e. g.
गोमान्, वृक्षवान् , यवमान् , etc. cf. तदस्या-
स्त्यस्मिन्निति मतुप् P. V. 2.94. The
very general sense of 'possession'
is limited to certain kinds of pos-
session by the Vārttikakāra in the
following stanza; भूमनिन्दाप्रशंसासु
नित्ययोगेतिशायने । संसर्गेऽस्तिविवक्षायां भवन्ति
मतुबादयः cf. Kāś. on P. V. 2.94.
There are other tad. affixes pres-
cribed in the same sense as मतुप्,
such as the affixes लच् (V. 2.96-
98), इलच् (99, 100, 105, 117), श
and न (100), ण (101), विनि (102,
121, 122), इनि (102, 115, 116,
128, 129-137), अण् (103, 104), उरच्
(106), र (107), म (108), व ( 109,
110), ईरन् and ईरच् (111), वलच् (112,
113), ठन् (115, 116), ठञ् (118, 119),
यप् (120), युस् (123, 138, 140),
ग्मिनि (124), आलच् and आटच् (125),
अच् (127), and ब, भ, यु, ति, तु, त
and यस् each one applied to spe-
|
cifically stated words. मतुप् is also
specially prescribed after the
words headed by रस (cf. रसादिभ्यश्च
P. V. 2.95) in supersession of
some of the other affixes men-
tioned above which would take
place in such cases, if मतुप् were
not prescribed by the rule रसा-
दिभ्यश्च. The portion of the Aṣṭādh-
yāyī prescribing the possessive affix-
es is named मतुबधिकार (P. V. 2.92
to 140).
मतुप्पाद a conventional name given
by grammarians to the third
pāda of the eighth Adhyāya of
Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī as the pāda
begins with the sūtra मतुवसोरु संबुद्धौ
छन्दसि P. VIII. 3.1.
मतुबर्थिक affix in the sense of मतुप्
i. e. in the sense of possession.
For these affixes of which इनि (इन्)
is very common see the word
मतुप्, cf. शैषिकान्मतुबर्थीयाच्छैषिको मतुब-
र्थिक; । सरूपः प्रत्ययो नेप्टः सन्नन्तान्न सनिष्यते ॥
M. Bh. on III. 1.7; V. 2.94.
मतुबर्थीय affix in the sense of मतुप् ;
see मतुबर्थिक.
मतुब्लोप elision of the affix मतुप्
specially prescribed after words of
quality, or words meaning quality,
such as शुक्ल, कृष्ण which originally
mean the white colour, the
black colour etc. e. g. शुक्लः पट: cf.
गुणवचनेभ्यो मतुपो लुक् P. V. 2.94
Vārt. 3.
मतोन्मज्जा name of a commentary on
Koṇḍabhaṭṭa's Vaiyākaraṇabhū-
ṣaṇa written by a grammarian
named वनमालिन्.
मत्वर्थ sense in which the affix मतु
( मतुप् ) is affixed; the sense of
'possession' in general; see the
word मतुप् above.
मत्वर्थीय an affix which has got the
sense of मतु ( मतुप् ). See the words
मतुबर्थिक and मतुबर्थीय above.
|
मध्य lit. middle; middling variety.
The word is used in the sense
of the middling effort between
the open (विवृत) and the close
(संवृत) external efforts which
technically is called हकार; cf. मध्ये
हकारः । मध्ये भव: मध्यः । अ सांप्रतिके ।
तदयमर्थः । सांप्रतिके प्रकृतिस्थे कण्ठे सति हकारो
नाम बाह्यः प्रयत्नः क्रियते । तेन च व्यञ्जनेषु
घोषो जायते । T. Pr. Bhāṣya on II.6.
मध्यकौमुदी called also मध्यमकौमुदी a
work on grammar which is an
abridgment, to a certain extent,
of Bhaṭṭojī's Siddhāntakaumudī.
The treatise was written by Vara-
darāja, a pupil of Bhaṭṭojī for
facilitating the study of the
Siddhānta-kaumudi.
मध्यपतित lit. fallen in the middle;
the word is used generally in the
sense of an augment which is
inserted in the middle of a word.
Sometimes an affix too, like अकच्
or a conjugational sign like श्रम्,
is placed in the middle of a
word. Such a middling augment
is technically ignored and a
word together with it is taken as
the original word for grammatical
operations; e.g. उच्चकैः, नीचकैः etc.
cf तन्मध्यपतितस्तद्ग्रहणेन गृह्यते Par. Śek.
Pari. 89.
मध्यम (1) the middle person ( मध्य-
मपुरुष ), cf. युष्मद्युपपदे...मध्यम: P. I.
4.105; cf. also Nir. VII. 7; (2)
middling tone or effort cf. मध्यमेन
स वाक्ययोगः T. Pr. XVIII. 4,
where the commentator explains
the word as उच्चनीचसमाहारविलक्षणः
वाक्प्रयोगः । the word मध्यमा is used
in this sense as qualifying a
mode of utterance. वृत्ति; cf.
अभ्यासार्थे द्रुतां वृत्तिं प्रयोगार्थे तु मध्यमाम् ।
Ṟ. Pr. XIII. 19; cf also चतुष्कला
मध्यमायार्म् R. T. 32; (3) one of the
seven modes of speech or tones.
|
cf सप्त वाचः स्थानानि भवन्ति । उपांशुध्वान-
निमदेापव्दिमन्मन्द्रमध्यमताराणि T. Pr.
XXIII.4 and 5 and also कण्ठे मध्यमम्
XVIII.11 where the commentatator
explains मध्यम as यत्र कण्ठे स्थाने
प्रयोग उपलभ्यते तन्मध्यमं नाम षष्ठं वाचस्स्थानम् ।
(4) one of the seven musical
notes originating or proceeding
from the Svarita accent cf., स्वरित-
प्रभवा ह्येते षड्जमध्यमपञ्चमाः Pāṇ Śikṣā.
मध्यमकौमुदी (l) name of a treatise on
grammar by Rāmaśarman; (2)
the same as मध्यकौमुदी.
मध्यमपदलोप lit. the dropping of the
middle word or member ( of a
compound generally) as for instance
in शाकपार्थिक for शाकप्रियपार्थिव;
the word मध्यमपदलोप is also used
in the sense of a compound.
The compounds which have
the middle word dropped
are enumerated by the Vārttika-
kāra under the Vārttika शाकपार्थिवा-
दीनां मध्यमपदलेापश्च Bh. Vṛ. II.1.60
Vārt.; cf also Kāt. II.6.30.
मध्यमा or मध्यमवृत्ति See मध्यम (2).
मध्यसिद्धान्तकौमुदी See मध्यकौमुदी
मध्येपवाद a rule forming an exception
to other general rules being placed
between them, one or many
of which are placed before and the
others afterwards. Such a rule sets
aside the previous rules and not
the succeeding ones. The state-
ment laying down this dictum is
मध्येपवादाः पूर्वान् विधीन् बाधन्ते नोत्तरान्
Par. Śek.Pari. 60, also M. Bh. on
P.VI.4.148 Vārt. 5.
मध्येपवादन्याय the maxim of the
middle rule of exception; see
मधेयपवाद.
मध्योदात्त the acute or udātta accent
to the मध्य vowel which is neither
the initial ( अादि) nor the final one
( अन्त ) as laid down by the rule
उपोत्तमं रिति P. VI.1.217; cf. मध्यो-
|
दात्तमपि यमिच्छति तत्र रेफमनुबन्धं करोति
M. Bh. on III.1.3.
मध्वादि a class of words headed by
the word मधु to which the taddhita
affix मत् (मतुप्) is added as a Cātu-
rarthika affix; e.g. मधुमान् , विसमान्
etc.; cf. Kāś. on P.IV. 2.86.
मन् (1) the affix मनिन् generally found
in Vedic Literature added to
roots ending in अा and preceded
by a noun; e.g. सुदामा, अश्वत्थामा; cf.
आतो मनिन्कनिब्वनिपश्च P.III.2.74,75;
(2) Uṇādi affix in ओद्म; cf. औद्म इति
उन्देरौणादिके मन्प्रत्यये नलोपो गुणश्च निपात्यते
Kāś. on P. VI.4.29.
मनिन् See मन्.
मनोज्ञादि a class of words headed by
the word मनोज्ञ, to which the taddhita
affix अक (वुञ्) is added in the
sense of 'nature' or 'duty'; e.g.
मनोज्ञकम्, काल्याणकम्, अाढयकम् etc. cf.
Kāś. on P. V. 1.133.
मनोरमा (I) the popular name given to
the commentary प्रौढमनेारमा on the
Siddhāntakaumudī of भट्टोजीदीक्षित
by the author himself; the com-
mentary is a scholarly one and
very extensive; and its first portion
only upto the end of Kāraka is
generally read in the Sanskrit
Pāṭhaśālās;(2) name of a commen-
tary on the Madhyasiddhānta-
kaumudī by Rāmasarman; (3)
name given to a treatise discussing
roots given in the Kātantra Gra-
mmar written by रमानाथशर्मा in the
sixteenth century. The work is
called कातन्त्रधातुवृत्ति also.
मनोरमाकुचमर्दन name given in a banter-
ing tone to the treatise प्रौढमनोरमा-
खण्डन written by जगन्नाथपण्डित:
मन्तुदेव known also as मन्तुदेव, a famous
grammarian of the eighteenth
century who has written a com-
mentary named दर्पणा on the
Vaiyākaraṇabhūṣaṇasāra of Koṇḍa-
|
bhaṭṭa and a commentary named
दोषोद्धरण on Nāgeśa's Paribhāṣendu-
śekhara.
मन्त्र name given to the Samhitā por-
tion of the Veda works especially
of the Ṛgveda and the Yajurveda
as different from the Brāhmaṇa,
Āraṇyaka and other portions of the
two Vedas as also from the other
Vedas; cf. मन्त्रशब्द ऋक्शब्दे च यजुःशब्दे च;
M. Bh. on P.I. 1.68 Vārt. 4. The
word मन्त्र occurs several times in
the rules of Pāṇini ( cf. P. II. 4.
80, III.2.71, III.3.96, VI. 1. 151,
VI.1.210, VI.3.131, VI.4.53, VI.
4.141) and a few times in the
Vārttikas. (cf. I. 1. 68 Vārt. 4,
IV.3.66 Vārt. 5 and VI. 4. 141
Vārt. 1). It is, however, doubt-
ful whether the word was used in
the limited sense by Pāṇini and
Kātyāyana. Later on, the word
came to mean any sacred text or
even any mystic formula, which
was looked upon as sacred. Still
later on, the word came to mean a
secret counsel. For details see Gold-
stūcker's Pāṇini p. 69, Thieme's
'Pāṇini and the Veda ' p. 38.
मन्द्र one of the three places of the
origination of articulate speech
which is described as situated in
the throat; cf. त्रीणि मन्द्रं मध्यममुत्तमं च ।
तेषु मन्द्रमुरसि वर्तते Uvvaṭa on R. Pr.
XIII. 17; cf. also मन्द्रमध्यमताराणि
स्थानानि भवन्ति । T.Pr.XXII.11.
मन्तुदेव See मन्तुदेव.
मप् tad. affix म always added to the
kṛt. affix त्रि ( क्त्रि) prescribed after
roots characterized by the mute
syllable डु; e.g. कृत्रिमम् , पवित्रमम् etc.
वत्रेर्मम्नित्यम् P.IV. 4.20.
मय् abbreviated term or pratyāhāra
for all the consonants of the five
classes or Vargas excepting the
|
consonant ञ्; cf. मय उञो वो वा
P.VIII.3.33.
मय tad. affix मयट् (1) in the sense of
proceeding therefrom (तत आगतः P.
IV.3.92) added to words showing
cause or meaning human being; e.g.
सममयम्, देवदत्तमयम्; (2) in the sense
of product (विकार) or part (अवयव) add-
ed optionally with अण् to any word,
e.g. अश्ममयम् , आश्मनम् मूर्वामयम् मौर्वम्,
and necessarily to words beginn-
ing with आ, ऐ and औ, words
of the class headed by the
word शर and the words गो, पिष्ट, व्रीहि,
तिल and some others्; cf. P. IV. 3.
143-150; (3) in the sense of pro-
portion, added to a numeral; e. g.
द्विमयमुदश्विद्यवानाम्; cf. P. V. 2.47; (4)
in the sense of "made up of' added
to the thing of which there is a
large quantity; e.g. अन्नमयम्,
अपूपमयम् cf; तत्प्रकृतवचने मयट् P.V.4.21,22.
मयट् see मय.
मयूरव्यंसकादि a class of compounds
of the type of मयूरव्यंसक which are
somewhat irregular formations and
hence mentioned as they are
found in use. The compounds are
called simple tatpuruṣa compo-
unds; e.g. मयूरव्यंसकः हस्तेगृह्य, एहिपचम्,
उच्चावचम्, खादतमोदता etc.; cf. मयूरव्यं-
सकादयश्च P.II.1.72.
मरीस tad. affix मरीसच् added to the
word अवि in the sense of milk; e.g.
अविमरीसम्; cf. अवेर्दुग्धे सोढदूसमरीसचः P.
V. 2.36 Vārt. 5.
मल्लिनाथ a reputed commentator on
many classical poetic and dra-
matic works, who flourished in
the fourteenth century. He was
a scholar of Grammar and is
believed to have written a com-
mentary on the Śabdenduśekhara
and another named न्यासोद्योत on the
न्यास of जिनेन्द्रबुद्धि.
मश् personal ending म् substituted
|
for अम् in Vedic Literature; e.g.
वधीं वृत्रम्; cf. अमो मश् P. VII. 1.40;
See म्.
मस् personal ending of the first
person (उत्तमपुरुष) plural; e.g.
भवाम:, कुर्मः; cf. तिप्तस्झिसिप्o III.4.78.
मसि personal ending formed by
adding इ to मस् of the 1st person
(उत्तमपुरुष) pl. in Vedic Literature
दीपयामसि, भजयामसि, cf. Kāś. on इदन्तो
मसि P.VII.1.46.
महादेव a grammarian of the Kātantra
school who has written a gloss
on the कातन्त्रवृत्ति of दुर्गसिंह.
महानन्द a grammarian of the eigh-
teenth century who has written a
gloss on Koṇḍabhaṭṭṭa's Vaiyāka-
raṇabhūṣanasāra.
महान्यास name of a commentary on
the Kāśikāvivaranapanjikā (popu-
larly named Nyāsa), mentioned
by Ujjvaladatta in his Unādi-
sūtravṛtti.
महाप्राण lit. hard breathing, aspirate
characteristic (बाह्यप्रयत्न) of conso-
nants possessed by the second and
fourth consonants of the five class-
es, and the sibilants श्, ष् and स्
which letters are also called महाप्राण
on that account.
महाभाष्य lit. the great commentary.
The word is uniformly used by
commentators and classical Sans-
krit writers for the reputed com-
mentary on Pāṇini's Sūtras and
the Vārttikas thereon by Patañjali
in the 2nd century B. C. The
commentary is very scholarly yet
very simple in style, and exhaus-
tive although omitting a number
of Pāṇini's rules. It is the first and
oldest existing commentary on the
Aṣṭādhyāyī of Pāṇini, and, in spite
of some other commentaries and
glosses and other compendia,
written later on to explain the
|
Sutras of Panini, it has remained
supremely authoritative and fur-
nishes the last and final word in
all places of doubt; cf. the remarks
इति भाष्ये स्थितम्, इत्युक्तं भाष्ये, इत्युक्तमाकरे
etc. scattered here and there in
several Vyaakarana treatises form-
ing, in fact, the patent words used
by commentators when they finish
any chain of arguments. Besides
commenting on the Sutras of
Paanini, Patanjali, the author, has
raised many other grammatical
issues and after discussing them
fully and thoroughly, given his
conclusions which have become
the final dicta in those matters.
The work, in short, has become
an encyclopedic one and hence
aptly called खनि or आकर. The
work is spread over such a wide
field of grammatical studies that
not a single grammatical issue
appears to have been left out.
The author appears to have made
a close study of the method and
explanations of the Sutras of
Paanini given at various academies
all over the country and incorpo-
rated the gist of those studies
given in the form of Varttikas at
the various places, in his great
work. He has thoroughly scruti-
nized and commented upon the
Vaarttikas many of which he has
approved, some of which he has
rejected, and a few of which he has
supplemented. Besides the Vaarttikas
which are referred to above, he has
quoted stanzas which verily sum
up the arguments in explanation
of the difficult sutras, composed
by his predecessors. There is a
good reason to believe that there
were small glosses or commenta-
ries on the Sutras of Paanini, written
by learned teachers at the various
|
academies, and the Vaarttikas form-
ed in a way, a short pithy summary
of those glosses or Vrttis. . The
explanation of the word वृत्तौ साधु
वार्तिकम् given by Kaiyata may be
quoted in support of this point.
Kaiyata has at one place even
stated that the argument of the
Bhaasyakaara is in consonance with
that of Kuni, his predecessor. The
work is divided into eightyfive
sections which are given the name of
lesson or आह्लिक by the author, pro-
bably because they form the subject
matter of one day's study each, if
the student has already made a
thorough study of the subject and
is very sharp in intelligence. cf.
अह्ला निर्वृत्तम् आह्लिकम्, (the explanation
given by the commentatiors).Many
commentary works were written
on this magnum opus of Patanjali
during the long period of twenty
centuries upto this time under the
names टीका, टिप्पणी, दीपिका, प्रकाशिका,
व्याख्या, रत्नावली, स्फूर्ति, वृत्ति, प्रदीप,
व्याख्यानं and the like, but only one
of them the 'Pradipa' of कैयटी-
पाध्याय, is found complete. The
learned commentary by Bhartr-
hari, written a few centuries before
the Pradipa, is available only in a
fragment and that too, in a manu-
script form copied down from the
original one from time to time by
the scribes very carelessly. Two
other commentaries which are
comparatively modern, written by
Naarayanasesa and Nilakantha are
available but they are also incom-
plete and in a manuscript form.
Possibly Kaiyatabhatta's Pradipa
threw into the background the
commentaries of his predecessors
and no grammarian after Kaiyata
dared write a commentary supe-
rior to Kaiyata's Pradipa or, if he
|
महाभाष्यदीपिका महाभाष्यव्याख्या 282
began, he had to abandon his work
in the middle. The commentary of
Kaiyata is such a scholarly one
and so written to the point, that
later commentators have almost
identified the original Bhasya with
the commentary Pradipa and
many a time expressed the two
words Bhasya and Kaiyata in the
same breath as भाष्यकैयटयोः ( एतदुक्तम्
or स्पष्टमेतत् ).
महाभाष्यदीपिका a very learned old
commentary on the Mahabhasya
of Patanjali written by the reput-
ed grammarian Bhartrhari or
Hari in the seventh century A. D.
The commentary has got only
one manuscript preserved in Ger-
many available at present, of
which photostat copies or ordi-
nary copies are found here and
there. The first page of the
manuscript is missing and it is
incomplete also, the commentary
not going beyond the first seven
Aahnikas. For details see page
383 Vol. VII Vyaakarana Maha-
bhasya D. E. Society's edition.
महाभाष्यप्रदीप a very scholarly com-
mentary on Patanjali's Mahabha-
Sya written by Kaiyatabhatta in
the eleventh century, The com-
mentary has so nicely explained
every difficult and obscure point
in the Mahabhasya, and has so
thoroughly explained each sen-
tence that the remark of later
grammarians that the torch of
the Mahabhasya has been kept
burning by the Pradipa appears
quite apt and justified. Kaiyata's
commentary has thrown much
additional light on the original
arguments and statements in the
Mahabhasya. There is a learned
commentary on the Pradipa
written by Nagesabhatta which
|
is named 'vivarana' by the author
but which is well known by the
name 'Uddyota' among students
and teachers of Vyakarana. For
details see pp. 389, 390 Vol VII,
Patanjala Mahabhasya, D. E. So-
ciety's Edition.
महाभाष्यप्रदीपटीक name given to each
of the various commentaries on the
Pradipa of Kaiyata written by gra-
mmarians, out of which the com-
mentaries of चिन्तामणि, रामचन्द्रसरस्वती,
नारायण, नित्यानन्दपर्वतीय and one or
two more are available in a man-
uscript form and those too quite
incomplete.
महाभाष्यप्रदीपप्रकाश called also कैयटप्र-
काश, name of the commentary on
the Pradipa of Kaiyata by Nilan-
kanthamakhi a versatile writer
of the 17th century.
महाभाष्यप्रदीपविवरण (!) original name
of the learned commentary on
the 'Pradipa' of Kaiyata written
by Nagesabhatta, a stalwart and
epoch-making grammarian of the
18th century. The commentary
is known popularly by the name
'Uddyota' or Pradipoddyota; (2)
name of the commentary on
Kaiyata's Pradipa by Nityaananda
Parvatiya. The commentary is
also known by the name दीपप्रभा.
महाभाष्यलघुवृत्ति name given to the
short gloss on the Mahabhasya
written by the famous eastern
grammar-scholar Maitreya-Rak-
sita of the twelfth century.
महाभाष्यव्याख्या name given to each of
the explanatory glosses on the
Mahabhasya written by gram-
marians prominent of whom were
Purusottamadeva, Narayana Sesa,
Visnu, Nilakantha and others
whose fragmentary works exist in
a manuscript form.
|
महामिश्र name of a grammarian who
wrote a commentary on Jinen-
drabuddhi's Nyasa. The com-
mentary is known by the name
Vyakaranaprakasa.
महाविभाषा a rule laying down an
option for several rules in a topic
by being present in every rule: cf.
महाविभाषया वाक्यमपि. विभाषा (P.II.1.11)
and समर्थानां प्रथमाद्वा (P. IV.1.82) are
some of the rules of this kind.
महासंज्ञा a long term, as contrasted
with the very short terms टि, घु,
भ, इत् and others introduced
by Panini in his grammar for
the sake of brevity. These long
terms such as सर्वनाम, अब्यय,
परस्मैपद, अात्मनेपद, and many others
were widely in use at the time of
Panini and hence he could not
but pick them up in his grammar
in spite of his strenuous attempts at
brevity. The commentators, how-
ever, find out a motive for his
doing this viz. that appropriate
words only could be understood
by those terms and not others; cf.
महासंज्ञाकरणेन तदनुगुणानामेव अत्र संनिवेशात् ।
S.K. on सर्वादीने सर्वनामानि P. I.1.27.
महिङ् personal ending of the Atmane-
pada first person (उत्तमपुरुष) plural;
cf. तिप्तस्झि ... वहिमहिङ् P. III.4.78.
महिष्यादि a class of words headed by
the word महिषी to which the tad.
affix अ (अण्) is added in the sense
Of 'proper for' ( धर्म्यम् ); e.g. माहिषम्
पौरोहितम् , हौत्रम्: cf. Kas,on P.IV.4.
48.
महीधर a grammarian of the sixteenth
century who, besides many small
treatises on other subjects, wrote
a commentary on the Sarasvata-
Prakriya Vyakarana.
महेशनन्दिन् a Jain Grammarian who
has written a work on the karaka
topic of grammar, named षट्कारक.
|
माक्षव्य name of an ancient writer of
Pratisakhya works mentioned in
the Rk Pratisakhya: cf. R.Pr.I.2.
माचाकीय an ancient writer of a
Pratisakhya work, who is quoted
in the Taittiriya Pratisakhya as
one, holding the view that य and
व् preceded by अ and followed
by उ and ओ respectively, are
dropped provided they stand at
the beginning of a Pada ( word ).
माचाकीय, who belonged to the
Yajurveda school, is said to have
held this view which is generally
held by the followers of the
Rgveda: cf. उकारौकारपरौ लुप्यते माचा-
कीयस्य(T. Pr. X.29) on which the
commentator adds वह्वृचानामयं पक्षः.
माणिक्यदेव a Jain writer who has
written a gloss on the Unadisutras
consisting of ten chapters popu-
larly called उणादिसूत्रदशपादी.
माण्डूकेय name of an ancient writer
of a Pratisakhya work referred to
in the Rk Pratisakhya, cf. R.Pr.I.2.
मातृकावर्ण letters of the alphabet.
See अक्षरसमाम्नाय.
मात्रच् a tad. affix in the sense of
measure applied optionally with
द्वयस and दघ्न to a noun e.g. ऊरुमात्रम्
प्रस्थमात्रम् ; cf. प्रमाणे द्वयसज्दघ्नञ्मात्रचः P.
V.2.37 and Kasika thereon which
remarks that द्वयस and दघ्न are
applied in the sense of height,
while मात्र is applied in the sense of
any measure: cf. प्रथमश्च द्वितीयश्च
ऊर्ध्वमाने मतौ मम Kas. on P. V.2.37.
मात्रा (1) measure, quantity ; cf भवति
हि तत्र या च यावती च अर्थमात्रा M. Bh.
on P.I.2.45 and II.1.1 ; (2) mora,
prosodial unit of one instant i.e.
the length of time required to
pronounce a short vowel: cf. भूयसी
मात्रा इवर्णोवर्णयोः, अल्पीयसी अवर्णस्य, M.Bh.
on I.1.48 Vart. 4: cf. मात्रा ह्रस्वस्तावद-
वग्रहान्तरं, द्वे दीर्धः,तिस्रः प्लुत उच्यते स्वरः
|
R. Pr.I.16: cf also R. Pr. I.34, T.
Pr.I.37, V.Pr.I.59, R.T.28 also cf
अर्धमात्रालाघवेन पुत्रोत्सवं मन्यन्ते वैयाकरणाः
Par. Sek. Pari. 132. The instant is
taken to be equal to the throbb-
ing of the eye, or a flash of lightn-
ing, or a note of a wood-cock.
माधव the well-known epoch-making
scholar of the 14th century who
has written a number of treatises
in various Saastras. His धातुवृत्ति is
a well-known work in grammar.
माधवीया-धातुवृत्ति a learned gloss on
the धातुपाठ of Paanini by माधव. See
माधव.
माधुरीवृत्तिः a gloss not composed by,
but simply explained by an inha-
bitant of Mathuraa or Madhuraa
Such a gloss is referred to in the
Mahaabhaasya on P.IV.3.101 Vaart.3,
which possibly might be referring
to an existing gloss on the Sutras of
Paanini, which was being explain-
ed at Mathura, at the time of
Patanjali. The term मधुरा was used
for मथुरा in ancient times and the
word माथुरी वृत्ति is also used for
माधुरी वृति.
मान krt affix आन of the present parti-
ciple with the augment म् prefixed
to it by आने मुक् P. II. 2.82; e.g.
यजमानः, एधमानः, याचमानः etc.
मार्कण्डेय an old grammarian, who
wrote a grammar of Praakrta
languages which is known by the
name प्राकृतसर्वस्व.
मार्दव softness of the voice characteriz-
ing the pronunciation of a grave
vowel; cf मार्दवं स्वरस्य मृदुता स्निग्धता ;
also cf. अन्ववसर्गो मार्दवमुरुता खस्येतिं
नीचैःकराणि शब्दस्य M.Bh. on P.I.2.29,
30; cf. also, T. Pr. XXII.10।
माला a variety of the utterance of
the Veda-Samhita ( वेदपाठ); a kind
of Krama-Patha, one of the eight
artificial recitations.
|
माहेन्द्र name of very ancient, pre-
Paninian grammar ascribed to इन्द्र
of which some references only are
available. The grammar work is
also referred to as ऐन्द्र; cf. यान्युञ्जहार
महेन्द्राद् व्यासो व्याकरणार्णवात् । पदरत्नानि किं
तानि सन्ति पाणिनिगेाष्पदे Devabodha's
com. on the Mahabharata. For
details see p. 124-27 Vol. VII
Mahaabhaasya, D. E. Society's
Edition.
माहेशसुत्र the fourteen sutras अइउण्,
ऋलृक् etc. which are believed to
have been composed by Siva and
taught to Paanini, by means of the
sounds of the drum beaten at the
end of the dance; cf. नृत्तावसाने नट-
राजराजो ननाद ढक्कां नवपञ्चवारम् । उद्धर्तुकामः
सनकादिसिद्धानेतद्विमर्शे शिवसूत्रजालम् Nandi-
keswara-kaarikaa 1. For details see
Vol. VII Vyaakarana Mahaabhaasya,
D. E. Society's edition.
माहेश्र्वरसूत्रthe Sutras, the authorship
of which is attributed to Shiva; the
sutras अइउण etc. giving the alpha-
bet. see माहेशसूत्र
मि ( मिप् ) personal ending of the
first person ( उत्तमपुरुष ) singular;
cf. तिप्तस्झि. P.III.4.78.
मित् (1) characterized by the mute
letter म्; augments So characterized
such as नुम् , अम् and the like, are
inserted after the last vowel of a
word to which they are to be
added; cf. मिदचोन्त्यात् परः P. I. 1.47;
(2) a technical term applied to the
fifty-five roots which are headed
by the root घट् and which belong
to the first corjugation, to the
roots ज्वल् etc., as also to the roots
जन्, जू, क्नूस्, रञ्ज् and roots ending
in अम्. These roots are not really
characterized by the mute letter
म्, but they are given the
designation मित्. The use of the
designation मित् is (a) the shortening
|
मितवृत्यर्थसंग्रह मुख्यविशेष्य 285
of the penultimate vowel which
has been lengthened by Vrddhi ,
before the causal sign णि and (b)
the optional lengthening of the ;
penultimate vowel before the affix
चिण् and णमुल्, For a complete list
of 'mit' roots see Dhaatupaatha.
मितवृत्यर्थसंग्रह name of a grammatical -
work on the Sutras of Paanini by
Udayana.
मिताक्षरा name of a commentary on
the Saarasvatasaara, written by Hari-
deva.
मिन् tad. affix in the sense of posses-
sion added to the word गो; e.g.
गोमिन् , cf. ज्योत्स्रातामिस्रा ...गोमिन्मलिन-
मलीमसा: P.V.2.114.
मिप् personal ending मि of the first
person ( उत्तमपुरुष ) sing. Parasmaipada:
cf. तिप्तस्झि...महिङ् P. III.4.78.
मिश्र roots taking personal endings of
both the Padas; Ubhayapadin
roots; this term मिश्र is given in
Bopadeva's grammar.
मिश्री a popular name given to the
commentary written by मैरवमिश्र
on the Paribhaasendusekhara in
popular use by grammarians.
मीय tad. affix मीय along with म ( मण्)
applied to the word मध्य in the
sense of a case-affix ( locative
case-affix) e.g. मध्यमीय ; cf मण्मीयौ च
प्रत्ययौ वक्तव्यौ Kaas. on P. IV.3.60.
मुक् augment म् prefixed to the affix
अान (i.e. शानच् , चानश् , and शानन्)
of the pres. part. Atmanepada;
e. g. एधमान:, वर्धमानः पवमानः, यजमानः,
etc.; cf. आने मुक् P. VII. 2. 82. See
मान.
मुख aperture of the mouth; the main
place of the utterance of a letter.
मुखनासिकावचन definition of अनुनासिक,
a letter which is pronounced
through both-the mouth and the
nose-as contrasted with नासिक्य a
|
letter which is uttered only thr-
ough the nose; e.g. ड्, ञ् , ण्, न् , म्
and the nasalized vowels and
nasalized य् , व् and ल्; cf. मुखनासि-
क्रावचनेीSनुनासिकः Paan. I. 1.8: cf. also
अनुस्वारोत्तम अनुनासिकाः (T. Pr. II.30),
where the fifth letters and the anu-
svaara are called anunaasika. Accor-
ding to Bhattoji, however, anu-
svaara cannot be anunaasika as it is
pronounced through the nose
alone, and not through both-the
mouth and the nose. As the anu-
svaara is pronounced something
like a nasalized ग् according to the
Taittiriyas it is called a consonant
in the Taittiriya Praatisaakhya: cf. '
अनुस्वारोप्युत्तमवह्यञ्जनमेव अस्मच्छाखायाम् ।
अर्धगकाररूपत्वात् । Com. on T. Pr. II.
30.
मुखसुखार्थ a mute letter added to an
affix or a substitute cr the like,
which does not really form a
part of the affix etc., but which
simply facilitates the utterance
of it: cf. अथ मुखसुखार्थस्तकार: दकारोपि !
M. Bh. on I.1.1, VI.1.87; cf. also
अादति तकारो मुखसुखार्थः, न त्वयं तपरः
Kaas. on P. III.2.171.
मुख्य main, , principal, primary
substantive as contrasted with a
gualifying substantive;cf.गौणमुख्ययो-
मुख्ये कार्यसंप्रत्ययः Par. Sek. Pari. 15.
मुख्यविशेष्यthe principal word in a
sentence which comes last in
the technical expression of the
import or शाब्दबोध. It is described
as primary and not subordinated
to any other thing ( अन्याविशेषणीभूत).
This मुख्यविशेष्य is, in a way,the cru-
cial point in the various theories
of import; e.g. according to the
grammarians the verbal activity is
the principal word while,according
to the Mimaamsakas the bhaavanaa
is the principal word.and accord-
|
ing to the Naiyayikas it is the
subject that is the principal word.
मुग्धबोध lit. instructions to the igno-
rant; a treatise on grammar simi-
lar to the Astadhyayi of Panini but
much shorter, written by Bopa-
deva or Vopadeva an inhabitant
of the greater Maharastra in the
Vardha district, in the thirteenth
century. After the fall of the
Hindu rulers in Bengal, treatises
like भाषावृत्ति and others written by
eastern grammarians fell into the
back-ground and their place was
taken up by easier treatises written
by Bopadeva and others.Many
commentaries were written upon
the Mugdhabodha, of which the
Vidyanivsa is much known to
grammarians
मुग्धबोधटीका a commentary work on
Mugdhabodha;the name is given to
commentaries written by Rama-
tarkavagisa(called मुग्धबोधपरिशिष्ट },
by Radhavallabha (called सुबोधिनी), .
by Gangadhara (called सेतुसंग्रह ),
by Durgadasa, by Dayarama and
by Ramananda.
मुत्वthe substitution of मु for the
syllable beginning with द् in certain
cases; cf. अदसोसेर्दादु दो मः P. VIII.2.
80.
मुद् a technical term for the sibilants
श् , ष् and स् given in the Vajasane-
yi-Pratisakhya; cf. मुच्च V. Pr. I.52,
cf also V. Pr. III.9,III.13,IV.122.
मुनित्रय the popular and honorific
term for the three prominent
grammarians of the Paninian sys-
tem of grammar wiz. पाणिनि, कात्यायन
and पतञ्जलि who were the pioneers
of that system; cf. मुनित्रयं नमस्कृत्य
Siddhanta-Kaumud beginning.
मुम्the augment म् inserted
immediately after the final vowel of the
|
word for which it is prescribed; cf.
अरुर्द्विषदजन्तस्य मुम् P.VI.3.67; cf. also
P.III.2.26, V. 4.7 and VI.3.69-72.
मूर्धन् the top of the orifice of the
mouth; the place of utterance
( स्थान ) of the letters ऋ, ॠ, ट् ,ठ् ,ड्
ढ् and ण्, र् and ष्; cf. ऋटुरषाणां
मूर्धा S. K. on P. I. 1.9; cf also
षटौ मूर्धनि V.Pr.I.67,R.T.6,R.Pr.I.19,
and T.Pr. II.37 where र् appears
excluded.
मृर्घन्य letters pronounced at the place
called मूर्धन्: cerebral or lingual
letters,the letters ऋ, ॠ,ट्, ठ् ,ड् ,ढ्, ण्.
मूल (1) the root of the teeth given as
the place of origin for the letter र्
in the Rk Tantra : cf. रेफस्तु दन्त्यो
दन्तमूले वा. R. T. 8; (2) the main
instrutment of the utterance of
letters known as मूलकरण or अनुप्रदान.
मूलप्रकृति the original base of the
word used in language; the root and
the praatipadika; the word परमप्रकृति
is also used in the same sense.
मृत the crude base of a declinable
word; the pratipadika; the term is
found used in the Jainendra Vya=
karana; cf Jain. Vyak. I..1.5.
मृदु (1) soft in utterance ; the term is
used in the Vajasaneyi Pratisakhya
for the क्षैप्र, प्रश्लिष्ट, तैरोव्यञ्जन, and
पादवृत्त varieties of the circumflex
accent (स्वरित) out of which the पादवृत्त
is the softest ( मृदुतम ) and conse-
quently always called मृदु, while the
others are called मृदु only with
respect to the preceding one in
the order given above; viz.अभिनिहत,
क्षैप्र etc.cf.सर्वतीक्ष्णोभिनिहत:प्राश्लिष्टस्तदनन्तरम् ।
ततो मृदुतरौ स्वारौ जात्यक्षेप्रावुभौ स्मृतौ ॥
ततो मृदुततः स्वारस्तैरोव्यञ्जन उच्यते । पादवृत्तो
मृदुतमस्त्वेतत्स्वारबलाबलम् Uvvata on V.Pr.
I. !25; (2) soft, as opposed to hard;
the term is used in connection with
the first,third and fifth consonants
of the five classes.
|
मक्डोनेल् [MACDONELL,ARTHUR
ANTHONY ] a deep scholar of
Vedic Gram. and Literature who
has written an exhaustive Vedic
Grammar; in treatment, at places
he differs from Panini and follows
a different method, but the manner
of thinking and argument is on
original lines.
मेघविजय a Jain grammarian of
the seventeenth century who has
written a grammar work, similar
to the Siddhanta Kaumudi, on the
Sabdanusasana of Hemacandra.
The grammar work is called
हैमकौमुदी, or चन्द्रप्रभा also.
मैत्रायणीय प्रातिशाख्य a Pratiskhya or
Parsada work giving the peculiari-
ties of Sandhi, accent and the
like, in changing the Maitrayaniya-
Samhitaapatha into the Padapatha.
मेत्रेयरक्षित a recognised scholar of
Paninis' grammar who belonged
to the Eastern part of India and
fourished in the beginning of the
twelfth century. As it appears
from the name Maitreya Raksita
he appears to have been a Buddhist
grammarian. Subsequent writers
in their works refer to him by the
name Raksita alone, as also by the
name Maitreya, but very rarely
by the name Maitreya Raksita.
He wrote many works on gram-
mar of which the 'tantrapradipa'
a learned commentary on Jine-
ndrabuddhi's Nyasa on Kasika was a
reputed one, which, although
available in a fragmentary manu-
script form today, has been
profusely quoted by prominent
grammarians after him.
मोक्षेश्वर a grammarian of the four-
teenth century who has written a
commentary on the Katantra Vrtti
of Durgasimha. He has written
|
a commentary on the Akhyatavrtti
of the Katantra school as also a
short treatise dealing with the krt
affixes called Krdvrtti.
म्लेच्छ (I) a word although correct,
yet looked upon as incorrect owing
to its faulty utterance; (2) a
person like the uncultured people,
who is not able to pronounce
words correctly cf. म्लेच्छा मा भूमेत्यध्येयं
व्याकरणम् M. Bh. I. 1, Ahnika 1.
य् (l) a consonant of the palatal
class, called semivowel or अन्तःस्थ
( spelt as अन्तस्थ also ), possessed of
the properties संवृतत्व, नाद, घोष and
अनुनासिकत्व in addition; (2) a substi-
tute for म् when that म् is followed
by ह् which is followed by य्. e. g.
किंय्ह्य: cf. यवलपरे यवला वा. P. VIII.
3. 26 Vart.l ; (3) य् looked upon as
possessed of a very little effort in
production i. e. which appears as
almost dropped but not comple-
tely dropped when its elision is
prescribed at the end of a word.
e. g- भोय् अच्युत; cf. व्योर्लधुप्रयत्नतर:
शाकटायनस्य P. VIII. 3.18.
य (1) the consonant य् with अ added
to it merely for the sake of facility
in pronunciation; यकार is also
used in the same sense: e. g. लिटि
वयो यः: P.VI.1.38 cf. T.Pr.I: 17,21;
(2) krt affix (यत्) prescribed as कृत्य
or potential passive participle; e.g.
चेयम्, गेयम्, शाप्यम् , शक्यम् , गद्यम् , अजर्यम्
पण्यम् etc.: cf. अचो यत्...अजर्यं संगतम् P.
III. 1.97-105; (3) krt. affix क्यप्
which is also an affix called krtya;
e. g. ब्रह्मोद्यम् , भाव्यम्, घात्यम् , स्तुत्यम् ,
कल्प्यम् , खेयम् , भृत्यः:, भिद्यः, पुष्य:, कृत्यम्
also कार्यम् ; cf. P. III. 1.106-123;
(4) krt affix ण्यत् ( which is also
कृत्य ), e. g कार्यम् , हार्यम् , वाक्यम् ,
लाव्यम्, कुण्डपाय्यम्. etc.: cf P. III.
|
1.124-132: (5) tad. affix य affixed
(a) in the sense of collection to
पाश, वात etc., as also to खल, गो and
रथ, e. g. पाद्या, रथ्या etc. cf. P. IV.
2. 49, 50ः (b) in the चातुरर्थिक senses
to बल, कुल, तुल etc. e. g. वल्यः,.कुल्यम्;
cf. P V.2. 80, (c) as a Saisika
tad. affix to ग्राम along with the
affix खञ् e. g. ग्राम्यः, ग्रामीणः; cf P:
IV. 2.94 (d) in the sense of 'good
therein' ( तत्र साधुः ) and other
stated senses affixed to सभा, सोदर,
पूर्व, and सोम; e. g. सभ्यः, पूर्व्यः; .etc.
cf. P. IV. 4.105, 109, 133, 137,
138; (e) in the sense of 'deserving
it' to दण्ड and other words, e. g.
दण्ड्य, अर्ध्य, मेध्य, मेध्य, etc.; cf P. V.
1.66: ( f ) in the sense of quality
or action to सखि e. g. सख्यम् ; cf P.
V. 1.126; (6) tad. affix यत् applied
to (a) राजन् श्वशुर, कुल, मनु in the
sense of offspring, (b) शूल, उखा, वायु,
ऋतु and others, under certain
conditions; cf. P. IV. 2.17, 31,
32, 101, (c) to अर्ध, परार्ध, words in
the class headed by दि्श, छन्दस् and
others in specific senses; cf P. IV.
3-46, 54 etc. and (d) in specific
senses to specific words mentioned
here and there in a number of
sutras from IV.4, 75 to V.4.25; (e)
to शाखा, मुख, जघन and others in the
sense of इव (similar to) e.g. शाख्यः,
मुख्यः, etc.; cf. P. V. 3. 103; (7)
case-ending य substituted for ङे of
the dative sing; e. g. रामाय cf.
P. VII. 3.102: (8) verb-affix यक्
applied to the nouns कण्डू and
others to make them ( denomina-
tive ) roots; e. g. कण्डूय,सन्तूय etc. cf.
कण्ड्वादिभ्यो यक् P. III. 1.27 (9) |
Vikarana य ( यक् ) applied to any
root before the Saarvadhaatuka per-
sonal endings to form the base
for the passive voice as also the
base for the 'Karmakartari' voice
e g क्रियते, भूयते, cf. सार्वधातुके यक् P.
|
III. 1.67 (10) Unaadi affix य ( यक् )
applied to the root हन् to form the
Vedic word अघ्न्य; cf अघ्न्यादयश्च;
( 11 ) augment य ( यक् ) added to
the affix क्त्वा in Vedic Literature;
e. g. दत्त्वाय; cf. क्त्वो यक् P. VII.1.47;
(12) verb affix यङ् added to a root
to form its Intensive base ( which
sometimes is dropped ) and the
root is doubled. e. g. चेक्रीयते,चर्करीति;.
cf. P. III. 1.22,24; (13) short term
( प्रत्याहार ) supposed to be beginn-
ing with य in the affix यइ in the
sutra धातोरेकाचो ... यङ् III. 1.22, and
ending with ङ् in the sutra लिड्या-
शिष्यङ्क III. 1.86, with a view to in-
clude the various verb affixes and
conjugational signs.
यक् the affix य; see य (8), (9), (10)
and (11) above.
यक्षवर्मन author of the commentary
called चिन्तामणि on the Sabdaanu-
Saasana of Sakataayana.
यङ् see य (l2) and (13) above.
यडन्त a secondary root formed by
adding the affix यङ् in the sense of
repetition and intensity, to roots
having one syllable and beginn-
ing with a consonant; cf. धातोरेकाचो
हलादे: क्रियासमभिहारे यङ् P. III. 1.22,
23,24. See य (12) above.
यड्लुगन्त a secondary root formed by
adding the affix यङ् to roots speci-
fied in P. III. 1.22,23,24, which
affix is sometimes dropped: cf.
यङोचि च ; P. II. 4. 74. The yanlu-
ganta roots take the parasmaipada
personal endings and not the
atmanepada ones which are appli-
ed to yananta roots.
यड्लुगन्तशिरोमणि a grammar work
dealing with the frequentative
roots written by PanditaSesakrsna.
यजादि roots headed by the root यज्
which take the samhprasaarana sub-
stitute for their semivowel before
|
terminations marked with the
mute letter क्: e.g. इज्यते, इष्टिः cf.
वचिस्वपियज्ञादीनां क्रिति P.VI.1.15. These
roots are nine in number, यज् , वप् ,
वंह् , वस् and others which are of
the first conjugation given by
Paanini in his Dhaatupatha at the end
of the roots of the first conjugation.
यञ्(l) short term ( प्रत्याहार ) formed
by the letter य of हयवरट् and the
mute letter ञ् of इभञ् including
serni-vowels and the third and the
fourth consonants excepting घ् , ढ्
and ध् of the five consonant
groups: cf. अतो दीर्घो यञि P. VII. 3.
10l ; (2) tad. affix added (a) in
the sense of गोत्र (grand-children
and their descendants) to words of
the गर्ग class and some other words
under specific conditions, e.g. गार्ग्यः
वात्स्य:, काप्यः etc., cf. गर्गादिभ्यो यञ् and
the following P.IV. 1. 105-108: (b)
in the sense of collection to केदार,
गणिका, केश and अश्व, cf. P.IV.2.40
and the Varttika.thereon and IV.
2.48; (c) in the Saisika senses to
the word द्वीप, cf. P.IV.3.10: (d)
to the word कंसीय e. g. कांस्यम् cf.
P.IV.3.168, and (e) to the words
अभिजित्, विदभृत् and others when
they have the tad. affix अण् added
to them : e.g. अाभजित्य: cf. P. V. 3.
118.
यण् a brief term for letters य् , व् , र्
and ल् ， i.e. the semi-vowels;cf. इको
यणदि P. VI. I. 77; cf. also I. 1.45
and VI. 4. 81.
यण्वत् containing a semi-vowel inside
it: cf. संयोगादेरातो धातोर्यण्वतः P. VIII.
2.43.
यत् see य (6).
यत्न ( 1) effort in the utterance of a
letter; the word which is general-
ly used for such an effort is प्रयत्न.
This effort is described to be of two
kinds अाभ्यन्तर internal i.e. below the
37
|
root of the tongue and बाह्य above
the root of the tongue i.e. inside
the mouth; cf. यत्नं द्विधा | अाभ्यन्तरो
बाह्यश्च | S. K. on P. I. 1.9; (2) spe-
cific effort, by adding a word to a
rule for drawing some inference,
with a view to removing some
technical difficulty: cf तेन पयो धावती-
त्यादौ यत्नान्तरमास्थेयम् Kaas. on P. VIII.
2. 25. The phrase कर्तव्योत्र यत्नः
often occurs in the Mahaabhaasya.
यत्प्रकरण lit. the topic or the section
of यत्; the section where the tad.
affix यत् is prescribed. This tad. affix
यत् is prescribed in the fifth adhyaaya
of Paanini in a number of rules in
different and different senses ; cf.
यत्प्रक्ररणे रथाच्च P.V. 1.6 Vaart.1 ; यत्प्रकरणे
व्रह्मवर्चसान्त्व P.V.1.39 Vaart. 1.
यथागृहीतं as they are actually found
in Vedic recital with some irregu-
larties of euphonic changes,length-
ening of the vowel and the like.
Specimens of such phrases are
given in R.Pr.II.33 to 39.
यथान्यासं as it is actually put in the
rule or a treatise by the author.
The phrase is often used in the
Mahaabhaasya when after a long dis-
cussion, involving further and fur-
ther difficulties, the author reverts
to the original stand and defends
the writing of the sutra as it stands.
सिध्यत्येवमपाणिनीयं तु भवति or सूत्रं भिद्यते ।
तर्हि यथान्यासमेवास्तु is the usual exp-
ression found in the Mahaabhaasya;
cf, M.Bh. I.1. Aahnika 1, I.1.1, 9,
20, 62, 65 etc.
यथालक्षणं as formed according to
rules. The phrase यथालक्षणमप्रयुक्ते is
very often found in the Maha-
bhaasya as a general guiding re-
mark that noun-forms or word-
forms which are not found in use
in the language of the people or
in literature should be understood
|
as they are derived by observing
all the rules that are applicable.
यथावत् as it is in the original Samahi-
tapaatha without any change of
accent, etc. when cited in the
Padapaatha: the word अव्ययवत् (not
allowing any change or reduction)
is given by Uvvata in explanation
of यथावत्; cf. दृश्यते पदं यथावत् R. Pr.
XI.31.
यथाश्रुतार्थग्राहिन् one who grasps the
sense as given by the actual word-
ing without going into details re: the
use or application etc.; cf यथाश्रुतग्रा-
हिप्रतिपत्रपेक्षोयं यथोद्देशपक्षः इति कैयटः Par.
Sek. Pari. 2
यथासंख्यं in respective order, the first
for the first, the second for the
second, and so on; when the
number of subjects and predicates
is the same, they should be conne-
cted in the same order; cf.
यथासंख्यमनुदेशः समानाम् P. I .3 .10.
यथोद्देश ( परिभाषा) a short phrase or
term for the Paribhaasaa or guiding
statement यथोद्देशं संज्ञापरिभाषम् : 'tech-
nical terms and Paribhaasaas are
to be interpreted at the place
where they are stated, and not at
the place or places of their appli-
cation or utility'.
यदागम ( परिभाषा ) short familiar word-
ing for the dictum or Paribhaasaa
'यदागमास्तद्गुणीभूतास्तद्ग्रहणेन गृह्यन्ते ' Par.
Sek. Pari. 11.
यदृच्छाशब्द् lit. a chance-word: Sam-
jna-sabda or proper noun which is
given accidentally without any
attention to derivation or autho-
rity cf. अयं तर्हि यदृच्छाशब्दोsपरिहार्यः।
लृफिङ्: लृफिङ्ङ् M. Bh.on Siva Sutra 2.
यद्योग a connection with the word
(pronoun) यत् by its use in the
same sentence and context, which
prevents the anudatta ( grave )
accent for the verb in the sentence;
|
cf.निपातैर्यद्यदिहृन्तकुविन्नेच्चेच्चण्कच्चिद्यत्रयुक्तम्
P. VIII. 1.30; cf also the usual
expression यद्योगादनिघात: found in
commentary works.
यद्वृत्त lit a word formed from यत्; a
word which contains the pronoun
यत् in it which prevents sarvaanu-
datta for a verb which follows;
cf. यदस्मिन्वर्तते यद्वृत्तम् M.. Bh. on P.
VIII.1.66; cf also. यद्वृत्तोपपदाच्च V.
Pr. VI. 14, where Uvvata explains
यद्वत्त as यदो वृत्तं यद्वृत्तं सर्वविभक्त्यन्तं सर्वप्रत्यया-
न्तं च गृह्यन्ते । V.'Pr. VI. 14 com.
यम्a short term (प्रत्याहार) for the con-
sonants which begin with य् (in
हयवरट्) and end (in ञमङ्णनम्) before
the mute म् i.e all semivowels, and
fifth constants of the of the five classes;
c.f. हलो यमां यमि लोपः Paan VIII.4.64
यम (1) one of pair, a twin letter
available in pronunciation be-
fore a nasal letter and similar
to it, when the nasal consonant
is preceded by any one of the
four consonants of the five classes;
a transitional sound intervening
between a non-nasal and the
following nasal as a counterpart
of the n6n-nasal; cf. वर्गेष्वाद्यानां चेतुर्णो
पञ्चमे परे मध्ये यमो नाम पूर्वसदृशो वर्णः
प्रातिशाख्ये प्रसिद्धः S.K. on P.VIII. l.1;
(2) name given to the seven
musical notes, found in the
singing of Saaman; cf. मन्द्रमध्यमत्राख्येषु
त्रिषु वाचः स्थानेषु प्रत्येकं सत स्थरभेदा
भवन्ति कुष्टप्रथमद्वितीयतृतीयचतुर्थमन्द्रातित्वार्यः
यमाः ' T. Pr. XXIII. 13,14.
यमन्वा an obscure term found used
in the Phit-sutras राजविशेषस्य यमन्वा चेत्
( आद्युदात्तो भवति ) Phi-sutra II. 42,
where the word यमन्वा is explained
as वृद्ध by the commentator for
the meaning of वृद्ध, see वृद्धिर्यस्याचा-
मादिस्तद् वृद्धम् P. 1.1.73.
यय्short term (प्रत्याहार) for the con-
sonants beginning with य् ( in
|
हयवरट्) and ending before the
mute letter य् ( in कपय् ) i.e. all
consonants except श्, ष्, स्, and ह्;
cf. अनुस्वारस्य ययि परसवर्णः P.VIII 4.
58 by which an anusvara is
changed into a cognate letter of
the following which is a letter
included in यय्.
यर् a short term ( प्रत्याहृार ) for any
consonant except ह्, which, (1)
standing at the end of a word is
optionally changed to the nasal
consonant of its class if followed
by a nasal letter; cf. यरोनुनासिकेनु-
नासिकेा वा P. VIII.4.45: and (2) is
doubled if preceded by र् or ह् as
also if preceded by a vowel but
not followed by a vowel; e.g.
अर्क्कः, दद्धयत्र; cf. अन्वॊ रहाभ्यां द्वे; अनचि-
च P. VIII.4.46,47.
यल् tad. affix य in the sense of posse-
ssion found in Vedic Literature
added optionally with the affix ख
(ईन)to the words वेशोभग and यशोभग;
e.g वेशोभग्य; वेशोभगीनः यशोभग्य:,
यशोभागिन:; cf. P.IV.4.131.
यलोप dropping of the consonant य्
which prevents the validity of a
changed letter ( स्थानिवद्भाव ); cf. न
पदान्तद्विर्वचनवरेयलोप......विधिषु P.I.1.58.
यवमध्य lit. having the centre bulging
out like the Yava grain; name
given to a variety of the Gayatri
which has 7 letters in the first and
third (last) feet and 10 letters in
the second i.e. the middle foot;
the name is also given to a Maha-
brhati having the first and the
last feet consisting of 8 letters and
the middle one consisting of 12
syllables: cf R.Pr.XVI.18 and 48.
यवर्ग the class of the consonants
headed by य् i.e. the semi-vowels
य, व्, र and लू
यवादि a class of words headed by
the word यव, the taddhita affix मत्
|
after which does not get the con-
sonant मृ changed into व् although
the affix मत् be added to a word
ending in म् or अ, or having म् or
अ as the penultimate letter; e. g.
यवमान् , ऊर्मिमान् , भूमिमान् etc.: cf.
Kas. on P.VIII.2.9. This यवादिगण
is looked upon as आकृतिगण
यश:कवि a grammarian, the author
of a treatise named Bhasanusasana.
यश:सागर a Jain grammarian, the
author of a work named Samasa-
sobha.
यशोवर्मदेव the same as यक्षवर्मन् the
author of ' चिन्तामणि ' a commen-
tary on the Sabdanussana of
Sakatyana.
यस् tad. affix य with mute स् to indi-
cate the application of the term
पद to the preceding base as a con-
sequence of which the final म् of
the words कम् and शम्, after which
यस् is prescribed, gets changed
into anusvara e. g. कंयु:, दंयु:: cf
P.V.2.138.
यस्कादि words headed by the word
यस्क, the affixes in the sense of ’a
descendant' placed after which
are elided and the words are to
be used in the plural number in
the masculine gender; e. g. यस्का:;
cf Kas. on P. II.4.63.
या substitute for a case affix in Vedic
Literature; e.g. उरुया, धृष्णुया for
उरुणा, धृष्णुना, cf. सुपां सुलुक्o P.VII.
1.39.
याच् substitute for a case affix found
and in Vedic Literature; e. g. साधुया for
साधु: cf. सुपां सुलुक् .. ... याजाल: P. VII.
1. 39.
याजकादेि a class of words headed by
the words याजक, पूजक, परिचारक and
others with which a word in the
genitive case is compounded, in spite
of the prohibition of compounds
with such words, laid down by the
|
rule कर्तरि च P. II. 2.16; e.g.ब्राह्मण-
याजकः. ब्राह्मणपूजकः etc.: cf Kas. on P.
II.2.9. These words, याजक and
others standing as the second
members of compounds have their
last vowel accented acute;cf.P.VI .
2.151.
याट् augment या prefixed to the case-
affixes marked with the mute letter
ङ् (i,e. the dat. sing. the abl. sing
the gen. sing. and the loc sing.)
after a feminine base ending in आ;
e. g. रमायै, रमायाः, रमायाम्; cf याडापः
P.VII.3.113.
यावादि a class of words headed by
the word याव to which the taddhita
affix क ( कन् ) is added without
any specific sense assigned to it;
e.g. यावकः: मणिक: etc.; cf. Kas. on
P. V.4.29.
यासुट् augment यास् prefixed to the
parasmaipada case-endings of लिङ्
(the potential and the benedictive)
which is accented acute; e.g. कुर्यात्,
क्रियात्.
यास्क a reputed ancient Nirukta-
kara or etymologist, of the 6th
century B.C. or even a few cen-
turies before that, whose work, the
Nirukta, is looked upon as the
oldest authoritative treatise regard-
ing derivation of Vedic words.
Yaska was preceded by a number
of etymologists whom he has men-
tioned in his work and whose works
he has utilised. Yaska's Nirukta
threw into the back-ground the
older treatises on etymology, all of
which disappeared gradually in
the course of time.
यिट् augment य् prefixed to the tad.
affix इष्ठ when it is applied to the
word बहु,in which case बहु is chang-
ed into भू ; e.g. भूयिष्ठ; cf बहोर्लोपो भू च
बहोः; इष्ठस्य यिट् च; P. VI. 4.158,159.
यु general wording including the
|
affixes युच्, युट्, ट्युत्, ट्युल् and ण्युट् of
which only यु remains as the affix,
which is changed into अन by the
rule युवोरनाकौ P.VII.1.1.
युक् augment य् (1) added to a verb-
base or a root ending in अा before
the affix चिण् and krt affixes marked
with mute ञ् or ण्; e.g. अदायि, दायकः;
cf. आतो युक् चिण्कृतोः, P.VII.3.33; (2)
added to the roots शा, ( शो ),
छा ( छो ), सा ( सो ), ह्वा ( ह्वे ), व्या ( व्ये )
वा ( वै ) and पा ( पा and पे ) before
the causal affix णिच् ; e. g. निशाययति
पाययति etc. cf शाच्छासाह्वाव्यावेपां युक्
P. VII.3.37; (3) added in Vedic
Literature to the frequentative
base of the root मृज् of which मर्मृज्य
is the form of perf. 1st and 3rd
pers. sing. instead of ममार्ज; cf.
दाधर्ति...मर्मृज्यागनीगन्तीति च P.VII.4.65.
युक्त (l) proper, appropriate, justi-
fied; the word is very frequently
used in the Mahabhasya and other
grammar works; (2) the sense of
the original base which is connect-
ed with the sense of the affix; cf.
अथवा युक्तः प्रकृत्यर्थ; प्रत्ययार्थेन संबद्धः,
Kas. on P. I. 2.51 ; (3) connected
with; cf. उकारश्चेतिकरणेन युक्त: R. Pr.
I. 29; तथायुक्तं चानीप्सितम् P. I. 4.50.
युक्तवत् the sense of the original
base,the affix after which is dropp-
ed by means of the term लुप् as
contrasted with the terms लोप and
लुक् which are used in the same
sense; cf. लुप्तवदिति निष्ठाप्रत्ययेन क्तवतुना
प्रकृत्यर्थ उच्यते । स हि प्रत्ययार्थमात्मना युनक्ति '
KS. on P. I. 3.51.
युक्तवद्भाव lit. behaviour like the
original base. The term is used
in the sense of possession of, or
getting, the same gender and
number as was possessed by the
base to which the tad. affix was
added and subsequently dropped
by a rule of Panini in which the
word लुप् is put in the sense of
|
dropping; e. g. कुरयः देशः or अङ्गाः
देश: in the sense of कुरूणां or अङ्गानां
निवासो जनपदः cf. जनपदे लुप् P. IV.3.81
and लुपि युक्तवद् व्यक्तिवचने P.I.2.51; cf.
also M.Bh. on P. I. 2.51 and 52.
युक्तारोह्यादि a class of compound
words headed by the word युक्तारोही
which have their initial vowel
accented acute in spite of the ge-
neral dictum that a compound
word except a Bahuvrihi com-
pound word, has its last vowel
accented acute; cf. Kas. on P. V I.
2.81.
युक्तार्थ the sense possessed by the
original word to which the affix,
subsequently dropped by means
of the word लुप, was added.
युक्ति (1) argumentation: reasoning;
(2) current maxim: cf. युक्तिसिद्धमेतत्.
युगपत्प्रसङ्ग simultaneous possibility of
the application of two rules or
operations, when in grammar no
option re : their application is
admissible as it is admissible
according to Mimamsa rules re :
two operations enjoined by Vedic
behests. In Grammar, only one of
such rules applies, the priority of
application being based upon the
criteria of परत्व, नित्यत्व, अन्तरङ्गत्व and
अपवादत्व; cf. शब्दपरविप्रतिषेधो नाम भवति
यत्रोभयोर्युगपत्प्रसङ्गः | M.Bh. on VI.
1.158 Vart, 12.
युगपदधिकरणवचनता denotation of
two or more things by one single
member by virtue of their being
put together in a dvandva com-
pound of two or more words; the
grammarians advocate this doc-
trine stating that in a dvandva
compound such as घटपटौ or घटपटम् ,
the word घट has the capacity of
expressing the sense of both घट and
पट, which in a sentence घटः पटश्च, it
does not possess. Similarly पट also
|
has the capacity of conveying the
sense of both पट and घट. Possibly
this theory is advocated by grarn-
marians, on the analogy of words
like पितरौ or मातरौ for मातापितरौ, द्यावा
for द्यावापृथिवी and so on; cf. सिद्धं तु
युगपदधिकरणवचने द्वन्द्ववचनात् P. II 2.29
Vart. 2. For details see Vyakara-
namahabhasya on चार्थे द्वन्द्वः P. II.
2.29.
युगपदधिकरणविवक्षा desire to express
two or more senses simultaneously
(by one word) ; cf. सर्वाणि द्वन्द्व बह्वर्थानि।
युगपदधिकरणविवक्षायां द्वन्द्वो भवति M. Bh.
on P. II.4.62. See युगपदधिकरणवचनता.
युगपद्वचनता expression of the senses
of two words together by one
word cf. बिग्रहे खल्वपि युगपद्वचनता दृश्यते ।
द्यावा ह क्षामा । द्यावा चिदस्मै पृथिवी नमेते ।
M. Bh. on P. II. 2.29 Vart 6.
युग्म (I) lit, pair; the word is used for
the second and fourth consonants
ख्, घ्, छ्, झ् etc. of the five classes
which, in a way are combinations
of two consonants; cf. युग्माः सोष्माणः
R. T. 16; cf also युग्मौ सोष्माणौ where
the word सोष्मन् is explained as उष्म।
वायुस्तेन सह वर्तन्त इति सोष्माण: । खघ छझ टढ
थध फभ; cf.also युग्मयोद्वितीयचतुर्थयोः; (2)
even, as opposed to odd, referring
to the vowels ओ and औ which are
even in the enumeration ए ओ ऐ अौ.
The consonants called युग्म viz. ख,
घ and others which are defined as
युग्म are also the even consonants in
their classes.
युच् krt affix यु changed into अन, (1)
applied in the sense of 'a habituat-
ed agent' to intransitive roots in
the sense of movement or utter-
ance, to Atmanepadi roots beginn-
ing with a consonant, to the roots
जु, चेकम् सृ, शुच्, कुघ्, as also to roots
in the sense of decoration: e.g.
चलन:, शब्दन:; cf P.III. 2. 148-15I ;
(2) applied to causal roots, as also
|
to the roots आस् श्रन्थ् and others in
the sense of verbal activity when
the word so formed has always the
feminine gender; e.g. कारणा, हृरणा,
आसना, घट्टना,वेदना etc.; cf. P.III.3.107
and the Varttikas thereon; (3) ap-
plied to roots ending in अा and pre-
ceded by the indeclinables ईषद्, दुस्
or सु in the sense of easy or difficult
for obtainment and, wherever seen
to any root in the Vedic language,
as also to some other roots as
found in actual use in the classi-
cal literature; e. g. ईषद्दानो गौर्मवता,
दु्ष्पानः, सुपान: etc. सूपसदन:, दुर्योधनः,
दुर्मर्षणः etc., cf. P.III.8.128-130.
युट् augment य् prefixed to the tad.
affix फिञ् ( अायनेि ) after the words
दगु, कोसल, कर्मार, छाग and वृष; e.g.
दागव्यायनिः, कौसल्यायनि:, कार्मार्यायणिः,
वार्ष्यायणिः; cf. P. IV. 1.155 Vart. 1.
युवन् lit. young person; masculine;
the word is given as a technical
term in grammar in the sense of
one, who is the son of the grand-
son or his descendant, provided
his father is alive; the term is also
applied to a nephew, brother, or
a paternal relative of the grand-
son or his descendant, provided
his elderly relative, if not his
his father, is alive; it is also appli-
ed to the grandson, in case respect
is to be shown to him: cf. P. IV.
1.163-167. The affixes prescribed
in the sense of युवन् are always
applied to a word ending with a
tad. affix applied to it in the sense
of an offspring (अपत्य) or grandson
(गोत्र), in spite of the ruling that in
the sense of grandson or his
descendant (गोत्र), one affix only इञ्
or अण् or the like is added to the
base; e.g. गार्ग्यस्यापत्यं गार्ग्यायण:, दाक्षेरपत्यं
दाक्षाय्ण: गार्ग्ये जीवति तस्य भ्राता सपिण्डो वा
गाम्यार्यण: तत्रभवान् गार्ग्यः; गार्ग्यायणो वा.
|
युवपाद a conventional term used for
the first pada of the seventh adh-
yaya which begins with the sutra
युवोरनाकौ P.VII.i.1.
युवप्रत्यय tad. affix फक् ( अायन ), फिञ्
( अायनि ) or any other in the sense
of युवन् which is to be applied to a
base ending with an affix in the
sense of offspring ( अपत्यप्रत्ययान्त ) or
with an affix in the sense of a
grandson ( गोत्रप्रत्ययान्त ). The affix
is not applied when a female off-
spring is meant.
युवसंज्ञा the technical term युवन् which
is given to persons described or
mentioned in P.IV.1.163 to 167.
युवादि a class of words headed by the
word युवन् which have the taddhita
affix अ ( अण् ) added to them in
the sense of 'duty' or 'nature': e.g.
यौवनम् स्थाविरम्, हौत्रम् etc.; cf. Kas. on
P.V.1.130.
युष्मत्पाद् conventional name given to
the third pada of the fourth
adhyaya of Panini's Astadhyayi
which begins with the sutra
युष्मदस्मदोरन्यतरस्यां खञ् च P. IV. 3.1.
युष्मद् designation of the second
person, used in the Jainendra
Vyakarana.
युस् tad. affix यु in the sense of posse-
ssion applied to (l) the word ऊर्णा;
e.g. ऊर्णायुः; cf. P. V. 2.123: (2) to
the words कं, शं, अहं and शुभं; e.g.
कंयुः,शंयुः, अहंयुः, शुभयुंः, cf P.V.4.139*
140.
येननाप्राप्तन्याय a term used by gramma-
rians and commentators very fre-
quently for the maxim "येन नाप्राप्ते यो
वेधिरारभ्येत स तस्य बाधको भवति " Par.
Sek. on Pari. 57. The term अपवाद-
न्याय is used in the Mahabhasya
which is the same as येननाप्राप्तन्याय
of later grammarians.
योग (1) a rule of grammar; the
word योग in this sense is very fre-
|
quently found used in the Maha-
bhasya; cf the frequent statements
अयं येगः शक्योsकर्तुम् M. Bh. on P.I.1.
6, 62, etc. or कान्यस्य योगस्य प्रयोजनानि
M. Bh. on P. I. 1.31 Vart. 6,
I.1. 57 etc.; (2) grammatical
connection; cf शास्त्रकृतो योगश्च Nir.
I.2; cf also षष्ठी स्थानेयेागा P.I.1.49.
योगरूढ a word that can be derived,
but is always used in a specific
sense, the derivative sense which
is wider being limited: e.g. पङ्कजम्.
योगवाह a technical term used for
phonetic elements or letters which
are mentioned in the alphabet of
Panini, viz., the Mahesvara sutras
in contrast with the term अयोगवाह
which is used by grammarians for
the phonetic elements अनुस्वार, विसर्ग
and others which are not men-
tioned. ,See अयोगवाह; cf. also M.
Bh on Siva sutra 5.
योगविभाग division of a rule which has
been traditionally given as one sin-
gle rule, into two for explaining the
formation of certain words, which
otherwise are likely to be stamped
as ungrammatical formations. The
writer of the Varttikas and the
author of the Mahabhasya have
very frequently taken recourse to
this method of योगविभाग; cf. P.I.1.3
Vart. 8, I.1.17 Vart.1,I.1.61, Vart.
3; I. 4.59 Vart. 1, II. 4. 2. Vart.2,
III.1.67 Vart. 5, III.4.2. Vart. 6,
VI.I. I Vart. 5, VI.1.33 Vart.1 etc.
Although this Yogavibhaga is not
a happy method of removing diffi-
culties and has to be followed as a
last recourse, the Varttikakara has
suggested it very often, and some-
times a sutra which is divided by
the Varttikakara into two,has been
recognised as a couple of sutras in
the Sutrapatha which has come
down to us at present.
|
योगाङ्ग a part or portion of the rule
of the grammarian: cf. सति च योगाङ्गे
योगविभागः करिष्यते M.Bh. on P.I.1.30,
II.1.4 etc.
योगापेक्ष concerning only that parti-
cular rule to which it refers. The
word is many times used in conn-
ection with a deduction ( ज्ञापक )
which is not to be applied in gene-
ral, but which is restricted to the
functions of that rule from which
the deduction is drawn; cf. योगोपक्षं
ज्ञापकम् M.Bh. on P. I.1.23 Vart.10,
P.III.1.95 Vart.2.,P.IV. 1.87 Vart.
2, cf. also M. Bh. on P.I.3.62 and
V.1.1.
योगारम्भ laying down or citing a rule
as done by the writers of sutras; cf.
नैकं प्रयोजनं योगारम्भं प्रयोजयति M. Bh. on
P. III.1.67 Vart. 5; P. VII. 1.96
Vart. 2.
योग्यता compatibility of sense; cf.
असत्यपि च गोहनने तस्य योग्यतया गेाघ्न
इत्यभिधीयते Kas. on P. III.4.73.
योजक causal instrument or causal
agent; the word is used in the
sense of प्रयोजक in the Jainendra
grammar; cf..]ain.I.2.125.
योनि place of origin: cf. तप: श्रुतं च
योनिश्च एतद् ब्राह्मणकारणम्, M. Bh. on P.
V.1.115: cf. also M.Bh. on P.IV.1.
48 Vart. 9; cf. also ओष्ठयोनिरोष्ठय:.
योषा a woman; the word is used in
the sense of feminine as applicable
to gender.
यौगपद्य simultaneity of occurrence;
simultaneous possibility of the
application of two rules which
evidently cannot apply simulta-
neously, but scope has to be given
to one of the two, the priority
being decided on the criteria of
परत्व, नित्यत्व, अन्तरङ्गत्व and अपवादत्व;cf.
न चास्ति यौगपदद्येन संभवः M. Bh. on P.
|
I.1.57; cf also M.Bh. on I. 4.1 , I.
4.2, II. 1.3 etc.
यौगिक based on derivation; etymo-
logical; one of the kinds of words
रूढ, यौगिक, योगरूढ and यौगिकरूढ; cf.
सैन्धवशब्दो लवणे उभयलिङ्ग:। यौगिकस्या-
भिधेयवल्लिङ्गम् l Kas. on P.II.4.31.
यौधेयादि a class of nine words headed
by the word यौधेय, a taddhita affix
applied to which is not to be elid-
ed even though the word be used
in the plural number.
र
र्(1) second letter of the यण् class
( semi-vowels ) which has got the
properties नादभागित्व, घोषवत्त्व,' संवृतत्व
and अल्पप्राणता i. e. it is a sonant,
inaspirate consonant. Regarding
its स्थान or place of production,
there is a difference of opinion :
generally the consonant र् is looked
upon as a cerebral or lingual letter
(मूर्धन्य); cf ऋटुरषाणां मूर्धा， S.K.also Pan.
Siksa; but it is called by some as
दन्त्य or दन्तमूलीय: cf रेफस्तु दस्त्ये दन्तमूले
वा RT. 8, by others as दन्तमूलीय and
and by still others as वर्स्त्य gingival.
In the Vajasaneyi-Pratisakhya it is
described as दन्तमूलीय; cf रो दन्तमूल
I. 68, while in the Taittiriya Pra-
tisakhya it is said to be produced
by the touch of the middle part of
the tip of the tongue just above
the root of the teeth ; cf. रेफे जिह्वाग्रमध्येन
प्रत्यग्दन्तमूलेभ्यः T. Pr. II. 41; (2) sub-
stitute र् (रेफ ) for the final letter
of the word अहन्, as also for the
final of अम्रस्, ऊधस्, अवस् and भुवस्
optionally with रु, which ( रु) is
dropped before vowels, and chang-
ed to ओ before अ and soft conso-
nants, while it is changed into
visarga before hard consonants and
surds.e.g. अम्नरेव, अम्र एवः ऊधरेव, ऊधएव:
cf. Kas. on P. VIII, 2-70: (3) the
consonants र (technically) called रु in
|
Panini's grammar ) which is substi-
tuted for the consonant स् and for
the consonant न् of the word अहन्
when the consonant स् or न् stands
at the end of a word. This substi-
tute रु, unlike the substitute र् is
liable to be changed into visarga, or
the consonant य्, or the vowel उ
by P. VIII.3.15, 17, VI.1.113, 114.
र (l) the consonant र, generally cited
as रेफ; the vowel अ is added to र्
for facility of utterance: cf. T. Pr.'
I.21 ; (2) short term ( प्रत्याहृार ) for
र् and ल्; cf. उरण् रपरः, P. I. 1.51:
(3) krt affix र applied to the roots
नम्, कम्प् etc. in the sense of agent
who is habituated to, or expert in
the action expressed by the root;
e. g, नम्रः, कम्प्र:; cf. नमिकम्पिस्म्यजसकम-
हिंसदीपो रः P. III. 2. 167; (4) tad.
affix र as a Caturarthika affix
applied to the words headed by
अश्मन्: e. g. अश्मरः; cf. वुञ्छण् P. IV.
2. 80; (5) tad affix र in the sense
of possession affixed to the words
ऊष, सुषि, मुष्क, मधु, and तमस् with अ of
तमस् changed to इ; e. g. ऊषरम्,
सुषिरम्, मधुर:, तमिस्रा: cf. Kas on.
P.V. 2.107 and 114: (6) tad. affix र
in the sense of diminution affixed
to the words कुटी, शमी and शुण्डा: e.g.
कुटीर:, शमीर, शुण्डार:; cf. Kas. on P.
V. 3. 88: (7) tad. affix रक् which
see below; (8) krt affix रक् which
see below; (9) a term for द्विगुसमास in
the Jainendra Vyakarana.
रक्(1) tad.affix र proposed by the Var-
ttikakra instead of अारक् for being
affixed to the word गोधा to form
the word गौधारः: cf. आरग्वचनमनर्थकं
रका सिद्धत्वात् P.IV.1.130 Vart. 1 ; (2)
krt affix रक् applied to the root ज्या;
cf. रकेि ज्यः प्रसारणम् P. I.1.4 Vart. 6.
रक्त lit. coloured i.e.coloured by
nasalization; a term used by
ancient grammarians for a nasa-
Iized letter ( अनुनासिक ); cf रक्तसंज्ञो
|
नुनासिकः R.Pr.r.17on which Uvvata
comments :-- अनुनासिको वर्णो रक्त
इत्युच्यते; also cf. अरक्तसंध्येत्यपवाद्यते पदं
R. Pr, XI. 18, where unnasa-
lized अा is stated as अरक्तसंधि and
illustrated by the commentator
by quoting the passage मन्द्रमा-
वरेण्यम् as contrasted with अभ्र औ
अपः ।
रक्तपाद conventional name given to
the second pada of the fourth
Adhyaya of Panini's Astadhyayi as
the Pada begins with the Sutra तेन
रक्तं रागात् P. IV. 2.1.
रक्षित named मैत्रेयरक्षित or मैत्रेय also; a
famous grammarian of the Eastern
school of grammarians which
flourished in Bihar and Bengal in
the ninth, tenth, eleventh and
twelfth centuries, claiming मैत्रयरक्षित,
पुरुषोत्तमदेव, सीरदेव and others as pro-
minent grammar scholars among
others. See the word मैत्रेयरक्षिiत.
रधुनाथ a grammarian of the seven-
teenth century, who was a pupil
of Bhattoji Diksita and who wrote
a small gloss ( लधुभाष्य ) on the
topic named ' पञ्चसंधि ' of the Sidd-
hantakaumudi.
रङ्ग nasalisation; colouring of a letter
by its nasalisation; cf. रङ्गवर्ण प्रयुञ्जीरन्
नो ग्रसेत् पूर्वमक्षरम् Pan. Siksa. 27.
रङ्गनाथ a grammarian,son of नारायणयज्वा,
who wrote a commentary named
मकरन्द on Haradatta's Padamanjari.
रजतादि a class of words headed by
the word रजत to which the tadd-
hita affix अ ( अञ् ) is added in the
sense of ' a product ' or 'a part ';
e.g. राजतम् , लौहम् , औदुम्बरम् etc. ; cf.
Kas. on P. IV.3.154.
रञ् tad. affix र causing vrddhi, appli-
ed to the word अग्नीध् in the sense
of Sarana i.e. a room or a place;
e.g. अाग्नीघ्रम् cf. अग्नीध; शरणे रञ् भं च
P. IV.3.120 Vart, 9.
|
रण् same as रञ् being only a variant,
See रञ्.
रत्नपाणि a grammarian of the eight-
eenth century who wrote a short
treatise on the Karaka relations
named षट्कारकविवरण.
रत्नार्णव name of a commentary on
the Siddhantakaumudi written by
Krsnamitra, a famous grammarian
and Naiyayika who lived in the
eighteenth century and wrote
many commentary works on books
in the Vyakarana and Nyāya
Sastras.
रत्नेश a grammarian who wrote a
grammar work named लक्षणसंग्रहृ,
रथ name of one of the eight kinds of
recitals of the Veda Samhita by
dividing it into the component
words ( पद ) and reciting the
component words by repeating
them, in their regular order
and reverse order too.
रदानुक् krt affix रदानु applied to the
root जीव्; e.g. जीरदानुः;cf. जीवे रदानुक् ।
जीरदानु: M. Bh. on Siva Sutra 5,
Vart. 5.
रधादि a class of eight roots headed
by the root रध् which allow the
addition of the augment इ ( इट् )
optionally to the ardhadhatuka
affix beginning with any conson-
ant except य्, placed , after them;
e.g. रघिता रद्धा, त्रता , तर्त्पा तर्पिता etc.
cf. P.VII.2.35 and VII.2.45.
रन् personal ending रन् substituted for
the personal ending झ of the
प्रथमपुरुष (third person) Atmanepada
of 'lin' (potential and benedictive);
cf. झस्य रन् P.III. 4.105.
रनु [RENOU,LOUIS] a sound Sans-
krit scholar of France of the present
time who has written some trea-
tises and many articles on Sanskrit
grammar out of which his works
on the Terminology of Sanskrit
|
Grammar, Kasika and Durghata-
vrtti require a special mention.
रपर with the letter र inserted after
it; the term is used in connection
with the guna and vrddhi substi-
tutes for ऋ. These substitutes are
respectively अ and अा, which, by
the addition of र्, always become
अर् and अार्: cf उरण् रपरः P.I. 1. 51,
cf. ऋकारस्य गुणवृद्वीं रेफाशिखा अरारावेवेति
cf. also वृद्धिर्भवति गुणो भवतीति रेफशिरा
गुणवृद्धिसंज्ञकोभिनिर्वर्तते; M.Bh. on P.VI.
4.121, VIII.2.42.
रप्रत्याहारखण्डन a small article show-
ing that the short term र for the
consonants र् and ल् need not be
advocated as done by the learned
old grammarians.The treatise was
Written by Vaidyanatha Paya--
gunde, the prominent pupil of
Nagesabhatta.
रप्रत्याहामण्डन an anonymous work,
comparatively modern, refuting
the arguments advanced in the
रप्रत्याहारखण्डन by Vaidyanatha Paya-
gunde.
रम् augment र inserted after the
vowel अ of the root भ्रस्ज्, when the
letter र् which is already present
in भ्ररुज् (before अ) and the penulti-
mate स् are dropped; the result is
that the word भर्ज्, in short, be-
comes substituted in the place of
भ्रस्ज्: cf. भ्रस्जो रोपधयो रमन्यतरस्याम् P.VI.
4.47, and भ्रस्जो रोपधयोर्लोप अागमो रम्
विधीयते as Bharadvajiya Varttika
thereon.
रमानाथशर्म a grammarian of the
Katantra school who lived in the
fifteenth century and wrote a
commentary named Manorama
on the Katantradhatuvrtti and
Sabdasadhyaprayoga.
रल्a short term ( प्रत्याहार ) used for
all consonants excepting य् and व्:
cf रलो व्युपधाद्धलादेः संश्च, P.I.2.26.
रस्personal ending of the third pers.
|
( प्रथमपुरुष ) substituted for the affix
झि in the first future ( लुट् ): cf. लुट:
प्रथमस्य डारौरस: II.4.85.
रसवती name of a commentary on
his own work ' Sanksiptasara Vya-
karana' by Kramadisvara,a sound
scholar of grammar in the thir-
teenth century A.D.
रसादि a class of words headed by the
word रस which have the tad.affix
मतुप् added to them in the sense
of possession in preference to other
affixes like इन्; e.g.. रसवान् , रूपवान्
etc.; cf. Kas. on P.V. 2.95.
राघवेन्द्राचार्य ( गजेन्द्रगडकर) a famous
scholar of Grammar in the nine-
teenth century, who taught many
pupils and wrote some commen-
tary works, the well-known being
प्रभा on the Sabdakaustubha,
विषमपदव्याख्या on the Laghusabden-
dusekhara and त्रिपथगा on the
Paribhisendusekhara. For details
see p. 27 Vyakarana Mahabhasya
Vol. VII D. E. Society's Edition.
राजदन्तादि a class of compound words
headed by राजदन्त in which the
order of words or the constituent
members is fixed. There are about
50 words in the class; some of
them are tatpurusa compounds
such as राजदन्त or अग्रेवण in which
the subordinate word which ought
to have been placed first is placed
second There are some karmadha-
raya.compounds in which one par-
ticular word is always placed first
and not any one of the two: e.g.
लिप्तवासितम्, सिक्तसंमृष्टम् etc. There are
some dvandva compounds such as
उलूखलमुसलम् , चित्रास्वाती, भार्यापती etc.
in which a definite order of words
is laid down. For details see Kasika
on राजदन्तादिषु परम् P. II. 2.31.
राजन्यादिa class of words headed by
the word राजन्य to which the
|
राजारामशास्त्री रामचन्द्रभट्ट तारे 299
taddhita affix अक ( वुच् ) is added
in the sense of ' the place of re-
sidence '; e. g. राजन्यकः, औदुम्वरक: !
etc. This class named राजन्यादि is ]
called अाकृतिगण and similar words !
can be included in this class such
as मालव,विराट् , त्रिगर्त and others from
which the words मालवक: वैराटक:
त्रैगर्तक: etc. can be arrived at cf.
Kas. on P. IV. 2.53.
राजारामशास्त्री ( कार्लेकर ) a reputed
scholar of Sanskrit grammar who
resided at Varanasi and establish-
ed a school of Sanskrit Gramma-
rians there in the nineteenth
century. He wrote a treatise on
grammar named शब्दव्युत्पत्तिकौमुदी.
राधाकृष्ण ( गोस्वामी ) a grammarian
who wrote two elementary gra-
umar treatises (1) अव्ययार्थे and (2)
वैयाकरणसर्वस्वसूची.
राधावल्लभ titled तर्कपञ्चानन, who wrote
a commentary named सुबोधिनी on
the Mugdhabodha Vyakarana.
राम or रामभट्ट who wrote a comme-
ntary on the Prakriykaumudi of
Ramacandra Sesa.
राम inhabitant of Mithila who wrote
a commentary by name विद्वत्प्रबोधिनी
on the Sarasvata Prakriya.
रामकिंकसरस्वती a grammarian who
wrote a small grammar treatise
named अायुबोधव्याकरण which is diff-
erent from the well-known अाशुबोध
of तारानाथतर्कवाचस्पति.
रामाकिशोर ( चक्रवर्तीं ) author of (1)
अष्टमङ्गला a commentary on the
कातन्त्रवृति of Durgasimha, as also of
(2) शाब्दबोधप्रकाशिका, a small work on
the import of words.
रामकृष्ण a grammarian who wrote a
treatise on Karaka relations known
by the name शाब्दबोधप्रक्रिया.
रामकृष्णभट्ट a grammarian of the 17th
century who wrote वैयाकरणसिद्धान्त-
रत्नाकर, a commentary on the diffe-
|
rent portions of the Siddhānta
Kaumudi
रामकृष्णानन्द writer of a commentary
on the Mahabhasya which is
available in a fragmentary form.
रामचन्द्र (1) रामचन्द्राचार्य (son of कृष्णाचार्य)
the well-known author of the
Prakriyakaumudi. He belonged to
the Sesa family and the latter half
of the fifteenth century is assigned
as his date. He is believed to have
been a resident of Andhra. His
work, the Prakriyakaumudi, was a
popular grammar treatise for some
time before Bhattoji's Siddhanta-
Kaumudi got its hold, and it had
a number of commentaries written
upon it especially by his descen-
dants and members of his family
which became well-known as the
Sesa family of grammarians. The
Prakriyakaumudi is named कृष्णर्कि-
करप्राक्रिया also. (2) There was a gra-
mmarian named Ramacandra who
wrote a small treatise on grammar
named विदग्धबोध. (3) There was
another grammarian of the same
name who was a pupil of Nagesa-
bhatta of the eighteenth century
and who wrote a small commentary
called वृतिसंग्रह on Panini's Astadh-
yayi. (4) There was also another
Ramacandra who was a scholar
of Vedic grammar and who wrote
the commentary named ज्योत्स्ना on
the Vajasaneyi-Pratisakhya.
रामचन्द्र दीक्षित a grammarian who
wrote (l) Unadikosa, ( 2 ) Mani-
dipika, a commentary on the Una-
disutras, and (3) Sabdabhedanirui-
pana.
रामचन्द्रभट्ट तारे one of the senior pupils
of Nagesabhatta who was a teacher
of Vaidyanatha Payagunde. He
wrote a small gloss on the Astadh-
yayi which is named पाणिनिसूत्रवृत्ति
|
He lived in the first half of the
eighteenth century and taught
several pupils at Varanasi.
रामचन्द्रशेष See रामचन्द्र (1).
रामचन्द्रसरस्वती pupil of वासुदेवेन्द्रसरस्वती
of the sixteenth century who has
written a gloss named विवरण on the
Mahabhasyapradipa of Kaiyata.
रामतर्कवागीश a learned grammarian
who held the titles महामहोपाध्याय and
भट्टाचार्य, He was an advocate of the
Mugdhabodha School and wrote
commentaries on (1) the Mugdha-
bodha, (2) the Kavikalpadruma,
(3) the Amarakosa and (4) the
Unadi sutras. He also wrote a
short gloss on case-relations, his
treatise on the subject being
named कारकटिप्पणी,
रामदास (चक्रवर्ती ) a follower of the
Katantra school of grammar who
wrote (l) चन्द्रिका, a commentary
on Katantraparisista and ( 2 )
कातन्त्रव्याख्यासार
रामनाथ ( चक्रवर्तीं ) who wrote short
glosses on the Katantra and the
Kalpa Vyakaranas.
रामनाथ ( चोबे ) a grammarian of the
nineteenth century who wrote (l)
शब्देन्दुशेखरटीका, (2) वैयाकरणभूषणटीका and
(3) वैयाकरणसिद्धान्तमञ्जूषाटीका.
रामनाथ ( विद्यावाचस्पति ) a Sanskrit
scholar of the 17th century who
studied Vyakarana,. Dharma,
Alamkara and other Sastras and
wrote a grammar work कातन्त्ररहस्य,
besides many books on other
Sastras.
रामनारायण writer of a commentary on
the Sarasvataprakriya.
रामभदृ writer of a commentary on
the Prakriyakaumudi.
रामभद्र दीक्षित son of यज्ञराम दीक्षित, a
grammarian of Tanjore of the
seventeenth century who wrote a
|
commentary on the Paribhasavrtti
of Siradeva named परिभाषावृत्तिव्याख्या.
He has also written the ' life of
Patanjali' ( पतञ्जलिचरित ) and many
miscellaneous works, such as
उणादिमणिदीपिका and others.
रामराम a grammarian who has written
a commentary on the Kavikalpa-
druma of Bopadeva.
रामशार्मा the same as रामतर्कवागीश. See
रामतर्कवागीश.
रामसिंहृवर्मा possibly the same king of
Sringaberapura who patronised
Nagesabhatta. He is said to have
written some Small comments on
the Ramayana and a small gram-
mar work named धातुरत्नमञ्जरी.
रामानन्द् a grammarian of the seven-
teenth century who wrote a com-
mentary on Bopadeva's Mugdha-
bodha. He was possibly the same
as Ramarama (see above) and
Ramānandatirtha who wrote the
Katantrasamgraha, although diffe-
rent from the well-known रामानन्द-
तीर्थ of the sixteenth century who
was a sanyasin and who wrote
many philosophical and religious
booklets.
रामालंकार possibly the same as रामराम
(see above) who wrote Dhatudi-
pika, a commentary on the Kavi-
kalpadruma of Bopadeva.
रामाश्रम a grammarian of the seven-
teenth century who wrote a com-
mentary named Siddhantacandrika
on the Sarasvata Vyakarana.
रामेश्वर a grammarian who wrote a
small compendium on grammar
named शुद्धाशुबोध.
राशि usually used in the sense of a
collection or a heap or a lunar
constellation; the word is often
used after the word वर्ण when it
means the traditional collection of
|
letters or the alphabet. The words
अक्षरराशि, ब्रह्मराशि and अक्षरसमाम्नाय are
also used in the same sense.
रिक् an augment added optionally
with रुक् and रीक् to the reduplica-
tive syllable of the frequentative
root from a primitive root which
ends in ऋ or has a penultimate ऋ;
e. g. चरिकर्ति, नरिनर्ति भरिभ्रत् etc.; cf.
रुग्रिकौ च लुकि, P.VII. 4.9l and ऋतश्च
VII.4.92.
रिङ् substitute रि for a verbal base
ending in ऋ before श (the sign of
the 6th conj.) यक् (sign of the pass.
voice) and a लिङ् affix beginning
with य which is not a Sārvadhātuka
affix; e. g. अाद्रियते, क्रियते, क्रियात्; cf.
रिङ् शयग्लिङ्क्षु P.VII.4.28.
रित् (1) characterized by the mute
consonant र् signifying the acute
accent for the penultimate vowel;cf.
उपोत्तमं रिति P. VI. I. 217; ( 2 )
the same as रिफित or रेफि, a visarga
which is changeable into र् when
euphonically combined; cf.
विसर्जनीयो रिफितः V.Pr.I.160; cf. also
भाव्युपधं च रिद्विसर्जनीयान्तानि रेफेण ; V.Pr.
VII.9. The terms रिफित, रेफि and रित्
are given in the Padapatha to a पद
or word which ends in a Visarga
which has originated from र् in the
Samhitapatha; e. g. the Visarga
in कः, प्रात: etc.; cf. R.Pr.I.30 to 32.
रिफित (1) a Visarga in the Padapatha
which has originated from र् in the
Samhita-patha; (2) a word or
pada which has got a रिफित at its
end; cf. क:, स्व: प्रातः etc. (which in
the Samhitapatha are कर् , स्वर् , प्रातर्
etc.;) cf. R.Pr. I.30 to 36 V.Pr.IV.
18.192.
रिल् tad. affix रि added optionally
with रिष्टात् to the word ऊर्ध्व which
becomes changed into उप; e.g.उपरि,
उपरिष्टात् ; cf. ऊर्ध्वस्य उपभावो रिल्रिष्टातिलौ
च P.V.3.31 Vart. 1.
|
रिष्टातिल् tad. affix रिष्टात् added to ऊर्ध्व;
see रिल्.
रीक् augment री added optionally with
रुक् and रिक् to the reduplicative syll-
able ( अभ्यास ) of the frequentative
base of roots having ऋ as their
penultimate vowel; e.g. वरीवृश्च्यते
वरीवृश्चीति, नरीनर्ति, चरीकर्ति; cf रीगृदुपधस्य
च P.VII. 4.90.
रीङ् substitute री for the vowel ऋ at
the end of a base ( अङ्ग ) before
the affix च्चि as also before य which
does not belong to a krt or Sarva-
dhatuka affix; e.g. मात्रीभूतः, मात्रीयते;
cf. रीङ् ऋतः P.VII.4.27.
रु (1) substitute र् for the consonant
स् at the end of a word as also for
the ष् of सजुत्र् , न् of अहन् and option-
ally with र् for the final स् of अम्नस्,
ऊधस् and अवस् in Veda; e.g. अग्निरत्र,
वायुरत्र, सजूर्देवोभिः cf. P.VIII.2.66; the
र् of this रु (as contrasted with the
substitute र् which see above) is
further changed into उ before a
soft consonant and before the
vowel अ provided it is preceded by
the vowel अ, while र् , prescribed
as substitute र (which see above),
remains unchanged; e g. शिवोर्च्यः,
शिवो वन्द्य: as contrasted with अहरत्र,
अहर्गण:; (2) substitute र् for the final
ज् of अवयज् (e. g, अवयाः), for ह् of
श्वेतवह् (e.g. श्वेतवाः), and for श् of पुरोडाश्
(e.g. पुगेडा:) before the case affix सु ;
cf.P.VIII.4.67;(3)substitute र् (or द्)
for the final स् or द् of a verb-form
ending with the personal ending
सिप् of the 2nd pers. sing; cf. P.
VIII.2.74,75;(4)substitute र् for the
final न् of words ending with the
affix मत् or वस् in Veda; e.g. मरुत्व:
हरिवः ; cf. Kas. on P.VIII.3.1; (5)
substitute र् for the final न् at the
end of a word when it is followed
by a छव् letter i.e. the first or a
second consonant excepting ख् and
|
फ्; e.g. भवांश्चिनोति; cf. P.VIII. 3.7;
(6) substitute र् for the final न् of नॄन्
before the letter प् as also for the
final न् of स्वतवान् and कान् under
certain conditions; cf. P. VIII.3.
10.12.
रुक् augment र् added optionally with
रिक् to the reduplicative syllable;
(see रिक् above); e.g. चर्कर्ति, नर्नर्त्ति;
cf P. VII. 4. 91, 92 as also VII.
4.65.
रुक्मन् the primary Yama letter; a
term used in the Śikșā treatises.
रुट् augment र्, prefixed to the pers.
ending झ of the प्रथमपुरुष (3rd pers.
plural) after the root शी, विद् and in
Vedic literature after a few other
roots e.g. शेरते, संविद्रते,अदुह्व;cf. शीङो रुट्;
P.VII. 1.6-8.
रुदादि a term used for the five roots
headed by the root रुद्,which have
the augment इ added to a Sārva-
dhātuka affix in certain cases; e.g.
रोदिति, श्वसिति, अरोदीत्, अस्वपीत् etc.; cf.
P.VII. 2. 76, VII.3.98.
रुद्रदेव a grammarian who has written
a commentary on the Vaiyāka-
raņa-Siddhānta-Bhūșaņa of Koņda-
bhațța.
रुघादि a class of roots headed by the
root रुध् which take श्नम् ( न् ) as the
conjugational sign inserted after
the final vowel, e. g. रुणद्धि ( where
रुध् becomes रुणध् ). These roots are
popularly called roots of the 8th
conjugation.
रूढ conventional; traditional; one of
the four senses in which words are
used. The senses are यौगिक (deriva-
tive ), रूढ (conventional), योगरूढ and
यौगिकरूढ; The term रूढ is also used
in the sense of 'a conventional
word' cf. प्रथमाशब्दो विभक्तिविशेषे रूढः
Kās. on P. VI. 1.102.
रूढा Samhitāpǎțha, as contrasted with
the Padapāțha.
|
रूढि convention; usage; custom. The
word रूढि is given along with योग
( derivation ) as the basis of the
use of words which are described
to be of four kinds; see रूढ above.
cf. नैगमरूढिभवं हि सुसाधु P. III 3. 1.
Vārt. 1.
रूप (1) word-form which is complete
with प्रकृति ( the base ) and प्रत्यय, i.e.
the affix which is attached to it;
cf. रूपनिर्ग्रहश्च शब्दस्य नान्तरेण लौकिकं प्रयोगम्
M. Bh. on P. I. 1.22 Vārt. 3; cf.
also the usual expression का रूपसिद्धिः
in the Mahābhāșya; cf. M. Bh.
on I. 1.51, 1.2.58 etc. ; the word
is also used in the sense of a
word-base ( धातु or प्रातिपदिक ); cf. स्वं
रूपं शब्दस्याशब्दसंज्ञा P. I. 1.68; (2) the
word form as characterized by its
derivation and properties cf. तस्य
रूपान्यत्वे वर्णान्यत्वम् explained as तस्य
शब्दस्य अनुप्रदानादिभिः कारणौ रूपभेदे जन्यमाने
वर्णभेदः संपद्यते T. Pr. XXII. 2
रूपनारायण a grammarian of Bengal
of the fifteenth century who wrote
short comments on some sections
of the Supadma Vyākaraņa under
the names सुपद्मषट्कारक and सुपद्मसमास-
संग्रह्.
रूपप् tad. affix in the sense of 'praise'
which is, in fact, possessed by the
word to which the affix रूपप् is
added, without making any
change in the sense of the word,
the affix being called 'स्वार्थे' i. e.
an affix in the sense of the base
or प्रकृति cf.स्वार्थिकाः प्रत्ययाः प्रकृत्यर्थविशेषस्य
द्योतका भवन्ति । प्रशस्तो वैयाकरणो वैयाकरणरूपः ।
याज्ञिकरूपः । प्रकृत्यर्थस्य वैशिष्ट्ये प्रशंसा भवति ।
वृषलरूपोयं य: पलाण्डुना सुरां पिबति । चोररूप: ।
Kāś. on P. V. 3.66.
रूपमाला (1) an elementary work on
Sanskrit grammar composed by
Vimalasarasvatī, in which the
Sūtras of Pāņini are arranged in
different topics many of which are
|
called माला, such as अजन्तमाला,
हलन्तमाला, छान्दसमाला, अव्ययमाला and so
on.(2) the name रूपमाला is also found
given to a work giving collections
of formed words written by Puņ-
yanandana.
रूपसिद्धि lit. the formation of words;
the name रूपासिद्वि is given to a small
literary work on the formation of
words written by Dayānandasa-
rasvatī.
रूपातिदेश the actual replacement of
the original in the place of the
substitute by virtue of the rule
स्थानिवदादेशोनल्विधौ P. I. 1. 56; one of
the two kinds of स्थानिवद्भाव
wherein the word-form of the
original ( स्थानी ) is put in the
place of the substitute (आदेश); the
other kind of स्थानिवद्भाव being call-
ed कार्यातिदेश by means of which
grammatical operations caused by
the original ( स्थानी ) take place
although the substitute (आदेश) has
been actually put in the place of
the original. About the interpre-
tation of the rule द्विर्वचनेचि P.
I.1.59, the grammarians accept
the view of रूपातिदेश; cf. रूपातिदेशश्चायं
नियतकालस्तेन कृते द्विर्वचने पुन: आदेशरूपमे-
वावतिष्ठते । पपतुः पपुः । अातो लोप इटि च
इत्याकारलोपे कृते तस्य स्थानिवद्भावात् एकाचो
द्बे० इति द्विर्वचनं भवति Kāś on P.I.1.59;
cf. also रूपातिदेशश्चायम् । द्विर्वचनेचि इत्य-
त्रास्य भाष्ये पाठात् । Pari. Bhaskara
Pari. 97. For details see Mahābh-
āșya on P.VII.1.95 96.
रूपावतार a well-known work on word
formation written by धर्मकीर्ति a Jain
grammarian of the twelfth century.
Scholars believe that this work
was the first work of the form of
topics which was taken as a model
by the authors of the Prakriyākau-
mudī and the Siddhāntakaumudī.
रूप्य (1) a tad. affix applied to a word
|
meaning 'a cause' or expressing
'a human being' in the sense of
'proceeding therefrom' e.g. समादागतं
समरूप्यम्; देवदत्तरूप्यम्; cf. हेतुमनुष्ये-
भ्योन्यतरस्यां रूप्यः P. IV. 3.81; (2) a
tad. affix applied to a word in the
genitive case in the sense of भूतपूर्व,
'formerly belonging to' ; e. g.
देवदत्तस्य भूतपूर्वो गौः देवदत्तरूप्य:; cf. Kāś.
on षष्ठया रूप्य च P. V. 3.54.
ऋ word-form of the ajbhakti or
svarabhakti ( a term used in the
ancient Prātiśākhya works), where
ऋ is looked upon as the consonant
र् surrounded by, or followed by
the nature of a vowel. ऋ as a
vowel is possessed of one mātrā
of which in svarabhakti, the con-
sonant र् possesses half and the
svarabhakti possesses half; cf रेफात्
स्वरोपहिताह्यञ्जनोदयाद् ऋकारवर्णा स्वरभाक्तिरूत्तरा
R. Pr. VI.13.
रे (रेश्) personal ending in Vedic
Literature, substituted for त of the
प्रथमपुरुष ( 3rd pers. ) plural in the
Perfect tense; cf. लिटस्तझयो रेश् इरेच्
P. III. 4.81.
रेखा termed also 'लेखा '; one of the
subdivisions of the krama-pāțha.
रेफ the consonant र्; generally the
word रेफ is used for र and not रकार;
cf. वर्णात्कार: । रादिफं: P.III.3.108 Vārt.
3,4. The consonant र is described as
one pronounced like the tearing of
a piece of cloth and resembling a
snarl or a growl: cf. रिफ्यते विपाटथते
वस्त्रादिपाटनध्वनिवदुच्चार्यते इति रेफ: ।
रेफशिरस् ( the guna or the vrddhi
substitute for ऋ viz. अर् or अार्)
with the letter र् represented in
script by a sign on the top; e. g.
अर्कः, आर्जवम्; cf. वृद्धिर्भवति गुणो भवतीति
रेफशिरा गुणवृद्धिसंज्ञकोऽभिनिर्वर्तते M.Bh, on
P. VI.4.121.
रेफिन् a term applied(1)to the Visarja-
snīya letter preceded by any vowel
|
excepting अ and अा, ( 2 ) to the
Visarjanīya preceded by अ in
some specified words such as
प्रातः, भाः, अविभः, अाद:, क: etc. under
certain conditions, as also, (3) to
the Visarjanīya in हातः, सनितः etc.
For details see R. Pr. I.30-36.
रेवत्यादि a class of words headed by
the word रेवती to which the affix
ठक् is added in the sense of 'an
offspring': e. g. रैवतिकः, आश्वपालिकः,
द्वारपालिकः etc.cf.Kāś. on P. IV.1.146.
रैवतिकादि a class of words headed by
रैवतिक to which the taddhita affix
ईय ( छ ) is added in the sense of
'belonging to'; e. g. रैवतिकीयः,
औदवाहीयः, बैजवापीयः etc. cf. Kaś. on
P. IV. 3.131.
रोमश one of the faults in pronunci-
ation; cf. प्रगीत उपगीतः क्ष्क्ण्णो रोमश इति
M. Bh I. 1. Ah. 1.
रौ personal ending substituted for the
प्रथमपुरुषद्विवचन ( 3rd pers, dual
affix तस्) in the periphrastic or first
future; e. g. कर्तारौ; cf. लुट; प्रथमस्य
डारौरसः P. II. 4.85.
रौढीय a term jocularly used with the
word घृत preceding it,for students
of a famous scholar named धृतरौढि;
cf. ओदनपाणिनीयाः घृतरौर्ढायाः M. Bh. on
P. 1.1.73.
रौढ्यादि another name given to the
क्रौड्यादि class of words which are
headed by क्रौडि and which take the
affix ष्यङ् to form their base in the
feminine; e. g. क्रौड्या लाड्या; cf. सिद्धं तु
रौड्यादिषूपसंख्यानात् । के पुना रौढ्यादयः ।
ये क्रौड्यादय; M. Bh. on P. IV. 1.79.
रौधादिक a root belonging to the
class of roots headed by रुध् which
take the conjugational sign न् (श्नम्).
See रुधादि above.
र्हिल् (1) a tad. affix termed also विभक्ति
which is applied to the word इदभ् in
the sense of the locative case, the
word इदम् being changed into एत;
|
e. g. एतर्हि; cf. इदमो र्हिल् P. V. 3.16
and एतेतौ रथो: P. V. 3.4. (2) tad.
affix applied in Veda to तत् and
other pronouns; e.g.तर्हि, कर्हि, यर्हि, cf.
P. V. 3.20, 21.
ल् (1 ) a consonant of the dental class
which is a semi-vowel ( यण् ) with
liquid contact in the mouth, and
which is inaspirate ( अल्पप्राण ),voic-
ed ( घोष ) and both nasalised and
unnasalised; (2) name in general
( लकार ) given to the personal
endings applied to roots in the
ten tenses and moods which take
different substitutes ति, त:, अन्ति etc.
and have various modifications and
augments in the different tenses
and moods; (3) substituted as a
semi-vowel ( यण् ) for the vowel
ऌ followed by any other vowel
in the euphonic combinations;
(4)applied at the beginning of non-
taddhita affixes as a mute letter
indicating the acute accent for
the vowel preceding the affix;
cf. लिति; P. VI. 1.193; ( 5 )
substituted for त्, थ्, द्, घ् or न्
before ल्， cf. P.VIII.4. 60; (6) subs-
tituted under certain conditions for
the consonant र् (a) of the root कृप्,
(b) of prefixes प्र and परा before the
root अय्, (c) of the root गॄ in fre-
quentative forms and optionally
before affixes beginning with a
vowel, and (d ) of the word परि
before घ and अङ्क; cf. P. VIII. 2. 18
to 22. _
ल (1) consonant ल्; see ल् above'
(2) a general term usually used
by ancient grammarians to signify-
लोप (elision or disappearance) of
a letter or a syllable or a word; cf.
सर्वसादेर्द्विगोश्च ल: | सवार्तिक:, द्वितन्त्र: M.
Bh. on P.IV.2.60; (3) tad. affix
|
ल added to the word क्लिन्न when
चिल् and पिल् are substituted for the
word क्लिन्न; e.g, चिल्लः, पिल्ल: cf. P.V.
2.33 Vārt 2.
लकार (1) the consonant ल्; see ल् (1)
above; (2) the personal endings
affixed to roots; see ल् (2).
लक्षण (1) a rule or a sūtra composed
by the ancient Sūtrakāras; the word is
very frequently used in this sense by
the Bhāşyakāra and later commentators;
cf. लक्ष्यलक्षणे व्याकरणम्; cf. also लक्षणं हि
नाम ध्वनति, भ्रमति मुहूर्तमपि नावतिष्ठते M.Bh.
on P.I.1.3 Vārt 10; (2) characteristic
or sign; cf. लक्षणेनाभिप्रती आभिमुख्ये P.
II. 1. 14; cf. also P.I.4.90 and III.
2.12; (3) indirect way of expression;
cf. लक्षणप्रतिपदोक्तयोः प्रतिपदोक्तत्यैव
ग्रहणम् Par. Śek. Pari. 105.
लक्षणप्रतिपदोक्त a short term used for
the well-known Paribhāşā लक्षणप्रति-
पदोक्तयोः प्रतिपदोक्तस्यैव ग्रहणम् Par. Sek.
Pari. I05, laying down that when a
question arises as to which of the
two words लक्षणोक्त (arrived at by
certain changes or modifications)
and प्रतिपदोक्त, (directly expressed)
be accepted, the latter should be
preferred.
लक्षणसंग्रह a work on grammar
written by a grammarian named
रत्नेश.
लक्षणा implication; potentiality of
implication; this potentiality of words
viz. लक्षणा is not recognised
by grammarians as a potentiality
different from the अभिधाशक्ति or the
power of denotation. Later gra-
mmarians, however, like the
Ālamkārikas, have used the word
in the sense of potentiality of
implication as different from that
of denotation; cf. अन्त्यशब्दे लक्षणा न च
Paribhāşenduśekhara.
लक्ष्मणसूरि a grammarian who has
39
|
written a booklet on the six dia-
lects, which is named षड्भाषाचन्द्रिका.
लक्ष्मीनृसिंह a grammarian of the
eighteenth century who has
written (1) Siddhāntakaumudī-
vilāsa, a commentary on the
Siddhāntakaumudī and (2)Triśikhā,
a commentary on Nāgeśa's Pari-
bhāşenduśekhara.
लक्ष्य lit. target; illustration; example
of a grammatical rule; cf. लक्ष्ये लक्षणं
सकृदेव प्रवर्तते Paribhāşā; also लक्ष्यानुसारि
व्याख्यानमेव शरणम् Paribhāşendu-
śekhara; cf. also शब्दो लक्ष्य: सूत्रं लक्षणम्
M. Bh. on P.I.1.1 Vārt. 14.
लक्ष्यार्थ implied sense. See the word
लक्षणा.
लघु (1) a term used in the sense of
light or short as contrasted with
गुरु meaning heavy or long, which
is applied to vowels like अ, इ etc.
cf. ह्रस्वं लघु P.I. 4. 10; (2) brevity;
brief expression; cf. लघ्वर्थे हि संज्ञाकरणम्
M.Bh. on P.I.2,27 Vārt. 6 also संज्ञा
हि नाम यतो न लघीयः; (3) small, as
qualifying an effort in writing or
explaining something as also in
utterance; cf. व्योर्लघुप्रयत्नतरः शाकटायनस्य
P.VIII.3.18.
लघुकौमुदी known as लघुसिद्धान्तकौमुदी
also, an abridged work based
upon the Siddhāntakaumudi of
Bhațțojī Dīkşita, written by Bhațțojī's
pupil Varadarāja. The work is very
valuable and helpful to beginners
in grammar. It has got the same
topics as the Siddhāntakaumudī,
but arranged differently. The work,
named सारसिद्धान्तकौमुदी is the same
as लघुसिध्दान्तकौमुदी. Possibly
सारसिद्धान्तकौमुदी was the original
name given by the author.
लघुता smallness of effort as contrast-
ed with गुरुता; cf. तत्राप्ययं नावश्यं
गुरुलघुतामेवोपलक्षयितुमर्हति, M.Bh. on P.
I.1.3 Vārt. 7.
|
लघुन्यास लघुशब्देन्दुशेखरव्याख्या 306
लघुन्यास (1) short writing, brief
putting in, brief expression; cf.
सोयमेवं लघुना न्यासेन सिद्धे etc.; (2) the
word is given as a name to a
grammatical work, written by
देवेन्द्रसूरि on the शब्दानुशासन of Hema-
candra, possibly in contrast with
the बृहन्न्यास written by Hemacandra
himself or with Kāśikāvivarana-
pańjikā popularly called न्यास
written by Jinendrabuddhi on the
Kāśikāvŗtti of Jayāditya and
Vāmana. See न्यास.
लघुपरिभाषावृत्ति an independent work
on Paribhāşās written by Puruşo-
ttamadeva in the twelfth century
A. D. called लघुपरिभाषावृत्ति in con-
trast with the बृहत्परिभाषावृत्ति of सीरदेव.
The Vŗtti is named 'Lalitā' also,
by the author.
लघुप्रक्रिया name of a grammar tre-
atise based on the Sabdānuśāsana
of Hemacandra written by
Vinayavijaya where the sūtras of
Hemacandra are arranged in
different topics as in the Siddhān-
takaumudī of Bhoțțojī.
लघुप्रयत्नतर requiring still less effort
for utterance than that required
for the usual utterance; the term
is used in connection with the
utterance of the consonant य् which
is substituted for Visarga following
upon long अा and followed by any
vowel. In such cases य् is not
pronounced at all according to
Śākalya, while it is somewhat
audibly pronounced according to
Śākațāyana; cf. व्योर्लघुप्रयत्नतरः शाकटा-
यनस्य P. VIII. 3.18.
लघुभूषणकान्ति name of a commen-
tary work by Harivallabha on
Koņdabhațța's Vaiyākaraņabhū-
şaņasāra.
लघुभूषणदर्पण or लघुदर्पणा name of a
commentary by Mannudeva on
|
Koņdabhațța's Vaiyākaraņabhū-
şaņasāra.
लघुमञ्जूषा name of an independent
work on the meaning of words
and their interpretation written by
Nāgeśa of which the परमलघुमञ्जूषा is
a popular short extract by the
author himself.
लघुशब्दरत्न name of a commentary
on Bhațțoji's Manoramā by his
grandson Hari Dīkşita, which is
generally read together with the
Manoramā, by students upto the
end of the Kāraka Chapter after
they have completely read and
mastered the Siddhāntakaumudī.
The commentary is called लघु-
शब्दरत्न which differentiates it from
the बृहच्छब्दरत्न written by the same
author viz. Hari Dīkşita.
लघुशब्देन्दुशेखर name of a comme-
ntary on Bhațțojī's Siddhānta-
kaumudī written by Nāgeśa
Bhațța, the stalwart Grammarian
of the eighteenth century. The
work is named लघुशब्देन्दुशेखर which
differentiates it from the author's
another work बृहच्छब्देन्दुशेखर of which
the former is an abridgment. As
the study of the Laghuśabdendu-
śekhara is very common and as the
Bŗhatśabdenduśekhara is seldom
studied, it is always the Laghuśa-
bdenduśekhara that is understood
by the simple and popular
name Śekhara.
लघुशब्देन्दुशेखरव्याख्या a commentary
on the Laghuśabdenduśekhara.
There are more than a dozen
commentary works on the popu-
lar Laghuśabdenduśekhara called
by the usual names टीका or व्याख्या
the prominent among which are
गदा, भैरवी and विजया. A few
of them have special names e. g.
चिदस्थिमाला, चन्द्रकला, ज्योत्स्त्रा, विषमी etc.
|
लघुसारस्वत an epitome of the Sāras-
vata Vyākaraņa, by कल्याणसरस्वती.
लघुसिद्धान्तकौमुदी see लघुकौमुदी.
लङ् name given to the affixes of the
imperfect tense; cf. अनद्यतने लङ् P.
III. 2.111, explained by Bhațțoji
as भूतानद्यतने लङ् स्यात् in his Siddhānta-
Kaumudi.
लच् tad. affix ल applied optionally
with the affix मतुप् to words ending
in अा and meaning a detachable
or undetachable part of an animal, ;
as also to words mentioned in the
group headed by the word सिध्म, as
also to words वत्स and अस showing
affection and strength respectively ;
e. g. चूडालः, सिध्मलः, वत्सलः, etc.; cf.
P. V. 2. 96-98.
लट् general personal ending applied
to roots (1 ) to show the present
time for which the personal end-
ings ति तः ... महि are substituted for
the formation of verbs and अत्
(शतृ) and आन or मान (शानच्) for
the formation of the present parti-
ciple; (2) to show past time when
the indeclinable स्म is used in the
sentence along with the verbal form
or when the indeclinables ननु, न, नु,
पुरा, यावत्, कदा, कर्हि etc. are used along
with the verbal form under spe-
cific conditions; e. g. कटं करोति
देवदत्तः, यजति स्म युधिष्ठिरः, अहं नु करोमि,
वसन्तीह पुरा छात्राः, यावद् भुङ्क्ते etc.; cf.
P. III. 2.118-123, III. 3.4-9.
लत्व change of र् into ल्. See ल above.
ललितावृत्ति name given to the Pari-
bhāșāvŗtti written by Purușottama-
deva, a famous grammarian of
the Eastern branch of Pāņini's
system which prevailed in Bengal
from the eighth to the end of the
twelfth century A.D. See पुरुषोत्तमदेव.
लसार्वधातुक a personal ending sub-
stituted for ल् which in certain
cases gets the grave accent in,
|
spite of the general rule that
affixes (which include personal
endings) are acute; cf. तास्यनुदात्ते-
न्डिद्दुपदेशाल्लसार्वधातुकमह्न्विङोः P. VI.
1. 186.
लाक्षणिक ( 1 ) secondary; taken or
understood in the secondary sense;
(2) stated by a rule (लक्षण); cf. एवं
तर्हि न लाक्षणिकस्य स्वरस्य प्रतिषेधं शिष्मः
M.Bh. on P. I. 4.2 Vārt. 9.
लाघव brevity of expression; ex-
pressing in as few words as possible;
brevity of thought and conception.
About brevity of expression, rules or
sūtras of the ancient Sūtrakāras are
noteworthy especially those of the
grammarian Pāņini, whose brevity
of expression is aptly extolled in
the familiar expression अर्धमात्रालाघवेन
पुत्रोत्सवं मन्यन्ते वैयाकरणाः Par. Śek. Pari.
122; cf. also in contrast पर्यायशब्दानां
लाघवगौरवचर्चा नाद्रियते Par.Śek.Pari.115.
लाघवन्याय law of minimisation, par-
simony in the use of words or
parsimony in expression, followed
generally by the Sūtra writers.
लादेश substitutes तिप्, तस् झि (अन्ति) सिप्
.....महिङ् for ल्, signifying the ten
ल् affixes or lakaras लट्, लिट्, लुट् etc.,
applied to roots in the senses of
the different tenses and moods; cf.
P.III.4.78.
लालविहारिन् a grammarian of the
nineteenth century who wrote a
gloss on Nāgeśa's Paribhāșendu-
śekhara.
लावस्था the original condition of ल् or
the personal endings before the
affixes तिप्, तस् and others are subs-
tituted for them in accordance
with the time or mood, as also the
person and the number in view;cf.
लावस्थायामेव स्यादयः, सार्वधातुके श्यनादयः
M. Bh. on P.III. 1. 33.
लि a common term used (1) for the
aorist vikaraņa affix च्लि for which
|
सिच्, क्स, अङ् etc. are substituted as
prescribed; (2) for लिट् and
लिङ् affixes; e.g. मन्त्रे घसह्वरणशवृदहाद्-
वृच्कृगमिजनिभ्यो ले: P.II.4.80.
लिङ् general term for the affixes call-
ed लिङ् (optative) which includes
the potential (विधिलिङ्) and the
conditional (अाशीर्लिङ्) affixes; .cf.
विधिनिमन्त्रणामन्त्रणाधीष्टसंप्रश्र्नप्रार्थनेषु लिङ् and
अाशिषि लिङ्लोटौ P. III. 3.161 and
173.
लिङ्ग (1) sign or characteristic mark;
generally the mute letter prefixed
or suffixed to roots, affixes, or aug-
ments and their substitutes with a
specific purpose; cf. किंचिल्लिङ्गमासज्य
वक्ष्यामि M. Bh.on I.1.1 Vārt.7, अवयवे
कृतं लिङ्ग समुदायस्य विशेषकं भवति M. Bh.
on P.I.3.62 Vārt. 5; (2) proof, evi-
dence (प्रमाण); the word is often
used in the Paribhāșendușekhara
and other works in connection
with a rule or part of a rule quot-
ed as an evidence to deduce some
general dictum or Paribhāșā; (3)
gender; cf. लिङ्ग स्त्रीलिङ्गपुंलिङ्गनपुंसकानि
Kāś. on P. II. 3. 46; cf. also
प्रातिपदिकग्रहणे लिङ्गविशिष्टस्यापि ग्रहणम्. Par.
Śek.Pari.71. The gender of a word in
Sanskrit language does not depend
on any specific properties of a
thing; it simply depends on the
current usage; cf. लोकाश्रयत्वाल्लिङ्गस्य
which is often quoted in the
Mahābhāsya; cf. M. Bh. on P.
II. 1.36, II.2.29, II.4.12, IV. 1.3,
V.3.66, V.4.68, VIII.1.15. For
details see Mahābhāșya on P.IV.1.
3 where after a long enlightening
discussion the definition संस्त्यानप्रसवौ
लिङ्गम् is given.
लिङ्गनिर्णयभूषण a work on genders by
a southern grammarian अण्णौयाचार्य.
लिङ्गवाचकप्रत्यय an affix such as अा,
(टाप्, डाप्, चाप्) or ई (ङीप्, ङीष्, ङीन्)
which is added to a masculine
base; cf. P.IV. 1.3 to IV.1.77.
|
लिङ्गविशिष्टग्रहण inclusion of the femi-
nine form of a word when a word
in the masculine gender is used in
a rule, for certain operations such
as the application of affixes and
the like; cf. the usual dictum rega-
rding this practice viz. the Pari-
bhāșā प्रातिपदिकग्रहणे लिङ्गविशिष्टस्यापि ग्रहणम्
Par. Śek. Pari. 71. as also M. Bh.
on P. IV. 1. 1 Vārt. 5 to Vārt, 15
for places of the application of the
dictum and those of its rejection.
लिङ्गविशिष्टपरिभाषा the dictum to
include the feminine form of a
word when in a rule the
word is used in the masculine
gender : प्रातिपदिकग्रहणे लिङ्गविशिष्टस्यापि
ग्रहणम् Par. Śek. Pari. 71. See लिङ्ग-
विशिष्टग्रहण.
लिङ्गव्यत्यय transposition of genders,
as noticed often in Vedic language;
e. g. मधोर्गृह्लाति or मधोस्तृप्ताः for मधुन:;
cf. M.Bh. on P. I. 4.9.
लिङ्गानुशासन lit. science of genders; a
short comprehensive old treatise on
the gender of words attributed to
Pāņini as its author. Other works
with the same designation are att-
ributed to वामन, दुर्गोत्तम and others.
लिङ्गानुशासनटीका name of a commen-
tary on Pāņini's लिङ्गानुशासन; some
commentaries of this kind are the
लिङ्गार्थचन्द्रिका by सुजनपण्डित,लिङ्गार्थ-
चन्द्रिकाप्रकाश by चकोर, लिङ्गानुशासनटीका by
दुर्गोत्तम and लिङ्गानुशासनटीका by तारानाथ.
लिङ्गार्थचन्द्रिका see लिङ्गानुशासनटीका.
लिङ्प्रत्ययार्थ sense of the optative and
the potential moods given or
expressed by affixes under the
common name लिङ् prescribed by
P III. 3.161, 164, 173.
लिट् an affix of the perfect tense; cf.
परोक्षे लिट् P.III.2.115 for which the
specific affixes णल्, अतुस् उस् etc. are
substituted after roots which take
Parasmaipada affixes. Before the lit
|
affixes, a monosyllabic root is
reduplicated while dissyllabic roots
and denominative and other
secondary roots, formed by adding
an affix to an original root,take the
affix अाम् after which all 'liț' per-
sonal endings are dropped and the
forms of the roots कृ, भू and अस् with
the necessary personal-endings, are
placed immediately after the word
ending in अाम्, but often with the
intervention of a word or more
in the Vedic language and rarely
in the classical language; cf. तं
पातयां प्रथममास पपात पश्चात्; cf. कास्प्रत्यया-
दाममन्त्रे लिटि P.III.I. 35 to 42.
लित् an affix marked with the mute
letter ल् such as ल्युट्, तातिल्, तल्, तसिल्,
विधल्, भक्तल् etc. where the mute ल्
signifies the acute accent for the
vowel of the base which imme-
diately precedes the affix; e. g.
चिकीर्षक:; in which the vowel ई is
acute; cf. लिति VI.1.193.
लित्स्वर the acute accent for the vowel
immediately preceding the affix
caused by that affix being marked
with the mute consonant ल्. See
लित् above; cf. अनुदात्तत्वं क्रियतां लित्स्वर
इति किमत्र कर्तव्यम् M. Bh. on P. II.
4.33.
लीबिश् [ LIEBICH, BRUNO] a
European grammarian belonging
to Breslau who lived in the last
quarter of the nineteenth and the
first quarter of the twentieth cen-
tury. He made a critical study of
Sanskrit grammar and edited
the Cāndra Vyākaraņa and the
Kșīratarańgiņī.
लु elision of an affix or its part in
the process of the formation of a
word as prescribed by the specific
mention of the words लुक्, श्लु and
लुप् which have the syllable लु as
common. The specific feature of
|
the elision by the use of these
letters is the prohibition of any
such operation for the preceding
base as is conditioned by the
elided affix; cf. प्रत्ययलोपे प्रत्ययलक्षणम् |
न लुमताङ्गस्य P.I.1.62,63.
लुक् (I) disappearance (लुच्यते इति लुक्);
a term used by Pāņini for the
disappearance of an affix or its
part under specified conditions as
prescribed by a grammar rule with
the mention of the word लुक्; e.g.
प्रत्ययस्य लुक्श्लुलुप: P. I.1.61; (2) aug-
ment ल् added to the root ला in the
sense of melting (an oily thing); cf.
घृतं विलालयति. See Kās, on P.VII.3.
39.
लुग्विकरण a term used by gramma-
rians especially in the Mahābhāșya;
(cf. M.Bh. on P.I. 2.4, I.2.12, II.4.
77 etc.) for such roots as have their
Vikaraņa (conjugational sign) dro-
pped by a rule with the mention
of the word लुक्; e.g. the roots of the
second conjugation as contrasted
with other roots; cf. लुग्विकरणालु-
ग्विकरणयोरलुग्विकरणस्य Par.Śek. Pari.90.
लुङ् an affix applied to a root, show-
ing action of immediate past time
as contrasted with affixes called
लिट् or लङ्. The affix लुङ् is found
used, however, in the sense of the
past time in general, and irrespe-
ctive of time in Vedic Literature;
cf. छन्दसि लुङ्लङ्लिटः P. III. 4.6. The
conjugational affixes ति, तः, etc.
are substituted for लुङ् as for the
lakāras of other tenses and moods
and the distinguishing sign or
विकरण is added to a root before
the affix called लुङ्; cf. च्लि लुङि and
the following P. III. 1.43 etc.
लुट् general name for affixes of the
first future which are added to
roots when the future time is not
the present day, but the next and
the succeeding ones; cf. अनद्यतने लुट्
|
P. III. 3.15. The affixes ति, तः
etc. replace the affix लुट् in acco-
rdance with the number and
person in view; cf. तिप्तस्झिसिप् ....
P. III. 4 78.
लुप् disappearance ( लुप्यते इति लुप्); a
term used by Pāņini with reference
to the disappearance of an affix
or its part under specified con-
ditions by the express mention of
the word लुप्. Although after the
disappearance of an affix no ope-
ration for the base before, can
take place as conditioned by the
affix, i. e. although there is no
प्रत्ययलक्षण, still, when the disappe-
arance is mentioned as लुप्, the
base gets the gender and number
of that original form of it which
existed before the affix, which
has disappeared, was applied; cf.
कुरव: दश:, चञ्चेव पुरुष: चञ्चा; cf. लुपि
युक्तवद् व्यक्तिवचने. P. I. 2.51 and
Kāśikā thereon.
लुप्त that which has been elided or
dropped during the process of
the formation of words. As elision
or लोप is looked upon as a kind
of substitute, in short a zero-
substitute, the convention of
the substitute being looked upon
as the original one, viz.the sthāni-
vadbhāva, applies to it.
लुप्तनिर्दिष्ट supposed to be mentioned
although not seen or heard in a
particular rule, for the sake of
bringing about some grammatical
operation with a view to arriving
at some desired forms; cf. ल्रान्तस्येत्यत्र
वकारोऽपि निर्दिश्यते । किं वकारो न श्रूयते ।
लुप्तनिर्दिष्टो वकारः । M. Bh. on P. I.1.3.
Vārt. 10; cf. also M. Bh. on I.3.7,
III. 1.44 etc.; also cf. क्ङिति च P. I.
1.5 where the consonant ग् is
supposed to be present in the
word क्ङिति .
|
लुप्तविकरण a term applied to roots
after which the conjugational sign
is dropped; e. g. roots of the
second and third conjugations; cf.
न लुप्तविकरणेभ्योनुदात्तत्वं भवति, M. Bh.on
P. VI.1. 186.
लुमत् lit. possessed of the syllable or
wording लु. The word is applied to
the terms लुक्, श्लु, and लुप् which
contain the letter लु and which all
mean the disappearance of a word-
element; cf. न लुमताङ्गस्य । लुक् श्लु लुप्
एते लुमन्त: S.K. on P. I. 1.63.
लृ common term for the affixes लृट्
( second Future ) and लृङ् (condi-
tional), the remnant being लृ after
the mute consonants ङ् and ट् have
been dropped.
लृङ् general term for the personal
affixes of the conditional, which are
applied to a root to show the hap-
pening of an action only if there was
another preceding action, both the
actions being expressed by लृङ् or
conditional affixes; e.g. देवश्चेदवर्षिष्यत्
सुभिक्षमभविष्यत्; cf. लिङ्निमित्ते लृङ् क्रियाति-
पत्तौ P. III.3. 139, 140. लृङ् is also
used under certain other condi-
tions when some specific partīcles
are used; cf. P.III.3.141-146, 151.
लृट् a general term for the general affix
ल् of the second future which is
applied in the sense of future time
in general, without any specific
conditions, the affixes ति, त:, अन्ति
being substituted for the ल् and the
sign (vikaraņa) स्य being added to
the root; cf. P.III.3.13 and III. 3.
133. The terminations अत् and अान
are substituted for the affix लृट्
to form future participles; e.g. भवि-
ष्यत्, एधिष्यमाण, cf. लृट; सद्वा P.III.3.14.
लेखा one of the varieties or develop-
ments of the क्रमपाठ or the artificial
recitation of the separate words
of the Samhitā.
|
लेट् a general term for the affixes of
the Vedic subjunctive, the usual
personal-endings ति, तस् etc. being
substituted for लेट् as in the case
of other tenses and moods. The
augments अट् and आट् are some-
times prefixed to the लेट् affix and
the sign (विकरण) स् (सिप्) is some-
times added to the roots. The
forms of लेट् are to be arrived at as
they are found actually used in
Vedic language, even by placing
personal-endings of a person or
number different from what is
actually required.
लेश such a slow or indistinct utter-
ance or pronunciation of the
letter य् or व् preceded by अ,
as shows that it is almost
dropped. This indistinct or slurr-
ed utterance of य् or व, which is
described as advocated by the
Prātiśākhyakāra Vātsapra, corres-
ponds to the utterance of य् or व्
with a very low tone as mentioned
by Pāņini in the rule व्योर्लघुप्रयत्नतरः
शाकटायनस्य; e.g. अाप उन्दन्तु; या जाता
ओषधयः etc.; cf. लेशो वात्सप्रस्य एतयोः
T.Pr. 10.23; cf. also लेशेन प्रयत्नशैथिल्येन
ब्यञ्जनानां वचनमुच्चारणं क्रियते Uvvața on
R.Pr. XIV.5.
लैङ्ग a grammatical operation or a
rule of grammar concerning
gender; cf. यदि तर्हि कृत्स्नः पदार्थोभिधीयते
लैङ्गाः सांख्याश्र्च विधयो न सिध्यन्ति M.Bh.on
P.II.2.24 Vārt. 8, 9.
लोक a term used in the Mahā-
bhāșya in contrast with the term
वेद, signifying common people
speaking the language correctly;
the term लोक is also used in contrast
with the term शास्त्र or its techni-
que; cf. यथा लोके or लोकतः M. Bh.
on P.VII. 1. 9, I.1.44 Vārt. 3;
also cf. न यथा लोके तथा व्याकरणे M.
Bh. on P.I.1.1 Vārt. 7.
|
लोकविज्ञान use or understanding of a
word current among the people;
cf. अन्तरेणैव वचनं लोकविज्ञानात्सिद्धमेतत् M.
Bh. on P. I.1.2I Vārt. 5.
लोकाश्रयत्व dependence upon the peo-
ple for the use.The phrase लोकाश्रयत्वा-
ल्लिङ्गस्य, referring to the fixation of
gender depending entirely on the
people's usage, is very common in
the Mahābhāșya; cf. M.Bh. on P.
II.1.36, II.2.29, etc.
लोट् a term for the affixes of the impe-
rative mood or आज्ञार्थ, applied to
roots in the same sense in which
the 'lin' affixes are applied; cf.विधि-
निमन्त्रणामन्त्रणाधीष्टसंप्रश्र्नप्रार्थनेषु लिङ् । लोट् च
P. III.3.161, 162. These affixes,
specifically the affixes of the second
person singular and plural, are also
applied in the sense of frequency or
collection,to a root when that root
is repeated to show that frequency;
e.g. लुनीहि लुनीहि इति लुनाति; भ्राष्ट्रमट
मठमट खदूरमट इति अटति; cf. Kāś on
P. III. 4. 2,3.
लोप disappearance of a word or part
of a word enjoined in grammar for
arriving at the required forms of
a word; cf. अदर्शनं लोपः P. I.1.52: cf.
अदर्शनमश्रवणमनुच्चारणमनुपलब्धिरभावो वर्णवि-
नाश इत्यनर्थान्तरम् । एतैः शब्दैर्योर्थोभिधीयते
तस्य लोप इतीयं संज्ञा भवति Kāś. on P.I.1.
52. This disappearance in the
case of an affix is tantamount to
its notional presence or imaginary
presence, as operations caused by
it do take place although the word
element has disappeared; cf.
प्रत्ययलोपे प्रत्ययलक्षणम् । प्रत्यये लूप्तेपि तद्धेतुकं
कार्ये भवति Kāś. on P. I.1.62.
लोपबलीयस्त्व the superior strength or
superiority of elision as a gramma-
tical operation in contrast with
other operations, by virtue of which
the elision, which is prescrib-
ed, takes place first and then
|
other operations get a scope for
their application; cf. सर्वविधिभ्यो
लोपविधिर्बलीयान् Par.Śek. Pari. 93.
लोमश्य the utterance of an aspirate
letter rather harshly, with a stress
on it, when that utterance is look-
ed upon as a fault; cf. ऊष्मणां घोषाणां
लोमश्यमसौकुमार्ये क्ष्वेडनम् अधिको वर्णस्य ध्वनिः
Uvvața on R. Pr. XIV.6.
लोमादि a class of words headed by
the word लोमन् to which the tad.
affix, श, in the sense 'possessed of'
is added optionally along with the
usual affix मत् ( मतुप् ); e.g. लोमशः,
लोमवान्, रोमशः रोमवान् बभ्रुशः, हरिशः,
कपिशः etc. cf. Kas. on P. V.2.100.
लोहितादि (1)a class of words headed by
लोहित to which the affix क्यव् (य) is
added in the sense of 'becoming',
to form a denominative root-base
which gets the verb-endings of both
the padas; e. g. लोहितायति, लोहितायते;
निद्रायति, निद्रायते; the class लोहितादि is
considered as अाकृतिगण so that simi-
lar denominative verb-bases could
be explained; cf. Kas. on P.III.1.
13; (2) a class of words headed
by लेहित, to which the fem. affix
ष्फ ( अायनी ) is added after they
have got the taddhita affix यञ्
added to them in the sense of 'a
grandchild'; e. g. लौहित्यायनी, कात्या-
यनी etc.; cf Kas. on P. IV. 1.18.
लौकिक prevalent in common utter-
ance of the people as contrasted
with वैदिक;cf.यथा लौकिकवैदिकेषु कृतान्तेषु
M.Bh.on Āhnika 1.See लोक above.
ल्यप् krt affix य substituted for the
gerund termination क्त्वा when the
root,to which त्वा has been applied,
is preceded by a prefix with which
it (the root with the affix) is com-
compounded; cf. समासेऽनत्र्पूर्वे क्त्वो
ल्यप् P. VII. 1. 37.
ल्यु krt affix यु changed into अन in
the sense of an agent applied to the
|
root नन्द् and others (after which it
is seen actually used in language);
e.g. नन्दनः, दूषणः, साधन:, रोचन: cf.
नन्दिग्रहिपचादिभ्यो ल्युणिन्यचः P.III.1.134.
ल्युट् krt affix अन in the sense of verbal
activity as also in the sense of an
'abode' or 'an instrument'; cf. P.
III.3.113,115, 116, 1 17.
ल्वादि a class of roots, headed by the
root लू, the past. pass.part. affix त
placed after which becomes
changed into न; e.g. लून:, लूनवान्;
जीनः, जीनवान्; etc. cf. Kas. on P.VII.
2.44.
व् (1) fourth letter of the class of
consonants headed by य्, which
are looked upon as semi-vowels;
व् is a dental, soft, non-aspirate
consonant pronounced as ब् in
some provinces and written also
sometimes like ब्, especially when
it stands at the beginning of a
word; (2) substitute for उ which
is followed by a vowel excepting
उ; e. g, मधु+अरि: = मध्वरिः; cf. इको
यणचि P. VI. I. 77; (3) the con-
sonant व्, which is sometimes
uttered with very little effort when
it is at the end of a word and
followed by a vowel or a semi-
vowel, or a fifth, fourth or third
consonant or the consonant ह्.
In such cases it is called लघूच्चारण;
cf. यस्योच्चारणे जिह्वाग्रोपाग्रमध्यमूलानां शैथिल्यं
जायते स लघूच्चारण: S. K. on P.VIII.3.
18;(4) solitary remnant of the affi-
xes क्विप्,क्विन्, ण्वि and the like, when
the other letters which are mute
are dropped and the affix क्वप् or
the like becomes a zero affix. This
व् also is finally dropped; cf.
वेरपृक्तस्य P. VI.1.67.
व (1) the semivowel व्; see व्; (2)
|
personal-ending substituted for वस्
in the perfect (लिट्) first person
(उत्तमपुरुष), and in the present tense
in the case of the root विद्;
cf. परस्मैपदानां णलतुसुस्० and विदो लटो
वा. P. III. 4.82,83; (3) krt affix
क्विप्, क्विन् or वि of which only व्
remains; cf. अनिगन्तोञ्चतौ वप्रत्यये P.
VI. 2.52; cf. also विष्वग्देवयोश्र्च टेरद्यञ्चतौ
वप्रत्यये VI.3.92.the affix is mention-
ed as वप्रत्यय by Panini, but, in fact,
it is व् , अ being added for ease in
pronunciation; (4) tad. affix in the
sense of possession added along
with the other affixes इन्, इक, and
वत् to the word केश and to some
other words such as मणि, हिरण्य, राजी,
अर्णस् etc. as also to गाण्डी and अजग;
cf. P. V. 2. 109, 110.
वंशादि a class of words headed by
the word वंश, the word भार placed
after which gets the taddhita
affixes added to it, as prescribed
in the senses 'takes it', 'carries it'
or 'produces it'; e.g. वांशभारिकः; cf.
Kas. on P.V. 1.50. The tad. affix-
es as prescribed in the senses
mentioned above are added to the
words वंश etc. and not to भार
according to some commentators;
e.g.वांशिकः, कौटजिकः etc.; cf. Kas. on
P. V. 1.50.
वकार the consonant व् with the vowel
अ and कार being added for facility
of utterance; cf. T. Pr. I. 17, 21,
also वर्णात्कारः P. III.3.108, Vart. 3.
वक्तव्य that which ought to be stated -
or prescribed; the word is fre-
quently found used by the Vartti-
kakāra when he suggests any
addition to, or modification in
Panini's rules. Sometimes,the word
is added by the author of the
Mahabhasya in the explanation of a
Varttika after stating what is lack-
ing in the Varttika.
40
|
वक्त्र mouth, or orifice of the mouth
which, in general is the place of
utterance for all letters, but espe-
cially for the vowel अ; cf. सर्व-
मुखस्थानमवर्णस्य केचिदिच्छन्ति ।
वङ्गसेन a grammarian who wrote a
grammatical work on verbs named
अाख्यातप्रकरण.
वचन (1) lit. statement; an authorita-
tive statement made by the authors
of the Sutras and the Varttikas as
also of the Mahabhasya; cf. अस्ति
ह्यन्यदेतस्य वचने प्रयोजनम् M. Bh. on
Siva Sutra 1 Vart. 1 The word is
also used predicatively in the sense
of वक्तव्यम् by the Varttikakara; cf.
ऌति ऌ वावचनम् , ऋति ऋ वावचनम्; (2)
number, such as एकवचन, द्विवचन,
बहुवचन etc.; cf. वचनमेकत्वद्वित्वबहुत्वानि
Kas.on P.I.2.51 ; cf लुपि युक्तिवद् व्यक्ति-
वचने । लुकि अभिधेयवल्लिङ्गवचनानि भवन्ति।
लवणः सूपः। लवणा यवागूः। M.Bh.on P.I.
2.57; (3) expressive word; cf.
गुणवचनब्राह्मणादिभ्यः कर्मणि च P. V.1.124
where the Kasika explains the
word गुणवचन as गुणमुक्तवन्तो गुणवचनाः;
cf. also the terms गुणवचन, जातिवचन,
क्रियावचन etc. as classes of words;
cf. also अभिज्ञावचने लृट् P.III.2.112;
(4) that which is uttered; cf. मुखना-
सिकावचनोनुनासिक:। मुखसहिता नासिका
मुखनासिका । तया य उच्चार्यते असौ वर्ण: Kas.
on P. I.1.8.
वज्राकृति the form of वज्र or thun-
derbolt, in which ( form ) the
Jihvamuliya (letter) is shown
in writing; cf. वज्राकृतिजिह्वामूलीयः Kat.
I.1.17. See जिह्वामूलीय.
वत् substitute for मत् of मतुप्. See मतुप्.
वति (1) tad. affix वत् in the sense of
similar activity or thing; e. g.
राजवद्वर्तते, मथुरावत् स्त्रुघ्ने प्राकारः; cf. तेन
तुल्यं क्रिया चेद्वतिः । तत्र तस्येव P.V.1.115,
116; (2) tad. affix वत् in the sense
of deserving;e.g, राजवत् पालनम् ; cf.
तदर्हम् P.V.1.117; (3) tad. affix वत्
|
applied to prefixes in Vedic Litera-
ture without any sense of its own ;
e.g यदुद्वतो निवतो याति बप्सत्; cf. उपसर्गा-
च्छन्दसि धात्वर्थे P.V. 1. 118.
वतिनिर्देश specific statement by putt-
ing the word वत् for the sake of
extended application ( अतिदेश);
e.g. ब्राह्मणवदधीते; cf. स तर्हि वतिनिदेश:
कर्तव्यः । न ह्यन्तरेण वतिमातदेशो गम्यते ।
M.Bh.on P. I.1.23 Vart. 4.
वती the possessive affix वत् ( मतुप् )
with fem. ई added; cf. विश्वदेव्यसोमौ
वत्याम् ( दीर्धमापद्येते ) V.Pr.III.117.
वतु or वतुप् tad. affix वत् applied to
the pronouns यत्, तद्, एतद् , क्रिम् and
इदम् in the sense of measurement;
e.g, यावान् , तावान् , एतावान् , कियान् ।
इयान् , कीवान् ;cf. यत्तदेतेभ्यः परिमाणे वतुप्,
किमिदंभ्यां वो घ: P. V. 2.39,40.Words
ending with this affix वतु are
designated संख्या: cf. बहुगणवतुडति
संख्या P.I.1.23.
वनमालिन् a grammarian of the
seventeenth century who wrote a
commentary named मतोन्मजा on
Kondabhatta's vaiyakarana-
bhusana and a grammar work
named सिद्धान्ततत्वविवेक.
वनस्पत्यादि a class of compound words
headed by वनस्पति which retain the
original accent of the members of
the compound, as for example, in
the compound word वनस्पति both
the words वन and पति have got
their initial vowel अ accented
acute; cf Kas.on P.VI.2.140.
वनिप् krt affix वन् applied in the
sense of agent in Vedic literature
to a root ending in अा and in
spoken language to any root where
forms are seen;e.g.भूरिदावा, विजावा;cf.
अातो मनिन्क्वनिब्वनिपश्च । अन्येभ्योपि दृश्यते P.
III. 2. 74, 75
वय tad. affix वय applied to the word
दु in the sense of मान (a peculiar
product); e.g. द्रुवयम्; cf. माने वय:
P. IV. 3.162.
|
वर or वरच् krt affix वर applied to the
roots स्था, ईश्, भास्, पिस् and कस्,as also
to the intensive base of या in the
sense of a habituated agent; e. g.
स्थावर, ईश्वर, यायावर etc. cf. स्थेशभास-
पिसकसो वरच् । यश्च यडः P. III. 2. 175,
176.
वरणादि a class of words headed by
वरण which have the taddhita affix
elided, if it is added to them in
the four senses mentioned in
P.IV.2.67-70; cf. वरणानामदूरभवं नगरं
वरणाः । कटुकबदर्या अदूरभवो ग्रामः कटुकबदरी ।
cf. Kas. on P.IV.2.82.
वरदराज a scholar of grammar and a
pupil of Bhattoji Diksita who flo-
urished in the end of the seven-
teenth century and wrote abridg-
ments of the Siddhanta-kaumudi
for beginners in grammar named
लघुसिद्धान्तकौमुदी and मध्यसिद्धान्तकौमुदी as
also धातुकारिकावली and गीर्वाणपदमञ्जरी.
The work under the name सार-
सिद्धान्तकौमुदी, which is the shortest
abridgment, is, in fact, the लघु-
सिद्धान्तकौमुदी itself. It is possible that
the auother first prepared the सार-
सिद्धान्तकौमुदी and then, he himself
or a pupil of his, put additional
necessary matter and prepared the
Laghusiddhanta-kaumudi.
वररुचि (1) a reputed ancient gra-
mmarian who is identified with
Katyayana, the prominent author
of the Varttikas on the Sutras of
Panini. Both the names वररुचि and
कात्यायन are mentioned in commen-
tary works in connection with the
Varttikas on the Sutras of Panini,
and it is very likely that Vararuci
was the individual name of the
scholar, and Katyayana his family
name. The words कात्य and कात्यायन
are found used in Sloka varttikas in
the Mahabhasya on P.III.2.3 and
III.2.118 where references made
are actually found in the prose
|
Varttikas (see कविधेो सर्वत्र प्रसारणिभ्यो
ड: P.III. 2. 3 Vart and स्मपुरा
भूतमात्रे न स्मपुराद्यतने P.III.2.118 Vart.
1)indicating that the Slokavarttika-
kara believed that the Varttikas
were composed by Katyayana.
There is no reference at all in the
Mahabhasya to Vararuci as a
writer of the Varttikas; there is
only one reference which shows
that there was a scholar by name
Vararuci known to Patanjali, but
he was a poet; cf. वाररुचं काव्यं in the
sense of 'composed' ( कृत and
not प्रोक्त ) by वररुचि M.Bh. on
P. IV. 2.4. ( 2 ) वररुचि is also
mentioned as the author of the
Prakrta Grammar known by the
name प्राकृतप्रकाश or प्राकृतमञ्जरी, This
वररुचि, who also was कात्यायन by
Gotra name, was a grammarian
later than Patanjali, who has
been associated with Sarvvarman,
(the author of the first three Adh-
yayas of the Katantra Sutras), as
the author of the fourth Adhyaya.
Patanjali does not associate वररुचि
with Katyayana at alI. His men-
tion of वररुचि as a writer of a Kavya
is a sufficient testimony for that.
Hence, it appears probable that
Katyayana, to whom the author-
ship of the Vajasaneyi Pratisakhya
and many other works allied with
Veda has been attributed, was not
associated with Vararuci by Patan-
jali, and it is only the later writers
who identified the grammarian
Vararuci,who composed the fourth
Adhyaya of the Katantra Grammar
and wrote a Prakrit Grammar and
some other grammar works,
with the ancient revered Katya-
yana, the author of Varttikas, the
Vijasaneyi Pratisakhya and the
Puspasutra; (3) There was a com-
paratively modern grammarian
|
named वररुचि who wrote a small
treatise on genders of words con-
sisting of about 125 stanzas with a
commentary named Lingavrtti,
possibly written by the author
himself. (4) There was also ano-
ther modern grammarian by
name वररुचि who wrote a work on
syntax named प्रयोगमुखमण्डन discuss-
ing the four topics कारक, समास, तद्धित
and कृदन्त.
वरवर्णिनी name of a commentary on
the Paribhsendusekhara written
by Guruprasada Sastri, a reputed
grammarian of the present century.
वराहादि a class of words headed by
वराह which have the taddhita affix
क ( कक् ) added to them in the
four senses mentioned in P. IV.
2.67-70 e.g. वाराहकम्, पालाशकम् etc.;
cf. Kas. on P. IV. 2.80.
वरी feminine form of the affix वनिप्;
e. g. ऋतावरी, शर्वरी; etc.; cf. वनो र श्च
P. IV. 1.7.
वर्ग name given to the different
classes of consonants which are
headed by an unaspirate surd;
e. g. कवर्ग, चवर्ग, टवर्ग, तवर्ग and पवर्ग.
The several consonants in each
group or class, are, in their serial
order, named वगेप्रथम, वर्गद्वितीय etc.
On the analogy of these five
classes, the semivowels are called
by the name यवर्ग and sibilants, are
called by the name शवर्ग,
वर्ग्यादि a class of words headed by
the word वर्ग्य which have their
initial vowel accented acute when
they stand as second members of
a tatpurusa compound other
than the karmadharaya type of it;
e. g. वासुदेववर्ग्यः, अर्जुनपक्ष्यः; cf Kas:
on P, VI. 2,131.
वर्ण phonemic unit: a letter The
term was in use in ancient times
and found used generally in the
|
masculine gender, but occasionally
in the neuter gender too; e. g.
उपदिष्टा इमे वर्णाः M. Bh. Ahnika 1.
also मा कदाचिदवर्णे भूत् M. Bh. on Siva
Sutras 3, 4.
वर्णग्रहण mention of a grammatical
operation concerning a single
letter or caused by a single letter;
cf. न वर्णग्रहणेषु (एषा अर्थवत्परिभाषा प्रवर्तते).
Siradeva Pari 10.
वर्णपाठ serial mention or enumera-
tion of letters in the fourteen Siva
Sutras. The word is also used in
the sense of the alphabet given in
the Pratisakhya and grammar
works; cf. एवं तर्हि वर्णपाठ एव उपदेशः
करिष्यते M.Bh. on P. I. 1.69.
वर्णप्रकाश a minor work upon letters
and their nature by a grammarian
named Ghanasyama.
वर्णराशि the collection of letters as
mentioned in works on grammar
and Pratisakhyas; cf. इति वर्णराशिः
क्रमश्च R. Pr. I. 10.
वर्णविकार change of one letter into
another (in the formation of a
word) the discussion of which is
looked upon as one of the features
of grammar; cf. लोपागमवर्णविकारज्ञो हृि
सम्यग्वेदान्परिपालायिष्यति. M. Bh. Ahnika 1.
वर्णविचाल disappearance of a letter:
cf वर्णाश्रयः प्रत्ययो वर्णविचालस्यानिमित्तम्;
दाक्षिः । M. Bh. on. P.I.1. 39 Vart.
10.
वर्णविधि an injunction or operation
conditioned by a single letter:
लादेशो वर्णविधेर्भवत्यन्तरङ्गतः M. Bh. on
P.1.4.2.
वर्णविपर्यय changing the place of
letters; cf. सिंहो वर्णविपर्ययात् Vart 20.
वर्णविवेकचन्द्रिका a minor grammar
work on the nature of letters by a
grammarian named काशिनाथ.
वर्णव्यत्यय transposition of letters; cf.
वर्णव्यत्यये चार्थान्तरगमनात् ( अर्थवन्तो वर्णाः);
|
M. Bh. on Siva Sutra 5; cf. कृतेस्तर्कुः
कसेः सिकताः| हिंसेः सिंहृ:| वर्णव्यत्ययो नार्थ-
व्यत्ययः| M. Bh. on. Siva sutra 5.
वर्णसमाम्नाय a collection of letters or
alphabet given traditionally. Alt-
hough the Sanskrit alphabet has got
everywhere the same cardinal let-
ters i.e. vowels अ, इ etc., consonants
क्, ख् etc., semivowels य्, र्, ल्, व,
sibilants श् ष् स् ह् and a few addi-
tional phonetic units such as अनुस्वार,
विसर्ग and others, still their number
and order differ in the different
traditional enumerations. Panini
has not mentioned them actually
but the fourteen Siva Sutras, on
which he has based his work,
mention only 9 vowels and 34
consonants, the long vowels being
looked upon as varieties of the
short ones. The Siksa of Panini
mentions 63 or 64 letters, adding
the letter ळ ( दुःस्पृष्ट ); cf. त्रिषष्टिः
चतुःषष्टिर्वा वर्णाः शम्भुमते मताः Panini
Siksa. St.3. The Rk Pratisakhya adds
four (Visarga, Jihvamuliya, Up-
adhmaniya and Anusvara ) to the
forty three given in the Siva Sutras
and mentions 47. The Taittiriya
Pratisakhya mentions 52 letters
viz. 16 vowels, 25 class-consonants,
4 semivowels, six sibilants (श्, ष् , स्,
ह् , क्, प् , ) and anusvara. The
Vajasaneyi Pratisakhya mentions
65 letters 3 varieties of अ, इ, उ, ऋ
and लृ, two varieties of ए, ऐ, ओ,
औ, 25 class-consonants, four semi-
vowels, four sibilants, and
जिह्वामूलीय, उपध्मानीय, अनुस्वार,
विसर्जनीय, नासिक्य and four यम letters;
cf. एते पञ्चषष्टिवर्णा ब्रह्मराशिरात्मवाचः V. Pr.
VIII. 25. The Rk Tantra gives 57
letters viz. 14 vowels, 25 class
consonants, 4 semivowels, 4 sibi-
lants, Visarga,.Jihvamuliya, Up-
adhmaniya, Anunasika, 4 yamas
and two Anusvaras. The Rk
|
वर्णानर्थवत्त्व
वर्तिन् 317
Tantra gives two different serial
orders, the Uddesa (common) and
the Upadesa (traditional). The
common order or Uddesa gives
the 14 vowels beginning with अ,
then the 25 class consonants, then
the four semivowels, the four
sibilants and lastly the eight
ayogavahas, viz. the visarjanya
and others. The traditional order
gives the diphthongs first, then
long vowels ( अा, ऋ, लॄ, ई and ऊ )
then short vowels (ऋ, लृ, इ, उ, and
lastly अ ), then semivowels, then
the five fifth consonants, the five
fourths, the five thirds, the five
seconds, the five firsts, then the
four sibilants and then the eight
ayogavaha letters and two Anus-
varas instead of one anuswara.
Panini appears to have followed
the traditional order with a few
changes that are necessary for the
technique of his work.
वर्णानर्थवत्त्व the view that letters do
not possess the sense, as individua-
lly in every letter no separate sense
is seen: cf. अनर्थकास्तु etc. M. Bh. on
Siva Sutra 5, Vart.14 and 15.
वर्णार्थवत्त्व the theory or view that indi-
vidual letters are severally possess-
ed of different senses. For instance,
the difference in the meanings of
the words कूप, यूप, and सृप is due to
the difference in their initial letter.
The theory is not acceptable to the
Vaiyakaranas nor the theory वर्णानर्थ-
वत्व given above. They follow the
theory of संघातार्थवत्त्व i. e. sense given
by a group of words together. See
M.Bh on Siva Sutra 5, Varttikas
9 to 15.
वर्णाश्रय a grammatical operation
depending upon a single letter i.e.
an operation caused by a letter
singly; cf, वर्णाश्रये नास्ति प्रत्ययलक्षणम् |
|
ParSek.Pari.21; cf.also वर्णाश्रयः प्रत्ययो
वर्णविचालस्यानिमित्तम् । दाक्षिःl M.Bh.onP.
I.1.39 Vart.10.
वर्णिकुबेरनाथ or वर्णिकुवेरानन्द an old writer
on grammar who has written a
work named शब्दविवरण on the mean-
ings of words. The work forms a
part of his bigger work दानभागवत.
Both the works are incomplete.
The शब्दविवरण is based mostly upon
ancient grammar works of Patanjali
Vararuci, Varttikakara, Sarvavar-
man, Bhartrhari and others.
वर्णौकदेश a part or a portion of a com-
bined letter i.e.संयुक्तस्वर or संयुक्तव्यञ्जन.
The diphthongs or संयुक्तस्वरs are
divisible into two Svaras, for inst-
ance ऐ into अा and ए, औ into अा
and ओ. Similarly double conso-
nants like क्कू, च्च्, क्म्, क्त् etc. are
also divisible. Regarding the point
raised whether the individual parts
can be looked upon as separate lett-
ers for undergoing or causing a gra-
mmatical operation,the decision of
the grammarians is that they can-
not be looked upon as separate,
when they are completely mixed
as the dipthongs; cf.नाक्यपवृक्तस्यावयवस्य
तद्वधिर्यथा द्रव्येषु M. Bh. on Siva Sutra
3, 4 Vart. 6.
वर्त a term used by ancient gramma-
rians and later on by commenta-
tors for compound words; cf. वर्तनं
वर्तः समासः Nyasa on Kas. II.4.15.
वर्तमान the present tense; cf वर्तमाने
लट् P.III.2.123; cf.also क्तस्य च वर्तमाने
PII 3.67;also वर्तमानसामीप्ये वर्तमानवद्वा
P. III. 3.131.
वर्तमाना a term used by ancient
grammarians for the present tense,
along with the term वर्तमान also;
cf. यदा हि बुद्धिकर्म तदा वर्तमाना भाबष्यति,
M.Bh. on P. III.3.133 Vart.8.
वर्तिन् from वर्त which means a com-
pound;see वर्त, (l) The term वर्तिन् or
|
वर्तिपद is used in the sense of a mem-
ber of a compound;cf.वर्तोस्यास्तीति वर्ति
समासावयवभूतम् Nyasa on P. II. 4.1 5.
(2) The term वर्तिन् is also used for
a syllable (अक्षरम् ); cf. वर्ति R.T.47,
explained by the commentator as
अकारादिषु वर्तते व्य़ञ्जनं वर्ति चाप्यक्षरं भवति |
cf. also गुर्वक्षराणां गुरुवृत्ति सर्वे R. Pr.
XVIII.32.
वर्त्स्य lit. gingival, or produced at the
gums; the letter र् according to
some scholars who believe that र्
is produced at the root of the
teeth i.e. at the gums; cf. एके
अाचार्या रेफं वर्त्स्यमिच्छन्ति। वर्त्से भवो वर्त्स्य: !
वर्त्सशब्देन दत्तमूलादुपरिष्टादुच्छूनः प्रदेशः
(gums) उच्यते Uvvata on R.Pr.I.20.
वर्त्स्यत् future, belonging to future;cf.
वर्त्स्यत्प्रवृत्त्या इह कार्याणि क्रियन्ते Paribhasa
87 given by Siradeva.
वर्धमान (1) a long vowel;(2)name of a
famous Jain grammarian, disciple
of Govindasuri, who lived in the
beginning of the twelfth century
A.D.and wrote a metrical work on
ganas or groups of words in gra-
mmar, named गणरत्नमहोदधि, and also
a commentary on it. The work
consists of 8 chapters and has got
some commentaries besides the
well-known one by the author
himself. He also wrote two other
works on grammar कातन्त्रविस्तर and
क्रियागुप्तक as also a few religious
books.
वर्ष name of an ancient scholar of
grammar and Mimamsa, cited by
some as the preceptor of कात्यायन and
Panini. If not of Panini, he may
have been a preceptor of Katya-
yana
वर्स्व्य or वर्त्य gingival, produced at
the gums; the word वर्स्व is proba-
bly the correct word meaning the
root of the teeth or gums; the
word वर्स was also used in the same
|
sense as वर्स्व from which the word
वर्स्य could be derived. बर्स्व्य and बर्स्य
are only the variant pronnnciati-
ons of वर्स्व्य and वर्स्य.The word वर्त्स्य,
with त् inserted between र् and
स् , is given above as explained by
Uvvata from वर्त्स. It is very likely
that वर्त्स is wrongly written for
वर्स्व or वर्स।
वल् short term (प्रत्याहार) for consonants
excepting य्; cf. लोपो व्योर्वलि P. VI.
1.66; आर्धधातुकस्येड् वलादेः P. VII.2.35.
वल (l) tad. caturarthika affix वलच्
applied to the word शिखा in the
four senses country and others; e.g.
शिखावलं नगरं देशो वा Kas.on P.IV.2.89;
(2) tad. affix वल in the sense of
possession applied to words रजस्,
कृषि and others as also to दन्त and
शिखा when the word is used as a
proper noun ( संज्ञा ) and to the
word ऊर्जस्; e.g. रजस्वला, कृषीवलः,
ऊर्जखलः etc.; cl. रजःकृष्यासुतिपरिषदो वलच्,
दन्तशिखात्संज्ञायाम् and ज्योत्स्ना ... ऊर्जस्वल
..मलीमसाः P. V. 2.112, 113, 114.
वल्लभ named हरिवल्लभ also,who wrote a
commentary on Nagesa's Sabd-
endusekhara.
वश् short term ( प्रत्याहार ) for conso.
nants from व in हयवरट् to the mute
श्， in जवगडदश् i.e. all semi-vowels
excepting य् , and the fifth, the
fourth and the third class conso-
nants; cf. नेड् वशि कृति cf.P.VII.2.8.
वशंगम name given in the Pratisakhya
works to letter-combinations where
a consonant gets a change suitable
to the neighboring consonants as
given in the Rk.Pratisakhya in IV.1
to IV.5 including जश्त्व, अनुनासिकादेश,
छत्व, परसवर्ण, अनुस्वार and others, as
given in P. VIII.2.39, VIII.3.7,
VIII. 3.23, VIII.4.40, 46, 58,59,
62, 63; cf. न ह्यत्र अवशंगमसंधाविव अपरि-
णतानि व्यञ्जनानि संयोगं गच्छन्ति Uvvata on
R.Pr.IV.5.
|
वस् (1) pres. participle affix वसु subs-
tituted for शतृ applied to the root
विद्; e.g. विद्वस्, cf. विदेः शतृर्वसुः P.VII.
l.36; (2) perf. part. affix क्वसु subs-
tituted for the general affix लिट्
mostly in Vedic Literature, but in
specific cases in spoken language;
e. g. see सेदिवस्, शुश्रुवस्, उपेयिवस् cf.
P III.2. 107-9. See क्वसु.
वसन्तादि a class of words headed by
the word वसन्त, which are mostly
names of seasons, to which the
affix इक (ठक्) is added in the sense
of 'that which one studies or
knows'; cf.वसन्तसहचरितोयं ग्रन्थो
वसन्तस्तमधीते वासन्तिकः 1 वार्षिकः Kas. on
P. IV. 2.63.
वसु the krt. affix क्वसु which see above.
The word वसु is used for क्वसु by
the Varttikakara; cf. वसुसंप्रसारणमाज्विधौ
सिद्धं वक्तव्यम् P.VI.4.22 Vart. 9.
वहि atmanepada personal-ending
of the first person ( उत्तमपुरुष) dual,
substituted for the general ल् affix;
cf. तिप्तसझि... महि़्ङ् P.III.4.78.
वा a term often used in the
sutras of Panini and others, to
show the optional application of
a rule; cf. न वेति विभाषा P.I.2.44: cf.
also वा गमःI.2.13 etc. See विभाषा.
वाकरनागल् [WACKERNAGELL], a
German Professor and scholar of
Sanskrit Grammar who collaborat-
ed in the work of editing 'Altindi-
sch Grammatik'.
वाकिनादि a class of words headed by
the word वाकिन to which the tadd-
hita affix आयनि (फिञ्) is added in
the sense of an 'offspring' when
along with the tad. affix अायनि, the
augment क् (कुक्) is added to the
base (वाकिन or the like ); e. g.
वाकिनकायनिः; cf. Kas. on P.IV.I.158.
वाक्य a sentence giving an idea in a
single unit of expression consisting
of the verb with its karakas or
|
instruments and adverbs; cf.अाख्यातं
साब्ययं सकारकं सकारकविशेषणं वाक्यसंज्ञं
भवतीति वक्तव्यम् । साव्ययम् । उच्चैः पठति ।
सकारकम् । ओदनं पचति । M. Bh. on
P. II. 1.1. Vart. 10. Regarding
the different theoretical ways of
the interpretation of a sentence
see the word शाब्दबोध. For details,
see वाक्यपदीय II. 2 where the diffe-
rent definitions of वाक्य are given
and the अखण्डवाक्यस्फोट is established
as the sense of a sentence.
वाक्यकाण्ड name given to the second
chapter of Bhartrhari's Vakya-
padiya in which problems regard-
ing the interpretation of a senten-
ce are fully discussed.
वाक्यकार a term used for a writer
who composes a work in pithy,
brief assertions in the manner of
Sutras, such as the Varttikas. The
term is found used in Bhartrhari's
Mahabhasyadipika where by con-
trast with the term Bhasyakara it
possibly refers to the varttikakara
Katyayana; cf. एषा भाष्यकारस्य कल्पना
न वाक्यकारस्य Bhartrhari Maha-
bhasyadipika. cf. also Nagesa's
statement वाक्यकारो वार्तिकमारभते; cf.
also चुलुम्पादयो वाक्यकारीया; Madhaviya
Dhatuvrtti.
वाक्यपदी name of a work on the de-
notation of words in verse-form
with a comentary of his own writ-
ten by a grammarian named
गङ्गादास. The name वाक्यपदी is con-
founded with वाक्यपदीय of Bha-
rtrhari through mistake.
वाक्यपदीय a celebrated work on
meanings of words and sentences
written by the famous grammarian
Bhartrhari (called also Hari) of
the seventh century. The work is
looked upon as a final authority
regarding the grammatical treat-
ment of words and sentences, for
|
वाक्यपदीयटीका वाक्यसंस्कारपक्ष 320
their interpretation and often
quoted by later grammarians. It
consists of three chapters the
Padakanda or Brahmakanda,
the Vakyakanda and the Sam-
kirnakanda, and has got an ex-
cellent commentary written by
Punyaraja and Helaraja.
वाक्यपदीयटीका name of a commen-
tary on Bhartrhari's Vakyapadiya
written by Punyaraja on the first
and the second Kanda. Some
scholars hold the view that the
commentary on the first kanda
was written by Bhartrhari himself.
वाक्यपदीयप्रकीर्णप्रकाश name given to
the commentary on the third
Kanda or book of Bhartrhari's
Vakyapadiya by Helaraja.
वाक्यपरिसमाप्ति completion of the idea
to be expressed in a sentence or in
a group of sentences by the word-
ing actually given, leaving
nothing to be understood as con-
trasted with वाक्यापरिसमाप्ति used in
the Mahabhasya; cf. वाक्यापरिसमाप्तेर्वा
P.I.1.10 vart. 4 and the Maha-
bhasya thereon. There are two
ways in which such a completion
takes place,singly and collectively;
cf. प्रत्येकं वाक्यपरिसमाप्तिः illustrated by
the usual example देवदत्तयज्ञदत्तविष्णु-
मित्रा भोज्यन्ताम् where Patanjali re-
marks प्रत्येकं ( प्रत्यवयवं) भुजिः परिसमाप्यते;
cf. also समुदाये वाक्यपरिसमाप्तिः where
Patajali remarks गर्गाः शतं दण्ड्यन्ताम् ।
अर्थिनश्च राजानो हिरण्येन भवन्ति न च प्रत्येकं
दण्डयन्ति । M. Bh.on P.I.1.1Vart.12;
cf. also M.Bh. on P.I.1.7, I.2.39,
II.2.l etc.
वाक्यप्रकाश a work on the interpreta-
tion of sentences written with a
commentary upon it by उदयधर्ममुनि
of North Gujarat who lived in the
seventeenth century A.D.
वाक्यप्रदीप a term sometimes seen
|
(wrongly) applied to the Vakya-
padiya of Bhartrhari. It may have
been the name of the commentary
on the vakyaprakasa.
वाक्यभेद a serious fault of expression
when a sentence is required to be
divided into two sentences for the
sake of its proper interpretation:
cf. केचिद्वा सुप्यापिशलेरित्यनुवर्तयन्ति तद्वाक्य
भेदेन सुब्धातौ विकल्पं करोति Kas. onP.VI.
1.94; cf. also तद्धि (स्थानेग्रहणं) तृतीयया
विपरिणमय्य वाक्यभेदेन स्थानिनः प्रसङ्गे जायमानः
etc. Par. Sek. on Pari. 13.
वाक्यशेष complement of a sentence;
something required to be under-
stood to complete the sense of a
sentence generally according to
the context; cf.कल्प्यो हि वाक्यशेषो वाक्यं
वक्तर्यघीनं हि । M. Bh. on P. I. 1.57
Vart. 6; cf. कामचारश्च वतिनिर्देशे वाक्यशेषं
समर्थयितुंम् । तद्यथा । उशीनखन्मद्रेषु गावः!
सन्ति न सन्तीति । मातृवदस्याः कलाः ! सन्तिं
न सन्तीति ! M.Bh. on P.I.3.62.
वाक्यसंस्कारपक्ष the grammarian's
theory that as the individual words
have practically no existence as
far as the interpretation or the
expression of sense is concerned,
the sentence alone being capable of
conveying the sense, the formation
of individual words in a sentence
is explained by putting them in a
sentence and knowing their mutual
relationship. The word गाम् cannot
be explained singly by showing the
base गो and the case ending अम्
unless it is seen in the sentence गाम्
अानय; cf. यथा वाक्यसंस्कारपक्षे कृष्णादि-
संबुद्धयन्त उपपदे ऋधेः क्तिनि कृते कृष्ण ऋध्
ति इति स्थिते असिद्धत्वात्पूर्वमाद्गुणे कृते अचो
रहाभ्यामिति द्वित्वं .. Pari. Bhaskara Pari.
99. The view is put in alternation
with the other view, viz. the
पदसंस्कारपक्ष which has to be accept-
ed in connection with the गौणमुख्य-
न्याय; cf. पदस्यैव गौणार्थकत्वस्य ग्रहेण अस्य
|
पृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/३३७ पृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/३३८ पृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/३३९ पृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/३४० मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/३४१ मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/३४२ मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/३४३ मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/३४४ मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/३४५ मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/३४६ मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/३४७ मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/३४८ मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/३४९ मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/३५० मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/३५१ मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/३५२ मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/३५३ मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/३५४ मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/३५५ मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/३५६ मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/३५७ मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/३५८ मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/३५९ मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/३६० मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/३६१ मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/३६२ मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/३६३ मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/३६४ मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/३६५ मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/३६६ मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/३६७ मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/३६८ मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/३६९ मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/३७० मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/३७१ मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/३७२ मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/३७३ मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/३७४ मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/३७५ मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/३७६ मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/३७७ मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/३७८ मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/३७९ मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/३८० मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/३८१ मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/३८२ मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/३८३ मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/३८४ मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/३८५ मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/३८६ मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/३८७ मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/३८८ मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/३८९ मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/३९० मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/३९१ मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/३९२ मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/३९३ मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/३९४ मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/३९५ मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/३९६ मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/३९७ मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/३९८ मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/३९९ मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/४०० मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/४०१ मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/४०२ मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/४०३ मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/४०४ मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/४०५ मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/४०६ मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/४०७ मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/४०८ मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/४०९ मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/४१० मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/४११ मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/४१२ मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/४१३ मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/४१४ मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/४१५ मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/४१६ मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/४१७ मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/४१८ मीडियाविकि:Proofreadpage pagenum templateपृष्ठम्:ADictionaryOfSanskritGrammarByMahamahopadhyayaKashinathVasudevAbhyankar.djvu/४१९
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
